Ifl 
 
 ! 
 
INSTITUTES 
 
 OF 
 
 LATIN GRAMMAR. 
 
 BY 
 
 JOHN GRANT, A.M. 
 
 Atque ut Latine loquamur, non solum videndum est, ut et verba efferamus 
 ea qua? nemo jure reprehendat ; et ea sic et casibus, et temporibus, et genere, 
 et numero conserveraus, ut nequid perturbatum ac discrepans aut prgeposte- 
 vum sit ; sed etiam lingua, et spiritus, et vocis sonus est ipse moderandus. 
 
 Cic. de Orat. lib. in. 
 
 SECOND EDITION, ENLARGED. 
 
 LONDON : 
 
 / 
 
 PRINTED FOR G. AND W. B. WHITTAKER, 
 AVE-MARIA-LANE. . 
 
 1823. 
 
Printed by Richard Taylor, 
 Shoe- Lane, London. 
 
TO 
 THE REEVREND 
 
 ALEXANDER CROMBIE, LL.D. 
 
 THE PRESENT WORK 
 
 IS 
 WITH THE GREATEST RESPECT 
 
 INSCRIBED, 
 
 AS A GRATEFUL THOUGH INADEQUATE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT 
 OF HIS LONG AND DISINTERESTED FRIENDSHIP, 
 
 AND A SM iLL TESTIMONY 
 
 OF THE HIGH ESTIMATION IN WHICH THE AUTHOR HOLDS 
 
 HIS EXTENSIVE AND TRULY CRITICAL ACQUAINTANCE WITH 
 
 THE LATIN LANGUAGE, 
 
 BY HIS MUCH OBLIGED 
 
 AND MOST OBEDIENT SERVANT, 
 
 J. GRANT. 
 
 393 
 
' 
 
THE PREFACE. 
 
 1 HE Latin Grammars commonly used in schools are 
 so well established, and, in general, so deservedly ap- 
 proved, that any attempt to supersede them would 
 justly be thought to savour of temerity or presump- 
 tion. A new Latin grammar on a small scale could 
 not be. essentially different from most of them ; and 
 one upon a more extended plan would not be calcu- 
 lated for the purpose of initiation, to which they are 
 chiefly adapted. 
 
 It has, however, been a prevailing sentiment among 
 teachers of Latin, that, notwithstanding the acknow- 
 ledged utility of our common grammars as initiatory 
 books, something is still wanting to facilitate the im- 
 provement of the more advanced student Ruddi- 
 man's larger grammar, a work supplementary to the 
 Rudiments, though truly a valuable production, is de- 
 fective in several particulars. These deficiencies are 
 partly supplied in his largest grammar ; but the last 
 is now difficult to be procured, and it treats merely of 
 Etymology and Syntax. To furnish, therefore, a 
 grammar, which shall combine a more minute and 
 correct detail of the mere elements, than is to be found 
 in our common grammars, with an ample elucidation 
 of the higher and more difficult principles, has been 
 the writer's leading object in the present work. In 
 
 a 3 
 
VI 
 
 the prosecution of it, he has directed his chief atten- 
 tion to the improvement of the senior scholar ; and 
 has, therefore, thrown the Etymology into tables anc 
 synopses, which, he hopes, will be useful in imparting 
 a clear and comprehensive idea of the mechanism o 
 the language. In treating of Syntax and Prosody 
 the two divisions on which he has expended most at 
 tention, he has laboured to combine the importan 
 requisites of conciseness, comprehension, and perspi 
 cuity. 
 
 Much novelty of matter is not to be expected in s 
 work of this nature. Some explanations, however 
 and critical remarks, are here given, which are not t< 
 be found in any grammar with which the author i 
 acquainted. But novelty is a merit which it is far fron 
 the intention of the writer to claim. If, by an ample 
 and, as he trusts, a correct digest of the Latin rules 
 with a copious enumeration of anomalies and excep 
 tions, he has furnished the senior scholar with usefu 
 instruction, and the master with a convenient bool 
 of occasional reference, he will have completely at 
 tained his aim. 
 
 How far he has succeeded, it does not become him 
 nor will he be permitted, to determine. The work 
 such as it is, he submits to the candour of the public 
 He has not the presumption to suppose, that, while i 
 professes to correct some errors, and to supply som 
 deficiencies, it is itself free from faults and imperfec 
 tions, either in plan or in execution. Conscious, how 
 ever, that he has been actuated by an earnest desir 
 to promote the improvement of the learner, and to fa 
 cilitate the labour of the teacher, he indulges the hop 
 of a liberal reception. And he begs leave to assur 
 
Vll 
 
 those who may adopt the work, that, should it be so 
 favourably received, as to arrive at another edition, he 
 will gratefully avail himself of every judicious sugges- 
 tion offered for its improvement. 
 
 ADVERTISEMENT 
 TO THE SECOND EDITION. 
 
 THE favourable reception which this work has expe- 
 rienced, is truly gratifying to the. author ; and has 
 encouraged him to employ his best efforts, to render 
 the present edition more worthy of attention. The 
 whole has been carefully revised, and, he would hope, 
 considerably improved. It will be found to be aug- 
 mented by a variety of information on interesting to- 
 pics, to a much greater extent than is indicated by 
 the mere number of additional pages. Defects and 
 inadvertencies, almost necessarily incidental to such a 
 publicatibn, he fears, may still be discoverable ; but, 
 while he trusts they are but few, he anticipates, with 
 well-grounded confidence, that they will experience the 
 same indulgence as was so kindly shown to those of 
 the former impression. 
 
 CROUCH-END, Feb. 18, 1823. 
 
By the same Author. 
 
 Lately published by SHERWOOD, NEELY, and JONES," 
 Paternoster-Row. 
 
 1. A GRAMMAR of the ENGLISH LANGUAGE, c 
 taining a complete Summary of its Rules, with an Elucida 
 of the general Principles of Elegant and Correct Diction : 
 compained with Critical and Explanatory Notes, Questions 
 Examination, and appropriate EXERCISES. Price 6s. boi 
 
 2. An ABRIDGMENT of a GRAMMAR of the ENGLI 
 LANGUAGE ; for the Use of the Junior Classes. Price Is. boi 
 
 3. A KEY to the EXERCISES in the GRAMMAR of 
 ENGLISH LANGUAGE; with Notes and Explanations, 
 tended chiefly for private Learners, or such Persons as are tl 
 own Instructors. Price 3s. bound. 
 
THE CONTENTS. 
 
 Page. 
 
 OF ORTHOGRAPHY .... 1 
 
 OF ETYMOLOGY ..... 4 
 
 Of a Noun 4- 
 
 Of a Pronoun 53 
 
 Of a Verb 65 
 
 Of an Adverb 140 
 
 Of a Preposition 144 
 
 Of a Conjunction 156 
 
 Of an Interjection 158 
 
 Of the Figures 159 
 
 OF SYNTAX 161 
 
 Of the Four Concords 162 
 
 Of Government 173 
 
 Of the Government of Substantives 173 
 
 Of the Government of Adjectives 178 
 
 Of the Government of Verbs 193 
 
 Of the Construction of Circumstances . . . . 24-5 
 
 Of the Construction of Adverbs 260 
 
 Of the Construction of Prepositions .... 263 
 
 Of the Construction of Interjections .... 266 
 
 Of the Const mction of Conjunctions .... 267 
 
 (Of Qui and the Subj. mood) 275 
 
 Lists 285 
 
 Of Neuter Verbs variously construed under the 
 
 same signification 289 
 
 Of Verbs sometimes employed, as Active or Neu- 
 ter , in the same or a similar sense .... 295 
 Of Neuter Verbs rendered Transitive by a Pre- 
 position 306 
 
 Remarks on the classification of certain Verbs . 307 
 Of Verbs "which vary their construction, accord- 
 ing to their Sense . 310 
 
 Of certain Verbs Deponent 312 
 
 ' Of Verbs Passive used as Deponents . . . . 314 
 
 Of Verbs Common 315 
 
 Of 'certain Participles . . 317 
 
Page. 
 
 Of the Arrangement or Position of Words in a Sentence 3 1 8 
 
 Of Figurative Syntax 325 
 
 Of Ellipsis 325 
 
 Of Pleonasm 327 
 
 OfEnallage 328 
 
 OfHyperbaton 332 
 
 Of the Tropes and Figures of Rhetoric 333 
 
 OF PROSODY 340 
 
 The four General Rules 341 
 
 Of 'the initial S, X, Z, (Note) 344 
 
 Special Rules 350 
 
 For the First and Middle Syllables of Deriva- 
 tives, Compounds, Preterites, Supines, and 
 
 Participles 350 
 
 Of certain Greek Words .... (Note) 358 
 
 For the Increments of Nouns . . . . . . 362 
 
 For the Increments of Verbs 370 
 
 An Appendix containing the Qiiantity of the First 
 
 and Middle Syllables of certain other Words 374 
 
 (On the arrangement of Tenses, a Note) . . . 374 
 
 For Final Syllables and Monosyllables . . . 378 
 
 Of Accent 398 
 
 Rules for the Accents, with observations . . . 398 
 
 On Accent, Quantity, Emphasis, Rhythm, <T. . 403 
 
 Of the Figures 419 
 
 Of Caesura 419 
 
 OfSynalcepha 422 
 
 OfEcthlipsis 423 
 
 Additional observations on the last tvco . . . 424 
 
 OfSynccresis 425 
 
 OfDiceresis 429 
 
 Of Systole 430 
 
 Of Diastole 432 
 
 Additional observations on the last two . . . 433 
 
 OfSynapheia . 434 
 
 Of Poetry 435 
 
 Of the different kinds of Feet 436 
 
 Of Compositions in verse, named Simple or Mo- 
 
 nocolon 438 
 
 Of Hexameter 438 
 
 Observations on Hexameter 44O 
 
 Observations on the Poetry of Virgil . . . 447 
 
 Of certain other Dactylic verses 453 
 
 OfPenlamelcr 455 
 
XI 
 
 Page. 
 
 Observations on Pentameter and Elegiac verse 456 
 
 Observations on the Ovidian Distich . . . 457 
 Of the Asclepiadic, the Gly conic, and other Cho- 
 
 riambic verses 460 
 
 Of the Sapphic (a Trochaic) with the Adonic (a 
 
 Dactylic) 4-62 
 
 Observations on the Sapphic verse . . . . 463 
 
 Of the Phaleucian verse (a Trochaic) .... 464 
 
 Of the Pherewatic (a Dactylic) 465 
 
 Of Iambic verses 465 
 
 Of the Scazon (an Iambic) 469 
 
 Of the Anacreontic (an Iambic) 469 
 
 Of Trochaic verses 469 
 
 O/Anapestic verses 472 
 
 Of the Carmen Horatianum 474 
 
 On the Verbal Structure 476 
 
 Of the Pyr rm 'c 481 
 
 Of the Ionic 482 
 
 Of Mixt verses 484 
 
 Of Compositions, in which the verse is varied, named 
 
 Compound or Polycolon 487 
 
 Of the Carmen Dicolon Distrophon .... 488 
 
 Of the Carmen Dicolon Tristrophon .... 492 
 
 Of the Carmen Dicolon Tetrastrophon . . . 493 
 
 Of the Carmen Dicolon Pentastrophon . . . 493 
 
 Of the Carmen Tricolon Tristrophon . . . 493 
 
 Of the Carmen Tricolon Tetrastrophon . . . 495 
 
 The method of scanning Horace * 495 
 
INSTITUTES 
 
 OP 
 
 LATIN GRAMMAR. 
 
 LATIN Grammar is the art of speaking, and of writing, 
 the Latin language, according to certain established rules. 
 
 It is divided into four parts : Orthography, Etymology, 
 Syntax, and Prosody. 
 
 The first treats of letters and syllables. The second, of 
 the nature and properties of single words. The third, of 
 the disposition of words into sentences. And the fourth, 
 of the quantity of syllables. 
 
 OF ORTHOGRAPHY. 
 
 In the Latin language, there are twenty-five letters : 
 A, B, C, D, E, F, G, II, IJLK, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R, S, 
 T, U, V, X, Y, and Z. 
 
 Of these, K, Y, and Z, are found only in words of Greek 
 origin. 
 
 They are divided into vowels and consonants. 
 
 A vowel makes a perfect sound of itself^ 
 
 A consonant cannot be sounded without* a vowel. 
 
 <z, e, z, o, u, and ?/, are vowels. 
 
 The other nineteen are consonants, of which h is gene- 
 rally considered as only a note of aspiration. 
 
 The consonants are divided into mutes and semivowels. 
 
 The mutes are defined to be those letters, which entirely, 
 and at once, obstruct the sound of the vowel, and prevent 
 its continuation. 
 
 The semivowels are defined to be those consonants, which 
 do not entirely obstruct the voice, but wliose sounds may be 
 continued at pleasure, thus partaking of the nature of vowels. 
 
 The semivowels are f^ I, m, n, r, s, v. The rest are mutes. 
 S is called by some Grammarians a letter of its own power. 
 
 B 
 
Of the semivowels, four are called liquids, /, m, n, and r. 
 They are thus named, because they readily unite with 
 other consonants, and glide, as it were, into their sound. 
 
 Two are called double letters, x and z ; the x being equal 
 to cs, Jcs, or gs, and z, to ds or ts ; as dux, dues, whence the 
 genitive duels ; rex,, regs (which, however, is generally pro- 
 nounced as if recsj, whence the genitive regis ; zona, dso?>a t 
 in which the d must be sounded very softly. 
 
 j is sometimes reckoned among the double letters ; but 
 in words of Greek origin it is, in reality, a vowel ; as liison, 
 lapetuS) not Jason, Japetus ; and also in such words as Troja 
 and Ajax, although, in these, pronounced as the English j. 
 
 OF DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 A diphthong consists of two vowels forming one syllable, 
 and pronounced by one impulse of the voice. 
 
 The diphthongs are, eight, ee or ae, as (Etas ; ce or oe, as 
 ccena ; au, as aurum ; eu, as euge ; ei, as hei / al, as Mala ,- 
 oi, as Trola / ui or yi, as hide, harpuia, or harpijia. 
 
 Of these, two are called improper, because the sound of 
 the first letter is lost, ce and ce, pronounced like e. The 
 others are called proper, because, in pronouncing them, the 
 sound of each letter may be distinguished. 
 
 OF THE PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 c, before e, i, y, ce, ce, is pronounced like 5 ; before #, 0, 
 U) and consonants, like Jc. ^^^ 
 
 g, before the vowels a, o, flPl u, and also before conso- 
 nants (itself sometimes excepted), has the hard or guttural 
 sound, as in the English words give, gone ; before e, I, and 
 y, or another g followed by e, it is pronounced like j ; as 
 gemma, glgno, gytyis, agger; excepting some Hebrew words, 
 as Gethsemane, s6me Greek words as G-yges, and a few Latin, 
 as gibber, gilvus, in which it has its proper hard sound. 
 
 ch is pronounced like k. 
 
 ti, before a vowel, sounds like si or ci ; as ratio, pruden- 
 tia ; excepting Greek w r ords, as asphaltion words in which 
 it is preceded by s or x, as istius, tnixtio ; words beginning 
 with ti, as tiara ; and infinitives formed by pai agoge, as 
 flectier, mittier. 
 
 u has but little sound, when, with any other vowel, it fol- 
 lows g, q, or s ; as sanguis, lingua, aqua, qui, suadeo, in 
 which its sound resembles that of w 9 or of u in the English 
 word persuade. 
 
OF THE DIVISION OF WORDS INTO SYLLABLES. 
 
 A syllable is one distinct sound. It may be either a 
 vowel, a diphthong, or one or more consonants with a 
 vowel. 
 
 There are five rules for the division of words into sylla- 
 bles : 
 
 1. A single consonant between two vowels must be joined 
 to the latter, as a-mo, le-go / except x^ which is joined to 
 the first vowel, as ex-ul. 
 
 2. Two consonants between two vowels are to be sepa- 
 rated, as //-/<?, an-mis. 
 
 3. Consonants which cannot begin a word cannot begin 
 a syllable, as ar-dmis, por-cus. 
 
 i. Consonants that can begin a word ought generally to 
 begin a syllable, as pu-blicus, do-ctus. 
 
 5. A compound word is to be resolved into its consti- 
 tuent parts, as ab-utor^ abs-condo*. 
 
 THE MOST COMMON ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 A. Aulus; C. Caius; D. Decius, Decimus; G. Gaius; L. Lucius; M. Mar- 
 cus; M' Manius ; N. Nuinerius; P. Publius; Q,. Quintus, Quirites, Quasstorj 
 T. Titus; Ap. Appius; Cn. Cnseus; Op. Opiter; Sp. Spurius; Ti. Tiberius; 
 Mam. Mamercus; Sex. Sextus; Ser. Servius; Tul. Tullius. In the prsenomen 
 of a woman, the capital was often inverted, as 3 for Caia, j^[ for Marca, j, 
 for Tita. 
 
 F. is put for filius ; N. for nepos. 
 
 P. C. patres conscripti ; P. R. populus Romanus; R. P. Respublioa; S C. 
 senatus consultum ; A. U. C. anno urbis conditae ; S. salutem ; S. P. D. salutem 
 plurimam dicit ; S. P. Q,. R. senatus popul usque Romanus; D. D. D. dat, di- 
 cat, dedicat; D. M. P. diis manibus posuit; D. D. C. Q,. dat, dedicat, conse- 
 cratque; H. S. or L. L. S. sestertium or sestertius; Imp. imperator; Cos. 
 consul ; Aug. Augustus ; Iinpp. imperatores ; Coss. consules, Augg. August!, 
 &c. doubling tlie last letter of the contraction, for the plural. 
 
 THE POWER OF LETTERS IN NUMERATION. 
 
 The letters made use of by the Romans, in numeration, were C, I, L, V, X ; 
 of which the value and order are as follow : 
 
 I. denotes one. 
 V ...... five. 
 
 X ...... ten. 
 
 L ...... fifty. 
 
 C ...... a hundred. 
 
 13 ...... five hundred. 
 
 a thousand. 
 five thousand. 
 . ten thousand. 
 1333, . . fifty thousand. 
 CCCI333. a hundred thousand. 
 
 Note 1. The antients, Pliny observes, went no further; but, if necessary, 
 
 B 2 
 
 133 
 
 CCI 
 
OF ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 IN Latin, are eight different kinds of words, called parts 
 of speed i : 
 
 Noun, pronoun, verb, participle, declined; 
 
 Adverb, preposition, interjection, conjunction, imde- 
 clined. 
 
 The changes made in the termination of the noun, pro- 
 noun, and participle, are called their declension. 
 
 Those made in the termination of a verb, its conjugation. 
 
 The general changes made in the declinable parts of 
 speech are called their accidents. 
 
 The accidents are six: gender, case, number, mood, 
 tense, and person. 
 
 Gender and case are peculiar to noun, pronoun, and par- 
 ticiple ; mood, tense and person are peculiar to the verb ; 
 and number is common to all. 
 
 OF A NOUN. 
 
 A noun (nomeri) has been defined to be that part of 
 speech which signifies the name or quality of a person or 
 thing. If it signify the name of a person or thing, it is 
 called a substantive noun : as vir, a man ; arbor, a tree. If 
 it signify a quality or property, as belonging to any person 
 or thing, it is called an adjective : thus bonus, good, denotes 
 the quality of goodness, but always in concrete, or in con- 
 junction with some substantive; thus, bonus vir, a good man, 
 a man having the quality of goodness. 
 
 Bonus, or good, has been termed the concrete. 
 
 Bonitas, or goodness, the abstract. 
 
 Substantives are of two kinds, proper and common. 
 
 A proper noun is that which is appropriated to an indi- 
 vidual, or to one particular thing of a kind ; as Georgius, 
 George; Londinum, London. 
 
 An appellative, or common noun, is that which is com- 
 mon to a whole class of things ; as vir, a man ; fcemina, a 
 woman ; arbor, a tree. 
 
 they repeated the last number, thus CCCID33* CCCID30 stand for two 
 hundred thousand. 
 
 2. By a combination of these letters, any intermediate number may be ex- 
 pressed ; thus II denote two, XV fifteen, &c. 
 
 3. If the less numeral letter be set before the greater, it takes away from 
 the greater as much as it imports, thus XC, ninety. 
 
 4. Writers of later date use I) lor five hundred, and M for a thousand. 
 
5 
 
 A proper name applied to more than one, becomes an 
 appellative ; as duodecim Ctfsares, the twelve Caesars. 
 
 I. Nouns receive names according to their signification : 
 thus, 
 
 1. A collective noun in the singular number signifies 
 many ; as popufus, a people. 
 
 2. An interrogative asks a question; as quis? who? uter? 
 which of the two ? 
 
 Such nouns used without a question are called indefinites. 
 
 3. A relative refers to something spoken of before ; as 
 qui, who; ille, he; alius, another; &c. 
 
 4-. A partitive signifies the w r hole severally; as omnis, 
 every one ; quisque, every one : or part of many, as qui- 
 da?n 9 aliquis, &c. 
 
 II. With respect to signification and derivation, 
 
 1 . Patronymics are nouns signifying pedigree or extrac- 
 tion, generally derived from the name of the father; as 
 PriamideS) the son of Priamus : but sometimes from some 
 remarkable person of the family; as JEacides the son, grand- 
 son, or one of the posterity of ^Eacus : or from the founder 
 of a nation, as Romididce, the Romans, from Romulus ,- or 
 from countries and cities, as Sicilis, Tracts, a woman of 
 Sicily, of Troy. 
 
 2. An abstract denotes the bare quality of an adjective ; 
 as bonitas, goodness, from bonus. 
 
 3. A gentile, or patrial, is a noun derived from the name 
 of a country, and expressing a citizen of that country ; as 
 Scotus, a Scotsman ; Macedo, a Macedonian ; from Scotia, 
 Macedonia. 
 
 4. A possessive is an adjective derived from a substantive, 
 proper or appellative, signifying possession ; as Scoticus, of, 
 or belonging to, Scotland, from Scotia ; paternus, fatherly, 
 from pater. 
 
 5. A diminutive is a substantive, or an adjective, derived 
 from a substantive, or adjective, denoting diminution ; as 
 libellus, a little book, from liber ; parvulm, very little, from 
 parvus. They generally end in lus, la, or lum. 
 
 6. A denominative is any noun derived from another 
 noun ; as gratia, favour, from grains ,- ccelestis, heavenly, 
 from ccelum. 
 
 7. A verbal is any noun derived from a verb ; as a?nor 9 
 love, from amo ; cap ax, capable, from capio. 
 
 8. Some nouns are derived from participles, adverbs, and 
 
prepositions; *& JfettifatS) counterfeit, fromfatus; crastinus, 
 belonging to tomorrow, from eras ; contrarius, contrary, 
 from contra. 
 
 Note, That the same noun may be ranked under different 
 classes; as quis is an interrogative, relative, or partitive; 
 pietas, an abstract, or denominative. 
 
 OF GENDER. 
 
 Genders are three ; the masculine, the feminine, and the 
 neuter ; denoted sometimes by hie for the masculine, hcec for 
 the feminine, and hoc for the neuter. 
 
 Gender is, in English, the distinction of sex ; for, in this 
 language, with very few exceptions, males are masculine; 
 females, feminine ;" and, unless under particular circum- 
 stances, all things inanimate, being without sex, are neither, 
 or neuter*, which last has, notwithstanding, received the 
 name of a gender. But, in Latin, although males are mas- 
 culine, and females, feminine, there are many nouns, hav- 
 ing no sex, which belong, some to the masculine, some to 
 the feminine, and some to the neuter gender, the termina- 
 tion and declension, not the sex, determining the gender. 
 The former has been called natural gender; the latter, gram- 
 matical gender. 
 
 Nouns which have either the masculine or the feminine 
 gender, according to the sense, are called common ; as pa- 
 rens, hie or h&c, a parent ; if a father, masculine ; a mother, 
 feminine. 
 
 Nouns, admitting the masculine or feminine gender in- 
 dependently on the sense, are called doubtful ; as hie or hac 
 anguis, a snake. 
 
 When, under one gender, a noun signifies both the sexes 
 of brutes, it is called epicene; as hie passer, hie irnts, a spar- 
 row, a mouse, male or female ; liccc aquila, hcec vulpes, an 
 eagle, a fox, male or female. ~When it is necessary to di- 
 stinguish the sex of such words, mas, male, or fcemina, fe- 
 male, is added to them. 
 
 * There is an obvious analogy between the gender of nouns and the per- 
 sons of verbs. In the first, there are, naturally, but two genders ; in the se- 
 cond there are not, necessarily, but two persons, the speaker and hearer. As 
 there is a third gender given to nouns, which is neither of the other two, so 
 there may be a third person, who is neither hearer nor speaker, but the ob- 
 ject or subject of both In the same manner their various terminations inti- 
 mate various relations and circumstances. 
 
OF NUMBER. 
 
 Number is the distinction of one from more than one, 
 cr many. 
 
 Numbers are two : the singular, which denotes one, or 
 the aggregate of many, collectively ; as homo, a man ; mul- 
 titudo, a multitude : the plural denoting more than one ; as 
 homines, men. 
 
 Some Latin nouns of the plural number signify but one ; 
 as Athena, Athens; others, one, or more than one, as 
 a marriage, or marriages. 
 
 OF CASES. 
 
 It is necessary to distinguish the several relations which 
 objects bear to one another ; and this is done, in English, 
 generally, by means of certain particles prefixed to nouns ; 
 but, in Latin, by a variation in the termination of a noun, 
 which is termed a case. 
 
 Cases, (casus, fallings,) or the inflexions of nouns, are so 
 called, because they have been supposed to fall or decline 
 from the nominative, which has been represented by a per- 
 pendicular line, and called casus rectus, or the upright case, 
 indicating the 'primary form of the noun ; the others being 
 named casus obliqui, or oblique cases. 
 
 There are six cases; the nominative, the genitive, the 
 dative, the accusative, the vocative, and the ablative. 
 
 The nominative simply expresses the name of a person 
 or thing, and marks the subject of discourse ; as Alexander 
 fccif, Alexander slew. 
 
 The genitive* is said to express a variety of relations, 
 chiefly comprised under that of origin., or the relation of 
 possession, or of property, and has, in English, the sign of 
 before it, or 's added to it ; as amor Dei, the love of God, 
 or God's love. 
 
 The dative is used to mark the object to which any thing, 
 whether acquisition or loss, is referred ; and is often equi- 
 valent to an English noun having the signs to and for, (both 
 sometimes understood, ) from and. by ; as Hoc mi hi datur, 
 seritur, adimitur; This is given to me, this is sovrn for 
 me, this is taken away from me. Nee cernitur ulli Virg., 
 
 * Some have derived the word genitive, from genus, kindred or family, as 
 if a case used to express alliance or extraction. From its expressing many 
 different relations, this case was named by the Greeks the general case ; and 
 it has been supposed, by others, that by mistaking the import of this word, 
 Latin grammarians named it the genitive or generative case. In Latin, and 
 in other languages, vvben a twofold relation subsists between two objects, this 
 rase involves an ambiguity, nmor Dei denoting either the love with which 
 God loves us, or the love with which he 5-s loved by us. 
 
Nor is he perceived by any one. Expedi hoc negotium 
 mihi, Dispatch for me this business. It sometimes receives 
 the action of the verb ; as Antonius nocuit Ciceroni, Antony 
 hurt Cicero. 
 
 The accusative indicates the object to which the action 
 of the verb passes ; as Alexander interfecit Clitum, Alex- 
 ander slew Clitus. 
 
 The vocative points out the object called upon, or ad- 
 dressed, with or without the sign O ; and is, in general, for 
 an obvious reason, the same in termination as the nomina- 
 tive ; as O felix /rater. My happy brother. Audi, Deus, 
 Hear, O God. 
 
 The ablative, whose derivation implies a taking away, 
 has been defined to be a case denoting the concomitancy of 
 circumstances*; as Ingressus est cum gladio, He entered 
 with a sword ; i. e. having at that time a sword along with 
 him, in his possession. But when, by inference, the ac- 
 companying circumstance is understood as the cause, man- 
 ner, or instrument of an action, the preposition cum is never 
 expressed ; as He killed him with a sword, i. e. a sword 
 was the instrument with which, or by which, his death was 
 effected, Eum gladio interfecit. I am pale with fear, Palleo 
 metu, i. e. not only with fear, but for fear, fear being not 
 only an apcompanying circumstance, but the cause of pale- 
 ness. They went to church with noise, Templum clamore 
 petebant, noise being an accompanying circumstance, and 
 denoting the manner of their going. 
 
 In English it has before it such signs as with, from, for, 
 , in, through, and in Latin is governed by a preposition, 
 sometimes expressed, but generally understood. 
 
 Observe, That nouns form all their oblique cases from the 
 genitive singular, except the vocative singular of masculine 
 and feminine nouns, and the accusative and vocative of neu- 
 ter nouns. 
 
 * See Encyclop. Brit, article, Case, in Grnmmar. 
 
 f The English particles, usually denominated signs of cases, are not, 
 generally, a true criterion of the Latin cases. From, for, and by, are no- 
 ticed as signs of the dative, and of the ablative also. But there appears 
 to be, in Latin, a striking affinity between these two cases. Indeed, it has 
 been contended, that the Latin dative, like the Greek, was originally 
 governed by prepositions, and included, in itself, the force of what is called 
 the ablative ; and hence perhaps it is, that it still denotes the person or 
 thing to which any thing is given, or from which it is taken away ; but that, 
 afterwards, when this case was divided into two cases, and a little distinction 
 was made between them, prepositions were restricted to that form which 
 received the name of ablative. We know that their termination is the 
 same in Greek, or, rather, that the Greeks generally use their dative in 
 the same way in which, most probably, their ablative, if they had one, 
 
OF DECLENSION. 
 
 Declension is the regular distribution of nouns, accord- 
 ing to their terminations, so that they may be distinguished 
 from one another. 
 
 There are five declensions of substantives, distinguished 
 by the ending of the genitive case. 
 The genitive of the fast ends in a. 
 second in /. 
 third in is. 
 fourth in us. 
 Jifth in ei. 
 
 OF ADJECTIVE NOUNS. 
 
 E adjective, as has been already observed, expresses 
 Lit y belonging to a substantive. 
 
 u properly has neither genders, numbers, nor 
 
 " v mina,tions answering to the gender, 
 
 iirj substantive with which it is joined. 
 
 Ail Adj Si the; first and second declension 
 
 conjointly , 
 
 When of tin j^jsion, they have three 
 
 different terminal^ S^&fcne, one for the 
 
 feminine, and one for i. bona^bonym *. 
 
 When of the third, they \\ ruinations, 
 
 the first of which is masculine arid $ie se- 
 
 cond neuter, as tristis 9 masculine a;, 
 ter, or only one termination for the thn 
 masculine, feminine, and neuter. 
 
 Adjectives are varied as substantives of the lik 
 tioii and declension. 
 
 would be used; and that the Romans were fond of imitating the Greeks : ~ 
 to which it may be added, that, in Latin, the dative and ablative, both 
 singular and plural, may be found, in certain forms at least, alike in 
 every declension, as will hereafter be seen in the Rules for the Ablative of 
 the Third Declension, and in the Observations on the Declensions, in regard 
 to certain Datives of the Third and Fifth Declension, ending in e, and of the 
 fourth in u : the difference between the dative singular and the ablative 
 of the first declension being the principal exception to this remark, not no- 
 ticed. But, in regard to this anomaly, it may be observed, that the 
 dative of the first declension ends in ae, diphthong, and that it ended some- 
 t'mes in Hi ; that the ablative of the first declension is the only case ending 
 in a. long, so that it is not improbable that formerly it may have had the 
 vowel annexed to it, which it has since dropped, although it still retains the 
 quantity belonging to a contraction, or to the original diphthong ; and in the 
 same manner, the ablative of the fifth declension may have its long e, from 
 a contraction of ei, or, in some nouns, from the long c of the dative. 
 
 * But eleven, which will hereafter be mentioned, having er or is masculine, 
 is feminine, and e neuter, belong to the third only. 
 
10 
 
 The following synopsis will show the declension of substantives anc 
 adjectives, with the quantities of the final syllables : 
 
 A general view of the declension of substantives and adjectives. 
 
 C3 O Q, 2 
 
 1 
 
 i5 
 o 
 
 i 1 
 
 1 ! 
 
 u i-4 
 
 11 
 
 | 
 | 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 1=1 If 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 en 
 
 3 g 
 
 A 
 
 i 1 
 
 ill 
 
 1 
 
 
 12 
 
 g 
 d 
 
 G 
 
 ed 
 
 c i5 ^ f ^ 
 
 .sT =o 
 
 p 
 
 0? *ti 
 
 H 
 
 oT <^ ^ 
 
 
 0^ ^ 
 
 c^ 
 
 . g ft 3 ^ 
 
 o* S 
 
 u 
 
 o 
 
 3 S 
 
 j 3 
 
 1 J ' S 
 
 f 
 
 rf'* 
 
 
 
 e Is 'S-l 
 
 i 
 
 
 ft M 
 
 
 
 |iil 
 
 > 
 
 &I 
 
 1 
 
 Will 
 
 B*i 
 
 1 
 
 .S3 '8 . 
 
 i ^ 
 
 |8fltf 
 
 ftfli 
 
 1 
 
 
 'G 
 
 If lit 
 
 * 3 a a 
 
 |j| 
 
 1 
 
 1 <^ 
 
 ,S3 
 
 i 
 
 * S U fi 
 
 _- 
 T 
 
 ^^ 
 
 *9 
 
 ||1| 
 
 J * 1 
 
 H <f 
 
 I 
 
 Sll| 
 
 |3|| 
 
 |<1 ^5 
 
 H # a? (S 
 
 
 IP 
 
 a 
 
 E.S a 
 
 c 
 
 
 v: 
 
 " .-5 ' 
 
 S^ 
 
 
 6, 
 
 S 
 
 II. 
 
 I. 
 
 II. 
 
 in. 
 
 IV. 
 
 V. 
 
 y-^-Jl ^^PN 
 
 N. -us, -*r 
 
 -a 
 
 -um 
 
 _ 
 
 d 
 
 -us 
 
 -u 
 
 / ^ta'>- 
 
 -es 
 
 
 G. I 
 
 ai 
 
 I 
 
 IS 
 
 IS 
 
 us 
 
 u 
 
 el 
 
 n 
 
 D. o 
 
 as 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 III 
 
 u 
 
 el 
 
 el 
 
 A. um 
 
 am 
 
 
 em, (im) 
 
 
 
 um 
 
 u 
 
 em 
 
 
 V. e, "r 
 
 a 
 
 'uin 
 
 - 
 
 -- 
 
 us 
 
 u 
 
 es 
 
 
 Ab.o 
 
 fi 4 
 
 
 
 e, i 
 
 e I 
 
 u 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 N. I 
 
 ^ 
 
 a 
 
 es 
 
 a', la 
 
 us 
 
 uS 
 
 es 
 
 
 G. orujft 
 
 arum 
 
 orum 
 
 um, ium 
 
 um, ium 
 
 mini 
 
 tium 
 
 erum 
 
 
 ^It^A 
 
 Is* 
 
 is 
 
 ibus 
 
 ibus 
 
 ibiis, iibus* 
 
 ibus 
 
 ebus 
 
 
 &.. OS 
 
 as 
 
 a 
 
 es 
 
 a,ia 
 
 us 
 
 uu 
 
 es 
 
 
 .^V. I 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 es 
 
 a, la 
 
 us 
 
 ua 
 
 es 
 
 
 r Ab.Is 
 
 Is* 
 
 Is 
 
 ibiis 
 
 ibiis 
 
 ibiis, iibus * 
 
 ibiis 
 
 ebus 
 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 N. 
 
 M. F. 
 
 N. 
 
 
 Thus, Bonus 7 
 rencr J " a 
 
 Likewise meus, tuus, suus, nos- 
 er, vcster. Tuus, suus. wester, wan 
 Vocat. Meus has meus or w 
 Voc. masc. 
 Adjectives in er drop e in de- 
 clining, except tener, alter (ms) 
 7s/w, carter, vesper, gibber, lacer 
 'iber (free), mixer, prosper. Ibei 
 'm), also compounds of fcro 
 and gero. Dexter has dextra 
 seldom dextcra. 
 See Note I. on irregulars. 
 All Participles in us. 
 
 Thus, felix, mitis, mitior, 
 ail adjectives of one termina- 
 tion, or of two; the pronouns 
 nostrcis, vestras, cujas. 
 For adjectives having in the 
 ablative only; or e and i; c 
 only, and for those which in 
 the plural have a, or in, um, or 
 ium, see Rule VI. 
 For comparatives see Rule 
 VII. Participles, Rule VIII. 
 For acer, alacer, &c. see 
 Note 1. on Adjectives. 
 All participles in ns. 
 
H 
 
 GENERAL RULES. 
 
 "I. Nouns of the neuter gender (which are generally of 
 the second and third declension) make the nominative, the 
 accusative, and vocative singular alike; and these three 
 cases, in the plural, end always in a *, 
 
 II. The vocative plural is the same as the nominative 
 plural ; and the vocative singular, as the nominative singu- 
 lar, except in nouns of the second declension, in us, which 
 have e ; in proper names in i-us, which throw away us ; as 
 also in geni-us, and Jili-us ; in Deus, which makes Deus ; 
 and in Greek nouns, which drop the s of the nominative, 
 as Thomas, vocat. Thoma ; Paris, vocat Pari\. 
 
 III. The dative and ablative plural are always alike*, 
 
 IV. Proper names, used as such, want the plural. 
 
 IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Note I. The following adjectives are of the first and se- 
 cond declension, but make their genitive singular in lus^ 
 (but alter, ms) and dative in i: unus, totus , solus, ullus, 
 nullus, uter, neuter, alter, alms, iste, ille, ipse, of which the 
 three last are pronouns. Alius, iste and ille have d in the 
 neuter gender instead of m. 
 
 * In attending to the mechanical structure of language, it is not unworthy 
 cf being remarked, that, except in neuter nouns, the ablative singular 
 of every declension is formed from the accusative, by dropping m : thus 
 musam, musa ; lapidem, la\ride ; navcm, navim, nave, navi ; gradum, gradu ; 
 rem, re. The second declension may appear an exception to this remark ; 
 but it is to be remembered, that the antients wrote the nominative, in os, 
 as dominos, avos, atovos ; and the accusative, in om } as dominom, avom, 
 asquom ,- and hence, in this declension likewise, was the ablative formed, 
 by dropping the m. It may be likewise observed, that, in the two first de- 
 clensions, the dative and ablative plural end in is ; but that the dative singu- 
 lar in i forms bus, which happens to the third declension, and to the fourth 
 and fifth, which are but varieties of the third. 
 
 f The poets sometimes use us in the vocative of some substantives, 
 and adjectives, after the Attic dialect ; as Jilius, Jtuvius, patricius, jwpulus 
 (people). 
 
 \ In prose. In poetry the i is common. But the i of altcrius is always 
 short, that of alius (which is a contraction for aliius] always long. 
 
 Totus, having ius, should be distinguished from totus, so great, which 
 is regularly declined. Some of these adjectives, as totus, nuUvs, solus t neuter t 
 form their genitive and dative regularly, in some old authors, 
 
12 
 
 Units, totus, solus, istc, Hit', ipse^ have vocatives. Con- 
 cerning the vocatives of the others, grammarians are di- 
 vided. 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 This has the greatest number of varieties in its cases. 
 They are chiefly in the genitive, accusative, and ablative 
 singular; and in the genitive plural. 
 
 I. The genitive singular ends in is without increase, or 
 with increase, after the following manner : 
 
 Genii. 
 
 is. 
 
 is. 
 
 otis. 
 
 oris*. 
 
 yis, yos. 
 
 bis. 
 
 pis. 
 
 itis. 
 
 tis. 
 
 tis. 
 
 cis. 
 
 But to these are the following exceptions. 
 
 
 Norn. 
 
 Genit. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 1 
 
 a, 
 
 -atis. 
 
 13 es, 
 
 2 
 
 e, 
 
 is. 
 
 14 is, 
 
 3 
 
 i, 
 
 -itis. 
 
 15 os, 
 
 4 
 
 y, 
 
 yos. 
 
 16 us, 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 8 
 
 o, 
 do, (fern.) 
 go, (fern.) 
 c, d, 1, 
 
 -onis. 
 inis. 
 inis. 
 -is. 
 
 17 ys, 
 (bs, 
 18^ ps, 
 (.ut, 
 
 9 
 10 
 
 n, 
 en, (neut.) 
 
 -is. 
 inis. 
 
 19J ns ' 
 \rs, 
 
 11 
 
 r, 
 
 -is. 
 
 20 x, 
 
 12 
 
 as, 
 
 atis. 
 
 
 A. 
 
 Abies, etis, 
 
 Accipiter, tris, 
 
 Acer, (adj.) acris, 
 
 Acus, eris, 
 
 Adeps, ipis, 
 
 JEs, seris, 
 Alacer, (adj.) alacris, 
 
 Allobrox, ogis, 
 
 
 Ales, 
 
 itis, 
 
 13 
 
 Anio, 
 
 enis, 
 
 11 
 
 Antistes, 
 
 itis, 
 
 11 
 
 Anceps, 
 
 itis, 
 
 16 
 
 Apollo, 
 
 inis, 
 
 18 
 
 Arbos, -or, 
 
 oris, 
 
 13 
 
 Areas, 
 
 adis, 
 
 13 
 
 As, 
 
 assis, 
 
 20 
 
 Aquilex, 
 
 egis, 
 
 13 
 
 5 
 
 13 
 
 18 
 
 5 
 
 15 
 12 
 12 
 20 
 
 * It would have been as well to say us, eris, for the greater number have 
 eris; as, acus (chaff), fceduSjfunus, genus, glomus, latus, munus, olus, onus, o]rus t 
 pondus, rudus, scelus, sidus, vellus, Venus, vetus, viscus, ulcus, vulnus. These 
 have (5m ; pecus, tergtis, focnus, lepus, nemus, frigus, penus, 2>ignus, pectus t 
 stercus, decus, dcdccus, littus, tcmpus, corpus. 
 
13 
 
 No?n. Genit. 
 
 
 Norn. Genii. 
 
 Aries, gtis, 
 
 13 
 
 Dives, itis, 1 3 
 
 Astyanax, actis, 
 
 20 
 
 Duplex, icis, 20 
 
 Auceps, upis, 
 
 18 
 
 E. 
 
 B. 
 
 
 Ebur, oris, 1 1 
 
 Bes, bessis, 
 
 13 
 
 Eques, itis, 13 
 
 Bibrax, actis, 
 
 20 
 
 F' 
 
 Biceps, itis, 
 
 18 
 
 . 
 
 Biturix, igis, 
 
 20 
 
 Far, farris, 1 1 
 
 Bos, bovis, 
 
 15 
 
 Fel, fellis, 8 
 
 
 
 Femur, oris, 1 1 
 
 . 
 
 
 Fidicen, nis, 9 
 
 Campester (adj.) tris, 
 
 11 
 
 Flamen, a priest, mis, 9 
 
 Cardo, iiiis, (m. or f.) 5 
 
 Flos, oris, 
 
 Caro, carnis, 
 
 5 
 
 Fcedus, eris, 16 
 
 Capis, idis, 
 
 14 
 
 Forceps, ipis, 1 8 
 
 Cassis, idis, 
 
 14 
 
 Fraus, audis, 16 
 
 Celeber, (adj.) bris, 
 
 11 
 
 Frons, a leaf, ondis, 1 9 ; but 
 
 Ceres, eris, 
 
 13 
 
 Frons, ontis, the forehead, 
 
 Chamaeleon, tis, 
 
 9 
 
 regular. 
 
 Charon, tis, 
 
 9 
 
 Frux, ugis, 20 
 
 Chlamys, yo! s > yd 
 
 is, 17 
 
 Funus, eris, 16 
 
 Charis, itis, 
 
 14 
 
 
 Chremes, is, etis, 
 
 13 
 
 G. 
 
 Cinyps, yphis, 
 
 18 
 
 Genus, eris, 16 
 
 Concors, dis, 
 Ccelebs, ibis, 
 Conjux, ugis, 
 I Cor, cordis, 
 
 19 
 18 
 20 
 11 
 
 Gigas, ntis, 12 
 Glans, glandis, 19 
 Glis, gliris, a dormouse, 14, 
 but 
 
 Crates, a man's name, 
 Crenis, Idis, 
 
 etis, 13 
 14 
 
 Glis, glidis, mouldiness, 14 
 Glomus, eris, i, 16 
 
 Cres, etis, 
 
 13 
 
 Glos, otis, oris, 15 
 
 Crus, cruris, 
 Cucumis, is, eris, 
 
 16 
 14 
 
 Graphis, idis, 14 
 Grex, egis, 20 
 
 Cupido, inis, (m. or f.) 6 
 
 7 O 
 
 Grus, gruis, 16 
 
 Cuspis, idis, 
 Custos, odis, 
 
 14 
 15 
 
 Gryps, yphis, 1 8 
 
 
 
 H. 
 
 D. 
 
 
 Harpax, agis, 20 
 
 Dares, etis, is, 
 
 13 
 
 Hebes, etis, 13 
 
 December, bris, 
 
 11 
 
 Hagres, edis, 1 1 
 
 Dido, us, onis 
 
 6 
 
 Hepar, atis, 1 1 
 
 Dis, itis, 
 
 14 
 
 Heros, ois, 1 5 
 
^ofli. Genit. 
 
 Norn. Genit. 
 
 
 Hipponax, actis, 20 
 
 Limes, ids, 
 
 13 
 
 Hseresis, eos, los, is, 14 
 
 Lis, Utis, 
 
 14 
 
 Homo, mis, 5 
 
 Locuples, (adj.) etis, 
 
 13 
 
 Honos, -or, oris, 15 
 
 
 
 Horizon, ontis, 9 
 
 . 
 
 
 Hylax, actis, 20 
 
 Margo, m.(orf.) inis, 
 
 5 
 
 I, J. 
 
 *" w 
 
 Manceps, ipis, 
 
 18 
 
 lapyx, igis, 20 
 Jaspis, idis, idos, 14? 
 Jecur, oris, 1 1 
 
 Magnes, etis, 
 Mansues, ~tis, 
 Mas, maris, 
 
 13 
 13 
 12 
 
 lens, (part.) euntis, 19 
 compounds also, but 
 Ambiens, tis, regular. 
 Imber, bris, 1 1 
 Incus, udis, 1 6 
 
 Mater, tris, 
 Mendes, etis, 
 Merces, edis, 
 Merges, itis, 
 Metropolis, eos, ios, is, 
 
 11 
 13 
 13 
 13 
 14 
 
 Index, icis, 20 
 
 Miles, itis, 
 
 13 
 
 Indiges, (adj.) etis, 13 
 Interpres, etis, 13 
 Intercus, (adj.) utis, 16 
 Iter, itineris, 1 1 
 
 Minos, ois, 
 Misericors, dis, 
 Municeps, ipis, 
 Munus, eris, 
 
 T* If * 
 
 15 
 19 
 18 
 16 
 
 Judex, icis, 20 
 
 Mos, mons, 
 
 15 
 
 Jupiter, Jovis, 1 1 
 
 Mus, uris, 
 
 16 
 
 Jus, juris, 16 
 
 N. 
 
 
 Juventus, utis, 1 6 
 
 Nefrens, dis, 
 
 19 
 
 L. 
 
 Nemo, inis, 
 
 5 
 
 Labos, -or, oris, 15 
 
 Nerio, enis, 
 
 5 
 
 Lac, lactis, 8 
 
 Nesis, Idis, 
 
 14 
 
 Laches, etis, is, 13 
 
 Nix, nivis, 
 
 20 
 
 Lampas, adis, 1 2 
 
 November, bris, 
 
 11 
 
 Laomedon, tis, 9 
 
 Nox, noctis, 
 
 20 
 
 Lapis, idis, 14 
 
 
 
 Lar (or Lars) tis, a man's 
 
 . 
 
 
 name, 1 1 
 
 Obses, idis, 
 
 13 
 
 Lar, laris, a household god, 1 1 
 
 October, bris, 
 
 11 
 
 Larynx, yngis, 20 
 
 Oedipus, odis, 
 
 16 
 
 Latus, eris, 1 6 
 
 Olus, eris, 
 
 16 
 
 Laus, laudis, 1 6 
 
 Onus, eris, 
 
 16 
 
 Lens, lendis, a nit, 19, but 
 
 Onyx, ychis, 
 
 20 
 
 Lens, lentis, pulse^ regular. 
 
 Opois, oentis, 
 
 14 
 
 Lex, legis, 20 
 
 Opus, eris, voork. 
 
 16 
 
 Libripens, dis, 1 9 
 
 Opus, untis, a town 
 
 ,16 
 
 Ligus, -ur, uris, 16 
 
 Ordo, inis, m. 
 
 5 
 
15 
 
 Norn. Genit. 
 
 Norn, Genit, 
 
 
 Orpheus, eos, 1 6 
 
 R 
 
 
 Os, oris, the mouth, 1 5 
 
 MM 
 
 
 Os, ossis, a bone, 1 5 
 
 Remex, igis, 
 
 20 
 
 
 Robur, oris, 
 
 11 
 
 P. 
 
 Ros, roris, 
 
 15 
 
 Pallas, adis, a goddess, 12 
 Pallas, antis, a ma?i's name, 1 2 
 
 Rudus, eris, 
 Rus, uris, 
 
 16 
 16 
 
 Palus, udis, 16 
 
 S. 
 
 
 Pater, tris, 1 1 
 
 
 
 Palmes, itis, 13 
 Paries, etis, 13 
 
 Salamis, mis, 
 Salubeiv(adj.)bris, 
 
 H 
 11 
 
 Paris, idis, 1 4? 
 
 Sal us, utis, 
 
 16 
 
 Particeps, ipis, 1 8 
 Pecus, udis, a sheep, 16; but 
 Pecus, oris, cattle, regular. 
 Pecten, mis, 9 
 
 Samnis, Itis, 
 Sanguis, inis, 
 Scelus, eris, 
 Sedes, words derived 
 
 14? 
 14- 
 16 
 from, 
 
 Pelamys, ydis, ydos, 17 
 Pes, pedis, 13 
 
 idis, 
 
 Seges, etis, 
 
 13 
 13 
 
 Perpes, etis, 13 
 Phalanx, gis, 20 
 
 Semis, issis, 
 Senectus, utis, 
 
 14? 
 16 
 
 Phorcys, 'ynis, ynos, 17 
 Phosphis, Idis, 14 
 Phryx, ygis, 20 
 Pixis, idis, (Pyxis) 14 
 Plus, uris, 16 
 
 Senex, is, 
 September, bris, 
 Servitus, utis, 
 Sidus, eris, 
 Silvester, (adj.) tris, 
 
 20 
 11 
 16 
 16 
 11 
 
 Pollex, icis, 20 
 
 Simois, entis, 
 
 U 
 
 Pondus, eris, 16 
 
 Simplex, (adj.) icis, 
 
 20 
 
 Praeceps, itis, 
 Princeps, ipis, 1 8 
 Praepes, etis, , 
 Praes, sedis, 1 3 
 
 Sospes, (adj.) itis, 
 Sphynx, gis, gos, 
 Strix, igis, 
 Subscus, udis, 
 
 13 
 20 
 20 
 16 
 
 Prseses, idis, 13 
 Promulsis, idis, 14? 
 
 Supellex, ectilis, 
 Supplex, (adj.) icis, 
 
 20 
 20 
 
 Pubes, eris or is (adj.) 13 
 Puls, tis, the only noun in Is. 
 
 Sus, suis, 
 Syrinx, gis, 
 
 16 
 20 
 
 Pulvis, eris, 14- 
 
 > 
 
 
 Pus, uris, 16 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Pyrois, oentis, 14- 
 
 Tapes, etis, 
 
 13 
 
 
 Teges, etis, 
 
 13 
 
 Q. 
 
 Tellus, uris, 
 
 16 
 
 Quies, etis, 13 
 
 Teres, (adj.) etis, 
 
 13 
 
 Quiris, itis, H 
 
 Termes, itis, 
 
 13 
 
1G 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Genit. 
 
 
 Nom. Genit. 
 
 
 
 U, V. 
 
 
 13 
 
 Vas, vadis, a surety, 
 
 12 
 
 14 
 
 Vas, vasis, a vessel, 
 
 12 
 
 15 
 
 Veles, itis, 
 
 14- 
 
 16 
 
 Vellus, eris, 
 
 16 
 
 9 
 
 Venus, or is, 
 
 16 
 
 19 
 
 Vetus, (adj.) eris, 
 
 16 
 
 17 
 
 Viscus, ris, 
 
 16 
 
 16 
 
 Virtus, utis. 
 
 16 
 
 16 
 
 Ulcus, eris, 
 
 16 
 
 15 
 
 Unedo, m. onis, 
 
 6 
 
 9 
 
 Volucer, (adj.) eris, 
 
 11 
 
 13 
 
 Vomis, eris, 
 
 14 
 
 5 
 
 Uter, utris, 
 
 11 
 
 14 
 
 Vulnus, eris, 
 
 16 
 
 Thales, etis, is, 
 Themis, id is, 
 Thos, ois, 
 
 Thus, fins, 
 
 Tibicen, mis, masc. 
 Tiryns, ynthis, 
 Trachys, ynis, ynos, 
 Trapezus, untis, 
 Tripus, odis, 
 Tros, ois, 
 
 Tubicen, mis, masc. 
 Tudes, itis, is, 
 
 Turbo, inis, 
 
 Tyrannis, idis, 
 
 (The figure refers to the termination to which its respec- 
 tive word is an exception. By means of the figure, all the 
 exceptions may be collected, and classed according to their 
 termination ; which is the way in which they ought to be 
 learned. Their present state is most adapted to occasional 
 reference.) 
 
 II. The accusative of masculine and feminine nouns ends 
 in em ; but some have em and im, and these have e or i in 
 the ablative singular, others have im or in, and these have 
 i only. (See the list.) 
 
 III. Neuters ending in e, al, ar, have i in the ablative 
 singular ; ia in the nominative plural ; and ium in the geni- 
 tive. Except^r, par (a pair, neut.) jubar, nectar ; hepar, 
 with proper names in e, which have e in the ablative. Neu- 
 ters having e in the ablative make their nominative and ge- 
 nitive plural, in , and um. (For a different distinction with 
 regard to par, supported by some grammarians, see Par in 
 the following list.) 
 
 IV. Nouns ending in es and is, not increasing in the geni- 
 tive singular, and in ns, make the genitive plural in ium. 
 Except votes, canis,juvenis, panis, strigilis, (because formerly 
 strigil,} volucris, par ens, opes pi. which have um. Apum 
 from apis, (or apes plural,) vokicrum, parentum, are used, as 
 many others, by syncope, instead of the regular apium, vo- 
 lucrium, parentium. To nouns having ium, may be added 
 the names in as, from countries, as Arpinas, -dtium : nostras, 
 
 vestras, -atium. Utilitatium, and utilitatwn ; civitatium 
 
 and cimtatum ; affinitatium and qffinitatum ; h&reditatium 
 
17 
 
 and h&reditatum, are both found, but the latter form is much 
 preferable. Optimatium, and, by syncope, optimatum, are 
 both used. 
 
 V. Nouns of one syllable in as, is, and s and x after a 
 consonant, make turn in the genitive plural ; as as, assium ; 
 Us, litium ; urbs, urbium ; merx, mercium. To these may 
 be added caro, cohors, cor, cos, dos, faux, lar, linter, mus, 
 nix, nox, os (ossis), Quiris, Samnis, uter, venter, arid the 
 compounds of as and uncia , as bes, sextans, septunx. Ex- 
 cept gryps, gryphum , lynx, lyncum ; sphinx, sphingum, 
 and some similar Greek words. The obsolete nominative 
 ops, (in the plural, opes,) though belonging to the rule, has 
 opum. 
 
 Obs. The following words are not found in the genitive 
 plural ; and many of them have no plural : Pax, fax, fax, 
 nex, pix, lux, mel,fel, os (oris), sol, glos, pits, ros, vicis, labes, 
 soboles, and proles. To these may be added crux and plebs, 
 although, in some authors, crucum or crucium, and plebium, 
 are found. 
 
 VI. Adjectives having e in the nominative singular neuter, 
 have i only in the ablative ; but adjectives of one termination 
 have e or i ; both having ia and him in the plural. (There 
 are some which have e only in the ablative, and urn in the 
 genitive plural, which in the following list are noted with *. 
 There are others having i, or e and i, which likewise have 
 um, and they are denoted by f . Adjectives having e or i, 
 when used as substantives, generally prefer the termination 
 e. Par and memor 1 have i only in the ablative. Compar, 
 impar, dispar, have e or i.) 
 
 VII. Comparatives have i, or more commonly e, in the 
 ablative singular, and therefore a in the neuter of the nomi- 
 native, accusative, and vocative plural, and um in the geni- 
 tive. Vetus likewise has veteri, vetera, veterum. 
 
 VIII. Words of three genders, ending in ns, have e or i 
 in the ablative. When used in an absolute sense, as parti- 
 ciples, they generally prefer e. As adjectives, they have e 
 or i. Such words often suffer a contraction in the genitive 
 plural, as prudentwn for prudentium ; sapientum for sapi- 
 entium / parentum for parentium ; adolescentum for ado- 
 lescentium. 
 
 IX. The genitive plural of words having no nominative 
 
 1 Memor was formerly declined memoris, memore / hence the ablative 
 
 memori. 
 
 c 
 
18 
 
 singular, or no singular, is formed, by analogy, as if they 
 had one, or, from some obsolete nominative. 
 Thus, Mcenia, -ium, from mcene, by R. III. 
 
 Ccelites, -urn, from ccelis, or cedes, by inference 
 
 from R. IV. 
 Penates, -turn, frompenas, or, rather penatis, by 
 
 R. V. 
 
 Primores, -urn, from primor, by R. VII. 
 Saturnalia, "him, (& -orum) from 
 
 saturnale / TTT 
 
 Florealia, -ium, (& -orum) from 
 
 Jloreale, 
 
 These two last, and others of a similar kind, had formerly 
 another nominative, in urn, and therefore they had a geni- 
 tive in orum, from the second declension ; but in the dative 
 and ablative they are of the third declension only. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS ON CERTAIN UNCOMMON CASES. 
 
 (1.) The genitive singular of the first declension formerly 
 ended in as, after the manner of the Greeks, which is still 
 retained mfamilias, when compounded with pater and ma- 
 ter ; to which t filius and Jilia have been added. Paterfa- 
 milias is likewise used. The antients likewise formed it in 
 ai, which is sometimes used by the poets, with a diaeresis ; 
 thus dives pictdi vestis Virg. Thus also lunai Pers. terrai, 
 aquai, &c. 
 
 When the genitive of the second declension ends in zY, 
 the last i is often cut off by the poets ; as tuguri for tugurii. 
 
 The genitive of the fourth formerly ended in is as hoc 
 fructi pro Idbore ab his Jero Ter. ; also in tits, after the 
 manner of the third, as ejus anuis causa Ter. 
 
 The genitive of the fifth is found in es , as rabies unde 
 ill(B IICKC germina surgunt Lucret. ; sometimes in ii, when 
 the nominative ends in es pure, as quorum nihil pernicii 
 causa Cic. pro Rose. ; sometimes in e, as vix decima parte 
 die reliqua Sail. 
 
 The genitive plural of the first four declensions is some- 
 times contracted, especially by the poets ; thus ccelicolum for 
 ccelicolarum ; deum for deorum , mensum for mensium ; cur- 
 rum for curruum. 
 
 (2.) The dative singular of the third declension is found 
 in a few instances in e, as viro sitiente Juv. to her thirsty 
 husband ; morte mece Propert ; tibi sene Catul. 
 
19 
 
 The dative of the fourth is found in u, by Apocope ; as 
 parce metu Virg. ; curruque vola?is dat lor a secundo-*-ld. ; 
 thus also impetu, exercitu, for impetui, exercitui. 
 
 The dative of the fifth is found in e, as uti cedas die 
 Plaut. ; prodiderit commissaJidelAor. 
 
 (3.) The accusative plural is found, in the third declen- 
 sion, in is and els, when the genitive ends in ium ; as puppeis, 
 adis Plaut. Amph. 1. 1. 194?. Omnis homines decet 
 Sail. Cat. 1. 
 
 (4.) The ablative singular of the third declension has 
 been shown to be in many nouns the same as the dative 
 singular. From the resemblance of many cases of the 
 fourth and fifth declensions to those of the third, it is evi- 
 dent that they may be considered as varieties of the third 
 declension. 
 
 PECULIARITIES IN THE GENDER OF CERTAIN ADJECTIVES. 
 
 (1.) Masculine gender redundant. 
 
 The following have a double masculine in the nominative 
 and vocative singular, acer, alacer, celer, celeber, campester, 
 equester, palmier, Sylvester, pedester, saluber, volucer : as 
 nominative, vocative, masculine, acer or acris ; feminine, 
 acris ; neuter, acre. Their ablative singular is in i only. 
 
 (2.) Masculine gender deficient. 
 
 Cater (of the first and second declension) is not used in 
 the masculine, singular. 
 
 Victrix and ultrix are feminine in the singular, seldom 
 neuter ; and, in the plural, they are feminine and neuter. 
 
 Such verbals in ix partake of the nature of substantives 
 and adjectives. They correspond, as feminines, to mascu- 
 lines in or: thus, victor, victrix ; ultor, ultrix ; fautor, 
 Jautrix. They have their ablative in e or i s but when 
 added to a neuter noun, i is preferred : Thus, victor exerci- 
 tus ; victrix mulier ; ferro victrici ; bella, arma,fulmina, $c. 
 victricia. 
 
 (3.) Neuter gender deficient. 
 
 Adjectives ending in er, or, es, os, fex, are seldom found 
 in the neuter, singular, or nominative, accusative, vocative 
 plural: such as pauper, puber, degener, ubcr, memor, dives, 
 locuples, sospes, superstes, compos, artifex. Also, comis, 
 inops, insons, impubis, pubis, intercus, particeps, princeps, 
 supplex, sons, vigil. Except, hebes and feres singular, the 
 adjectives in No, 1, and others of three endings, 
 
 ca 
 
(4.) Masculine and feminine deficient. 
 
 Plus (the comparative of multus) has only the neuter 
 gender in the singular, being declined as a substantive; it 
 wants the dative and perhaps the vocative, and has e or i in 
 the ablative ; in the plural, plures masculine and feminine, 
 and plura (or pluria, rarely), and, in the genitive, plurium. 
 Its compound, complures, has no singular. 
 
 A LIST OF SOME OF THE IRREGULARITIES MENTIONED IN 
 THE FOREGOING RULES, AND OF SOME OF THE EXAMPLES 
 WHICH WERE NOT PARTICULARIZED. 
 
 A. 
 
 Gen. PL 
 tium, rather 
 turn. 
 
 
 Ace. Sing. 
 
 Abl. Sing. 
 
 Amnis, ......... 
 
 
 e or i raro. 
 
 Amussisj ...... 
 
 
 
 
 
 e or i. 
 
 
 
 
 Aqualis, 
 Araris, 
 
 im, or em,,.. 
 
 i or e. 
 e 
 
 As and corn- 
 
 
 
 
 
 e or i. 
 
 Adjectives. 
 Ales, f .. 
 
 
 
 Anceps, 4- ...... 
 
 
 e or i, ...(.... 
 
 Artifex, 4* ...... 
 
 
 e ori, ......... 
 
 B. 
 
 Bcetes, 1! , 
 
 im or in, ... 
 
 i or e. 
 
 Bilbilis, 
 
 im* 
 
 i. 
 
 Bipennis, .... 
 
 
 i. 
 
 Bos, 
 
 
 
 Buris, 
 
 im, . . 
 
 i. 
 
 C. 
 Canalis, 
 Cannabis, 
 
 em, .. 
 im, 
 
 i. 
 i or e. 
 i or e. 
 
 
 
 
 Centussis,.,.... 
 
 un. 
 
 
 mm. 
 
 itum. 
 itum, (ia, 
 
 nom.) 
 um. 
 
 bourn, (bo- 
 bus, dat.) 
 
 mum. 
 
 

 Ace. Sing. 
 
 Abl. Sing. 
 e or i. 
 
 
 
 e or i. 
 
 
 
 
 Clavis, 
 
 im, em, ..... 
 
 i or e. 
 
 Cor, 
 
 
 
 Cos, 
 
 
 
 Collis, 
 
 
 e or i. 
 
 Cucumis, 
 Cutis, 
 
 irn, 
 iiBj .......... 
 
 i. 
 i or e. 
 
 Adjectives. 
 Capio, comp. of 
 
 
 e or i, 
 
 Caput, comp. of 
 
 
 e or i, ......... 
 
 
 
 
 Ccelebs,* 
 
 
 e, . 
 
 
 
 e or i, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Color, comp. 
 O f * . 
 
 
 
 Corpus, comp. 
 of in ~or ^ 
 
 
 e. . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i or e. rarely* 
 
 D. 
 Decussis, 
 
 im. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 
 e or i, 
 
 
 
 e or i, 
 
 
 
 Cj sometimes i. 
 
 F. 
 
 
 i or 6. 
 
 
 
 
 Febris, 
 
 im, em, 
 
 i, e. 
 i, e. 
 
 
 
 
 Fustis, 
 
 
 e. i. 
 
 Facio, comp. of 
 
 
 
 Gen. PL 
 
 tmm. 
 
 dium. 
 tium. 
 
 um. 
 
 um. 
 um. 
 urn. 
 um. 
 um. 
 um. 
 
 um. 
 
 um. 
 um. 
 ium. 
 
 tmm. 
 
 um. 
 um. 
 um. 
 
 cium. 
 
 cmm. 
 
 um. 
 
22 
 
 G. 
 
 Gausape (perk. 
 
 Ac, Sin,. 
 
 Abl Sing, 
 e. 
 
 Gen. PL 
 rium. 
 um. 
 
 um. 
 
 tium, 
 um, ium sel- 
 dom. 
 um. 
 
 um. 
 um, 
 um. 
 um. 
 
 ium. 
 
 ium. 
 tium. 
 um, ium sel- 
 dom. 
 
 um. 
 rium 1 . 
 
 urn- 
 
 Glis, 
 
 
 
 im 
 
 i. 
 
 Genus, comp. 
 of in -er, 
 
 H. 
 Hseresisj ...... 
 
 
 im, in, 
 
 i. 
 ite. 
 
 I. 
 
 ' 
 
 e or L 
 e or i. 
 
 
 
 Infans, R. IV. 
 
 
 
 iure, . 
 
 
 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 
 ote. . 
 
 
 
 e or i, 
 ere. , 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 L. 
 
 
 e or i. 
 
 Lar, . 
 
 
 Lens, 
 
 dm, tern, ... 
 
 ti, te. 
 
 
 
 
 M. 
 
 
 e or 1, * . 
 
 im, ......... 
 
 i. 
 e or i. 
 i. 
 
 e or i. 
 
 
 
 Molaris, ^ ..... 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Memor, adj. f 
 (olim Memo 
 ris), , 
 
 
 i, 
 
 Scmel apud Ciccronem muru/n. 
 
N. 
 
 XTof a 1ic f . 
 
 Ace, Sing. 
 
 Abl Sing. 
 i or e. 
 i or e. 
 
 Navis, 
 
 Nix, 
 
 im, em, 
 
 November(tf?z</ 
 such ). 
 
 em, .,,...... 
 
 i. 
 
 i or e. 
 
 i. 
 e or i* 
 
 0. 
 
 
 October, 
 Orbis, 
 
 em, 
 
 
 
 Ovis, 
 
 em, im, ..... 
 im, em, ..... 
 
 e or i. 
 
 i or e. 
 e, . 
 
 P. 
 Pelvis, 
 
 
 
 i, , 
 
 
 
 
 Pars, 
 
 
 e or i. 
 e or i. 
 i or e. 
 i or e. 
 
 Postis, 
 
 
 Pugil, 6 
 
 
 PuDois, 5 . , 
 
 im, em, 
 
 Adjectives. 
 Par, f . 
 
 Particeps, 4- . 
 
 
 e or i, 
 
 Pauper, * * 
 
 
 ere. . 
 
 Pes, comp. of^ * 
 Princeps, { 
 
 
 e, . 
 
 
 
 Praeceps, * .... 
 
 
 i, e, 
 
 Plus, 
 
 
 ri. re. 
 
 Pubes, *... 
 
 
 
 Q. 
 
 Quintilis (and 
 such\ .... 
 
 
 i. 
 
 
 
 R. 
 Ratis, 
 
 em, im, ..... 
 im, 
 im, em *.... 
 
 e, i. 
 i. 
 e. 
 i or e. 
 i or e. 
 e. 
 
 Ravis, 
 
 Restis, 
 
 Rivalis, t ...... 
 
 Rus, . 
 
 
 Rudis, . 
 
 
 Gen. PL 
 
 nivium, 
 
 ossium. 
 
 mm, 
 ium. 
 
 udium, 
 
 mm. 
 
 um. 
 
 urn. 
 
 um. 
 
 um. 
 
 turn (ia, nom.) 
 
 rium. 
 
 um. 
 
 itium, itum. 
 
s. 
 
 Sal, . 
 
 Ace. Sing. 
 
 All. Sing. 
 & or i. 
 
 G* 
 
 
 
 
 tium. 
 
 
 im, em, 
 
 e. 
 
 
 
 
 e or i. 
 
 
 Sementis, .... 
 Senex, 
 
 i m, em, 
 
 i or e. 
 
 urn. 
 
 Sentis, 
 Septunx, 
 
 em, im, 
 
 e or i. 
 
 cium. 
 
 Seranis, II . 
 
 im, 
 
 j. 
 
 
 Sextans, 
 
 
 
 tium. 
 
 Sextilis, 
 
 em, 
 
 j. 
 
 
 Sinapis, 
 Sitis, 
 
 im, 
 im, 
 
 i, e ?-aro. 
 i 
 
 
 Sodalis, J 
 
 
 i or e. 
 
 
 Sordes, 
 
 
 e or i. 
 
 
 Sors, 
 
 
 e or i. 
 
 
 Strisfilis, . 
 
 em, im sel- 
 
 
 
 Supellex, .... 
 
 dom, 
 
 e. 
 
 i or e. 
 
 
 Adjectives. 
 Senex, * 
 
 
 
 uin. 
 
 Sospes, * 
 
 
 
 um. 
 
 Superstes, * ... 
 
 
 ite. . 
 
 um. 
 
 Supplex, + ..... 
 
 
 ici or e, 
 
 um. 
 
 T. 
 Tibris, || 
 
 im, in, ...... 
 
 i, e, ide. 
 
 
 Tigris, || 
 Tridens, 
 
 im, in, 
 
 i, e. 
 i or e. 
 
 
 Turris, 
 Tussis, 
 
 Adjectives. 
 Tricorpor, * ... 
 
 im, em, 
 im, em, 
 
 i or e. 
 i or e. 
 
 e. . 
 
 um. 
 
 Tricuspis, * ... 
 
 
 e, ., 
 
 um 
 
 Tripes,* 
 
 
 e . 
 
 um 
 
 U,V. 
 Vectis, 
 
 
 e or i. 
 
 
 
 
 
 ium 
 
 ViffiLS.. 
 
 
 
 um. 
 
 Vis, pi. vires, . . 
 
 
 
 riuni 
 
 
 
 e or i 
 
 
 Volucris,!.. 
 
 
 
 um* 
 
25 
 
 Ace. Sing. Abl. Sing. Gen. PI. 
 Uter, ium. 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 Uber,f e or i, um. 
 
 Vetus,* i, e seldom, ... um. 
 
 Vigil,f i, e, um, ium sel- 
 dom. 
 
 Volucris,f ... i, um, ium sel- 
 dom. 
 
 J Such substantives have z, because they are formed from 
 adjectives having i only, in the ablative. Though used as 
 substantives, they are, in reality, adjectives, the substantive 
 with which they agree being understood. 
 
 Substantives thus marked, take either termination in- 
 differently : those not marked, take, in general, the first- 
 mentioned termination. 
 
 * f See Rule VI. 
 
 || Carthago and such nouns have e or i, when at a place is 
 signified, that is, when the question is made by Ubi, where? 
 The names of gods, rivers and cities, in is, take, in general, 
 im or in, in the accusative, i, or sometimes e, in the ablative. 
 
 A Synopsis of the Declension of Greek Nouns. 
 
 I. Declension. II. Declension. III. Declension. IV. 
 
 2. 3. 
 
 ( 
 
 4. 
 
 5. 
 
 r 
 
 6. 
 
 7. 
 
 8. 9. 
 
 OS, OS, US. 
 
 on, um. 
 
 
 n. 
 
 ys. o. 
 
 6, i. 
 
 i. 
 
 os, is. 
 
 is,ios, eos. 
 
 yos,yis. us. 
 
 
 
 o. 
 
 i. 
 
 i. 
 
 yi. o. 
 
 on, o. on,um. 
 
 on,um. 
 
 a,em. 
 
 im,in. 
 
 ym,yn. o. 
 
 os, e. 
 
 on, um. 
 
 
 
 i. 
 
 y. o. 
 
 0. 
 
 0. 
 
 e. 
 
 i. 
 
 y. ye. o. 
 
 N. as. es. e. 
 G. ae. se. es. 
 D. a?. ae. e. 
 A. am,an. em,en. en. 
 V. a. e. e. 
 
 A. a. e, a. e. 
 
 I. According to this declension are declined such nouns 
 as jEneas, Anchises, Epitome ; likewise patronymics in des, 
 as Pelides, with the following proper names, Acestes, Acha- 
 teS) Agyrtes, Antiphates^ Bootes, Butes, Laertes, Leucdtes, 
 Mencetes, Philoctetes, Polites, Procrustes, Thersttes, Tliy- 
 estes 9 Zetes. Add names of jewels and wines; as Achates, 
 Aromatites. Other nouns in es belong to the third. 
 
 Nouns in stes make sta in the vocative: as Thyestes, Thy- 
 esta. When nouns of this declension have a plural, it is 
 regular. 
 
 II. According to this declension, decline such nouns as 
 Tenedos, Androgeos, Athos, Panthus, Pelion. Os short makes 
 i in the genitive and e in the vocative. 
 
 In the vocative Panthus has Panthu ,- Chorus has chore 
 
28 
 
 Note 1. Some have thought, that, from twenty to an 
 hundred, if two numbers be coupled, the less should be put 
 before the greater ; but to this there are many exceptions. 
 Cicero says viginti et quatuor. 
 
 2. After centum, the inferior number is put with or with- 
 out a copulative ; as centum et duo, or centum duo ; centesi- 
 mus secundus, or, centesimus et secundus. 
 
 3. For octodecim and novemdecim, duodeviginti and unde- 
 viginti are elegantly used ; in the same way duodetriginta 
 for twenty-eight Also for decimus octavus, and decimus 
 nonus, are used duodevicesimus and undevicesimus. In the 
 distributive numbers also ; as duodeviceni. 
 
 4. Instead of primus, and secundus, we often find unus 
 and duo before vicesimus, tricesimus, &c.; as uno et octoge- 
 simo anno Cic. So too in English. 
 
 5. The cardinal and distributive numbers may be thus 
 distinguished : 
 
 The cardinal express a number absolutely ; as one, two, 
 &c. 
 
 The distributive are those which distribute to every single 
 person of many, the same number. Example : 
 
 Dedit iis tres asses, He gave them three pence (to be di- 
 vided among them). 
 
 Dedit ternos asses, He gave them three pence each. 
 
 But poets, and sometimes prose writers use the distributive 
 for the cardinal numbers. 
 
 The multiplicative numbers also are sometimes used for 
 the cardinal by the poets ; as Duplices tendens ad sidera pal- 
 mas, instead of duas palmas. 
 
 6. Unus, when used as a numeral, takes de or e, or ex, 
 after it, and seldom the genitive plural; as unus ex iis, 
 one of them. But when used for solus it takes the geni- 
 tive plural ; as Lampedo unafceminarum, Lampedo the only 
 woman. 
 
 GENDERS OF NOUNS. 
 
 GENERAL RULES. 
 
 By the Signification, 
 
 I. Names of males, and nouns denoting general employ- 
 ments of men, are masculine ; as, Mars, Numa, pater, 
 scriba, maritus. 
 
29 
 
 * 
 
 II. Names of winds, months, rivers and mountains, are mas- 
 
 culine. Names of mountains often follow the gender 
 of the termination. Rivers likewise. 
 
 III. Names of females are feminine ; as Venus, Anna, soror, 
 
 flia. 
 
 IV. Names of trees, plants, countries, cities, ships, islands, 
 
 gems, and poems, are feminine; as alnus, nardus % 
 halus, Epirus, Lacedcemon, Centaurus, sapphirus, eu- 
 nuchus. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Trees. Masculine; Rhamnut, spinus, and those ending in 
 -ster. 
 
 Herbs. Masculine; Intybus, helleborus, raphanus, seldom fe- 
 minine : if feminine, planta is under- 
 stood. 
 
 Trees. Doubtful ; Larix, lotus, rubus, cupressus. Two first 
 rather feminine. 
 
 Herb. Doubtful; Cytisus ; but rather masculine. 
 
 Trees. Neuter ; Siler, suber, robur, thus, acer / those end- 
 ing in urn, as buxum. 
 
 Cities. Masculine ; Sulmo, Pontus, Parisii, Agragas. 
 
 Neuter; Argos, Tibur ; nouns in e and urn, as 
 
 Pr&neste, Pcestum. Anxur is mascu- 
 line and neuter. 
 
 Gems. Masculine ; Carbunculus, pyropus, opalus, beryllus, 
 smaragdus ,- if feminine, gemma is un- 
 derstood. 
 
 LILY'S THREE SPECIAL RULES. 
 
 By the ending of the Genitive Case. 
 
 [Those words whose genders are so easily ascertained by 
 the general rules, are omitted, such as mulier, anus, socrus, 
 soroi', uxoT) Tros, Areas, Ligur, satrapa, athletes, &c. The 
 error of placing in the 2nd special rule, sus, grus, scrobs, mas> 
 pes, vas (vadis), &c., words increasing short, is corrected. 
 Other errors are likewise corrected. Those doubtfuls that 
 have an m marked over them are commonly masculine ; 
 those having an^ feminine. The words which are common 
 in sense and gender, are thus marked*. The others are 
 common in sense, but not in gender.] 
 
28 
 
 Note 1. Some have thought, that, from twenty to an 
 hundred, if two numbers be coupled, the less should be put 
 before the greater ; but to this there are many exceptions. 
 Cicero says viginti et quatuor. 
 
 2. After centum, the inferior number is put with or with- 
 out a copulative ; as centum et duo, or centum duo ; centesi- 
 mus secundus, or, centesimus et secundus. 
 
 3. For octodecim and novemdecim, duodemginti and unde- 
 mginti are elegantly used ; in the same way duodetriginta 
 for twenty-eight. Also for decimus octavus, and decimus 
 nonus, are used duodevicesimus and undevicesimus. In the 
 distributive numbers also ; as duodeviceni. 
 
 4. Instead of primus, and secundus, we often find unus 
 and duo before vicesimus, tricesimus, &c. ; as uno et octoge- 
 simo anno Cic. So too in English. 
 
 5. The cardinal and distributive numbers may be thus 
 distinguished : 
 
 The cardinal express a number absolutely ; as one, two, 
 &c. 
 
 The distributive are those which distribute to every single 
 person of many, the same number. Example : 
 
 Dedit iis tres asses, He gave them three pence (to be di- 
 vided among them). 
 
 Dedit ternos asses, He gave them three pence each. 
 
 But poets, and sometimes prose writers use the distributive 
 for the cardinal numbers. 
 
 The multiplicative numbers also are sometimes used for 
 the cardinal by the poets ; as Duplices tendens ad sidera pal' 
 mas, instead of duas palmas. 
 
 6. Unus, when used as a numeral, takes de or e, or ex, 
 after it, and seldom the genitive plural; as unus ex iis, 
 one of them. But when used for solus it takes the geni- 
 tive plural ; as Lampedo unafceminarum, Lampedo the only 
 woman. 
 
 GENDERS OF NOUNS. 
 
 GENERAL RULES. 
 
 By the Signification. 
 
 I. Names of males, and nouns denoting general employ- 
 ments of men, are masculine ; as, Mars, Numa, pater, 
 scriba, maritus. 
 
29 
 
 
 
 II. Names of winds, months, rivers and mountains, are mas- 
 
 culine. Names of mountains often follow the gender 
 of the termination. Rivers likewise. 
 
 III. Names of females are feminine ; as Venus, Anna, soror, 
 
 Jilia. 
 
 IV. Names of trees, plants, countries, cities, ships, islands, 
 
 gems, and poems, are feminine; as alnus, nardus % 
 bolus, Epirus, Lacedcemon, Centaurus, sapphirus, eu- 
 nuchus. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Trees. Masculine; Rhamnus, spinus, and those ending in 
 -ster. 
 
 Herbs. Masculine; Intybus, helleboitis, raphanus, seldom fe- 
 minine : if feminine, planta is under- 
 stood. 
 
 Trees. Doubtful ; Larix, lotus, rubus, cupressus. Two first 
 rather feminine. 
 
 Herb. Doubtful; Cytisus ; but rather masculine. 
 
 Trees. Neuter ; Siler, suber, robur, thus, acer ; those end- 
 ing in um, as buxum. 
 
 Cities. Masculine ; Sulmo, Pontus, Parisii, Agragas. 
 
 Neuter; Argos, Tibur ; nouns in e and um, as 
 
 Pr&neste, Ptestum. Anxur is mascu- 
 line and neuter. 
 
 Gems. Masculine ; Carbunculus, pyropus, opalus, beryllus, 
 smaragdm ; if feminine, gemma is un- 
 derstood. 
 
 LILY'S THREE SPECIAL RULES. 
 
 By the ending of the Genitive Case. 
 
 [Those words whose genders are so easily ascertained by 
 the general rules, are omitted, such as mulier, anus, socrus, 
 soror, uxor, Tros, Areas, Ligur, satrapa, athletes, &c. The 
 error of placing in the 2nd special rule, sus, grus, scrobs, mas, 
 pes, vas \vadis], &c., words increasing short, is corrected. 
 Other errors are likewise corrected. Those doubtfuls that 
 have an m marked over them are commonly masculine ; 
 those having an t /J feminine. The words which are common 
 in sense and gender, are thus marked*. The others are 
 common in sense, but not in gender.] 
 
30 
 
 THE FIRST SPECIAL RULE. 
 
 Nouns not increasing in the genitive, as nubes, nulls, are 
 feminine. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 MASCULINES. 
 
 Nouns in nis are masculine; (Greek nouns feminine.) 
 Cum callis, cassis, caulisqae, cometa, planeta, 
 Axis, cenchris, collis, follis, fastis, aqudlis, 
 Fustis, mensis, piscis, postis, sentis, et ensis ; 
 Orbis, torris, vectis, vepres, vermis, et unguis. 
 To these may be added Adria ,- nouns from the Greek in 
 as, as tiaras ,- in es, as acinaces ,- and the compounds of as, 
 as centussis, (and pandect & pi.) 
 
 (a) Nouns in er and us are masculine. Except these fe- 
 minine : 
 
 Vannus, acus, jfausque, colusque, domusque, manuscyjiQ, 
 
 Carbasus, atque tribus, portions, alvus, humus : 
 with words of Greek origin ; as Abyssus, antidotus, atomus, 
 dialectus, diphthongus, eremus, methodus, periodus, pharus, 
 &c. 
 
 [Note. These feminine nouns, though exceptions to this 
 part of the rule, are regularly feminine according to the first 
 special rule.] 
 
 NEUTERS. 
 
 Nouns in e of the third declension are neuter. 
 
 Nouns in um are neuter. 
 
 Nouns undeclined are neuter. 
 
 Virus and pelagus are neuter. Vulgus masc. and neut. 
 
 Likewise, Cacoethcs, hippomanes, nepenthes, panaces, neuter. 
 
 DOUBTFULS EXCEPTED. 
 
 f. f. m. m. 
 
 These are doubtfuls : talpa l , dama, canalis, cytisus, bala- 
 
 m. in. m. m. f. f. 
 
 nus, Jinis*, clunis, penus 3 , amnis, pampinus, corbis, linte) 
 
 m. m. m. m. 
 
 torquis, specus 3 , anguis, phaselus, grossus, paradisus, 
 bitus, palumbes. 
 
 1 Talpa and dama are masculine in two instances in Virgil. 
 
 2 Fines, borders or territories, is always masculine. 
 
 3 Penus and sjiecus, of the third declension, are neuter. 
 
31 
 
 COMMONS EXCEPTED, 
 
 Nouns compounded of verbs, ending in a ; as agricola, 
 from colo ; advena from venio. Add senex, auriga, verna, 
 sodalis, vates*, extorris,patruelis*, qffinis*,juvenis*,testis*, 
 civis*, cams*, hostis *, perduellis, conviva*. 
 
 THE SECOND SPECIAL RULE. 
 
 Nouns increasing long in the genitive, as virtus, virtutis, 
 are feminine. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 MASCULINES. 
 
 Nouns in er, or, and os, are masculine (except cos and dos, 
 which are feminine). 
 
 Nouns of more than one syllable in n, ens, as antis, and 
 the names of numbers and substances in o, are masculine. 
 Add, 
 
 Sol, ren, splen, fons, mons, pons, mus, as, bescpie, merldi- 
 es, dens, sermo, lebes, magnes, thoraxque, tapesque. 
 The compounds likewise of as, as quadrans, dodrans. 
 
 NEUTERS. 
 
 Nouns of more than one syllable in al, and ar. Add 
 Crus, jus, pus, rus, thus, f el, mel, vas (yasis), et halec, 
 jEs, spinther, cor, lac, far, ver, os (or is, et ossis). 
 Sal (salt) is masc. rarely neut. Sales (plural), always mas- 
 culine. 
 
 DOUBTFULS EXCEPTED. 
 
 ra. m. m. 
 
 These are doubtfuls: Arrhabo, serpens, lubo, rudens, 
 
 * I I* 
 
 perdix, lynx, Umax, stirps 1 , when it signifies a trunk of a 
 tree, and calx* a heel. Dies is doubtful in the singular, and 
 masculine in the plural. Animans is of all genders. 
 
 COMMONS EXCEPTED. 
 
 Par ens*, auctor*, hifans*, adolescent, dux*, illex, 
 hares*, exlex: derivatives from from, asbifrons,- alsocustos*, 
 bos*, fur, sacerdos*, cliens*, pras*. But custos (a shoot) 
 is masculine. 
 
 1 Stirps parents, or children, always feminine. 
 
 2 Calx lime, femiuine. 
 
32 
 
 THE THIRD SPECIAL RULE. 
 
 Nouns increasing short in the genitive, as sanguis, san- 
 gumis, are masculine. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 FEMININES. 
 
 Nouns of more than two syllables in do and go are femi- 
 nine. 
 
 All nouns in as adis, and in is idis, (except lapis, masc.) 
 Junge pecus (pecudis), coxendix, trabsque, supellex, 
 Appendix, crux, fax, nex, nix, mix, pixqae, Jilixque, 
 Grando, Jides, compes, forceps, seges, arbor, hyemsqae. 
 Scobs, carex, forfex, res, spes, sandyxque, tegesque. 
 
 NEUTERS. 
 
 Nouns in a, ar, en, put, ur, us, and names of plants in er, 
 are neuter (except pecten and furfur, both masculine). 
 His quoque marmor, ador, neutris jungasque cadaver. 
 His cequor, tuber ! , verber, et uber, iter. 
 
 DOUBTFULS EXCEPTED. 
 
 m. m. m. m. m. m. m. in- 
 
 Cardo, margo, cinis, obex, scrobs, pumex, imbrex, cortex, 
 
 m. f. m. m. m. f. 
 
 pulvis, grus, adeps, culex, natrix, silex, and onyx 9 , (with its 
 
 m. m. 
 
 compounds), varix, hystrix, and rumex. 
 
 COMMONS EXCEPTED. 
 
 Vigil, pugil, exul, pr&sul, homo, nemo*, martyr*, augur*, 
 antistes*, miles*, pedes, interpres*, comes*, hospes, ales, 
 prases, princeps*, auceps, eques, obses*, conjux*, judex*, 
 vindex*, opifex, aruspex, sus*, municeps*. 
 
 Note. To the Second Special Rule may be added these 
 masculine exceptions. 
 
 Spadix, ids, m. a certain colour. 
 Volvox, ocis, m. a vine-fretter. 
 Solar, dris, m. a young salmon. 
 
 1 Tuber, a mushroom, or wen, neut. ; name of a tree, fera, ; the fruit, 
 * Onyr, a gem, fern. ; marble, or a vessel, masc. 
 
33 
 
 To the Third Special Rule, feminine exceptions. 
 
 Tomcx, ids, f. a cord. 
 
 Merges, itis, f. a handful of corn. 
 
 Sniilax, ads, f. a yew-tree, or herb. 
 
 THE EXCEPTIONS ARRANGED, WITH A FIGURE REFERRING 
 TO THE RULE TO WHICH THEY BELONG. 
 
 A. 
 Abyssus, s! 9 a bottomless pit, 
 
 f; 1 () 
 Adnaces, is, a scimitar, m. 1 . 
 
 Acus, us, a needle, f. 1 (a) 
 Adcps, ipis, fatness, d. 3. m. 
 Adolesccns, tis, a young man 
 
 or woman, c. 2 * 
 Ador, or is, wheat, n. 3. 
 Adria, &, a sea, m. 1. 
 Advena, ce, a stranger, c. 1. 
 JEquor, or is, the sea, n. 3. 
 /2&, <em, brass, n. 2. 
 Affinis, is, a relation, c. 1 * 
 Agricola, tc, a husbandman 
 
 or -woman, c. 1. 
 Ales, ilis, a great bird, c. 3. 
 Alvus, i, the paunch, ^ 1 (a) 
 Amnis, is, a river, c/. 1. wz. 
 Anguis, is, a snake, r/. 1. w. 
 Antidotus, i, an antidote, yi 
 
 i W 
 
 Antistes, itis, a priest or 
 
 priestess, c. 3 * 
 Appendix, ids, an addition, 
 
 /3. 
 
 Aqualis, is, an ewer, w. 1. 
 Arbor, or is, a tree, f /^ 3. 
 Arrhabo, onis, an eiirnest, c?. 
 
 2. 7. 
 
 Armpex, ids, a soothsayer, 
 
 c. 3. 
 
 -45, ass/s, a pound, ?w. 2. 
 Atomus, i, an atom, yi 1 (a) 
 Auceps, cupis, a fowler, c. 3. 
 Auctor, or/5, an author, r. 2 * 
 
 Au<rur, tiris, a soothsayer, r. 
 
 3* 
 
 Auriga, cr., a waggoner, c. 1 . 
 Axis, is, an axle-tree, m. 1. 
 
 B. 
 
 1. 
 
 Balanus, i, a chesnut, 
 Barbitus, i, a lute, rf. 1. 
 7&>5, 0^55/5, eight ounces, ??z. 2. 
 Bifrons, tis, double-faced, c. 
 
 *2. 
 Bos, bovis, an ox or cow, c. 
 
 2* 
 J3woo, o/5, an owl, d. 2. TH. 
 
 C. 
 
 Cacoethes, is, a bad habit, w. 1. 
 Cadaver, eris, a carcase, w. 3. 
 Callis, is, a path, w. 1 . 
 CVzr, cw, the heel, </. 2. 
 Canalis,is,& channel, ^. LOT. 
 Cants, is, a dog or bitch, c. 1 * 
 Carbasus, i, fine linen, f. 1 
 
 (a) 
 
 Cardo, mis, a hinge, rf. 3. m. 
 Carex, ids, sedge, f. 3. 
 Cassis, idis, an helmet, f. 3 : 
 
 but 
 
 Cassis, is, a net, TTZ. 1. 
 Caulis, is, a stalk, w. 1. 
 CcncJiris, is, a sei-pent, m. 1. 
 Centussis, is, Roman money, 
 
 m. 1. 
 
 Gmz's, er/5, ashes, d. 5. m. 
 Civz>, z>, a citizen, r. 1 * 
 D 
 
34. 
 
 Cliens, tis, a client, c. 2 * 
 Clunis, is, a buttock, d+ 1. m. 
 Collis, is, a hill, m. 1. 
 Coins, i, or us, a distaff, / 1. 
 
 Comes, itis, a companion, c. 
 
 3* 
 
 Cometa, a, a comet, ?#. 1. 
 Compes, Mis, a fetter, / 3. 
 Conviva, cc, a guest, c. 1 * 
 Conjux, iigis, husband, or 
 
 wife, c. 3 * 
 
 Cor, d/s, the heart, n. 2. 
 Corbis, is, a basket, d.l.f. 
 Cortex, ids, a bark, c?. 3. m. 
 Coxendix, ids, the hip, f. 3. 
 Crws, Sm, a leg, n. 2. 
 Crux, uds, a cross, / 3. 
 Culex, ids, a gnat, 5. 3. m. 
 Custos, odis, a keeper, c. 2 * 
 Cytisus, i, hadder, d 1. m. 
 
 D. 
 
 Dama, cc, a deer, d. I. f. 
 Dens, tis, a tooth, TTZ. 2. 
 Dialectus, i, a dialect,/ 1 (a) 
 Dies, ei, a day, c?. 2. plural, 
 
 77Z. 
 
 Diphthongus, i, a diphthong, 
 
 / 1 (a) 
 Dodrajis, tis, nine ounces, 
 
 w. 2. 
 Domus, i, or zfo, a house, / 
 
 1() 
 Dw^r, uds, a guide, c. 2 * 
 
 E. 
 
 Ensis, is, a sword, ?w. 1. 
 Eques, itis, a horseman 0> 
 
 -woman, c, 3. 
 Eremus, i, a wilderness, / 
 
 lr/r, legis, a lawless per- 
 son, 
 
 Extorris, is, a banished per- 
 son, c. 1. 
 Exul, ulis, an exile, c. 3. 
 
 F. 
 
 Jfor, f arris, bread corn, ??. 2. 
 Fasds, is, a faggot, ;w. 1. 
 Fax, ads, a torch, f. 3. 
 JH, /e//w, gall, n. 2. 
 2^'cw5, /, or ?1s, a fig, / 1 (a) 
 Fides, ei, feith, / 3. 
 r, zcw, fern, / 3. 
 
 , an end, d. 1. m. 
 Follis, is, a pair of bellows, 
 
 m. 1. 
 
 jPow5, ^>, a fountain, m. 2. 
 Forceps, ctpis, a pair of tongs, 
 
 /3. 
 Forfex, ids, a pair of shears, 
 
 /3. 
 
 Fur, furls, a thief, c. 2. 
 Fustis, is, a club, w. 1. 
 
 G. 
 
 Grando, mis, hail, f. 3. 
 Grossus, i, a green fig, c?. 1. 
 Gms, iiis, a crane, 6?. 3. f. 
 
 H. 
 
 Halec, eds, a herring, n. 2. 
 Hacres, edis, an heir, c. 2 * 
 Hippomanes, (indecl.) a poi- 
 son, rc. 1. 
 Plomo, mis, a human being, 
 
 c. 3. 
 
 Hospes, itis, a guest, c. 3. 
 Hostis, is, an enemy, c. 1 * 
 Humus, i, the ground,/ 1 (#] 
 Hyems, emis, winter, / 3. 
 Hystrix,ids, a porcupine, <L 3. 
 
 I. 
 
 Illex, legis, a lawless person, 
 c. 2. 
 
35 
 
 Imbrex, iris, a gutter-tile, d. 
 3. m. 
 
 In/ans, tis, an infant, c. 2 * 
 
 Interpret, ctis, an interpre- 
 ter, c . 3 * 
 
 Jfer, itineris, a journey, w. 3. 
 
 Judex, 2 cis, a judge, c. 3 * 
 
 Jus, juris, right, n. 2. 
 
 Jwoenis, is, a youth, c. 1 * 
 
 L. 
 
 Z/flc, /ac/z, milk, n. 2. 
 Lebes, efts, a cauldron, ?;z. 2. 
 Limax, ads, a snail, 6/. 2. t /I 
 Linter, tris, a boat, rf. l.Ji 
 Lynx, ds, a spotted beast, 
 d.*.f. 
 
 M. 
 
 Magnes, etis, a loadstone, 
 
 w. 2. 
 
 Ma?ius, us, a hand, ^ 1 (a) 
 Margo, mis, a margin, d. 3. 
 
 7W. 
 
 Martyr, yris, a martyr, c. 3 * 
 .Mi?/, mellis, honey, n. 2. 
 Mensis, is, a month, TH. 1. 
 Meridies, ei, noon, wz. 2. 
 Metkodus, i, a method, ^ 1. 
 
 (a) 
 
 Miles, itis, a soldier, c. 3 * 
 Mons, tis, a mountain, w. 2. 
 jMz^, ftris, a mouse, w. 2. 
 Muntceps, ipis, a freeman, c. 
 
 3* 
 
 N. 
 
 Natrix, ids, a water-snake, 
 
 d. 3. wz. 
 
 Nemo, mis, nobody, c. 3 * 
 Nepenthes, is, bugloss, n. 1. 
 .Ni?,r, ecz'5, death, f. 3. 
 snow, f. 3. 
 a nut, / 3. 
 
 O. 
 
 Obses, Mis, a hostage, c. 
 
 3* 
 Qbex, ids, a door-bolt, d. 3. 
 
 JW. 
 
 , ^c/zz5, an onyx-stone, 
 d. 3. ^ 
 
 Opifex, ids, a workman, c. 3. 
 Orbis, is, a round thing, 777. 1. 
 Os, 055Z5, a bone, w. 2. 
 O^, 5m, the mouth, n. 2. 
 
 P. 
 
 Palumbes, is, a ringdove, d. 
 
 1. 
 Pampinus, i, a vine-leaf, rf. 
 
 1. wi. 
 
 Panaces, is, an herb, w. 1. 
 Pandectce, drum, pandects, 
 
 m. 1. 
 Paradisus, i, paradise, d. 1. 
 
 7W. 
 
 Parens, tis, a parent, c. 2 * 
 Patruelis, is, a cousin-ger- 
 
 man, c. 1 * 
 
 Pecus, tidis, small cattle,^ 3. 
 Pedes, itis, one-on-foot, c. 3. 
 Pelagus, i, the sea, w. 1. 
 Penus, i, or w^, provisions, 
 
 d. 1. 
 
 Perduellis, is, a traitor, c. 1. 
 Perdix, Ids, a partridge, d. 
 
 2./ 
 Pharus, i, a watch-tower, /^ 
 
 1() 
 
 Periodus, i, a period, f.l(a) 
 Phaselus, i, a barge, S. 1. ?;z. 
 Pisds, is, a fish, ?w. 1. 
 pitch, ^ 3. 
 
 Planeta, a, a planet, TW. 1 
 
 , a bridge, m. 2. 
 Portions, its, a gallery, y 
 
Postis, is, a post, m. I . 
 Pnes, dis, a surety, c. '2 * 
 Prceses, id is, a president, c. 3. 
 Pnesid, tilis, a prelate, c. 3. 
 Princeps, ipis, a prince or 
 
 princess, c. 3 * 
 Pugil, ilis, a champion, c. 3. 
 Pidvis, eris, dust, d. 3. m. 
 Pumex, ids, a pumice stone, 
 
 d. 3. m. 
 Pus, ttris, filth, n. 2. 
 
 Q. 
 
 Quadrans, tis, a quarter, m. 2. 
 
 R. 
 
 Ren, rents, a kidney, m. 2. 
 JKt's, rei, a thing, y 3. 
 Rudens, tis, a cable, rf. 2. TW. 
 j?ws, rSm, the country, n. 2. 
 Rumex, wis, sorrel, d. 3. /. 
 
 S. 
 
 Sacerdos, otis, a priest w 
 
 priestess, c. 2 * 
 Sandyz, wis, a colour, ^ 3. 
 Scobs, obis, sawdust, ^ 3. 
 Scrobs, obis, a ditch, t?. 3. m. 
 Seges, etis, standing corn, 
 
 f.z. 
 
 Senex, is, an aged person, c. 1 . 
 Sentis, is, a thorn, m. 1. 
 Sermo, onis, a speech, w. 2. 
 Serpens, tis, a serpent, c?. 2. 
 &7<?.r, ?m, a flint, d. 3. yj 
 Sodalis, is, a companion, c. 1. 
 Sol, solis, the sun, 772. 2. 
 Specus, i, or ?/s, a den, d. 1. 
 Spes, ei, hope, yi 3. 
 Spinther, eris, a buckle, TZ. 2. 
 
 , ^'5, the spleen, m. 2. 
 
 , ^z>, a stump, d. 2. 
 
 Supdlex, -lee fili s, furniture, 
 f. 3. 
 
 5?^, 5W75, a SOW, C. 3 * 
 
 T. 
 
 Talpa, <z, a mole, d. I. f. 
 Tapes, etis, tapestry, ?. 2. 
 Teges, etis, a mat, yi 3. 
 Testis, is, a witness, c. 1 * 
 Thorax, dcis, a breast-plate, 
 
 TW. 2. 
 
 7%W5, flm, frankincense, w. 2. 
 Tiaras, <z, a turban, TTZ. 1 . 
 Torquis, is, a chain, <^. 1. m. 
 Torris, is, a firebrand, m. 1. 
 Trabs, is, a beam, y 3. 
 Tribus, its, a tribe, y 1 (a) 
 Tuber, eris, a swelling, w. 3. 
 
 V. 
 
 Varix, ids, a swoln vein, rf. 
 3. 7;z. 
 
 Vannus, i, a fan, y^ 1 (a) 
 
 Vas, vdsis, a vessel, n. 2. 
 
 Fate.9, 25, a prophet or pro- 
 phetess, c. 2 * 
 
 *Ubcr, eris, a dug, w. 3. 
 
 Vectis, is, a bar, m. 1. 
 
 Vepres, is, a brier, ?w. 1. 
 
 /^r, w7Jf, the spring, n. 2. 
 
 Verber, eris, a stroke, w. 3. 
 
 Vermes, is, a worm, 7?z. 1. 
 
 Vwna, cz, a slave, c. 1 . 
 
 Vigil, ilis, a sentinel, c. 3. 
 
 Vindex, ids, an avenger, c. 
 3* 
 
 Virus, i, poison, n. 1. 
 
 Unguis, is, a man's nail, m. 
 1. 
 
 Vidgus, i, the common peb- 
 ple, . and m. 1. 
 
 
37 
 
 IT may be observed, that, as Lily's Rules pre-suppose a 
 knowledge of prosody, so far, at least, as concerns the quan- 
 tity of the genitive increasing; for those who are entirely 
 ignorant of prosody, the following rules for the genders, ac- 
 cording to the termination of the nominative, are preferable. 
 
 GENDERS BY THE TERMINATION. 
 
 The following six lines contain the general rules for the 
 genders of Latin terminations; and the other lines, from the 
 Westminster Grammar, contain the principal exceptions, 
 arranged by the genders. 
 
 Foemineum a primae. Mas est us, nme secunda2. 
 
 Urn neutrum est. Er, or, os, o l mascula tertiae habentur. 
 
 Fcemtnea, impm-um s, x, aus, as fere et es, is, 
 
 Et Vcrbale in zo 1 , et polysyllabon in do 1 vel in go 1 . 
 
 Hgec sunt omnia neutra, en, ar, ur, t, c, us, e, /, ma. 
 
 Us quartae mas : U neutrum est. Es icemina quintse. 
 
 VARIATIO GENERIS. 
 
 1. MASCULINA ALIENEE TERMINATIONS. 
 
 Mascula, neutro fine ; lien cum pectine, ren ; sol ; 
 Furfur, item turtur, vultur ; salar ; et lepus, et mus. 
 Mascula, foemineo ; dens, fons, mons, pons ; Tudes, antes, 
 Cespes, item fomes, gurges, cum limite, merges, 
 Pes, paries, palmes, poples, cum stipite, termes, 
 Trames ; meridies, formae vox unica quintae. 
 ( 'all-is, caulis, coll is, follis, mensis, et ensis, 
 Fastis, fastis, piscis, postis, sentis et unguis, 
 Et torris, vectis, vet-mis, siinul orbis, et axis ; 
 
 1 Obser\-e, that all nouns in o, including harpago; words of two syllable^ 
 in do and go, such as cardu, ordo, tcndo, ndo, ligu, cudo, and margo (tin's last 
 rarely feminine) ; nouns in to. denoting number, or bodily substance, such as 
 unio, duernio, tcndo, &c., scipio, pugio, papilio, curculio, titio, are masculine. 
 
 But words of more than two syllables, in do and go, with grando and caro ; 
 also nouns in i derived from verbs, nouns or adjectives, as ojiiio (from opto) t 
 rcbdlio (from bellum), tulio (from tatis) are feminine. 
 
 The genders of Greek nouns may be determined by the following lines : 
 Mascula in -as aut -es, sed in -c muliebria, Primae ; 
 Mascula item quamplurima in -es, per -a versa Latinis. 
 
 Tiaras, Planctes -eta, Cometes -eta, Epitome, Musics. 
 
 Omnia in -ens sunt masculu, in -on sunt neutra secunds;. 
 
 Theseus^ Iliun. 
 
 Mascula in -an, -en, -in, -on, -es, -us ; paucnla in ->5, -is, 
 Tertia); in -o fonna? muliebria singula Quartae. 
 
 ^ Titan, splen, delphin, Mcmnon, Chremes, Euriput ; adamas, Simo'is; Sappho, 
 Echo. 
 
38 
 
 Et vox in -nis, ut ignis ; item sanguis, lapis, et glis, 
 Fomiscpie et vomer, mugilcpie et mugilis ,- atque 
 As cum compositis in -is omnibus ; ut centussis. 
 Sic pars assis in -#ws, vel in -e ns, vel in unx ; itidem bes. 
 Addefrutex, caudex, codex, cimexque, latexcpie, 
 Grex, murex, pollex, pulex, sorexque, culexque, 
 Ramex, et vertex, et apex, jbrnixcpie, 
 His plura inveniet tyro, sed rarius, usu. 
 
 2. FCEMINEA. 
 
 Vannus, humus, facit i ; tribus -its ; sic portions, Idus, 
 Sic acus, et manus : unica sed domus, -i facit aut -its. 
 Additur his caro : qugeque a tails, lalio, nata est. 
 Arbor ; cos, dos ,- cum tellure, solus, palus, incus ; 
 Servi -que -tus, virtusque, juventus, atque senectus. 
 
 3. NEUTRALIA. 
 
 Suber, acer, siler, uber, iter, ver / junge cadaver, 
 Tuber, item cicer, et piper, et siser, atque papaver ,- 
 jjEquor, marmor, cor ; as ; vas -is ; et os -sis, et os -ris. 
 Omne etiam nomen casu invariabile ; ceu fas. 
 
 4. COMMUNIA 1 . 
 
 Omnibus his commune genus ; plerumque sed hsec sunt 
 Mascula ; adeps, Jinis, torquis, pidvis, cinis, anguis, 
 Vepres, linter, margo, rudens, scrobs, pampiims, obex, 
 Index, calx, cortex : Ha3C foeminea ; ut coins, alvus, 
 Grando, silex, co?*bis, rubus, et lux, carbasus, imbrex : 
 Plura, utriusque notae, genera in diversa feruntur. 
 Sunt, quae de'ficiunt, generum adjectiva duorum ; 
 Qualia in -es sunt ; ut locuples : neutralia raro. 
 Foemineum in -trix plurali solo ordine neutrum est. 
 
 SPECIAL RULES BY THE TERMINATION AND 
 DECLENSION. 
 
 FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 (1) Nouns of this declension ending in as and cs are mas- 
 culine ; and in a and e, feminine. 
 
 1 The words named common^ in these verses, are, properly, denominated 
 doubtful. The nouns that are common are contained in the following lines ; 
 
 COMMONS. 
 
 Conjux atque parens, infans, patruelis et haeres, 
 Affinis, vindex, judex, dux, miles et hostis, 
 Augur, et antistes, juvenis, conviva, sacerdos, 
 Muni^w<?ceps, vates, adolesccns, civis et auctor, 
 Gustos, nemo, comes, testis, sus, bos^wr, canis^^r, 
 Interpres^we 1 , cliens, princeps, praes, martyr et obses. 
 
39 
 
 SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 (2) iiSj OS) r, masculine. Urn, oy, neuter. 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 (3) or, cr, o, n, 05, masculine. 
 
 (4) as, aus, es, x, s (after a consonant), is, i/S) do, go 9 and 
 20) are feminine. 
 
 (5) C) ar 9 ur, us, ?na 9 men, I, e 9 t, neuter. 
 
 FOURTH DECLENSION. 
 
 (6) us is masculine; u is neuter. 
 
 FIFTH DECLENSION. 
 
 (7) es is feminine. (All but mer idles, which is masculine.) 
 THE EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 A. 
 
 Adria, ce> m. 1, the Adriatic 
 sea. 
 
 Ames, itis, m. 4, a stake. 
 
 Adamas, antis, m. 4, a dia- 
 mond. 
 
 Acinaces, is 9 m. 4, a scimitar, 
 zs, m. 4, an axle-tree. 
 
 is 9 m. 4> 9 a water- 
 pot. 
 
 ~ax 9 Greek nouns in, m, 4; 
 as 
 
 Abac l 9 ac'iS) m. 4, a desk. 
 
 Apex 9 iciS) m. 4, a top. 
 
 As, assis 9 m. 4, a pound- 
 weight. 
 
 its compounds and parts, 
 m. 4, except uncia, f. 
 
 Alvus, z, f. 2, the belly. 
 
 AntidoiiiS) t,f. 2, an antidote. 
 
 AbyssziS) i, f. 2, a bottomless 
 pit. 
 
 Arctus, i> f. 2, a certain con- 
 stellation. 
 
 Arbor, oris, f. 3, a tree. 
 
 Aedon 9 oniS) f. 3, a nightin- 
 gale. 
 
 ^6ws, w^, f. 6) & needle : but 
 
 ACM, I, m. a sea fish, and 
 ) eris, n. chaff. 
 
 , oris, n. 3, the sea. 
 
 Ador 9 oriS) n. 3, fine wheat. 
 
 JEs, ceris., n. 4, brass. 
 
 -as, Greek nouns ending in, 
 n. 4. 
 
 Augur, uris, c. g. s. an au- 
 gur. 
 
 Antistes, itis, c. g. s. a chief 
 priest. 
 
 Auctor, oris, c. g, s- an au- 
 thor. 
 
 Adolescens, tis, c. g. s. a 
 youth. 
 
 Affinis, is, c. g. s, a cousin. 
 
 Advena, tc, c. s. m. a stran- 
 ger. 
 
 Agricola, ce, c. s. m. a hus- 
 bandman. 
 
 1 And such words as nyctictirax, acts, (m.) an owl ; thryrar, aris, the bfcast; 
 dropax, am, (M.) a certain ointment; storax, acts, a gum, Abax is hardly La- 
 tin, but Abacus is used. 
 
Auriga, a, c. s. m. a chari- 
 oteer. 
 
 Auceps, upis, c. s. m. a fow- 
 ler. 
 
 Aruspex, ids, c. s. m. a sooth- 
 sayer. 
 
 Ales, itis, d. a bird. 
 
 Adeps, ipis, d. fat. 
 
 Anguis, is, d. a snake. 
 
 Amnis, is, d. m. a riven 
 
 Atomus, i, d. f. an atom. 
 
 Animans, tis, m. f. n. an ani- 
 mal. 
 
 B. 
 
 Bombyx, Ids, m. 4, a silk- 
 worm: but 
 
 Bombyx, f. the finest cotton. 
 
 Bidens, tis, m. 4, a fork: but 
 
 Bidens, f. a sheep. 
 
 Bodily substance, words in io 
 denoting, m. 
 
 Bos, bovis, c. g. s. an ox or 
 cow. 
 
 Balanus, i, d. an acorn. 
 
 Barbilos, i, d. a lute. 
 
 Bubo, onis, d. m. an owl. 
 
 C. 
 
 Comcta, fc, m. 1, a comet. 
 Callis, is, Til. 4, a path. 
 Caulis, is, m. 4, a stalk. 
 Collis, is, m. 4, a hill. 
 Caudex, ids, m. 4, a stock 
 
 of a tree. 
 
 Cidex, ids, m. 4, a gnat. 
 Cimex, ids, m. 4, a bug. 
 Calix, ids, m. 4, a cup. 
 Calyx, yds, m. 4, the cup of 
 
 a flower. 
 Cocajx, ygJSy ds, m. 4, a 
 
 click ;o\v. 
 
 1 Gustos, a shoot, is masculine. 
 
 * Cupldo, mis, m. the god of rlcsire : hut Cupldo, frm's, jT. desire i 
 Horace used cujrido sordidus for desire 
 
 Chalijbs, jjbis, m. 4, steel. 
 
 Cardo, mis, m. 4, a hinge. 
 
 Cw^o, ow/5, TW. 4, a fur cap. 
 
 Curculio, onis, m. 4, a mite. 
 
 Carbasus, i, f. 2, fine linen, 
 
 Coins, i, f. 2, a distaff. 
 
 Cos, co/s, y] 3, a whetstone. 
 
 C'aro, ms, t /.' 3, flesh. 
 
 Chaos, -oDat. n. 3, confusion. 
 
 Cadaver, en's, n. 3, a carcase. 
 
 Cicer, eris, n. 3, a vetch. 
 
 Cor, ?w, 7i. 3, the heart. 
 
 Cacoethes, (indecl.) n. 4, a bad 
 habit 
 
 Conviva, &, c. g* s. a guest. 
 
 Custos*) <jdis, c. g. s. a keep- 
 er. 
 
 Civis, is, c. g. s. a citizen. 
 
 Comes, itis, c. g. s. a compa- 
 nion. 
 
 Canis, is, c. g. s. a dog or 
 bitch. 
 
 Cotyux, tigis, c. g. 5. a mar- 
 ried person. 
 
 Client, tis, c. g. s. a client. 
 
 Calx* cis, d. the heel. 
 
 Chin is, in, d. a buttock. 
 
 Candlis, is, d. a channel. 
 
 Cinis, r;v'.s\ d. m. ashes. 
 
 Camelus, i, d. m. a camel. 
 
 Cortex, ids, d. m. the bark. 
 
 Cupido*, tnis, m. 4, Cupid, 
 
 D. 
 
 Den.*, fit, m. 4, a tooth. 
 
 Dialectvs, /, f. 2, a dialect. 
 
 Diphthongus, i, f. 2, a di- 
 phthong. 
 
 Diamclros, t, f. 2, a diamc-' 
 ter. 
 
 ddtis* f. 3, a dowry. 
 
41 
 
 Domus, its, f. 6, a house. 
 Dux, duds, c. g. s. a leader. 
 Dies, iei, d. a day. 
 Dies, (plur.) m. days. 
 Dama, a, d. f. a doe. 
 
 Elepkas, antis, m. 4, an ele- 
 phant. 
 
 Ensis, is, m. 4, a sword. 
 
 Epops, op is, m. 4, a kind of 
 bird. 
 
 Eremus, i, f. 2, a wilderness. 
 
 Eos 1 , ( indecl. )y.' 3, the morn- 
 ing. 
 
 Epos, (indecl.) n. 3, Epic 
 poetry. 
 
 Exlex, egis, c. s. m. a lawless 
 person. 
 
 Eques, itis, c. s. m. a rider. 
 
 Exul, ulis, c. s. m. an exile. 
 
 Extorris, is, c. s. m. an exile. 
 
 F. 
 
 Pomes, itis, m. 4, fuel. 
 Fascis, is, m. 4, a faggot. 
 Funis, is, m. 4, a rope. 
 Fustis, is, m. 4, a club. 
 Follis, is, m. 4, a pair of bel- 
 lows. 
 
 Frutex, ids, m. 4, a shrub. 
 F'ornix, ids, m. 4, an arch. 
 Fons, tis, m. 4, a fountain. 
 Furfur, iiris, m. 5, bran. 
 Ficus, its, f. 6, a fig. 
 Fruits in r, names of, n. 3. 
 Fas, (indecl.) n. 4, justice. 
 Fur, furis, c. s. m. a thief. 
 Finis, is, d. an end. 
 Fines, (plur.) m. confines. 
 
 G. 
 
 Gigas, antis, m. 4, a giant. 
 
 Gurges, itis, m. 4, a whirl- 
 pool. 
 
 Giis, gltris, m. 4, a dor- 
 mouse. 
 
 (Glis, glidis, f. mouldiness.) 
 
 (jrrex, egis, m. 4, (seldom 
 fern.) a flock. 
 
 Gryps, yphis, m. 4, a griffon. 
 
 Gluten, mis, n. 3, glue. 
 
 Grajugena, <E, c. s. m. a 
 Greek born. 
 
 Grossus, i, d. a green fig. 
 
 Grus, uis, d. f. & crane. 
 
 H. 
 
 Herpes, etis, m. 4, St. An- 
 thony's fire. 
 Helops, opis, m. 4, a kind of 
 
 fish. 
 Hydrops, opis, m. 4, the 
 
 dropsy. 
 
 Harpago, onis, m. 4, a hook. 
 Humus, i, f. 2, the ground. 
 Halo' 2 , onis, f. 3, a, circle 
 
 round the sun. 
 Halcyon, onis, j\ 3, a king's 
 
 fisher. 
 Hippomdnes, (indecl.) n. 4, a 
 
 raging humour. 
 Hares, edis, c. g. s. an heir 
 
 or heiress. 
 
 Hostis, is, c. g. s. an enemy. 
 Homo, mis, c. s. m. a human 
 
 being. 
 
 Plospes, itis, c. s. m. a guest. 
 Hystrix, ids, d. a porcupine. 
 
 I. 
 
 Icon, onis, J\ 3, an image. 
 
 1 7-,'os is ranked among Monoptotcs ; yet eois Gen. is found. 
 
 c The gender of this word seems uncertain. Some call it masculine, as, 
 According to its termination, it ought to be considered. 
 
Incus, lidis, f. 5, an anvil. 
 
 Idus, Hum, f. 6, the ides 
 (plur.) 
 
 Inguen, mis, n. 3, the groin. 
 
 Iter, itineris, n. 3, a journey. 
 
 Indeclinables, n. 
 
 Imtar, (indecl.) n. bigness. 
 
 Iiifans, tis, c. g. s. an infant. 
 
 Interpret, etis,'c. g* s. an in- 
 terpreter. 
 
 IlleX) egis, c. s. m. an outlaw. 
 
 Imbrex, ids, d. a gutter-tile. 
 
 Index, ids, c. s. g. a disco- 
 verer. 
 
 J. 
 
 Juventus, utis, f. 5, youth. 
 Juvcnis, is, c. g. s. a youth. 
 Judex, ids, c. g. s. a judge. 
 
 Limes, itis, m. 4, a limit. 
 
 Lebcs, ctis, m. 4, a kettle. 
 
 Lapis, idis, m. 4, a stone. 
 
 Latex, ids, m. 4, water. 
 
 Ligo, onis, m. 4, a spade. 
 
 Lepus, oris, m. 5, a hare. 
 
 Laser, eris, n. 3, benzoin. 
 
 Laver, cris^ n. 3, water-par- 
 sley. 
 
 Linter, Iris, d. a little boat. 
 
 Lynx, ds, d. f. a lynx. 
 
 Limax, ads, d. f. a snail. 
 
 Lagopus, odis, f. 5, a certain 
 bird. 
 
 M. 
 
 Merges, itis, m. 4, a reaping- 
 hook. 
 
 Magnes, etis, m. 4, the load- 
 stone. 
 
 Mcnsis, is, m. 4, a month. 
 
 Mugilis, is, m. 4, a mullet. 
 
 Moldris, is, m. 4, a mill- 
 stone. 
 
 Mons, tis, m. 4, a mountain. 
 
 Merops, opis, m. 4, a wood- 
 pecker. 
 
 Mus, muris, m. 5, a mouse. 
 
 Meridics, iei, m. 7 5 noon. 
 
 Methodus, i, /.%,& method. 
 
 Manus, us, f. 6, a hand. 
 
 Marmot', oris, n. 3, marble. 
 
 Miles, itis ! , c. g. s. a soldier. 
 
 Mwiiceps, ijris, c. g. s. a free 
 person. 
 
 Martyr, yris, c. g. s. a martyr. 
 
 Margo, mis, d. m. a margin. 
 
 N. 
 
 -nis, Latin nouns in, m. 4, 
 but Greek nouns, f. 
 
 Natdlis, is, m. 4, a birth-day. 
 
 Nefrens, (porcus) -dis, m. 4, 
 a barrow-pig. 
 
 Number, nouns in io denot- 
 ing, m. 4. 
 
 Nihii, (indecl.) n. nothing. 
 
 Nepenthes, (indecl.) ?i. 4, bu- 
 gloss. 
 
 Nemo, mis, c. g. s. nobody. 
 
 Natrix, ids, d. m. a water- 
 snake. 
 
 O. 
 
 Orbis, is, m. 4, a circle. 
 Oryx,ygis, m. 4,a kind of goat. 
 Ocddens (sol), -tis, in. 4, the 
 
 west. 
 Oriens (sol), -tis, m. 4, the 
 
 east. 
 
 Ordo, mis, m. 4, order. 
 Os, ossis, n. 3, a bone. 
 05, oris, n. 3, the mouth. 
 Obscs, ulis, c. g. s. a hostage. 
 
 1 Nova miles cram Ovid. Avgur cctpa futurl. Stat. and the like, are not 
 to be imitated. Du?, index, vfa&v, prees f fnincrjH, tcslb, and some other*, an- 
 
 rart'lv feminine* 
 
 
43 
 
 Opifex, ids, c. s. m. an arti- 
 ficer. 
 Obex, ids, d. m. a bolt. 
 
 P. 
 
 Planeta, cc, m. 1, a planet. 
 
 Pandectce, drum, m. 1, pan- 
 dects. 
 
 Paries, etis, m. 4, a wall. 
 
 Palmes, itis, m. 4, a branch. 
 
 Poplcs, itis, m. 4, the ham. 
 
 Postis, is, m. 4, a door- 
 post. 
 
 Pisds, is, m. 4, a fish. 
 
 Pollis, mis, m. 4, fine flour. 
 
 Pantex, ids, m. 4, the 
 paunch. 
 
 Podex, ids, m. 4, the breech. 
 
 Pollex, 'ids, m. 4, the thumb. 
 
 Ptdex, ids, m. 4, a flea. 
 
 Phoenix, ids, m. 4, a phoe- 
 nix. 
 
 Pons, tis, m. 4, a bridge. 
 
 Profluens (Jluvius)^ -tis, m. 
 4, a stream. 
 
 Pugio, onis, m. 4, a dagger. 
 
 Papilio, onis, m. 4, a moth. 
 
 -}ms, Greek nouns in, m. 5, 
 except perhaps lagopus,/. 
 a certain bird. 
 
 Pccus, iidis, f. 5, (or m.} a 
 sheep : but 
 
 Pecus, oris, n. a flock of 
 sheep. 
 
 Pharus, i, f. 2. d. a watch- 
 tower. 
 
 Pcrimetros, i, f. 2, a circum- 
 ference. 
 
 Palm, udis, f. 5, a marsh. 
 
 Portions, us, f. G, a portico. 
 
 Pclagus, i, n. 2, the sea. 
 
 Pollen l , mis, n. 3, fine flour. 
 
 Piper, eris, n. 3, pepper. 
 
 Papdver, tris, n. 3, a poppy. 
 
 Panaces, (indecl.) n. 4, all- 
 heal. 
 
 Parens, tis, c. g. s. a parent. 
 
 Patruelis, is, c. g. s. a cou- 
 sin-german. 
 
 Princeps, ipis, c. g. s. a 
 prince or princess. 
 
 Pr<zs, dis, c. g. s. a surety. 
 
 Prases, idis, c. s. m. a pre- 
 sident. 
 
 Pedes, itis, c. s. m. one-on- 
 foot. 
 
 Pugil, ills, c. s. m. a cham- 
 pion. 
 
 Prasul, ulis, c. s. m. a pre- 
 late. 
 
 Perduellis, is, c. s. m. an ene- 
 my. 
 
 Phasclus, i, d. a pinnace. 
 
 Palumbes, is, d. a ring-dove. 
 
 Pumex, ids, d. m. a pumice- 
 stone. 
 
 Pidvis, em, d. m. powder. 
 
 Perdix, Ids, d.f. a partridge. 
 
 Pcnus, i, or us, d. provi- 
 sions. 
 
 Penus, oris, n. provisions. 
 
 R. 
 
 JRamex, tds, m. 4, a rupture. 
 Rumex, ids, d. m. sorrel. 
 r, names of fruits in, n. 3. 
 Riidens, tis, d. m. a cable. 
 
 S. 
 
 Stipes, itis, m. 4, a stake. 
 
 Sanguis, inis, m. 4, blood. 
 
 Sorex, ids, m. 4, a rat. 
 
 Spadix, ids, m. 4, scarlet 
 colour. 
 
 Seps, sepis, ?n. 4, a serpent. 
 
 Senio, onis, m. 4, the num- 
 ber six. 
 
 1 The gender of this noun does not seem ascertained ; nor the termination, 
 
44 
 
 Sdpio, onis, m. 4, a staff 1 . 
 
 Sol, solis, m. 5, the sun. 
 
 SaictT) dris, m. 5, a trout. 
 
 Synodus, i, f. 2, a synod. 
 
 Sindon, onis, f. 3, fine linen. 
 
 Salus, utis, f. 5, safety. 
 
 Senecttis, utis, f. 5, old age. 
 
 Servians, utis, f. 5, slavery. 
 
 Subscus, ildis, f. 5, a joint. 
 
 Spinther, eris, n. 3, a buckle. 
 
 Sacerdos, dtis, c. g. s. a priest 
 or priestess. 
 
 Sits, suis, c. g. s. a hog or 
 sow. 
 
 Senex, is, c. s. m. an old per- 
 son. 
 
 Sardonyx, ychis, d. a pre- 
 cious stone. 
 
 Silcx, ids, d. a flint-stone. 
 
 S/irjis, is, d 1 . a root of a 
 tree. 
 
 Serpens, tis, d. a serpent. 
 
 Scrobs, obis, d. a ditch. 
 
 Sandy x, ids, d. J\ a kind of 
 colour. 
 
 Sal, satis, ?n. sometimes n. 
 salt. 
 
 Sales, (plur.) m. jests, 
 
 Specus, its, m. J\ n. a den. 
 
 Sexus, i, n. 2, a sex : but 
 
 Sexus, us, m. a sex. 
 
 T. 
 
 Tramcs, ^tis, m. 4-, a path. 
 Trrmes, if is, ?n. i, a bough. 
 Tapes, e/is, m. 4, tapestry. 
 TorriS) is, m. 4, a firebrand. 
 Thorax, acts, m. 4, the breast, 
 Tradux, iicis, m. 4, a graft. 
 TridenS) tit, m. 4. a trident. 
 Tor r ens, tis, in* 4, a torrent. 
 Tcndo*, inis, m. 4, a tendon, i 
 
 Ternio, onis, m. 4, the num- 
 ber three. 
 
 Tifio, onis, m. 4, a firebrand. 
 Turtur, iiris, m. 5, a turtle. 
 Tellus, Tiris, f. 5, the earth. 
 Tribus, us, /. 6, a tribe. 
 Tuber, en's, n. 3, a wen : but 
 Tuber, eris, m. a fruit. 
 Teslis, is, c. g. s. a witness. 
 Torquis, is, d. a chain. 
 Talpa^ ce, d. J\ a mole. 
 
 u. 
 
 Unguis, is, m. 4, a nail. 
 Udo, o?iis, m. 4, a sack. 
 Unio, onis, m. 4, a pearl. 
 Unguen, mis, ?i. 3, an oint- 
 ment. 
 
 Uber, eris, ?i. 3, an udder. 
 Urpex, ids, m. 4, a harrow. 
 
 V. 
 
 Fectis, is, m. 4, a bar. 
 
 Vernris, is, m. 4, a worm. 
 
 I'omis, eris, in. 4, a coulter. 
 
 Vertex, Ids, m. 4, the lop. 
 
 Vortex, Jc/V, 7. 4, a whirl- 
 pool. 
 
 Volvox, ods, m. 4, a vine- 
 frettcr. 
 
 / '////;//, tiris, in. o, a vulture. 
 
 Vaintm, i, f. 2, a fan. 
 
 Virtus, Mis, f. 5, virtue. 
 
 Virus, i, n. 2, poison. 
 
 Ver, eris, n. 3, spring. 
 
 Vas, vdsis, n. 4, a vessel. 
 
 Vindex, ids, c. g. s. an a- 
 venger. 
 
 Vates, is. c. g. s. a prophet 
 or pro])lietcss. 
 
 I'erna, rr, r. s. m. a slave. 
 
 1 Stirps for a tree, masc. or fern. ; for parents or children, always fem. 
 An uncommon word ; generally plural. 
 
yarL'.tcis, d. w. a swolnvein. 
 yulgusy 7, m. and n. the vul- 
 gar. Zinziber, em, ?i. 3, ginger. 
 
 The figure points out the rule to which the word is an ex- 
 ception, c. s. m. denotes the word to be common in sense 
 or signification, but masculine in gender. 
 
 c. g. s. shows the word to be common in sense, but that 
 it varies its gender, according to its signification, d. m. 
 means doubtful, but that the masculine is preferable, d. f. 
 doubtful likewise, but feminine in preference. 
 
 By the referring figure, all the exceptions may be classed 
 either according to the gender, after the manner of the Latin 
 verses, since in each letter they are arranged in the order of 
 masculines, feminines, neuters, &c. ; or they may be classed, 
 as in the second form, according to their declension and 
 termination. 
 
 HETEROCLTTES. 
 Nouns differing from the common declension, are generally 
 
 named Heteroclites. 
 Deficit^ aut variat, heteroclita vox, vel abundat. 
 
 I. Abundants have different terminations to the same case. 
 
 II. Variants change from one declension or gender to an- 
 
 other. 
 
 III. Defectives want case, sometimes number. 
 
 Observe ( 1 ), some words are of double-declension, as the 
 following : 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Jus-jurandum, 
 Juris-jurandi, 
 Juri-jurando, 
 Jus-jurandum, 
 
 N. 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 Ac. 
 
 V. 
 
 A. 
 
 N. 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 Ac. 
 
 V. 
 
 A. 
 
 Jus-jurandum, 
 Jure-jurando. 
 
 Res-publica, 
 
 Rei-publicge, 
 
 Rei-publicae, 
 
 Rem-publicain, 
 
 Res-publica, 
 
 Re-publica. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Jura-juranda, 
 Jurum-jurandorum, 
 Juribus-jurandis, 
 Jura-juranda, 
 Jura-juranda, 
 Juribus-jurandis. 
 
 Res-publicse, 
 
 Rerum-publicarum, 
 
 Rebus-p ubl i cis, 
 
 Res-publicas, 
 
 Res-publicse, 
 
 Rebus-publicis. 
 
 The genitive, dative and ablative plural of jus-jurandum 
 are not used. Jus is a substantive neuter, of the third de- 
 clension; jurandnm the neuter gender of the future parti- 
 
ciple passive of the verb juro. Res is a noun feminine of 
 the 5th declension, agreeing with publicus, an adjective of 
 the 1st and 2nd. In double words nominatives only are 
 declinable ; juris-pej'itus declines peritus only. AUer-ttter 
 declines its last nominative only. Pro consule, for proco?isul, 
 and the like, may be found. 
 
 Observe (2), some words are of peculiar-declension, as the 
 following : 
 
 :l 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 TVT "P "NT 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N Amb- 
 f ? Du- 
 
 -* iVl Jp S* 
 
 | o, -ae, -o, 
 
 Jesus, 
 
 Jupiter. 
 
 G. 
 
 -orum, -arum, -orum, 
 
 Jesu, 
 
 Jovis, 
 
 D. 
 
 -obus, -abus, -obus, 
 
 Jesu, 
 
 Jovi, 
 
 Ac. 
 
 -os, o, -as, -o, 
 
 Jesum, 
 
 Jovem, 
 
 V. 
 
 -0, -6, -0, 
 
 Jesu, 
 
 Jupiter, 
 
 Ab. 
 
 -obus, -abus, -obus. 
 
 Jesu. 
 
 Jove. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Sing. Plur. 
 
 N. Vis, 
 
 Vires, 
 
 Bos, Boves, 
 
 G. Vis, 
 
 Virium, 
 
 Bovis, Bourn, 
 
 D. 
 
 Viribus, 
 
 Bovi, Bobus, bubus, 
 
 Ac. Vim 
 
 , Vires, 
 
 Bovem, Boves, 
 
 V. Vis, 
 
 Vires, 
 
 Bos, Boves, 
 
 Ab. Vi. 
 
 Viribus. 
 
 Bove. Bobus, bubus. 
 
 I. ABUNDANTS. 
 
 1. Some abound in termination, as arbor, arbos. 
 
 2. Some are of the first and third declension, as Calchas, 
 ac or antis. 
 
 3. Of the second and third, as Iber, cri or em, sequester, 
 ri or ris. 
 
 4. Of the second and fourth. Colus, Jicu^ laurus, pit 
 have u in the ablative singular, and us in the nominative 
 accusative, vocative plural. 
 
 Qiiercus of the fourth makes quercoruni) and -num. Ve 
 has versi, versorum, versis, as well as its regular cases. 
 Domus is declined according to the verse of Alstedius, 
 " Totte me, mi, mu, mis, si declinare domus vis." 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. V. Domus, 
 
 G. Domi (at home], Domus, 
 
 D. Domui, Domo, 
 
 Ac. Domum, 
 
 Ab. Domo. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Domus, 
 
 Domorum, uum, 
 Domibus, 
 Domos, us, 
 Domibus. 
 
5. Of the third and fifth, as pleh, is; or pleles, ei , fames, 
 is or ei. 
 
 6. Some abound in gender only, as dies, masculine and 
 feminine in the singular. 
 
 7. In termination and declension, as menda, ce ; mcndum, 
 i. 
 
 8. In termination and gender, as tonitrus, us, masculine 
 tonitru, neuter. 
 
 9. In declension and gender, as pcnus, i, or penus, its, 
 masculine and feminine; and pemtm, i, or penus, oris, neuter. 
 
 10. In termination, declension, and gender, as tether, 
 eris, masculine ; and athra, <z, feminine. 
 
 11. In oblique cases, as Tigris, idis or is s Chr ernes, 
 Dares, Laches, Thales, have etis or is. 
 
 12. Some adjectives abound in termination and declen- 
 sion, as declivus, -is ; imbecillus, -is ; semisomnus, -is , exani- 
 mus, -is. 
 
 II. VARIANTS. 
 
 1. In gender and termination. 
 
 Sing. 
 Masc. 
 
 Avernus, 
 
 Dindymus, 
 
 Ismarus, 
 
 MassTcus, 
 
 Msenalus, 
 
 Pangseus, 
 
 Taenarus, 
 
 Tartarus, 
 
 Taygetus. 
 
 Feminine. 
 Carbasus, 
 Pergamus. 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Locus, 
 Jocus, 
 
 Plur. 
 Neuter. 
 a, orum. 
 
 i or a. 
 i or a. 
 
 Masculine and neuter. 
 
 Sibilus -um, 
 Balteus -um, 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Elysium, i 1 . 
 
 Argos, (eos) i. 
 
 Fraenum, i, (or, a neut.) 
 
 Rastrum, i, (or, a neut.) 
 
 2. In gender and declension. 
 2 decl. neut. P. 
 
 Delicium, sel ~. 7 ~ , 
 -^ V of the first. 
 
 Epulum, se J J J 
 
 Balneum, se, (or, a of the 
 second.) 
 
 3. In declension only. 
 
 2 decl. 
 Jugerum, a, of the third. 
 
 Of the third, neut. 
 Vas, a, orum, of the 
 
 second. 
 
 4?. The following vary their 
 sense according to their 
 number : rostrum, for- 
 tuna, facultas, mos, opis, 
 <zdis or cedes, sal, popu- 
 lus (populi, nations). 
 
 1 Cceli and ccclos from the obsolete coclus are uncommon. 
 
48 
 III. DEFECTIVES. 
 
 DEFECTIVES IN CASE, 
 
 1. Called aptotes, or indeclinables. 
 
 Nouns in u are indeclinable in the singular, but regular 
 ill the plural, as cornu : plural cornua, -uum, &c. 
 
 Most nouns in i are indeclinable in both numbers, as 
 gummi. 
 
 Cardinal numbers, likewise, from quatuor to centum. 
 
 Foreign words, like Job, Jerusalem., Abraham, Adam. 
 Abraluz, Ada, are borrowed from a Latin nominative in 
 as. 
 
 Semis, frit, git, cepe, gausape, are singular aptotes. 
 
 Tot, quot, and compounds, totidem, aliquot, &c. plural 
 aptotes. 
 
 Nequam and frugi are aptotes in both numbers. 
 
 Pondo is an aptote, added to both numbers. Duo pondo, 
 two pounds. 
 
 Mitte the adjective is a plural aptote of all genders. 
 
 Mille the substantive is an aptote in the singular ; but re- 
 gular in the plural : millia, -turn, -ibus. 
 
 Prasto is generally considered an adverb. Satis also. 
 
 2. Monoptotes, or words having one case. 
 
 Nominatives. Eos (though some give it, Eois\ damnas (an 
 old law contraction for damnatus}, inquies ; the adjec- 
 tives, exspes, and potts, pote. 
 
 Genitives. Dicis and nauci. Diets gratia, for form's sake. 
 Res nauci, a thing of no value. 
 
 Datives. Such words as despicatui, ostentui, &c., but they 
 are found in other cases. 
 
 Ablatives. JLrgo (for the sake of), such verbals as accitu, natu, 
 jussu, injussu, promptu, permissu, admonitu, &c. noctu. 
 Diu and inter dm (in the day) are formed from dies, as 
 noctu from nox, but they are considered adverbs. 
 
 Accusatives plural. Inficias, incitas or incita. Inficias <?0, 
 I deny. Ad incitas (calces, understood, or lineas), or 
 incita (loco) redactus, reduced to wit's end : a meta- 
 phorical expression from a certain game : they come 
 from the adjective incitus. 
 
 Ablative plural. Ingratiis, or ingratis. 
 
 Ablatives singular, and all the plural. Casse, ccelite, annali, 
 fauce, ambage. This last wants the genitive plural. 
 Viscere is found; and the plural, viscera, complete. 
 Viscus nominative and w'sceris genitive are perhaps ob- 
 solete. 
 
3. Diptotes, words having two cases. 
 
 Nom. and Ace. Neccsse, nccessum, adjectives neuter; voluptfj 
 instar, hlr (hiris seldom), astu, a city. 
 
 Nom. and Abl. Astus, astu (craft) ; siremps, sirempse. 
 
 Gen. and Abl. Impetis, impete, plur. impetibus ; spontis 9 
 sponte ; verberis, verbere ; jugeris, jugere (both entire 
 in the plural); compedis ( seldom ) y compede, no geni- 
 tive plural, but all the other cases. 
 
 Nom. and Ace. pi. Suppetitf, suppetias ; infer ice, infer i as. 
 
 Gen. and Abl. pi. Repetundarym, repetundis. 
 
 Nom. sing, and pi. and Vocat sing. Mactus (magis auctus), 
 macti, macte, a common word of encouragement. 
 
 4. Triptotes, words having three cases. 
 
 Nom. Ace. Voc. sing. Fas, nefas, nihil, nil , secus (an old 
 word for scxus) and specus, when of the third declen- 
 sion and neuter; epos, cacoethes, hippomanes, and 
 other Greek neuters in es. See Pentaptotes. 
 
 Nom. Ace. Voc. pi. The neuters cete, Tempe, mele, pelage. 
 
 Nom. Gen. Ace. sing. Tantundem, tantidem. 
 
 Nom. Ace. Abl. sing. Mane. In ablative sometimes mani ; 
 vesper (vesper em seldom), vesper e. 
 
 Ace. sing, and pi. Dicam, dicas. Dica nominat. is seldom 
 used. 
 
 Gen. Dat. Abl. sing.; Nom. Ace. Voc. pi. Feminis, -/, -e. 
 femina. 
 
 Dat. Ace. Abl. sing. ; the plural complete. Preci, -em, ~e ,- 
 preces, -urn, -ibus, &c. 
 
 Nom. Ace. Voc. pi. ; all the singular. Rus, thus, fel, mel, 
 hyems, hilum, solium, far, ebur, metus, and nouns of 
 the fifth declension (except res and dies complete). 
 The feminine, grates, has no singular. 
 
 5. Tetraptotes, words havi?ig four cases. 
 
 Nom. and Voc. singular wanting. Frugis, opis, pecudis, 
 sordis (these have plural complete) ; ditionis (with- 
 out plural) ; vicis (having all the cases plural but the 
 genitive), and dapis ; for daps is not usual : plural 
 dopes entire. 
 
 6. Pentaptotes, words having t five cases. 
 
 Gen. pi. wanting. Fax, fax, sol, vicis, labes> sobolcs, proles, 
 
 E 
 
50 
 
 to, os (0m). Necum and necilus are scarcely ever 
 found. Chaos, melos, (cpos l \ are Greek nouns neu- 
 ter, increasing in the genitive singular, and therefore 
 belonging to the third declension. They have N. A. 
 V. singular; and, as if from masculines of the second, 
 chaos and melos have sometimes chao and melo in the 
 dative or ablative. Melos has mele in the nom. ace. 
 voc. pi. ; and it is sometimes found to have melos mas- 
 culine in the accusative plural. The word satias is 
 said not to be found in the genitive singular. It is a 
 contraction of satietas, -dtis. (See Declensions R. 
 V. obs.) Vis seldom has the dative singular; vires, 
 -ium, -ibus, plural complete. (See the Declension 
 of Irregular Adjectives, note 1.) Nemo wants the 
 vocative singular; and has no plural. Such words 
 as quails^ quantus^ quotus, &c. have no vocative. 
 
 2. DEFECTIVES IN NUMBER. 
 
 These have only the Singular' 3 * 
 
 Proper names, most names of places (except those which 
 have only the plural), most names of virtues, vices, herbs, 
 liquors, metals, abstract qualities, and many others which 
 may be known by the sense : as Hector, Dido, Italia, jus- 
 
 1 See Triptotes. 
 
 a This is the general rule, but it must be confessed to be tery vague ; for 
 many words belonging to these classes hare the plural, such as : 
 
 1. Avena, deer, Jaba, far, frumenlum, faseolus, glans, hordeum, lupinus, pi- 
 sum, vicia, most of which, however, are used in the singular when quantity is 
 signified. Acus (chaff), farina, lomentum, furfur (bran), are generally sin- 
 gular. Furfur (a disorder) has the plural. Palea has the plural, though 
 used, in the singular, for a quantity. Pollen has the plural. Piper and zin- 
 ztber, with other names of spices, are singular only, except cinnamum* 
 
 2. Tlie following names of herbs are found in the Plural. 
 
 Abrotonus 
 
 biblus 
 
 cytisus 
 
 lapsana sagmeu 
 
 absinthium 
 
 brassica 
 
 eruca 
 
 linum sampsuchuna 
 
 acanthus 
 
 bulbus 
 
 fill* 
 
 lolium satureium 
 
 aconitum 
 
 carduus 
 
 foanum 
 
 malva serpillum 
 
 alga 
 
 casia 
 
 gramen 
 
 melissophyllon sesamum 
 
 allium 
 
 centaureum 
 
 helleborus 
 
 mentha stupa 
 
 amomum 
 
 cepe 
 
 intybum 
 
 nasturtium thymus 
 
 anagallis 
 
 cicuta 
 
 intybus 
 
 ocymum tribulus 
 
 anthyllis 
 
 colocasium 
 
 inula 
 
 papaver verbena 
 
 asparagus 
 
 coriandrum 
 
 juncus 
 
 porrus ulpicum 
 
 betonica 
 
 corruda 
 
 lactuca 
 
 radix urtica. 
 
 beta 
 
 cunila 
 
 lappa 
 
 ruta 
 
titia, luxiiSs hyssopuS) triticwn^ oleum., lac^ aurum^ 
 macics, butyrum^ 
 
 Aer humus omasum sitis 
 
 aether jubar penum or supellex 
 
 album justitium penus tabes 
 
 argilla lardum pelagus tabum 
 
 barathrum lethum piper venia 
 
 cestus limus plebs ver 
 
 coenum lues pontus vespera 
 
 crocum lutum prolubium veternum or 
 
 diluculum mane pubes veternus 
 
 fimus meridies pulvis virus 
 
 glarea mundus (ap- pus viscum or 
 
 gelu parel) sabulum -o viscus (glue) 
 
 giastum muscus sal (neut.) vitrum 
 
 salum vulgus 
 zinziber. 
 
 gluten -inum nectar 
 
 gypsum 
 
 hepar 
 
 hesperus 
 
 These, and some others^ are sometimes found in the Plural. 
 
 nemo 
 
 m'hilum 
 
 nitrum 
 
 salus 
 
 sanguis 
 
 senium 
 
 Aer 
 
 bilis 
 
 cholera 
 
 cutis 
 
 fama 
 
 fames 
 
 gloria 
 
 labes 
 
 lux 
 
 mel 
 
 pax 
 
 pituita 
 
 pulvis 
 
 pix 
 
 quies 
 
 ros 
 
 sopor 
 
 talio 
 
 tellus. 
 
 [Nouns of 
 the 5th declen- 
 sion are seldom 
 found in the 
 plural.] 
 
 Caryophilli, croci, hyacinthi, roste, violce, refer to the flowers. Plants yield- 
 ing roots for food, often have the plural ; Inulce, napi, pastinacte, rapa, ra- 
 phani, siseres, are in Pliny. 
 
 3. Arena, cinis, lana ; aqua, aura, cruor, fcx, Jluor, latex, liquor, mel, mucus, 
 mustum, oesypum, saliva, spuma, sudor, vimtm, ulva, urina ; adeps, balsamum, 
 cera, gummis, medulla, pingue, used substantively, resina, thus; ces (for things 
 made of that metal), electrum, orichalcum, stannum, bitumen, cccmentum, cbur, 
 
 fumus, glarea, lignum, marmor, rubigo, sucdnum, sulfur, pecunia has pecunia 
 (sums of money), nummus (money or coin). 
 
 4. The names of many affections of the mind ; as algor, ardor, angor, color, 
 candor, contemptus, fastits, fervor, furor, horror, languor, livor, metus, mceror t 
 pavor, pudor, terror, vigor ; to which may be added, fragor, odor, stridor, nitor, 
 pallor, pqdor, rigor, splendor, squalor, tenor (tone or accent), tepor, tumor, and 
 many words of the like nature. 
 
 5. And although every abstract quality, metaphysically considered, must 
 be singular ; yet being considered as existing in a variety of subjects, their 
 names are occasionally used in the plural number : hence, ambitio, avaritia, 
 amaritudo, astutia, bonitas, elegantia, dementia, fortitudo, formido, gloria, ira, 
 malitm, mors, sanctitas, savitia, stultitia, vita, and many more of a similar kind, 
 are found in the plural. 
 
 E2 
 
The following have only the Plural. 
 
 
 The names of several cities, books, feasts, and sciences : 
 also most adjectives of number ; as Athenae, Thermopylae, 
 Parisii, Bucolica, Georgica ; Baechanalia, Otympia / mu- 
 sica, grammatica , ambo t duo, tres, &c., pauci, singuli, bini, 
 
 3 
 
 Add the following : 
 
 Acta 
 
 facilitates (re- lustra [dens) 
 
 principia (for 
 
 adversaria 
 
 sources) 
 
 majores 
 
 - the tent) 
 
 antes 
 antae -iae 
 
 fasces (a badge) manes 
 fasti and -us manubiae 
 
 pugillares 
 quisquiliae 
 
 apinae 
 
 facetiae 
 
 magalia, -ium 
 
 reliquiae 
 
 argutiae 
 
 feriae 
 
 minae 
 
 repotia 
 
 arma 
 
 fines(territory) minores 
 
 rostra (the 
 
 eestiva 
 
 flabra 
 
 minutiae 
 
 court) 
 
 Bona (goods) 
 
 fortunae (es- 
 
 mcenia, -ium 
 
 sales (witti- 
 
 branchiae 
 
 tate) 
 
 multitia 
 
 cisms x ) 
 
 brevia, -ium 
 
 furfures(scwr/ 
 
 ) munia 
 
 salinae 
 
 bellaria 
 
 gerrae 
 
 natales (birth) 
 
 scalae 
 
 calendae 
 
 hyberna 
 
 nonae 
 
 scatebrae 
 
 cancelli 
 
 idus 
 
 nugae 
 
 scopae 
 
 can! 
 
 ilia, -ium 
 
 nundinse 
 
 scruta 
 
 castra (camp) 
 
 incunabula 
 
 nuptiae 
 
 sponsalia, -ium 
 
 celeres 
 
 infer! 
 
 off'uciae (tricks) 
 
 stativa 
 
 clitellffl 
 
 induciae 
 
 opes (riches) 
 
 super! 
 
 codicilli 
 
 induviae 
 
 orgia 
 
 talaria, -ium 
 
 comitia 
 
 insecta 
 
 pandectae 
 
 tenebrae 
 
 crepundia 
 
 insidiae 
 
 parietinae 
 
 tesqua 
 
 cunae 
 
 justa 
 
 parapherna 
 
 thermae 
 
 cunabula 
 
 lactes 
 
 penates 
 
 tori (muscles) 
 
 dirae 
 
 lamenta 
 
 plagae (nets) 
 
 transtra 3 
 
 divitiae 
 
 lapicidinae 
 
 poster! 
 
 tricag j 
 
 excubiae 
 
 lautia 
 
 phalerse 
 
 trigae 
 
 exequiae 
 
 lemures 
 
 praecordia 
 
 valvae 
 
 exta 
 
 lendes 
 
 prcebia 
 
 vergiliae 
 
 exuviae 
 
 luceres 
 
 primitiae 
 
 vindici^e. 
 
 1 Cicero uses sal in this sense. Sales sometimes signifies salt. 
 * Transtro is found in Perseus. 
 
53 
 
 These and some others are sometimes found in the Singular. 
 
 Angustise crates mapalia quadrigse 
 
 decimae nares salebraa 
 
 artus 
 
 aedes 
 
 bigae 
 
 charites 
 
 copiae 
 
 cibaria 
 
 fores operae (work- tempora (tem- 
 
 fori men) pies) 
 
 furiae prim ores plerique 
 
 fruges proceres vepres. 
 
 literse (an epistle) praestigiae 
 
 It may be observed that many of the foregoing are ad- 
 jectives; such as bona, cani, adversaria, dirce, infer 7", super i, 
 justa, majores, minores, posteri, stativa, &c. 
 
 PLURALS SIGNIFYING SINGULARLY. 
 
 The indefatigable Mr. R. Johnson has given, in his ex- 
 cellent Commentaries, the following list, confirmed by pro- 
 per citations, of words which are sometimes found (espe- 
 cially among the poets) in the plural number, with the sig- 
 nification of singulars : Alta (the sea), animi, auras ; ca- 
 rinte, cervices (the neck), colla, comce, connubia, corda 9 cor- 
 pora^ crepuscida, currus ; exilia , frigora ; gaudia, guttura / 
 hymenai ; jejunia^ judicia^ igncs, inguina^ jubte ; limina^ 
 littora; mensts (a course or service of dishes); numina; odia, 
 ora, ora (plur. of os), ortus, otia ; pectora ; rictus (jaws of 
 one creature, or of more), robora ; silentia, sinus (the plait 
 of a garment); tadce, terga, tempora (time), thalami, tori, 
 viae, vultus, thura, amores (sweetheart), &c. 
 
 SINGULARS USED PLURALLY. 
 
 Certain nouns are sometimes elegantly used in the singu- 
 lar, with a plural signification, such as, miles for milites (the 
 soldiery); eques for equites; ttoma?ius for Romani; pedes for 
 pediteS) &c. 
 
 The adjective multus likewise; as in the examples, Quis 
 multa gracilis te puer in rosa Hor. Quam multo repetet 
 Gratia milite Hor. i. e. 6n many roses, or a bed of roses; 
 with many soldiers, or a large army. 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 A pronoun is a word used, through necessity or for con- 
 venience, instead of a noun : it has gender, case, and num- 
 ber. 
 
 Pronouns are divided into four classes, viz. 
 1. Demonstratives; ego, tit, sut\ 
 
2. Relatives; ille, ipse, iste, hie, is, quis, qui. 
 
 3. Possess! ves ; meus, tuus, suus, nosier, vester. 
 
 4. Gentiles or Patrials ; nostras, vestras, cujas. 
 Qiiis and cujas are called also Interrogatives. 
 
 The declension of all these has been shown, except that 
 of ego, tu, sui ; and hie, is, quis and qui. 
 
 Ego, tu, sui, are substantives ; they have no gender of their 
 own, but assume the gender of the noun for which they are 
 placed. They are thus declined : 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Plur. Sing. 
 
 Plur. Sing. $ Plur. 
 
 N. ego, 
 
 nos, 
 
 tu, 
 
 vos, 
 
 
 
 G. me7, 
 
 nostrum, I, 
 
 tui, 
 
 vestrum, -i, 
 
 SUI, 
 
 D. mihT, 
 
 nobis, 
 
 titf, 
 
 vobls, 
 
 sibT, 
 
 Ac. me, 
 
 n5s, 
 
 te, 
 
 vos, 
 
 se, 
 
 V. 
 
 
 
 tu, 
 
 vos, 
 
 
 
 Ab. me, 
 
 nobis. 
 
 te, 
 
 v5bis. 
 
 se. 
 
 The preposition cum is put after these ablatives. 
 The compounds egomet, tutemet, suimet, are regular. 
 
 T/iese are Monoptotes. 
 
 Nom. tute. Ac. sese, tetc, the simple pronoun being 
 doubled. 
 
 Hie, Is, Qui and Quis, are thus declined : 
 
 M. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 F. 
 
 N. 
 
 hoc, 
 
 N. hie, hc, 
 
 G. hujiis, 
 
 D. huic 1 , 
 
 Ac. hunc, hanc, hoc, 
 
 Ab. hoc, hac, hoc, 
 
 Sing. 
 
 M. F. N. 
 
 N. is, eS, id, 
 
 G. ejiis, 
 
 Z). ei, 
 
 Ac. Sum, earn, id, 
 
 V. 
 
 Ab. eo, ea, eo, 
 
 M. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 F. 
 
 N. 
 
 hi, hs>, 
 
 horum, hiirum, horum, 
 
 his, 
 
 hos, has, 
 
 his. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. F. N. 
 
 ii, eS, ea, 
 
 eorum, earum, eorum, 
 ns, vel ^Is, 
 
 eos, ^iis, ea, 
 
 iis vel Is. 
 
 Or hnYc, but less 
 
55 
 
 M. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 F. 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 N. 
 
 (quid or quod), 
 quod, 
 
 Qui, 
 
 Cujiis, 
 
 Quern, quam, quod (quid), 
 
 Ab. Quo, 
 
 qua, qu5. 
 
 M. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 F. 
 
 N. 
 
 Qui, qusc, qu&, 
 
 Quorum, quorum, qu5rum> 
 Quibus vcl queis, 
 Quos, quas, qu&, 
 
 Quibus vel queis. 
 
 Qui is put for the ablative singular in all genders, rarely ab- 
 lative plural. Cum is put after the ablatives of qui and quis. 
 
 COMPOUND PRONOUNS. 
 
 ( 1 ) Compounds of hie are : N. isthic, isthac, isthoc vel 
 isthuc. Ac. isthunc, isthanc, isthoc vel isthuc. Ab isthoc, 
 isthac, isthoc. So illic. Hicce has all the cases that end in c 
 or s, before ce* ; and hiccine all the cases having c before cine. 
 
 (2) The compound of is is, idem, eddem, idem, which, like 
 quidam, changes m before d into n. 
 
 (3) Compounds of quis formed by prefixing ne, ?mm 9 ec, 
 si and all (alms) to quis ; or adding nam, quam, que, piam 9 
 or doubling quis, are : nequis, numquis, ecquis, siquis, ali- 
 quis ; quisnam, quisquam, quisque, quispiam, quisquis. The 
 compounds of quis, when quis is put last, have qua in the 
 nominative singular feminine and neuter plural. Siquis and 
 ecquis have qua or qucc. Quisquis is thus declined : N. quis-' 
 quis, quidquid, or quicquid. Ac. quidquid or quicquid. Ab. 
 quoquo, quaqua, quoquo. Quisquam has qu&quam, quod- 
 quam, and quidquam or quicquam : Ace. sing, quenquam, the 
 feminine wanting. The plural is seldom used. Some are 
 doubly compounded ; as ccquisnam, used in the nominative 
 only, and unusquisque, which wants the plural. 
 
 (4-) The compounds of qui are quidam, qndcunquc, quivts, 
 and quilibet, which are regular. 
 
 All these pronouns want the vocative. 
 Queis is not used in composition. 
 
 MONOPTOTES. 
 
 Gen. Ejusce, cujusce, hujusmodi, ejusmodi, cujusmodi, hu- 
 jusccmodi. Ac. Eccum, eccam ; eccos, eccas (from ecce, and 
 is). Ellum, dlam ; dlos, ellas (from ecce and tile). 
 
 1 Or citf, but less common. 
 
 - This is a common rule j but hice may be fomjd in Terence, Etui. 2. 2. 38. 
 Horuncc and haruncc, and, by apocope, Iwrunc and harunc may likewise be 
 found ; but they are uncommon. 
 
56 
 
 Abl. Pte is put after the ablatives med, tud, sud, nostrd, 
 vestrd, and sometimes after the masculine of these. 
 Observations on some pronouns. 
 
 (1) Aliquis and Quidam may be thus distinguished: the 
 former denotes a person or thing indeterminately; the latter, 
 determinately. 
 
 (2.) Uter refers to two, and is therefore joined to compa- 
 ratives. 
 
 (3) Quis may refer to many, and is therefore joined with 
 superlatives. 
 
 (4) Hie and Ille are often found to refer to two words 
 going before them. Hie refers to the latter; Hie to the 
 former ; but in a few instances, where no ambiguity is oc- 
 casioned by it, this distinction is reversed *. 
 
 (5) As demonstratives, Hie refers to the person nearest 
 to me ; Iste to the person nearest to you; Ille to any inter- 
 mediate person. In the same manner Hie is for the first 
 person ; Istic for the second; Ulic for the third. Is may re- 
 fer to a person absent^ 
 
 (6) Ipse and Idem are joined to any person. Ipse is often 
 joined to the primitives ego, tu, ille, sui. It may agree with 
 these; but when the nominative, and the word governed 
 by the verb, refer to the same person, it is better to be put 
 in the nominative ; as, Mihi ipse placeo ; Te ipse laudas ; 
 Cato se ipse occidit. It is often used emphatically, for per 
 se ; as, Ipse prcefuit exercitui> He commanded the army in 
 person. 
 
 (7) Ille denotes honour; Iste contempt. 
 
 (8) Tuus is used when we speak to one; as, Sumne, Co* 
 riolane, in tuis castris captiva, an mater-? Vester, when 
 we speak to more than one; as, Cives, miseremini cceli vestri. 
 
 (9) Omnis, Quisque, and Utcrque, have been thus distin- 
 guished : Omnis and Qiiisque are generally used when we 
 speak of more than two ; Uterque always when we speak of two. 
 
 (10) Alter is in general applied to one of two; Alius to 
 one of many. But Cicero uses Primus, Secundus et Alter. 
 In general Alter when repeated is to be translated by the one 
 and the other ; but there is a passage in Cicero, in which 
 the former Alter refers to the last antecedent ; viz. Ut enim 
 cum civi alitcr contendimus, si est inimicus, aliter si compe- 
 titor : cum altcro (competitore] certamen honoris, cum altero 
 capitis et famce. De Off. lib. 1, 12. Alius is, in Caesar, 
 
 1 In such instances as pontus et rtcr, Fluclibus hie tumidus, nubibus ille 
 minar Ovid. Sic deus ct mrgo eat ; hir. spc cclcr, ilia (iniorc Ovid, the rela- 
 tive situations of the objects may have been regarded, not the position of the 
 nouns in the sentence. 
 
57 
 
 applied' to one of two; as, -Ducts leges promulgavit ; unam 
 qua mercedes habitationum annuas condiictoribus donavit ; 
 all am tabularum novarum. Cies. 3. Bel. Civil. Alter is 
 sometimes used like Alms. When in a sentence alius is 
 repeated, it is expressed in English by different terms cor- 
 responding with each other; such as one, another ; some, 
 others. &c. Thus, Alii domos, alii monies petebant, Some 
 were going to their homes, and others to the mountains. 
 Quorum alms, alia causa illata, petebat, Of whom one as- 
 signing one cause, another, another, asked ; or Each of whom 
 assigning a different cause, asked. 
 
 (11) Quivis, any whom you please; Quisqvam, any one; 
 and Ullus, any, are thus used : Quivis affirms ; as, Quidvis 
 mild sat est, Any thing pleases me. Quodvis pati mallem, 
 I would rather suffer any thing. Ullus never affirms, but 
 asks or denies, that is, it may be used in an interrogative 
 sentence, or in a sentence negatively expressed: as also 
 Quisquam. Thus, Nee ulla res ex omnibus me angit Cic. 
 Nor does any thing of all these things distress me. Nee 
 quisquam eorum te novit, Nor does any one of them know 
 you. In an interrogative sentence; as, An quisquam dubi- 
 tabit ? Cic. Will any one doubt it ? Ullus is used in the 
 same way. 
 
 (12) Met, tui, sui, nostri, vcstri, the genitives of the pri- 
 mitives, are generally used when passion, or the being acted 
 upon, is denoted ; as amor met, means, the love wherewith I 
 am loved. 
 
 (13) Metis, tuus, suns, noster, vester, the possessives, de- 
 note action, or the possession of a thing ; as amor meus, is 
 the love which I possess and exert towards somebody else. But 
 these two distinctions are sometimes reversed: thus the first; 
 Nam neque tud negligentidj neque odio id fecit tuo Ter. 
 Neither did he do it out of neglect towards you, nor of 
 hatred towards you ; in which the possessives tud and tuo 
 are used instead of tui, denoting the neglect with which you 
 are neglected, and the hatred with which you are hated. 
 
 The second; Ex unius tui vita pendere omnium Cic. That 
 the lives of all depend upon your life ; in which tui is put 
 instead of the possessive tud. Cicero uses insidice alicujus, 
 passively, for the snares which are laid against a man, not 
 for those which a man lays. 
 
 (14-) Adjectives, participles, and verbs, which have a ge- 
 nitive after them, take that of the primitives ; as, Similis mci ; 
 memor noslri ,- obscrvans tui ; in di get is mci. 
 
 (15) Partitives, numerals, comparatives, and superlatives 
 
58 
 
 take after them nostrum, vest rum ,- as, utcrque nostrum , 
 primus vcstrum ,- major, maximum veslrum. But Cicero, in 
 his Orations, pays no regard to this distinction. 
 
 (16) The possessives often take after them ipshis, solius, 
 unius, duorum, trium, &c., omnium, plurium, paucorum, cu- 
 jusque, and the genitives of participles likewise ; which words 
 have a reference to the primitive understood ; as, Dixi mea 
 unius opera rempublicam esse salvam Cic. I said that the 
 state was preserved by the service of me alone, Meum solius 
 peccatum corrigi non potest Cic. The offence of me alone 
 cannot be amended. - Scripta cum mca nemo legal, vul- 
 go recitare timenlis Hor. Since nobody reads the writings 
 of me, fearing to rehearse them publicly. De tuo ipsius 
 studio conjecturam cepcris Cic. You may conjecture from 
 your own study. In sua cujusque laude prcestantior Erasm. 
 More excellent each in his own skill. Nostra omnium me- 
 moria Erasm. In the memory of us all. Vcstris pauco- 
 rum respondet laudibus Cic. He answers to the praises of 
 you few. 
 
 It is evident, that to all these the primitive is understood: 
 thus, Meum solius peccatum is the same as Mei solius pecca- 
 ; but, as meum was expressed, mei became unnecessary. 
 
 RECIPROCALS. 
 
 (17) Sui and Sutis are called reciprocals, because they al- 
 ways refer to some preceding person or thing, generally the 
 principal noun in the sentence : thus, Ctzsar Ariovisto dixil, 
 turn scse (C&sarem) Gallis, sed Gallos sibi (Ccesari) bellum 
 inlulisse, Caesar told Ariovistus, that he had not made war 
 upon the Gauls, but the Gauls upon him ; in which se and 
 sibi refer to Caesar, the principal noun. But when different 
 persons are spoken of pronominally, other pronouns are ne- 
 cessary for distinction's sake : thus, Cato confesses that he 
 (Cato) has erred, Cato se peccdsse fatetur. Cato thinks ill 
 of Caesar, and says that he (Caesar) aims at a revolution; 
 De Casare male sentit Cato ; eum studere novis rebus arbi- 
 tratur. Cato killed himself with his (Cato's own) sword; 
 Suo se gladio conjecit Cato. He killed himself with his sword 
 (that is, with the sword of any body else); illius gladio se 
 confecit* 
 
 These distinctions will be more fully explained by the 
 following remarks : 
 
 I. When he or his refers to the case which precedes the 
 verb, sui and suits are used : as, Homo Justus nihil cuiquam> 
 quod in sc transferal dclrahcL Cic, : in which sc refers to 
 
59 
 
 homo. Pythius pisca fores ad sc (Pythium) convocavit, et ab 
 his petivit, ut ante suos (Pythii) hortulos piscarentur Cic. 
 Had the fishermen's gardens been intended, the expression 
 would have been ante ipsorum hortulos. Change the nomina- 
 tive ; Piscatores erant a Pythio rogati, ut ante suos hortulos 
 piscarentur : here suos refers to piscatores ; and if his is to 
 refer to Pythius, it must be expressed by ante ejus hortulos. 
 The noun preceding the verb is sometimes in the accusative: 
 as, Dicunt Cererem antiqiiissimam a C. Verre ex suis templis 
 esse sublatam Cic. ; in which suis refers to the accusative 
 Cererem, which is virtually a nominative, and resolvable into 
 quod Ceres &c. If I say C. Verres sustulit Cererem ex tem- 
 plis suis, suis refers to Verres the nominative ; and if I wish 
 to apply the pronoun to Ceres, I must say ex templis ejus. 
 
 In such sentences as, Pater jussit Jilio 1 , ut iret in cubicu- 
 lum suum, and, Verres rogat Dolabellam, ut de sua provincia 
 decedat, in which there are two verbs, and two third persons, 
 we must distinguish by the context which is the principal 
 person, in order, generally, to refer the reciprocal to this as 
 its proper nominative. 
 
 II. The reciprocals may likewise be applied to the word 
 which follows the verb, provided that it is capable of being 
 turned into the nominative, without altering the sense: thus, 
 Trahit sua quemque voluptas Virg. ; in which sua refers to 
 quemque, the object of the verb, because it may become the 
 subject, as in the equivalent expression, Quisque trahitur a 
 voluptate sua. In the same manner, Regis est gubernare 
 suos ; in which suos refers to regis, because we may say, Regis 
 qfficium est ut (rex] gubernet cives suos. Hunc sui cives eje- 
 cerunt Cic. Sui refers to hunc, because we may say, Hie 
 ejectus est a suis civibus. 
 
 III. Provided no ambiguity should arise, the reciprocals 
 may be used instead of relative pronouns ; and especially 
 when the first or second person is used : as, Gratias mihi 
 agunt quod se (eos) med sententid reges appcllaverim Cic.; 
 Suam rem sibi salvam sistam Plaut.; in Which ejus and ei 
 might be used; Timet ue deseras se, or, earn Ter. Relatives 
 may be used instead of reciprocals : as, Omnes boni, quan- 
 tum in ipsis (or se) J'uit, Ccesarem occiderunt Cic. ; Per- 
 suade nt Rauracis ut una cum Us (or secum) proficiscantur 
 Caes. Perfuga Fabricio pollicitus est, si prcemium ei (or sibi, 
 
 1 This is an uncommon construction ; for although Tacitus says, Ubi Bri- 
 tannieo jussit exurgere, jubco has commonh the accusative and infinitive mood 
 after it. 
 
60 
 
 viz. perfuvtc) proposuisset, se Purrhum veneno necaturum 
 Cic. Qiiapropter non petit iit ilium (se) miserum putetis, nisi 
 et innocens fuerit Quinct. 
 
 ( 1 ) Sometimes sui and ipse are applied to 1 the same per- 
 son, in the same sentence : as, Abisari Alexander nunciari 
 
 jussit, si gravaretur ad se (Aleccandrwii) venire, ipsum (Alex- 
 anti-rum) ad eum esse venturum Curt. Ei legation! Ariovis- 
 tus respondit) si quid ipsi (Ariovisto] a Cccsare opus csset, sese 
 (Ariovistum) ad cum venturum Juisse ; si quid ille (Ccesar} a 
 se (Ariovisto) velit, ilium (Ccesar em) ad se (Ariovistum} ve- 
 nire oportere Caes. Sometimes the reciprocals refer, in the 
 same sentence, both to the primary and secondary noun, 
 especially when the latter becomes important, and no ambi- 
 guity is thereby produced. Thus Ariovistus tells Caesar, 
 Neminem secum sine sua pernicie contendisse ; that no one 
 had contended with him, without suffering his own ruin. 
 Secum refers to Ariovistus / sud to nemincm. It is evident 
 that Ariovistus laid great stress on sua pernicie ; and that 
 these two words must refer to neminem, since it was Ario- 
 vistus himself who was then speaking, and whose destruc- 
 tion, consequently, could not, at that time, have taken 
 place. 
 
 (2) Sims, Is, or Ipse, may likewise be used, indifferently, 
 in certain cases. ^Ve may say, Cepi columbam in nido suo, 
 or, in nido ejus, or ipsius. The first is equivalent to, Co- 
 Iwnba a me capta cst in nido suo. And ejus or ipsius may 
 be used, because nidus can refer to columba only. Suus may 
 likewise be used for other pronouns, when its use cannot, 
 from the sense, cause any ambiguity ; as, in Virgil, when, 
 speaking of Dido's nurse ; he says, Namque suam patria^ an- 
 tiqua dim ater kabcbat, in which suam cannot refer to cinis 
 ater, either according to the sense, or the gender used, but 
 evidently to her nurse. 
 
 Sui also ; as, Diomjsius Jilias suas tondere docuit, instituit- 
 que ut candentibus juglandium putaminibus barbam sibi, et 
 capillum adurerent Cic. Here sibi cannot refer to his daiigh- 
 ters, although they are the nominative to adurcrent., but to 
 Dionysius himself since his daughters, it is presumed, had 
 no beard. Had the sentence been, Dionysius instituit ut Ji- 
 litc su<z capillum sibi adurerent, sibi must refer to Jtlite, the 
 nominative to the verb. To remove any ambiguity in this 
 sentence, and to make his applicable to Dionysius, we should 
 say, ut capillum ipsi adurerent. 
 
 (S) When two oblique cases are connected by a con- 
 junction, the relative pronoun is rather to be used: as, Sup- 
 
61 
 
 t 
 
 plicium sumpsil de Jure et sociis ejus, not sin's,, lest stiis should 
 refer to he, the nominative to the verb. If the preposition 
 cum be used, we generally say de Jure cum sociis suis. 
 
 (4) If the nominative or accusative precede inter, the re- 
 ciprocal sui only is used : as, the nominative ; Fratres ge- 
 mini inter se cum forma turn moribus similes Cic. The ac- 
 cusative ; as, Fcras inter sese partus atque educatio et natura 
 conciliat Cic. But when the genitive, dative, or ablative pre- 
 cede, sui, or, ipse, or sometimes iste, may be used ; as, after 
 the genitive, Una spes est salutis istorum inter istos dissensio 
 Cic. Inter se or ipsos might have been used. After the da- 
 tive ; as, Latissime patens hominibus inter ipsos societas est 
 h&c Cic. After the ablative ; as, In magnis quoque auctO" 
 ribus incidunt aliqua vitiosa etiam a doctis inter ipsos mutuo 
 reprehensa Quinct. 
 
 (5) Suus is sometimes put for unicuique proprtus, peculi- 
 ar : as, India mittit ebur, molles sua tliura Sab&i Virg. The 
 country of the Sabaei was particularly famous for myrrh, 
 cassia, frankincense, and such productions. It sometimes 
 indicates jitness or congruity : as, Sunt et sua dona parenti 
 Virg. There are likewise for my father, fit, appropriate, 
 or suitable presents. 
 
 (6) Suus is often used without the substantive being men- 
 tioned to which it refers : as, Suum cuique tribuito, Give every 
 man his own (thing, negotium). Sui rcsponderunt. His sol- 
 diers or countrymen answered (does or milites being under- 
 stood). 
 
 (7) The reciprocals alone, are used with quisque, and they 
 generally are placed before it : as, Pro se quisque acriter in- 
 tendat animum Liv. Sua cujusque animantis natura est 
 Cic. Every animal has its own peculiar nature. Suus is put 
 after quisque in this example from Virgil ; Quisque suos pa- 
 timur manes. 
 
 (8) Sibi and sometimes tibi, mihi, &c., though not indis- 
 pensably necessary, are used for the sake of elegance : as, 
 Suo sibi gladio huncjugulo Ter. Ex ard hinc siime tibi ver- 
 benas Ter. Expedi mild hoc negotium Ter. 
 
 (9) The reciprocals may be applied to two distinct sub- 
 jects coupled by a conjunction ; as, Liter se contendebant 
 Indutiomarus et Cingetorix Caes. The manner of using cer- 
 tain pronouns should be exemplified by such sentences as 
 the following: " Quod ubi Ca?sar rescivit; quorum per fines 
 ierant his uti conquirerent et reducerent, si sibi purgati esse 
 vellent, imperavit. Tulingos, et Latobrigos, in fines sues 
 unde erant profecti, reverti jussit : Ailobrogibus imperavit 
 
ut his frumenti copiam facererit; ipsos, oppida vicosque quos 
 incenderant, restituere jussit." Cses. 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 I. Regular comparison is made by adding to the first case 
 of the positive in z, or for the masculine and feminine, and 
 us for the neuter of comparatives ; and -ssimus -a -urn, for 
 the superlative. 
 
 1. Some adjectives in Us change is into limits for the su- 
 perlative ; as agil-iS) facil-is, gracil-is, simil-is, kumil-is, -li- 
 mus. Imbecillis has -limus, and from imbecillus^ -issimus. 
 
 2. Adjectives in er, add to er 9 rimus, for the superlative. 
 Celer has, from celeris, sometimes celerissimus. 
 
 II. Adjectives in dicus 9 volus,JLcus, loqutis, change us into 
 
 entior 9 and entissimus. Mirifcus has mirificissimus or miri- 
 
 jficentissimus. 
 
 IRREGULAR, 
 
 Positive. 
 Adolescens, .... 
 
 Apricus, 
 Bellus, . , 
 Bonus, ., 
 
 Consultus, 
 
 Crispus, 
 
 Deter (obsol.)... 
 
 Dexter, 
 
 Diversus, 
 
 Dives, divitisl 
 cont. ditis, ) 
 
 Diuturnus, 
 
 Exter, 
 
 Falsus, 
 
 Fidus, 
 
 Jejunus, 
 
 Inclytus, 
 
 Inferus 
 
 Infinitus, 
 
 lr\terus(obsolete) 
 Ingens, 
 
 DEFECTIVE, OR UNUSUAL COMPARISON. 
 
 Comparative. Superlative. 
 
 adolescentior, * . 
 
 anterior, . 
 
 apricior, * f apricissimus. * f 
 
 bellior,*f bellissimus. * 
 
 melior, optimus. 
 
 citerior, citimus. 
 
 consultior,* f consultissimus.* 
 
 crispior, *f crispissimus.* f 
 
 deterior, * deterrimus. * 
 
 dexterior,*' dextimus. 
 
 diver sior,*f diver sissimus.*f 
 
 divitior*f cont. 1 divitissimus * f , cont. 
 
 ditior, j" ditissimus. 
 
 diuturnior, * . 
 
 exterior, * extimus, extremus. 
 
 falsissimus. * f 
 
 fidior,*'f fidissimus.* 
 
 jejunior, * 
 
 inclytissimus.* 
 
 inferior,* infimus, imus. 
 
 infinities, * f . 
 
 interior,* iiitimus. 
 
 ingentior. * . 
 
63 
 
 Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 
 
 In visas, invisior, * f invisissimus.*f 
 
 luvitus, invitior,*f invitissimus.* 
 
 luvictus, invictissimus.* 
 
 Juvculs, junior, . 
 
 Licens, licentior,* . 
 
 Magnus, ........ major, maximus. 
 
 Malus, pejor, pessimus. 
 
 Maturus,... ...... maturiorj* maturrimus, -issimus* 
 
 Mellitus, mellitissimus.* 
 
 Meritus, meritissimus.* 
 
 Multus, plus (sing, neuter) ,. plurimus. 
 
 Nequam(z72^cZ.) 1 nequior,* nequissimus.* 
 
 Novus, ...... novissimus.* 
 
 Nuperus, ...,. . . nuperrimus. 
 
 ocyor, ocyssimus. 
 
 Opimus, opimior,* . 
 
 Par, ...... parissimus.* 
 
 Parvus, minor, minimus. 
 
 Persuasus, ... persuasissimus.* 
 
 Posterus, posterior,* postremus or postu- 
 
 Potis, pote (mo- mus, 
 
 noptote), ...... potior,* potissimus.^ 
 
 Pronus, pronior, * 
 
 prior, primus. 
 
 propior, proximus. 
 
 Sacer, , sacerrimus *. 
 
 Satur,... saturior, *...... . 
 
 Senex, senior, . 
 
 - seqmor,..., 
 
 - 2 satior. ., 
 
 Sinister, sinisterior,f sinistimus. 
 
 Silvester, sil-1 ., . * 
 
 > sil vestrior, * . 
 
 vestris, J 
 
 Supinus, supinior,*f . 
 
 Superus, superior,* supremus, summits. 
 
 Vetus, veterior,* veterrimus. 
 
 ulterior, ultimus. 
 
 Words marked * are regularly compared. Those marked f 
 are not often found. 
 
 ADDITIONAL SUPERLATIVES WANTING. 
 
 Most adjectives in His and dlis, and in bilis ; as j 
 
 1 Nequam forms its comparison as if from neyui the genitive. 
 
 2 Satins only, I believe, is found. 
 
64 
 
 iS) capitalist regalis, tolerabilis. Add also, arcanus, de- 
 ) prodivis, longinquus, propinquns. 
 
 COMPARISON WANTING. 
 
 Participles in rus and dus^ adjectives in bundus, imus 9 inns, 
 iciis, and 2/5 after a vowel (except -qum\ diminutives 
 ill lus (which are in reality a sort of comparison); as ama- 
 turus, amandus 9 pudibundus, limits, matutinus, odorus, famcli- 
 cus, tenellus, dubim, have no simple comparison. Add to 
 these, most nouns in ivus, and adjectives compounded of 
 verbs and nouns ; as Jugitivtis, versicolcr, tardigradus, de- 
 gener, consonus, pestifer, armiger ; and almus, mirus, egenus, 
 lacer, memor 9 sospes. 
 
 (1) Some adjectives in us pure, are found, having simple 
 comparison, such as arduus, assiduus, exigims, plus *, perpe- 
 tuus, strenuus, vacuus, to which add tennis ; but they have 
 generally compound comparison, by magis and maxime. 
 
 The comparison of substantives, as Nero, Neronior ; of 
 pronouns, as ipse, ipsissimus ; of words already compared, 
 as proximus 9 proximior ; postremus, postremissimus, is not to 
 be imitated. 
 
 (2) When the adjective does not vary its termination in 
 comparison 2 , and the sense admits further intension, tl is is 
 done by prefixing magis (more), and maxime (most); or, for 
 diminution, minus (less), and minime (the least). The compa- 
 rison of eminence denoted by very (in adjectives likewise that 
 are susceptible of terminational comparison) is made by 
 valde and vuknbdum, or by de 9 per, or pr& prefixed ; as d.e- 
 parcus, very sparing; per- or prde-facilis 9 very easy ; permttltiy 
 very many ; perpauci, very few 3 . In this state they admit no 
 
 1 Pienlissimus is found in inscriptions. 
 
 * It may be more a metaphysical than a grammatical remark, that, pro- 
 perly speaking, no words, but such as admit of further intension, can be com- 
 pared. But, in English, the word perfect, and, in Latin, jierfectus, plenttf, 
 satur, &c., are compared. It is evident, that nothing can be more perfect than 
 perfection, nor more full than fulness. These words, therefore, do not increase 
 upon the absolute sense of the positive ; but, being compared, indicate a com- 
 parative increase over something not possessing the full quality implied in the 
 positive, in its absolute and complete sense ; and must, therefore, denote ap- 
 proximation or tendency. Thus, "One thing is fuller than another," must 
 mean, that one thing approadies nearer to fulness than the other, and presup- 
 poses that neither is absolutely full. 
 
 In nearly a similar way may be explained, the manner in which certain 
 comparatives seem greater than superlatives, in the following quotations from 
 Cicero : 
 
 " Ego aii tern hoc sum miserior quam tu, quce es tniserrima." " Persuade 
 tibi te mihi esse charissinnuu, sed vnulto fore cfiariorem, si &c." In these sen- 
 tences the superlative is to the comparative, as a sort of positive, upon which 
 the comparative is formed. 
 
 3 Adjectives compounded with certain prepositions increasing or diminishing 
 the signification of the simple noun, if the simple noun be in use and admit 
 comparison, are seldom compared ; such are pradivet, pradurus ; deparcvs 
 
65 
 
 simple comparison, although the word perpaucissimi^ a very 
 very few, is found. 
 
 (3) When the superlative is wanting, the comparative is 
 sometimes used in its stead : as, Adolescentiores apum, The 
 younger or youngest of the bees. Juniores patrum, The 
 youngest of the senators. In such instances, the bees and 
 the senators are divided into two parties ; and then the com- 
 parative is strictly applicable. 
 
 For the comparison of adverbs^ see Adverbs. 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 A Verb has been defined to be " that part of speech which 
 signifies to be, to do, or to suffer : " or, more correctly, " that 
 part of speech which predicates some action, passion, or 
 state of its subject : " as, amo 9 vulneror, sto. Its essential ser- 
 vice consists in affirmation, and by this property it is distin- 
 guished from every other part of speech. 
 
 To the verb belong, conjugation, voices, moods, tenses, 
 numbers, and persons. 
 
 OF THE DIFFERENT KINDS OF VERBS. 
 
 Verbs are either simple, as amo ; or compound, as redamo. 
 Primitive, as lego ; or derivative, as lectito. Regular, as arno 
 or irregular, as volo ; defective, as inquam ; or redundant, as 
 edo, I eat. Their termination is in o, as amo; in or, as amor; 
 or in m, as sum. 
 
 Verbs have been likewise divided into substantive, and ad- 
 jective. A substantive verb denotes the affirmation of being 
 or existence : as, sum, Jio 9 existo. 
 
 An adjective verb denotes existence, but with the addition 
 of some attribute or quality belonging to the subject: as, lego, 
 
 edurus ; subhorridus, subtristis, &c. Except preedarus, which has both a com- 
 parative and a superlative. But pr&stans, prcestabilis, &c. which come imme- 
 diately from verbs, admit comparison ; to which add prcesens, whose simple 
 noun is not in use, and prcefractus, -for, in which the signification of the simple 
 noun is changed. The compounds of per derived from verbs follow the 
 ame rule as those with pra : thus may be found perquisitior, pervagatior, per* 
 vagatissimus, perjurior, perjurissimus, from perquiro, pervagor, perjuro or pejero. 
 But when, for the sake of intension, per is prefixed to adjectives admitting 
 comparison, it is joined only to the positive ; as in percarus, perdiligens, per- 
 pulcher; nor are such words as percarior, -issimus, found. Vossius and Ursinus 
 however, contend that the superlative also admits per, from the supposed oc- 
 currence of perpaucissimus in Columella, R. R. iii. 20 ; of pertenuissimus, 
 Senec. N. Quaest. ii. 10; of peroptimus, Plaut. Mostell. iii. 1. 143; of perdif- 
 JpcilKmut, Liv. xl. 21 ; of perplurimum, Plin. ii. 54. But better editions have, 
 in these places, tenuisrima t optinw, per difficillimnm, plurimum. 
 
 F 
 
06 
 
 I read, or am reading. In regard to their having a person 
 as their subject, or not admitting one, they are divided into 
 personal, and impersonal. 
 
 Personal verbs are divided into active, passive, neuter 
 (and neuter passive), deponent, and common. 
 
 A verb active is that which affirms that the person or no- 
 minative before it is doing something : as, amo, loquor, cur- 
 ro 9 I love, I speak, I run. 
 
 A verb passive denotes that the person or nominative, is 
 suffering, or in the condition of being acted upon : as verbe- 
 ror, I am beaten. 
 
 A verb neuter denotes the state, posture, or quality of its no- 
 minative: as,palleo, Iampale;sM?o, I sit; gaudeo, I am glad. 
 
 The verb active may be considered as either transitive, or 
 intransitive. When the energy or action passes from the 
 agent to something else, the verb is transitive : as, amo^ I 
 love. Every active transitive verb is necessarily placed be- 
 tween two substantives, the agent or nominative, and the 
 object or accusative. Thus when w r e say, "Achilles slew," 
 our conception of the meaning is incomplete, till we supply 
 " Hector," or some other object on which the agent acts ; 
 which, in Latin, is always expressed in an oblique case ; as, 
 Achilles interfecit Hectorem. Sometimes a clause or sentence 
 supplies the place of this last: as Superbia Jecerat, Pride had 
 occasioned, What ? ut heec tiberta$ esset Itetior Liv. 
 
 When the energy does not pass from the agent to any 
 extrinsic object, the verb is intransitive : as, curro, I run. 
 This class contains verbs of loco-motion : as, co, redco, am- 
 bulOy &c. ; verbs of internal or involuntary motion: as, stillo 9 
 cado, cresco, &c. ; >verbs denoting certain employments : as, 
 bajulo, fceneror^ regno, &c. These are sometimes classed with 
 neuter verbs. It may be here observed, that some intran- 
 sitive verbs, which, as such, cannot have an accusative after 
 them, may be rendered transitive, and in this case have a pas- 
 sive voice, by means of a preposition prefixed to them, which 
 gives to the verb a direction of its energy. Thus some of the 
 compounds of eo : as, adeo (used passively chiefly in the 
 third persons), ambio, circwneo, coeo (used chiefly with so- 
 cietas\ ineo, obeo, prater eo, subeo, transeo. Some compounds 
 of venio : as, circumvenio, invenw, prcEvenio, and convenio 9 
 which last is generally intransitive, and used passively chiefly 
 in the perfect participle ; with some others *. 
 
 1 Some of those intransitive verbs which seem to be rendered transitive, by a 
 preposition, govern either an accusative, or the case of the preposition : as, Egres* 
 *usJines-~Sy.\]. & Cscs. EgrediveritalemmT\, Urbe, tectis egredi-*~Ci<:, & OY. 
 
67 
 
 A neuter-passive verb is partly active, and partly passive, 
 in termination ; and is passive or neuter in signification : as, 
 Jio,/actus sum, to be made: or neuter; as, audeo, ausus sum, 
 to dare ; gaudeo, gavisus sum, to rejoice ! . 
 
 A deponent verb has a passive termination, with an ac- 
 tive, or neuter signification : as, loquor, I speak ; morior, I 
 die. It is a verb active, or a verb neuter, in or. It is called 
 Deponent, from its having deposed or forsaken the active 
 form. 
 
 A common verb has a passive termination, with an active 
 and passive signification : as, criminor, I blame, or am blamed. 
 It is generally considered as deponent, excepting in the per- 
 fect participle, which, in some verbs, has either an active, or 
 a passive, signification. 
 
 Verbs receive different names, according to their various 
 natures or tendencies. 
 
 Frequentatives denote frequency of action, and are formed 
 from the supine of the primitive, by changing in the first 
 conjugation, atu into ito , and in the other conjugations, u 
 into o ; as clamito, dormito, pulso, from claino, dormio, pello? . 
 
 Inceptives denote an action begun, and going on, and are 
 formed from the second person singular of the primitive 
 verb : thus, caleo, cales, calcsco 3 * 
 
 1 Flo, with vapulo and veneo, words which, under an active termination, 
 have the signification and construction of passive verbs, are sometimes named 
 neuter-passives, and sometimes passive-neuters. To them have been added 
 exulo, nubo, and liceo ; but these do not, as the former three, admit after them 
 an ablative of the efficient cause with a or ab. Indeed, the real signification 
 of nubo may perhaps be considered as active ; and the other two seem to de- 
 note rather an accidental state, than actual suffering. 
 
 2 Frequentatives end in to, so, xo, and, when deponent, in or : as, damito, 
 jndso, ncxo, minltor. Nato, which comes from no, natu, is irregular in forma- 
 tion. Scitor, or, more frequently, sciscitor, comes from scio, scitu, or from 
 scisco. Pavito from paveo ; sector from scquor ; loquitor from loquor, are formed 
 as if the primitives had pavitu, sectu, loquitu. Qucerito, fundito, agito, and 
 
 Jluito, are formed from quceris, fundis, agis, and Jims, or, perhaps, from obso- 
 lete supines. Some seem to be formed by changing u into ito : thus, from 
 actu comes actito ; from heesu, hasito ; lectu, lectito ; scriptu, scriptito, &c. But 
 perhaps these may be formed from other frequentatives now obsolete ; indeed, 
 lecto and scripto are both in Horace. From frequentatives are formed others: 
 as, gero, gcsto, gestito ;jacio,jacto,jactito, &c. They are all of the first conju- 
 gation. 
 
 3 Inceptives are also derived from nouns, by changing the last vowel of 
 the genitive into Cisco or csco : as, pucrasco, ignesco, dulcesco, from puer, ignis t 
 dulcis. They are neuter, and of the third conjugation. Those which are 
 formed from nouns want the preterite and supine ; the others borrow them 
 from their primitives. 
 
 F2 
 
68 
 
 Desideratives or meditatives denote desire, or an attempt, 
 to do a thing, and are formed from the last supine of the 
 primitive, by adding rio : as, esurio, I desire to eat, from edo, 
 esu ; ccenaturio, I desire to sup, from cceno, ccenatu. 
 
 Diminutives generally end in Ho, and diminish the sig- 
 nification of the primitive: thus, cantillo, I sing a little, from 
 cano ; sorbillo, I sup a little, from sorbeo. 
 
 There are some verbs in sso, derived from other verbs, 
 whose precise import and signification are not ascertained 
 among grammarians : such as, capesso, facesso, petesso, a?*- 
 cesso, incesso, lacesso. Capesso and facesso are termed in- 
 choatives, or words importing the commencement of going ,- 
 thus, capesso, I am going to take ; facesso, I am going to 
 make ; to which some add viso, I am going to see. Ursinus 
 calls them, with greater propriety, intensives : thus, capesso 
 and facesso mean, I am taking, or doing, a thing in an ear- 
 nest or urgent manner ; thus also, petesso, I very much de- 
 sire. 
 
 Incesso and lacesso may be reckoned frequentatives. Ar- 
 cesso, incipisso, vibrisso, have nearly the same signification 
 as their primitives. 
 
 OF VOICES. 
 
 A voice is that accident of a verb, which denotes whether 
 an action or energy is confined to the agent or nominative : 
 as, cado, I fall ; or is exerted by the nominative upon an ex- 
 ternal object, as Amo virum, I love the man ; or is exerted 
 by an external object upon the nominative, as Vir amatur, 
 The man is loved. 
 
 As only active transitive verbs exert an energy on extrinsic 
 objects, and cause suffering, so these only admit a passive 
 voice. The voices are two, the active and passive ; the one 
 in o, as amo ; the other in or, as amor. 
 
 As an active verb denotes that the nominative to it is 
 doing something, and a passive verb, that it is suffering ; 
 hence, to distinguish whether an English verb is to be ren- 
 dered, in Latin, in the active or passive voice, nothing more 
 is necessary than to consider whether the nominative be 
 doing or suffering; Exa. John is building, Joannes <Edi- 
 faat. The wall is building, Murus adificatur. The English 
 is the same in both examples, but in the one, John is active; 
 in the other, the wall is passive. 
 
69 
 
 OF MOODS. 
 
 Action and states of being may be predicated, as either 
 certain or contingent, free or necessary, obligatory or op- 
 tional ; hence arises the accident or circumstance of verbs, 
 called a mood or mode. 
 
 There are four moods: the indicative, the subjunctive, 
 imperative and infinitive. 
 
 The indicative asserts, and interrogates; as Amo, I love; 
 Non amo, I love not; Dixit aliquid? Did he say any thing? 
 
 When the sense is purely indicative, and the second form 
 of the verb is subjoined to some conjunctive, adverbial, or 
 indefinite term, the mood is said to be subjunctive; as Eram 
 miser, cum amarem. When I was in love. In tantd pau- 
 pertate decessit, ut qui efferretur yix reliquerit Nep. that 
 he scarcely left. When the word expresses what is contin- 
 gent or hypothetical, having the same signification as debeo, 
 volo, possum, with an infinitive, and thus denoting duty, will, 
 ability, or liberty, the mood is, strictly speaking, potential. 
 When subjoined, it has been termed the subjunctive poten- 
 tial. When it denotes a wish, the mood is said to be opta- 
 tive. It may be remarked, however, that when the second 
 form of the verb is used potentially or optatively, the ex- 
 pression is, probably, elliptical; and that; the periphrasis 
 with possum, volo, licet, &c., is employed, and not this form 
 of the verb, when the proposition is absolute and indepen- 
 dent, or where the power, liberty, will, or duty, is to be em- 
 phatically expressed ! . 
 
 The imperative commands, entreats, or permits. 
 
 The infinitive expresses the mere energy of the verb, rnd 
 has neither number, person, nor nominative before it ; but 
 approaches nearly to the signification of a verbal noun. 
 
 OF TENSES. 
 
 As all verbs have their essence in motion or in rest, and 
 as motion and the privation of it imply time, so verbs come 
 to denote time. And hence the origin and use of tenses, 
 which are so many different forms assigned to every verb, 
 to show the various times in which the attribute expressed 
 by that verb may exist. 
 
 The tenses are five : the present, preterimperfect, preter- 
 perfect or preterite, preterpluperfect, and future. 
 
 1 For an able and elaborate explanation of the nature and use of the subjunc- 
 tive and the potential mood, see Crombie's Gymnasium, 2nd ed. vol. ii p. 320. 
 
70 
 
 OF NUMBERS AND PERSONS. 
 
 A personal verb admits a person or a thing as its subject 
 or nominative. As one or more persons may speak, be 
 spoken to, or spoken of, there are two numbers ; the singu- 
 lar, which speaks of one, and the plural, which speaks of 
 more than one; and three persons in each number. Ego, 
 tu, ille or ilia, are the first, second and third persons singu- 
 lar ; nos, vos, illi or lllce^ the first, second and third persons 
 plural ; and to each of these the verb has appropriate varia- 
 tions in its termination: thus, Ego amo 9 I love; Tu amas, 
 Thou lovest, &c. Two or more persons may become the 
 subject ; but, as the first person is preferred to the second, 
 and the second to the third, ego joined to tu or ille is equi- 
 valent to 7ios ; tu joined to ille or illi, to vos. 
 
 All nouns in the singular, belong to the third person sin- 
 gular ; those that are plural, to the third person plural. 
 
 Pronouns, participles or adjectives, having nouns under- 
 stood to them, belong to the third person, 
 
 Qui takes the person of the antecedent. 
 
 Ipse may be joined, according to the sense, to any person. 
 
 OF PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS, AND SUPINES. 
 
 To verbs belong participles, gerunds, and supines. 
 
 A participle is a part of speech derived from a verb, par- 
 taking of the nature of the verb, and of an adjective; of the 
 latter, as agreeing with a noun ; of the former, as being di- 
 stinguished into different times, and governing the same 
 case as the verb, but differing from it in this, that the parti- 
 ciple implies no affirmation. 
 
 Gerunds are so called because they signify the thing as it 
 were in gerendo (antiently written gerundo], and, along with 
 the action, convey an idea of the agent. 
 
 A gerund is a participial noun, of the neuter gender, and 
 singular number, declinable like a substantive, having no 
 vocative, construed like a substantive, and governing the 
 case of its verb. 
 
 A supine is a verbal substantive, of the singular number, 
 and fourth declension, having the same signification as the 
 verb. There are two; one in urn, called the first supine, 
 which governs the case of the verb, and is supposed to be 
 an accusative; another in u, called the second supine, sup- 
 posed to be an ablative, governing no case, and generally 
 having a passive signification. 
 
71 
 
 There are four participles ; one ending in am or ens, and 
 another in rus, both generally active ; one ending in dus, 
 always passive ; and another ending in tus, sus, or xus (and 
 one participle in uus, mortuus\ generally passive, but some- 
 times active, or common, according to the nature of the 
 verb. 
 
 Active verbs have two participles : the present ending in 
 72S, as amans ; the other in rtts, as amaturus. 
 
 Verbs passive have two : one ending in tus, sus, or xus> 
 as amatus, visus, ftexus ; the other in dus, as amandus. 
 
 Neuter verbs have two participles : as sedens, sessurus. 
 
 Active intransitive verbs have frequently three: as carens y 
 cariturus, carendm ; and sometimes four, as jurans, juratu- 
 rus, juratus, jurandus. 
 
 Neuter-passive verbs have generally three : as gaudens, 
 gavisus, gavisurus; audens^ ausus, ausurus from gaudeo and 
 audeo. Audendus is found in Livy. Fido has orityjfdens 
 and Jisus ; soleo, solens and solitus. Fio, though ranked 
 among these, is a passive verb, and has four participles *. 
 
 Deponent verbs of an active signification have generally 
 four participles; as secptens, secutums, secutus, sequendus, 
 from scquor. 
 
 Those of a neuter signification have generally but three ; 
 as labensy lapsus^ lapsurus, from labor. But fruendus, fun- 
 gendus 9 gloriandus, medendus, potiundus, vescendus, utendus y 
 ai'e found; the reason of which is, that their verbs originally 
 governed an accusative, or were considered as active. 
 
 Common verbs have generally four participles : as dtg- 
 ?ia?is, dignaturus, dignatus^ dignandus^ from dignor. Their 
 perfect participle sometimes signifies actively, and sometimes 
 passively : as, Adeptus victoriam^ Having obtained the vic- 
 tory, or Victoria adepta^ The victory being obtained. 
 
 All participles are adjectives ; those ending in ns of the 
 third declension ; the rest, of the first and second. 
 
 Gerunds and supines come from active, neuter, and de- 
 ponent verbs : as, docendum, currenditm, loquendwti ; lectum^ 
 lectu ; cubitum, cubitu , deprecatum, deprecatu from doceo, 
 lego, cubo 9 deprecor. 
 
 ^ ' Diomcdes mentions _ficns as the present participle of Jlo. Fio is now con- 
 sidered as the passive voice offacio, which has two active and two passive par- 
 ticiples, , faciens, facturus, factus, faciendus, the two last being formed from 
 the antient factor. 
 
72 
 OF THE USE AND SIGNIFICATION OF THE TENSES. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. Amo. 
 
 1. The present tense denotes that an action is going on : 
 as, cedificat) he builds ; domus (Edificatur^ the house is build- 
 ing. Historians and poets sometimes describe past actions, 
 in this tense, in order to give animation to their discourse, 
 by bringing them, as it were, under immediate observation. 
 Thus Livy ; Ad. equites dictator advolat obtestans ut ex equis 
 descendant, Dicto paruere> desiliunt ex equis, provolant in 
 primum, et pro antesignanis parmas objiciunt. The dictator 
 flies forward to the cavalry, beseeching them to dismount 
 from their horses. They obeyed; they dismount, fly forward 
 to the front, &c. It may be observed that both present and 
 past tenses are used together; as paruere in the last sentence. 
 
 2. Any general custom, if still existing, may be expressed 
 in this tense: thus, Apud Parthos signum datur tympano, et 
 non tuba Justin. Among the Parthians the signal is given 
 by the drum, and not by the trumpet. 
 
 3. Those truths which are at all times true, are generally 
 expressed in this tense: as, Ad pcenitendum properat, citb 
 quijudicat. He hastens to repent, &c. 
 
 4. In Latin, as in English, this tense may express futu- 
 rity : as, Qudm mox navigo Ephesum -Plaut. As soon as I 
 sail, or shall sail, &c. 
 
 Preterimperfect tense. Amabam. 
 
 1. The preterimperfect expresses an action as passing, 
 some tune ago, but not yet finished ; as <zdificabat> he was 
 building ; domus (zdificabatur, the house was building. Ibam 
 
 forte via sacra Hor. I was going accidentally, &c. Irrue- 
 rant Danai, et tcctum omne tenebant. And were, at a cer- 
 tain time referred to, in possession of the house. 
 
 2. It likewise denotes what is usual or customary : as, le- 
 gebat, aiebat, he was wont to read, he was wont to say. In 
 agmine nonnunquam equo, scepius pedibus anteibat Suet He 
 was wont to go, or in the habit of going ; or, as it is some- 
 times expressed in familiar language, he would go before, 
 &c. 
 
 3. It is sometimes used instead of the imperfect subjunc- 
 tive : as, Anceps certamcn erat, ni cquitcs supervehtsscnt, The 
 battle had been, or would have been, esset. 
 
73 
 
 Preterperfect tense. Amavi. 
 
 1. When we mean to say that an action was completed 
 in past time without particular reference to the present, a 
 circumstance which is expressed in English by a perfect ge- 
 nerally ending in ed ; or that an action was finished in any 
 portion of a space of past time which is bounded by the 
 present, and not supposed or considered to be interrupted 
 by any intervening circumstance, which is expressed in En- 
 glish by have and the perfect participle, we use the preter- 
 perfect tense: as, amavtt, he loved, or has loved. Ora- 
 tionem hujuscemodi habuit Sail. He made a speech, &c. 
 
 Turn freta diffudit, rapidisque tumescere ventis 
 Jussit, et ambitce circumdare litora terrte Ov. 
 Then he poured out and ordered, &c. Themistocles ad te 
 veni. I Themistocles have come to you. Hujus ad memo- 
 riam nostrum monumenta manserunt duo Nep. Have re- 
 mained, &c. 
 
 The indefinite time of this tense is sometimes coupled 
 with the passing time of the imperfect : as, Conticuere om- 
 nes 9 intentique ora tenebant Virg. All preserved silence, 
 and were keeping &c. Themistocles units restitit ; et uni- 
 verses pares esse aiebat; disperses testabatur perituros Nep. 
 Although the action implied in both perfects may have existed 
 prior to that which is contained in the imperfects, (which 
 tense may be used to show that the action was continued 
 and progressive,) yet it appears, that afterwards^ notwith- 
 standing the diversity of tenses, the progression of the ac- 
 tion of both is contemporary. 
 
 2. This tense is sometimes used, like the present, to ex- 
 press an action of that kind which may be mentioned in any 
 time : as, Neque ille aut doluit miserans mopem, aut invidit 
 habenti ; in which the feelings resulting from the principles 
 of a Stoic, at all times the same, are here expressed by Virgil, 
 in past time. 
 
 3. It is sometimes used instead of the pluperfect indica- 
 tive: as, 
 
 Qua postquam evolvit, cascoque exemit acervo^ 
 Dissociata locis concordipace ligavit Ov. 
 Which after he sorted (had sorted) and took (had taken) 
 from the confused mass, &c. 
 
 4?. It is poetically used instead of the imperfect, or plu- 
 perfect subjunctive : as, Nee veni nisi fata locum sedemque 
 dedisscnt Virg, Neither would I have come, venissem. 
 5. In verbs in 0r, this tense is double: as, amatus swn 9 vcl 
 
fuL It has been generally supposed that the former of these 
 two expressions is used when we mention an action past, 
 without any regard to the precise time : as, Domus est cedifi- 
 cata, The house was built ; and that sometimes it expresses 
 time just past, and consequently bounded by the present: 
 and that Domus cedificata fuit implies that the house was 
 built, that is, was finished at some remote period of time ; 
 but many instances can be produced of the promiscuous use 
 of these two forms ! . Thus, Filius huic Jato diwim prolesque 
 virilis nutta fuit> primaque oriens erepta juventd est .ZEn. 
 Was snatched away, &c. Occisus est 45 imperil anno 
 Eutr. He was slain. In quibus es venata montibus Ov. 
 Have you been hunting. Tune es qusesita per omnes, nata, 
 mihi terras Ov. Have you not been sought for, &c. As- 
 suetus studiis mollibus ipse fui Id. I have been accustomed, 
 &c. Janua sed nullo tempore aperta fuit Ov. Has been. 
 Neque vero non fuit apertum Nep. Was it evident, &c. 
 But some of these may be considered as adjectives. 
 
 In some verbs the distinction seems to be maintained. 
 
 Linacer says that pransus sum denotes an action imme- 
 diately past ; pransus fui, an action past at some distance 
 of time. And Cicero uses the expression, Qui in patria 
 Junditus delenda occupati et sunt, et fuerunt. Who are em- 
 ployed, or have been employed (up to the present time), 
 
 1 The promiscuous interchange of several tenses which appear to be differ- 
 ent in their nature and conformation, may have arisen from a variety of causes. 
 
 1. From the impossibility of fixing a standard, by a reference to which the 
 different kinds and minute gradations of time might be ascertained. All kinds 
 of time are relative, and to be ascertained by some fixed boundary. The present 
 time has been adopted as this boundary, that which is on one side being called 
 past time, and that wjiich is on the other, future time. But it happens, that, 
 as time cannot be arrested, this boundary itself is every moment shifting, and 
 what was future the last moment, is present this moment, and is, at the com- 
 mencement of the next, added to the past; the fact being that present time, 
 (although we speak of the present moment,) like a mathematical point, can 
 have its momentary existence in idea only. 
 
 2. In relating past events it sometimes happens, that this portion of time 
 which we denominate present, and by which other times are to be ascertained, 
 is supposed fixed at different periods. We sometimes relate past actions, as if, 
 while we are speaking, we were transferred back, and were present during the 
 time of their being carried on ; or, which is nearly the same, we bring them 
 forward, and relate them in present time, as if they were happening during 
 the time of recital. 
 
 3. When the sense has not been rendered ambiguous by the use of one 
 tense instead of another, they may have been used promiscuously ; but this 
 does not prove the identity of their significations. 
 
 4. An inaccuracy in ascertaining the real import of some Latin tenses may 
 have arisen from the ambiguous, or various ways, in which we express the 
 import of certain tenses, in our own language. Thus, amor is expressed by 
 I am loving, I am a-loving, I am in-loving (all understood passively, in tbe 
 same way as, when we say, He is training, or in -training, we mean that the 
 person is under a certain regimen), I am in the stale of being loved, and, 
 usually, I am loved, &c. Amctiar has been expressed, as the former, I waa 
 
75 
 
 and who were employed (at some remote time past). It has 
 been remarked that sum and eram with the perfect participle 
 are commonly used to constitute the perfect and pluperfect, 
 passive ; Jut and Jucrajn, very seldom. 
 
 The Preterpluperfect tense. Amaveram. 
 
 1. When we mean to say that an action was completed, 
 before some other action took place, which also is past, we 
 use the preterpluperfect tense: as, ffdificaverat) he had built. 
 Before the succours arrived, he had conquered the enemy 
 
 hostes superaverat. 
 
 2. It is sometimes used among poets, and prose writers 
 too, for the perfect indicative, and pluperfect subjunctive : 
 as, Dixeram a principle, ut de republicd silerctur Cic. I 
 have said, &c. Si mens non Iceva fuisset, impulerat, &c. 
 JEn. He would have impelled, impulisset, or, according to 
 the same idiom in English, had impelled, &c. 
 
 3. In verbs in or this tense is double : as, amatus eram, vel 
 Jueram, the former denoting that I was loved at some time 
 
 past ; the latter, that I had been loved before some time past. 
 But like the compound perfect, both forms (of which the 
 first is the more common) are used promiscuously, accord- 
 ing to the common signification of the pluperfect. 
 
 4. In some instances the participle seems to be considered 
 as little different from an adjective, and then eram is trans- 
 loving, I was in-loving, I was being loved, I was in the state, or custom, of 
 being loved, I was loved, &c. Now, it is evident that, in such expressions as 
 I am loved, the house is built, he was loved, loved and built refer to an action 
 completed, and are inapplicable to an action incomplete and progressive, such 
 as must be predicated in that tense which expresses action going on, and not 
 finished ; for, in amor, the suffering is unfinished, progressive and present, 
 and not perhaps to be clearly expressed in English by the perfect participle, 
 without circumlocution. Amabar likewise denotes an action that was passing ; 
 but in / was loved, as in / am loved, the suffering is finished, the one in past 
 time indefinitely, and the other in past time connected with present time. The 
 progression of action can be indicated only by the participle in ing : as, The 
 house is building, Domus ecdificatur. But as this participle has both an active 
 and a passive signification, its use in this way often becomes ambiguous, and 
 the meaning is then to be discovered by an examination of the context. In- 
 deed, if we say The man is teaching, is murdering, or is esteeming, we are in- 
 variably inclined to consider the man as acting, not acted upon ; for whether 
 it arises from habit, or from something in the nature of this participle, it is dif- 
 ficult to be reconciled to the use of it in a passive sense, when the subject is a 
 person ; and, as has been already observed, if we use loved, esteemed, we do not 
 mark progression exclusively. But, when the historian is relating past actions, 
 in present time, he uses with great propriety the perfect participle : thus, In 
 quo facto domum revocatur, accusatus capitis absolvitur ; multatur tamen pe~ 
 cunil, $-c. Nep. He is recalled home, he is acquitted, fined, &c. For 
 some further remarks on this subject, see Grant's English Grammar, pp. 57, 
 64, 65, 85, 86. It would, there, appear, that the perfect participles of verbs 
 
 ing imply progression, or do not necessarily indicate cessation. 
 
76 
 
 lated was : as, Neque id tarn Artaxerxi, quam c&teris erat 
 apertum Nep. Neither was that evident, &c. Fimtusque 
 norxEJam labor artis erat Ov. And the labour of the new 
 art was now finished. Primd luce ex superioribus locis, qiue 
 C&saris castris erant conjuncta, cernebatur equitatus Cass. 
 Which were next to, or adjoining to. 
 
 The Future tense. Amabo. 
 
 1. This tense is used when we mean to express that an 
 action will be going on, some time hence, but not finished : 
 sha 
 
 as Ccenaboy I shall sup, or be supping; Domus cs 
 The house will be building. 
 
 2. In Latin, as in English, the second person of this 
 tense is used imperatively; as in the divine precepts, Non De- 
 cides, non furaberis, &c. Thou shalt not kill, steal, &c. It 
 is used by profane writers likewise : as, Tu kcec silebis ; Cice- 
 ronem puerum curabis, et amabis Cic. You will keep these 
 things secret ; you will take care, &c. 
 
 The tense, as used in this last sentence, seems half impe- 
 rative, and half future; the former, as conveying, very faintly 
 and delicately, a desire that the things may be done ; and 
 the latter, as intimating the idea or belief that they will be 
 done. 
 
 ADDITIONAL REMARKS ON THE TENSES, AND ON THE IDIOM 
 OF CERTAIN ENGLISH TENSES. 
 
 The present, the imperfect, and the future tenses, are 
 used when we mean to express that an action is, was, or 
 will be, going on. The perfect, pluperfect, and perfect fu- 
 ture (sometimes called the second future, and sometimes, 
 though improperly, the future subjunctive, under which title 
 it will be hereafter explained) are used when we mean to ex- 
 press the perfection of an action. 
 
 According to the idiom of the English language, it some- 
 times happens that those actions which, in English, are pre- 
 dicated ip the three latter tenses are expressed, in Latin, by 
 the three former : thus, when we mention that an action has 
 existed for some time, and. is still continuing, we use, in En- 
 glish, the perfect ; but in Latin, the present. And if, in En- 
 glish, the pluperfect has been used, in Latin the imperfect 
 is used. Thus, I have been, and still am, is expressed in 
 Latin by the present. I had been, and, at a particular time, 
 was, is expressed by the imperfect '. Exa. Plus jam sum 
 
 1 It is not improbable that this peculiarity in the English tenses arises from 
 the nature of the auxiliaries. For, although haw joined to been, or to any 
 perfect participle, constitute:- a past tciibc, have is the present tense of a verb, 
 
77, 
 
 libera quinquennium Plaut. I have been free more than 
 five years. Una cum gente tot annas bella gero j5n. I 
 have been waging war (and now am), &c. Audiebat jam- 
 dudum verba querentis Liber Ov. Had heard, or been 
 hearing, and, at a certain past time, was hearing. Te annum 
 jam audientem Cratippum Cic. You who have been at- 
 tending to (and are still attending to) Cratippus. Huic le- 
 gioni et Casar indukerat prtzcipue, et propter virtutem con- 
 fidebat maxime Caes. He not only may have had great 
 confidence in it, but still did confide in it. The tokens of 
 esteem and kindness which he might have shown, had oc- 
 curred some time ago. They were transient and occasional; 
 but his confidence was still existing, and was permanent and 
 habitual. 
 
 A similar analogy exists in regard to the future ; for that 
 action which, in English, is expressed in the perfect future, 
 is expressed, in Latin, by the future : as, Tomorrow we shall 
 have been three months in town. Cras erimus tres menses 
 in urbe. 
 
 To the foregoing observations there are very few excep- 
 tions. 
 
 OF WHAT HAS BEEN TERMED THE FALSE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 In Latin, some indefinite words and adverbial conjunc- 
 
 and denotes present possession. In the same manner, had, which, with a per- 
 fect participle, constitutes the pluperfect, is, in itself, the perfect of the verb 
 have, and denotes merely past possession : thus, I have been free more than 
 five years, means I now possess the action expressed by been-free, i. e. the ac- 
 tion, or rather the condition, of liberty, the existence of which is perfected. I 
 had been free more than five years, when a certain event happened, means I 
 possessed, as in the former example, the perfected existence of more than five 
 years' liberty, and at a time too identical with that of the other event Erara 
 liber. Tomorrow I shall have been five years free, means I shall possess the 
 perfected existence of five years' liberty Ero liber. 
 
 The idiom of the German is the same as that of the English, in which have 
 and had, and, in some verbs, am and were, with the participle, constitute the 
 perfect and pluperfect, as our have and had. Thus, How long have you been 
 in London ? Wie langt sind sie zu London gewesen ? How long had you been 
 in London, when Wie lunge waren sie zu London gewesen, da 
 
 The idiom of the Greek is the same as that of the Latin : thus, n^i *A^^ 
 ytviirfai, \yu lipi, John viii. 58, translated, according to the Greek idiom, Be- 
 fore Abraham was, I am ; but expressed according to the English idiom, it 
 should be, Before Abraham was [born], I have been, or I have existed. 
 
 The modern languages, derived from the Latin, follow, I believe, the Latin 
 idiom. Of the Spanish and the French, I can speak with a little certainty. 
 Thus, How long have you been employed in this business? is expressed in 
 Spanish by, Quanta tiempo ha que esta Vm. empleado en este asunto ? In French 
 by, Combicn y a-t-il que rous etes employe dans c.ette affaire ? How long had 
 
 you been employed in this business, when ? In Spanish, Quanta tiempo 
 
 habia que estaba Vm. empleado en este asunto, quando ? In French, Com- 
 
 bien y avoit-il que vans etiez employe dans cette affaire, quand < ? 
 
78 
 
 tions may govern the subjunctive, when the sense is uncon- 
 ditionally assertive, or indicative. Certain conjunctions also 
 require the subjunctive mood after them, independently of 
 the sense. In English, conjunctions, as has been remarked 
 by Dr. Crombie in his learned and ingenious treatise on the 
 Etymology and Syntax of the English Language, govern 
 no mood, the sense alone determining the mood that should 
 follow them. Hence it happens, that, in Latin, certain in- 
 definite words and adverbial conjunctions l may, and certain 
 conjunctions must, govern the subjunctive, when, in the 
 English, the use of the subjunctive would, according to the 
 nature of the language, be inconsistent with, or not clearly 
 expressive of, the meaning intended to be conveyed ; and 
 from these circumstances, arising from contrasting the dif- 
 ferent ways of using the same mood in the two languages, 
 has originated what has been improperly named, in Latin, 
 the false subjunctive. 
 
 The following are examples : Rogas me quid tristis ego 
 sim. Ter. Why I am sad. Quam dulcis sit libertas., bre- 
 
 viter proloquarPhdzdr. how sweet liberty is. Quum 
 
 C&sar Jicec animadvertisset. Had observed. Adeo benevolus 
 eraty ut omnes amarent. That all men loved him. In all 
 these examples the verb is really subjunctive. In many in- 
 stances the meaning may be sufficiently obvious, whichever 
 mood may be used in English: thus, Vehementer eos incusat; 
 primum quod, aut quam in partem^ aut quo consilio duceren- 
 tur, sibi quccrcndum, aut cogitandum, putarent Caes. Into 
 what part, or with what design, they were, or might be, con- 
 ducting (being conducted). 
 
 POTENTIAL AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present tense. Amem. 
 
 The present tense expresses contingency going on either 
 in present or future time. It has generally the signs may, 
 
 1 It appears to me that, strictly speaking, the real government of conjunc- 
 tions is seen only in what is termed the false subjunctive. In such expressions 
 as, Lego ut discam, Oro ut redeat, it is evident, that, independently of the con- 
 junction, the sense requires the potential mood. Not so, in such expressions 
 as, Adeo benevolus erat ut omnes amarent, That all men loved him ; for here the 
 sense is purely assertive, or indicative, and yet the conjunction ut, by its own 
 power, causes the verb to be put in the subjunctive; and indeed, although, in 
 speaking of these two moods, their names are generally used indifferently, 
 their terminations being the same, this seems the real character of the subjunc- 
 tive, its proper English being indicative :thus we say in the present also, Tarn 
 dives es ut nescias, You are so rich that you know not not that you cannot , or 
 may not, know. 
 
79 
 
 might, could, can> Would, should : and in many instances is 
 equivalent to the verbs debeo, possum or licet, and volo, with 
 an infinitive, either in interrogative, or declarative sentences. 
 Mediocribus, et quis ignoscas vitiis teneor Hor. Which 
 you may excuse. Quam sanctc jurabat, ut quivis facile pos- 
 sit credere Ter. Might ! believe ; not may. Or at a Ccc&are 
 ut det sibi veniam Caes. He begs of Caesar that he would 
 give him leave. 
 
 Debeo implied. 
 
 Quid me ostentem ? Cic. Why should I boast ? 
 Possum. 
 
 Plures reperias ad discendum promptos. You may find 
 many ready, &c. Tamen ea faciatis e quibus appareat vo- 
 luptatem vos, non officium, sequi. By which it may appear 
 that ye pursue pleasure, &c. Non habcs quid arguas Cic. 
 You have nothing which you can blame. 
 
 This tense has this meaning, when the clause of the po- 
 tential signifies end, or purpose, with ut, quo, ne : as, Lego 
 ut discani, I read that I may learn. 
 
 Volo. 
 
 Quod si liccc urbs vocem emittat, non hoc pacto loquatur ? 
 Would it not speak ? 
 
 This tense may be used, 
 
 1st. -When the clause of the relative is the predicate : as, 
 Erunt qui audaciam ejus reprehendant Cic. There will 
 be persons who will censure (or blame) his boldness. Here 
 the verb is subjunctive. 
 
 2dly. When the clause denotes the end or effect of some 
 former verb : as, Nunquam efficies ut judicem. You will 
 never cause me to judge. 
 
 Sdly. When the clause is indefinite : as, Ncscio ubi sit. I 
 know not where he is. 
 
 1 May denotes present liberty ; might and might have, past liberty. Can 
 denotes present ability ; could and could have, past ability. Would and should^ 
 the preterites of will and shall, denote, the one, past volition, and the other 
 past obligation. But might, could, would, and should, though preterites, are 
 used to denote present time likewise ; but in this case congruity in the tenses 
 must be observed. Thus I may say "I may go if I choose," or, " I might 
 go if I chose." In the former, the liberty and inclination are each expressed 
 as present. In the latter, although liberty and inclination be expressed in the 
 preterite, present time is implied. Thus also in Latin, the imperfect potential 
 expresses present time : as, Irem si vellem, I might go if I chose. The de- 
 pending action, which, in English, is expressed by an Infinitive, is future, or 
 subsequent to the time expressed by the auxiliary; hence it is, that the poten- 
 tial mood implies, in regard to execution, futurity. The modal time, however, 
 depends upon the leading words which are implied in the signification. 
 
80 
 
 4thly. When the clause signifies a probable consequence 
 of a conditional or contingent event : as, Nam si altera ilia 
 magis wstabif, forsitan nos rejiciat Ter. He perhaps will 
 (may) reject us. 
 
 5thly. It is used elegantly after fore or futurum esse, and 
 
 when the following verb wants the future participle: as, Con- 
 
 Jido fore ut utamur olio genere literarum. I trust that we 
 
 shall use another kind, &c. In spem veniebat, fore, uti per- 
 
 tinacid desisteret Caes. That he would desist. 
 
 6thly. It is generally used in interrogative sentences, when 
 in English we employ shall, a sign of the future tense. Thus 
 eamne ? Shall I go ? Quid si non veniet, maneamne usque 
 ad vesperum ? Ter. Shall I remain ? The reason of this 
 usage seems to be that shall, originally equivalent to / owe 
 or / ought, is implied in this tense. Thus, Quid faciam ? i. e. 
 Qiiid facere debeo ? What shall I do ? or, what ought I to 
 do ? Non earn ? Nonne ire debeo ? Should I not go ? Ought 
 I not to go ? 
 
 When the present potential implies volo, the will is ge- 
 nerally signified as present, and the execution as future; and, 
 therefore, the thing may be expressed in the present poten- 
 tial, or in the future indicative. 
 
 in regard to such examples as Rogo ut facias, I request 
 that you will do it, it may be observed, that, although the 
 execution of the request must be future in regard to the re- 
 quest itself, yet as the one may be supposed immediately to 
 follow the other, so as in the mind of the speaker to be al- 
 most contemporary events, the Latins expressed it in the 
 present tense. 
 
 Preterimperfect tense. Amarem. 
 
 The imperfect is used to signify a contingent passing event, 
 either in past, present, or in future time. Si fata fuissent, 
 ut caderem, meruisse manu Virg. If it had been my fate 
 that I should fall. Utinam jam adesset Cic. I wish he 
 were now present. Si possem, sanior essem Ov. If I could, 
 I would be wiser. Adolescenti ipsi eriperem oculos : post hcec 
 prtsdpitem darem Ter. I would tear out the eyes of the 
 young man himself, and afterwards would throw him down 
 headlong. 
 
 It likewise seems in some instances to imply possum, volo, 
 and debeo. . 
 
 Possum. 
 
 Putares nunquam accidere posse, ut verba mihi deessent 
 Cic. You might think. 
 
81 
 
 Volo. 
 
 istuc facerem ? Would I do that ? 
 De.beo. 
 
 Non venirem ? Should I not come ? 
 
 The use of this tense, as well as of the present, depends 
 upon the tense of the preceding verb. 
 
 If the clause depend upon a verb implying past time, or 
 upon a future infinitive governed by a verb of past time, 
 this tense is used : as, Rogavi ut faceres, I requested you to 
 do it. In spe?n veniebat fore ut desisteret, He was in hopes 
 he would desist. The sense will point out the exceptions ; 
 as, Mortuus est ut nos vivamus, He died that we may live. 
 When the sense of the leading verb is present-perfect, the 
 present subjunctive sometimes follows : as, Ea ne (ut non) 
 me celet, consuefeciJiUum Ter. I have accustomed. If the 
 preceding verb be present or future, the present of the sub- 
 junctive must be used; as, Moneo ut caveas, I advise you to 
 take care. Legam ut discam, I will read that I may learn. 
 Confido fore ut utamur, I trust we shall use. But these rules 
 are sometimes infringed ; as, Dumnorigi, ut idem conaretur, 
 persuadet Cses. Non puto te expectare quibus verbis eum 
 commendarem Cic. Yet on another occasion he says, Nihil 
 jam opus est te expectare quibus verbis eum commendem. 
 Subjunctively, Quo factum est, ut brevi tempore illustraretur 
 Nep. became famous. 
 
 Preterperfect tense. Amaverim. 
 
 This tense denotes a contingent action which may be al- 
 ready past, or which will be past at some future time 1 . The 
 common signs are may, might, would, or should, have. 
 
 Errarim fortasse Plin. Perhaps I might be in an error. 
 Injussu tuo, imperator, extra ordinem nunquam pugnaverim, 
 non si certam victoriam videam Liv. I never would fight. 
 
 1 The author of the article, Grammar, in the Encyclop. Brit, seems to deny 
 this tense the power of expressing past contingency, which indeed he thinks 
 cannot exist. In adducing this opinion, he a] -pears to me to confound two 
 things perfectly distinct, viz., objective, and subjective contingency. That 
 there can be no objective contingency in a past action, is sufficiently obvious. 
 What is past, is certain, and, therefore, cannot be contingent. A past action, 
 however, may be considered as an object of subjective uncertainty, or contin- 
 gency. Thus I may say, " Perhaps I may have written such words, but, if I 
 hare, I have no recollection of it." Forsan ita scripserim. It is, doubtless, 
 true that I must either have written, or not have written, and, therefore, th 
 affirmative, or the negative, is objectively certain. But, subjectively, it is not 
 so ; it is to me as uncertain as any contingent future event. This distinction 
 is familiar to every logician. See Watts's Logic, part 2, chap. 2. Crombie 
 on Necessity, p. 127. 
 
 G 
 
Quis hunc vere dixerit divitem ? Who would truly call him 
 rich ? Videor sperare posse, si te viderim, et ea qu& premant, 
 et ea qua impendeant mihi, facile transiturum Cic. If I 
 can see you, or When I shall be able to see you. It is not 
 commonly used to express past contingency ; for, as John- 
 son observes, Videris, si officer is, would not be used for, You 
 might have seen it, had you been there ; but Vidisses si qf- 
 Juisses. 
 
 This tense is often used by writers when they declare 
 their own opinion : as, De Menandro loquor, nee tamen ex- 
 cluserim alias Quint. Nor do I (would I) exclude others. 
 
 In verbs in or, this tense is double, amatus sim \elftieiim, 
 as in the indicative mood. 
 
 It is sometimes used in concessions : as, Parta sit pecunia 
 Cic. Suppose the money were gotten. Or as an impera- 
 tive, as will be hereafter mentioned. 
 
 Preterpluperfect tense. Amavissem. 
 
 This tense is used to express a contingent event, to be 
 completed in time past ; which contingency is generally fu- 
 ture as to some past time mentioned in the context. The usual 
 signs are ; had, might have, would have, could have, should 
 have, or ought to have. Si jussisset, paruissem. If he had 
 commanded, I would have obeyed. Mortem pugnans oppe- 
 tisses, Thou shouldest have met death, righting ; or oughtest 
 to have met. Boni vicissent, The good might have con- 
 quered. Quid tibi cum pelago ? terra contenta fuisses Ov. 
 You might have been content, Verum ancepsfuerat pugnce 
 fortuna ; fiiisset -Virg. It might have been so ; suppose 
 that it had been so. 
 
 It must often ye expressed, in English, like the imperfect 
 subjunctive. Mtilta pollicens, si conservasset Nep. Pro- 
 mising many things, if he would preserve him. Responde- 
 runt sefacturos esse, cum ille vento Aquilone Lemnum venis- 
 S et Nep. They answered, that they w r ould do it, when he 
 should come &c. Si se consulem fecissent, brevi tempore 
 Jugurtham in potestatem P. R. redacturum, If they would 
 make him consul, that he would soon reduce &c. Dixerunt 
 sefacturos esse qiKecunque imperasset, They said, they w r ould 
 do whatever he should command. 
 
 In such examples, when, at a certain past time referred 
 to, a thing is represented as future, and yet to be completed 
 before another thing which is also represented 'at that time 
 as future, took place, this tense is used. The past time re- 
 ferred to is expressed by dixerunt, they said. When they 
 snid so, tkeir doing what he should command, and also the 
 
03 
 
 command itself, were future. But as the command must 
 have been given before they could execute it, the verb im- 
 pe-ro is rendered pluperfect, and facto is put in the future of 
 the infinitive. They said that they would do it then, when 
 he should have commanded it. 
 
 Subjimctively, Quum Caesar kac animadvertisset Caes. 
 had observed. Accusatus proditionis, quod a pugnd deces- 
 sisset Nep. had come off. 
 
 Johnson observes that this tense is commutable with the 
 imperfect : as, Hem praecliceres or praxlixisses. At tu dictis, 
 Albane, maneres or mansisses *. 
 
 In verbs in or, this tense has three forms : as, amatus 
 essem, fuissem, or for em. Et felicissima matrum dicta foret 
 Niobe, si non sibi visa esset Ov. Might have been called, 
 had she not seemed. 
 
 Future tense. Amaverp. 
 
 This tense is improperly named the future subjunctive ; 
 for it is a tense of the indicative, and seems to have the same 
 relation to the future of the indicative, as the perfect definite 
 has to the present ; on which account it has been named, 
 with more propriety, the perfect future. 
 
 When we mean to express that an action will be finished 
 before another action, which is also future, take place, we 
 use this tense. The usual sign is shall have, but it is often 
 omitted. Quum eo stultitia pervenero, de me actum erit 9 
 When I arrive (shall arrive, have arrived, shall have arrived) 
 at that pitch of folly, I shall be undone. Cum ccenavero, 
 proficiscar, When I sup (have supped, shall have supped) 
 I will go. 
 
 From these examples, it may be seen that this tense is 
 not very different from the perfect subjunctive ; and that, in 
 many instances, it is immaterial to the signification, whether 
 the action be expressed as absolutely future perfect or con- 
 tingently future perfect. 
 
 Mr. R. Johnson, in opposition to Vossius, contends that 
 we may use this tense, in speaking of a thing future, without 
 regard to its being finished before another thing also future, 
 and produces this among other examples : Si te <zquo animo 
 fare accipiet, negligentem feceris Ter. If he shall hear that 
 you take this with indifference, you will render him careless. 
 
 Now Johnson contends, that, according to the doctrine 
 of Vossius, as his hearing must have taken place before he 
 became careless, it should have been expressed, Si te aquo 
 
 1 In a few sentences the one tense may be found used instead of the other ; 
 but their number is too small to warrant this general observation. 
 
 G2 
 
84 
 
 animo ferre acceperit, negligentem facies. But as it is not 
 expressed in this manner, he differs from Vossius, and is of 
 opinion, that the future subjunctive may be used like the 
 future indicative. But Ruddiman, agreeing with Vossius, 
 judiciously observes, that we may faintly hint at the finishing 
 of an action yet future, without considering the finishing of 
 an action on which it depends. He also observes, that the 
 occasionally promiscuous use of tenses is not sufficient to 
 make them formally the same. 
 
 In verbs in or, tnis tense -has two forms : as, amatus ero 
 orfuero. The first form strictly denotes the completion of 
 a future action indefinitely. The second implies that it shall 
 be finished before another action, likewise future, shall take 
 place. There is no future subjunctive ; but its import is, ex- 
 pressed by the future participle, and the verb sum ; thus 
 amaturus sim, sis, sit, &c. ; as Hand dubito, quin facturus 
 sit, I doubt not but he will do it, quin being joined to the 
 subjunctive. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 1. This mood is used, when we address ourselves to a per- 
 son or thing, to command, exhort, entreat, and sometimes 
 to permit ; and consequently the second person is the only 
 part that is really imperative. Ama, love thou. Amatote, 
 love ye. Ne nega Ter. Deny not. 
 
 2. The second person of the present subjunctive is used as 
 an imperative, especially in forbidding, after ne 9 nemo, mil- 
 lus. Ne me attingas, scelcste Ter. Do not touch me. 
 
 3. The second person of the perfect subjunctive, or perfect 
 future, is used as an imperative. Tu videris de his Liv. 
 Look upon these. Luant peccata, nee illos juveris auxilio 
 JEn. Nor assist them. 
 
 4. The third person of the imperative is permissive, and 
 generally is expressed by let. Faciat, quod lubet ; sumat, 
 consumat, perdat ; decretum est pati Ter. Let him do 
 let him take, &c. 
 
 5. The third person of the perfect, and sometimes of the 
 pluperfect, subjunctive is thus used : Sed primum positum 
 sit, nosmet ipsos commendatos esse nobis Cic. Let it be laid 
 down. Verum anceps fuerat pugnte fortuna , fuisset Virg. 
 Be it so let it have been so it might have been, &c. 
 
 6. The first person plural, which belongs to the present 
 subjunctive, is used only in encouraging or resolving. Mo- 
 riamur, et in media arma ruamus ^En. Let us die and 
 let us rush. 
 
 Vossius and Priscian have contended, that the imperative, 
 
85 
 
 in the passive voice, has a preterperfect tense. J< 
 denies it, and observes that the very nature of the ii 
 
 Johnson 
 impera- 
 tive has a strong repugnance to all past time. 
 
 If the command be regarded, and not the execution of it, 
 the imperative may be considered as implying present time. 
 But if respect be had to the execution, the imperative im- 
 plies future time. The examples which Vossius produces 
 to prove that it has a preterperfect in the passive voice are 
 these : Primum positum sit, nosmet ipsos commendatos esse 
 nobis Cic. H&c dicta sintpatribus Liv.; and a few others. 
 
 This controversy, like many others respecting the tenses, 
 arises from inattention to the proper distinction between pre- 
 terite and perfect, the former as referring to time only, and 
 the latter to action. That there can be no preterite of the 
 imperative, in other words, that a past action, in its nature 
 irrevocable, cannot form the subject of a present command, 
 is sufficiently evident. But, though every command, con- 
 sidered simply as a command, and expressed imperatively 
 in the words of the speaker, must be present, yet, this com- 
 mand may be either definite or indefinite in respect to the 
 completion of the action. It may either order an action to 
 be done, without referring to the time of its perfection, or 
 it may command its being perfected in a given time. In 
 the latter case, as the action is ordered to be perfected, there 
 can be no impropriety in calling that form of the verb, which 
 expresses it, the imperative perfect. Thus, if I say, Liber 
 legitor, I give a general command, without referring to the 
 perfection of the action. If I say, Liber sit lee fas (forsaii) 
 infra horam^ I imply that the reading is to be finished in the 
 space of an hour 1 . The latter may be called the imperative 
 perfect. The Greeks, in their imperatives, admit certain 
 tenses of the past, such as those of the perfect and two aorists. 
 But when they are so used, they either lose their temporary 
 nature, or imply such a quickness of execution, that the 
 deed should be, as it were, done, the very moment it is com- 
 manded. The same difference seems to be between our 
 English imperatives, go and begone ; do and have done. The 
 first allow time for going and doing ; the others call for the 
 completion of the act, at once. 
 
 So in Greek, ypa$s, (present imperative,) write thou ; 
 
 1 It should, however, be observed, that the command implied it^such foi'ms 
 really arises from an ellipsis of some present of the imperative, such as da or 
 puta ; and that it is only the perfect participle which refers to the completion 
 or perfection of the action. The former expresses a command in present time ; 
 the latter the perfection of an action, and, by inference, injfutitre time. 
 
86 
 
 ypa4/ov, (perfect indefinite -or aorist of imperative,) get your 
 writing finished as soon as possible; y=ypa$5, (perfect im- 
 perative,) have your writing finished. 
 
 Thus it appears that the present imperative regards the 
 commencement, or progression of an action ; the other 
 imperatives seem particularly to have an eye to its comple- 
 tion. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 1 . If the action of the infinitive is present or progressive, 
 at the time of the action of the preceding verb on which the 
 infinitive depends, whether it be past, present or future, the 
 infinitive is in the present tense l . Visne mihi auscultare ? 
 Will you listen to me ? Audivit me stare, He heard that I 
 was standing. Vidi enim nostros inimicos cupere helium 
 Cic, Were wishing. 
 
 2. As in the present indicative, poets and historians some- 
 times relate past events in the present infinitive. Fertur 
 Prometheus addere principi Lima coactus particulam undique 
 desectam Hor. to add, meaning to have added. 
 
 3. When the action of the infinitive is meant to be past 
 at the time denoted by the leading verb, the infinitive is put 
 in the past time, whatever tense the other may be in, Vic- 
 tarem victae succubuisse queror Hor, Had submitted. 
 
 1 When in English two verbs come together, past time is in certain instances 
 expressed in the preterite of the depending verb : as, I ought to have read. But 
 the reverse takes place in Latin : as, Debui legerc. When an action is repre- 
 sented as present at a certain time past, the past time is expressed in both lan- 
 guages, in the leading verb alone, the other being put in the present. Hence, 
 in English it is proper to avoid, when the principal verb has a reference to 
 subsequent action, such double perfects as, I thought to have won, instead of / 
 thought to win. The following examples, in which possu?n, volo, nolo, mulo, and 
 dcbc.o are the leading verbs in Latin, seem, in their English, to infringe this 
 rule. Melius fieri non potuit Ter. It could not have been done better, j. e. 
 it was impossible to be done better. Volui dicere Plaut. I would have said, 
 z. e. I wished to say. Sumere noluit anna Ov. lie would not have taken 
 arms, i. e. he was unwilling to take arms. Maluit rcgis opes augere Nep, Pie 
 would rather have increased the king's power, f. e. he was more inclined to 
 increase. Debuisti mild ignoscere Cic. You ought to have pardoned me, 
 i. e. it was your duty to pardon me. Dividi non oportuit Cic. It ought 
 not to have been divided, i. e. it behoved it not to be divided. But it is to be 
 observed that ought, although the preterite of owe, does not now, as formerly, 
 denote past, but present obligation ; and that could, would and might, as has 
 been already mentioned, do not always mark past time exclusively, but very 
 often present time also. In Latin, although, the present of the infinitive be 
 used after memini, it must be expressed by the perfect, in English : as, Ego 
 illain mdi virginem : form"/ bnn$ memini videre Ter. I remember that I saw 
 her. The perfect is also used : as, Tibi me permisisse mcinini Cic. In these 
 it seems immaterial whether the circumstances are laid up in the mind, while 
 they are passing, or after they are past ; whether I remember the seeing, or 
 permitting of a person, or the having seen) or permitted him. 
 
87 
 
 Ctesar rtyperit a Sut'vis, aiu'itia missa esse CKS. Had 
 been sent. 
 
 4-. Sometimes the present and perfect may be interchanged. 
 Sed abunde crit ex its duo exe triplet retulisse Vai. Max., or 
 r(Jerre 9 to relate. 
 
 5. When the action of the infinitive may be future to that 
 of the leading verb, it is put in the future, whatever the time 
 of the leading verb may be : Qjicm quidem conjido omnibus 
 istis laudibus excclleutem lore Cic. Would be. Postquam 
 audierat non datum injilio uxorem suo Ter. That a wife 
 would not be given to his son, 
 
 Note 1. We sometimes find the perfect participle passive, 
 and the future participle active, when employed with esse to 
 form the infinitive, used as if indeclinable, and joined to 
 nouns, without regard to their gender or number ; thus, 
 Credo ego inimicos meos hoc dicturum (esse) C. Gracch. 
 Hancsibi rem prcesidio sperant futurum (esse) Cic. Justam 
 rem et facile m esse oratuni a vobis volo Plant. Ut cohortes 
 ad- me missum facias Cic. But such constructions, arising 
 probably from oversight, or from considering such a peri- 
 phrasis as oratum esse indeclinable, are not to be imitated. 
 
 Note C 2. That the future of the infinitive passive is com- 
 posed of the verb of motion fr/, and the supine in urn ; and 
 the sentence maybe thus supplied: Postquam audierat id 
 non iri ab illis datum uxorem suojilio^ That it was not going 
 by them (impersonally ; that is, that they were not going) 
 to give a wife to his son, 
 
 6. In many instances the present, as in English, may be 
 used when the signification is future ; but in some, it appears 
 that the future would be preferable 1 . Omfiia ci peragere 
 promiserunt Cic. They promised to perform, that they 
 would perform. Nisi dictis starctur, non se remittere exer- 
 citum Flor. That he would not send back, remissuruib esse. 
 Cras mild argenlum dare dijc'U Ter. Would give, daturum *. 
 
 1 The infinitive seems to be sometimes used for the present subjunctive: as, 
 Wcc Btibylonios teniiiris numcros, nt m-chun, yuicquid crit, patl I lor. that, or 
 by that, bi/ ii'/iic'i, the better to suj/l'r, i, e. itf, i\'l quo, melius p;itiari;, vet pnti 
 possis quicqidd crit. This is a Greek idiom. lam not ignorant that some have 
 said, that, here, nl is used for qunnimn, and that tlie meaning is, of, it is belUr 
 to sii/frr, but tlie former interpretation I deem preferable. 
 
 " The use and signification of the infinitive preceded by an accusative, and 
 depending upon another verb, may be seen in the following examples: 
 J)icit "^ pile says that 1 read, or am reading. 
 
 J)icebat \ I He WHS saying that I was reading. 
 
 Dixit ^ . ^ He said that 1 was reading. 
 
 Dicet J (^He will say that I am reading. 
 
 &icit 
 
88 
 
 7. Fore, the infinitive of sum, is joined to all participles in 
 us. Commissum cum equitatu prtelio fore videbat Caes. 
 Delude addis, te ad. me fore venturum Cic. Eo quoque 
 mittendos fore legates Liv. 
 
 In seTeral instances it seems to approach to the significa- 
 tion of esse. 
 
 Note. That the use of the infinitive as a noun will be found 
 in SYNTAX: and its use after the word that, under CONJUNC- 
 TIONS. 
 
 Gerunds and supines have been defined ; and their use 
 and signification will be found explained in SYNTAX. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present Part. Act. Amans, loving. Perf. Pass. Amatus 9 loved. 
 Some have supposed that the time of both these partici 
 pies is present; some have supposed that they have no tune, 
 and some have supposed that they are of all times. The 
 first denotes an action incomplete, and progressive, and its 
 time may, therefore, be considered as present; the second 
 denotes the state of suffering finished, and, therefore, the 
 time in which it has been perfected may be considered as 
 past. For it does not appear that doctus l is, if I may so ex- 
 press it, the precise counter-part passive of docens ; because, 
 although docens signifies a person at this moment teaching 
 another, doctus, it is known, does not denote the person who 
 
 He says that I read, or, have or had read. 
 
 He was saying that I read, or, have or had read. 
 
 He said that I have, or, had read. 
 
 He had said that I had read. 
 _He will say that I have, or, had read. 
 "He says that I will read. 
 
 He was saying that I would read. 
 
 He said that I would read. 
 
 He had said that I would read. 
 
 He will say that I am about to read. 
 
 He says that I would have read. 
 
 He was saying that I would have read. 
 
 He said that I would have read. ' 
 
 He had said that I would have read. 
 
 He will say that I would have read. 
 
 1 Mr. R. Johnson says that the time is the same in Fidi eum superantera 
 as in vidi eum superatum. The time of seeing the two men, expressed by vidi, 
 is certainly the same ; but their situations, in regard to the action which the 
 one is doing, and in regard to the action which the other has completely suffer- 
 ed, are widely different. And I cannot conceive, but that such expressions 
 as, Fidi eum superantem. superare, and superari, denote an action present 
 and progressive at the time expressed by vidi ; and that Fidi cum superatum 
 denotes an action past and completed in a time previous to that which is ex- 
 pressed by vidi. 
 
 Dicit "1 
 
 Dicebat \ 
 
 Dhit \ < 
 
 Dixerat legl * SC > 
 
 Dicet J 
 
 Dicit 
 
 
 Dicebat 
 
 me 
 
 Dixit 
 
 lectinum < 
 
 Dixerat 
 
 esse, 
 
 Dicet 
 
 
 Dicit 
 
 \ 
 
 Dicebat 
 
 me 
 
 Dixit 
 
 * lecturum < 
 
 Dixerat 
 
 fuisse, 
 
 Dicet 
 
 
$9 
 
 is at this moment in the act of being taught by the former; 
 but a man on whom, in a time previous to the present, the 
 act has been perfected, and whose suffering is completed, 
 vir doctus, a man already taught ; and, consequently, the 
 passive voice has no present participle. 
 
 But there are not wanting instances, in which, from the 
 nature of the verb, whose action seems susceptible of con- 
 tinuation, it appears that the action of the perfect participle 
 is continued into present time ; and in these the perfect par- 
 ticiple has the force of a present participle passive : or, in 
 some instances, is to be considered as an adjective, denoting 
 the existence of some quality, the result of past action, but 
 divested of time. Thus: Notus evolat Tetribilem piced tec- 
 tus caligine vultum Ov. Not merely having been veiled, 
 (and possibly having ceased to be veiled,) but veiling his 
 countenance, or having it, at that moment, veiled. Ster- 
 nuntur segetes, et deplorata coloni Vota jacent Ov. Not 
 merely having been lamented, or despaired of, but at that 
 moment despaired o desperate, or hopeless. Perfection 
 does not in all cases necessarily imply cessation. 
 
 It is not inconsistent with the foregoing explanation, to 
 say that these participles are joined to verbs in all times, and 
 this too without losing their distinctive time and significa- 
 tion. For amans denotes an action which is present at die 
 time represented by the leading verb of the sentence, whe- 
 ther that verb be past, present, or future. 
 
 In the same manner, amatus represents an action which 
 is past, in regard to the time expressed in the context, whe- 
 ther past, present, or future. When divested of time, these 
 participles are called participials, and may govern a geni- 
 tive: as, Patiens frigus, one bearing cold. Patiens frigoris, 
 one patient of, or able to bear, cold. 
 
 In the latter, patiens is a participial, and denotes a qua- 
 lity belonging to some person, and not a transient act Doc- 
 tus Latinam linguam, one taught the Latin language. Doc- 
 tus lingua Latins, one skilled in the Latin language. As 
 participials, they admit comparison : as, Servantissimus ccqui 
 Virg. A very strict observer of equity. 
 
 Future Participle Active, Amaturus, about to love. 
 
 This participle not only implies future time, but also some- 
 times denotes intention, or inclination : as, Lecturus sum, I 
 am about to read, or I intend to read. 
 
 Joined to cro 9 it is translated as if it constituted another 
 form of the future : as, Mergile me Jttictiis, quum reditunis 
 
90 
 
 ero Mart. I shall be returning. Nihil ego ero till datu- 
 ras Plant. I shall give. Tu procul absenti cura futurus 
 eris Ov. Quo die ad Sicam venturus ero Cic. 
 
 Joined to esse or juzsse, it forms the future of the infini- 
 tive active, agreeing, like an adjective, with its substantive ; 
 amaturum esse, to be about to love; amaturum Juisse, to have 
 been about to love. 
 
 Future Participle Passive, Amandus, to be loved. 
 
 This participle, coming even from verbs in or, signifying 
 actively, has always a passive signification. In conjunction 
 with the verb sum, it denotes that a thing must be done, or 
 ought to be done : and, hence, by inference it likewise im- 
 
 Elies futurity. Dixi literas scriptum iri ab eo, I said that a 
 jtter would be written by him. Dixi literas scribendas esse, 
 I said that a letter should, or ought to, be written. 
 
 The former is the future of the infinitive, and implies bare 
 futurity ; in the latter sentence, duty or necessity is implied. 
 Delenda est Carthago Cato. Must be, ought to be, is to 
 be, destroyed. Legatos mittendos censuit senatus Liv. 
 Should be sent. 
 
 In the following examples, it is said to denote bare futu- 
 rity ; Ut terrain invenias, quis earn tibi tradet habendam 
 Ov. Dido ./En. To be possessed. Facta fugis ; facienda 
 petis Ov. Dido /En. Things that will hereafter be done. 
 
 It is also used as a gerundive adjective : as, Cur adeo dv~ 
 lectaris criminibus inferences ? Why are you so pleased with 
 bringing accusations ? Aliter inferendo crimina. His enim 
 legendis, redeo in memoriam morluorum Cic. By reading 
 these ; h&c legendo. Ad accusandos homines duci pnemio. 
 To accuse men, or, to the accusing of men. QIKC ante con- 
 ditam, condendamve urbem traduntur Liv. Before the 
 city was built or building : In this example, it has some- 
 what of the force of a present participle passive ! , in regard 
 to the progressive action of its building ; and of the future 
 participle, in reference to the intention of that action. 
 
 All participles are found with all tenses of sum. 
 
 1 There are many instances in which the participle in dus seems to have the 
 import of the present : thus, quas ubi vidit audicilqnc sencx, vdut si jam agendis 
 fju(E aitdiebat iniercsSet Liv. i. e. the things while they were doing. Thus also, 
 volvenda dies en attulit ultra Virg. Perizonius is of opinion that it was ori- 
 ginally a participle of the present tense passive, and lays some stress on its he- 
 ing uniformly derived from the present participle active, following even its 
 irregularity in the only one which is irregular: thus, tens, cnniis, eundus. 
 
 Dr. Crombie (Gymnasium, 2nd ed. vol. Si. p. 363) likewise contends, and, 
 it appears to rne, successfully, that thi* word is a present participle of the pas- 
 sive voice j and that it does not, by its own power, ever express futurity, or 
 
91 
 
 OF CONJUGATION AND FORMATION. 
 
 Conjugation is the regular distribution of the inflexions 
 of verbs, according to their different voices, moods, tenses, 
 [numbers, and persons, so as to distinguish them from one 
 another. 
 
 There are four conjugations of verbs, distinguished by the 
 vowel preceding re of the infinitive mood. 
 
 The first conjugation makes are long : as, Amdre. 
 
 The second conjugation makes ere long: as, Monere. 
 
 The third conjugation makes ere short : as, Regere. 
 
 The fourth conjugation makes ire long: as, Audlre. 
 
 There are four principal parts of a verb, whence all its 
 other parts are formed, viz. o of the present, i of the pre- 
 terite, um of the supine, and re of the infinitive : as, Amo 9 
 amavi 9 amaium, amare ; and these are sometimes called its 
 conjugation. 
 
 It has been customary to form, from the infinitive, the 
 present participle, the future participle in dus, and the ge- 
 runds ; a formation which cannot be considered as correct, 
 in regard to verbs in io of the third conjugation, since those 
 verbs have not in their infinitive the i which belongs to 
 those parts ; and even in the fourth conjugation, they are 
 formed with greater propriety from the present. For simi- 
 lar reasons, the method which excludes the infinitive is 
 equally objectionable. 
 
 The following formation is not liable to such objections, 
 and seems preferable to the other two methods, for reasons, 
 which will be found in the annexed explanation, 
 
 the obligation either of necessity or duty. In such phrases as tcmpus petendce 
 pads, neither futurity nor obligation is expressed, the expression being equi- 
 valent to tempus petendi pacem, tempus quo pax pelatur, tempus petere pacem* 
 In volvenda dies en attalit uttro Virg., volvenda is clearly a participle of the 
 present tense passive, equivalent to sese volvens, or dum volvitur, and expressing 
 neither futurity nor obligation. In such expressions as permisit urbem diripi- 
 eiuLam, he contends that it is purpose, not futurity, that is directly expressed. 
 He does not, however, deny that the participle in dus, whqn joined to the verb 
 sum, uniformly denotes moval or physical obligation ; but he contends, that, 
 in such phraseologies, there is no word expressive of futurity or obligation, al- 
 though the combination of the two words lias by usag^acquired this significa- 
 tion, in the same manner as in English, such expressions as " Is a man to be 
 jmnisked for what he could not prevent? " in which there is no word expressive 
 of duty, obligation, or futurity, are reckoned equivalent to " Ought a man to 
 be punished ? " He agrees with Pcrizonius in consideringybrc to be understood 
 in Movebatiir iglt-iir misericordia civium, quos intcrficiendos vidcbal Csos. Be- 
 cause he saw that many of his countrymen must fall, or would necessarily be 
 slain, if he encountered the enemy in another battle. 
 
92 
 
 The Formation of the Tenses of Verbs, from the Present, 
 the Perfect, the Supine, and the Infinitive. 
 
 I. From -o are formed, Names of the Tenses. 
 
 -bam, Imperf. Indie. 
 , f Fut. Indie, of the 1 st and 2d 
 5 \ Conjugation. 
 
 f Pres. Subj. of the 2d; Pres. 
 -<m,< Subj. ahd Fut. Indie, of 3d 
 
 ^ and 4th. 
 
 -em, Pres. Subj. of the 1st. 
 -ns, The Present participle. 
 -dus, The Fut. Participle, Passive. 
 -dum, ~\ 
 
 -di, V The Gerunds. 
 -do, ) 
 
 II. From -i are formed, 
 
 -ram, The Plup. Indie. 
 -rim, The Perf. Subj. 
 -ro, The Fut. Subj. 
 -ssem, The Plup. Subj. 
 -sse, The Perf. Infinit 
 
 III. From -urn are formed, 
 
 -u, The second Supine. 
 
 -us, The Perf. Participle, Passive. 
 
 -rus, The Future Participle. 
 
 IV. From the infinitive, whether ending in -re, -le, or - 
 
 are formed the imperative, by cutting off' the final 
 syllable ; and the imperfect of the subjunctive, by 
 adding m to it. 
 
 Observations on the Formation of Regular and Irregular 
 Verbs. 
 
 (1.) The first formation includes all verbs in -o and those 
 in -io of the third conjugation. These last have the i also 
 before -unt of the present indicative, and -unto of the impe- 
 rative. The principal irregularity of the irregular verbs, be- 
 sides their deficiency, consists in their deviating from the 
 usual mode of formation, chiefly in those parts that are 
 formed from the present. Thus ; 
 
fSum, 
 Possum, 
 (_ Prosujn, 
 CVolo, 
 \ Nolo, 
 \Mato, 
 Eo, 
 
 Imperf. ladic. 
 
 has, eram, 
 poteram, 
 proderam, 
 
 Fut. 
 
 ero, 
 potero, 
 prodero, 
 
 Pres. Subj. 
 
 sim. 
 possim. 
 prosim. 
 velim. 
 nolim. 
 malim. 
 earn. 
 
 
 
 
 
 ibam, 
 
 ibo 9 
 
 Pres. participle, iens ; gerunds, eundum, -i, -o. Ens from 
 sum is obsolete. Its compound, potens, is generally consi- 
 dered as an adjective ; also, absens and prtesens. 
 
 (2, 3.) The second and third formations are followed by 
 all verbs having a perfect, or supine. Fio, though active in 
 its termination, being a passive verb, has all the compound 
 tenses of the passive voice. Sum, though without a supine, 
 has the future participle, futurus, as if from fuitum or futum 
 of the obsolete fuo, whence it has also fui its perfect, fore 
 of the infinitive, forem, &c. 
 
 (4.) The fourth formation includes regular and irregular 
 verbs : thus, infinit. imperat. and imperf. subj. Regere, rege, 
 regerem : Capere, cape, caperem ; Ferre, fer, ferrem , Ire, /, 
 irem ; Posse-, Velle-, Matte-, Nolle-, m, the tiiree first having 
 no imperative ; Esse, es, essem ; Prodesse, prodes, prodessem. 
 Except Die, due, fac, Jt, and noli. Fieri makes Jierem ; it 
 was originally Jiri, audfaem, regularly; andhence^of the 
 imperative. 
 
.2 J3 
 
 ^ ^ -M 
 
 G C 
 
 . c/3 tyj 
 
 PH --> O) 0) 
 
 J fi 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 Cj 
 
 L 
 
 PS 
 
 ?o S 
 
 CN 
 
 10) >0> 
 
 
 
 en 
 
 en -73 T3 -3 
 
 G G G G 
 
 ld> icu IO 10 
 
 e s 
 
 i-< ?O 
 
 Eseseese 
 
 
 
a a x 
 > c ^ 
 
 X< HH* 
 
 ^ ^3 
 
 w ^ I .1 J 3 
 
 ti 
 
 03 
 
 Ji* 
 
 i^ 
 
 o^ I" a" 
 
 P-l HH h-5 
 
 I '2 
 
 )a> >aj 
 
 
 
 i s 
 
 t/J CO ^ 
 
 C/J c/5 *"* 
 
 l-i |^ |r H 
 
 '5 >B 'S 
 
 CS CJ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 'S 
 
 <p 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 rexisseir 
 
 1 
 
 o> 
 
 rt 
 
 .d >3 
 
 *-> 4-J 
 
 recturiis 
 
 1 
 
 tf 
 
 &5 
 
 X> 33 
 
 bfi bD 
 
 -O> CT 
 
 1 *~* 
 
 o 
 
 ^ 
 
 monueram 
 
 monuerim 
 
 moniiero 
 
 monuissem 
 
 monuisse 
 
 Monitum 
 
 monitu 
 momtus 
 
 moniturus 
 
 Monere 
 
 mone 
 monerem 
 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 103 
 
 S 
 rfj 
 
 1 
 
 1C3 
 
 1 
 
 mavero 
 
 mavlsse] 
 
 mavlsse 
 
 a 
 
 Cfi 
 
 S )d 
 
 -*-> 4-> 
 
 IC3 IC3 
 
 w 
 )3 
 C 
 
 i3 
 
 *- 
 
 .1 
 '1 
 
 ,1 
 
 ^s 
 
 C3 
 
 c3 
 
 cs 
 
 05 
 
 C3 
 
 ^^ 
 
 C3 TO 
 
 ra 
 
 ^^ 
 
 cs S 
 
96 
 
 CO 00 GO GO GO 
 
 CM 
 
 s> 
 * 35 
 
 I 
 
 ^ IP 
 cs "o 
 
 10 
 
 i ITS 
 C 2 
 
 2 "*"* 
 
 -S 
 
 o ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 Q 
 
 , 
 
 03 10 >S iS ^Q >3 
 
 G5 
 
 *S 
 
 ^ 
 
 & 
 
 <yj 
 
 t?* \m w> 
 
 < 2 > > 
 
 ,,4 >0 rO 
 
CO CO 00 00 CO 
 
 CN 
 
 CN 
 
 * ^ ~ ,2 18.5 
 c 9 i3 E g C 
 
 tO 1 ^H 3^ i PH 3^ 
 
 fi 
 
 a G c , 
 
 C3 10) ,p 
 
 
 iu i^ * *- 
 
 -fcJ -4-J lO 'O 
 
 i i S ,*; 
 
 . ^sI'N S i'li'i' 
 
 1 till 
 a 
 
 IV > f 
 
 V >n 
 
 'l 
 
 H 
 
98 
 
 i ^ > 
 
 : S 
 
 a. 
 
 i S- 
 
 
 S6SS6SS 
 
 
 >S 
 
 50 
 
 I -c >T 
 
 '1 s s I 
 
99 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 ** 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 co co GO 
 
 
 
 CO 80 
 
 
 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 
 
 CM CM CM 
 
 
 
 CM CM 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 rH i < 
 
 
 r* 
 
 i 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 33 
 
 4-> 
 
 2 
 
 33 
 
 "5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 ID 
 
 >D 
 
 , 
 
 J2 
 
 
 
 | 
 
 v. ,* >3 2 2 fc, 
 
 
 i* 
 
 3=J 
 
 A 
 
 2 S 
 
 
 5^ 
 
 a 
 
 >?" 
 
 ^R 
 
 5 2 
 
 
 
 , 
 
 ID i=5 j2 ^ ^ ID 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 i3 
 
 G 
 ID 
 
 G 
 
 53 
 
 
 
 "3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 **** 
 
 & 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 5-( 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 >s 
 
 ' 
 
 'i 
 
 3O 
 
 *=? 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 F 
 
 
 ^P 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 i^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 103 
 
 ID 
 
 it! 
 
 i3 
 
 <u 
 
 ,8 
 
 MOOD. 
 
 CM '& 
 
 '=J >-< IH j5 G '2 
 
 ,3,5 g g 3 2 3 S 
 g 5 2 J S il J g 
 
 ID jfl ,S ja ^D ID 
 
 MOOD 
 
 1 
 
 ID 
 
 amim 
 remini 
 
 MOOD. 
 
 f 
 
 ID 
 
 I 
 
 \ 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 Ki 
 
 
 
 INDICATIV 
 
 fa 
 33 
 
 ICtf 
 
 A H H ^ > H 
 
 fllljl 
 
 ID 5 S i5 ^2 ,12 ( g3 
 
 UBJUNCTI 
 
 a 
 
 ID 
 
 11 
 
 | 
 1 
 
 ID 
 
 eamur 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 05 
 
 
 
 *""* 
 
 
 
 
 
 33 ^ 
 
 ifSigSSg 
 
 ^ is ID ^S w*a ja iS 
 
 M *>' 
 
 3=3 3=5 S 
 
 I.-S ID >a i 
 
 ^^ 
 
 bo 
 
 3D 
 
 3 C 3 S 3 5 S ' ^ 
 
 IOJ ID 3D iS ^2 ^2 
 
 >D 
 
 > 
 
 D 103 
 
 Is 
 
 irt iw 
 
 3D ,s 
 
 - h 30 ^ ,5 3C3 30 ^ 
 "" 3O W 3O jS ^2 rQ 303 
 
 JJ e 
 
 PH I HH 
 
 H2 
 
100 
 
 OBSERVATIONS ON THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 (1) The future of the infinitive, active, is composed of 
 the accusative of the future participle in rus, and esse vel 
 
 fuisse ; the former of which has been termed by some the 
 future imperfect ; the latter, the future perfect. 
 
 (2) In looking over the scheme of the conjugations, it 
 may be observed, that there is very little difference among 
 them, except in their characteristics. The future indicative 
 of the two first ends, in the active, in bo ; in the passive, in 
 bor : of the two last, in the active, in am ; and in the passive, 
 in ar. The present subjunctive of the first ends, in the ac- 
 tive, in em ; in the passive, in er : that of the three last, in 
 the active, in am ; and in the passive, in ar. 
 
 The following are the general terminations of the Indi- 
 cative and the Subjunctive, in the 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 Sing. Plur. 
 
 23 123 
 
 5, t; mus, tis, nt. 
 
 The 2nd person singular perfect indicative is an excep- 
 tion, being isti. 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 Sing. Plur. 
 
 23 183 
 T i s } 
 
 9 Y tur; mur, mini, ntur. 
 
 re,f 
 
 (3) In the imperative mood, both active and passive, the 
 second form of the third persons singular and plural, and 
 the first person plural, are evidently the same persons of the 
 present subjunctive of their respective voices. The termi- 
 nation -minor, of the second person plural, passive, is but 
 little used. 
 
 (4) In the first conjugation the verb do alone has its in- 
 crease short. 
 
 Verbs of the first conjugation ; of the second and third, 
 having evi for the perfect ; and of the third and fourth, 
 having zW, suffer a contraction, by syncope, of v, or of v and 
 the following vowel, in certain persons of the perfect of the 
 indicative, and in parts formed from it : also verbs in io of 
 the third conjugation, and verbs of the fourth, in the imper- 
 fect of the indicative. The quantities of which contractions 
 are as follows ; 
 
101 
 
 Conjugation. 
 
 Ind. Perf. astl\ astis, drfint. 
 
 Plup. dram, &c. 
 
 Sub). Perf. flnwz, &c. 
 
 Plup. dssem, &c. 
 
 Fut. aro, c. 
 Inf. Perf. 
 
 The second and third conjugations, having cvi, are con- 
 tracted and marked the same as the first, the e being long 
 like the a. 
 
 The third and fourth in ivi. 
 
 Ind. Imperf. ibam, &c. Passive, Ibar, &c. 
 
 Perf. u, ilstl isti, lit it ; ilstis istis, urunt tere. 
 
 Plup. leram, &c. 
 Subj. Peril lerim, &c. 
 
 Plup. ussem issem, &c. 
 
 Fut. iho, &c. 
 Inf. Perf. Tisse isse. 
 
 Observe, that in those verbs in /<?, which have an / before 
 , e, o, , the i is short. 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 (5) The simple tenses of the passive voice are formed 
 from the corresponding tenses of the active, in the following 
 manner. The Jirst persons singular of the passive, from the 
 first persons singular of the active, by adding r ; or, if the 
 active end in m, by changing m into r : thejfrst persons plu- 
 ral, by changing 5 into r. The second persons singular, by 
 inserting ri between the two concluding letters of the same 
 persons in the active ; but in the present of the indicative of 
 the third conjugation, by inserting er before the final z's,- 
 and the second persons plural are formed by changing -tis 
 into -mini. The third persons singular and plural, passive, 
 are always the same as those of the active voice, but with 
 the addition of ur. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 The first form of the second person singular is formed by 
 
 1 According to Priscian, it should be added, that avit is con- 
 tracted into at. In omnibus, he says, qua penultimam habent cir- 
 cumfic.xam, si patiantur syncopam, eundc.m frrvam'ts accentum in 
 ultima ; lit Juma-cii : Jumat ; cupivit, cupit. Page 629. 
 
102 
 
 the addition of re to the same person active (and is the same 
 as the present of the infinitive active, and as the second per- 
 son singular of the second form of the present of the indi- 
 cative passive): the second persons plural are formed by 
 changing -te and -tote into -mini (which is the same as the 
 second person plural of the present of the indicative passive) 
 and -minor : and the other parts are formed by adding r to 
 o of the active. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 The present of the infinitive passive is formed, in the first, 
 second and fourth conjugation, by changing the final e of the 
 infinitive active into i ; and, in the third, by changing ere 
 into z, or by taking away s from the second person singular 
 of the present of the indicative active. Deponent verbs form 
 their infinitive in the same manner, an infinitive active being 
 supposed, which is the same as the first form of the second 
 person singular of their own imperative ; or, by changing, 
 for the third conjugation, or or ior into z, and, lor the first, 
 second, and fourth, re of the second person singular of the 
 present of their indicative into ri. 
 
 The Compound Tenses are thus composed. 
 Indicative mood. 
 
 Perf. The perfect participle prefixed to sum vel fui. 
 Plup. to cram vel fueram. 
 
 Subjunctive mood. 
 
 Perf. The perfect participle prefixed to sim vel fuerim. 
 
 Plup. to essem vel fuissem* 
 
 Fut. to ero vel fuero. 
 
 Infinitive mood. 
 
 The accusative of the perfect participle with csse or fuisse, 
 constitutes the perfect and pluperfect; the first supine and 
 zrt, the future of the infinitive. This last, some have termed 
 the future imperfect ; and the accusative of the participle in 
 dus with fuissC) the future perfect. 
 
103 
 
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 
 
 GENERAL RULES, 
 
 L. If the verb has the letter a in the present, it has a like- 
 wise in the supine and infinitive, although it may change it 
 in the preterite : as, facio, fed, factum, facerc. 
 
 II. Whatever verbs are deficient in perfects, are without 
 supines also. Cieo, (civi being borrowed from cio^) citum ; 
 and tundo, (tutudi being said to be borrowed from the obso- 
 lete tudo, and to be but little used, unless in composition,) 
 are perhaps the only exceptions. 
 
 III. The present of the infinitive is formed from the pre- 
 sent indicative, by changing, in the 
 
 First Conjugation^ o into dre. 
 Second Conjugation, eo into ere. 
 Third Conjugation, o, and w into ere. 
 Fourth Conjugation, lo into ire. 
 
 [Special rules for the formation of the perfects and supines 
 will be found under the different conjugations; and the rules 
 for the formation of compounded verbs will be hereafter 
 mentioned.] 
 
 THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 The first conjugation makes dvi in the perfect, and a turn 
 in the supine : as, amo, amavi, amatum^ to love '. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 The following six having ut\ itum ; 
 
 Crepo 2 , / make a noise ; sono, / sound (sonaturus, in 
 Horace}; cubo 3 , Ilie down : tono, I thunder (intonatus, in 
 Horace] ,- domo, / tame ,- veto, I forbid. 
 
 1 The present of the indicative of this conjugation generally 
 ends in o impure , but the following verbs in eo and io belong to 
 it : beo, screo, era?, meo, calceo, illaqueo, nauseo, enucleo, delineo ; 
 amplio, basio, brevio, concilia, crucio, furio, glacio, hio, lanio,lux- 
 uriOy nuncioy pio, propitio, radio, repudio, satio, saucio, socio, som- 
 nio, spolio, suavio or suavior, vario, vitio. 
 
 4 Discrepo has rather discrepavi. 
 
 s Thus, ac- re- ex- cubo, &c. For those that assume the letter 
 m, see Cumbo, in the third conjugation. Cubasse and incubaverc 
 are found. 
 
104.' 
 
 Do 1 , d&li, datum, to give. 
 Juvo, juvi, jutum*, to help. 
 Frico, fricui, frictum, to rub. (In- per- re- con- fricatus, 
 
 are -found.) 
 
 Lavo, lavi, lavatum, to wash. (Lavavit, Plant.) 
 lautum, 
 lotum, 
 
 Mico 3 , micui, , to shine. 
 
 Plico*, *plicui, *plicitum, to fold. 
 
 * plicavi, * plicatum, 
 Poto, potavi, potum, to drink. 
 
 potatum. 
 Seco, secui, sectum, to cut. 
 Sto 6 , steti, statum, to stand. 
 
 Labo, Hotter ; nexo, I bind; plico, I fold, have neither 
 perfect, nor supine. 
 
 THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 The second conjugation makes ui G , itum 1 : as, habeo^ 
 habui, habitum*, to have. 
 
 1 Thus, venundo, drcumdo, pessundo, satisdo. See Do, third 
 conjugation. 
 
 * Hence jutus, and adjutus ; the latter being more common. 
 
 3 Emico has emicui, and emicatum. Dimico, dimicavi (seldom 
 dimicui), dimicatum. The simple verb neco is regular, having 
 necavi (sometimes necui), necatum. Its compounds eneco and 
 interneco have enecavi and enecui, enecatum and enectum ; interne- 
 cavi, -alum and -ectum. 
 
 * Du- multi- re- sup- plico, -avi, -atum. 
 
 Ap- im- com- ex- plico, -avi, -atum. Complicaviy ^ 
 -ui, -Hum. Compliciti, 
 Explico, I explain, has -avi t -atum ; I unfold, -ui, -itum. 
 
 * The words thus marked (*) are obsolete, and are introduced 
 only for the sake of their compounds. 
 
 * Its compounds have -stiti, -stitum, and more frequently -sta- 
 tion. The participle in rus is commonly formed from the latter. 
 Circum- inter- super- steti, are found. 
 
 6 These have no perfect, and, therefore, no supine : aveo, ceveo, 
 denseo, jlaveo, glabreo, lacteo, liveo,wcereo, muceo, renideo, polleoj 
 scateo* 
 
 7 These have no supine ; neuter verbs having ui; time.o and si- 
 ko (which arr neuter and active, and have a passive voice) ; neu- 
 ttrs in -ceo. Except calcp, carco-, coalco, dolco, jacco : lateo, licco. 
 
105 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 AlgeO, alsi 9 , , to be cold. 
 
 Ardeo, arsi, arsum, to burn. 
 Augeo, auxi, auctum, to increase. 
 
 Calveo, calvi, , to grow bald. 
 
 Caveo, cavi, cautum, to beware of. 
 Censeo, censui, censum, to judge. 
 Cieo, civi I0 , citum, to stir up. 
 
 Conniveo, connivi, , to wink. 
 
 connixi, 
 
 Doceo, dociii, doctum, to teach. 
 Deleo, delevi, deletum, to blot out. 
 Faveo, favi, fautum, to favour. 
 
 Ferveo, ferbui, , to boil. 
 
 Fleo, flevi, fletum, to weep. 
 Foveo, fovi, fotum, to cherish. 
 
 Frigeo, frixi, , to be cold. 
 
 Fulgeo, fulsi, , to shine. 
 
 Haereo, haesi, ha3sum, to stick. 
 Indulged, indulsi, indultum, to indulge. 
 
 rarb indiilsum, 
 Jubeo, jussi, jussum, to order. 
 
 Luceo, luxi, , to shine. 
 
 Lugeo, luxi 11 , , to mourn. 
 
 Maneo, mansi, mansum, to remain. 
 Misceo, miscui, mistum, to mix. 
 
 mixtum, 
 
 Mordeo, momordi, morsum, to bite. 
 Moveo, movi, motum, to move. 
 Mulceo, mulsi, mulsum, to stroke. 
 
 merco, noceo, oleo, pareo,placeo, taceo, valeo } suid their compounds, 
 which are oftener found in the participle in rus, than in the supine. 
 Arceo has no supine in use, but, co- ex- erceo, -itum. Taceo and 
 laieo have a supine; but their compounds have none. Taceo, some- 
 times active, and sometimes neuter ; it has a passive voice. 
 
 8 Prcebeo is put. for prcehaueo or prohibeo. Pr&bit -urn, -us, 
 -urus, and prtzbcor are found, but are seldom used. 
 
 9 Alsus, as if from ahum, is found in Cicero. 
 
 10 Civi belongs to do of the fourth conjugation, which its com- 
 pounds generally follow : as, accio, exdo, &c. 
 
 1 ' Luctum I can find in dictionaries only ; whence oomes the 
 substantive Indus. Neither luctum nor the participles luctus and 
 lucturus arc in use. 
 
106 
 
 Mulgeo, mulsi, mulsum, to milk. 
 
 mulctum, 
 
 Neo, nevi, netum, to spin. 
 Oleo 1 , olui, *olitum, to smell, or grow, 
 * olevi, * oletum, 
 
 Paveo, pavi, , to be afraid. 
 
 Pendeo, pependi, pensum, to hang. 
 *Pleo, *plevi, *pletum, to Jill. 
 Prandeo, prandi, pransum, to dine. 
 Rideo, risi, risum, to laugh. 
 Sedeo 3 , sedi, sessum, to sit. 
 Sorbeo 3 , sorbui, sorptum, to sup up. 
 Spondeo, spospondi, sponsum, to promise. 
 spopondi, 
 
 Strideo, stridi, , to make a noise. 
 
 Suadeo, suasi, suasum, to advise. 
 Teneo*, tenui, tentum, to hold. 
 Tergeo, tersi, tersum, to wipe. 
 Tondeo, totondi, tonsum, to clip. 
 Torqueo, torsi, tortum, to twist. 
 torsum (seldom), 
 Torreo, torrui, tostum, to toast. 
 
 Turgeo, tursi 5 , , to swell. 
 
 Urgeo 6 , ursi, , to urge. 
 
 Video, vidi, visum, to see. 
 Voveo, vovi, votum, to vow. 
 Vieo, vievi, vietum, to bind. 
 
 1 The compounds of oleo, that signify to smell, have -m, -itum: 
 as, ob- per- red- oleo, -ui, -Hum. Those that deviate from the ori- 
 ginal signification of the simple verb have -em, -etum : as, ex- in- 
 obs- oleo t -evi, -ttum. But aboleo, -olevi t -olitum. Adoleo, -olevi t 
 adultum. 
 
 * De- dis-per-prce- re- sub- sideo, seldom have a supine. De- 
 dis- sideo, seldom the perfect. 
 
 3 Absorbeo is rarely found to have -sorpsi ; ex- re- sorptum are 
 not found. 
 
 4 Attineo and pertineo have no supine; abstineo, seldom; al- 
 though abstentus is found. Teneo and tendo seem to have the same 
 origin; and they and their compounds are not easily distinguished 
 in their supines, and the formation therefrom, unless when the su- 
 pine tensum from tendo is used. 
 
 5 Tursi is uncommon. Priscian attributes obtursi to Lucilius. 
 
 6 Urgeo has ursum in the dictionaries ; but neither that, nor a 
 perfect nor future participle) is found. 
 
107 
 
 THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 The third conjugation l forms its perfects and supines va- 
 riously, according to the termination of the present. 
 
 Bo a makes bi, bitum : as, bibo, bibi, bibitum, to drink. 
 
 EXCEFflONS. 
 
 * Gumbo 8 , cubui, cubitum, to lie down. 
 Nubo, nupsi, nuptum, to marry. 
 Scribo, scripsi, scriptum, to write. 
 
 Co makes xi 9 ctum : as, dico y dixi^ dictum^ to say. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Ico, ici, ictum, to strike. 
 Vinco, vici, victum, to conquer. 
 Parco, peperci, parsum, to spare, 
 (rarely, parsi,) parcitum 4 , 
 
 Sco* makes vi, turn : as, nosco, novi, no turn*, to know. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Disco 7 , didici, , to learn. 
 
 1 The third conjugation ends in o impure; but the following 
 verbs in io and tor belong to itijacio, jacio, capio, rapio, *lacio> 
 * specie , fodio, fugio, cupio, sapio, pario, quatio ; gradior y patior, 
 orior, morior, and compounds, those of pario excepted, which be- 
 long to the fourth. 
 
 8 Lambo and scaoo have no supines. Offi-cio t likewise. Glubi 
 <m&glubitum, from glubo, are uncommon. Degluptus maybe found. 
 
 3 Cumbo is the same as cubo of the first. The following admit 
 the m : ac- con- de- dis- in- oc- pro- re- sue' superin- cumbo. 
 
 4 If there be any perfect participle, it is parcitus. Parsurus is 
 found in Suetonius, and Livy. Parcitum is uncommon. Com- 
 parsit or compersit, from comparco, or comperco, is used by Terence. 
 
 5 Inceptive verbs in sco, want both perfects and supines, un- 
 less they borrow them from the verbs whence they are formed : as, 
 ardesco borrows am, arswwz, from ardeo, Ac- in- per- pro- suc- 
 su- per- cresco have no supine; the other compounds have. Gliscti, 
 neither perfect nor supine. 
 
 6 But ag- cog- nosco t -novi, -nilum ; also recognosco. The other 
 compounds, like nosco. The participle nosciturus, as if from nos- 
 citum, is found in Livy. Priscian makes mention ofignosciturus, 
 but it is without sufficient authority. 
 
 7 Disco had formerly discitum ; anddiscitunisisfoundin Apuleiu*. 
 
108 
 
 Pasco 1 , pavi, pastum, to feed. 
 
 Posco*, poposci, poscitum [rarely), to demand. 
 
 *Quinisco 8 , *quexi, , to nod. 
 
 jDo* makes di, sum : as, scando, scandi, scansum, to climb, j 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 The following nine, having si, sum, viz. 
 
 Claudo, I shut. Ludo, I play. Rodo, I gnaw. 
 Divido, I divide. Plaudo, I applaud. Trudo 6 , / thrust. 
 Laedo, I hurt. Rado & , I shave. Vado 5 , I go. 
 
 The compounds of do 6 , having didi, dttum, viz. 
 
 Abdo, I hide. Dido, I give out. Prodo, I betray. 
 
 Addo, I add. Edo, I publish. Reddo, I restore. 
 
 Condo, I hide, build. Indo, I put in. Subdo, 1 put under. 
 
 Credo, I believe. Obdo, I oppose. Trado, I deliver. 
 
 Dedo, I yield. Perdo, 1 destroy. Vendo, / sell. 
 
 Cado 7 , cecidi, casum, to fall. 
 Caedo 8 , cecidi, caesum, to kill. 
 Cedo, cessi, cessum, to yield. 
 
 1 Thus also com- de- pasco. Epastus also is found. But com- 
 dis- pesco, -pescui, no supine. 
 
 * Exposcitum is found in Seneca, according to Vossius. 
 
 9 Quinisco has but one compound, conquinisco. Both are un- 
 common words, and seldom found in their perfects. 
 
 * Strido and rudo have no supine. Nor sido ; but its compounds 
 borrow from sedeo: as, as- circum- con- da- in- ob- per- re- sub- sido y 
 -sedi, -sessum. Some give cusi to cudo, but cudi rests on much bet- 
 ter authority. 
 
 * The perfects of rado and trudo, and the perfect and supine of 
 rtf^o, are seldom used, uncompounded. 
 
 6 Thus also the double compounds decondo, recondo, coaddo, 
 superaddo, deperdo, disperdo. Abscondo has abscondi (seldom a^- 
 condidi), absconditum (seldom absconsum). The compcunds of do 
 with prepositions are generally of this conjugation. But circundo 
 is of the first. Interdare, superdare, superdandus, introdabat, may 
 be found, but are not to be imitated. 
 
 7 The compounds ofcado; as, ac~ con-de- ex- inter- pro- suc-cido, 
 have no supine. But, in- oc- re- cido, -casum. These are all neuter. 
 
 * The compounds change ce into I ; as, abs- co- circum- de- ex- 
 in inter- oc- per- prce- re- sue- cido. These are all active. 
 
 Distinguish abstido, abstidi from c&do, and abscindo, abscidi 
 from scindo. Observe also that the compounds of ccvdo have but 
 
109 
 
 Edo 1 , edi, esum, edere, to eat. 
 (uncommon 9 estum, esse,) 
 Findo*, fidi, fissum, to cleave. 
 Fundo, fudi, fusum, to pour out. 
 Pando 3 , pandi, passum, to open. 
 Pedo*, pepedi, * peditum, to break wind. 
 Pendo, pependi, pensum, to weigh. 
 
 (pendi, per/taps once in Livy,) 
 Scindo 5 , scidi, scissum, to cut. 
 Tendo 6 , tStendi, tensum, to stretch. 
 
 tentum, 
 
 Tundo 7 , tutiidi, tunsum, to beat. 
 tusum, 
 
 Go and gwomake -xi, -ctwn ; as, rego 9 , rexi, rectum^ to rule. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Ago 8 , egi, actum, to act. 
 
 one s in their supine ; those of scindo have a double s. Neither 
 the compounds of cado, nor of ccedo, retain the reduplication of 
 the perfect. 
 
 1 Comestus is found, but it is better to say comesus, as we say 
 ambesus, peresus, &c. Edo and its compounds are generally regular. 
 
 The participle fissus is to be distinguished from Jisus ofjldo. 
 Another verb in ndo retains the n in the perfect, viz.frendo, but 
 its participle is fressus, or fresus^ as if from fressum or fresum. 
 
 3 Some give pansum to pando. Expansus is found ; also dis- 
 pansus. 
 
 4 Some deny peditum ; but the verbal peditum is found in Ca- 
 tullus. 
 
 5 Distinguish conscissum of conscindo from cancisum of conctdo. 
 
 6 Tentum is most common in the compounds. Extensum and 
 extentum are used promiscuously. Ostendo has oftener ostensum 
 than ostentum. The compounds having tentus are not easily di- 
 stinguished from those oiteneo. 
 
 7 The compounds have commonly -tusum. 
 
 " Pergo and surgo -rexi, -rectum. Thus also or- cor- di- e-por- 
 sur- rigo. Some consider pergo as a compound of rego, and some, 
 of ago. 
 
 Deago and conago become dego and cogo. Dego, degi, no su- 
 pine. Cogo, cocgi, coactum. 
 
 Ambigo and vergo want perfect and supine. Clango, ningo, an- 
 go, satago, prodigo, have no supine. Sugo and lingo, rarely. Sue- 
 tus is in Pliny. The supine of lingo is linctum, whence the ver- 
 bal Ijnctus in Pliny, who uses also linctum sulphur. 
 
110 
 
 Figo, fixi, fixum, to fix, (fictus, raro.) 
 Fingo, finxi, fictum, to feign. 
 Frango, Iregi, fractum, to break. 
 Frigo, frixi, frixum, to fry. 
 
 frictum, 
 
 Lego 1 , legi, lectum, to read. 
 Mergo, mersi, mersum, to sink. 
 Mingo, minxi, mictum, to make water. 
 * Pago 9 , pepigi, pactum, tojix in, orjbargain. 
 Pango.*, panxi, pactuin, to strike. 
 Pingo, pinxi, pictum, to paint. 
 Pungo 3 , pupugi, punctum, to prick. 
 Spargo*, sparsi, sparsum, to spread. 
 Stringo, strinxi, strictum, to bind. 
 Tango*, tetigi, tactum, to touch. 
 
 Ho makes -xi, -ctum : as, traho, traxi, tractum, to draw. 
 To, forms variously : as, 
 
 Capio 4 , cepi, captum, to take. 
 Cupio, cupivi, cupitum, to wish. 
 Facio*, feci, factum, to make. 
 Fodio, fodi, fossum, to dig. 
 Fugio, fugi, fugitum, to Jlee. 
 Jacio*, jeci, jactum, to throw. 
 *Lacio 6 , *lexi, * lectum, to allure. 
 Pario 6 , pepcri, partum, to bring forth. 
 paritum, 
 
 1 Di~ intel- neg- ligo, -lexi. lectum. The rest as lego. Some 
 retain the e of lego: as, al- per-prce- re- sub- lego. Others change 
 it into i: as, Col- de- e- recol- se- ligo. 
 
 * Pago is obsolete, instead of which paciscor is used. The com- 
 pounds ofpango, especially those which change a of the present 
 into z, have the perfect of the obsolete pago : as, im- com- sup- 
 pingo, -pegi, -pactum. Oppango also has -egi, -actum. Circum- 
 de- re- pango are said to be formed both ways ; but for -pa?ixi, 
 there does not seem to be sufficient authority. 
 
 8 The compounds have -punxi. Repungo has repupugi or re- 
 punxiy but neither is common. 
 
 4 The changes that take place in spargo, tango, capio, Jacio> 
 jacio, and in many others, when compounded, will be hereafter 
 explained in a connected summary; as these, and the others, 
 undergo similar changes, in a state of composition. 
 
 a Thus the compounds, except elicio which has elicui, elicitum. 
 
 6 Its compounds belong to the fourth conjugation. Partum 
 contracted for paritum is the more usual. The participle pari- 
 turus is found in Cicero, Ovid, &c. 
 
Ill 
 
 Quatio, * qiiassi, quassum, to shake. 
 Rapio, rapui, raptuin, to snatch. 
 
 Sapio ', sapui, , to be wise. 
 
 *Specio 9 , *spexi, *spectum, to see. 
 
 Jo. Mejo, minxi, mictum, to make water. 
 
 L,o 3 makes -ui, -itum : as, molo, molui, moUtum, to grind. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Alo, alui, alitum, reg. to nourish. 
 
 (altum, by syncope) 
 
 * Cello*, *cellui, *celsum, to beat ', excel. 
 Colo 5 , colui, cultum, to till. 
 
 Consulo, consului, consultum, to advise, or consult. 
 Fallo, fefelli, falsum, to deceive. 
 Pello, pepiili, pulsum, to beat. 
 
 Psallo, psalli, , to play on an instrument. 
 
 Sallo, salli, salsum, to salt. 
 Tollo 6 , sustuli, sublaturn, to lift up. 
 Velio 7 , velli, vulsum, to pull. 
 vulsi, 
 
 The usual perfect is sapui; but it had sapivi and sapii; whence 
 its compounds resipio and desipio had also -ivi or -ui, but the lat- 
 ter is preferable. Resipisse and sapisti, formed by syncope, are 
 found, the one in Terence, and the other in Martial. 
 
 This verb is obsolete ; but its compounds are thus formed. 
 Conspicor and suspicor, formed from it, are deponents of the first 
 conjugation. 
 
 3 Noloy volo, malo, refello, have no supine, Attollo and recella 
 no perfect or supine. Ante- ex-prtz- cello, no supine. 
 
 4 Celsus the adjective is used. Ante- ex- prce- cello, -cellui. Ex- 
 celsus and prtecelsus seem to be adjectives. The dictionaries give 
 recello a perfect, without sufficient authority, Percello has per- 
 culi, perculsum. Perculsi seems unwarranted. 
 
 * Thus its compounds, and occulo, which changes o into u. 
 Accolo and circumcolo have no supines. Incidtus does not come 
 from incolo, but is a compound of the participle cultus. 
 
 6 The perfect and supine of tollo come from sustollo. They are 
 likewise borrowed by suffero. In the same way extuli and elatum, 
 from extollo, are lent to effero, when it is used in a similar signifi- 
 cation. 
 
 T Thus, a- con- e- inter- pr<z- re- vello; but generally de- di-per~ 
 f. -velli, -vulsum. This distinction is not rigidly observed. 
 
Ill 
 
 Mo 1 makes wz, it-urn : as, fremo, fremui, fremitum> to roar. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Como 9 , comsi, com turn, to deck. 
 Demo 2 , demsi, demtum, to take away. 
 Emo, emi, emtum, to buy. 
 Premo, pressi, pressum, to press. 
 Promo, promsi, promtum, to bring out, 
 Sumo, sumsi, sumtum, to take. 
 
 No forms variously : as, 
 
 Cano, cecini, cantum, to sing, comp. -cinui and -centum, 
 Cerno 3 , crevi, cretum, to see. 
 Gigno*, genui, genitum, to beget. 
 Lino 5 , levi, Iitum, to daub. 
 
 livi, 
 
 lini, 
 
 Pono, posui, positum f ', to place. 
 Sino 7 , sivi, situm, to permit. 
 Sperno, sprevi, spretum, to despise. 
 Sterno 8 , stravi, stratum, to lay Jtat. 
 Temno 9 , *temsi, *temtum, to despise. 
 
 1 Tremo and its compounds have no supine. 
 
 * The perfects and supines of como, demo, promo, sumo, temno, 
 and the supine of emo, are commonly written with a p ; thus, 
 compsi, emptus, &c. It has been wished to appropriate -psi and 
 -ptum to verbs in -po. The latter mode of spelling is certainly the 
 more common, but the former may be more consonant with analogy. 
 
 3 Thus, de- dis- ex- in- se- cerno. Cretum is but little used, nor 
 crevi, denoting seeing; but it is used when it means, to declare 
 one's self heir, to decree, or to enter upon an estate. 
 
 * Gigno borrows its perfect and supine from the obsolete geno. 
 
 * The usual perfect is levi. Lini is said to be in Quintilian. 
 Levi may come from * leo. Livi is in Columella. 
 
 8 Repostus for repositus is a frequent poetical contraction ; also 
 compostus, for compositus. 
 
 7 Sivi is sometimes contracted into sii, especially in the com- 
 pound : as, desino, desivi, but oftener desii. Sini is found in an- 
 tient authors. Some dictionaries give sinitum, but I find no autho- 
 rity for it. 
 
 9 Consterno is of the first conjugation, when it denotes mental 
 agitation ; when it is applied to body, it is of the third ; but this 
 distinction is not rigidly observed. The same remark is applicable 
 to exstemo. 
 
 The perfect and supine of this verb are not used out of composi- 
 tion; but contemno, contemsi, contemtum. See note 2. 
 
113 
 Po makes psi, ptum : as, carpo, carpsi, carptum^ to pluck. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Rumpo, rupi, ruptum, to break. 
 
 Strepo, strepui, strepltum, to make a noise. 
 
 Quo. There are only two in quo ; 
 
 Coquo, coxi, coctum, to boil. 
 Linquo 1 , liqui, *lictum, to leave. 
 
 Ro 9 makes ssi, stum : as, gero, gessi, gestum, to carry. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Curro, cucurri, cursum, to run. 
 
 Fero, tuli, latum, to bear. 
 
 Quaero, quaesivi, quaesitum, to seek. 
 
 *Sero 3 , *serui, *sertum, to lay in order. 
 
 Sero*, sevi, satuin, to sow. 
 
 Tero, trivi, tritum, to wear. 
 
 Verro 5 , verri, versum, to sweep. 
 
 1 De- re- dere- linquo, ~liqui, -lictum. 
 
 * Furo and sujffero have no perfect or supines. This is said 
 ofsuffero, signifying bearing or suffering; but when it signifies to 
 carry away, it borrows sustuli and sublatum from tollo or sustollo ; 
 yet, some grammarians deny a preterite and supine to sujfero, in 
 any sense, and always refer sustuli and sublatum to tollo. Indeed, 
 there seems some disagreement among grammarians, in regard to 
 these verbs ; many, guided by a certain analogy, asserting that the 
 preterite and supine commonlyassigned to tollo, come from sitffero. 
 In the same way, they refer extuli and datum to effero, which, they 
 say, lends them to extollo. It seems clear to me, that tuli and la. 
 turn (said to be a contraction oftolatum,) are borrowed byfero it- 
 self from tolo or tulo ; and that, if borrowed by the original, sim- 
 ple verb, they must still be considered as borrowed by its com- 
 pounds. Attuli and allatum are, however, generally referred to 
 affero, as they are not used in the signification ofattollo, which, in 
 course, is said to be without preterite or supine. 
 
 s The compounds of sero that denote arranging or linking to- 
 gether, are thus formed ; being As- con- de~ dis- edis- ex- in- inter- 
 sero. 
 
 4 Those that denote planting or solving, thus : as, as- con- circum* 
 de- dis- in- inter- pro- re- sub- tran- sero t -sevi, -situm, a being 
 changed into i t in the supines. 
 
 * Some give verro the perfect versi ; but verri is far prefe- 
 rable. 
 
 I 
 
So makes sivt> sltum : as, arcesso *, arcessivi, arcessltum, to 
 send for. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Depso 9 , depsui, depstum, to knead. 
 
 Incesso, incessi, , to attack. 
 
 Pinso, pinsi, pinsitum, to bake. 
 pinsui, pinsum, 
 pistum, 
 Viso 3 , visi, , to visit. 
 
 To forms variously : thus, 
 
 Flecto, flexi, flexum, to bend. 
 Meto, messui, messum, to reap. 
 Mitto, misi, missum, to send. 
 Necto, nexui, nexum, to tie. 
 
 nexi, 
 
 Peto, petivi, petitum, to seek. 
 Pecto, pexi, pexum, to comb. 
 
 pexui, 
 Plecto*, plexui, plexum, to plait. 
 
 plexi, 
 Sisto, stiti, statum, to stop (active). 
 
 Sisto 5 , , , to stand (neuter). 
 
 Sterto, stertui, , to snore. 
 
 Verto, verti, versum, to turn. 
 
 1 Arcesso, capesso, facesso, lacesso, are said by some to have ii 
 and i, by Syncope. The syncopated perfect is the only one left to 
 incesso, Incessui is once found. 
 
 8 Some grammarians give depso no supine. The dictionaries 
 give it depsitum, which, by syncope, becomes depstum ; and hence 
 the participle depsius, which Cato uses. 
 
 3 Reviso and inviso are said by some to have supines ; but since 
 visum is denied to viso t as being the supine of video, whence viso 
 itself is formed, upon the same principle inmsum and revisum are 
 to be referred to invideo and revideo. 
 
 4 Whether in the sense of plaiting or of punishing, either pre- 
 terite is very uncommon. 
 
 5 'Sisto (neuter) is said to borrow steti, statum from sto The 
 compounds, have -stiti, -stitum: as, as- circuin- con- de- ex- in~ 
 inter- ob per- re- sub- sisto, -stiti, -stitum. Absisto has no supine ; 
 nor'are the supines of the others authorized. 
 
 
115 
 
 Uo l makes ui, utum : as, tribuo, tribui, tributum, to bestow. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Fluo, fluxi, fluxum, to flow. 
 Ruo-, rui, ruitum, to rush. 
 Struo, struxi, structum, to build. 
 
 Fo 3 makes vi, utum: as, volvo, volvi, volutum, to roll. 
 
 EXCEPTION. 
 
 Vivo, vixi, victum, to live. 
 Xo* makes ui, turn: as, texo^ texui^ textum, to weave. 
 
 THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 The fourth conjugation makes wi, Itum : as, audio 5 , 
 audivi 6 , auditum> to hear. 
 
 1 These have no supines : metuo, pluo, congruo, ingruo, respuo, 
 annuo, abnuo, innuo, renuo. Luo has lui (luitum, seldom). Its 
 compounds, lutum : as, diluo, dilui, dilutum. Batuo and duo have 
 no supines ; but the verbs themselves have become obsolete. 
 
 Fluo seems to have had jluctiim, as well asjluxum ; hence the 
 verbal fiuctus. 
 
 2 The compounds have -rutum. Corruo and irruo are not found 
 in the supine. Eruiturus is found as well as eruturus. Ruiturus 
 is in Lucan. 
 
 3 Calvo, calvi, calvere ; and calvor t calvi, are obsolete. 
 
 * Nexui and nexum come rather from necto than nexo. Nexo 
 belongs to the first conjugation. But some grammarians write 
 nexo, nexis, nexui, nexum, nexere. 
 
 ' Eo and queo are the only simple verbs in eo that belong to 
 this conjugation, and both have itum in the supine. The com- 
 pounds likewise ; except ambio, ambitum. These want the su- 
 pine ; ccecutio, gestio, glocio, dementio, ineptio, ferocio. Obedio 
 (perhaps ob-audio) is a neuter verb; and consequently not used 
 in the passive voice, but as an impersonal verb, hence obeditum 
 est, in Livy. It has obediturus, as if from obeditum, the supine 
 usually given to it. There is not sufficient authority for the su- 
 pines of as- circum- sub- pro- silio ; but the verbs assulto and sub- 
 sulto ; arid the nouns assultus and subsultus are found, formed from 
 a supine. Aio andferio want perfect and supine ; but aio has the 
 2d persons of the perfect. Likewise verbs denoting desire, and 
 ending in -urio ; except esurio, -im, itum ; parturio -ivi, but for 
 this last there is only modern authority, and perhaps nupturio ivi. 
 Nupturisse Apuleius. Esuriturus Ter. Parturiit Buchanan. 
 
 6 In one instance Cicero is said to have usedpunitus es, instead 
 o? punivisti ; -Cujus tu inimicissimum multo crudelius punitus es. 
 
 12 
 
116 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Amicio, amicui, amictum, to cover. 
 
 amixi, (seldom,) 
 
 amicivi, (male,) 
 
 Cambio, campsi, campsum, to change money, (obs,) 
 Farcio, farsi, fartum, to cram. 
 Fulcio, fulsi, fultum, to support. 
 Haurio 1 , hausi, haustum, to draw out. 
 
 (seld. hausum,) 
 
 Raufcio, rausi, rausum, to be hoarse. 
 Salio 2 , salui, saltum, to leap. 
 Sancio 3 , sanxi, sanctum, to ratify. 
 
 sancivi, sancitum, 
 Sarcio, sarsi, sartum, to mend. 
 Sentio, sensi, sensum, to feel. 
 Sepelio, sepelivi, sepultum, to bury. 
 Sepio*, sepsi, septum, to inclose. 
 
 sepivi, (seld.) 
 Singultio 6 , singultivi, singultum, to sob. 
 
 Veneo 6 , venii, , to be sold. 
 
 Venio, veni, ventum, to come. 
 Vincio, vinxi, vinctum, to bind. 
 
 1 Hauriturus is found. Hausurus, Virgil. Hausturus, Cicero. 
 
 a Salio makes salui or salii, but for the former there are superior 
 authorities. The compounds have -silui or -silii, -sultum. As- 
 circum- sub- pro- sultum, are unauthorized: but some verbs are 
 found which seem formed from assultum and subsultum. See 
 note 5, in the preceding page. 
 
 3 Sancivi is sometimes contracted into sancii, as sancitum is into 
 sanctum ; and hence the participle sanctus. Sanxi is almost uni- 
 versally used ; and sanctus is much more common than sancitus, 
 and rests on much better authority. 
 
 4 Sepivissent is in Livy ; or rather perhaps sepissent. But Gro- 
 novius conjectures that sepsissent ought to be read. The passage 
 is XLIV. 39. 
 
 5 Singultum, formed, by Syncope, from singultitum, as sepultum 
 is from sepelitum, is preferred to singultitum t on account of the 
 noun singultus derived from it, but neither is common. 
 
 * Some give veneo a supine, venum ; but this is considered as a 
 noun, which, compounded with eo, forms veneo itself. Venii may 
 be contracted from venivi. 
 
117 
 Compounds ofpario, a verb of the third conjugation. 
 
 1 
 
 DEPONENT VERBS. 
 
 To form the perfect of a deponent verb, suppose an ac- 
 tive voice ; from the supine of which, formed by preceding 
 rules, comes the participle in -tus, -sits, or -xus, which, added 
 to sum or fui, constitutes the perfect : thus, gratulor, gratu- 
 latus sum, as if from gratulo, gratulavi, gratulatum, 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 In the first conjugation all the deponent verbs are formed 
 regularly. 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 The second conjugation has the following 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 Fateor, fassus sum, to confess. 
 Misereor, misertus sum, to pity. 
 
 miseritus, (Liv. and others.) 
 Reor, ratus sum, to think. 
 
 THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 Apiscor 3 , aptus sum, to get. 
 Comminiscor, commentus sum, to devise. 
 Expergiscor, experrectus sum, to awake. 
 
 1 Thus also the double compounds, adaperio, adoperio, coope- 
 rio. Comperi, not compertus sum, is found as the preterite of corw- 
 perior. Comperio and reperio are perhaps compounds of the ob- 
 solete perio or perior, whence periculum, peritus, and experior, are 
 formed, rather than of pario. 
 
 8 The verb sarrio or sario belongs to this conjugation. It is 
 formed regularly by -ivi, -itum. It has also sarrui ; and Mr. R. 
 Johnson quotes two instances from Cat. c. 3, in which sarseris is 
 used as a part of this verb ; but may it not come rather from sarcio? 
 Columella uses sarrivisse, xi. 2. Sarueris is said to be found in 
 Cato; but some read sarrieris. In regard to the supine, sarritura 
 is found in Columella ; sartura is in Pliny, xviii. 27> which implies 
 the existence of sartum, as well as 4 sarritum. 
 
 3 Apiscor is but little used : its compounds are adipiscor and in. 
 dipiscor, -eptus* 
 
118 
 
 Fruor 1 , fruitus sum, to enjoy. 
 
 fructus, 
 Gradior, gressus sum, to go. 
 
 (ol.) grassus, 
 
 Irascor 9 , iratus sum, to be angry. 
 Labor, lapsus sum, to slide. 
 Loquor, locutus sum, to speak. 
 
 loquutus, 
 
 Morior 3 , mortuus sum, to die. 
 Nanciscor, nactus sum, to get. 
 Nascor*, natus sum, to be born. 
 Nitor 5 , nisus sum, to endeavour. 
 
 nixus, 
 
 Obliviscor, oblTtus sum, to forget. 
 Orior*, ortus sum, oriri, to rise. 
 Paciscor, pactus sum, to bargain. 
 Patior, passus sum, to suffer. 
 Proficiscor, profectus sum, to go. 
 Queror, questus sum, to complain. 
 Sequor, secutus sum, to follow. 
 
 sequutus, 
 
 Ulciscor, ultus sum, to revenge. 
 Utor, usus sum, to use. 
 
 The verb potior has potiri, and belongs to the fourth con- 
 jugation ; but is used, by the poets, in the 3d and 4th, who, 
 however, prefer potttur of the third 6 . 
 
 FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 Metior, mensus sum, to measure^ 
 metitus, (male.) 
 
 1 Fruitus is said to be the more common ; notwithstanding, from 
 fructus come the noun fructus, and the participles perfructus and 
 Jructurus. Lucretius uses fructus sum, iii. 953. Petfructus is at- 
 tributed to Cicero. Fruitus sum is in Seneca, epist. -93. 
 
 * Iratus is considered as an adjective. 
 
 3 The infinitive ofmorlor is mori; sometimes, as in Plautus and 
 Ovid, moriri. Emoriri is in Terence. The participle is moriturus. 
 
 * The future participles active of nascor and orior are also nas- 
 citurus and oriturus. In the imperfect subjunctive orirctur is uni- 
 versally found instead oforeretur; also in the compounds. la any 
 other parts, it is seldom found to follow the fourth conjugation. 
 
 * Con- in- ob~ re- sub- nitor, -xus oftener than -sus. Annitor 
 -xus, and -sus, promiscuously. Enixus is generally applied to a 
 birth ; otherwise, enisus. 
 
 6 Pofitur, Virg. Poteretur, V. Flacc. Poteremur, Ovid. 
 Poterentur, Propert. 
 
119 
 
 Ordior 1 , orsus sum, to begin. 
 Experior, expertus sum, to try. 
 Opperior*, oppertus sum, (Ter.) to wait for. 
 opperitus, (Plant.) 
 
 COMPOUNDED VERBS. 
 GENERAL RULE. 
 
 Compounded verbs form their perfect and supine in the 
 same manner as the simple verbs : thus, red-amo, red-amavi, 
 red-amatum^ to love again. 
 
 But the following changes, which happen to the preposi- 
 tion, and to the simple verb, in a state of composition, merit 
 attention. 
 
 A, Ab 9 Abs. 
 
 A is used in composition before m and r. Ab before 
 vowels, and d 9 f, k, j, /, n, r, s. Before fero and fugio, it 
 becomes au : as, aufero, aufugio. Abs is used before c and 
 t : as, abscedo, abstuli. 
 
 Ad. 
 
 Ad changes d into the first letter of the simple, beginning 
 with c 9 f, gy /, 7i 9 p 9 r, s 9 t : as, accurro^ afficio 9 aggero. In 
 some writers it remains unaltered, as adficio. 
 
 Am (ambe or ambi from a^j, circum). 
 Am, before c, q, f 9 h, is changed into an : as, anquiro, an- 
 helo. Sometimes it assumes its own b : as, ambio. 
 
 Circum. 
 
 Circum remains unaltered. The m is sometimes changed : 
 as, circundo for circumdo ; omitted : as, circueo for circumeo. 
 
 1 Some give ordior, orditus, when it signifies to weave ; but 
 this rests chiefly on modern authority. 
 
 a The following have no perfect ; vescor, liquor, medeor, remi- 
 niscor, irascor, ringor, pr<revertor, diffit-eor, divertor, defetiscor. 
 Divertor and prczvertor are said to borrow perfects from diverto 
 and pr&vcrto, for -diver sus sum and prczversus sum are not used. 
 In the same way, revertor, though it has reversus sum, borrows 
 reverti from reverto, which is an uncommon verb. The word rictus 
 is a substantive derived from the obsolete ringo. Diffessus is 
 hardly to be found. Fatiscor is a very uncommon worcl. Such 
 words as ratus, iratns , fessus , defcssus ; and cassus and lassus are 
 considered as adjectives. 
 
120 
 
 Con (for cum). 
 
 Con, before a vowel or h 9 drops the n : as, coaleo, cohi- 
 beo ; before /, its n becomes /, and before b, p, m, it becomes 
 m : and before r it changes n into r ; as, colligo, comburo, 
 comparo, commeo, corripio. In comburo it assumes b after 
 it. 
 
 Di, Dis. 
 
 Di is used before d, g 9 I, m, n 9 v : as, diduco, digladior. 
 Dis and di before r : as, disrumpo, dirumpo ,- likewise before 
 j : as, disjudicO) dijudico. Dis is used before c, p 9 q, s, t : as, 
 discumbo, dispello. Before sp and st, s is removed, and be- 
 foreyit is changed into/": as, dispicio, disto 9 diffiteor. Be- 
 fore a vowel, it assumes r : as, dirimo, from emo. 
 
 E,Ex. 
 
 E is found before &, d, g, /, m, n, r, and before j and v : 
 as, ebibo, edttco, ejicio, eveho. Ex is used before vowels, and 
 #, c, p 9 a, t, s : as, exaro, exhibeo, excutio : before f, x be- 
 comes f: as, efficio. 
 
 In. 
 
 In sometimes changes n into the first letter of the simple 
 verb : as, illudo ; but before b, m, p, it changes n into m : as, 
 imbibo, immineo, impleo. 
 
 Ob. 
 
 Ob generally remains unaltered. The b is sometimes 
 omitted, as in omitto ; or changed into the first letter of the 
 simple verb : as, offero. 
 
 He, Pro. 
 
 Re assumes d before d, a vowel, or h : as, reddo, redamo, 
 redeoy redhibeo. Pro likewise sometimes takes a d, as in pro- 
 deo< 
 
 Sub. 
 
 Sub changes b into the consonant of the simple, before c, 
 f> g> m 9 P> r: as > succedo, suffero, suggero. Submitto and sum- 
 mitto; submoveo and summoveo, are both used. 
 
 Trans. 
 
 Trans is generally contracted into tra, before d,j, n : as, 
 trado, trajiciO) trano ; and sometimes before I and m : as, 
 traluceo, trameo. Post becomes pos in postuli. Few if any 
 changes take place in the other prepositions. Other pre- 
 fixes consist of verbs, as in calefacio, of caleo , of adverbs, 
 as in benefacio, of bene ; of participles and adjectives, as in 
 mansuefacio, magnifico, ofma?isuetus and magnus; of substan- 
 tives, as in significo, of signum ; of a preposition and noun, 
 as in animadvertOy of ad and animus. 
 
 
121 
 
 OF THE PRESENT. 
 
 The following simple verbs, when in composition, change 
 a into e : 
 
 Arceo fallo , lacto patro 
 
 *cando farcio mando sacro 
 
 capto 1 fatiscor pario scando 
 
 carpo gradior partio spargo 
 
 damno jacto patior tracto. 
 
 But we find amando 9 prcemando, prtedamno 9 ablacto (sel- 
 dom), desacrO) pertracto, retracto. Parco makes comparco 
 or comperco. Paciscor makes depeciscor. Canto changes a 
 in occento. Halo with ex remains unaltered ; as, exhalo ; 
 but we find anhelo. 
 
 These change , CE and e 9 into i. 
 
 Cado habeo quaero statuo 
 
 caedo laedo rapio taceo 
 
 cano lateo salio, to leap, tango 
 
 egeo placeo sapio teneo. 
 
 But we find com- per- placeo ; post- ante- habeo. Prce* 
 habeo becomes prcebeo ; oc- re- cano are sometimes found. 
 
 These change a and e into i 9 in the present only. 
 
 Ago fateor pango *specio, 
 
 apiscor frango premo 
 
 capio jacio rego 
 
 emo * lacio sedeo 
 
 Except coemo, cogo (for con-ago) 9 dego (for de-ago\ 
 circum- sat- per- ago. Sursum-erigo (e-rego) becomes surgo 9 
 and per-rego* becomes per go. 
 
 1 Such words as the following may be formed at once from the 
 supine of the primitive compounded, viz. accepto from acceptum ; 
 delecto from delectum, the supine of the obsolete delicio. 
 
 * I was at a loss to determine whether I should consider pergo 
 as a compound of rego, or of ago. From its having an x in the 
 perfect it seems to come from rego. But it may be observed, that 
 x is composed of gs, or of cs, and that the latter of these is some- 
 times omitted ; that^czo, although in fed it uses but one of these 
 letters, yet mfaxim and^^o (facsim andfacso) uses both; that 
 lego, in some of its compounds, has the g only, and in others, the 
 gs or x ; and that ago, in the language whence the Latin ago is 
 probably derived, has an a; () in some of its parts ; so that the 
 coincidence of the perfects in regard to rego and pergo, does not 
 seem satisfactorily decisive of the derivation of the latter. To 
 
122 
 
 Antecapio and anticipo ; superjacio and superjicio are both 
 used. Circum- super- sedeo ; de- ob- re- pango. Facio com- 
 pounded with a preposition changes a into i as, afficio, 
 interjicio. Such compounds have the imperative in e ; and 
 form their passive regularly, by adding r to o. The other 
 compounds with verbs, nouns or adjectives, do not change 
 the a, and have the imperative in c, throwing away the e : 
 and their passive voice is like Jio : as, calefacio, calefac, ca- 
 lefio. Some compounds with nouns and adjectives, throw 
 away the i which precedes o, and are of the first conjuga- 
 tion: as, significo, Itftifico, magnifico 1 . 
 
 Specio forms some compounds in the same way ; as, con- 
 spicoi* and suspicor, deponents of the first conjugation. 
 
 Lego, compounded with con, de, di, e, inter, nee, se, 
 changes e into i : as, colligo, deligo ; but at- pr<z- per- re- 
 sub- trans- lego. 
 
 Calco and salto compounded change a into u : as, incidco, 
 insulto. 
 
 Plaudo, compounded, changes au into o : as, explodo ,- 
 except applaudo. 
 
 Audio changes au into e in obedio. 
 
 Causo, claudo, lavo, quatio, throw away a, and Iwoo turns 
 v into u : as, accuso, recludo, deluo (or from luo), percutio. 
 
 Juro changes u into e in dejero and pejero. Its other com- 
 pounds retain the u. 
 
 OF THE PERFECT. 
 
 Compounds throw away the reduplication of the perfect: 
 as, pello, pepuli ; compello, compuli. The second conjuga- 
 tion drops the reduplication entirely : as, spondeo, spospondi; 
 respondeo, rcspondi. The compounds of do, sto, disco and 
 poscOy retain it : as, circundedi, addidi, astiti, edidici, depo- 
 posci. Prendo for prehendo has prendidi as well as prendi. 
 Repungo retains it in repupugi. Ac- con- de- dis- ex- in- oc- 
 per- pr<z- pro- curro, sometimes have the reduplication, and 
 
 this it may be added, thatpergo, though neuter, is sometimes used 
 actively, in nearly the same sense as pcrago; and that as cogo (con- 
 ago) and colligo (con-lego) convey similar ideas, and are, neither 
 of them, very different from cruv-ayw, whence ago may be sup- 
 posed to be derived, it is not very improbable, that ago may, in 
 sense , at Ifeast, form the basis of re.go, lego, pergo and surgo. Still, 
 upon the score of formation, it is expedient to consider pcrgo as 
 per-rego. The rest is mere conjecture. 
 
 1 But bencfacito, calejacito and the like, are more common than 
 bencfac, &c. 
 
123 
 
 sometimes not Circum- re- sue- trans- ctirro, seldom or never 
 have it. Some changes in the perfects of certain simple verbs 
 as, solid into silui ,- cecini into cinui have been noticed 
 under their conjugations. 
 
 OF THE SUPINE. 
 
 These compounded change a into e. 
 
 Cantum carptum fartum partum sparsum. 
 cap turn factum 1 jactum rap turn 
 
 Also the participles, aptus, Jassus^ and passtts. Observe 
 that compounds in -do and -go ; and the compounds of 
 placeo, habeO) sapio, salio and statno^ though they change a 
 of the simple verb into 2, do not take e in their supine : as, 
 recido, recasum ; adigo^ adactum ; displiceo, displicitum ; pro- 
 hibeo, prohibition ; desipio (desipitum 2 ) ,- insilio, insultum , 
 instituO) institutum. 
 
 The simple verbs with which the following are compound- 
 ed, are either obsolete, or but little known ; adipiscor, indi- 
 piscor> defendo, offendo, aspicio, conspicio^ experior, compe- 
 rior, expedio, impedio, doleo, imbuo, compcllo- as^ appello 
 -as, incendo, accendo, ingruo, congruo, infligo, qffligo, con- 
 jligo, instigo, impleo, compleo, renideo, connweo^ percello, im- 
 e- pra- mineo, alUcio, illicio, induo, exuo, and some others. 
 
 OF VERBS DEFECTIVE IN THEIR PRIMARY PARTS. 
 
 The following lines contain a connected view of the prin- 
 cipal verbs that are defective in perfects or supines. 
 
 SUPINES. 
 
 These have no supines : 
 
 The compounds of nuo and gruo. 
 Those of cado ; except incido, occido, recido. 
 Neuters in -veo ; and arceo 8 . 
 
 Neuters in eo, ui ; except caleo, careo, coaleo, doleo,jaceo, 
 lateo 3 , liceo, merco, noceo, oleo, pareo, -placco, taczo 3 , valeo. 
 The rest are comprehended in these verses : 
 
 1 In the compounds only that change a of the present into t. 
 
 a This word does not appear to have a supine. 
 
 3 See arceo, lateo, taceo, iu the second conjugation, luo in the 
 third, and mico in the first. Several additional remarks on simple 
 and compound verbs will be found under their respective conju- 
 gations. 
 
124- 
 
 Algeo cum timeo, sic urgeo, lugeo, fulgeo, 
 
 Frigeo, cum sileo, sic turgeo, luceo, strideo ; 
 
 Ango, clango, luo 1 , disco, compesco, quinisco, 
 
 Dego, lambo, mico 1 , dispesco, posco, refello, 
 
 Incesso, metuo, ningo, cum prodigo, psallo, 
 
 Stride, scabo, pluo, sido, cum respuo, rudo, 
 
 Sterto, tremo, sapio, satago, cum veneo, viso ; 
 
 Csecutit, glocio, dementio, gestit, ineptit, 
 
 His et prosilio 2 , pariterque ferocio jungas. 
 
 These have neither perfect nor supine. 
 
 Verbs in -sco, that signify to grow, or to begin ; 
 
 Verbs in -urio, signifying desire ; except parturio, esurio, 
 and nupturio. Also 
 
 Flaveo, cum scateo, liveoque, renideo, polleo, 
 
 Nexo, aveo, denseo, glabreo, cum lacteo, mcereo; 
 
 Ainbigo, sisto 3 , furo, ferio, labo, vergo, recello, 
 
 Divertor, plico, praevertor, liquet et reminiscor, 
 
 Piffiteor, ringor, medeor, vescorque, liquor^. 
 Verbs 'which borrow tenses from others : 
 
 Inceptives in -sco borrow their perfects from their primi- 
 tives: as, tepesco, tepui, from tepeo : their supines also: as, 
 abolesco, -evi, -itum, from aboleo. 
 
 Ferio, percussi, percussum, from percutio ; 
 
 Fero, tuli, latum, from tulo ; 
 
 Furo, insanivi, insanitum, from insanio ; 
 
 Meio, minxi, mictum, from mingo ; 
 
 Sido, sedi, sessum, from sedeo ; 
 
 Sum, fui, futurus, from fuo, obsolete , 
 
 Tollo, sustuli, sublatum, from suffero, or rather sustollo ; 
 
 Liquor, liquefactus sum, from liquefio ; 
 
 Medeor, medicatus sum, from medicor, deponent ; 
 
 Reminiscor, recordatus sum, from recorder ; 
 
 Vescor, pastus sum, from pascor*, &c. 
 
 1 See note 3, in the preceding page. 
 See salio, in the fourth conjugation. 
 
 3 Sisto neuter. See sisto, third conjugation. 
 
 4 Whether, strictly speaking, all these perfects and supines 
 can be said to be really borrowed by the defective verbs, or to be 
 used instead of their defective tenses, it is perhaps impossible, 
 nor is it of much importance, to determine. At any rate, they 
 are used in the same, or nearly the same, signification, in which 
 the defective tenses would have been used ; but still, it may be, 
 that they are used, not as upon loan, but chiefly as tenses of their 
 own verbs, with whose signification that of the defective verbs 
 happens to coincide. 
 
125 
 
 NEUTER.PASSIVE VERBS. 
 
 Audeo, gaudeo, soleo, Jido, and Jio. The first four, neuter 1 
 verbs, though they have an active termination, have a pas- 
 sive preterite ; and hence their name. Th simple tenses 
 are active in termination, the compound, passive. They are 
 thus conjugated. 
 
 Audeo 1 , ausus sum, audere, to dare, "1 - , ^, 
 
 Gaudeo, gavisus sum, gaudere, to rejoice, f on - 
 Soleo 2 , solitus sum, solere, to use, ) " 
 
 Fido 3 , fisus sum, fidere, to trust of the 3d. 
 Fio*, factus sum, fieri, to be made of the 3d or 4-th. 
 
 The following peculiarities happen to words which are 
 not commonly deemed defective, nor very irregular in their 
 termination. 
 
 Neither dor nor der*, the presents passive of do, nor for 
 nor fer are used; we say daris vel dare, &c. ; faris velfare, 
 &c. But in composition we find addor, condor, &c. Effbr 
 and affbr are scarcely used. 
 
 Furo is not used in the first person singular of the present 
 indicative. 
 
 Sci, the second person singular of the imperative of scio, 
 is obsolete. 
 
 Die, due, fac, fer, are used as imperatives instead of dice, 
 duce, &c. Face, adduce, abduce, dice, edice, addice and Mice 
 are found, but very seldom. The compounds offacio, that 
 change a into i, as has been formerly mentioned, retain the 
 e ; as, office, infice, perfce. 
 
 ABUNDANTS. 
 
 Of the abundants, some abound in signification, being 
 
 1 Audendus is used by Livy ; and auderi is used by Cornelius. 
 * Soluerat is attributed to Sallust. 
 
 9 Thus confido, and dijfido. Confido has confidi also, accord- 
 ing to Livy ; and diffidi is in Quintilian. 
 
 4 Thus the compounds offacio with nouns, verbs or adverbs. 
 Fio is the passive voice offacio. To these, some add mcereo, 
 mcestus sum, mcerere. Mcestus sum belongs also to mcereor ; and 
 by some mcestus is considered merely as an adjective. Exulo, 
 liceo, vapulo, and veneo, are neuter verbs, and, because expressed 
 in English by the passive voice, have been termed neuter-passives. 
 Liceor is a deponent verb, and has an active signification. 
 
 5 Deris and demur, and the other parts ofjaris (except fatur, 
 fare of the imperative, fans, fatus nndfandus,fandi andfando) 
 
 seem obsolete. Virgil uscsfabor. Jfcn. i. 261. 
 
126 
 
 either neuter, or active : as, maneo, I remain, or I wait for ; 
 some have an active or passive signification : as, criminor, I 
 blame or am blamed. 
 
 Others abound in termination : as, assentio and assentior. 
 
 Others in conjugation : as, of 
 
 The Jirst, Lavo, lavas; of the third, rarely, Lavo, lavis. 
 The second, Ferveo, ferves; Fervo, fervis. 
 
 Strideo, strides; Stride, stridis. 
 
 Tueor, tueris; Tuor, tueris. 
 
 Tergeo, terges ; (used in both) Tergo, tergis. 
 
 Fulgeo, fulges; Fulgo, fulgis. 
 
 The third, Fodio, fodts; ofthefourth,rarely,Yo&o, fodis. 
 
 Sallo, sallis ; Sallio, sallis. 
 
 Morior, moreris; M orior, morlr is. 
 
 Orior, oreris ; Orior, orlris. 
 
 Potior, poteris; Potior, potiris. 
 
 Note That orior and pot tor are always of the 4th, in the 
 infinitive. 
 
 Others abound in certain tenses. Thus the following are 
 said to have a perfect of an active or a passive termination ; 
 juro, nubo, placeo, punio, suesco. The abundant impersonals 
 will be found among the Impersonals. Edo, an abundant, 
 will be found among the Irregulars. Among abundants (but 
 it is a misapplication of the term), have sometimes been 
 reckoned verbs which, in some of their principal parts, re- 
 semble each other; but which differ in their signification, and 
 often in their conjugation. 
 
 1 . Some agree in the present : as, 
 
 Aggero, -as, to heap up. Aggero, -is, to bring together. 
 
 Appello, -as, to call. Appello, -is, to arrive. 
 
 Compello, -as, to address. Compello, -is, to compel. 
 
 Colligo, -as, to bind. 
 Consterno, -as, to astonish. 
 Effero, -as, to enrage. 
 Fundo, -as, to found. 
 Mando, -as, to command. 
 Obsero, -as, to lock. 
 Volo, -as, tojly. 
 
 Some change their quantity likewise : as, 
 
 Colo, -as, to strain. Colo, -is, to till. 
 
 Dico, -as, to dedicate. Dico, -is, to say. 
 
 Educo, -as, to educate. Educo, -is, to bring out. 
 
 Colligo, -is, to collect. 
 Consterno, -is, to strew. 
 Effero, -iers, to bring out. 
 Fundo, -is, to pour out. 
 Mando, -is, to chew. 
 Obsero, -is, to sow over. 
 Volo, vis, to will. 
 
127 
 
 Lego, -as, to send. Lego, -is, to read. 
 
 Vado, -as, to wade. Vado, -is, to go. 
 
 2. Some agree in their perfects : as, 
 
 acui, to be sour. Acuo, acui, to sharpen. 
 
 Cresco, crevi, to grow. Cerno, crevi, to see. 
 
 FrigeOy.frixi, to be cold. Frigo, frixi, to fry. 
 
 Fulgeo, fulsi, to shine. Fulcio, fulsi, to prop. 
 
 Luceo, luxi, to shine. Lugeo, luxi, to mourn. 
 
 Paveo, pavi, to be afraid. Pasco, pavi, to feed. 
 
 Pendeo, pependi \ to hang. Pendc, pependi, to weigh. 
 
 3. Some agree in their supines : as, 
 
 Cresco, cretum, to grow. Cerno, cretum, to see. 
 
 Maneo, mansum, to stay. Mando, mansuni, to chew. 
 
 Sto, statum, to stand. Sisto, statum, to stop. 
 
 Succenseo, -censum, to be Succenck), -censum, to burn. 
 
 angry. 
 
 Teneo, tentum, to hold. Tendo, tentum, to stretch. 
 
 Verro, versum, to sweep. Verto, versum, to turn. 
 
 Vinco, victum, to conquer. Vivo, victum, to live. 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 (1) The verbs commonly reckoned irregular are sum, eo 9 
 queo, volo, edo 9 fero 9 fa, and their compounds. 
 
 (2) The compounds of sum are ad.- ab- de- inter- in-pra- 
 ob- sub- super- pro- pos- sum. Insum wants the perfect and 
 the parts formed from it. Prosum takes in a d after pro, 
 whenever sum begins with an e. Possum (which is Potsum, 
 for potis- or pote- sum.,} changes the t when it is followed by 
 an $ 9 into s. In other respects the t is retained, but they of 
 sum is thrown out ; as, potui, potueram, &c. Potessem and 
 potesse are contracted into possem and posse. Potestur is 
 found in the passive. 
 
 (3) The compounds of eo are all conjugated like eo 9 ex- 
 cept ambio, which belongs to the fourth conjugation. Trans- 
 eo and pratereo have sometimes -iam in the future indica- 
 tive. In the compounds, ivi, ivisti, &c. are generally con- 
 tracted into ii 9 iisti, &c. 
 
 1 To these may be added the compounds of sto and of r.isto: 
 thus, consto, constiti; consisto, constiti ; inslo, instiii ; insisto, in- 
 stiti, &c. Some have added the compounds of fero and tollo : 
 as, confero, contuli ; contollo, contidi; effero, extuli; extollo, extuli ; 
 profero, proiuli ; protollo, protuli. But these preterites are better 
 referred tofero, exclusively. Concerning sustuli, which some re- 
 fer to suffero, and some to "tollo, or sustotto, mention has already 
 been made. 
 
128 
 
 (4) Queo and nequeo are conjugated like eo ; but have no 
 imperative mood, or gerunds, and seldom participles. Quitus, 
 queuntur, queatur : nequeor, nequitur are rarely found. 
 
 (5) The compounds of volo are nolo (non volo} and malo 
 (magis volo}. Their gerunds seem to rest on no good au- 
 thority. 
 
 (6) Edo, although reckoned among the irregulars, is a 
 regular verb of the third conjugation ; but in some parts in 
 which it seems to fall in with stim, it is abundant. Its com- 
 pounds are conjugated like it. Estur, in the passive, is found 
 as well as editur. 
 
 (7) Fero borrows tidi 9 and latum (supposed to be con- 
 tracted for tolatum or tulatum) from the obsolete tulo. Its 
 compounds are conjugated like it. 
 
 (8) Fio is commonly considered as the passive of facto 1 , 
 some of the compounds of which have their passive in ^fio 9 
 and others in ^ficior^ as has been explained under the Com- 
 pounded Verbs. 
 
 1 The ingenious author of an excellent little Grammar observes, that " fio 
 is absurdly supposed to be the passive voice of facio ; whereas it came from 
 Qua, which gave birth to fui, the perfect of sum." Is not this remark rather 
 harsh ; and does it not involve the very circumstance which the intelligent 
 author wishes to reprehend ? It is certainly true that fio comes from Qva ; 
 hence the obsolete fuo which gives to sum, fui, fueram, forem (or fuerem) t 
 fuerim, fuissem, fore ( probably fuere},fuisse. Fuat occurs in Virgil, JEn. x. 
 108. Indeed, to complete the Latin verb of existence, another verb is pro- 
 bably added. "Eipi sum, and ttptt eo, seem to be kindred verbs, both apparently 
 derived from 'iu, to go, to come into existence, to be. The Latin sum is formed 
 either from 'hfti, or from iraftai, the future of 'tea. According to Varro, the 
 ancients used to say esum, and esumus, estis, esunt. Eram, essem, ero, esse, ap- 
 pear, too, to come from the original eo or do. Eram is, by termination, ob- 
 viously a pluperfect, denoting, I had come into existence, I was ; essem, a plu- 
 perfect subjunctive or potential, denoting I had come into existence, / was, 
 or I would have come into existence, / would be ; ero, a future perfect, I shall 
 have come into existence, / shall be ; esse, a perfect of the infinitive, to have 
 come, to be come, to be. The word escit occurs in Lucretius, and the com- 
 pound superescit, in Ennius. Escunt, too, is said to occur in a passage of the 
 12 tables. The author of the P. Royal Grammar observes, that "escit is used 
 for erit." We ought, probably, however, to read essit ; for the ancients formed 
 their perfect subjunctive in ssim, as negassim for negaverim : others, however, 
 doubtless contemplating the obvious relation between sum and eo, conceive 
 that exeo, exit, have been corrupted into esceo, escit, and that, in Lucretius 
 escit, exit, is used merely in the sense of est. We have little doubt, that a com- 
 mon affinity exists generally, in language, between verbs of existence, going, 
 becoming, standing, living, eating, birth, &c. Indeed, in the very terms in 
 which we speak of sum, and some other verbs, as verbs of existence (ex sisto) 
 or as substantive (sub sto} verbs, we imply the relation of standing. In Latin, 
 sto is sometimes used substantively, or as a connecting verb, in a way little dif- 
 ferent from sum ; and in Spanish, estar, the verb denoting to be, or, etymolo- 
 gically, to stand, is always used, under certain established conditions, particu- 
 larly that of variability in the predicate, as the verb of existence. We say in 
 Latin, qmtm placidum ventis staret mare, when the sea stood (was) tranquil ; 
 and here, too, the use of sto seems to be regulated by the same circumstance 
 as that of the Spanish esto , for were quietness a property or usual attribute of 
 
129 
 
 Their Conjugation. 
 
 (9) Sum and its compounds cannot be classed under any 
 conjugation. It borrows its perfect and future participle 
 from the obsolete fuo of the third. I 
 
 (10) Eo and queo are irregulars, from the fourth. 
 
 (11) Volo, nolo, malo, fero, from the third. 
 
 (12) Fio, whose infinitive was originally JJhL and imper- 
 fect subjunctive jvrem, may be referred to the fourth. 
 
 Their Formation. 
 
 (13) They are all regular in the formations from the per- 
 fect, supine, and infinitive. Their principal irregularity, be- 
 sides their deficiency, is in the formation from the present, 
 and in the terminations belonging to the present, and to the 
 formation from it, as has been already mentioned in the 
 Rules for the Formation of Verbs. 
 
 The following is a Synopsis of the 
 Irregular Verbs. 
 
 the sea, it is not probable that sto would be employed. If a Spaniard means 
 to say, " He is at present in ill health," he uses the substantive verb estar, to 
 be, equivalent to the Latin stare; thus, " El esta malo." If he speaks of a 
 man that is habitually or inlierently wicked, he employs the substantive verb 
 ser, corresponding to the Latin esse ; thus, " El & malo," he is a bad man, 
 
 K 
 
"Xi u 
 <<i iO 
 
 P O 
 
 % 
 
 s 
 
 jap . 
 
 1 1 
 
 1 1 
 
 M 
 
 3 
 
 
 2 S 
 
 ^ * 
 
 # & 
 
 3 2 ^ 
 
 H .M d) M 
 
 3 s -n 
 
 g 
 
 ' .^ 
 
 C 4!? 
 
 
 
 Q C 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 i 
 
 s 
 
 oT of 
 
 w , 
 S e 
 
 
 0) 
 
 1 
 
 & 
 
 g 
 
 "3 3 
 
 O M 
 
 ( 3 o> 
 ^ 
 S 0) 
 
 O o 8 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 3 s 
 
 
 M e>.. 
 
 
 
 r\ 
 
 
 ** P* 
 
 
 S S S 1 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 
 1 3 
 
 
 - 2 | $ 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 w g 
 
 
 
 W H d 
 
 
 
 HO 
 E ^ 
 
 
 
 . M 
 
 
 
 
 ^ o o X" o 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 ., 
 
 r '^ 
 
 ^r -^ 
 
 
 ^ | 
 
 
 
 J* ^r 
 
 G g 
 
 s" 3 = 
 
 111 
 9 .1 ! 
 
 S g 
 
 S <JT cT 
 pal 
 
 S c fi 
 
 1 -i 1 
 
 B <U tS 
 
 
 i I o 
 
 N <u 
 
 
 a .s i a 
 
 3* *S S 
 
 ** ,-T ^ 3 
 T3 ~ ^ 
 
 <y 5 ^S ^3 
 
 o" J 
 
 - I .2 
 
T 
 
 I II II I i s I II 
 
 o, S 
 
 s i 
 
 II 
 
 Q 
 O 
 O 
 
 - g 
 GO 5 
 
 n 
 
 a 
 
 
 11 
 
 ? S 
 
 S S 
 
 >=S >3 
 
 W5 C/3 
 
 CQ O 
 
 o. a, 
 
 I 1 
 
 3 O 
 
 > s 
 
 3 N c 
 
 -a -fi 
 
 S S 4J 
 
 s s t f 
 
 * I I >M I tf 
 
 1 1 f 1 1 f I 
 
 .9 > H V t& G 
 
 .'s 
 
 i 
 
 *O -4-* 
 
 * :r JS 
 
 ST 1 f 1 P. - 1 
 
 1 I 
 
 a 
 
 , .* 
 
 'i! 
 
 S 
 
 o 
 
 > 525 
 
 K2 
 
 . 
 
 .2 o 
 
 A 
 
r . 
 
 Vi 
 
 < ^^ 
 
 S <3 
 
 Es- 
 
 ., 
 
 02 
 
 S S S 2 -3 g g 
 
 HJIJM 111 2 * 
 
 l8|93.1"8"'i -s ^ 
 
 PHp^^^^Sw (g PH f^ 
 
 r co- ^ , , , ^ . -^ 
 
 '?'? f '?-f-f I f f f " T 
 
 S S" -r r? c -- g - C 
 
 ifgiiij i i 
 
 O;-icSa>O^2 r c5 o> .S 1> 
 
 ^^ CLj Cla] ^^" >^J i^^ [jta) p^J Cjj p^ 
 
 43 
 
 
 05 
 
 1 1 
 
 a 15 
 
 w- !z; 
 
 ^3^3 
 
 oT 
 
 g 
 
133 
 
 IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 Impersonal verbs are not declined in the first or second 
 person, but only in the third person singular; they never ad- 
 mit a person as their nominative ; and, when literally trans- 
 lated, have, in English, the word it before them. 
 
 OF THEIR VOICE, CONJUGATION, AND INFLECTION. 
 
 (1) There are impersonals in both voices. 
 
 Some belong to the first conjugation : as, constat, juvat, 
 prastat. 
 
 Some to the second : as, decet, oportet, pcenitet. 
 
 Some to the third : as, accidit, conducit, fugit. 
 
 Some to the fourth : as, convenit, expedit. 
 
 Some are irregular : as, interest and other compounds of 
 sum, Jit, pr&terit, nequit, subit, confert, refert, &c. 
 
 The regular impersonals are inflected like the third per- 
 sons singular of their respective voices and conjugations ; the 
 irregular, like the third person singular of those personal 
 verbs, whence they ar^e formed, or with which they are com- 
 pounded. But in the perfect, miseret has misertum est ; tcedet 
 has tacduit, and the compound perttfsum est ; placet, libet, 
 licet, pudet, piget, -uit and -itum est. Liquet has no per- 
 fect. 
 
 (2) Impersonals of the active voice have of the infinitive 
 the present and perfect only ; they want the imperative, (in- 
 stead of which is used the present of the subjunctive,) and 
 generally participles, gerunds, and supines. 
 
 Passive impersonals have all the infinitive. 
 
 (3) The first supine of the personal verb, or the neuter 
 gender of the perfect participle, with the verb sum, consti- 
 tutes the compound tenses of the passive voice. 
 
 PERSONALS USED IMPERSONALLY. 
 
 (4-) Many personal verbs are used as impersonals, with 
 an infinitive after them, or the subjunctive mood and ut : as, 
 delecto, juvo, appareo, attineo, incipio, conduce, expedio, con- 
 venio, &c. But it is to be observed, that, although many of 
 these are used personally : as, Tu mihi places ; Filius patrem 
 delectat ; yet they are always used impersonally when fol- 
 lowed by an infinitive, or subjunctive mood. For we do not 
 say Si places audire, but Si placet tibi audire ,- not Ego con- 
 tigi esse domi, but Me contigit esse domi ; not Ille evenit mori, 
 but Ulum mori evenit, or ut ille moreretur. 
 
134- 
 
 The following is a rule for ascertaining when these and 
 similar verbs are to be used personally, and when imperson- 
 ally. 
 
 Observe, That if the person mentioned in English as con- 
 stituting the subject of these verbs be active, that is, doing 
 any thing, a personal verb must be used : as, I please you, 
 Placeo tibi. 
 
 But, if the person be suffering, an impersonal verb must 
 be used : as, I please to hear, or I am pleased to hear, Placet 
 mihi audire, i. e. to hear pleases me. If an infinitive follows 
 in English, the verb is impersonal; if not, it is generally per- 
 sonal. 
 
 IMPERSONALS USED PERSONALLY. 
 
 (5) On the other hand, impersonals are sometimes, though 
 rarely, used as personal verbs : as, Athenienscs, sicut primi 
 defecerant, ita primi pcenitere cceperunt Justin, instead of 
 primos pcenitere ccepit. Non te h&c pudent Ter. Quo in 
 genere multa peccantur Cic. This happens particularly 
 with some adjectives of the neuter gender : as, Aliquid pec- 
 catur vitio prcecipientium Sen. Ne quid in eo genere pec- 
 cetur Cic. 
 
 TWO SUPPOSED KINDS OF IMPERSONALS. 
 
 (6) Miser et, piget, pudet, pcenitet, taedct; lucescit, vesper- 
 ascit, pluit, tonat, Jidgurat, fulminat, Jlat, ningit, rorat, 
 .hyemat, serenat, lapidat, gelat, grandinat, and the like; and 
 
 neuter and active verbs used impersonally : as, curritur, vi- 
 vitur, itur, turbatur, agitur, &c., are said to involve their no- 
 minatives in themselves ; although it may be observed, that 
 Miseret me tui is not essentially different from Ego tui mise- 
 reor ; nor Poznitet me conditionis, from the words of Plautus, 
 Conditio me pcenitet , and Pcenitet me hoc fecisse is not dif- 
 ferent from Hoc factum me pcenitet. The same thing may 
 be said of Non me hoc dicer e pudebit ; so that, strictly speak- 
 ing, only those impersonals mentioned above, denoting cer- 
 tain operations of nature, and passive impersonals, formed 
 from active or neuter verbs, can be said to contain their no- 
 minatives in themselves ; and even to these, some would 
 supply DeuSy Natura> or the matter of the verb, as their no- 
 minative. 
 
 (7) Other verbs, as, oportet, libet, liquet, licet, est and its 
 compounds, rcfert, decet, delectat, jiwat^ &c., are supposed 
 to have hoc, illud, or id, referring to the words following, 
 
135 
 
 understood, as a nominative, or the infinitive mood, or part 
 of a sentence *. 
 
 (8) The infinitive mood of both kinds is used imperson- 
 ally: as, Terra multifariam pluisse nunciatum cst Liv. 
 Qitum multitude .... resisti posse Appio crederet Id. 
 
 THEIR ENGLISH. 
 
 (9) Although, in a literal translation, impersonal verbs 
 have it before them, it is better, according to the English 
 idiom, to adopt the person as the nominative : as, Licet mihi, 
 It is allowed to me ; rather, I am allowed. Pcenitet me, I 
 repent. Pugnatur a me, a te t ab illo, &c., I fight, thou fight- 
 est, he fights, &c. 
 
 THEIR NOMINATIVE. 
 
 (10) There have been great disputes among grammarians 
 about the nominative understood before impersonal verbs, 
 when it cannot be obviously supplied by some pronoun un- 
 derstood, infinitive mood, or part of a sentence. Some have 
 supposed res, negotium, natura, &c., or a nominative of cog- 
 nate signification with the verb, to be understood. None of 
 these suppositions is found applicable in every instance. The 
 truth, perhaps, is, that no nominative is, or ever was, un- 
 derstood ; but that such impersonals, before the distinctions 
 in language arising from the analysis of a proposition into 
 its constituent parts of a subject and predicate, (the latter 
 comprehending the copula, or word of assertion, and the at- 
 tribute) were attended to, originally constituted a compen- 
 dious and simple method of expressing, -in one word, an en- 
 tire event in the aggregate, especially in regard to those 
 operations of nature, beyond human power, and in which 
 the subject or agent is invisible ; and that pluit, in itself, is 
 fully equivalent to It rains, Rain is or falls, Imber dccidit, 
 or Tcmpestas cst pluvialis. 
 
 But they have never been supposed to have a person as 
 their nominative, and hence arises the name, Impersonal. 
 This observation may be extended further, lor they do not 
 admit as a nominative the name of any animated being. 
 
 1 Caesar says, Ccssari quum id nunciatum esscl, eos per promn- 
 dam nostram iter Jacere conari ; in which id is the nominative to 
 the verb, and refers to the words which constitute the real subject, 
 or nominative, eos per provinciam nostram iter Jacere conari. Whe- 
 ther or not nunciatum est be here considered as impersonal, the 
 insertion of id seems unnecessary. 
 
1 
 
 
 en 
 
 jr 
 
 
 a 
 
 "ox 
 
 i 
 
 "1 
 
 C*N 
 
 .a 
 
 .f 
 
 o 
 
 C5 
 
 
 
 i- 
 
 i 
 
 ^ 
 
 (2 
 
 PH 
 
 I 
 
 
 j 
 
 ^ ? 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 i 1 
 
 E-5 i i) 
 
 
 
 1 I "I 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 1 
 
 
 
 jf 
 
 
 
 1 1 !! 1 
 
 w i^ 
 
 tfjf 
 
 II 
 
 1 
 
 ! 
 
 
 
 
 >> > e 
 
 
 
 s ii s! 
 
 "* S H 1 
 
 3 
 
 
 f 
 
 | 
 
 
 
 
 30; 
 
 I0> 
 
 
 TO 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 "it 
 1 } 
 
 
 
 "3 
 
 * 
 
 .1 
 
 
 
 
 cS 
 
 | ^ 
 
 | | ^.f 1 
 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 ! 1 
 
 +r tf ^ 
 
 .2 -a -2 
 
 111 
 
 .1-1 x "- 1 
 
 |D f ^o 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 .JT / * A ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 5- ^ *S rVT '^ *- 
 
 J-i C/5 . ; ii) c/3 j^ ^ 
 
 F^ Q> < Q<| 5^ "^*J3*S*C* 
 
 .1* 
 
 .s ." 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 c\ 
 
 | 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i I Cj 
 
 
 
 
 1 "' 
 
 III 
 
 
 
 ||l 
 
 
 
 
 1 d 
 
 ! t!fi 
 
 0-^ . . CH fcn QJ O j 
 
 p^ ^~i r^i p"^ ^4| 
 
 *3 n 
 i 
 n 
 
 i It 
 
 1 " If 
 
3$ 
 
 > 
 
 00 
 
 A 
 
 '! 
 
 HM 
 
 '3 
 g 
 
 oJ 
 
 *>- 
 
 00 
 
 If 
 
 II 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 pr-i 
 
 1 
 
 , 
 
 "a -" s 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 en 
 
 
GO 
 
 - 
 
 CO 
 
 GO ^ 
 
 S'S 
 ' S 
 
 13 13 
 
 
 '^g^ 
 
 11^ 
 
 S ^ 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 
 .J 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 O* 
 
 
 C 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 r 
 
 ! 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Cfi 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 :>: 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Cfl 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cr 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 itf 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 " en 
 
 
 
 ^T j a 
 
 
 
 cr 
 * 
 
 
 1| 
 
 ci2 o ^C 
 
 :i 
 
 
 .# 
 
 
 
 
 *w 
 
 15 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 C7 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 w . 
 
 1 
 
 
 aT 
 
 
 
 52 
 
 
 D 
 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 ^ )0) 
 
 O M 
 
 w . 8^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 i!? 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 i 
 
 SH , 
 O^ , i^ 
 
 H PH 
 
 
 
 C JE 
 
 t 
 
 t-H 
 
 1 1 
 
 8 
 
 M 
 
 ^ 1 
 HH a 
 
-d 
 **3 
 
 
 
 
 GO 
 
 
 4) -2 
 
 a . 
 
 <o 
 
 HH CO 
 
 exp 
 
 it is 
 
 e 
 
 >OJ ^ 
 
 ll 
 
 c. 
 
 2 
 
 O 
 
 to 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 cu 
 
 O 
 
 .s 
 I 
 
 o 
 
 2 
 
 
140 
 
 THE PRETERITIVE VERBS, 
 
 (1) So called from their having little more than preterites 
 and the formation from these, are odi, memini, and ccepi. 
 They have, in their perfects, the signification of the present 
 also 1 : in the pluperfect, that of the perfect also; and in the 
 future of the subjunctive, that of the future indicative also. 
 It is because novi sometimes signifies / know, that it is 
 ranked among these, for it is the perfect of the verb nosco, 
 which is complete. 
 
 (2) Odi has the participle osus, which signifies actively, 
 and the future participle osurus. Its compounds perosus 
 and exostis are used, but not perodi or exodi ; and they sig- 
 nify actively, and sometimes passively. 
 
 (S) Memini has also the imperative, in the second per- 
 sons singular and plural, namely, memento, mementote. 
 
 (4) Ccepi has also its perfect participle cceptus, which sig- 
 nifies passively ; and the future participle ccepturus. 
 
 (5) Oditur, odiaris, odiatur, odientes ; meminens ; ccepio, 
 ccepiam, cceperet, cceptu, are sometimes found. 
 
 CONTRACTIONS. 
 
 The poets sometimes use sis for si vis ,- sultis for si vultis ; 
 sodes for si etudes ; capsis for cape si vis, or perhaps for ce- 
 peris ; to which may be added abisis, videsis, cavesis, apa- 
 gesis, in which sis seems to be added to diminish the harshness 
 of the imperative. 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 The principal thing to be considered in an adverb, is its 
 signification. Adverbs are joined to verbs, participles, ad- 
 jectives, or to other adverbs, to express some circumstance, 
 or the quality and manner of their signification. Some are 
 primitive: as, eras, jam, ubi, temere. 
 
 They are, however, generally derivatives from nouns, pro- 
 nouns, verbs, participles, and prepositions. 1. From nouns; 
 as, viritim from vir ; docte from doctus. Many of the words 
 deemed adverbs are nouns ; as words in um and o, primum, 
 primo, mutuo, modo, &c. ; comparatives, as, amplius, melius, 
 &c. ; and tempori, luci, vesper i, antient ablatives; rite for ritu, 
 diu, noctu, forte, &c.; alias may be alias res; una, una opera : 
 recta, recta via. In forming adverbs from adjectives or par- 
 
 1 It is doubtful, whether ccepi ever denotes present time. From ccqri comes 
 occcejri, found in Terence and Tacitus. Occepi and incepi t of occipio and in- 
 cipio, are formed, not from ccepi, but the kindred verb capio. Odcrit and odcrint 
 are sometimes used imperatively j as Oderinl, dum meiuant. Vide Cic. off. i. 28, 
 and Sencc. dc ira, k 16. 
 
HI 
 
 ticiples, the o of the ablative seems to be generally changed 
 into e, as, recte. To the ablative in te, r is added, to i is 
 added ter ; as, diligenter, fortiter. But facile, as well as 
 faciliter } simul, together, as well as similiter^ from similis; 
 omnino, from omnis; and repente, from repens. From firmus, 
 too, we have Jirmiter and fame. 2. From pronouns ; as, 
 hie, eo, qui, from hie, is, quis. Most of these end in c, a, 
 or o, as, hue, ca, quo, many of which are really pronouns. 
 Quam, than, is an accusative ; and quum or cum, when, is 
 quern or quom, which appears to have been applied to all gen- 
 ders. Quo, whither, is said to be an antient dative singular, 
 or accusative plural, to which may be added eo and illo. Qid, 
 how, is an ablative, said to be used in both numbers, and in 
 every gender. 3. From verbs; as, ccesim, punctim, from qado, 
 pungo. These generally end in im, and seem to come from 
 the supine or perfect participle. 4. From participles ; as, 
 amanter, simulate, merito, &c. 5. From prepositions ; as, 
 intro, citro, ultro, clanculum, from infra, citra, ultra, clam. 
 
 They are likewise formed by composition, in various ways; 
 as, hodie, today, from hoc die ; postridie, the following day, 
 from poster o die ; scilicet, namely, from scire licet ; quam- 
 obrem, wherefore, from ob quam rem, &c. 
 
 The numerous classes into which they are divided, may 
 be left to be learned by practice. The following distinction 
 in adverbs of place should be attended to. 
 
 In, 
 
 To, 
 
 Towards, 
 
 From, 
 
 By a place. 
 
 Hie, 
 
 hue, 
 
 horsmn, 
 
 hinc, 
 
 hac. 
 
 illic, 
 
 illuc, 
 
 illorsum, 
 
 illinc, 
 
 iliac. 
 
 istic, 
 
 istuc, 
 
 istorsum, 
 
 istinc, 
 
 istac. 
 
 ibi, 
 
 eo, 
 
 > 
 
 inde, 
 
 ea. 
 
 ubi, 
 
 quo, 
 
 quorsum, 
 
 unde, 
 
 qua. 
 
 alibi, 
 
 alio, 
 
 aliorsum, 
 
 aliunde, 
 
 alia. 
 
 ibidem, 
 
 eodem, 
 
 
 indidem, 
 
 eadem. 
 
 5 
 
 ubilibet, 
 
 quolibet, 
 
 , 
 
 undelibet, 
 
 qualibet. 
 
 alicubi, 
 
 aliquo, 
 
 J 
 
 alicunde, 
 
 aliqua. 
 
 foris, 
 
 foras, 
 
 , 
 
 foris. 
 
 
 intus, 
 
 intro, 
 
 introrsum, 
 
 intus. 
 
 
 Adverbs are compared : as, 
 Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 
 
 Diu, diutius, diutissime. 
 
 Satis, satius, . 
 
 Secus, seciusor sequius, . 
 
 Saepe, saepius, saepissime. 
 
 Tuto, tutiiis, tutissime. 
 
 Penitus, .,,.,,.... penitius, ..,,,,,,.. penitissime. 
 
They are generally compared like the adjectives, from 
 which they are derived : as, 
 
 Acriter, 
 
 acrius, 
 
 acerrime, 
 
 from acer ; 
 
 bene, 
 
 melius, 
 
 optime, 
 
 from bonus ; 
 
 celeriter, 
 
 celerius, 
 
 celerrime, 
 
 from celer; 
 
 facile, 
 
 facilius, 
 
 facillime, 
 
 from facilis ; 
 
 male, 
 
 pejiis, 
 
 pessime, 
 
 from malus ; 
 
 parum, 
 
 . > fminime, 1 
 minus, < . . x > 
 ^minimum, J 
 
 from parvus ; 
 
 multum, 
 
 plus, 
 
 plurimum, 
 
 from multus ; 
 
 prope, 
 
 propius, 
 
 proxime, 
 
 from propior ; 
 
 valde, for 
 valide, 
 
 valdius Jt /0r 
 valid ius, 
 
 Jvalidissime, 
 
 from validus ; 
 
 ultra, 
 
 ulterius, 
 
 ultimo -urn, 
 
 from ulterior. 
 
 Positive wanting. 
 
 Magis, maxime ; ocyus, ocyssime ; prius, primo, or pri- 
 mum ; potius, potissimum. Potissime is found. 
 
 Comparative wanting. 
 
 Paene, paenissime; nuper, nuperrime; nove and noviter, 
 novissime; merit(\ meritissimo. 
 
 Superlative wanting. 
 
 Excusate, excusatius; tempore, or tempori, temporuis; 
 satis, satius; secus, secius. 
 
 (Obs. 1) Instar and ergo, not being declined, are 
 ranked among adverbs, but the one may be considered as a 
 triptote, and the other a monoptote. That instar is used as 
 a noun may appear from the following : Unus ille dies milii 
 quidem immortalitatis instar fuit Cic. Cujus equi instar pro 
 cede Veneris dedicavit Suet. Instar montis eqiium Virg. 
 Ad instar is attributed to later writers. 
 
 (2) Some indeclinable words are said to change their part 
 of speech, according to their signification. Cum, when, is 
 considered as an adverb ; although, a conjunction ; and cum, 
 with, as a preposition. 
 
 (3) Before, when joined to a verb, is expressed by the ad- 
 verbs of time, antequam, priusquam. Before^ joined to an 
 oblique case of a noun, is made by ante, ad, apud, cor am, 
 &c. The same distinction is to be observed between post- 
 quam, ubi, cum, ut ; and the prepositions, a, ab, de, ex. 
 
 (4-) The neuter gender of adjectives, both in the singu- 
 lar and plural number, is sometimes used adverbially : as, 
 dulce-ridens, sweetly-smiling; suave-rubens, sweetly-blush- 
 
us 
 
 ing; torva-tuens, sternly-looking; acerba-sonans, harshly- 
 sounding. 
 
 (5) Tantum, tantb, quantum, quanta, veriim, verb, solum, 
 cceterum, modb, primum, primb, certb, minus, tempore, re- 
 vera, brevi, profectb (pro facto), and such like, whether ad- 
 verbs or conjunctions, are in most sentences obviously re- 
 solvable into the nominatives, accusatives, or ablatives, of 
 the nouns or adjectives whence they are supposed to be de- 
 rived. Partim is an old accusative, the same as par tern. 
 
 (6) Adverbs sometimes connect, like relatives: as, In 
 Hispania ubi (i. e. quo in loco) nullus consul erat, In Spain 
 where there was no consul ; Non qucesivit, ubi ipse viveret 
 tutb, sed unde prcesidio posset esse civibus, r He did not look 
 out for a place in which he himself might be safe, but one 
 
 from which he might be of service to his countrymen. 
 
 (7) Adverbs of time, place, and order, are often used for 
 each other : as, ubi, where, or when ; inde, from that time, 
 or from that place. 
 
 (8) Some adverbs denote either past, present, or future 
 time: as, jam, already, now, or by and by ; olim, formerly, 
 or hereafter. 
 
 (9) Interrogative adverbs doubled, or compounded with 
 cunque, answer to the English soever : as, ubiubi, or ubi- 
 cunque, wheresoever. Likewise, some other interrogatives : 
 as, quotquot and quotcunque, how many soever; quantus- 
 quantus, and quantuscunque, how great soever. 
 
 (10) In English the same word is sometimes an adverb 
 and an adjective ; it is necessary, therefore, in turning it into 
 Latin, to ascertain to which part of speech it belongs : thus, 
 if we say " He was only rich," only is an adverb, and the 
 Latin expression is Hie solum erat dives. But if we say " He 
 only was rich," only is an adjective, and this sentence will 
 be expressed in Latin by Ille solus erat dives. 
 
 (11) In Latin, as in English, two negatives in the same 
 clause destroy each other, and render the sense affirmative: 
 as, Haud ignara mali, Not unacquainted, (or, acquainted,) 
 with misfortune. Non sum nescius, I am not ignorant, (or, 
 I know). But in many instances they convey the assertion 
 more faintly than an affirmative mode of expression ; as, 
 Non par ere noluit Nep. He did not refuse to obey. Among 
 old authors two negatives are sometimes used to render the 
 negation stronger : as, Neque ille haud objiciet mihi Plaut. 
 Special or particular negations do not destroy the general 
 negation : as, Nulla neque amnem libavit quadrupes, nee gra- 
 minis attigit herbam~~Virg. Neminem neque suo nomine, nee 
 
144- 
 
 subscriber, accusavit Nep. In these, neque and nee ntust 
 be translated in English by either and or. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 A preposition is an indeclinable part of speech, generally 
 placed before nouns and pronouns, which it governs, am 
 of which it shows the relation to some other word. Th< 
 various ways of expressing, in English, their general mean- 
 ing, will be seen in the following examples. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 Ad, to : as, omnes ad unum, all to a man. At : as, ad prce- 
 stitutam diem, at the appointed day. According 
 to : as, ad, cursum tunce* according to the course of 
 the moon. After : as, aliquanto ad rem avidior, 
 a little too greedy after money. For : as, rebus ad 
 profectionem comparatis, things being ready for a 
 march. Before : as, ductus est ad magistratum, he 
 was taken before the magistrate, or to the magis- 
 trate. 
 
 Apud, at or near : as, apud forum, at the forum. Among : 
 as, apud Sequanos, among the Sequani. With : as, 
 potior apud. exercitum, in greater credit with the 
 army. Before : as, causam apud regem dicere, to 
 plead before the king. 
 
 Ante, before (in respect to time or place, and opposed to 
 post) : as, ante, non post, Jioram decimam, before, 
 and not after, ten o'clock ; ante aciem, non post 
 seu pone aciem, before, and not behind, the army. 
 
 Adversus, 1 against : as, adversus hostem, against the ene- 
 
 Adversum, J my. Towards : as, pietas adversus deos, piety 
 towards the gods. To : as, de ilia adversus hunc 
 loquet^e, speak to him of her. 
 
 Contra, against : as, contra naturam, against nature. Op- 
 posite to : as, Carthago Italiam contra, Carthage 
 opposite to, or over against, Italy. 
 
 Circa, 1 about, applied to time, place, persons and things; 
 
 Circum, /generally to place. It is sometimes rendered 
 with : as, paucce circum illam, the few with her, or 
 about her. 
 
 Circiter, about, applied to time, place, and number. 
 
H5 
 
 Cis, 1 on this side: as, cis Euphratem, on this side the 
 
 Citra, j Euphrates. Without : as, citra necessitatem, without 
 necessity. 
 
 Erga, towards : as erga arnicas, towards his friends. Before, 
 opposite to : as, qua modo erga cedes habitat, who 
 lives now before our house. 
 
 Extra, without, opposed to intra : as, extra, hand intra, 
 scholam, out of, not in, school. Beyond : as, ex- 
 tra modum, beyond measure. Besides : as, extra 
 famulos, besides the servants ; extra jocum, some- 
 times for sine joco. 
 
 Infra, under, below, beneath : as, infra se, beneath himself. 
 
 Inter, between, among : as, inter fratrcs, between brothers. 
 At, or, in time of: as, inter ccmam, at, in time o 
 during, supper. 
 
 Intra, within : as, intra decem annos, within ten years. 
 
 Juxta, near : as, juxta viam, by the way. 
 
 Ob, for : as, ob qumtum, for gain. Before : as, ob oculos 
 exitium versatur, destruction is before my eyes. 
 Phrase, Ob industriam, on purpose. 
 
 Propter, for : as, propter usum meum, for my use. Near to : 
 as, propter patrem cubantes, lying near their fa- 
 ther. The moving cause, or motive: as, propter 
 me, by my means ; propter misericordiam, out of 
 pity. 
 
 Per, during: as per diem, during day time, or, each day. 
 By or through : as, per vim, by force ; per compos, 
 through the fields. In : as, per ludum et jocum, 
 in sport and jest. Per denotes the instrumenta- 
 lity, or subordinate agency : thus, per eunuchum 
 epistolam misit. 
 
 Pone, behind : as, pone cedem, behind the temple. 
 
 Prseter, beyond, except : as, neminem prceter Lucullum vides, 
 you see no one except Lucullus. Beyond : as, proe- 
 ter spem, beyond expectation. Contrary to : as, 
 prater" tequum et bonum, contrary to what is just 
 and reasonable. Before : as, prceter oculos, before 
 my eyes. Without : as, prteter rationem, without 
 reason. 
 
 Penes, in the power of: as, penes Pompeium, in Pompey's 
 power. Possession : as, quern penes est virtus, who 
 is possessed of virtue. Phr. Penes te es ? are you 
 in your senses ? 
 
 Post, after : as, post multos annos, after many years. Since : 
 as, post hominum memoriam, since the memory of 
 L 
 
H6 
 
 man. Behind : as, post tergum, behind or at the 
 back. 
 
 Secundum, according to : as, collaudavi te secundum facta, 
 I praised you according to your deeds. Along : 
 as, secundum littus, along the shore. Near, hard 
 by : as, duo vulnera in capite, secundum aurem, ac- 
 cepit, he received two wounds in the head, near 
 his ear. Next after : as, secundum te, next to you. 
 For : as, secundum te decrevit, he gave judgment 
 for you. 
 
 Supra, above : as, supra lunam, above the moon. Phr. JEcce 
 supra caput homo sordidus, lo a man extremely sor- 
 did. Cum hostes supra caput sint, since the ene- 
 mies are at hand. 
 
 Trans, over, on the other side : as, trans maria, beyond seas. 
 Ultra, beyond: as, ultra Britanniam, beyond Britain. Ad- 
 verbially, nihil possit ultra, nothing can exceed it. 
 (Note 1.) Prepositions, when the word which they would 
 govern is suppressed, are often considered as adverbs, al- 
 though, in reality, they do not cease to be prepositions. 
 
 (2.) Many of the rules of syntax arise from a preposition 
 understood. The ablative after comparatives is governed 
 by prcK understood ; the ablative of cause, manner, and in- 
 strument, is governed by a preposition : as is perhaps the ab- 
 lative absolute, with many similar examples. 
 
 (3.) The preposition is sometimes, however, omitted in 
 some examples, in an unusual manner : as, devenere locos 
 l&tos, supply ad ; " maria aspera juro, supply per ; ut se loco 
 mover -e non possent, supply e or de ; si reipublicce commodo 
 facere posset, supply cum. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE ABLATIVE. 
 
 A, ab, abs, from : as, ab ovo usque ad mala, from beginning 
 to end. By reason of: as, vir ab innocentid cle- 
 mentissimus, a man very mild by reason of his in- 
 nocence. After : as, hujus a morte, after his death. 
 Against, from or because of: as, a f rigor e, against, 
 from, or because of, the cold. For : as, a mendacio 
 contra verum stare, to stand for a lie in opposition 
 to truth. Phr. A studiis (minister understood), a 
 director of one's studies ; a pedibus, a footman ; a 
 rationibus, an accountant. 
 
 Absque, without: as, absque causa, without cause. But for: 
 as, absque te esset, but for you. 
 
 Coram denotes nearness, and refers to persons : as, coram 
 
147 
 
 rege, in the presence of the king, or before the 
 king. Coram is nearly synonymous with in con- 
 spectu. 
 
 Cum, with : as, cum exercitu, with the army. At : as, cum 
 primd luce, at break of day. In : as, dum esses cum 
 imperio, while you were in authority. Phr. Cum 
 bond venid audire, to hear patiently ; cum primis, 
 m the first place. 
 
 De, of, concerning : as, de hominibus, of, or concerning, men. 
 According to : as, de sententid med, according to 
 my opinion. After : as, somnus de prandio, sleep 
 after dinner. From : as, de loco superiore, from the 
 higher ground. Phr. De integro, afresh ; de im- 
 proviso, unawares; de industrid, on purpose; de 
 transverso, across ; de mco, at my cost. For : as, 
 ecquid nos amas dejidicina isthac ? do you love us 
 for that musical girl ? 
 
 E, ex, out of, from : as, e Jlammd, out of the fire. Accord- 
 ing to : as, status e naturd, a condition according 
 to nature. By : as, ex consilio patrum, by the ad- 
 vice of the senators. For : as, magnd ex parte, for 
 the most part. Since : as, ex eo die, since that day. 
 Amongst : as, ex lusionibus multis, amongst many 
 diversions. 
 
 Palam, openly : as, palam omnibus, before all the world. 
 
 Prae, in comparison : as, pra nobis, in comparison to us. 
 Because of: as, prte muliitudine, because of the 
 multitude. Before : as, prce oculis, before the eyes. 
 Through, out of (some passion of the mind): as, 
 pro? metu, through fear. 
 
 Pro, instead of ; or in exchange for : as, pro illo, instead of 
 him hence, in defence of. According to : as, pro 
 merito, according to his merit. Before : as, pro 
 castris, before the camp. Considering : as, pro no- 
 strd amicitid te rogo, I ask you in consideration 
 of our friendship. Fw : as, pro me est, it makes 
 for me. In defence of: as, pro aris et focis, in 
 defence of (for) God and one's country. As: thus, 
 libertatem pro pr&mio dederunt, they gave him his 
 freedom as a reward. 
 
 Sine, without (not having), opposed to cum, with : as, sine 
 pondere, without weight 
 
 Tenus, as far as, up to : as, capulo tenus, up to the hilt. 
 Crurum tenus, up to the legs. It follows the ge- 
 L 2 
 
us 
 
 nitive when the word is plural. Also the ablative 
 plural : as, pectoribus tenus, up to the breasts. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING TWO CASES* 
 
 Clam, unknown to, governs either the accusative or abla- 
 tive, but more frequently the ablative. 
 
 In, into, sub, under, and super, above, govern the accusative 
 when motion to a place is signified. But when motion 
 or rest in a place is signified, in and sub govern the ab- 
 lative: as, Ctesar in hibernd exercitum deduxit Gees. 
 Magna met sub terras ibit imago Virg. Super agmina 
 incidit Virg. Ego in portu navigo Ter. Recubans sub 
 tegmine fagi Virg. 
 
 Super governs either case, when motion or rest in a place is 
 signified : as, Super M&nandrum amnem pomit castra 
 Liv. Stratoque super discumbitur ostro Virg. When it is 
 particularly opposed to subter, it almost always governs 
 the accusative. 
 
 Subter governs either case, but most frequently the accusa- 
 tive, whether motion or rest be denoted : as, Subter fas- 
 tigia tecti j%2nea?i duxit Virg. Ilia subter C&cum vulnus 
 habes Pers. Subter densa testudine Virg. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS VARYING THEIR CASE ACCORDING TO THEIR 
 MEANING. 
 
 In, put for erga, contra, per, ad, usque ad, apud, super, go- 
 verns the accusative : as, Amor in patriam Cic. Impie- 
 tatem in deos Cic. Crescit in singulos dies hostium nu- 
 merus Cic. Siletur in noctem Virg. Studebat in ccence 
 tempus Plin. &c. 
 
 In, for inter, governs either the accusative or ablative ; the 
 accusative, when motion to, or towards, is implied, and 
 the ablative, when motion or rest is denoted : thus, Ex- 
 ercitum in Bellovacos ducit Caes. i. e. He leads his army 
 among (into the territories of) the Bellovaci. Postquam 
 in vulgus militum elatum est Cass. After it was made 
 known among the common soldiers. In his fuit Ariovis- 
 tus Caes. Among these was Ariovistus. 
 
 Sub, for circa, or paulo ante, or paulo post (about), governs 
 the accusative: as, Sub noctem naves solvit Caes. i. e. 
 paulo ante. Sub dies festosQc. i. e. paulo post. Sub 
 idem tempus Liv. i. e. circa or per idem tempus. 
 
 Super, for ultra, prcvter, inter, governs the accusative; but 
 
J49 
 
 for de, pro or ob, the ablative : as, Super et Garamantas 
 et Indos Proferet imperium Virg. Punicum exercitum 
 super morbum etiam fames affecit Liv. De ejus nequitid 
 omnes super ccenam loquebantur Plin. Hdc super re scrt- 
 bam ad te Cic. Nee super ipse sud molitur laude labor em 
 Virg. His accensa super Virg. i. e. ob hcec. 
 Tenus and versus, and sometimes penes and usque, are set 
 after the case which they govern ; and when the word is 
 plural, tenus generally governs the genitive ; also, when 
 we speak of things of which we have naturally but two ; 
 as, crurum tenus, up to the legs. 
 
 Prope, versus, usque, procul and circiter may be considered 
 as adverbs : they seem to govern a case by means of a 
 preposition which is generally understood, but sometimes 
 expressed. Clam may perhaps be added ! . 
 Observe, that 
 
 A and e are used before consonants. 
 
 Ab and ex, generally before vowels. 
 
 Abs is generally placed before q and t.* 
 
 1 Several prepositions seem to have had originally the nature of 
 adverbs : such as, adversus, juxta,propter t secus, secundum, the ac- 
 cusative which followed them being supposed to be governed by 
 ad. Some of these are found governing other cases, and some- 
 times without any regimen. Palam and pone have likewise been 
 excluded from the list of prepositions, the word which they seem 
 to govern being supposed to be governed by coram or post under- 
 stood. Other words generally considered as adverbs are found 
 governing the accusative or ablative, like prepositions ; or some- 
 times the genitive. Intus is found with the genitive, the accusa- 
 tive, and the ablative. Foras, with the ablative, in Lucretius ; and 
 with the accusative, in the Vulgate. Commits is found with an 
 accusative. Retro also. Seorsus or seorsum is found with an ab r 
 lative in Lucretius. Simvl is found with an ablative in Horace 
 and Ovid. Desuper and insuper are found governing the accu- 
 sative, like the simple super. In such instances, either a prepo- 
 sition is understood, or the adverbs are used, after the manner of 
 the Greeks, as prepositions. To these might be added several 
 more ; but it may be observed that, in general, such constructions 
 appear to be elliptical. That circiter is, in reality, an adverb, may 
 be inferred from its construction, when there is no ellipsis sup- 
 posed : as, Circiter pars quarto, armis instructa erat Sail. When 
 it is followed by an accusative, ad, understood, is the governing 
 word. It is sometimes followed by the ablative also : as, Ipse hord 
 circiter diet quarta Britanniam attigit Caes. ; in which in may be 
 understood, or the ablative may be referred to the question by 
 quando, which will be noticed in Syntax. 
 
 * Ab is often found before consonants, especially those of a 
 softer sound ; such as, l y n, r, d, s, and j : as, ab legatis, ab nullo, 
 
150 
 
 A few instances are found in which in, signifying motion 
 to a f)lace, governs the ablative ; and in, signifying rest, the 
 accusative: as, Cum divertissem a Cumis in Vestiano Cic. 
 Venit in senatu Cic. Esse in amicitiam ditionemque popul i 
 Romani Cic. Cum talem virum in potestatem haberct 
 Sail. 
 
 [These observations properly belong to Syntax ; but the 
 division of the prepositions, according to their government, 
 naturally suggested their introduction here. The subject 
 will be afterwards resumed.] 
 
 Prepositions are either primitive : as, ad, apud, ante, &c. ; 
 or derivative : as, adversum, from the adjective adversus ; se- 
 cundum, from secundus. They are either simple: as, ad, 
 ante, abs ; or compound : as, exadversnm, absque. 
 
 There are certain prepositions named inseparable, be- 
 cause they are always found prefixed to a word. The other 
 prepositions also are sometimes used in this way. Their in- 
 fluence, as well as that of the inseparables, am, dis, re, se, 
 con, ve, will be seen in the following examples : 
 
 PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION. 
 
 A, abs, ab, from or away : as, avcrto, I turn away ; abstineo, 
 I abstain, or keep from : ajifugio, I fly away. A is 
 likewise added to nouns as a privative , as amens, 
 mad. 
 
 Ad, to, or near to : as, accipio, I take to myself. It in- 
 creaseth : as, adamo, I love much ; adbibo, I drink 
 much. 
 
 Am, about, around: as, amburo, I burn all about; anquiro, 
 I seek about, or seek diligently ; anceps, that may 
 be taken both ways. 
 
 Ante, before : as, anteeo, I go before ; antemissus, sent be- 
 fore. 
 
 De, from, down, much, or ceasing : as, dehortor, I dissuade 
 from; depono, I Jay down; deamo, I love much ; 
 dedoceo, I unteach; despcro, I despair; demens, 
 mad; decolor, discoloured. 
 
 ab Romanis, ab ducibus, ab senatu, ab Jove. Ex is often used by 
 Cicero before consonants. In certain expressions e is generally 
 used, and in others ex: as, e longinquo, e regione, e vestigio, e re 
 med est t &c. In like manner, ex prceparato, ex parte, ex compacto, 
 ex toto, ex sententia, ex tempore, &c. Abs is sometimes found be- 
 fore s: as, Abs Suessa nunciaium est Liv. Non abs re erit, in 
 which abs is used before r, is a common mode of expressing Not 
 foreign from the purpose. 
 
151 
 
 Dis, di 5 separation, or denial : as, distraho, I pull asunder ; 
 diffido, I distrust; disputo, I think differently, I 
 dispute. By separating, it implies distinction : as, 
 dijudico, I judge distinctly. 
 
 Con, (fen' cum) together : as, concurro, to run together ; con- 
 tendo, to strive together, or to contend, to exert 
 or stretch (nervos) together ; congredior, to come 
 together; hence, to engage in battle. 
 
 E, ex, from, away, greatly, negation : as, expello, I drive 
 away ; exoro, I beg earnestly ; exuro, I burn up ; 
 exsanguis, bloodless; exanimis, lifeless. 
 
 In, in, into, upon, over or against : as, indo, I put in ; in- 
 jicio, I cast into or upon ; incipio, I take upon me, 
 I begin ; impono, I put over, I impose ; irruo, I 
 rush upon or against. It sometimes increases : 
 as, infringO) I break in pieces ; induro, I harden 
 much. In some participials or adjectives it is either 
 intensive, or privative : as, infractus, unbroken, or 
 broken in pieces ; invocatus, called upon, or unbid- 
 den ; impotens, weak, or overmighty ; iiifrcenatus, 
 bridled, or unbridled ; immutatus, changed, or un- 
 changed. With adjectives it is generally privative : 
 as, ingrains, ungrateful. 
 
 Inter, among or between: as, inter jicio, I cast between. Some- 
 times it increases : as, interbibo, I drink up all. 
 
 Ob, against, before, about : as, oppono, I place against or be- 
 fore, I oppose ; obambulo, I walk up and down : 
 intensive, used for ad : as, obedio, I obey. 
 
 Per, signifies through, entirely, very muck : as, perlego, I 
 read through : perficio, I finish ; peradolescens, very 
 young. It is sometimes privative : as, peifldus, per- 
 fidious ; perjurus, perjured. 
 
 Prae, before, or over : as, prtepono, I place before, I prefer ; 
 prccvaleo, I prevail ; prcepolleo, I surpass. In ad- 
 jectives it augments : as, prtefacilis, very easy. 
 
 Pro, forth, forwards, to a distance : as, produce, I lead forth ; 
 prosilio, I leap forwards ; prospicio, I see at a di- 
 stance ; prohibeo, I ward off, I prohibit. Some- 
 times it is privative : as, prof anus, profane : in- 
 tensive : as, procurvus, very crooked. 
 
 Post, after : as, posthabeo, I account after, I postpone. 
 
 Re, back again, or against : as, repono, I place again ; re- 
 luctor, I struggle against; rccipio, I take again, I 
 receive. It sometimes increases : as, redundo, I 
 
152 
 
 run over, I redound. It is sometimes negative: 
 as, retcgo, I uncover ; recludo, I unlock. 
 
 Se, apart, or aside : as, sevoco, I call aside ; secludo, I shut 
 up. 
 
 Sub, under, a small degree, or privily : as, subjicio, I cast un- 
 der ; subinvideo, I envy a little ; subtristis, some- 
 what sad : surripio, I steal, or I seize privily. 
 
 Super, upon, or over : as, superscribe, I write upon. 
 
 Subter, under, privily : as, subterfluo, I run or flow under ; 
 subterfugio, I escape privily. 
 
 Trans, over : as, transfero, I carry over, I transfer. 
 
 Ve, is privative : as, vecors, foolish ; vesanus, sickly. It is 
 intensive : as, vehemens ! , vehement or violent, hav- 
 ing strong passions or feelings. It is sometimes 
 both in the same word : as, vegrandis, very great, 
 or very slim. 
 
 Other prepositions in composition have nearly the same 
 signification a$ out of composition. For the changes which, 
 for the sake of sound, prepositions undergo in being pre- 
 fixed, see Compounded Verbs ? 
 
 The Manner of expressing in Latin certain English Par- 
 ticles, some of which are denominated Prepositions, and 
 some, the Signs of Cases. 
 
 Of, after a substantive (or 's), is the sign of the genitive: as, 
 the father of the king, or the king's father, pater regis. 
 
 Of, before an adjective of praise or dispraise, joined to a 
 substantive, shows that it may be put in the genitive or 
 ablative : as, a man of no integrity, homo nidlius Jidei, or 
 nulla fide. 
 
 Of, after adjectives of plenty or want, is the sign of the ge- 
 nitive or ablative: as, full of wine, plenus vini or vino. 
 
 Of, after worthy, unworthy, need, descended, born, is the sign 
 of the ablative : as, worthy of praise, dig?ms laude ; there 
 is need of action, opus est facto ; born of a king, natus 
 rege. 
 
 Of, after comparatives, superlatives, partitives, and certain 
 numerals, is the sign of the genitive : as, the elder of the 
 brothers, senior fratrum ; or it may be made by de, e, ex, 
 or inter : as, the elder of the two sons, ex duobus Jiliis 
 natu major. 
 
 1 Vctus et vehement, says Stephanus, " alterum ab cstaiu mag- 
 nitudine, alterum a mentis vi, compositum." 
 
153 
 
 Of, signifying the matter of which a thing is made, is ex- 
 pressed by de, e, or ex : as, a buckler of gold, clypeus ex 
 auro. 
 
 Of, for concerning, is expressed by de : as, a story of you, 
 
 fabula de te ; for by or from, by , ab, e, ex: as, I received 
 
 the book of (from is more common) the master, librum a 
 
 prceceptore accept ; perhaps you had heard of somebody, 
 
 audisti ex aliquo fortasse ? 
 
 Of, after verbs of accusing, condemning, acquitting, and / 
 repent (pcenitet me), I am ashamed (pudct me), lam weary 
 (t&det me), it irketh (piget), is a sign of the genitive: as, 
 he accuses me of theft, accusat me furti ; it irketh me of 
 (I am grieved for) my folly, me piget stidtiticz mea. 
 
 Of, after mereor, is made by de : as, he deserves praise of 
 you, de te laudem meretur. 
 
 Of, after verbs of unloading and depriving, is the sign of the 
 ablative : as, he robbed his friend of his character, amicum 
 famd spoliavit. 
 
 Of is sometimes included in the Latin verb : as, beware of 
 intemperance, intemperantiam cave. 
 
 To and for are signs of the dative when they come before 
 a noun, and signify to the use or hurt of any person or 
 thing : as, pleasant to his friends, jucundus amicis. 
 
 To, after it belongs (attmet, pertinet), it regards (spectat), 
 and after some verbs of calling, exhorting, inviting, and 
 provoking , such as, voco, loquor, hortor, invito, lacesso, 
 is made by ad : as, he invited me to supper, ad ccenam me 
 invitavit. 
 
 To and for, signifying motion, and after born, Jit, prone, 
 ready, are made by ad or in : as, prone to peace, ad pa- 
 cem promts. 
 
 To is sometimes the sign of the genitive : as, time to write, 
 tempus scribendi, i. e. time of writing. 
 
 To is expressed, according to circumstances, by different 
 parts of a verb : as, I came to dine, veni pransum ; a boy 
 about to write, puer scripturus ; I desire to be loved, cu- 
 pio amari ; god to be worshipped, deus colcndus ; a man 
 worthy to be loved, dignus amatu. 
 
 To is sometimes included in the verb ; as, see to your health, 
 valetudinem cur a ; pray to the gods, precare deos. 
 
 For ; See the prepositions pro and pra, ob, propter, de, ad, 
 
 in, per. 
 For, denoting the cause, is a sign of the ablative : as, worse 
 
 for liberty, liccntid deterior. 
 
For, before the price, is the sign of the ablative : as, all 
 things are sold for gold, omnia venduntur auro. 
 
 For, in the beginning of a sentence, is made by nam, enim, 
 denim, &c. 
 
 For is sometimes part of the noun or verb: as, a certain look- 
 ing-for of judgment, qu&dam expectatio judicii ; he sends 
 for a physician, medicum accersit. 
 
 With is found before the cause, manner and instrument, and 
 
 is a sign of the ablative : as, he killed him with his own 
 
 hand, manu sud occidit. 
 With, denoting in company with, or together with, is made 
 
 by cum : as, he entered with a sword, cum gladio ingressus 
 
 est. 
 With, after verbs of anger, comparing, meeting, is the sign 
 
 of the dative : as, I am angry with you, tibi irascor ; to 
 
 compare great things with small, parvis componere magna. 
 With, applied to a person with regard to situation, is made 
 
 by apud : as, he is with me, or at my house, apud me est. 
 With is sometimes the same as concerning, and is made by 
 
 de : as, what have you done with that horse, quid de isto 
 
 equofecisti ? 
 With, after verbs signifying to begin, is made by a or a b : as, 
 
 I had a mind to begin with that, ab eo exordiri volui. 
 With is sometimes part of the verb : as, he goes on with his 
 
 villany, prosequitur suum scelus. 
 
 From ; See the prepositions a, ab, abs, e, ex, de. 
 
 From, after verbs of taking away, is the sign of the dative : 
 as, he took a book from me, eripuit mihi librum. 
 
 From, after a verb of hindering or withholding, is expressed 
 by the infinitive mood, or ne, quo minus, and quin, with 
 the subjunctive: as, they hinder them from carrying, eos 
 Jerre prohibent ; he rescued himself from pleading his 
 cause, ne causam diceret, se eripuit ; weakness kept you 
 from coming, infirmitas te tenuit quo minus venires; I can 
 scarcely refrain from flying in his face, viz me contineo 
 quin involem in capillum. 
 
 From, before the name of a town, is the sign of the ablative : 
 as, he came from London, Londino venit. 
 
 From is sometimes part of a verb : as, conceal this matter 
 from your wife, cela hanc rem uxorem. 
 
 In ; See the prepositions in, apud, ad. 
 
 In, referring to time, is made by in, de, per, intra, inter : as, 
 
155 
 
 thieves rise by (or in the) night, de node surgunt lalrones; 
 
 in the tune of the truce, per tempus induciarum. 
 In, for by or after, is the sign of the ablative of manner : as, 
 
 he did it in this way, hoc modo fecit. 
 In is sometimes a part of the verb : as, they are held-in by 
 
 reason, a ratione retinentur ; i. e. restrained. 
 
 By ; See the prepositions a, ab, e, ex, per, propter. 
 
 By, signifying near, is made by ad, apud, juxta, prope, se- 
 cundum and sub ; which see. 
 
 By denotes the ablative of manner or cause : as, by force and 
 arms, vi et armis. 
 
 By, after verbals in bills and dus, after passive verbs and 
 perfect participles, among the poets, is the sign of the da- 
 tive : as, a grove penetrable by no star, lucus nulli pcnetra- 
 bilis astro ; nor is he seen by any one, neque cernitur ulli 
 (ab ullo). 
 
 By, before the name of a town, is the sign of the ablative ; 
 as, he came by London, Londino, or, per Londimim venit. 
 
 By is sometimes included in the verb : as, I was by, ego ad- 
 eram. 
 
 At, near, ad, apud; during, in, inter, which see. 
 
 At before names of towns, see Syntax. 
 
 At, after verbs of anger, is the sign of the dative : as, he is 
 angry at me, mlhi succenset *. 
 
 At denotes the ablative of cause: as, I come at the command 
 of Jupiter, jussu Jovis venio. 
 
 At denotes the ablative of time : as, at one o'clock, hard 
 primd. 
 
 At denotes the ablative of price : as, he lives at an extrava- 
 gant rate, profusis sumptibus vivit. 
 
 At is sometimes part of the verb : as, I laugh at, derideo. 
 
 On, upon, a word of place, meaning near, a, ab, ad. 
 On, a word of rest, in or super : as, on horseback, in equo. 
 On, a word of motion, in : as, they leapt on the targets, in 
 
 scuta salierunt. 
 On, after to depend, or to beget, is made by a, ab, de, e, ex, 
 
 (but otherwise by in or super) : as, this depends upon you, 
 
 hoc a te pendet. 
 On, before time, musical instruments, condition, terms, food, 
 
 1 The English now say " angry at a thing," <{ angry with a 
 person." It was not so formerly. 
 
166 
 
 &c. is the sign of the ablative : as, on that day, eo die ; 
 
 he plays on the harp, lyrd modulatur ; on this condition, 
 
 hac lege. 
 On, after verbs of pity, is the sign of the genitive : as, take 
 
 pity on so great misfortunes, miserere laborum tantorum. 
 On, after verbs of bestowing, wasting, or losing, is made by 
 
 in : as, he bestowed kindness upon me, in me beneficium 
 
 contulit. 
 On is sometimes part of the verb : as, he employed his time 
 
 on his studies, tempus studiis impendit ; I am thinking on 
 
 a different thing, aliam rem cogito. 
 
 Than after the comparative degree is the sign of the abla- 
 tive, or it is made by quam and a nominative : as, I never 
 saw a man more valiant than Caesar, nunquam vidi homi- 
 nem fortiorem quam Ciesar est, or C&sare, or quam Ccc- 
 sarem ; which last is governed by vidi 9 or is said to be 
 coupled by quam to hominem, 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS, 
 
 A conjunction is an indeclinable word, having no gov< 
 ment of nouns ; but which connects words and sentences, 
 and shows their dependence upon one another. 
 
 Conjunctions are divided into primitive : such as, ef, ac 9 
 sed 9 nam, &c., and derivative : as, quod from quis, verum and 
 verb from verus. From their structure, some are called 
 simple : as, at 9 nam, &c. ; others are called compound : as, 
 atque, namque. 
 
 According to their meaning and use, they are divided into 
 numerous classes : as, copulative, et, ac, atque , disjunctive, 
 jiut, vel, seu, sive, which two last have been called subjunc- 
 tive or explanatory : as, Diana sive Luna ; C&sar sive Dic- 
 tator, both words having the same application : concessive, 
 as, etsi 9 etiamsi ; conditional : as, si?i, si, du?n, dwmnodo ; 
 with many other classes not necessary to be mentioned. 
 
 According to their position in a sentence, they are divided 
 into prepositive, or those which are placed first : as, nam 9 
 quarc, at, ast, atque, neque; subjunctive, or postpositive, 
 which are not placed first: such as, quidem, quoque, autem, 
 vero, enim ; and the enclitics, (so called because they throw 
 the accent upon the preceding syllable of the word to which 
 they are always annexed,,) viz. que, ne, and ve. The follow- 
 ing arc either prepositive or postpositive, and are therefore 
 
157 
 
 named common : etiam, equidem, licet, quamvis, quanquam, 
 tamen, attamen, namque, quod, quia, quoniam, quippe, utpote, 
 ut, uti, ergo, ideo, igitur, idcirco, itaque, proinde, propterea, 
 si, ni, 7iisi. Quamvis, quanquam, quod, quia, ut, uti, si, ni, 
 nisi, are generally placed first : tamcn and igitur, second. 
 
 The same word in English having sometimes different 
 meanings, and, according to the sense, being referred to 
 different parts of speech, it will be expedient for the young 
 learner, in turning English into Latin, to attend to such di- 
 stinctions as the following. 
 
 ( 1 ) The word but has two significations. In the first it 
 is equivalent to be-out, and is the same as without, or unless, 
 or sine and nisi, the former of which is a preposition, and 
 the latter a conjunction. But, which in this sense is an ex- 
 ceptive, or word of exclusion, is synonymous with prater, 
 pr&terquam or nisi : as, I saw nobody but John, Vidi nemi- 
 nem nisi, or prceter, Joannem. In the second, it means add, 
 or moreover, and is synonymous with at, ast, (probably con- 
 tractions for adsit,) autem, ccetcrum. In this sense it is, in 
 English, a copulative, serving to connect what follows it, 
 with a sentence, or part of a sentence, going before : as, 
 nunc omitte, qu&so, hum; caeterum posthac si quicquam, 
 nihil precor. But hereafter if he shall do &c. i. e. add this, 
 or another thing, or one thing more, viz. if he shall do any 
 thing. 
 
 But, when equivalent to that, is made by quin : as, there 
 is no doubt but , non cst dubium quin ; to only, by tan- 
 tum, modo, solum : as, they disagree but about one thing, in 
 re una solum dissident ; to than, by quam or nisi ; as, she 
 does nothing else, but grieve, nil aliud facit, qudm dolet. 
 
 (2) The word whether, though, in reality, always a pro- 
 noun, is considered as sometimes a pronoun, and sometimes 
 a conjunction, because it corresponds to Latin words refer- 
 red by grammarians to these two species : thus, whether is 
 the richer, uter est ditior ? It is also expressed by ne, utrum, 
 an, num, &c. ; as, llomcene, an Mitylenes, mattes vivere, 
 Whether would you prefer to live at Rome, or at Mitylene? 
 Utrum inscientem eum vultis contra feeder a fecisse, an scien- 
 tem? 
 
 The same remark is applicable to the definitives, or adjec- 
 tives, either and neither : as, I am not so strong as either of 
 you, Minus habeo virium quam vestrum utervis. Either two 
 or none, Vel duo, vel nemo. Neither is very blamable, Neu- 
 ter est valde reprehcndendus. I neither bid you, nor forbid 
 you, figo nequc te jtibeo, neque re to. 
 
158 
 
 (3) Both, followed by and, is made by et : as, Both Cse* 
 sar and Scipio, Et Ccesar et Scipio. Both the orators (Se- 
 parately), is expressed by Uterque orator. Both the Scipios 
 (together), Ainbo Scipiones. This last distinction has not 
 always been attended to. 
 
 (4) For, in the beginning of a clause, implying a reason, 
 is made by nam, enim, etenim. 
 
 For, before an oblique case, implying a purpose or inten- 
 tion, is made by the prepositions ob, propter, ad, in ; imply- 
 ing an exchange, by pro. 
 
 But for is made by absque : as, But for him I should have 
 looked well to myself Absque eo esset, recte ego mihi vidis- 
 sem. 
 
 (5) As, denoting manner, similitude or comparison, is ex- 
 pressed by ut, sicut, uti, ac ,- thus, As in looking-glasses, Uti 
 in speculis. As miserable as I am, Miser ceque ac ego. 
 
 As, when equivalent to since or because, is expressed by 
 quoniam, quia, quippe, quod. 
 
 (6) Cum and turn, or turn repeated, and tarn and quam, 
 are often used in instances in which emphasis or contradi- 
 stinction is intended: as, He embraces not only all the 
 learned, but particularly Marcellus, Amplectitur cum erudi- 
 tos omnes, turn imprimis Marcellum. He hates both learning 
 and virtue, Odit turn literas, turn virtutem. I love you as 
 much as myself, Tarn te diligo, quam meipsum. The adverb 
 qua repeated is sometimes used in a similar way: as, Famous 
 both (as well) for his father's glory and (as) his own, Insig- 
 nis qua paternd gloria qua sud. 
 
 INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 Interjections are indeclinable words, without any govern- 
 ment, and expressing in a brief manner some affection or 
 emotion of the mind. They have been divided into the fol- 
 lowing classes expressive of 
 
 1. joy; as, evax, hey, brave. 
 
 2. grief; as, ah, hei, heu, elieu, ah, alas, woe is me. 
 
 3. wonder ; as, papte, oh, strange ; vah, ha. 
 
 4. praise ; as, euge, well done. 
 
 5. aversion ; as, apage, away, begone. 
 
 6. exclamation ; as, o//, proh, O. 
 
159 
 
 7. surprise or fear ; as, at at, ha, aha. 
 
 8. imprecation; as, vac, woe. 
 
 9. laughter; as, ha, ha, he. 
 
 10. silencing; as, au, 'st, pax, silence, hush, *st. 
 
 11. calling; as, eho, io, ho, so, ho, soho, O. 
 
 12. derision; as, hui, away with. 
 
 13. attention; as, hem, ha. 
 
 Some of these are merely instinctive or mechanical sounds ; 
 others have an intrinsic meaning : as, apage, and pax ; for 
 both nouns and verbs are sometimes used as if they w r ere in- 
 terjections : thus, malum ! with a mischief! turpe, shameful; 
 sodes, amabo, qiifsso, prithee. The same interjection some- 
 times expresses different passions : thus, vah ! may express 
 either joy, sorrow, or wonder. 
 
 OF THE FIGURES. 
 
 Changes in the form or position of words, (which are 
 named metaplasm] are produced by Prosthesis, Epentkesis, 
 Paragoge, Diaeresis, Crasis, Apharesis, Syncope, Apocope, 
 Antithesis, Metathesis, commonly called the Figures of Ety- 
 mology, but belonging to Prosody likewise; to which may be 
 added Anastrophe and Tmesis, generally used for the sake of 
 the metre ; and Archaismus and Hellenismus. 
 
 PROSTHESIS adds a letter, or syllable, to the beginning of 
 a word : as, gnatus for natus ; tetuli for tuli ; eduram for du- 
 ram. Virg. Geo. iv. 1 4-5. Perhaps, however, natus and tuli 
 may be considered as formed by Aphaeresis, from gnatus and 
 tetuli, the former derived from the obsolete ge.no, or from y<- 
 voju,ai, and the latter having an augment, after the manner 
 of the Greeks. 
 
 EPENTHESIS inserts a letter, or syllable, in the middle of 
 a word: as, navita, Timolus, alituum, for nauta, Tmolus, ali- 
 tum. 
 
 PARAGOGE adds a letter, or syllable, to the end : as med, 1 
 amarier, docerier, avellier, audirier, for me, amari, doceri, 
 avelli, audiri. 
 
 DIAERESIS is the division of one syllable into two: as, 
 auldi for aulce ; siliice for silvte. Vossius is of opinion that 
 etiam is formed a trisyllable by this figure, from et jam. 
 
 CRASIS or SYN/ERESIS is the contraction of two vowels 
 
 1 The antients often added d to a word; thus in the laws of the 12 tables, 
 SED. FllAVDED. ESTOD. i. i-. .* (<* sin^ frawte eXo. 
 
160 
 
 belonging to different syllables, into one syllable : as, vent-ens 
 for vehemens ; prendo for prehendo. This and the preceding 
 figure are confined to the poets chiefly. 
 
 APH^RESIS cuts off the first letter, or syllable, of a word : 
 as, brevist, opust, similist, rhabo, in Plautus, for brews est, opus 
 est, similis est, arrhabo; and tender ant, in Seneca, Here. fur. 
 v. 538, instead of tetenderant. See Prosthesis. 
 
 SYNCOPE strikes a letter, or syllable, from the middle of 
 a word : as, oraclum, poplus, vinclum, calda, valdius, aspris, 
 repostus, extinxem, dixti, objecsem, collexem, percmti, surrexe^ 
 amantum, deiim, &c. ; instead of oraculum, populus, vincuhtm, 
 calida, validius, asperis, repositus, extinxissem, dixisti, obje- 
 cissem, collegissem, (is being struck out, and gs turned into 
 x } ) percussisti, surrexisse, amantium, deorum. 
 
 APOCOPE takes away the final letter, or syllable, of a word : 
 as, inert, Antony tuguri, puer, prosper ; for mene, Antonii y 
 tugurii. t ptierus, prosperus. 
 
 ANTITHESIS substitutes one letter for another: as, olli and 
 ollis, for illi and ittis ;faciundum for faciendum; optumus for 
 optimus ; publicus for poplicus, or populicus ; vult, vidtis, for 
 volt, voltis, contractions of volit, volitis. 
 
 METATHESIS changes the order of letters in a word : as, 
 pistris farpristiss Lybia for Libya. 
 
 ANASTROPHE inverts the order of words : as, dare circum, 
 Virg. ^En. ii. 792; erit super, Ovid. Fast. v. 60Q;facit are, 
 Lucr. vi. 692; instead of circumdare, supererit, arejacit. 
 Thus also, Jows cum fulmina contra, in Virgil ; and also 
 Transtra per et remos. 
 
 TMESIS separates compounded words, in order to put an- 
 other word between them : as, Quce me cunque vacant terrce 
 Virg. Super tibi erunt Virg. Scptcm subjecta trioni 
 Virg. Inque salutatam Virg. Ob esse sequentemPlaut. 
 Dum re non sit tamen apse Lucr. ; instead of qucecunque, 
 supererwit, septemtrioni, insalutatamque, obsequentem, reapse, 
 i. e. reipsa. The insertion of que is frequent in Lucretius : 
 as, conque-globata, conque-gregantur, disque-sipatis, inqiie- 
 gravescunt, perque-plicatis, &c. 
 
 ARCHAISMUS is the old way of writing : as, aulai, vids, 
 omneis or omnis, ornati, senati, anuis, curru, die, scibo, au- 
 dibo, prohibesso, negassim, duim, siem, expugnassere, impe- 
 trassere, capsimus, adaxint, mwiri, fuat, here, quase, donz- 
 cum, nenu, endo or indu ; instead of aulce, vite, omnes, orna- 
 tus, senatus, anus, currui, diet, sciam, audiam, prohibuero, 
 negaverim, dem, sim, expugnaturum, impetraturum esse, cepe- 
 rimus, adegerint, mori, sit, heri, quasi, donee, non, in. 
 
161 
 
 HELLENISMUS is an imitation of the Greek termination, 
 or declension : as, Helene, Crete, Nymphe, instead of Helena, 
 Creta, Nympha. Also Antiphon, Demiphon, Milon, for An- 
 tipho, Demipho, Milo. Thus likewise in the first declension, 
 Gen. auras ; in the second, Gen. Orpheos, Dat. Orphei, 
 Ace. Orphea ; in the third, Gen. Pallados, Ace. Pallada, 
 Dat. pi. Troasin, Ace. Troadas. 
 
 The following lines contain a concise explanation of the 
 Figures properly so called. 
 
 Prosthesis apponit capiti, sed Aphteresis aufert. 
 
 Syncopa de medio tollit, sed Epenthesis addit. 
 
 Abstrahit Apocope fini, sed dat Paragoge. 
 
 Constringit Crasis, distracta Diuresis effert. 
 
 Litera si legitur transposta, Metathesis exit. 
 
 Antithesin, mutata tibi si litera, dices. 
 
 OF SYNTAX 1 . 
 
 SYNTAX is the arrangement 2 of words in a sentence, ac- 
 cording to the established rules of Concord and Govern- 
 ment. 
 
 Concord is the agreement of one word with another in 
 certain accidents, as in case, gender, number, or person : 
 thus, Cicero orator, Cicero the orator : Ego amo, I love. 
 
 Government is the power which one word has in deter- 
 mining the state of another : as, Ego virum amo, I love the 
 man. 
 
 1 Such as prefer an English Syntax, will find Mr. Ruddiman's plain, con- 
 cise, and yet comprehensive. The numerous notes subjoined to it deserve an 
 attentive perusal. An abstract of these rules is now given, with a consider- 
 able collection of such notes and observations, as, it is trusted, will be found 
 not undeserving of attention. Those who prefer the Latin Syntax, in the 
 Eton Abridgment of Lily, will find in these notes many things explained, 
 which are either wholly overlooked, or but slightly noticed, in that Syntax. 
 Each of these two syntaxes, both of which are extremely popular, having a 
 useful system of exercises adapted to it, is one great reason that induced me 
 not to make any material alteration in this division of grammar, either in re- 
 gard to the subject, the arrangement, or the number, of the rules. One thing 
 is, however, very obvious, that many of what are accounted rules of syntax 
 might be referred to the figures of apposition, ellipsis, &c. 
 
 8 The arrangement, or order of words in a sentence, will hereafter be no- 
 ticed. 
 
 M 
 
162 
 
 I. OF CONCORD. 
 
 The Concords arc four ; 
 
 1. Of an Adjective with a Substantive. 
 
 C 2. Of a Verb with a Nominative. 
 
 3. Of a Relative with an Antecedent. 
 
 4. Of a Substantive with a Substantive. 
 
 RULE I. An adjective agrees with a substantive in gen- 
 der, number, and case : as, 
 
 Vir bonus, A good man. 
 
 Fcemina casta, A chaste woman. 
 Dulce pomum, A sweet apple. 
 
 Note 1. Thus also, Namtua res agitur, paries cum proximus 
 ardetHoi:. An Adjective is often joined in the same case with 
 a personal pronoun : as, Ut se toiurn ei traderet Nep. Ipse ceger 
 ago Virg. i. e. ipse ego. 
 
 Note 2. Under adjectives are comprehended adjective pronouns, 
 and participles. 
 
 Note 3. The substantive is often omitted ; and in this case the 
 adjective takes the gender of the substantive understood ; as, Per 
 immortales ; supply deos. The substantive thing (negotium) is 
 usually understood, the adjective being put in the neuter gender : 
 as, Triste lupus stabulis Virg. 
 
 Note 4*. Adjectives are often used substantively; and sometimes 
 substantives are used adjectively : as, Fortunate senex Virg. Po- 
 pulum late regem Virg. i. e. regnantem. 
 
 Note 5. Several adjectives may agree with one and the same 
 substantive : as, Etiam externos midtos claros viros nominarem 
 Cic. 
 
 Note 6. An adjective joined with two substantives of different 
 genders generally agrees with that one which is chiefly the subject 
 of discourse ; as, Dein Puteoli, colonia Diccearckia dicti Plin. 
 This refers chiefly to such adjectives as appellatus, habitus, credi- 
 tus, visus, &c. It sometimes agrees with the nearest substantive, 
 although it may not be the principal one ; as, Non omnis error 
 stultitia est dicenda Cic. But if the principal substantive be the 
 name of a man or a woman, the adjective agrees with it: as, Semi- 
 ramis puer esse credita est Justin, not creditus. A few instances 
 occur in which the relative agrees with the appellative ; but they are 
 not to be imitated. In such phrases as Maxima pars vulnerati 
 Sail. Pars injugam effusi simt Liv. the adjective seems to agree 
 with some general word implied in the sense; as, milites or homines. 
 In some instances, the female seems the leading gender: as, Ille 
 meas trrare boves permisit~Virg. 
 
163 
 
 Note 7. Part of a sentence may supply the place of a substan- 
 tive, the adjective being put in the neuter gender : as, Audito regent 
 Doroberniam projidsd Eton Gram. Excepto quod non simul esses, 
 ccetera l&tus Hor. 
 
 RULE II. A personal verb agrees with its nominative, in 
 number and person : as, 
 
 Ego lego, I read. 
 
 Tu scribiS) Thou writest. 
 
 Preceptor docet, The master teacjieth. 
 
 Note 1. Thus also Quid ego cesso Plaut. Sol ruit, et monies um- 
 brantur Virg. 
 
 Note 2. Ego and nos are the first persons ; tu and vos the se- 
 cond ; and all nouns belong to the third. 
 
 Note 3. The nominative of pronouns, especially of the first- and 
 second person, is seldom expressed ; as, Nonfallam-*-Cic. Quod 
 te dignum est. Jades Ter. But they are not omitted, when em. 
 phasis or a distinction of persons is intended : as, Tu dominus, tu 
 mr, tu mihi f rater eras Ovid. Nos, nos, dico aperte, nos consules 
 desumus Cic. Ego reges eject, vos tyrannos introduces Auct. 
 ad Herenn. 
 
 Note 4. Aiunt,dicunt,ferunt, sunt, narrant, tradunt, and thfe 
 like, often have their nominative understood, when it is a person : 
 as, Aiunt solere senes repuerascere Plaut. Sunt quosjuvat Hor. 
 homines is understood. For it is to be observed, that every no- 
 minative must have a finite verb, and every finite verb a nomina- 
 tive, expressed or understood; thus, in Di meliorat Virg. dent 
 may be understood ; in Nam Polydorus ego Virg. the verb sum. 
 
 Note 5. The nominative is sometimes found with the infini- 
 tive ; in which case ccepit or cceperunt is generally supposed to be 
 understood : as, Invidere omnes mihi Ter. Caesar JEduos fru- 
 mentumjlagitare Caes. But in some instances, other verbs may 
 be supposed, according to the sense, to be understood ; and in 
 others, the infinitive seems to be of the same import as the im- 
 perfect of the indicative. 
 
 Note 6. The infinitive mood, or part of a sentence, may be the 
 nominative of the third person ; as, Non est mentiri meum Ter. 
 Incertum est quam longa nostrum cujusque vita futura sit Cic. E 
 ccelo descendit, Nosce teipsum Juv. The adverb or antient accusa- 
 tive, partim, sometimes appears as a nominative : thus, Sed eorum 
 partim in pompd, partim in ade illustres esse voluerunt Cic. But 
 such constructions may be elliptical. 
 
 Note 7. In Latin, as in English, the person speaking, and the 
 person addressed, are sometimes put in the plural, but in the for- 
 mer, perhaps, with some allusion to more than one : as, Nos da- 
 bimus quod ames Ovid, Heroid. xvi. 85, i. e. ego dabo. Vos, 
 
 M2 
 
164 
 
 Calliope, precor, adspirate canentiVirg. JEn. ix. 525. There 
 are instances in which the person speaking of himself uses, one 
 while the singular and another the plural, in the same sentence. 
 
 RULE III. Substantive verbs, verbs of naming and ges- 
 ture, have a nominative both before and after them, belong- 
 ing to the same thing : as, 
 
 Ego sum discipulus, I am a scholar. 
 
 Tu vocaris Joannes, You are named John. 
 
 Ilia incedit regina. She walks [as] a queen. 
 
 Note 1. Thus also, Ira est Juror Hor. Ego incedo regina 
 Virg. 
 
 Note 2. This rule seems to arise from the nature of the figure 
 Apposition, and may be thus expressed generally : Verbs which 
 serve as copulcs t uniting the predicate with its subject, have a no- 
 minative before and after them. 
 
 Note 3. Substantive verbs are sum, Jlo, forem, and existo. 
 Verbs of naming comprehend such passives as appettor, dicor, 
 vocor, nominor, nuncupor,jeror, perhibeor, censeor, existimor, vi- 
 deor, habeor, creor, cognoscor^ inventor, &c. Verbs of gesture or 
 of posture are eo, incedo, venio, cubo, sto, jaceo, sedeo, evado,Ju- 
 gio, dormioy maneo t &c. 
 
 Note 4, The rule is not confined to these verbs only ; for any 
 verb may have a nominative before and after it, belonging to the 
 same thing : as, Audim hoc puer Cic. Sapiens nil facit invitus 
 Cic. 
 
 Note 5. When a verb comes between two nominatives of differ- 
 ent numbers, it usually agrees with the first, which may be sup- 
 posed to be the subject of discourse: as, Ossa lapis Jiunt Ovid. 
 It sometimes, however, takes the number of the last : as, Aman- 
 tium irce amoris integratio est Ter. Pectus quoque roborajiunt 
 Ovid. 
 
 Note 6. If a vocative precede, such verbs or their participles are 
 generally followed by the nominative : as, Esto, tu C&sar, amicus 
 Mart. v. 20. But the poets often use another vocative : as, 
 Quibus, Hector, ab oris Expectate Denis Virg. for expectatus. Lee- 
 tule divitiisjacte beate meis Propert. Hence also, Made virtute 
 esto, for mactus. 
 
 RULE IV. The infinitive mood has an accusative before 
 it: as, 
 
 Gaudeo te valere, I am glad that you are well. 
 
 Note 1. Thus also, Credunt se negligi Ter. Miror tenonscri- 
 lere Cic. 
 
 Note 2. The word that, either expressed or understood, coming 
 between two English verbs, is the usual sign of this construction. 
 
165 
 
 Note ?. This accusative may be often turned into a nominative 
 preceded by quod or ut, the infinitive being changed into the in- 
 dicative or subjunctive: thus, Equidem scio jam Jilius quod amet 
 meus Ter. forjilium meum amare. Volo vos bene sperare, or ut 
 bene speretis. 
 
 Note 4f. Me, te, se, ilium, are often understood : as, Sed reddere 
 posse negabatVirg. i. e. se posse. 
 
 Note 5. Esse ovfuisse is frequently omitted after participles : as, 
 Sed de ea re legatos missuros dixerunt Nep. i. e. esse. 
 
 Note 6. Sometimes the accusative and infinitive are omitted : 
 as, Pollidtus sum suscepturum Ter. for me suscepturum esse. 
 
 Note 7. If the verb following that have no future participle, the 
 expression may be varied thus : In spem veniebat,fore, utipertina- 
 da desisteret Cses. Nunquam putavifuturum, ut pater meus libc- 
 ros odisset Senec. 
 
 Note 8. Care should be taken in using this construction not to 
 render the meaning ambiguous, as in the famous .answer of the 
 oracle ; Aio te, JEacida, Romanos sincere posse, in which it could 
 not be ascertained from the mere words, which party was to prove 
 victorious. The ambiguity might be prevented by changing the 
 active into the passive voice. Further observations on quod t ut, 
 and the infinitive mood, will occur under the Construction of the 
 Infinitive Mood, and under Conjunctions. 
 
 RULE V. Esse has the same case after it that it has before 
 it: as, 
 
 Petrus cupit esse vir doctus, Peter desires to be a learned 
 
 man. 
 
 Scio Petrum esse virum doctum, I know that Peter is a learned 
 
 man. 
 
 Mihi negligenti esse non licet, I am not allowed to be neg- 
 ligent. 
 
 Note 1. Thus also, Qui volet esse plus Lucan. Licet illis esse 
 timidis Liv. 
 
 Note 2. This rule may be better expressed thus : Substantive 
 verbs, and most verbs neuter and passive, have the same case after 
 them as before them. 
 
 Note 3. When the leading verb governs the dative, such as li- 
 cet, cxpedit, datiir, concedo, the case after the infinitive may be ei- 
 ther the dative, or the accusative : thus, Vobis necesse estjbrtibus 
 esse viris Liv. Da mihi fatter e, da justo sanctoque videri Hor. 
 Expcdit bonas esse vobis Ter. Si dm Romano licet esse Gadita- 
 num Cic. It is evident that this construction and its varieties 
 depend upon apposition ; for if we say Licet illis esse timidis, ti~ 
 midis agrees with illis t the word to which it refers, and which it 
 
166 
 
 qualities. If we say Licet illis esse timidos, the accusative illos 
 seems to be understood before esse, to which, in like manner, ti- 
 midos refers. The former seems to be a Greek construction ; the 
 latter accords with the nature of the Latin language. 
 
 Note 4. After aio, refero, puto t ncscio, sentio, and the like, with 
 esse, the poets sometimes use the nominative instead of the accu- 
 sative : as, Phaselus ille, quern videtis hospites, aitfuisse navium ce- 
 lerrimus Catull. Retuht Ajax esse Joms pronepos Ovid. Uxor 
 invicti Jovis esse nescis Hor. Sometimes the infinitive is omit- 
 ted : as, Sensit medios delapsus iji hostes Virg. for se delapsum 
 esse. In these examples, it may be observed that the pronoun is 
 not expressed before the infinitive. 
 
 Note 5. This rule extends only to the nominative, dative and 
 accusative; on which account we cannot say Interest Ciceronis esse 
 eloquentis, but eloquentem, in which eloquentem refers to a personal 
 pronoun understood before esse. 
 
 RULE VI. The relative qut, qua, quod, agrees with the 
 antecedent, in gender, number, and person : as, 
 Amo virum qui pauca loquitur^ I love the man who speaks 
 
 little. 
 Ego qui doceo, I who teach. 
 
 RULE VII. If no nominative come between the relative and 
 the verb, the relative shall be the nominative to the verb: as, 
 Preceptor qui docet, The master who teacheth. 
 
 RULE VIII. But if a nominative come between the rela- 
 tive and the verb, the relative shall be of that case which the 
 verb or noun following, or the preposition going before, uses 
 to govern : as, 
 
 Deus quern colimus, God whom we worship. 
 
 Cujus munere vivimus, By whose gift we live. 
 
 Cut nullus est similis, To whom there is none like. 
 
 A quofacta sunt omnia^ By whom all things were made. 
 
 Note 1 . Thus also, Levejlt onus quod (onus} benefertur Ovid, 
 Literal, quas (literas) dedi Cic. 
 
 Note 2. The antecedent is the substantive going before the re- 
 lative, to which the latter refers, and which is again understood to 
 the relative. The relative may, therefore, be considered as placed 
 between two substantives (which are the same), whether expressed 
 or understood ; with the former of which it agrees in gender, 
 number, and person; and with the latter, in gender, number, and 
 case, as an adjective: thus, Dieindicunt, qua (die) adripam Rho- 
 dani omnes conveniant Caes, Erant omnino itinera duo f quibus 
 (itincribus} domo exire possent CJES. 
 
 Note 3. in the former notc^ there arc two examples in which 
 
167 
 
 the antecedent is repeated by Caesar ; but this is uncommon, as it 
 is naturally implied in the relative : thus, Animum rege, qui, (scil. 
 animus] nisi paret, imperat Hor. 
 
 Note 4-. Sometimes the substantive is omitted in the case which 
 it strictly assumes as an antecedent, and expressed in that case 
 which, though always understood, is generally suppressed ; as, 
 TJrbem quam statuo vestra est Virg. i. e. urbs quam (urbem) statuo. 
 Eunuchum quern dedisti nobis, quas turbas dedit Ter. i. e. Eunu~ 
 chus, quern (eunuchum) dedisti, &c. This seems an imitation of 
 Greek construction: as, 'Axyera^ $s 6 'Hpw^^, elrtzv, ov lyw aVsxe- 
 4>aA/tra 'Iwavv/yv, 5ro$ sri, i. e. roV 5~Jv 'loudvvys , ov 'Icudvvyv lyco 
 &c. Mark vi. 16. The antecedent is omitted in two ways ; 1st, 
 by putting the substantive after the relative, and, consequently, 
 in the same case with it: as, Popido ut placer ent, quas Jecisset fa* 
 hulas Ter. 2dly, by putting, through the figure anastrophe, 
 the substantive before the relative, but in such a manner that, in 
 reality, it does only supply the place of the following word, as it 
 is still in the same case as the relative : thus, Naucratem quern 
 convenire volui, in navi non erat Plaut. 
 
 Note 5. Sometimes both the antecedent and the subsequent sub- 
 stantive implied in the relative are omitted ; as, Sunt quos juvat 
 collegissc Hor. i. e. sunt homines quos (homines') &c. Qualis esset 
 natura montis, qui cognoscerent misitCaes. 
 
 Note 6. When the relative is placed between two nouns of dif- 
 ferent genders, it may agree with either ; but its agreement with 
 the antecedent is according to the analogy of Latin construction: 
 thus, Her culi sacrificiumjecit in loco, quern (locum) Pyram appellant 
 Liv. Unus erat toto natures vultus in orbe, Quern dixere Chaos 
 Ovid. The agreement with the consequent is an imitation of Greek 
 construction : thus, Animal providum et sagax quern vocamus ho- 
 minem Cic. Ad eum locum qua appellatur Pharsalia applicuit 
 Caes. 
 
 Note 7. If part of the sentence be the antecedent, the relative is 
 of the neuter gender: as, Ego quoque unaperco, quod mihi est carius 
 Ter. i. e. quodnegotium. Sometimes the pronoun id is elegantly 
 placed before quod: thus, Catilina, id quod facillimum erat, om- 
 nium flagitiorum atquejacinorum circum se catervas habebat Sail. 
 
 Note 8. Sometimes the antecedent is implied in the possessive : 
 as, Omnes laudarejbrtunas meas, qui haberemTer. i. e.Jbrtunas 
 mei. 
 
 Note 9. The relative sometimes refers to the sense of tlie pre- 
 ceding words, or to some other substantive than that which goes 
 before, with which last it sometimes differs in gender and number: 
 as, Inter alia prodigia eiiam carne pluit, quern imbrem ingem mi' 
 merits avium intervolitando rapuissejertur Liv. i. e. pluit imbrem 
 carne, quern (imbrem) &c. Daret id catenisjatale monstrum, quce 
 generosius perire qucerem &c. Hor. in which quce is feminine, 
 not in regard to the antecedent monstrum, but to Cleopatra of 
 whom the poet is speaking. 
 
168 
 
 Note 10. Sometimes it refers to an antecedent of a different 
 number from that which is expressed : as, Si tempus est ullumjure 
 hominis necandi, qua multa sunt Cic. i. e. tempora. Inter ea ser- 
 vitia repudiabat, cujus initio ad eum magnte copies concurrebant 
 Sail. i. e. servitii. 
 
 Note 11. Sometimes it agrees in gender with a word of similar 
 import to the antecedent : as, Ego te, Euclio, de alia re rescivisse 
 censui, quod ad me attinet Plaut. in which quod seems to refer 
 to negotium understood rather than to its real antecedent re. De- 
 lectu rebusque aliis dimnis humanisque quce (supply negotia) perip- 
 sos agenda erant, perfectis Liv. 
 
 Note 12. The relative is sometimes omitted : as, Est in secessu 
 longo locui ; insula portum Efficit objectu laterum Virg. Est lo- 
 cus: Hesperiam Graii cognomine dicunt Virg. in both which quern 
 may be supplied after locus. 
 
 Note 13. Sometimes the word is added to the antecedent, which 
 belongs to the clause of the relative; as, Cum venissent ad vada Vo- 
 laterrana quce nominantur Cic. for vada quce nominantur Vola- 
 terrana. As the original quotation stands, quce nominantur may be 
 translated, as they are named. 
 
 Note 14. The relative sometimes appears to agree in case with 
 the antecedent : as, Cum scribas, et aliquid agas eorum quorum 
 consuestiCic. Nonpro sud, aut quorum simulat ^ injuria Sail. 
 Frag. This construction may be elliptical ; and perhaps such ex- 
 amples are to be supplied thus : Aliquid agas eorum, quorum (all- 
 quid agere) consuesti. Pro injuria eorum,pro quorum injuria simu- 
 tat, scil. se arma cepisse. This is an imitation of Greek construc- 
 tion, and may arise from what is called attraction : thus, Ka< Itft- 
 reucrav fy y/aapjj, xa) ftp Aoyoy, w siifsv 6 'Iy<r8$ John ii. 22. 'Ex 
 reds eopToug, otf$' yyopsv! Aristoph. In these the relative is said 
 to be attracted, by the antecedent, into its case. 
 
 Note 15. Sometimes the relative, if once expressed, is after- 
 wards omitted, and in such a manner that, if supplied, its case 
 would be different : as, Quibus nee qucestus est, nee didicere artem 
 ullam Plaut. instead of nee qui didicere. 
 
 Note 16. Words of relative quantity and quality, as, quotus, 
 quantus, qualis, are often construed as the relative : thus, Fades, 
 qualem decet esse sororum Ovid. Tantce multitudinis, quantam 
 capit urbs nostra, concursus est ad me factus Cic. But when re- 
 latives of this description and their redditives (i. e. the adjectives 
 which correspond to them) refer to different substantives, the for- 
 mer agree with the first, and the latter with the second substantive, 
 as adjectives : thus, Dixi de te quce potui, tanta contentione, quan- 
 tum est Jorum Cic. Among the poets, qualis is sometimes made 
 to agree in gender with the former substantive : as, Sed incitat me 
 pectus et mammce putres, Equina quotes ubera Hor. for qualia 
 sunt ubera. The same poet uses the accusative for the ablative: as 
 Occurrunt animce, quales neque candidiorcs Terra tulit ; for qua- 
 libus. The word negotium is sometimes understood ; as, Talc 
 
169 
 
 tuum carmen nobis, quale sopor fessis in gramme Virg. Either 
 the relative or its redditive is sometimes omitted : as, Quale manus 
 addunt ebori decus Virg. for tale decus, quale. Qui tanti talem 
 genuere parentes Virg. i. e. tanti, quanta tu Dido; talem item, 
 qualem te conspicimus. 
 
 Note 17. The first two rules in regard to the relative qui, de- 
 pend upon the first and second concords ; and the third rule, upon 
 the rules for the government of nouns, verbs, and prepositions. It 
 always agrees in gender and number with the antecedent ; and 
 when the antecedent and consequent happen to be in the same 
 case, it then agrees in case also. Its case depends always upon 
 that of the consequent, which it implies ; and instead of which it 
 generally stands alone. 
 
 Note 18. The clause of the antecedent is sometimes found after 
 that of the relative : as, Qui pauperes sunt, us antiquior officio est 
 pecunia Cic. 
 
 RULE IX. Two or more substantives singular, coupled 
 together by a conjunction [et, ac, atque, &c.], generally have 
 a verb, adjective, or relative plural : as, 
 
 Petrus et Joannes, qui sunt docti, Peter and John, who are 
 
 learned. 
 
 Note 1 . Thus also, Lupus et agnus compulsi Phaedr. Furor ira- 
 que mentem pradpitant Virg. Herodotus Thucydidesque, quorum 
 <ztas in eorum tempora incidit Cic. 
 
 Note 2. This rule arises from the figure syllepsis. 
 
 Note S. It refers not only to affirmative copulatives, but may 
 be extended to those also which are negative, and to the disjunc- 
 tive conjunctions aut, vel, ve, seu, sive, in those cases where the 
 attribute is either affirmed or denied in regard to the several sub- 
 jects : as, Quod in decemviris neque Ctzsar, neque ego habiti essemus 
 Cic. Veluti cum prcetor, aut prases, aut proconsul, in balneum, 
 vcl in theatrum eant Justinian. Inst. 
 
 Note 4. A singular nominative followed by an ablative governed 
 by cum sometimes takes a plural verb or adjective : as, Juba cum 
 Labieno capti inpotestatem Ccesaris venissent Hirt. B. Afr. Remo 
 cum Jratre Quirinus Jura dabuntVirg. Pharnabazus cum Apol- 
 lonide et Athenagora vincti traduntur Curt. 
 
 Note 5. The conjunction is sometimes omitted, by the figure 
 asyndeton : as, Dum cetas, metus, magister prohibebant Ter. 
 
 Note 6. Sometimes two adjectives in the singular belong to a 
 plural substantive: as, Maria Tyrrhenum atque Adriaticum Liv. 
 
 Note 7. Frequently an adjective or verb singular is joined by 
 the figure zeugma to two or more nouns coupled together : as, 
 Mare rubrurn et tolus oricntis occanus referlus est silms Plin. 
 
170 
 
 Note 8. If the singular nominatives be of different persons, the 
 plural verb will agree with the more worthy person, that is, with 
 the first in preference to the second, and with the second rather 
 than with the third : as, Si tu et Tullia, lux nostra, valetis, ego et 
 suamssimus Cicero valemus Cic. The same rule is observed, if 
 cither substantive, or both, be plural ; as, Si nos duces, vosque mi- 
 lit es strenuo suo quisque qfficiofungamur. Th us also Errastis, Rulle, 
 vekementer et tu, et nonnulli college tui Cic. But in many in- 
 stances the person next to the verb, although it may be the more 
 unworthy, is preferred. 
 
 Note 9. In substantives denoting living beings, the masculine 
 gender is preferred to the feminine : as, Pater mihi ct mater mortui 
 sun t Ter. It is not ascertained among grammarians, whether 
 or not the feminine gender ought to be preferred to the neuter; 
 whether we should say Lucretia et ejus mancipiumfuerunt castce, or 
 casta. Vossius, in his larger grammar, tbeauthors of the Port Royal 
 grammar, and Ursinus, seem to think the feminine preferable. But 
 the same Vossius (in his less grammar'), Linacer, and Alvarez, 
 prefer the neuter to the feminine. It may sometimes happen that 
 one of the nouns does not signify persons expressly, but by im- 
 plication ; as when the name of a place is put for the inhabitants : 
 thus, Athenarum et Cratippi ; ad quos Cic. So likewise when 
 one of them is a collective, persons being signified : Quadraginta 
 millia peditum, duo millia septmgenti equites, et tanta prope civium 
 sociorumque pars ccesi dicuntur Liv. But we also find Taria millia 
 quadringenti ccesa Liv. 
 
 Note 10. When the substantives denote things without life, the 
 adjective is generally neuter : as, Divitice, decus et gloria in oculis 
 sita sunt Sail, in which negotia seems to be understood. It is ge- 
 nerally understood that if any one of the substantives denote a thing 
 inanimate, the adjective may be neuter : as, Serpens, sitis, ardor, 
 arencc, Didcia virtuti Lucan. Sometimes in inanimate things, re- 
 gard is paid to the simple construction, or the more worthy gender : 
 as, Grammatice quondam ac Musice junctccfiierunt Quinct. Seri- 
 ores supra dictis narcissus et lilium Plin. When the substantives 
 signify irrational animals or plants, we find the adjective or relative 
 agreeing with the general word understood : thus, Expertesrationis 
 sunt equi, boves, reliquce pecudes , apes, quarum (perhaps bestiarum) 
 opere effidtur aliquid ad kominum iisum et vitam Cic\ Quid de 
 vitibus olivetisque dicam, quarum (perhaps arborum) fructus nihil 
 omnino ad bestias pertinent Cic. In this last example, it may per- 
 haps be, that the feminine is preferred to the neuter ; or olivetis 
 
 1 His words there are, " Utrum et femininum dignius est neutro ? Ita qui- 
 dem plerisque videtur, idque propter illnd Lucani ; Leges ct plcbiscita coactce. 
 Scd istoc ^.9a?<*c videtur, sive singulare ; ut adversus aliorum scriptorum 
 t'onsuetudiricm exinde non debeat judicium ferri." But some consider coactai 
 as a mistake for coacta ; others divide plebiscite into plebis scitu, and cozistrue 
 coacla with plebis. 
 
171 
 
 may be used instead of the feminine olivis ; and, indeed, in the 
 former, quarum may refer to apes, the nearest substantive. 
 
 Note 11. The more worthy person is generally placed first : as, 
 Ego et tu. Livy furnishes an example to the contrary ; Pater et 
 ego, fratresque mei, pro vobis anna tulimus. The precedence, 
 here, may be intended as a mark of deference and distinction. 
 
 Note 12. The verb or adjective frequently agrees, by the figure 
 zeugma, in person, gender, or number, with the nearest substan- 
 tive : as, Et ego et Cicero meus flagitabit Cic. Salus, liberi, 
 fama, fortunes, sunt carissimcz Cic. Sociis et rege recepto Virg, 
 When cum intervenes between two nouns, regard is still paid to 
 worthiness of gender : as, Ilia cum Lauso de Numitore sati Ovid. 
 The verb takes the person of the nominative : as, Tu quoque cum 
 Druso prcemia feres Ovid. When singular substantives are 
 joined together, especially those signifying things without life, the 
 best authors often use a verb singular : as, Virtus, et honestas, et 
 pudor cogebat Cic. This is the more common, when the differ- 
 ent words are of similar signification ; and when this is the case, 
 the adjective or relative generally agrees with the nearest : as, 
 Mutiijanua et vestibulum, quod maxime celebratur Cic. Turner 
 condemns Lily's Imperium et dignitas quce petiisti, which should 
 be, he says, quam petiisti ; but, as Ruddiman observes, Cicero 
 himself seems in one instance to write in a similar manner. Col- 
 lective nouns, as, populus, gens, turba, manus, &C. 1 , and certain 
 partitives, as, quisque, uterque, &c., are frequently joined to a verb, 
 adjective or relative, plural; and the adjective or relative, instead 
 of taking the gender of the collective expressed, often agrees 
 with a word which the sense suggests to the mind : as, Multitude 
 convenerant Cses. Magna pars vidnerati aut occisi sunt Sail. 
 Intimus quisque libertorum vincti abreptique Tacit. Familia quo- 
 rum, &c. Sail. Such constructions arise from the figure syn- 
 thesis, or, as it may, perhaps, with greater propriety be named, 
 synesis. 
 
 1 A collective noun may be joined with a verb either of the singular or of 
 the plural number : as, Quarit pars scmina Jlammcc Virg. Pars in frusta 
 secant Virg. Joined with a singular verb, it generally expresses many con- 
 sidered as one aggregate ; but, when joined with a plural verb, it signifies many 
 separately or individually. Hence, if an adjective or participle be subjoined to 
 the verb, when the latter is of the singular number, the former will agree both 
 in gender and number with the collective noun : as, Cirdter pars quarta erat 
 mUitaribus armis instructa Sail. : since, in this case, they all agree with the 
 term of universality, and are understood to the special or individual terms : 
 but, if the verb be plural, the adjective or participle will be plural also, and of 
 the same gender as the individuals constituting the collective noun ; as, Pars 
 erant ctesi. Complerant litora pars et certare paraiiVirg. Sometimes, 
 however, though rarely, the adjective is thus used in the singular as, Pars, 
 arduus altis Pulverulentus equisfurit Virg. JEn. vii. 624, for ardui, pulveru- 
 Icntifurunt. Proper names and appellatives also take the gender of the indi- 
 viduals implied: as, Latium, Capuaquc agro mulLctti Liv. viii. 11, for Latini 
 et Campani. Capita conjurationis virgis c.'i Liv. x. 1, for duces or pnncipes, 
 as we say, in English, the heads. 
 
172 
 
 RULE X. One substantive agrees with another signifying 
 the same thing, in case : as, 
 
 Cicero Orator, Cicero the Orator. 
 
 Urbs Edinburgum, The city Edinburgh. 
 
 Filius delicice matris suce, A son the darling of his mo- 
 ther. 
 
 Note 1. That is, when two nouns come together denoting the 
 same person or thing, the one explaining or describing the other, 
 they are put in the same case : as, Justitia virtus Cic. Opes irri- 
 tamenta malorum Ovid. 
 
 Note 2. This is named apposition, and is not considered by some 
 grammarians as a concord. I consider it, however, as a primary 
 concord, and founded on the abstract principle, that words agree- 
 ing in meaning should agree by grammatical concord 1 . 
 
 Note 3. It is not necessary that the nouns agree in gender, num- 
 ber, or person; as, Magnum pauperies opprobrium Hor. Alexin 
 delicias domini Virg. Ego homuncio hoc non faccrem ? Ter. 
 In all such constructions there seems to be an ellipsis of the an- 
 tient ens, or of qui est, qui vocatur, or the like. 
 
 Note 4-. The substantive descriptive of two or more singular 
 substantives joined together, is made plural : as, Cn. Domitio, C. 
 Sosio consulibus Nep. Eupolis, atque Cratinus, Aristophanesque 
 po'etce Hor. Likewise, when the nouns are connected by cum : 
 as, Cottamcum Titurio Sabino legatos ibiamisimus Flor. iii. 10-8. 
 But in some editions legato is read : the former reading, however, 
 seems to be preferred. 
 
 Note 5. When a plural appellative is used as descriptive of two 
 or more proper names of different genders, it must be of the more 
 worthy gender: as, Ad Ptolemceum Cleopatramque reges legati 
 missi Liv., in which reges is equivalent to regem et reginam. In 
 the same manner socer, jilius, andfrater are used, implying like- 
 wise socrus, Jilia, and soror. 
 
 Note 6. When one of the substantives is animate, the adjective 
 and verb agree with it : as, Cum duofulmina nostri imperil subito 
 in Hispania, Cn. et P. Scipiones,extinctioccidissentCic. In many 
 instances the sense will determine the regimen. If the nouns are 
 inanimate, it agrees with the last : as, Fama malum, quo non aliud 
 velocius ullum Virg. Here, likewise, the agreement of quo with 
 malum is determined by the sense. The rule seems to be that, in 
 this case, the adjective and verb shall agree with the more general 
 noun : as, Flumen est Arar t quod in Rhodanum iiiftuit Caes. Co- 
 
 1 The antients named this construction Epexegcsis or declaratio, because the 
 preceding substantive is explained by the following. Grammarians state its 
 object to be threefold. 1. To limit a general term ; as, arbor laurus. 2. To 
 remove ambiguity ; as, Taurus mons, lupus ^'zsc/'s. 8. To designate some pro- 
 perty ; as, Socrates vir sapient issimus. 
 
173 
 
 rioli oppidum captum Liv. Caesar has made the adjective agree 
 with the proper name in Flumine Rheno qui agrum Helvetium a 
 Germanis dividit, and in other parts. 
 
 Note 7. Sometimes the latter substantive is put into the geni- 
 tive : as, Fons Timavi Virg. Arbor jici Cic. Et lapathi brevis 
 herba Hor. 
 
 Note 8. A sentence or clause may supply the place of one of 
 the substantives: as, Cogitet oratorem institui, rem arduam 
 Quinct. 
 
 Note 9. If the latter substantive be susceptible of a change in 
 termination, to express a difference of gender, it must agree with 
 the former in gender and number : as, Populum late regem Virg. 
 for regnantem. Regina pecunia Hor. for regnans. But to epi- 
 ccenes, and neuters, the masculine is generally joined : as, Aquila 
 rex avium. Tempus magister multorum. Virgil speaks of reges 
 et ductores apum> not reginas et ductrices. 
 
 Note 10. To the preceding four concords some add a fifth, that 
 of the Responsive, generally agreeing in case with its Interrogative. 
 But this depends entirely upon the nature of the figure ellipsis ; 
 for if we say Quis herus est tibi ? Amphitruo Ter. to this last no- 
 minative are understood the words est herus mihi. When words 
 of different construction are used, the Responsive and Interroga- 
 tive disagree: as, Cujumpecus? an Melibcei? Non, verum JEgonis 
 Virg. Cujus est liber ? meus, not mei. Cuja interest ? Regis. 
 But even in some of these, if the elliptical words be supplied, the 
 constructions do only seem to disagree : thus, if we say Cujus in- 
 terest ? and reply mea t tua, &c. the full sentence may be, Cujus 
 negotia interest , or Inter cujus negotia est ? Mea negotia interest t 
 
 II. OF GOVERNMENT. 
 
 1. Of Nouns. 
 
 2. Of Verbs. 
 
 3. Of Words indeclinable. 
 
 THE GOVERNMENT OF NOUNS. 
 
 OF SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 RULE XI. One substantive governs another signifying a 
 different thing, in the genitive : as, 
 
 Amor Dei, The love of God. 
 
 Lex nature The law of nature. 
 
174 
 
 Note 1 . That is, when two substantives come together, signi- 
 fying different things ; or in which the latter limits or defines the 
 general signification of the former, and expresses some particular 
 relation belonging to it, it must be put into the genitive : as, Amor 
 nummi Juv. Initium est salutis notitia peccati Senec. 
 
 Note 2. The substantive in Latin, which is to be put into the 
 genitive, is that which corresponds with the English word follow- 
 ing of, or which ends in 's. 
 
 Note 3. The governing substantive is sometimes omitted : as, 
 Ubi ad Dianas veneris Ter. i. e, templum or cede-in. 
 
 Note 4>. The latter substantive is sometimes understood : as, 
 Tritici decies cent am millia, el horde i quingenta, indicantes se ad 
 mare devecta habere Liv. i. e. modium. 
 
 Note 5. The pronouns hujus, ejus, illius, cujus, &c. are used as 
 substantives, the word with which they agree being generally un- 
 derstood: as, Liber ejiis. Libri eorum. Supply hominis and ho- 
 minum. The personal pronouns, having the nature of nouns, 
 are governed by a noun : as Languet desiderio tui. 
 
 Note 6. The genitive may have either an active or a passive 
 signification : thus, in Nee sese JEnece jactavit vulnere quisquam 
 Virg. vulnere JEnece denotes the wound which ^Eneas had received; 
 Et vulnere tardus Ulyssi Virg. refers to the wound which Ulysses 
 had given. 
 
 Note 7. The substantive governed may govern another signify- 
 ing a different thing : as, Fratris hicjilius erat regis Liv. 
 
 Note 8. Sometimes two genitives depend upon the same go- 
 verning substantive: as, Hujus civitatis est longe amplissima aucto- 
 ritas omnis ores maritime regionum earum Caes. Here, indeed, 
 there are three genitives, but the third is governed by the second. 
 
 .Note 9. Sometimes the word governing and the word governed 
 exchange cases : as, Sex dies ad earn rem conficiendam spatii pos- 
 tulant C^s^i. e. spatium sex dierum. 
 
 Note 10. The genitive, signifying possession, is often changed 
 into an adjective: as, Domus paterna Cic. for Domus patris. 
 
 Note 11. The genitive is sometimes changed into the dative: 
 as, Fratri cedes fient pervice Ter. forfratris. Or, into an accu- 
 sative or ablative with a preposition : as, Odium erga Romanos 
 Nep. Cura de salute patria Cic. If the former substantive be 
 derived from a neuter verb, the latter often follows the construc- 
 tion of that verb : as, Colloquia cum amicis Cic. as well as Col- 
 loquia amicorum Cic. Sibi successor em Suet. Justitia est obtem- 
 peratio scriptis legibus institutisque populorum Cic. In old Lati- 
 nity especially, the dative and accusative are sometimes found 
 after a substantive derived from an active verb : as, Traditio alteri 
 
 Cic. Quid istum tibi tactio est Plaut. In such phrases as 
 
 Domum reditionis spe sublata CPCS. in which the case of domus 
 
175 
 
 is erroneously ascribed by some grammarians to the government 
 of reditio ; the accusative, or the ablative, depends entirely upon 
 the nature ofdoi&us, which is governed by a preposition generally 
 understood. 
 
 Note 12. Pars is omitted after such adjectives &sprimus> medius, 
 ultimas, extremes, Difimus, imus, summits, suprcmus, reliquus, cce- 
 terus; thus Media noxCses. signifies the middle (part of the) 
 night. In summo monte, On the top (or highest part) of the hill. 
 In such examples the adjective must agree with the substantive. 
 
 [Certain observations on the nature and construction of pro- 
 nouns, usually referred to this rule, will be found in Etymo- 
 
 RULE XII. If the latter substantive have an adjective of 
 praise or dispraise joined with it, it may be put in the geni- 
 tive or ablative : as, 
 
 Vir mmmce prudently \ f A man of the greatest 
 
 vel summa prudcntid^ ) \ wisdom. 
 Puer vrobce indolis* veil /. i v 
 
 protAindok, } A boy of a good deposition. 
 
 Note 1. That is, when the second substantive expresses a qua- 
 lity belonging to the first, having also an adjective joined to it, 
 expressing some degree, accident, or property belonging to that 
 quality, it may be put in the genitive or ablative : as, Ingenui vul- 
 tuspuer Juv. Es nulld t fide~Cic. Magnopondere saxum Virg. 
 Mulier estate Integra Ter. 
 
 Note 2. The genitive seems to depend upon the former substan- 
 tive taken possessively ; and the ablative is governed by some pre- 
 position generally understood, but sometimes also expressed : as, 
 Amicus cum magna Jide Plaut. Trin. iv. 4-. 4?. 
 
 Note 3. Prose writers use the ablative more frequently than the 
 genitive, especially after a substantive verb. 
 
 Note 4. In such instances as the following, the genitive is the 
 more common : Magni formica laboris Hor. Testimonium nul- 
 lius momenti Cic. Nulli (nullius) consilii sum Ter. Rosaju- 
 cundi odoris Plin. 
 
 Note 5. In such as the following, the ablative only is used : 
 Bo?io anitno es Ter. Quantofuerim dolore Cic. Mira sum ala- 
 critate ad litigandum Cic. Credens se minore invidiajbre Nep. 
 
 Note 6. Sometimes both constructions are found in the same 
 sentence : as, Lentulum, eximia spe, summce virtutis, adolescentetn 
 fac erudiasCic. 
 
 Note 7. Sometimes the adjective agrees with the former sub- 
 stantive, or the subject of discourse, and the latter substantive is 
 put in the ablative : as, Vir gravitate ct prudentia prcestans Cic. 
 Vir prcetfantis ingenii, pr&stanti ingenio, pr<z$tans i?igenio, and 
 
176 
 
 (poetically) prastans ingenii, are all found. Sometimes the poets 
 use an accusative : as, Os humerosque similis deo Virg. Vultum 
 dejectus Stat. Such accusatives are governed by the preposition 
 secundum or quod ad understood, and are referred to the figure 
 synecdoche. Integer vita Hor. Prcestans animi Virg. and the 
 like, may perhaps be referred to another rule. 
 
 Note 8. In like manner, neuter and passive verbs are construed 
 with the ablative : as, Et corde et genibus tremit Hor. Leevo bra- 
 chio vulneratur Liv. And by the poets with an accusative : as, 
 Sxpleri mentem nequit Virg. Such cases are governed by a pre- 
 position understood. 
 
 Note 9. The former substantive is sometimes understood : as, 
 Vulgus est ingenio mobili Sail. Populus, or some similar word, 
 is understood. 
 
 Note 10. The latter substantive must denote some part or pro- 
 perty of the former ; otherwise its government does not depend 
 upon the present rule: hence such phrases as Pulchra prole paren- 
 tem Virg. Rex gelidce ores Hor. Pater optimorum liberorum, 
 and the like, are excluded from it. I believe, it may be generally 
 observed, that when in English the analytical or Norman form of 
 the genitive (i. c. with of) is convertible into the simple or Saxon 
 form (with '$), the Latin genitive is to be referred to the pre- 
 ceding rule : thus, " The father of the fine children," which is 
 equivalent to " The fine children's father." But when, consist- 
 ently with sense and with general usage, this cannot be done, the 
 genitive belongs to the present rule: as, u A man of great virtue," 
 which is not convertible into " great virtue's man." 
 
 It has been observed, that when a person is distinguished by 
 any rank, quality, or character ; the noun expressing it is used 
 in the genitive, to denote the source of that distinction ; but that 
 the ablative is used, when the quality, rank, or character is re- 
 presented, not as the source of distinction, but as the instrument 
 or medium by which the subject is distinguished. 
 
 RULE XIII. An adjective in the neuter gender, without 
 a substantive expressed, is followed by a genitive : as, 
 
 Multum pecunicz, Much money. 
 Quid rei ? What is the matter ? 
 
 Note 1. That is, adjectives in the neuter gender, used as sub- 
 stantives, govern the genitive : as. Paululum pecunice Ter. Hoc 
 noctis Cic. Id negotii Ter. Id miseriarum Ter. * 
 
 Note 2. The adjectives thus used are generally such as signify 
 quantity : as, multum, plus, plurimum, tantum, quantum, minus, 
 
 1 Or, an adjective in the neuter gender, expressive of quantity, or parti- 
 tively used, governs, in the genitive case, the substantive with which, strictly, 
 it should agree : thus we say Multa pecunia : but if we use multum, we must 
 say Multum pecunite. Thus also we say Augusta riorum for Angustee vice. 
 
177 
 
 minimum ; also id, quid, hoc, aliquid, quidquam ; to which may 
 be added summum, uttimum, extremum, dimidium, and medium: as, 
 Summum montis Ovid. AnimcK dimidium Hor. To these may 
 be added a great number of plural neuters: as, Angusta viarum, 
 opaca locorum, &c. Virg. Incerta fortunes, antiqua fcederum, 
 extrema periculorum Liv. And sometimes other singular neu- 
 ters : as, Lubricum juventte Tac. Sub obscurum noctis Virg. 
 Ex adverso cceli Virg. 
 
 Note 3. It is observed that quod, aliquod, quoddam, always 
 agree with their substantives ; and that quid audplus are always 
 followed by a genitive. 
 
 Note 4. Nihil, hoc, id, illud, istud, quid, aliquid, quidquam, 
 elegantly admit the genitive of neuter adjectives of the second 
 declension : as, Nihil sinceri Cic. Quid reliqui est? Ter. This 
 seldom happens with adjectives of the third declension; and never 
 with those that end in is, e. Aliud is joined with nihil, and never 
 the genitive, according to this rule. 
 
 Note 5. Negotium, tempus, locum, spatium, or the like, are un- 
 derstood to these adjectives, and are the really governing words, 
 according to Rule XL 
 
 RULE XIII. 1 Opus and usus, denoting necessity, conveni- 
 ence , or expediency ) are followed by the dative of the object 
 to which the thing is necessary, and the ablative of the thing 
 wanted: as, 
 
 Auctoritate tud nobis \ f We have need of your 
 
 opus est Cic. ) \ authority. 
 Nunc viribus usus (est \ ( Now you have need of 
 tibi) Virg. / \ strength. 
 
 Note 1. They are said sometimes to govern the genitive; but, 
 when this is the case, they generally appear to be taken in their 
 literal sense. The following are adduced as examples of their go- 
 verning a genitive, according to the sense mentioned in the rule : 
 Sed etiam si nosse, quid quisque senserit, volet, lectionis opus est 
 Quinct. Inst. xil. 3. Alii offerunt se, si quo usus opera sit Liv. 
 xxvi. 9. 
 
 Note 2. Opus is sometimes used like the adjective necessarius, 
 but as an aptote : as, Dux nobis et autor opus est Cic. 
 
 Note 3. Opus is elegantly followed by the ablative of perfect 
 participles, the substantive being either expressed or omitted: as, 
 Priusquam incipias, consulto ; et ubi consulueris, mature facto opus 
 est Sail. Opusfuit Hirtio convento Cic. Thus also, Dictu opus 
 est Ter. And Facto est usus Plaut. 
 
 1 Opus and usus, denoting necessity, are usually noticed under adjectives of 
 want. They are here made the subject of a separate rule, which, for obvious 
 reasons, is numbered as the preceding. 
 
 N 
 
178 
 
 Note 4-. Opus is sometimes followed by an accusative : as, Puero 
 opus est cibum Plaut, Diomedes mentions that the antients said 
 Opus est mihihanc rem; but it is probable, that these accusatives 
 are governed by some infinitive ; such as kabere, dicere, facere. 
 The following has been adduced as an instance in which usus 
 governs an accusative; Ad earn rem usus est hominem astutum, doc- 
 turn Plaut. 
 
 Note 5. It is followed by the infinitive, or the subjunctive with 
 Ht : as, Quod opus sit scirl Cic. Opus e$t> cegram ut tc adsimules 
 Plaut. 
 
 Note 6. The word governed by it is often omitted : as, Si opus 
 sit, accurras Cic. in which the word accurrere may supply the 
 place of the ablative of the thing wanted, or may be considered as 
 the nominative to sit, opus being then reckoned equivalent to ne- 
 cessarium. 
 
 Note 7. The ablative after these words seems to be governed by 
 the preposition in. Utor formerly governed an accusative, as well 
 as an ablative; and as there are not wanting instances to prove 
 that verbal nouns sometimes governed the case of their verbs, this 
 consideration may, perhaps, be satisfactory to some, in regard to 
 the origin of the government of usus. 
 
 OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 RULE XIV. Verbal adjectives, or such as signify an af- 
 fection of the mind, require the genitive : as, 
 Avidia gloria, Desirous of glory. 
 
 Ignams fraudis, Ignorant of fraud. 
 
 Memor beneficiarum. Mindful of favours. 
 
 Note 1 . Or, verbal adjectives, by which are meant verbals in T 
 osus, and idus, with panicipials in ns; and adjectives signifying an 
 affection of the mind, by which are meant those which denote de- 
 sire or disdain, knowledge or ignorance, innocence or guilt, or the 
 like, require the genitive: as, Timidus deorumOvid. Jmperitus 
 rerum Ter. Fraterni sanguinis insons Ovid. 
 
 To this rule belong 
 
 1st. Verbals in ax, and participials in Jis: as capax, edax,fugax, 
 pervicax, tenax, &c., amans, appetens, cupiens, negligens,'metuem 
 sciens, &c. : as, Tempus edax rerum Ovid. Alieni appetem 
 Sail. To these may be added certain participials in us; as consul 
 tus, doctus, expertus, inexpertus, insuetus, insolitus : as, Juris con 
 sultus Cic. 
 
 2dly. Adjectives denoting affection : as, 
 
 1 . Desire and disdain ; cupidus, avarus, avidus, jastidiosus, c 
 riosus, studiosus, incuriosus, &c. with many other words belonging 
 to verbals in idus and osus : as, Laudis avidi- Sail, Literarw 
 
179 
 
 2. Knowledge and ignorance ;peritus 9 gnarus t prudens, caltidus t 
 docilis, certus, memor, &c. ; ignarus, improvidus, wiprudens^ insolitus, 
 &c. : as, Conscia mens recti Hor. Nescia mens fati Virg. 
 
 3. Innocence and guilt ; innocens, innoxius, insons, &c., noxius, 
 reus, suspectus, compertus, &c. as, Consilii innoxius Curt. Reus 
 avarit'HC Cic. 
 
 4. To the foregoing may be added a vast multitude of other 
 adjectives, of which Johnson and Ruddiman have given lists. But 
 the greater part of these belong to the above-mentioned classes, 
 and some may be referred to other rules ; such are the following. 
 
 Abjectior animi ApuL or Liv. Confirmatus animi Apul. 
 Absonum fidei Liv. (perk, dot.) Confusus animi Liv. 
 Abstemius vini Auson. Conterminus jugi. 
 
 Acer militiae Tac. Credulus adversi Sil. 
 
 Admirandus frugalitatis Senec. Spesanimicredulamutui-Hor. 
 
 Adversa domuum. 
 animi Liv. 
 
 ingenii Sil. 
 /Equal es aevi Sil. 
 JEquus absentium Tac. 
 Alienum dignitatis. 
 Al tern us animse Sil. 
 Ambiguus pudoris Tac. 
 Amens animi Virg. 
 Anhelus laboris Sil. 
 Anxius furti Ov. 
 Ardens animi. 
 Argutus facinorum Plant, 
 Assuetus tumultus Liv. 
 Atrox odii Tac. 
 Attonitus serpentis Sil. 
 Audax ingenii Stat. 
 Angustior animi ApuL 
 A versus animi Tac. 
 Benignus vini Hor. 
 Bibulus Falerni Hor. 
 Blandus precum Stat. 
 Bonus fati. 
 
 Caecus animi Quinct. 
 Callidus temporum Tac, 
 Captus animi Tac. 
 Catus legum Auson. 
 Celer nandi Sil. 
 Certus destinations Tac. 
 
 Clamosus undae. 
 Clarissimus discipline Pater c. 
 Commune omnium. 
 
 Compos animi Ter. voti. Liv. Expertus belli Virg. 
 Confident animi Sueton.. Expletus animi Apul. 
 
 N2 
 
 Cumulatissimus scelerum . 
 
 Plant. 
 
 Damnandus fact! Sil. 
 Deformis let! Sil. 
 Degener artis patria3 Ovid. 
 Despectus taed^e. 
 Devius &qui Sil, 
 Discolor lanae. 
 Discors patris Veil. Pat. 
 
 al. patri. 
 
 Disertus leporum Catul. 
 Dispar sortis SU. 
 Diversus morum Tac. 
 Ditior animi Stat. 
 Dissoliienda tristitise pectora 
 
 Tibul. 
 
 Divina futuri Hor. 
 Docilis modorum Hor. 
 Doctus virgae Sil. 
 Dubius animi Virg. 
 Dulcissimus 
 Durus oris Liv. 
 Durior oris Ovid. 
 Effusissimus munificentiae Pa 
 
 terc. 
 
 Egregius animi Virg. 
 Enuntiativi corporum Senec. 
 Ereclus animi Sil. 
 Exact us morum Ovid. 
 Exiguus animi Claudian. 
 Eximius animi Stat. 
 Exosa hujus vita? Boet. 
 
180 
 
 Exsors culpae Liv. 
 Exsul patriae Hor. 
 Externatus animi Apul. 
 Extorris regni Stat. 
 Exutus formae Sil. 
 Facilis frugum Claudian. 
 Fallax amicitia? Tac. 
 Falsus animi Ter. 
 Eatigatus spei Apul. 
 Felix cerebri Hor. 
 Ferox animi Tac. 
 Fervidus ingenii Sil. 
 Fessus rerum Virg. 
 Festinus animi Apul. 
 Fidens animi Virg. 
 Fidissima tui Virg. 
 Firmatus animi Sail. 
 Firmus propositi Paterc. 
 al. proposito. 
 Flavus comarum Sil. 
 Floridior aevi Sil. 
 Fluxa morum Sil. 
 Fcetae novales Martis Claud, 
 Formidolosior hostium Tac. 
 Fortunatus laborum Virg. 
 Fractus animi, opum. 
 Frequens silvae mons Tac. 
 Frustratus spei Gel. 
 Fugitivus regni Flor. 
 Furens animi Virg. 
 Gaudens alti Stat. 
 Gravis morum Claudian. 
 Gravidam Amathunta metalli 
 
 Ovid> 
 
 I Ilex animi ApuL 
 Impavidus somni Sil. 
 Impiger militiae Tac. (perhaps 
 
 the dative.) 
 Impos anirai Plant. 
 Improba connubii Stat. 
 Incautus futuri Hor. 
 Indecora formae foemina Tac. 
 Indocilis pacis Sil. 
 Inexplebilis virtutis Liv. 
 Infelix animi Virg. 
 Infirmus corporis Apul. 
 Ingens animi Tac. 
 Inglorius militise Tdc. 
 Ingratus salutis Virg. 
 Innoxius consilii Curt. 
 
 Insanus anirai Apul. 
 Insatiabilis rerum Senec. 
 Insolens infamiae Cic. 
 Insolitus servitii Sail. Frag. 
 Insuetus laboris Cces. 
 Integer animi, vitas Hor. 
 Interrita leti mens Ovid. 
 Intrepidus ferri Claud. 
 Invictus laboris Tac. 
 Invidus laudis Cic. 
 Irritus incepti Sil. 
 Laetus laboris Virg. 
 Lapsus animi Plant, al. 
 Lassus animi. 
 Lassus laboris, maris, militiae 
 
 Hor. 
 
 Laudandus labortim Sil. 
 Lentus coepti Sil. 
 Levis opum Sil. 
 Liber laborum Hor. 
 Liberalis pecuniae Sail. 
 Lugendus formae Sil. 
 Macte animi Mart. 
 Madid us roris Apul. 
 Manifestus criminis Tac. 
 Maturus aevi Virg. 
 Maximus sevi Sil. 
 Medius pacis et belli Hor. 
 Melior fati SU. 
 Miser animi Plant. 
 Modicus pecuniae Tac. 
 Mollior sui Apul. 
 Munificus auri Claudian. 
 Mutabile mentis genus Sil. 
 Mutatus animi Apul. 
 Nimius imperii Liv. 
 Nobilis fandi Auson. 
 Notus fugarum SU. 
 Novus dolor is Sil. 
 
 al. dolori. 
 
 Nudus arboris Ovid. 
 Occultus odii Tac. 
 Onusta remigum Hirt. j 
 
 Afr. 
 
 Optimus militiae Sil. 
 Otiosi studiorum Plin. 
 Pares aetatis mentisque Sil* 
 Pavidus offensionum Tac. 
 Pauper aquae Hor. 
 Perfida pacti gens Sil* 
 
181 
 
 Periclitabundus sui Apul. 
 Perinfames disciplinae Apul. 
 Pertinax docendi Apul. 
 Pervicax irae Tac. 
 Piger pericli Sil. 
 Potens lyrae Hor. 
 Praeceps animi Virg. 
 Praecipuus virtutis Apul. 
 Praeclarus fidei Tac. 
 Praestans animi Virg. 
 Pravus fidei Sil. 
 Procax otii Tac. 
 Profugus regni Tac. 
 Promptus belli Tac. 
 Properus oblatae occasionis 
 
 Tac. 
 
 Proprke deorum voluptates. 
 Prospera frugum Hor. 
 Pulcherrimus irae Sil. 
 Purus sceleris Hor. 
 Recreatus anirai Apul. 
 Rectus judicii Senec. 
 Resides bellorum Stat. 
 Sanus mentis Plant. 
 Satiatus caedis Ovid. 
 Saucius famse Apul. 
 Scitus vadorum Hor. 
 Secors rerum Ter. 
 Secreta teporis corpora Lucr. 
 Segnis occasionum Tac. 
 Seri studiorum Hor. 
 Similis tui Plant. 
 Sinister fidei Sil. 
 Solers operum Sil. 
 - lyrae Hor. 
 Solliciti reruan. 
 
 Solutus operum Hor. 
 Spernendus morum Tac. 
 Spreta vigoris Sil. 
 Strenuus militiae- Tac. 
 Stupentes animi Liv. 
 Summus severitatis Tac. 
 Superior sui Tac. 
 Superstes bellorum. 
 Surdus veritatis Col. 
 Suspensus animi Apul. 
 Tantus animi Apul. 
 Tardus fugae V. Flac. 
 Tenella animi Apul. 
 Tenuis opum Su. 
 Territus animi Liv. 
 Timidus deorum Ovid. 
 Trepidi rerum Liv. 
 Truncus pedum Virg. 
 Turbatus animi Sil. 
 Turbidus animi Tac. 
 Vafer juris -OvtW. 
 Vagus animi Catul. 
 Validus animi Tac. 
 Vanus veri Virg. 
 Vecors animi Apul. 
 Venerandus senectae-r-SzY. 
 Versus animi Tac. 
 Versutus ingenii Plin. 
 Vetus regnandi Tac. 
 Victus animi Virg. 
 Vigil armenti Sil. 
 Viridissimus irae Sil. 
 Unicus rerum fessarum Sil. 
 Utilis medendi radix Ovid. 
 Heroid. Y. 147. al. medenti. 
 
 But of these many are with much more propriety referred to 
 other rules : such as, abstemius, compos, impos, liber, made, mo- 
 dicus, potens t impotent, purus ; also cumulatus, explehis, exsors, 
 exsul) extorriS) foetus, frequens, gravidus, munificus, and the like, 
 which are usually referred to adjectives of plenty or want. 
 
 Note 2. Many of the adjectives enumerated in the previous part 
 of this rule are construed variously: as, Patiens frigus, One suf- 
 fering cold at this moment. Patiens frigoris, A person capable of 
 bearing cold. Doctus grammatic<z*,One skilled in grammar. Doc- 
 tus grammaticam, One that has been taught grammar ; which he 
 may perhaps have forgotten. Doctus Latinis literis, Learned in. 
 
 1 Greeeerwn titerarum rfoe/u* Cic. 
 
182 
 
 Amdior ad rent Ter. Avidus in pecuniis locupletium Cic. Vino 
 cupidce Plaut. Callidusnatura Ovid. Adfmudem callidus Cic. 
 Prudens consilio Justin. Jurisconsidtus and Jure consultus Cic. 
 Homines labore assiduo et quotidiano assueti Cic. Assuetus prtzdce 
 miles Liv. In omnia familiar ia jura assuetus Liv. Insuetus labo- 
 ris Caes. Insuetus moribus Romanis Liv. Corpora insueta ad one- 
 
 raportanda Caes. Insolitus rerum Sail., ad laborem Cses. 
 
 Anxius gloria Liv. Sollicitus de re Cic. Diligens in, ad, de Cic. 
 Cic. Plin. Securus de belloLiv. Negligens in aliquemCic., in 
 amicis eligendis Cic.Reusmagnis criminibus Cic. Super see- 
 
 lere suspectus Sail. Regni crimine insons Liv. Most of those 
 
 adjectives contained in the preceding list are construed, especially 
 by prose writers, in the ablative, or otherwise: as, Prcestans ingenio 
 -i-Cic. Cultumodicus Tac. JEgerpedibus Sail. Credulus alicui 
 Virg. Prqfugi ab Thebis ~L\v.JEmulus, certus, incertus, 
 dubius, ambiguus, conscius, manifestus, suspectus, noxius, compertus, 
 are frequently construed with the dative, but in a different sense. 
 Adversus, czqualis, offtnis, alienus, blandus, communis, conter- 
 minuS) contrarius, credulus > dispar> dissimilis^JiduSfJinitimus, par t 
 proprius, similis, superstes, and some others, are oftener construed 
 with the dative than the genitive. Superior takes generally the 
 ablative. Alienus takes frequently the ablative with a or ab : as, 
 Humani nihil a me alienum puto Ter. But these and innume- 
 rable other varieties may be safely left to observation. 
 
 Note 8. Grammarians differ a little about the nature of this go- 
 vernment. It may, however, be observed, that, in many instances, 
 the adjectives are used substantively : thus, that Amans mrtutis is 
 the same as Amator mrtutis. Other adjectives are supposed to be 
 followed by a genitive governed by such words as in re, in causa, 
 in negotio, understood : as, Non anxius causa sui. Reus gratia 
 JurtL 
 
 RULE XV. Partitives, and words placed partitively, com- 
 paratives, superlatives, interrogatives, and some numerals, 
 govern the genitive plural : as, 
 
 Aliquis pkilosopkorum, Some one of the philosophers, 
 
 Senior fratrum^ The elder of the brothers. 
 
 Doctissimus JKomanorum, The most learned of the Ro- 
 mans. 
 
 Quis nostmm ? Which of us ? 
 
 Una musarum, One of the muses. 
 
 Octavus sapientum. The eighth of the wise men. 
 
 Note 1. That is, adjectives denoting apart of a number govern 
 the genitive plural, which may be resolved into an ablative with 
 de, e, ex, or in, or an accusative with inter, 
 
 To this rule belong : 
 1. Partitives, whether nouns or pronouns; idlus, nuttus, solus, 
 uterque, utercunque, uterms, ulcrlibet, alter, alteruter, neuter, 
 
183 
 
 alms, aliquis, quidam, quispiam, quisquis, quisquc, unusqutsque, 
 aliquot, cceter, reliquus ; to which are added omnis, cunctus, and 
 nemo : as, Quisquis deorum Ovid. Nemo mortalium Plin. Ves- 
 trum utcrvis Cic. 
 
 2. Words used partitively: as, Canum dcgeneres Plin. Nigrce 
 lanarum Plin. Sancte deorum Virg. Expediti militum Liv. 
 Vulgus Atheniensium Nep. 
 
 3. Comparatives and superlatives : as, major juvenum Hor. 
 Villosissimus animalium lepus Plin. 
 
 4. Interrogates ; quis, quisnam, quisve, uter > quot, quotus, quo- 
 tusquisque : as/ Quis mortalium Sail. 
 
 5. Numerals, comprehending both cardinals and ordinals ; unus, 
 duo, tres, &c.; primus, secundus, tertius, &c. ; also the partitive or 
 distributive, singidi; with multi, pauci, plerique, medius: as, Equi- 
 tum centum quinquaginta interfecti Curt. Sapientum octavus- 
 Hor. Multce arborum Cic. Quarum quce media est Ovid. Sin- 
 gulos vestrum Curt. 
 
 Note 2. If the substantive be a collective noun, the genitive 
 singular is used : as, Prtestantissimus nostrce cimtatis Cic., i. e. 
 nostrorum civium. Totius Grtedts doctissimum Cic., i. e. omnium 
 Gracorum. 
 
 Note 3. The genitive is governed by de, e, or ex, numero, which 
 is often expressed : as, Ex numero adversariorum cirdter sexcentis 
 interfectis Caes. 
 
 Note 4-. Instead of the genitive, the ablative is often found, go- 
 verned by de, e, ex, or in ; or the accusative with inter or ante : as, 
 Unus e Stoicis Cic. But unus put for solus governs the genitive : 
 as, Lampedo una Jeminarum Plin. Lampedo the only woman. 
 Acerrimus ex sensibus Cic. Ipse ante alios pulcherrimus omnes 
 "Virg. Croesus inter reges opulentissimus Senec. Ordinals are 
 often construed with a or ab : as, Tertius ab JEnea. Secundus, 
 denoting inferior to, governs the dative : as, Nee sunt tibi Marie 
 secundi Ovid. 
 
 Note 5. The partitive is sometimes understood : as, Fies noli- 
 Hum tu quoquefontium Hor. od. 3. 13. 13. Supply unus. 
 
 Note 6. The partitive takes the gender of the substantive go- 
 verned, when there is no other: as, Nulla sororum Virg., i. e. 
 Nulla soror e numero sororum. But if the noun governed be a col- 
 lective, the partitive takes the gender of the noun understood, 
 which the sense will determine : as, JEtatis sues doctissimus ; i. e. 
 doctissimus vir. 
 
 Note 7. If there be another substantive expressing the chief sub- 
 ject of discourse, the adjective generally takes the gender of that 
 substantive, and not of the following genitive : as, Indus, qui est 
 omnium Jluminum maximus Cic. Sometimes the former is not ex- 
 pressed : as, Quid (tu) agis didcissime rcrum Hor. Omnium rc- 
 rum mars est extrcmum Cic., i,e. ncgotiunt* 
 
184- 
 
 Note 8. Sometimes the substantive of partition and the parti- 
 tive are put in the same case : as, Maxima pars morem hunc homi- 
 nes habent Plaut. Milites^ equites, and pedites are often thus 
 used : as, Ex eodem exercitu pedites quindecim millia, et equites 
 quingenti Liv. 
 
 Note 9. The comparative and the superlative with the genitive 
 of partition are used, when the things compared are of the same 
 nature, class, or description : as, Dextra estfortior manuurn. Pol' 
 lex estfortissimus digitorum. Hence there is an error in the im- 
 precation of the Roman Ultimus suorum moriatur, Let him die 
 the last of his relatives ; for it is evident, that it is improper to 
 speak of him as one of his own friends or relatives. Hence also 
 the impropriety of Qua socer Omatius, magnorum major avorum 
 Sidon. And the impropriety in English of Milton's The fairest of 
 her daughters Eve. In such instances, the comparative should be 
 used, followed by a Latin ablative, or, in English, by than: as, 
 Omatius major magnis avis. Fairer than her daughters Eve. 
 
 Note 10. The comparative with the genitive of partition is used 
 when two persons or things, or two aggregates, are compared to- 
 gether; the superlative, when more than two: thus, Majorfratrum 
 refers to two brothers : Maximusjratrum, to three or more. Ju- 
 niores patrum Liv. is spoken of in contradistinction to the aggre- 
 gate of the seniores. These two rules are very general, few viola- 
 tions of them occurring either in Latin or English. 
 
 Note 11. Uter, alter, neuter refer in like manner to two ; quis f 
 alms, nullus, to more than two. But there are exceptions to this 
 observation. Uterque is also applied to two ; quisque and omnis to 
 more than two. But there are a few instances in which quisque 
 and omnis refer to two only. 
 
 Note 12. Nostrum and vestrum are used after partitives ; not 
 nostri and vestri : as, Quam vestrum utervis Cic. but, in his Ora- 
 tions, Cicero pays no regard to this distinction. 
 
 RULE XVI. Adjectives signifying profit or disprofit, like- 
 ness or unlikeness, require the dative : as, 
 Utilis bello, Profitable for war. 
 
 Perniciosus reipublicfz. Pernicious to the commonwealth. 
 Similis patri, Like his father. 
 
 Note 1 . That is, adjectives signifying utility or inconvenience, 
 benefit or damage, pleasure or displeasure, and the like, are fol- 
 lowed by a dative of the object to which their quality is directed: 
 as, Incommodusjilio Cic. Felix tuis Virg. Conveniens homini 
 Ovid. Color contrarius albo Ovid. Si fads, ut patrice sit idoneus, 
 utilis agris Juv. 
 
 To this rule belong adjectives signifying 
 1. Advantage or disadvantage ; bcnignus, bonus, commodus,fc- 
 prosper, salubcr, utilis ; also calamitosus., 
 
185 
 
 damnosus, dims, exitiosus, Junestus, incommodut, inutilis, malu$ y 
 noxius, perniciosus, pestifer. 
 
 2. Pleasure or pain ; acceptus, dulcis, gratus, gratiosus,jucundu$ t 
 l&tus, suavis ; also acerbus, amarus, insuavis, injucundus, ingratus, 
 molestus, tristis. 
 
 3. Friendship or hatred; addictus, tequus, amicus, benevolus, 
 blandus, earns, deditus, Jidas, Jidelis, lenis, mitis, propitius ; also 
 adversus, asper, crudelis, contrarius, infensus, infestus, infidus, and 
 the like. 
 
 4. Perspicuity or obscurity ; apertus, certus, compertus, conspi- 
 cuus, mantfestus, notus,perspicuus ; also ambiguus, dubius, ignotus, 
 incertus, obscurus. 
 
 5. Propinquity ',jtnitimus,propior,proximus,propmquus, socius, 
 vicinus, qffinis. 
 
 6. Fitness or unfitness ; aptus, appositus, accommodatus, habilis^ 
 idoneus, opportunus ; also ineptus, inhabilis, &c. 
 
 7. Easiness or difficulty \facilis, levis, obviiis, pervius; also dif- 
 Jicilis, arduus, gravis, laboriosus, periculosus, invius. To these add 
 pronus, proclivis, propensus, promptus, paratus. 
 
 8. Equality or inequality ; cequalis, cequatvus, par, compar, sup- 
 j)ar ; also incequalis, impar, dispar, discors.^ Likeness or unlike- 
 ness ; similis, cemulus, geminus; also dissimilis, absonus, alienus, di- 
 versus, discolor. 
 
 9. Many compounded with con ; cognatus, communis, concolor y 
 concors, confinis, congruus, consanguineus, conscius, consentaneus, 
 consonus, conveniens, conterminus, contiguus, continens (as Huic 
 
 Jundo continentia qucedam prcedia mercatur Cic. i. e. adjoining, 
 or contiguous to), &c. 
 
 10. To these may be added a greet number of adjectives that 
 cannot be easily reduced into distinct classes : as, obiwxius, sub- 
 
 jectus, supplex, superstes, credulus, absurdus, decorus, deformis, 
 prceslo, secundus, &c. To this rule might also be referred, verbals 
 in bills and dus. 
 
 Note 2. Some substantives, especially those signifying any affec- 
 tion, or advantage or disadvantage, are followed by the dative : 
 as, Namque erit ille mihi semper Deus Virg. Matres omnesjiliis 
 in peccato adjutrices Ter. Thus also, Ad similitudinem deopro- 
 pius accedebat humana virtus Cic. Caput Italic omniLi\. But, 
 perhaps, the dative is governed by the substantive verb, expressed 
 or understood, or its obsolete participle ens. 
 
 Note 3. Of the adjectives denoting friendship or hatred, or other 
 affection, to a person, some generally take the dative: as, nffabi- 
 lis, arrogans, asper, cams, difficilis,Jidelis, invisus, iratus, ofen- 
 sus, suspectus. But we find also In liberos difficilis. Poe'ta vet. ap. 
 Cic. Nat. Deor. iii. 29. Fidelis in jUios Justin. Apud militares 
 inmsum esse nomen Romanum Liv. To the above-mentioned ad- 
 jectives add dexter, exitialis,fahiloqmts,ferus, hospitus, inhospitus, 
 insodabilis, intolerans^jucundus, lav us, morigcrussnortifer, odiosus> 
 
186 
 
 placidus, propitius, scelestus, supplex, tranquillus, trux : as, Dexter 
 Pcenis deus Sil. Senijuit jucundissimus Nep. Sontibus esse tru- 
 
 cem Ovid. Some are followed by in and an accusative : as 
 
 acerbus, animalus, beneJiGus,gratiosus, injuriosus, liberates, rnendax^ 
 misericors, qfficiosus, plus, impius, prolixus, severus, sordidus, tor- 
 vus, vehemens. We also find Animatus erga principem Suet. 
 Lijuriosus adversus patrem Senec. Misericors adversus bonos 
 Senec.; with a few more varieties. Acer, aquabilis, mtemperans, 
 
 ingratus, and a few others are found with in. Some are found 
 
 with a dative, or an accusative governed by in, erga, or adversus : 
 as coniumax, criminosus, durus, exitiabilis, grams, hospitalis, im- 
 placabilis, inexorabilis, intolerabilis, iniquus, scevus, Alicui or in 
 aliquem. Benevolus, benignus, molestus, Alicui or erga aliquem. 
 Mitis, comis, Alicui, or in, or erga aliquem. Permcax adversus 
 aliquem. Crudelis in aliquem, seldom alicui. Amicus, cemulus, 
 infensus, injestus, Alicui, seldom in aliquem. Gratus Alicui, or 
 in, erga*, adversus aliquem. The noun vulgus with the preposi- 
 tion in, follows many of these adjectives : as gratus, ingratus, ac- 
 ceptus, ignotuSj &c., in vulgus. Id in vulgus gratum esse sentimus, 
 Cic. 
 
 Note 4. Affinis, similis, communis,par,proprius,jinitimus,Jidus, 
 conterminus, superstes, conscius, (equalis, contrarius, adversus, some- 
 times govern the dative and sometimes the genitive. Of these, 
 par, Jidus, adversus, conterminus, superstes, contrarius govern the 
 dative generally : conscius commonly the genitive, that is, of a 
 thing, but always the dative of a person. Affines facinori Cic. 
 rerum Ter. Somnio similis Curt, tui Plaut. Omni tetati com- 
 munis Cic. mrtutiim Cic. Par delicto sit pcena Ovid, hujus 
 Lucan. Propria est nobis mentis agitatio Quinct. Oratoris pro- 
 prium Cic. Falsa veris Jlnitima Cic. Fluvii hujus Jinitimi 
 Justin. Fida sorori Ovid. Tuijidissima Virg. Fonti conter- 
 mina O v id . Jugi conterminos locos Apul. Mihi superstes Ter. 
 dignitatis Cic. Conscium facinori Cic. Atque ego peccati vellem 
 mihi conscius essem Ovid. JEquali-s sibi Plin. temporum illorum 
 Cic. Honestati contrariamCic. virtutum Cic. Adversus 
 nemini Ter. illustrium domuum- Tac. Similis auddissimilis,it 
 is observed, are followed by the genitive when they refer to man- 
 ners ; and by the dative, when to shape orjbrm. JEqualis is fol- 
 lowed by a genitive, when it refers to time or age : otherwise, by 
 a dative; but these distinctions are sometimes disregarded. 
 
 Note 5. Alienus is construed with a genitive, or dative, or, more 
 frequently an ablative governed by a or ab : as, Alienum dignitatis 
 Cic. illi causce Cic. a me Ter. The preposition is sometimes 
 omitted: as x Alienum nostra amicitia Cic. Diversus is generally 
 construed in like manner ; it does not, however, admit a genitive, 
 unless in a different sense. 
 
 Note 6. To adjectives governing the genitive or dative are added 
 amicus, familiar is, cognatus, propinquus, vicinus, socius, cemulus, 
 germanus, inimicus, invidus, necessanus; but when they govern the 
 
187 
 
 former case, it will be generally found that they are used sub- 
 stantively. 
 
 Note 7. Some adjectives vary their construction : as Similes, 
 dissimiles, pares, dispares, cequales, communes, inter se. Thus also, 
 JEtate et forma hand dissimili in dominum Tac. Alpina corpora 
 habent quiddam simile cum nivibus suis Flor. 
 
 Note 8. Par and communis, either with or without a dative ; 
 consentaneus and discors, only when without a dative, take an ab- 
 lative with cum : as, Erant ei qu&dam ex his paria cum Crasw 
 Cic. Quern tuparem cum liberis, regnique participemjecisti Sail. 
 Locupletibus Jere cum plebe communiaCic. Illud cum adolescen- 
 tia esse commune Cic. Quod erat consentaneum cum us literis 
 Cic. Civitas secum discors Liv. 
 
 Note 9. Idem among the poets sometimes governs the dative : 
 as, Invitum qui servat, idemfacit occidenti Hor. In prose, it is 
 construed with qui, et, ac, atque : as, Peripatetici quondam iidem 
 erant qui academici Cic. Dianam et Lunam eandem esse putant 
 Cic. Animus erga te idem ac fuit Ter. Pomarium seminarium 
 ad eundem modum atque oleagineum Jacito Cato. In like man- 
 ner alius is construed with ac, atque, and et ; and with an ablative: 
 as, Neve putes alium sapiente bonoque beatum Hor. Cicero some- 
 times uses idem ut : as, In eadem sunt injustitia ut si in suam rem 
 aliena comiertant Off. i. 14-. It is sometimes construed with cum; 
 as, In eodem consilio erat cum Besso Curt. But it is improper 
 to use cum, when speaking of the same object under different 
 names : as, Paulus est idem cum Saulo, since Paul and Saul are 
 names of the same person. Sometimes similis and par are con- 
 strued like idem, that is, with ac, atque, and et. 
 
 Note 10. Certain adjectives signifying use,Jitness, and the con- 
 trary, are construed either with the dative, or the accusative with 
 ad : as, Ad nullam rem utilis Cic. Ad civium usus haud inutile 
 Cic. But when the object is a person,, the dative only is used : 
 thus aptus, opportunus, utilis mihi, not ad me. 
 
 Note 1 1 . Adjectives denoting motion or tendency to a thing, are 
 construed with the accusative and ad, rather than with the dative, 
 such as celer, tardus t velox,piger, impiger, lentus,prteceps, rapidus t 
 segnis, declivis, inclinabuis, proclivis, promts, propensus ; also pa- 
 ratus, promptus, profugus : as, Piger ad pcenas princeps, ad mce- 
 mia velox Ovid. Ad aliquem morbum proclivior Cic. Ad om- 
 nejacinus paratus Cic. Ad lubidinem proclive Ter. In is some- 
 times used: as, Celer in pugnam Sil. 
 
 Note 12. Propior and proximus, in imitation of their primitive, 
 prope, have either a dative, or an accusative without the preposi- 
 tion's being expressed : as, Quodpropius vero est Liv. Proximus. 
 hide Virg. Vitium propius mrtutem erat Sail. Proximus Pom- 
 peium sedebamC\c. 
 N ote 13. The dative, according to grammarians, is not, strictly 
 
188 
 
 speaking, governed either by nouns, verbs, or any part of speech, 
 but is subjoined to a word, when acquisition, advantage, or the 
 reverse of these, or when destination in general is denoted. 
 
 RULE XVII. Verbals in bills and dus govern the dative : 
 as, 
 
 Amandus vel amabilis omnibus, To be beloved by all men. 
 
 Note [. That is, verbals in bills, and future participles passive 
 are followed by the dative, which may be resolved into an abla- 
 tive governed by a or ab : as, Multis ille bonis Jlebilis occidit ; 
 Nullijlebilior, quant tibi, Virgili Hor. Restat Chremes, qui mihi 
 exorandus est Ter. 
 
 Note 2. Perfect participles passive are sometimes followed by 
 the dative: as, Dilecta sorori Virg. Ego audita tibi put dram 
 Cic. It is observed by Alvarez, that this construction is most fre- 
 quent with participles which assume the nature of adjectives: such 
 as notuSj perspectus> contemptus, probatus, dilectus, &c. This da- 
 tive may likewise be resolved into the ablative with a or ab : as, 
 Vexati a civibus Cic. A me amatus Quinct. Indeed, passive 
 verbs themselves are often construed, especially by the poets, with 
 a dative, instead of the ablative of the agent : as, Vix audior ulll 
 Ov. for ab ullo. 
 
 Note 3. Johnson refers to this rule not only verbals in bills t but 
 other adjectives having a passive signification, such as invius, ob- 
 vius, pervius, impervius, &c. : as, Troja obvia Graiis -Virg. Nee 
 Cereyi terra indocilis, nee inhospita Baccho Sil. To this rule he 
 likewise refers facilis and ulills construed with the dative of a per- 
 son : as, Facilis rogantibus Ovid. 
 
 Note 4. Verbals in bills are seldom construed but with the da- 
 tive. The following constructions are, however, to be referred to 
 the ablative of instrument or cause ; Nullo penetrabile telo Ovid. 
 Nullojbrabilis ictu Ovid. Verbals in bills have generally a pas- 
 sive signification, only a few instances being found in which they 
 signify actively. 
 
 Note 5. Participles in dus are often followed by the ablative 
 with a or ab : as, Admonendum a me Cic. 
 
 Note 6. Perfect participles are generally followed, especially 
 among prose writers, by an ablative with a preposition : as, Mors 
 Crassi est a multis defleta Cic. Proditus a socio est Ovid. In 
 such examples as the last, the dative seems altogether inadmis- 
 sible. . 
 
 Note 7. The English preposition by is the usual sign of this 
 dative. 
 
 RULE XVIII. Adjectives signifying dimension govern the 
 accusative of measure : as, 
 
 Columna sexaginta pedes alta^ A pillar sixty feet high. 
 
189 
 
 Note 1. Or, adjectives of dimension, such as hngus, latus, eras- 
 sus, prqfundus, altus, densus, are generally followed by the accu- 
 sative, but sometimes by the ablative or genitive, of the words de- 
 noting measure, such as digitus, palmus, pes, cubitus, ulna, passus, 
 stadium, milliare : as, Muris ducenos pedes altis, quinquagenos latis 
 Plin. Fossam sex cubitis altam Liv. Later a pedum lata tri- 
 cenum Plin. Ablative and genitive together; Quidam dupondio 
 et quadrants altum sulcum, latum pedum quinquefaciunt Colum. 
 The genitive is used in the plural only. 
 
 Note C 2. The excess or the deficiency of measure is put in the 
 ablative only l : as, Sesquipede est quam tu longior Plin. Novem 
 pedibus minor Plin. Quanta doctior, tanto submissior Cic. Su- 
 perant capite Virg. To this note are referred the ablatives tanto, 
 quanto, quo, eo, hoc, aliquanto, multo,paulo, nihilo, &c., frequently 
 joined to comparatives, and sometimes found with superlatives 
 or verbs. 
 
 Note 3. Verbs of dimension, such aspateo,cresco,&c., are con- 
 strued like the adjectives : as, Patettres ulnas Virg. But these 
 will be noticed hereafter, under the Distance of Place. 
 
 Note 4. The accusative is governed by ad or in understood, 
 but sometimes expressed ; the ablative, by a, ab, tenus, or in ; 
 the genitive, by ad mensuram or spatium*. 
 
 Note 5. In Latin, as in English, the adjective is sometimes 
 changed into the substantive : as, Transtra digiti pollicis crassitu- 
 dine Caes. in which the ablative is governed by in understood. 
 
 RULE XIX. The comparative degree governs the abla- 
 tive, which is resolved by qudm : as, 
 
 Dulcior melle, Sweeter than honey. 
 Prczstantior auro, Better than gold. 
 
 Note 1. That is, when quam after a comparative is omitted, the 
 substantive following is put in the ablative : as, Thymo dukior 
 Virg. Glaciefrigidior Ovid. i. e. quam thymus, quam glades. It 
 is sometimes resolved by ac or atque : as, Amicior mihi nullus vi* 
 vit atque is Plaut. 
 
 Note 2. The positive with magis or minus is sometimes followed 
 by the ablative : as, O luce magis dilecta sorori Virg. Hoc nemo 
 fuit minus ineptus Ter. 
 
 Note 3. When the comparative is followed by quam, the ob- 
 jects compared must be put in the same case : as, Ego hominem 
 callidiorem vidi neminem quam Phormionem Ter. i. e. vidi. It 
 
 1 The measure of excess is sometimes expressed by tantum, quantum, all- 
 quantum. See Rule XIX, Note 9. 
 
 2 This seems an imitation of Greek construction ; thus v^<a; &w$ixa rif- 
 %tui %<>u<rtos, statua virilis duodecim cubitorum wurea Herod. The governing 
 substantive is sometimes expressed ; as, xar ro piytfof \\ JaxT^Aay, ad magni- 
 
 itudinem sex palmarum Diod. Sic. 
 
190 
 
 is to be observed, that only the nominative and accusative can 
 be repeated after quam with the comparative ; and that if any other 
 case precede it, the verb sum with a nominative must be used : as, 
 Loquor de viro sapientiore quam tu es. Homini gratiosiori quam 
 Cn. Callidius est Cic. It is likewise to be observed, that, when 
 the ablative of comparison is nemo, nullus, or the relative qui, it 
 is not with propriety resolved by quam. 
 
 Note 4-. In such instances, quam should be used after compa- 
 rative adverbs : as, Oderam hunc multo pejus quam Clodium Cic. 
 
 Note 5. Quam is elegantly put between two comparatives : as, 
 Triumphus clarior quam gratior Liv. i. e. not so acceptable as 
 famous ; or, more famous than acceptable. 
 
 Note. 6. Than before a verb is always expressed by quam : as, 
 Nihil turpius est quam mentiri. And quam, between two verbs, 
 if the comparative be an adverb, causes them to be put in the 
 same tenses : as, Nihil facio libentiui quam ad te scribo ; i. e. than 
 to write to you. But, after potiusquam, and sometimes after pri- 
 usquam, the verb is put in the subjunctive. 
 
 Note 7. Nihil with a "neuter comparative is sometimes used for 
 nemo or nidlus : as, Crasso nihil perfect ius Cic. Nihil illofuisse 
 excellentins Nep. i. e. Nobody was. The interrogative quid, 
 and quidquam when it is preceded by a negative, are sometimes 
 thus used. 
 
 Note 8. The comparative is often followed by opinione, spe, 
 tequo, solito, justo, dicto : as, Dicto citius Virg. Solito velocius 
 Ovid. These ablatives are often omitted : as, Liberius vivebat 
 Nep. i. e. eequo. In such cases the Latin comparative often 
 seems equivalent to an English positive preceded by too or rather, 
 which is a species of comparison : as, Tristior (solito). Rather 
 sad, and, perhaps sometimes, somewhat sad. Severior (ceqtio). 
 Too severe, rather severe, somewhat severe. Thus also : Onus 
 viribus tuis est majus. Too great for, or greater than. 
 
 Note 9. Several intensive particles, such as tanto, quanta, eo, 
 quo, c. and tantum, quantum and aliquantum are added to com- 
 paratives : as, Sed quo erant suaviores, eo majorem dolorem ille ca- 
 sus ajferebat Cic. Ejusfrater aliquantum ad rem est avidior 
 Ter. Sometimes the responsive particle eo or hoc is omitted ; as, 
 Quo plures erant, major cades Jitti Liv. 
 
 Note 10. The dative is sometimes used instead of the ablative : 
 as, Vir mdla arte cuiquam inferior Sail. Livy uses the ablative, 
 even in the presence of another ; Attobroges nulla Gallica gente 
 opibus autfama inferiores. But, in general, inferior is construed 
 with quam and a nominative or accusative : as, Timotheus belli 
 laude non inferior full quam pater Cic. Quern ego intelligam 
 prudentia non esse inferiorem quam me Cic. 
 
 Note 11. Magis and plus are sometimes used redundantly with 
 the comparative : as, Nihil invcnies magis hoc certo certius' Plaut. 
 
191 
 
 Note 12. Quam after plus, amplius and minus is elegantly omit- 
 ted, in all cases but the dative and vocative: as, Captaplus guin- 
 que millia hominum Liv. 
 
 Note 13. Quam pro is sometimes elegantly used after the com- 
 parative : as, Pr&lium atrocius quam pro numero pugnantium 
 Liv. i. e. The battle was more bloody than could have been ex- 
 pected from the number engaged in it. 
 
 Note 14. Comparatives, besides the ablative of comparison, take 
 also after them that case which their positives govern ; as, Thymo 
 mild dulcior Hyblte Virg. 
 
 Note 15. The ablative of comparison is governed by prce un- 
 derstood. It is sometimes expressed : as, Unus pro; cczterisfortior 
 exsurgit Apul. Other prepositions, as ante, prceter and supra, 
 are used in comparison : thus, Scelere ante alios immanior omnes 
 -Virg. 
 
 RULE XX. These, adjectives, dignus, indignus^ contentus, 
 prceditus, captus, and fretus ; also natus y satus, ortus, editus, 
 and the like, require the ablative : as, 
 
 Dignus honore, Worthy of honour. 
 
 Prteditus virtute, Endued with virtue. 
 
 Contentus parvo, Content with little. 
 
 Captus. oculis \ Blind. 
 
 Fretus viribus 2 , Trusting to his strength. 
 
 Ortus rcgibus, Descended of kings. 
 
 Note 1. To dignus, indignus, contentus, prceditus, captus and 
 fretus, may be added cams, vilis, and venalis ; all which are fol- 
 lowed by an ablative : as, Dignus laude Hor. Conscientia fretus 
 Curt. Asse carum Senec. Auro venaliajura Propert. 
 
 Note 2. Participles signifying descent, such as genitus, genera- 
 tus, creatus, prognatus, cretus, &c. are followed by an ablative, the 
 prepositions e, ex, or de being understood, or sometimes express- 
 ed : as, Nate dea Virg. Edite regibus Hor. Ortus exconculina 
 Sail. We also find Ccelesti semine oriundi Lucret. Oriundi 
 a Syracusis Liv. These adjectives may be followed also by a, 
 or ab : as, Prisco natus ab Inacho Hor. 
 
 Note 3. Dignus, indignus, and contentus are sometimes followed 
 by the genitive : as, Dignissimum tucevirtutisCic. Indignus avo- 
 rum Virg. Angusti clavi contentus Paterc. Dignus and indig- 
 nus are often construed with an infinitive : as, Digna vincere 
 Ovid. But Dignus est ut, or, qui mncat ; Dignus erat ut y or, qui 
 
 1 Prceditus and captus might be referred to adjectives of plenty and want. 
 After dignus, indigmis, captus, a or ab seems to be understood : after con- 
 tentus, de or cum ; after fretus, in ; after preeditus, cum ; after cams, vilis and 
 venalis, pro. 
 
 * Fretus with a dative is attributed to Livy : Muliitudo nulli rei, praterquam 
 numero, freta. \[, 13, Some would read null& re. 
 
192 
 
 vinceret, are preferable. It is probable that the genitive is go- 
 verned by some substantive understood ; and that Dignus laudis 
 may be Dignus re laudis, the substantive being governed by a 
 preposition likewise understood. 
 
 RULE XXL An adjective of plenty or want governs the 
 genitive or ablative : as, 
 
 Plenus irce vel ird, Full of anger. 
 Inops rationis, Void of reason. 
 
 To this rule belong adjectives denoting 
 
 1. Plenty ; abundans^ beatus, copiosus, dives, J*erax,fertilis }i fce- 
 cundus, foetus, frequens,frugifer, grams, gramdus, immodicus, lar- 
 gus, locuples, mactus, nimius, oneratus, onustus, opulentus, plenus, 
 re/ertus, satur, tentus, distenlus, tumidus, turgidus, uber ; to which 
 add, benignus,Jirmus, instructus, Icstus, liberalis, munificus, para- 
 tus, prodigus, prosper, satialus, insatiabilis : as, Res plena timoris 
 Ovid. Domus servis est plena superbis Juv. 
 
 2. Want ; egenus, indigus, inops,jejunus, inanis, modicus, pau- 
 per, sterilis, tenuis, vacuus : as, Inops consilii Tac. verbis Cic. 
 
 3. Privation ; captus (mentioned in the preceding rule), cassus, 
 expers, exsors, dissors, exsul, extorris, immunis, irritus, mutilus, 
 nudus, orbus, truncus, mduus. Participation ; consors, particeps, 
 and to these may be added affinis and prceditus, which have been 
 already noticed elsewhere. Power and inability ; compos, pollens, 
 potens, impos, impotens ; add liber, solutus, imparatus, infirmus, 
 parcus, purus, many of which have been referred to other rules: 
 as, Imm unis delict or um Paterc. vitiis Paterc . Consiliorum parti- 
 ceps Curt, ratione Cic. Dum mei potens sum Liv. Potens ar- 
 mis Virg. Spei metusque liber Senec. terrore Cic. Some con- 
 structions are not frequent ; as, Captus animi Tac. Neque animo 
 aut lingua satis compotes Sail. Fama atquefortund expertesSall. 
 
 Note 1. Of these some govern, it appears, 
 
 1. The genitive only ; benignus, exsors, impos, impotens, irritus, 
 liberalis, munificus, prcdargus. 
 
 2. The ablative only ; beatus, differtus,frugifer, mutilus, tentus, 
 distentus, tumidus, turgidus. 
 
 3. The genitive more frequently; compos, consors, egenus, ex- 
 hceres, expers, Jertilis, indigus, parcus, pauper, prodigus, sterilis, 
 prosper, insatiatus, insatiabilis. 
 
 4. The ablative more frequently ; abundans, cassus, extorris, 
 Jirmus, foetus, frequens, grams, gramdus, jejunus, infirmus, liber, 
 
 Locuples, Icetus, nudus, oneratus, onustus, orbus, pollens, satiatus, 
 solutus, tennis, truncus, mduus. 
 
 5 The genitive or ablative indifferently; copiosus, dives, fce- 
 cundus,ferax, immunis, inanis, inops, largus, mactus, modicus, im- 
 modicus, nimius, opulentus, plenus, potens, purus, refertus, satur, 
 vacuus, uber. 
 
 Note 2. Copiosus, Jirmus, paratus, imparatus, inops, instructus, 
 
19$ 
 
 ext orris, orbus, pauper t tenuis,Jcecundus, modicus, parcus, i 
 inanis, liber, ?iudus, solutus, vacuus, potens, stenlis, have often a 
 preposition after them : as, Locus copioms afrnmento Cic. Ab 
 equitatufirmus Cic. Ab omni re paratus Cic. Imparatus a pe- 
 cunia Cic. Inops ab amicis Cic. Instructus a doctrina Cic. 
 Meo sum pauper in cere Hor. Tennis in verbis serendis Hor. 
 Parcus in victu, modicus in cultu PI in. Domus liber a conspectu, 
 immunis ab arbitris Veil. Inanis a marsupio Prudent. Mes- 
 sana ab his rebus vacua atque nuda est Cic. Solutus a CVpiditati- 
 bus, liber a delictis Cic. In ajfectibus potentissimus Quinct. Po- 
 tens ad efficiendum Quinct. in res bellicas Liv. 1 Cimtas ab 
 aquis sterilis Apul. Extorris ab solo patrio Liv. Orba ab opti- 
 matibus Cic. 
 
 Note 3. Benignus, prosper, latus, grams, and some others, go- 
 vern the dative, by Rule XVI, but in a different sense. Those ad- 
 jectives that govern the genitive only have been referred by some 
 grammarians to Rule XIV. 
 
 Note 4-. The authorities for different constructions should be 
 properly estimated, for some are poetical; as, Liber labor um Hor. 
 Vini somnique benignus Hor. Abundans lactis Virg. Tennis 
 opum Sil. Others are uncommon : as, Captus animi Tac. and 
 some others already mentioned. Expers may be found with the 
 ablative, but the genitive is much more common. Pauper and 
 egenus do riot appear to be found with the ablative. 
 
 Note 5. Neither the genitive nor theablative is governed, strictly 
 speaking, by the adjectives : but the genitives are governed by re 
 or negotio understood, and these, as well as the other ablatives, 
 by the prepositions in, a, ab, de, or ex : thus Vacuus cur arum may 
 be Vacuus recurarum; Vacuus curls is Vacuu sa curis. 
 
 OF VERBS. 
 
 OF PERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 RULE XXII. Sum, when it signifies possession, property, 
 or duty, governs the genitive : as, 
 
 Est regis punire rebelles. It belongs to the king to punish 
 
 rebels. 
 Insipientis est dicere, \ f It is the property of a fool to 
 
 Nan putdram, J \ say, I had not thought. 
 Militum est suo duci\ / It is the duty of soldiers to obey 
 parere, J (^ their general. 
 
 1 Potens is construed with the genitive or ablative, but in different senser. 
 If we say Potens ircc, we refer to the object j if we sny Potens opibus, we refer 
 to ths source or cause of the power. 
 
 o 
 
104- 
 
 Note 1. Thus also, Jam me Pompeii totum esse scis Cic. Ado* 
 lescentis est majores natu revereriCic. Bonipastoris est tondere 
 pecus Suet. 
 
 Note 2. To this rule may be referred the following, and similar 
 expressions: Suadere principi quod oporteat, multilaboris (est) 
 Tac. Grates persohere dignas, Non opis est nostrce Virg. Est hoc 
 Gallicce consuetudinis Caes. Moris antiqui fuit Plin, In all 
 such expressions it is evident that the genitive is governed, not by 
 sum, but by such words as officium, munus, opus, negotium, res, 
 causa, proprium, understood. Indeed, such words are sometimes 
 expressed : as, Principum munus est resistere levitati multitudinis 
 Cic. Sometimes the preceding word is to be repeated: as, Hoc 
 pecus est (pecus) Melibcei Virg. To the same rule may be re- 
 ferred a common elliptical form of writing, according to which the 
 participle in dus with its substantive is subjoined to the verb sum; 
 as, Quce res evertendce reipublicce solent esse Cic. Regitim impe- 
 rium, quod initio conservandce libertatis, et augenda reipubliccejue- 
 rat Sail. Quce post quam gloriosa modo, neque belli patrandi cog' 
 novit Liv. supply esse. This genitive is found depending upon 
 other verbs besides sum. Grammarians differ about the man- 
 ner of supplying the'ellipsis in these, some supposing instrumentum 
 or adminiculum to be understood ; others, causa, ergo, gratia, or 
 ratione, with some such word as constitutus or comparatus. 
 
 RULE XXIII. These nominatives meum, tuum, suum, 
 nostrum, vestrum, are excepted : as, 
 
 Tuum est id procurare, It is your duty to manage that. 
 
 Note 1. That is, instead of mei, tui, sui, nostri, vestri, the ge- 
 nitives of the primitive pronouns, the nominative neuter of the 
 possessives is used, agreeing with opus, negotium, officium, or the 
 
 like, understood. Certain possessive adjectives ; as, regius, hu- 
 
 manus, belluinus, sermlis, are often used in like manner : as, Non 
 est mentiri meum Ter. Humanum est erroreler. Et agere et 
 patijbrtia Romanum est Liv. 
 
 Note 2. If sum be in the infinitive mood, the possessives must 
 
 be put in a different case ; and if a substantive be expressed, they 
 
 must agree with it in gender : as, Puto esse meum Cic. Hce par- 
 
 tesfuerunt tuce Cic. equivalent to Tuumfuit, or Tuarum partium 
 
 fuit. 
 
 Note 3. It is evident that this cannot be deemed a distinct rule. 
 It is the same as Rule III, an infinitive, a part of a sentence, or 
 some neuter noun understood, being as one of the nominatives, 
 and requiring the adjective following the verb to be in the neuter 
 gender, to which some neuter noun may be supposed understood. 
 
 RULE XXIV. Misereor, miseresco and satago, govern die 
 genitive: as, 
 
 Miserere civium tuorum, Take pity on your countrymen. 
 Satagit rerun syctrum, He is busy with his own affairs. 
 
195 
 
 Note 1. Thus also Miserere mci Ovid. Et generis miseresce 
 tui Stat. Irarum et molestiarum muliebrium satagebat Cell. 
 
 Note2. Misereor and mLseresco may be found with a dative, 
 among writers of inferior authority. Miseror governs the accu- 
 sative. 
 
 Note 3. The genitive does not appear to be governed by the 
 verb.- Some consider such constructions as Grcecisms ; others 
 think that the genitive is governed by negotio, re, causa, or the 
 like, understood, with the prepositions in, de, or a. 
 
 Note 4. Many other verbs denoting some affection of the mind 
 
 are followed by a genitive : as, ango, decipior, desipio, discrudor, 
 
 fallo,fallor,fastidiOj invideo, Itetor, miror, pendeo , studeo , vereor: 
 
 thus, Absurdefads qui angas te animi Plaut. Discrudor animi 
 
 Ter. FaUebar sermonis Plaut. L&tor malorum Virg. 
 
 Note 5. Many others are found with the genitive, in imitation, 
 of Greek construction : as, abstineo, desino, desisto, quiesco, remo ; 
 also, adip&scor, condico, credo, frustror^ Juro, laudo, libero, levo, 
 participo t prohibeo : thus, Abstineto irarum Hor. Desine quere- 
 larum Hor. Tempus desistere pugnce Virg. Daunus agrestium 
 regnavit populorum Hor. Dominationis adipisceretur Tac. Le~ 
 vas me Isborum Plaut. &c. The ellipsis in these constructions, 
 and in those contained in the preceding note, is variously supplied : 
 thus, Discrudor animi, sc. dolor e. Regnavit populorum y sc. in cos- 
 tu. Levas laborum, sc. onere, &c. 
 
 Note G. The verbs contained in Note 4- are more commonly 
 construed thus ; angor % desipio, discrudor,fallw, animo. Angi de 
 aliqi&o, Angere aliquem, ana Fallit me animus, are used by Cicero. 
 Hoc animum excruciat, Fastidio, miror, vereor, aliquem vel ali~ 
 quid. Lceior aliqua re. Cicero uses Lcetor in re aliqua, de hoc 
 re, and Lector utrumque. Invideo alicui laudes, vel laudibus all- 
 cujus. Pendeo animi vel animo ; but Pendemus animis, not ani- 
 morum. Studeo alicui, vel aliquid. Likewise, In id solum student 
 * Quinct. 
 
 Note 7. The examples contained in Note 5 are chiefly poetical. 
 It is much better to say Abstineo rnaledictis oramaledictis. Desino 
 aliquid or ab aliquo. Desisto incepto, de negotio, ab ilia mente. 
 Regnare omnibus oppidis Cic. in being understood. Adipisci ali- 
 quid. Levare aliquem sollidtudine, or alicujus sollidtudinem, &c. 
 
 RULE XXV. Est taken for habco (to have) takes the da- 
 tive of a person : as, 
 
 Est mi hi liber, I have a book. 
 
 Sunt mihi libri, I have books. 
 
 Note 1. Thus also, Est mihi pater Virg. Sunt nobis mitia 
 poma Virg. i. e. Ego habeo patrem : Nos habemus mitia poma, 
 the English accusative becoming in Latin the nominative to the 
 
196 
 
 third person singular or plural of sum, or the accusative before its 
 infinitive ; and the English nominative being turned into a dative. 
 Note 2. To this rule may be added suppetit, suppeditat used in 
 a neuter sense, andforet; and the verbs of a contrary significa- 
 tion, deest, deforet, and defit, used for careo or non hqbeo : as, Pau- 
 per enim non est, cui rerum suppetit usus Hor. Publio neque ani- 
 mus in periculis, neque oratio suppeditavit Tac. But in this ex- 
 ample perhaps a reciprocal pronoun is understood ; for suppedito, 
 as an active verb, governs the accusative, and as a verb of giving, 
 the dative likewise 1 . Si mihi cauda foret Mart. Defuit ars vobis 
 Ovid. Non defore Arsacidis virtutem Tac. Lac mihi non defit 
 -Virg. 
 
 Note 5. The dative is often understood: as, Sit spes JaUendi, 
 miscebis sacra projanis Hor., i. e. tibi. 
 
 RULE XXVI. Sum used for affero (to bring) takes two 
 
 datives, the one of a person, and the other of a thing-: as, 
 
 Est mihi voluptati* It is (or it brings) a pleasure to me. 
 
 Note 1. Or, Sum taken for affero, (into which, however, it can- 
 not always be resolved, when followed by two datives, )forem, do, 
 duco, habeo, tribuo, relinquo, verto, to which may be added appono, 
 assigno, cedo, comparo,pateo, suppedito, venio, eo, curro, projiciscor, 
 are found with two datives, the one generally of a person, or of 
 something personified, and the other of a thing : as, Fit is arbori- 
 bus decori est Virg. Sibi enim fore ccetera curae Ovid. Matri 
 puellam dono deditTer. Tu nunc tibi id lavdi duds Ter. Utrum 
 studione id sibi habeat, an laudi putatfore Ter. Quod illi tribueba- 
 tur ignaviceCic. Ea relicta est huic arrhaboni Ter. H 'oc verto 
 
 tibi vitio Plant. Postulare id gratice apponi sibi Ter. Sub- 
 
 sidio mihi diligentiam comparavi Cic. Pateant Carthaginis arces 
 Hospitio TeucrisVirg. Si illi per go suppeditare sumptibus Ter. 
 Maturavit colleges venire auxilioLiv. Also, Venire, ire, currere t 
 prqficisci subsidio alicui Cic. To these are added by the au- 
 thor of the Port Royal Grammar pttto, and, by other grammarians, 
 mitto. But Ruddiman observes thut puto is never followed by two 
 datives, unless when esse or fore is expressed or understood, which 
 of course is considered as the governing word. It further appears 
 to me, that the two datives which follow several of the above-men, 
 tioned verbs may. perhaps be governed by sum understood, and 
 that, e. g. Numidas subsidio oppidanis mittit Cses. may be, Nu- 
 midas (ut sint, or qui sint} subsidio .oppidanis mittit. But this is a 
 conjecture. The following example, in which, by a Greek form 
 of much elegance, the participle volenti is used instead of the sub- 
 stantive voluptati, may seem to sanction the opinion that puto is 
 followed by two datives : Neque plebi militia volenti putabatur 
 
 1 It likewise governs two datives, as will be noticed in the next rule. 
 , tt It has been conjectured, that tin's Dative is an old form of the ablative, 
 governed by />/<:> understood, or expressing cause cr instrument. 
 
197 
 
 Sail. But here the infinitive of turn is understood. To this 
 
 rule may perhaps be referred the elegant phrase, Esse audientem 
 dicto alicui. Si proton dicto non audiens esset Liv. 
 
 Note2. The English of those passages, in which this Rule takes 
 place, would naturally refer them to Rule III, or X, and, indeed, 
 they may be so rendered : as, Ipse caierisfuisset exemplum Curt. 
 Amor exit ium est pecori Virg. in which the substantive following 
 the verb, and expressing the thing, is put in the same case with 
 the word going before, the dative of the person being under the 
 government of the noun or verb immediately preceding. But, as 
 the latter nominative is followed by a noun having in English the 
 sign of the Latin dative, both the nouns following the verb are ele- 
 gantly put in the dative : as, Hie multisfuit exemplo Curt. Thus 
 also, JEthiopicis laus datur Plin. and, elegantly, Metello laudi da- 
 tum est Cic. Sometimes both the nouns significant of one and 
 the same subject follow the verb : as, He sends up the cohorts to 
 assist (as an assistance to) the cavalry, Submittit cohortes equitibus 
 subsidioC&s. in which cohortes and subsidio refer to the same 
 thing. Thus likewise Dare dono and donum ; Relinquere regnum 
 prtfdce and prcedam. Other forms are sometimes used : as, Ad 
 laudem vertere. In crimen vertere. In gloria ducere, &c. 
 
 Note 3. To this rule are sometimes referred such forms of 
 naming as the following, in which the nominative, the genitive, 
 and dative are used ' ; Nominative, Mihi nomen est Sosia Plaut. 
 Fons, cui nomen Arethusa est Cic. Genitive, Nomen Mercurii 
 est mihi Plaut. Dative, Nomen Arcluro est mihi Plaut. Asca- 
 nius, cui nunc cognomen lulo additur Virg. The following ex- 
 pressions may likewise be added: Esse cordi, usui, derisui. prad<r t 
 ludibrio, sc. alicui. Habere cura, qiuestui, sc sibi. Canere rer,eptui, 
 sc. militibus. Indeed, the dative of the person is frequently omitted: 
 thus also, Exemplo est magni formica laboris Hor. i. e. nobis or 
 omnibus. Reliquit pignori putamina Plaut. i. e. mihi. 
 
 RULE XXVII. A verb signifying advantage or disad- 
 vantage requires the dative : as, 
 
 Fortunajavetfortibus, Fortune favours the brave. 
 Nemini noccas. Do hurt to no one. 
 
 Note 1. Or, most verbs used acquisitively, of which, in English, 
 the usual signs, either expressed or understood, are to and for, 
 are followed by the dative : as, Tibi aras, tibi occas, tibi seris> tibi 
 eidem et metis Plaut. Mihi quidem Scipio vivit, vivetque semper 
 Cic. This is a rule of very great extent ; but, in a mere par- 
 ticular manner, are referred to it, verbs signifying, 
 
 1. To profit or hurt; as prnjicio,placeo, commodo, prospicio, ca- 
 veo, metuo, timeo, consulo, (to provide for or against); also, noceo, 
 
 1 The genitive is seldom used ; the dative is esteemed the most elegant ; 
 thus also P. Scipio, rui posted Africaiui cognomen fwt Sail. No example be- 
 longs to the rule, iu which there are not two datives, 
 
198 
 
 qfficio, incommode, displiceo, insidior: thus, Neve tnihi noceat, quod 
 vobis semper, Achivi, Profuit ingenium~-O\ld. 
 
 2. To favour or help, and the contrary; a$Javeo,gratulor, gra- 
 t if cor, grator, ignosco, indulgeo,parco, studeo, adulor, plaudo, blan- 
 dior, lenocinor, palpor, assentor, supplico, subparasitor ; also, aux- 
 ilior, adminiculor, subvenio, succurro, patrocinor, medeor, medicor, 
 opitulor; also, derogo, detraho, invideo, cemulor-, thus, Favete inno- 
 centia Cic. Succurrere communi saluti Cic. 
 
 3. To command, obey, serve, and resist ; as impero, prcecipio, 
 mando, moderor (to restrain); also, pareo, ausculto, obedio, obse- 
 quor, obtempero, morigeror, obsecundo ; &\o,Jamulor, servio, inser- 
 vio, ministro, ancillor; and repugno, obsto, reluctor, renitor, resisto, 
 refragor, adversor t and, poetically, pvgno, certo. bello, contendo, 
 concurrO) luctor ; thus, Imperare animo nequivi, quin Liv. Pug- 
 nabis amori? Virg. 
 
 4. To threaten, or be angry with; as minor, comminor, inter' 
 minor, iroscor, succenseo ; thus Mihi minabatur Cic. 
 
 5. To trust ; asjido, conjido, credo ; also diffido, despero : thus, 
 Ulli reijidere Liv. Despemre saluti Cic. 
 
 6. A great number of other verbs that are not easily reduced 
 to distinct classes; such as nubo, excetto, hcereo, supplico, cedo 1 , 
 operor, prcestolor, prtevaricor, recipio (to promise), pepigi (I have 
 promised ) , renuncio ( to give over) , respondeo ( to satisfy ) , tempero 
 (to abstain), vaco (to study, or attend to), convicior, &c. 
 
 7. The compounds of sum, except possum : as, Nee sibi, nee 
 alteri prosunt Cic. Vir abest miki Ovid. 
 
 8. Verbs compounded with satis, bene t male: as, Pulchrumest 
 benefacere reipublicce Sail. 
 
 9. Many verbs compounded with ad, ante, con, in, inter, ob, 
 prce, sub, super. 
 
 Ad ; as acctdo, accresco, accumbo, acquiesco, adno, adnato, ad- 
 equito, adhcereo, adsto, adstipulor, advolvor, nffulgeo, allabor, an- 
 nuo, appareo, applaudo, appropinquo, arrideo, aspiro, assentior, 
 assideo, assisto, assuesco, assurgo : thus, Annue cceptis Virg. 
 
 Ante ; as anteceUo, anteeo, antesto, anteverto : thus, AnteceUere 
 omnibus Cic. 
 
 Con ; as colludo, concino, consono, convivo : thus, Paribus coUu- 
 dere Hor. 
 
 In ; as incumbo, indormio, inhio, ingemisco, inhareo, innascor, 
 innitor, imideo, insto, insuto, insudo, imulto, invigilo, illacrymo, 
 illudo, immineo, immorior, immoror, impendeo ; thus, Imminet his 
 aer Ovid. 
 
 1 Cedo put for locum dare governs the dative. When an accusative is joined 
 to it, as in Cedere locum alicui, Perizonius is of opinion, that this accusative is 
 governed by quod ad understood, since cedo is a neuter verb. Its usual con- 
 struction is with the ablative : as, Postquam Tusculand villa creditoribus cesserat 
 Suet. 111. Gramm. Cedere seilli regno profitetnr Justin. Nisi sibi horlorum 
 possessione cessisset Cic. The preposition de, which in these instances is un- 
 derstood, is expressed in others : as, Cedo de republics, de fortund, de dignitate 
 Cic. We also find, Cedere ab oppido, ex civitate, &c t 
 
199 
 
 Inter; as intervenio, intermico, intercede, intercido, inlerjaceo ; 
 thug, Nox pr&lio intervenitLiv. 
 
 Ob ; as obrepo, obluctor, obtrecto, obstrepo, obmurmuro, occum- 
 to, occurro, occurso, obsto, obsisto, obvenio : thus, Occumbere morti 
 -Virg. 
 
 Prae; as pracedo, prcecurro, praeo, pr&sideo, prceluceo, prceni- 
 teo, prcesto, prcevaleo, prcevertor : thus, Majoribus prceluxi Cic. 
 
 Sub ; as succedo, succumbo, stifficio, sujfragor, subcresco, suboleo, 
 subjaceo, subrepo : thus, Miseris succurrere Virg. 
 
 Super; as supervenio, supercurro, supersto: thus, Timidis super- 
 venit Virg. But most verbs compounded with super govern the 
 accusative, through the preposition: as, Deas supereminet omnes 
 Virg. Supervenio also governs the accusative, but in a sense 
 somewhat different from that in the preceding example : as, Crura 
 loquentis Terra supervenit Ovid. In the former example, it seems 
 to denote she comes to the assistance of: in the latter, the earth 
 simply came over. Supcrsedeo is sometimes joined with the dative : 
 as, Adversaries pitgnce supersedere animadvertit Hirt. B. Afr. but 
 oftener the ablative : as, Supersedeas hoc labore Cic. In these 
 instances its meaning seems to be to omit or leave off-, it is found 
 also with an accusative, in its literal acceptation of sitting upon, 
 but even in this sense, the dative, or perhaps rather the ablative, 
 is more common. 
 
 A few verbs might be added, compounded of ab, de, ex, circum, 
 contra , but these generally take the case of the preposition. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Jubeo, offendo, laedo, juvo, delecto, guberno, govern the accusa- 
 tive : as, Dextraque silentia jussit Lucan. But the accusative 
 following jubeo is generally supposed to depend upon some infini- 
 tive understood, such as facere, Jieri, esse or dari. It is gene- 
 rally found with the accusative and the infinitive ; sometimes with 
 a dative and the infinitive; and seldom with an accusative and da- 
 tive together: thus, Fuscum salvere julemus Hor. Hcc mihi liter & 
 Dolabeilce jubtnt ad pristinas cogitationes reverti Cic. Pacem 
 jubebo omnibus Stat. But, as this verb is used in the passive 
 voice, not merely impersonally, but after the manner of active 
 verbs, whose accusatives then become nominatives, it may be ob- 
 served, that its proper and regular government in the active, is the 
 accusative. Impero, a verb of like signification with juleo t is 
 followed by an accusative of the thing demanded : as, Imperare 
 tributum, pccuniam, arma, equites, which some grammarians, con- 
 ceiving impero to be neuter, consider as dependent upon dari, prce- 
 leri, or the like, understood. By others, however, it is regarded 
 as active, governing of itself the accusative, and having a regular 
 passive voice, the accusative becoming the nominative to the verb: 
 as, Imperaturei pudicitia Just. Imperatce pecunice Caes. Naves 
 imperatae sunt Curt. Obsidibus imperalis. COBS. Illi se, qua? im- 
 perarentur, facere dixerunt Caes, Indeed, it appears that it once 
 
200 
 
 
 admitted an accusative, of the person commanded, as we find Ego 
 imperor Hor. Epist. 1, 5, 21, instead of mi hi imperatur. In re- 
 gard to the construction of this verb, 1 am decidedly of opinion, 
 that there is no ellipsis, but that it is followed by the dative of the 
 person commanded, and governs the accusative of whatever is 
 commanded or demanded, which last case becomes the nominative 
 to the passive voice: thus, Equites imperare civitaiibus Caes. Nup~ 
 tias imperare alicui Quinct. Suis, ut idemfaciant, imperat Caes. 
 in which the words ut idemfaciant supply the place of the accusa- 
 tive of the thing commanded. Malo imperari quam eripi mortem 
 mihi Senec. In such expressions as Equitatum procedere imperat 
 Ca?s. equitatum expresses neither the persons commanded, nor 
 the command itself, but the words equitatum procedere, taken to- 
 gether, stand for an accusative expressing the thing commanded. 
 Ego imperor for mihi imperatur is entirely poetical. The govern- 
 ment of the other five has never been a subject of doubt : thus, 
 Cur ami cum offendam in nugis Hor. Also, OJfendere aliquem, or 
 aliauia, for to find; in re aliqud, for to transgress. Injuste neni- 
 nem Iccsit Cic. Juvit facundia causam Ovid. Lilris me delecto 
 Cic. Omnia gubernes Cic. 
 
 Note 2. The greater part of the verbs hitherto mentioned as 
 governing the dative are neuter. Many active verbs govern a da- 
 tive with the accusative, as will be hereafter noticed. It is likewise 
 to be observed that the greater part of the verbs compounded 
 with ad, ante, con, &c. do not govern the dative : such as acco/o, 
 antegredior, ineo, invado y inlercurso, oppugno, obsideo, postvenio, 
 prcevenio, subsilio, supernaio, &c. ; and, that, besides those which 
 have been mentioned, there are many, signifying profit, assist- 
 ance, favour, and the contrary, which are construed with the ac- 
 cusative, or otherwise ; such as levo, erigo, alo, nutrio, amo, diligo, 
 vexo, crucio, aversor, &c. , 
 
 Note 3. Many of the verbs which have been enumerated as be- 
 longing to this rule, are found differently construed, while their 
 signification remains the same; and many vary their meaning; of 
 both which, lists will be given at the end of the Syntax. 
 
 Note 4. To this rule are referred many verbs which, among the 
 poets chiefly, are construed with a dative, after the manner of the 
 Greeks, but which are commonly found with the ablative and a 
 preposition, according to Latin construction ; as verbs of 
 
 1. Contending; contendo t cento, lello, luctor, pugno alicui for 
 cum aliquo. Solus till ctrtet Amyntas Virg. We also find Con- 
 tendere contra or adversus aliquem Cic. Ccr tare inter se Cic. 
 Pugnare contra or adversus Quinct. Plin. inter se Curt, in aii- 
 quem Liv. 
 
 2. Differing ; as distare, dissentire, discrepare, dissidere, differ re 
 rei alicui, for a re aliquot. Paulum sepultce distat inertias Celata 
 virtus Hor. We also find distant, dissentiunt, discrepant, dissi- 
 dent, diffirunt inier.se-~-Cic. JDistare meta .Ovid, Dissentire, dis- 
 
201 
 
 sidert cum aliquo Cic. Differt inter opiidonem meam ei luam 
 Cic. 
 
 3. Coming together, and mixing; as coeo, concurro, concnmlo, 
 ml ceo: thus, Placidis cocant immitia Hor. Concurrere hosti 
 Ovid. Conculuisse dece Propert. Mista Deo mulier Virg. in- 
 stead of cum placidis, cum hoste, &c. We also find Coire, concur- 
 rere, inter se Virg. and Liv. Mhcere vinum aquce, or cum aqud, 
 or uqud, &c. 
 
 4. Keeping or driving away ; as Arcelis gravido pecori Virg. 
 Solstitium pecori defendite Virg. But these belong to verbs of 
 taking away, which govern two cases, and will be hereafter no- 
 ticed. 
 
 5. Passive verbs : as Non inteUigor ulli Ovid, for al ullo. Ne- 
 que cernitur ulli Virg. 
 
 Nott 5. Verbs of calling, or exhorting ; as voco, hortor, invito, 
 provoco, lacesso, anijno, stimulo, with specto, pertineo, attineo, con- 
 formo, and some other verbs denoting tendency to motion, are 
 followed by an accusative with ud : thus, Eurum ad se vocal Virg. 
 Ad. ccenam hominem invitavit Cic. Ad arm a res spectant Cic. 
 Provocdsse ud pugnam Cic. Me conjormo ad ejus volunlatem 
 Cic. &c. 
 
 Note 6. Verbs of local motion ; as eo, vado, curro, propero,fes- 
 tino, pergo } fugioj also porto, fero, lego, -as, prcecipito, toilo, traho, 
 cfwco, verto, &c. and incito, tuscito, tendo, vergo, inclino, and the 
 like, are followed by an accusative with ad or in: as, In jus nun- 
 quamiit Nep. Vergimurin senium Stat. Fergit ad sepiemlriones 
 Caes.- But the poets sometimes use a dative : as, It clamor 
 ccelo Virg. Jnferret deos Latio Virg. The verb propinquo is 
 generally construed with the dative : as, Propinquare castris, Jbri- 
 l:us, scopulo Virg. campis, littori, &c. Tacit. Sallust writes 
 Propinquare amnem ; in which, ad may perhaps be understood. 
 It is found however with an accusative, but in an active sense: as 
 Tu rite propinques avgurium Virg. Mortem licet anna propin- 
 quent Sil. 
 
 Note 7. Verbs compounded with ad are variously construed. 
 Some generally govern the dative only ; as assideo, assurgo, ad- 
 
 versor, alicui. Plautus uses Adversariadversus sententiam Some 
 
 generally have an accusative with od or in - } as accio, accurro, ad- 
 
 hortor, advoco, allicio, alligo, attrahu, &c. Some have either 
 
 construction ; as accedo, accido, adhceresco, adrepo, uffluo : also ac- 
 cingo, accommodo, addo, odfero, adhibeo. adjicio, vffigo, alfido, oppono, 
 adnato, adsto, advigilo, alludo, aspiro, &c. several of which, being 
 active verbs, have an accusative with a dative, as will be hereafter 
 noticed Some, the accusative, without the preposition's being 
 repeated; as advehor, affor, alloc/uor, alluo, attono Some, the 
 accusative with or without a preposition ; as, adeo, advetio, adven- 
 to, aggredior, ascendo, aspicio Some, the dative, or the accusa- 
 tive without a preposition ; as adcquito, adjacco, adno, adstrepo, 
 
202 
 
 adsulto Some, the dative, or the accusative with or without a 
 preposition; as Advolvi gen ibus, genua, ad genua. Thus also ao 
 cedo, advenio, advolo, allauor, appropinquo, for which see the lists. 
 
 Note 8. The verb occurro, signifying to come together, or run, 
 is frequently followed by ad : as, Ad consilium occurrere Liv. 
 but it is generally followed by the dative : and it has been ob- 
 served, that, when it signifies to meet, it is not used in the first 
 person singular, but that the English objective case is turned, in 
 Latin, into the nominative, and the nominative into the dative : 
 as, Meus pater mihi occurritl I met my father. 
 
 Note 9. Even verbs governing two cases have a dative, by this 
 rule : as, Accuso teilli, as well as apud ilium, or coram illo, magni 
 sceleris, or de magno scelere. 
 
 Note 10. When the passive form of an English verb is to be 
 expressed by a Latin neuter, or deponent, the phrase must be 
 varied : thus, I was favoured by fortune, Fortuna mihi favelat. 
 A master ought to be loved and respected by his scholars, Dis- 
 cipuli debent amare et revereri prceceptorem. Thus also, the neu- 
 ter may be used in the passive voice, but impersonally ; as I am 
 favoured, Mihifavetur. 
 
 RULE XXVIII. A verb signifying actively 1 governs the 
 accusative: as, 
 
 Ama Deum, Love God. 
 
 Reverere parentes, Reverence your parents. 
 
 Note 1. That is, verbs transitive, whether they be active, de- 
 ponent, or common, govern an accusative of the object to which 
 their energy passes : as, Animum rege Hor. Agrum depopulates 
 est Liv. Imprimis venerare Deos Virg. 
 
 Note 2. Sometimes there is an ellipsis of the governing verb : 
 as, Quid multa? Cic. i. e. dicam or loquar. 
 
 Note 3. The accusative is frequently understood : as, Solus 
 Sannio servat domi Ter. i. e. res qiue sunt domi t or res domesticas. 
 
 That all verbs whose signification is active and extends to an object, do not 
 govern the accusative, may be seen by a slight examination of the preceding 
 rule. There is the same kind of action and of communication of action in noceo 
 as in laedo ; and yet we say Noceo tibi, and Lcedo te. We may also say Tu 
 laderis, in which the pronoun following the active voice, becomes the nomina- 
 tive ; but we cannot say Tu nocms, (but nocetur tibi,} because noceo, though a 
 verb of an active signification, is considered in regard to government as neuter. 
 I am aware, that, in the dictionaries, noceo is denominated active, in reference 
 both to its signification and government ; and that there are a few instances in 
 which it seems to be used passively ; but, its true syntactical character is neuter, 
 and, as such, it cannot be used passively, but in the third person singular, and 
 that impersonally, the object of its active signification still remaining in the 
 dative, instead of becoming a nominative, as happens after the passive tenses 
 of active transitive verbs. It is needless to observe, that such active intransi- 
 tive verbs as eo, venio, curro, &c. signify actively ; but, that, as their action is 
 limited to the subject or agent, they are necessarily precluded from governing 
 an accusative. 
 
203 
 
 Cumfadam vituld* Virg. i. e. sacra.. Nox pr&cipitat Virg* i.e. 
 se. Eolavatum Hor. i. e. me. The accusative of the pronoun 
 is frequently understood to many verbs, which, on this account, 
 have been named absolute, or have been, without sufficient rea- 
 son, considered as intransitive ; such as abstineo, celero, dedino, 
 and many others, which will be noticed, at the end of Syntax, 
 after the list of verbs construed actively andneuterly . 
 
 Note 4. The infinitive, or a sentence, sometimes supplies the 
 place of the accusative : as, Reddes dulce loqui Hor. i. e. dulcem 
 sermonem. Fed e servo libcrtus ut esses mihi Ter. i. e. te liber- 
 turn. Vereor ne a doctis reprehendar Cic. i. e. doctorum repre- 
 hensionem. 
 
 Note 5. Some active verbs are variously construed : as, Colerc, 
 incolere, habitare locum, and in loco ; Confiteri crimen, and de cri- 
 mine Cic. Intueri aliquem, and in aliquem Cic. Respicere, spec- 
 tare , visere, revisere aliquem, and ad aliquem. Declmare locum, 
 and a loco. In some of these constructions, the active verb either 
 imitates the nature of the neuter verb, or has se, or some similar 
 word, understood to it. 
 
 OF NEUTER OB ABSOLUTE VERBS. 
 
 Note 6. Neuter verbs admit after them an accusative of their 
 own or a kindred signification : as, Vitam vivere Plaut. Fu- 
 rerejurorem Virg. Noxam nocuerunt Liv. Servitutem serviat 
 Plaut. This phraseology seeqps of Greek origin, for the last ex- 
 ample is equivalent to the Greek foXe&fy flsAe/av. It is also com- 
 mon in English : as, to live a life. Thus also, Ire viam Virg. 
 Somnum humanum quievi Apul. When taken in a metaphorical 
 or active sense, they have sometimes an accusative : as, Corydon 
 ardebat Alexin Virg. i. e. ardenter vel vehementer amabat. Nee 
 vox hominem sonat Virg. i. e. nor does the voice bespeak or show 
 the person to be the man. Thus also ; Olet hircum Hor, Abo- 
 lere maculam Justin. Morientem nomine clamat Virg. Omnes 
 una manet nox Hor. i. e. awaits. 
 
 Note 7. Instead of the foregoing accusatives, an ablative is fre- 
 quently subjoined : as, Ire nostris ilineribus Cic. Morte obiit 
 repentina. Ludere alea Hor. These are governed by a prepo- 
 sition understood. 
 
 Note 8. The poets use the neuter gender of adjectives, cither 
 
 1 The accusative after certain active verbs, generally when they are used in 
 some figurative sense, is governed, not by the verb, but by some preposition 
 understood, the accusative which is the real object of the verb, being under- 
 stood ; thus Ferire, icerc, percutere fasdus, is put for Ferire, iccre, $c. porcum 
 ad sanciendum fcedus. Conserere pr&lium, for Conserere manum ad prcelium 
 faciendum. Plangere funera, damna, for Plangere lacertos or pcctus ad funera, 
 ad damna. In English, too, we say, To strike a bargain ; but there is little 
 doubt, that, here, the bargain is not the real object of the action contained in 
 the verb strike, but that this is, in some way, or from some custom, an indica- 
 tion of a bargain's being agreed upon. 
 
204 
 
 singular or plural, adverbially or instead of adverbs : as, 
 repente clamatVirg. for torve. Et pede terrain Crebra Jerit 
 Virg. for crebrb. This use of the neuter gender after neuter 
 verbs or their participles is almost peculiar to the poets ; but Ta- 
 citus writes, Tiberius torvus aut falsum renidens vultu Ann. iv. 
 60. 3. The following from Horace is quoted as an instance of a 
 neuter gender used adverbially after the participle of a verb hav- 
 ing an active signification ; Lalagen amabo dulce loquentem ; i. e. 
 sweetly ; in which, however, dulce, having some substantive un- 
 derstood to it, may, perhaps, be governed by loquentem ; but 
 this renders the meaning somewhat different from what it is if 
 dulce be considered as used for dulciter, and as qualifying the 
 participle. 
 
 Note 9. The accusatives hoc, id, quid, aliquid, quicquid, nihil y 
 idem, illud, tantum, quantum, multa, pauca, alia, ccetera, omnia, 
 are often subjoined to neuter verbs, circa, ob, propter, orsecundum 
 (or Kara,) being understood : as, Num id lacrumat virgo ? Ter. 
 Scto quid erres Plaut. Quicquid delirant reges, plectuntur Achi- 
 oi Hor. Illud cave dubites Cic. Other accusatives may be found 
 after such verbs as abnuo tt fastidio, horreo, ardeo, caleo, tepeo, la- 
 tro, sibilo,palleo,paveo,tremo, trepido,pereo, depereo, doleo,gemo, 
 fao,ploro, lacrymo, ambulo, curro, eo, procedo, vado, venio,juro, 
 vigilo, dormio, nato, navigo, equito, &c, but they are governed by 
 some preposition understood. Such constructions as the follow- 
 ing are to be referred to the licentia poetica, or to an imitation of 
 it : Via ambulatur, nai-igatur mar?, Bellum hoc tibi militabitur 
 Hor. Pugna pugnata Cic. Dormitur hyems Mart. Vivitur 
 cetas 1 Ovid. &c. 
 
 Note 10. Certain verbs, which in their simple form are intransi- 
 tive, govern an accusative, through the preposition with which 
 they are compounded : as, Adeopatrem ; Villain prater eo Ter. 
 Flumen prceterfluit muros *Liv. Evaditque celer ripam irremeabi- 
 lis undce Virg. Excedere modum. It is true that e and ex go- 
 vern the ablative ; but it is supposed that they are put for extra : 
 as prce, which also governs the ablative, is for prceter, in Volucrem 
 fuga prcevertitur HebrumVirg. Vado likewise, when compound- 
 ed with in, becomes transitive : as, Vitam hominum invasisse 
 Cic. Cicero has also repeated the preposition : as, In mult as pe- 
 
 cunias invasit. Various verbs of motion are influenced in like 
 
 manner 2 . In all the preceding remarks concerning the accu- 
 sative, it is a fundamental rule, that every accusative must be go^ 
 verned by a transitive verb, or a verb used transitively, or by a 
 preposition, if not expressed, at least, understood. The same 
 remark is applicable to adjectives, or participles, in regard to an 
 
 1 In Sed maximam partem lacte atque pecore vivuntCses. there is evidently 
 an ellipsis of quod ad, or *a-ra. 
 
 tt A similar thing occurs in English ; as go, intransitive j undergo, transitive j 
 eome, intransitive j overcome, transitive, &c. 
 
205 
 
 ellipsis of a preposition in such constructions as Crinem soluta- 
 Virg. i. e. secundum. Humeros amictus Hor. i. e. circa. 
 
 RULE XXIX. Recorder, memini^ reminiscor, and oblivis- 
 cor, govern the accusative or genitive : as, 
 
 Recorder lectionem vel lectionis, I remember the lesson. 
 Obliviscor injuriam vel infurus 9 I forget an injury. 
 
 Note 1. That is, the above-mentioned verbs, denoting remem- 
 brance andforgetfulness, are followed by a genitive or an accusa- 
 tive: as, Meminisse labor urn Virg. Numeros memini Virg. Me- 
 mineram Pauttum Cic. Although it be evident by the last quo- 
 tation, that memini may govern the accusative of the person, 
 contrary to the opinion of Vossius, who, in his smaller grammar, 
 asserts, that we can say only Memini Ciceronis, not Ciceroncm ; 
 yet it is better to say Memento mei, nostri, than me, nos ; and 
 also Oblitus ne sis nostri, than nos. Obl'misci injtirias Cic. Est 
 proprium stultitice aliorum vitia cernere, oblivisci suorum-Clc. c. 
 
 Note 2. Memini, when it signifies to make mention, is followed 
 by a genitive, or de : as, Neque omnino hujus rei usquam meminit 
 poeta Quinct. Achillas, cuj us supra meminimus Cses. De qui- 
 
 bits multi meminerunt Quinct. Recorder, when it signifies to 
 
 .make mention, is, perhaps, construed with an accusative only : as, 
 Externa libentias in tali re, quam domestica recordor Cic. 
 
 Note 3. Recordor and memini, denoting memoria teneo (I re- 
 member), are sometimes construed with de : as, Tu si meliore 
 .memoria cs, velim scire ecquid de te recordereCic. De Planco 
 memini -'Cic. 
 
 Note 4. The phrase Venit mild in mentem, denoting remember- 
 ing, is variously construed : as, Venit miki in mentem htzc res, 
 hujus rei, de hac re. Mihi veniebat in mentem ejus incommodum 
 Ter. Mihi solet venire in mentem illius te.*>poris Cic. In mentem 
 venit de speculo Plaut. 
 
 Note 5. All these may be construed with the infinitive or a 
 part of the sentence, instead of the respective cases : as, Virgi- 
 ncm memini videre Ter. Memini Antiochum sententia destitisse 
 Cic. Nee venit in mentem quorum consederis arms Virg. Or with 
 an ablative with or without a preposition : as, Si cum animis ves- 
 tris recordari C. Staleni vitam et naturam volucritis Cic. Facile 
 memoria memini Plaut. 
 
 Note 6. The nature of this construction is variously explained 
 by grammarians. Some contend, that, when recordor, memini, 
 and rerniniscor are followed by a genitive, this is governed by me- 
 moriam or recordationem understood ; and that to Venit in men- 
 tern, memoria or recordatio is understood. Others contend that 
 quod ad negotium, or in negotio, is understood to all. In regard 
 to the accusative, they say, that, as these verbs are neuter, ( Pe- 
 rizonius is inclined to let memini pass as active, in certain exprcs- 
 
206 
 
 felons,) this case must be governed by ad, quod ad, xara under- 
 stood. It has been doubted by some, whether the correspond- 
 ing English verbs, / forget, I remember, with many others de- 
 noting mental operations, as / hear, I see, I feel, 1 understand, be 
 active transitive verbs or not. This may be more a metaphysi- 
 cal than a grammatical question. That these verbs admit an ac- 
 cusative after them in Latin, English, and in other languages, is 
 well ascertained ; and, therefore, although in all of these ope- 
 rations the mind may not be active, but passive, and it may be 
 difficult to point out what passes from the agent to the object j 
 yet, in a grammatical point of view, there can be little impro- 
 priety in considering them as active transitive, and in asserting 
 that the accusative following them is governed by them. In 
 speaking of such English verbs, it is observed by Dr. Crombie, 
 (Etymol. and Synt. of the Eng. Lang. 2d Ed. p. 118,) that, if 
 the point in question be metaphysically considered, it would be 
 easy to demonstrate, that, though in sensation the mind be pas- 
 sive, in perception it is active. 
 
 ACTIVE VERBS GOVERNING ANOTHER CASE TOGETHER 
 WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 RULE XXX. Verbs of accusing, condemning, and ac- 
 quitting, with the accusative of the person govern also the 
 genitive of the crime : as, 
 
 Arguit mefurti) He accuses me of theft. 
 
 Meipsum inertia condemno., I condemn myself of lazi- 
 ness. 
 
 Ilium homicidii absolvunt. They acquit him of man- 
 slaughter. 
 
 Note 1 . These verb", govern the accusative, according to Rule 
 XXVIII, and are followed by a genitive of the crime or punish- 
 ment. The former has been named their Direct Regimen ; the 
 latter, their Indirect. 
 
 To the rule belong verbs of 
 
 Accusing ; accuso, ago, appello, arcesso, anquiro, arguo, coar- 
 guo, capto, increpo, increpito, urgeo, incuso, insimulo, interrogo, 
 postulo, alligo, astringo, defero, compello . as, Qui allerum incusat 
 probri, eum ipsum se inlueri oporiet Plant. Cum capitis anqui- 
 tissent Liv. Dolabellam repetundarum postulavit Suet. &c. 
 
 Acquitting; absolvo, libero, purgo, to which perhaps soluo may 
 be added : as, Judex absoluit eum injuriarum Auct. ad Herenn. 
 Liberavit ejus culpce regem Liv. Me omnium purgnvi Apul. 
 Hanc tetram immanemque belluam. . . . solvit subito tegum consul 
 -Cic. Cum J am u Us operum salutisHor. 
 
 Condemning ; damno, condemno, infamo, noto, to which may be 
 added, convinco, prehendo, deprehendo,judico, plector: as, Scelerls 
 condemnat generum suum Cic. Vatem scelcris damnare Ovid. 
 
207 
 
 Te convinco inhumanitatis~~Cic. Perduellionis sejiidicare C* Ful- 
 vio dixit Liv. To these may be added such constructions as 
 Quern ego capitis perdam Plant. Castigat se ipsum dementice 
 Lactant. Me capitis periclitatum memini Apul. 
 
 Note 2. The genitive of the crime may be put in the ablative 
 with de, chiefly after accuso, arguo, defero, postulo, appello, absol- 
 vo, damno, condemno, purgo : as, Accusare de negligentia Cic. 
 De eo crimine quo de arguatur Cic. Qui de perduellione anquire- 
 rent Liv. De proditione appellalus Liv. In is sometimes 
 found : as, In quo te accuso Cic. j and a or al after libero : as, 
 A scelere liberati sumus Cic. 
 
 Note 3. The crime or punishment is sometimes put in the ab- 
 lative without a preposition's being expressed, after absolvo, li- 
 bero, damno, condemno, &c. : as, Consulem regni suspicions absol- 
 verent Liv. Nemo sapientiam pauper tate damnavit Senec. Dam- 
 
 nalis tu votis Virg. also voti Nep. Liv. To the preceding 
 
 verbs may be added, accuso, alligo, anquiro, appello, arcesso, ar- 
 guo, arripio, astringo, compello, -as, insimulo, multo, noto, obligo, 
 obstringo, postulo, teneor. Crimen quo argui posset Nep. Hoc 
 crimine compellabatur Nep. Teneri pcend Cic. &c. 
 
 Note 4. Accuso, incuso, insimulo, sometimes take two accusa- 
 tives : as, Si id me non accums Plaut. Qua? me incusaveras 
 Ter. Sic me insimulare falsum facinus^ Plaut. One of these ac- 
 cusatives, which is generally id, illud, quod, or the like, is go- 
 verned by circa or quod ad understood. 
 
 Note 5. The nouns crimen and caput are either put in the ge- 
 nitive, or in the ablative generally without a preposition : as, Ho- 
 minem tantorum criminum postuldsset*Apul. An cornmotce cri- 
 mine mentis absolves kominem Hor. Capitis damnatus est Suet. 
 Nee ob earn rem capite damnarer Cic. Capite plectere or punire, 
 not capitis ; also Capite anquiri, damnari, plecti, without a pre- 
 position. Argui de crimine is attributed to Cicero, but such words 
 as crimen and scelus, being general, that is, not referring to any 
 specific crime, are used without a preposition. Multo is con- 
 strued with an ablative, the preposition being always omitted : 
 as, Multare pasna, pecunid, &c. l 
 
 Note 6. The genitive, strictly speaking, is not governed by 
 the verbs mentioned in this rule, but by some ablative understood, 
 such as poem, crimine, scelere, peccato, actione, multd f nomine, re, 
 
 1 Valla and others say that thee words, altero, neutro, utro, utroque, ambo- 
 bus (to which Linacer adds superlatives, and some other words, as nullo, aho, 
 omnibus) ought to be used in the ablative only : thus, Teneturne sacrilegii, an 
 furti, an utroque, vel ambobus, vel neutro ? Also Accusesne huncfurti, an sacri- 
 legii, an ince&ti, an omnibus, vel, an nullo, vel, an maxima ex us ; and not utri- 
 itsque, amborum, omnium, &c. The Eton Grammar has a similar observation, 
 borrowed, probably, from Linacer or Lily ; but, since neither is supported by 
 examples from the writings of the antients, they are entitled to little consider- 
 ation. 
 
208 
 
 causa, ergij : as, Accuso te (crimine) furti. And these, or other 
 ablatives, are governed by de or in, expressed or understood. 
 
 Note 7. The following verbs of accusing, c. are not construed 
 with the genitive, calumnior, carpo, corripio, criminor, culpo, cx- 
 cuso, mulcto, punio, reprehendo, sugillo, taxo, traduco, vitupero : as, 
 Potentiam alicujus invidiose criminari Cic. Also, Excuso tibi 
 tardilatem meam, Multo te exsilio, and not Excuso me tiii tardita- 
 tis, Multo le exsiiii. This construction is found even with some 
 of the verbs which have a genitive or ablative : as, Ejus avaritiam 
 
 perfidiamque accusarat Nep. Ago tecum furti, injuriarum, and 
 
 not Ago te furti, injuriarum, is a peculiar mode of expression. 
 
 Note 8. Where there is a variety of constructions, authority 
 is the only criterion. It may, however, be better to say Increpare 
 alicujus avaritiam, Nolare incuriam alicujus, Castigare suam demen- 
 ti am, than Increpare aliquem avaritice Suet. Notare aliquem in- 
 cur ice Gell. Castigare se dementice Lactant. Liber are aliquem 
 culpd, Purgare se apud aliquem, vel alicui de re aliqud, may be 
 better than Liberare aliquem culpce Liv. Purgare dicti factique 
 
 hostilis civitatem Liv. It is to be observed also that Urgeri 
 
 male administrates provincicB, Interrogari facti alicujus, Infamari 
 temeritatis, Plecti falsce insimuLutionis, Perdi capitis, Captare im- 
 pudicilicE; Qamnatus Longi laboris, although they may be found in 
 their respective authors, Tacitus, Seneca, Apuleius, Plautus, &c., 
 are by no means to be imitated. 
 
 VERBS OF ADMONISHING. 
 
 Note 9. Under this rule, (or Rule XXXII,) may be mentioned, 
 moneo, admoneo, commoneo, commonefacio, which with the accu- 
 sative of a person take the genitive of the thing : as, Grammati~ 
 cos officii sui commonemus Quinct. 
 
 Note 10. Instead of the genitive, they sometimes take an ab- 
 lative with de : as, De quovos admonuiCic. 
 
 Note 11. They have sometimes two accusatives: as, Sed eoi 
 hoc moneo Cic. Passively, the latter: as, Afulta in extis admone- 
 mur Cic. One of these is generally a pronoun, as hoc, id, quod, 
 &c. or some word referring to number or quantity, as unum, duo, 
 trio,, multa, nihil, nonnihil. Ovid, however, writes, At virgo scit se 
 non falsa montri Met. x. 427. The accusative of the thing 
 is governed by some preposition urderstood, as, quod ad, or 
 the like. To verbs having this construction some add hortor and 
 cohortor : as, Quod tejamdudum hortor Cic. Pauca pro temp ore 
 milites hortalus Sail. But these two are much more frequently 
 construed with ad : as, Hortor te ad virtutem, Cohortor ad pacem. 
 
 Note 12. The genitive of the thing after verbs of advising is 
 supposed to be governed by causd, or in re, or negotio. 
 
 Note 13. These verbs are construed with the infinitive, or the 
 
209 
 
 subjunctive with ut or ne : as, Pietas erga parentes officium con- 
 servare monet Cic. Sed te illud moneo, ut te ante compares, quo- 
 tidieque meditere, resistendum esse iracundice Cic. Immortalia ne 
 speres, monet annus Hor. 
 
 RULE XXXI. Verbs of comparing, giving, declaring, 
 and taking away, govern the dative with the accusative : as, 
 Comparo Virgilium Homero, I compare Virgil to Homer. 
 Suum cuique tribuito. Give every man his own. 
 
 Narras fabulam surdo^ You tell a story to a deaf 
 
 man. 
 Eripuit me morti, He rescued me from death. 
 
 Note 1. That is, verbs signifying comparison, acquisition, or 
 giving, loss, or taking away, refusal, application, information, 
 and the like, in addition to their direct regimen of the accusa- 
 tive, govern also the dative ; thus verbs of 
 
 Comparing ; comparo, compono, confero, cequo, cequipa.ro ; also 
 verbs of Preferring or Postponing; antepono, antej'ero, prcepono, 
 prcefero-j postpono,posthabeo,postfero,&c.: as, Parvis componere 
 magna Virg. Posthabui tamen illorum mea seria ludo Virg. 
 
 Giving ; do, tribuo, largior, pratbeo, minislro, suggero, suppedi' 
 to ; also verbs of Restoring ; as, reddo, restituo, retribuo, rependo, 
 remetior ; of Acquiring ; qucero, acquiro, paro, pario ; of Promis- 
 ing ; promitto, polliceor, recipio, spondeo ; also debeo, solvo, assero, 
 vindico, mitto, relinquo, and innumerable others ; thus, Amorique 
 nostro plusculum etiam, quam concedet veritas, largiare Cic. Quce 
 tibi promitto Cic. &c. 
 
 Declaring; narro, dico, memoro, loquor, nuncio, refero, declaro, 
 aperio, expono, explico, significo, indico, monstro, ostendo, &c. ; of 
 Denying ; nego, inficior ; of Confessing ; fateor, confiteor, &c. : 
 as, Postquam diem operi dixerat Cic. Neget quis carmina Gallo 
 Virg. 
 
 Taking away ; aufero, adimo, eripio, eximo, demo, surripio, de- 
 traho, excutio, extorqueo, &c. : as, Mea miki ademerunt Cic. , 
 
 To these may be added a great number of active verbs com- 
 pounded with ad, in, ob, prce, sub ; as addo, adfero, adjicio, ad- 
 jungo, infigo, injungo, inscribo, insero, irrogo, oppono, offero, of- 
 fundo, objicio, prcecludo, prceffcio, prceparo, prceseribo, subdo, sub" 
 jugo, submitto, suppono. In short, most active verbs may govern 
 the dative with the accusative, when together with the thing done, 
 is also expressed the object to or for which it is done : as, Facto 
 tibi injuriam. Doce mihi filium. Miscere alicui mulsum Cic. 
 
 Note 2. The accusative is sometimes suppressed : as, Ignoscere 
 ' alteri j i. e. culpam or delictum. Detrahere alicui -, i. e. laudcm. 
 Nubere alicui ; i. e. perhaps, se or vultum. 
 
 Note 3. Comparo, compono, and confero, are often found with 
 cum and an ablative : as, Ut hominem cum homine comparetis 
 
 P 
 
210 
 
 Cic. Dicta cumfactis lomponere Sail. Conferte hanc pacem cum 
 iilo bello Cic. We also find Comparare res inter se Cic. Ne 
 comparandus hie quidem ad ilium est Ter. This last construc- 
 tion is said to be used, when there is 720 comparison between the 
 objects, when the difference between them is very great ; in any 
 other case, illi or cum illo. 
 
 frote 4. Verbs of Taking away, instead of the dative, have often 
 the ablative, with a, ab, de, e, ex : as, Auferre ab aliquo triginta 
 minas Ter. Eripite nos ex miseriis Cic. De magnis divitiis si 
 quid demas Plaut. The preposition is sometimes suppressed : 
 as, Sudque eripere cede Deam Ovid. Vagindque eripit ensem 
 Virg. The following verbs have commonly an ablative, and ge- 
 nerally with the preposition expressed ; abduco, deduco, decutio, 
 deripioy detraho, eximo, extraho ,- also segrego, sejuugo, sepono, se- 
 moveo, removeo, submoveo. 
 
 "Note 5. Many verbs vary their construction : as, Afflare alicui 
 venenum Auct. ad Herenn. aliquem veneno Virg. Ovid. As- 
 pergere lalem alicui Cic. aliquem lab e Cic. Donare alicui rem 
 Hor. aliquem re Cic. Induere sibi vestem Cic. se veste Cic. 
 Intercludere alicui commeatum Plaut. aliquem commeatu Caes. 
 Prohibere alicui rem Plaut. aliquem re Cic. Committere se 
 alicui Cic. in Jidem alicujus ler. aliquem cum aliquo Tac. 
 omnes inter se Suet. Imponere onus alicui Cic. in aliquem 
 Plaut. Accingere se operi, and ad opus Virg. Liv. Admovere tur- 
 res muro Liv. aliquid ad corpus Cic. Adscribere aliquem civi- 
 tati, in dvitatem, et civitate Cic. Assumere aliquid sibi Cic. 
 
 aliquem in societatem Liv. Mittere^ scribere, epistolam alicui, 
 
 or ad aliquem. Imprimere aliquid animo, in animum, in animo. In- 
 cider e teri, in ccs, in cere. Intendere telum alicui, et in aliquem. 
 Rescribcre literis and ad lileraswith innumerable others. 
 
 RULE XXXII. Verbs of asking and teaching admit two 
 accusatives, the first of a person, and the second of a thing: 
 as, 
 
 Posce Deum veniam, Beg pardon of God. 
 
 Docnit me grammaticam, He taught me grammar. 
 
 Note 1. To this rule are generally referred, 
 Celo : as ; Celo te hanc rem Ter. 
 
 Verbs of Asking or Entreating ; as rogo, interrogo, oro, exoro, 
 olsecro, precor, percontor, posco, reposco, Jlagilo : thus, Rogo 
 nummos Mart. Te hoc obsecratCic. Horace construes laces 
 in this sense, with two accusatives : as, Nikil wtora deos lacessc 
 Car. II. 18. 11. 
 
 Verbs of Teaching ; as, doceo, edoceo, dedoceo, erudio : thus, 
 Te liter as doceam Cic. Te leges prceceptaque erudiit Stat. Dai 
 nosasque (eum) erud.it artes Ovid. This last is a poetical con- 
 struction. 
 
 To these have been commonly added verbs of Arraying ; 
 
211 
 
 vestio, induo, cingo, accingo -, but, although the poets may write 
 Induilur vestem, Quidlilet indutus, Cingiturferrum, and the like, 
 it is not to be thence inferred that Induii se vestem, Cingit sefer- 
 rum are correct. Such verbs have generally the ablative of the 
 thing without a preposition. Exuo and induo have frequently the 
 accusative of a thing and the dative of a person. 
 
 Note 2. The construction of the preceding verbs is often va- 
 ried : as, Id Alcibiadi celari non potuit Nep. Bassus noster me 
 de hoc libro celavit Cic. 
 
 Note 3. Verbs of Asking often change the accusative of the 
 person into the ablative with a, ab, or als : as, Non delelam abs 
 te has literas poscere Cic. Veniam oremus ab ipso Virg. 
 Peto, exigo, qucero, scitor, sciscitor are always followed by a pre- 
 position : as, A te peto Cic. Gradere et scitabere ab ipso Ovid. 
 Percontor, qucero, scitor, sciscitor are generally construed with ex : 
 as, Epicuri ex Velleio sciscitabar sententiam Cic. Also, Qucero de 
 te, for als or ex te Liv. Peto als te, never ex te. 
 
 Note 4. Verbs of Teaching frequently change the accusative 
 of the thing into the ablative with de : as, De itinere hostium se- 
 natum edocet Sail. This is the case, chiefly when they denote 
 to warn, or to give information of. We also find Doctus ad legem 
 Cic. Erudire ad modestiam Cic. Erudire alicjuem in jure civili 
 Cic. Doctus, eruditus, literis Greeds Cic. ; but, scarcely, if 
 ever, Doceo te de grammaticd. 
 
 Note 5. Instruo, formo, instituo, informo aliquem artibus, are 
 generally used without a preposition. We also find In hoc sit in- 
 structus Quinct. and Instruere ignorantiam alicujus Plin. Insti- 
 tuere aliquem ad lectionem Quinct. ad turpitudines Cic. artem 
 aliquam Cic. Also, Formare ad studium Virg. meniem studiis 
 Hor. studia alicujus Quinct. Imbuo aliquem artibus vel 
 prceceptis ; seldom in or ab artibus. 
 
 Note 6. Other verbs are sometimes found with two accusatives : 
 as, Argentum, quod hales, condonamus te Ter. Scin* quid ego te 
 volelam Ter. Many verbs are sometimes used in this way, such 
 as cogo, circumduco, defraudo, eludo, emungo, interverto,juvo, ad- 
 juvo, adjuto, oljurgo, remitto ; and it is observed, that the accusa- 
 tive of the thing is generally some pronoun, or word of number 
 or quantity ; thus, Quid non mortalia pectora cogis ? Virg. Id, 
 amalo, adjuta me ler. Multa prius de salute sud Pomtinum ol- 
 leto/iw Sail. 
 
 Note 7. Many verbs may be found with two accusatives refer- 
 ring to the same object : as, Praesla. te vlrum Cic. Africam 
 Grceci Libyam appellavere Plin. Petit hanc Saturnia munus- 
 Ovid. Many such constructions may be referred to apposition, 
 or to an ellipsis of ewe. 
 
 Note S. The accusative of the thing, in this Rule, is not, strictly 
 speaking, governed by the verb, but by ad, quod ad, secundum, 
 
 P 2 
 
212 
 
 circa, ob, understood : thus in Rogare patrem veniam, veniam may 
 be governed by ad, circa, or propter. Also, Objurgabat hcec me 
 pater ; \. e. ob hcec. In such expressions as Si quid me. voles, 
 Qute te aliquidjuleant, we may suppose either a similar ellipsis, 
 or that oi'facere. Thus also, Doceo te (quod ad) literas, or, per- 
 haps, scire literas. In such expressions as Trajicit Jluvium exer- 
 citum, it is evident that the one accusative is governed by trans 
 in composition. The third accusative in Objurgare hcec me nodes 
 et dies Plaut. is evidently governed by per understood. 
 
 RULE XXXIII. The passives of such active verbs as 
 govern two cases, do still retain the last of them : as, 
 Accusor furti, I am accused of theft. 
 
 Virgilius comparatur Homero, Virgil is compared to 
 
 Homer. 
 Doceor grammaticam, I am taught grammar. 
 
 Note 1. That is, 
 
 The passives of verbs of Accusing, Condemning, and Acquit- 
 ting, retain the genitive or ablative : as, Damnatus est ambitus 
 Cic. Ausoluti sunt majestatis Cic. Arguimur crimine pigritice 
 Mart. The passives of verbs of Admonishing likewise retain 
 the genitive, sometimes the accusative : as, Commonefiat sceleris 
 Cic. Multa in extis monemur Cic. 
 
 The passives of verbs of Comparing, Giving, Declaring, and 
 Taking away, retain the dative : as, Parva magnis conferuntur 
 Cic. Res nunciatur hostibus Cses. Eripitur nobis puella Pro- 
 pert. 
 
 Celor, and the passives of verbs of Asking and Teaching, re- 
 tain the accusative of the thing : as, Nosne hoc celaios tarn diu ? 
 Ter. Celor, the dative too : as, Id Alcibiadi celari non potuit Nep. 
 Is rogatus est senientiam Liv. Segetes alimentaque debita dives 
 poscelatur humus Ovid. Motus doceri gaudet lonicos matura 
 virgoHor. All these accusatives are governed byquodad (xar 
 understood. 
 
 Verbs passive of Clothing, such as induor, amicior, cingor, ac- 
 cingor j also exuor, discingor, and their participles, although their 
 actives do not govern two accusatives, have often, according to 
 the poets, an accusative of the thing put on, but with others an 
 ablative : as, Induitur faciem cultumque Diance Ovid. Non canas 
 vestita nives Claudian. Sometimes also an accusative of the 
 
 thing covered : as, Pinuque caput prcecinctus acutd Ovid. 
 
 Veste Aralicd induitur Curt. Cingitur gladio Liv. Exutus 
 omnibus fortunis Tac. Vrlor, tegor, calceor, coronor, spolior, are 
 generally construed with the ablative. In all these the accusative 
 is governed by ad, quod ad, or per, understood ; the ablative, by 
 cum. In the same manner are to be explained, Magnam partem 
 in his occupati sunt. Cic. Omnia Mercurio similis vocemque, &c. 
 Virg. Expleri mcntem n^tti/- Virg. Nodoque sinus collecta 
 
213 
 
 Jluentes Virg. ; with many other similar instances found among 
 the poets chiefly ! . 
 
 Note 2. It deserves observation, that, in conformity with this 
 rule, whatever is the accusative after the active verb, must be the 
 nominative to it in the passive voice; thus, Tibi librum do; Tibi 
 liber datur. Narras jabulam surdo ; Surdo falula narratur, Ca- 
 pitis eum condemndrunt ; Capitis itle est condemnatus. Pateram 
 vino implevit ; Vino patera est implela. And where there are two 
 accusatives, that of the person becomes the nominative : thus, 
 Pueros grammaticam docebat ; Pueri docebantur grammaticam. 
 
 On the subject of this rule, I am indebted to the critical dis- 
 cernment of the friend to whom this little work is dedicated, for 
 the following observations. " The rule of lluddiman (he ob- 
 serves) is extremely vague. It contains no precise information ; 
 nor have I seen any Grammar, in which the principle seems rightly 
 understood, or clearly elucidated. In respect, indeed, to the 
 phraseologies, which maybe comprehended under this, or a more 
 correct rule, there are few modern Latin writers who are not 
 chargeable with repeated violations of that usage, which Cicero, 
 Caesar, and Livy uniformly adopt. Thus we read Ut equidem per- 
 suasus sim Xenoph. Mem. Leunclav. p. 729. Me persuaso 
 Eurip. Phceniss. King, p. 464. Persuasus vales mendacia locutus 
 sit Oed. Tyr. Johnson, p. 534. Hoc mirum videtur, persuaderi 
 cjuosdam potuisse Xenoph. Mem. c. 11, 1, Simpson 8 . These and 
 similar incorrect expressions might have been avoided, had the 
 writers attended to this simple rule, That whatever is put in the 
 accusative case after the verb, must be the nominative to it in 
 the passive voice, while the other case is retained under the go- 
 vernment of the verb, and cannot become its nominative, Thus, 
 * I persuade you to this or of this,' Persuadeo hoc tibi. Here, the 
 person persuaded is expressed in the dative case, and cannot, 
 therefore, be the nominative to the passive verb. We must, there- 
 fore, say Hoc till persuadetur, * You are persuaded of this ;' not 
 Tu persuaderis. Thus also Caesar. His persuaderi, ut diutius mo- 
 rarentur, non poterat. * He trusted me with this affair,' or l He 
 believed me in this,' Hoc mihi credidit. Passively, Hoc mihi ere- 
 ditum est. ' I told you this,' Hoc tibi dixi. * You were told this,' 
 Hoc tibi dictum est 3 , not Tu dictus es. Is then the phraseology 
 
 1 This rule is applicable also to the passives of verbs of Valuing, which re- 
 tain the genitives magni, parvi, nihili, &c. To the passives of verbs of Filling, 
 Loading, Binding, Depriving, &c. which retain the ablative. All these are 
 to be noticed hereafter. 
 
 * To the examples here adduced may be added, Si persuasus auditor fuerit 
 Auct. ad Herenn. ], 6. NUiil erat difficile persuader? pcrsuasis mori Jus- 
 tin. II, 11. Jamdudum persuasus erit Ovid. Art. Ill- 679. 
 
 3 I may be permitted to observe, in addition to the remarks with which I 
 have been favoured by this ingenious critic, that it is the more necessary to at- 
 tend to this rule, and to these distinctions, as the idioms of the two languages 
 do not always concur. Thus, Hoc tibi dictum est means not only " This was told 
 to you," but " You were told this." Liber mihi a patre promissus est means 
 
Tu dictus cs inadmissible ? Certainly not : but, when this expres- 
 sion is employed, tu denotes the subject of discourse, or the per- 
 son of whom, not the person to whom, information is given. Thus, 
 Ille dicitur esse vir sapiens. Here, ille is the subject spoken of, 
 not the person to whom any thing is told. Thus also Credo tibi, 
 ' I believe you,' that is, I give credit to what you say, in which 
 sense we must say in the passive voice, Tibi creditur, and not Tu 
 credcris ; for the latter of these two expressions would imply not 
 that credit is given to the words f the person, but that he is the 
 object or the subject of belief. In short, it is to be remembered that 
 nothing but that, which is in the accusative after the active verb, 
 whether denoting a person or a thing, can be the nominative to 
 the verb in the passive voice. Hence it is, that, if a verb does not 
 govern the accusative in the active voice, it can have no passive, 
 unless impersonally ; thus we say Resisto tibi, and cannot, there- 
 fore, say Tu resisteris, but Tibi resistitur. It is to be observed, 
 
 however, that the poets have frequently transgressed this rule. 
 Thus Virgil, speaking of Cassandra, says Credita Teucris y where 
 Cassandra denoting the person believed, or to whom credit is 
 given, and which, after the active verb, would be put in the da- 
 tive case, is made the nominative to the verb in the passive voice. 
 If we consult, however, the purest models of Latin prose, Cicero 
 and Caesar, or Livy and Sallust, we shall never find this phrase- 
 ology. Nor is the rule here given, and to which the practice of 
 the best prose writers is strictly conformable, the mere result of 
 arbitrary usage. It contributes to perspicuity. If Ego credor 
 be employed to signify, not only that I, as a person speaking, am 
 believed, but also, as a person spoken of, obscurity or ambiguity 
 
 must frequently follow. 1 have observed also, that no verb can 
 
 be regularly used in the passive voice, unless it govern the ac- 
 cusative in the active voice. The practice of the purest Classics 
 justifies this observation. The poets are less scrupulous. Thus, 
 Horace says Bactra regnata Cyro, where the verb regno, which 
 does not govern the accusative case in the active voice, admits a 
 nominative as a regular passive verb. Thus also Gentes regnan- 
 lur Tac. The best prose writers never employ this phraseology." 
 
 RULE XXXIV. The price of a thing is put in the ab- 
 lative, with any verb : as, 
 
 Em i librum duobus assibus^ I bought a book for two 
 
 shillings. 
 Vendidit hie auro patriam, This man solcj his country 
 
 for gold. 
 Demosthenes docuit talento, Demosthenes taught for a 
 
 talent. 
 
 both, " A book was promised (to) me by my father," and " I was promised a 
 book." Is primum rogalus est sentcntiam, " He was first asked for his opi- 
 nion," and " An opinion was first asked of him," in which last the accusative 
 of the person becomes, in Latin, the nominative in the passive voice. 
 
Note 1. That is, not only verbs which plainly denote Buying 
 or Selling, but those likewise which refer thereto, are followed 
 by an ablative : as, Viginti talentis unam orationem Isocrates ven- 
 didit Plin. Non emam vitiosd mice Plaut. Piscines cedijican- 
 tur magno Varro. Multo sanguine et vtdneribus ea Pcenis victo- 
 ria stetit Liv. 
 
 Note 2. The verb valeo, when it refers to Price, has generally 
 the ablative ; as Ita ut scrupulum valeret sestertiis vicenis Plin. 
 It is seldom found with an accusative ; Denarii dicti f quod denos 
 ceris valebant ; quinarii quod quinos Varro. 
 
 Note 3. Magno, permagno, parvo, paululo, minimo, plurimo, 
 are often found without their substantive : as, Frumentum suum 
 quam plurimo venditurus Cic. To these are added plure, vili, 
 nimio : as, Plure venit Cic. To all these pretio, are, or the like, 
 is understood. It is sometimes expressed: as, Vendere aliquid 
 parvo pretio Cic. ' 
 
 Note 4. The ablative is not, strictly speaking, governed by the 
 verb, but by pro understood : as, Dum pro argenteis decemaureus 
 units valeret Liv. Emere ad viginti minas, Ad earn summam erne- 
 re, Ad earn summam ojferre, are mentioned by Johnson, who at- 
 tributes the first two to Cicero. 
 
 RULE XXXV. These genitives, tanti, quanti, pluris, 
 minoris, are excepted : as, 
 
 Qitanti constitit ? How much cost it ? 
 
 Asse ct pluris, A shilling and more. 
 
 Note 1. This is merely an exception to the preceding rule. 
 To the above-mentioned genitives may be added their compounds 
 quanticunque, quantiquanti, tantidem, and also majoris : as, Non 
 concupisces ad libertatem quanticunque pervenire Senec. Multo 
 majoris atapce mecum veneunt Pha?dr. 
 
 Note 2. If the substantive be expressed, these words must be 
 put in the ablative: as, Authepsa ilia quam tanto pretio mercatus 
 est Cic. Pretio minore redimendi captivos copia Liv. This re- 
 mark does not refer to tantidem, which has no ablative. There 
 
 is a distinction between Emi equum magno or parvo pretio and 
 Emi equum magni or parvi pretii, the former denoting the price 
 of the horse, the latter his intrinsic or real worth. 
 
 1 To these ablatives some grammarians add multo, pauco, dimidio, duplo, 
 paulo, maximo, and immenso ; but they are without authorities. In the fol- 
 lowing instances, Multo minoris vendidit fjudm tu Cic. and AmbtdaLiuncida 
 props dimidio minoris conslabit isto loco Cic., multo and dimidio are the ab- 
 latives of detect, rather than of price. Curo cmpta, attributed to Quiuctilian, 
 is a doubtful reading, care being most probably the word intended. But 
 Diomedes does not hesitate to consider cnro andvtft as adverbs of valuing. 
 Horace writes I.uscinias solid impetiso prandcrc coemptas-~" Sat< ii. 3. 1'45. arc 
 being understood. 
 
216 
 
 Note 3. To the genitives magni, pluris, tanti, quanti, &c. eeris 
 pretio or pondere, or, inversely, pretii or ponderis cere, is said to be 
 understood. 
 
 RULE XXXVI. Verbs of Valuing, besides the accusa- 
 tive which they govern, admit such genitives as these 
 
 magni) parvi, nihili : as, 
 
 JEstimo te magni, I value you much. 
 
 Note 1. That is, verbs of Valuing admit after them, besides 
 tanti, quanti, pluris, minoris, the following also, magni, parvi, maxi- 
 mi, minimi, pluriwi, with assis, nihili, nauci, Jlocci, pili, teruncii, 
 hujus, pensi. 
 
 Note 2. The verbs of Valuing are cestimo, existimo, duco, facto, 
 hdbeo, pendo, puto, taxo, to which may be added sum and jio, 
 taken for astimor, which are followed by the genitive of value, 
 but which do not take the accusative : as, Magni cestimabat pecu- 
 niam Cic. Quis Carthaginiensium pluris fuit Annibale consilio 
 Cic. Ut quanti quisque se ipsefaciat, tanti Jiat ab amicis Cic. 
 It is to be observed, that pili, teruncii, and hujus are con- 
 strued wiihfacio only ; nauci, with facio and habeo ; assis, with 
 facio and cestimo ; nihili, with facio and pendo; Jlocci, with facio, 
 pendo, and existimo. Pensi is generally preceded by non, neque, 
 or nihil : as, Neque id quibus modis assequeretur , quidquam pensi 
 habebat Sail. Nee pensi duxerat Val. Max. 
 
 Note 3. To this rule may be referred the phrases sEqiii bonique 
 Jacio, or JEqui boni Jacio, and ' Boni consulo: as, Isthuc cequi bo- 
 nique facio Ter. Hoc munus, rogo, boni considas Senec. 
 
 Note 4. JEstimo sometimes takes these ablatives, maguo, per- 
 magno, parvo, nihilo, nonnihilo : as, Data magno cestimas, accepta 
 parvo Senec. Quia sit nonnihilo (Bstimandum Cic. 
 
 Note 6. The substantive understood to the adjectives magni , 
 parvi, &c. is pretii, ceris, ponderis, momenti, or the Jike ; and the 
 construction may be thus supplied : JEstimo te magni, i. e. esse 
 hominem ma^ni pretii, or pro nomine magni pretii. JEstimat pe- 
 cuniamparvi, i. e. esse rem parvi momenti, or pro re parvi momenti. 
 In like manner, Isthuc cequi bonique facio, i. e. facio isthuc rem 
 ccqui bonique hominis, or animi, or negotii. Consulo boni, i. e. 
 interpreter esse boni animi or viri munus ovfactum And nearly 
 in a similar way, QUCE ille universa naturali quodam bono fecit lu- 
 
 cri Nep. i. e. fecit rem lucri. Pro nihilo habeo, puto, duco, 
 
 are common phrases : as, Istam adoptionem pro nihilo esse haben- 
 dam Cic. Cicero uses Qua: visa sunt pro nihilo ; but here there 
 may be some ellipsis, of haberi perhaps. 
 
 RULE XXXVII. Verbs of Plenty and Scarceness for the 
 most part govern the ablative : as, 
 
 Abundat divitiis, He abounds in riches. 
 Caret omni culpa^ He has no fault. 
 
217 
 
 Note 1 . To this rule belong verbs of 
 
 Plenty : as abundo, exubero, redundo, scateo, qffluo, circumftuo, 
 diffluo, superfluo : as, Amore abundas Antipho!ei'. 
 
 Want or Scarcity : as, careo, egeo, indigeo, vaco (to want), with 
 deficior and destituor : thus, Carere delet omni vitio Cic. Rations 
 deficitur Cic. 
 
 Note 2. Egeo and indigeo frequently take the genitive : as, Ut 
 medicines egeamus Cic. Non tarn artis indigent, quam laboris 
 Cic. Also, among the more antient writers, scateo, and careo : 
 as, Terra scatet Jerarum Lucret. Tui carendum erat Ter. 
 Lucilius has Abundemus rerum, but the genitive is more frequent 
 after abundant. Sometimes careo and egeo take the accusative: as, 
 Id careo Plaut. Multa egeo Gell. 
 
 Note 3. The ablative is not, strictly speaking, governed by the 
 verb, but by some preposition understood, as a, ab, de, ex, or zn. 
 After some verbs it is frequently expressed : as, Hcec a custodibus 
 classium loca maxime vacabant Caes. Deficior prudens artis ab 
 arte mea Ovid. And when any of these verbs are followed by 
 the genitive, some ablative, such as re, negotio, causa, prcesentui, 
 ope, copia, or the like, with a preposition, is understood : thus, 
 Careo tui> i. e. ope or prcBsentifi. 
 To this rule may be referred 
 
 Verbs of Filling, Loading, Binding, Depriving, Clothing, and 
 some others, which, with the accusative, have also an ablative 
 case : thus verbs of 
 
 Filling ; as, impleo, cornpleo, expleo, repleo t saturo, obsaturo, sa- 
 tio, refercio, ingurgito, dito, and the like : thus, Implevit mero pale- 
 ram Virg. 
 
 Loading ; as onero, cumulo, premo, opprimo, obruo : Unloading : 
 as levo, exonero; thus, Naves onerant auro Virg. Tefasce levabo l 
 Virg. 
 
 Binding ; as astringo, alligo, devincio, impedio, irretiu, illaqueo, 
 &c. Loosing ; as solvo, exsolvo, Libero, laxo, expedio : thus, Ser- 
 vitutem astringam testimonio sempiterno Cic. Solvit se Teucria 
 Iwtu Virg. 
 
 Depriving; as privo, nudo, orbo, spolio t fraudo, emungo : thus, 
 Nudavit ab ea parte aciem equestri auxilioLiv. Add also, vacuo, 
 evacuo, exhaurio, exinanio, depleo. 
 
 Clothing; as vestio, amicio, induo, cingo, tego, ve/o, corowo, calceo; 
 and their contraries, exuo, discingo: thus, Sepulchrum vepribus 
 
 1 The inexperienced learner should be careful to distinguish between such 
 phrases as Lcvflbo te fasce, in which levo denotes to ease or disburden, and the 
 ablative belongs to this rule ; and such as Saepe sitis opibus inopiam eorum pub- 
 licam levavit Nep. Auxilioque levare viros Virg. Levaverant animos reli- 
 gione Liv. in which levo signifies to help or relieve, and the ablatives do not 
 belong to this rule, but are to be referred to those of cause, manner, and in- 
 strument. In numberless instances, however, such is the nature of the verb 
 or the phrase, that it is not easy to distinguish the ablative of the one rule, 
 from that of the other. 
 
218 
 
 vestire Cic. Teque his exue monstris Ovid.- To these may 
 be added many others, such as muto, dono, munero, remunero, com- 
 munico, pasco, beo, impertior, dignor, qfficio, prosequor, assequor, 
 consequor, insequor, spargo, incesso, insector, oblecto: with verbs of 
 Mixing, as misceo, permisceo, tempera ; such verbs as orno, honoro, 
 honesto, decoro, venusto, coto, excolo, dehonesio, dedecoro, fcedo, in- 
 quino, polluo: verbs of Teaching ; asformo, informo, doceo, erudio, 
 instruo, imbuo : verbs denoting Excess,, as antecedo, antecello, ex- 
 cello, supero, &c. : verbs of Bounding, Measuring, and Recom- 
 pensing; Sisjinio, deJiniOj termino, metior, dimetior, penso, compenso 
 with numberless other verbs which, without an accusative, ad- 
 mit an ablative of the cause, manner, or instrument, as possum, 
 polleo, valeo, vivo, &c. 
 
 Note 1. Impleo, compleo, and expleo sometimes take the genitive: 
 as, Ne ita omnia Tribuni potestatis suce implerent Liv. Erroris 
 illos et dementias complebo Plaut. Animum explesse juvabit ul- 
 tricis flammce Virg. And, among the more antient writers, aJso 
 saturo and obsaturo : as, Hce res vittz me saturant Plaut. Istius 
 olsaturalere Ter. 
 
 Note 2. The verb induo is variously construed : as, Ex ejus spo- 
 llis sibi et torquem et cognomen induitCic. Pomis se fertilis ar- 
 bos induerat Virg. 
 
 Note ?). Verbs of Liberating are often followed by a or ex : as, 
 Arcem ab incendio liberavi Cic. Solvere belluam ex catenis 
 Auct. ad Herenn. Verbs of Clothing are sometimes followed by 
 a or db, among the poets : as, Gelicis si cingar ab armis Ovid. 
 
 Note 4?. The preposition cum is sometimes expressed after pro- 
 sequor: as, Decedentem cum favor e ac laudibus prosecuti sunt 
 Liv. 
 
 Note 5. The ablative after mltto is the thing taken in exchange: 
 as, Muto librum pecunia j but, by the figure Hypallage, it may be 
 Muto pecuniam libro*. 
 
 Note 6. Many verbs vary their construction : as, Universosfru- 
 mento donavit Nep. and Prcedam militibus donat Cses. Asper- 
 gere sale carnes, or Aspergere salem carnibusPlm. Impertire ali- 
 fjuem salute Ter., or alicui salutem Cic. Communicare rem all- 
 quam cum aliquo; seldom, aliquem re aliqua; and never rem ali- 
 quam alicui. Cum altero rem communicavit Cic. Communicalo 
 te semper mensa med Plaut. Abdicare magistratum Sail. Se ma- 
 gistralu Cic. 
 
 Note 7. The accusative is governed by Rule XXVIII ; the ab- 
 lative by some preposition, or it may be frequently referred to 
 that of cause, manner, or instrument, which also is governed by 
 some preposition. 
 
 1 The preposition is sometimes expressed after muto : as, Mutare bcllum pm 
 yacc Sail. Cum pcdibusyuc maims, cunilongis brachia tnutat cnmbusOrid. 
 
219 
 
 RULE XXXVIII. Utor, abutor, fruor, Jungorj potior, 
 vescor, govern the ablative : as, 
 
 Utitur fraude, He uses deceit. 
 Abutitur libris, He abuses books. 
 
 Note 1. That is, the above-mentioned verbs, to which may be 
 added nitor, innilor, epulor, nascor, creor, glorior, Icetor, defector, 
 gaudeo, vivo, victito,Jido, confido, exulto, sto 1 , consto, eonsisto, cedo, 
 supersedeo, laboro, are followed by an ablative: as, Utere sorte tud 
 Virg. Pace frui Cic. Functus est munere Cic. Filio niti- 
 tur Cic. Glande v escuntur Cic. Sunt, qui piscibus, atcjueovis 
 avium vivere existimantur Caes. Gaudet patientia duris Lucan. 
 Fortes creantur fortibus Hor. &c. To these may be added the 
 compounds, deutor, once used in Cornelius Nepos for abutor, and 
 perfruor, defungor, perfungor. Fido, confido, innitor, and cedo, have 
 been noticed under Rule XXVII. 
 
 Note 2. Under this, or the preceding rule, are usually enume- 
 rated, assuesco, ampLector, comprehendo, conflictor, periclitor, pas- 
 cor 2 , which are found with an ablative of a thing: as, Atsuescere 
 latore Cic. Complecti benevolentid Cic. Such ablatives may 
 be referred to those of cause, &c. Pascor, deponent, often takes 
 the accusative: as, Pascuntur silvas Virg. 
 
 Note 3. Potior yfungor , vescor, epulor, sometimes take the accu- 
 sative: as, Potiri summam imperil Ne A x Homlnum officia fungi 
 Tac. Qui regnum adeptus ccepit vesci singular Phaedr. Pul- 
 los epularl Plin. Also, among the more antient writers, utor, 
 alutor) fruor : as, Ccetera quceque volumus uti Plaut. Cperam 
 abutitur Ter. Ingenium frui Ter. 
 
 Note 4. Potior frequently admits the genitive: as, Potiri regni 
 Cic. urlis Sail, hostium Sail. Potiri rerum, and not res, nor 
 rebus, is always used in the sense of to rule or govern : as, Dum 
 civitas Atheniensium rerum potita est Cic. 
 
 Note 5. With some of the verbs a preposition is frequently ex- 
 pressed ; as consto, laboro, nitor, glorior : thus, Cum constenms ex 
 anirno tt corpore Cic. Laborare ex pedikus, ex renibus Cic. 
 Cujus in vita nitebatur salus civitatis Cic. In virtute gloriamur 
 Cic. 
 
 1 Some, led away by the English idiom, according to which we say " To 
 stand to an agreement," have supposed that it is the dative which follows sto ; 
 hut this is a mistake, as may he seen in the following examples ; TJterqnc cen- 
 sor censor is opinione standwn non putavitCic. Etsi priori fcedere starelur- 
 LiV. Hence, also, Stare decrcto, promissis, conventis, conditionibus, which are 
 not datives, and, in Ovid, Stemus, ait, pacto. Maneo seems to be sometimes 
 construed in a similar way ; as, Tu modo promissis maneas Virg. At tu dic- 
 tis, Albane, maneres Virg. But Cicero expresses the preposition : as, Ma~ 
 ncre in conditione atque pacto ; and, in like manner, Postquam in eo quod con- 
 vcnerat, non mancbalur Mela. 
 
 - Depasco and depctscor have the accusative only : as, Luxuricm scgetum 
 tcncru. dcpascit in Ac/'fro Virg. Miseros morsu dcpascitur art its Virg. 
 
220 
 
 Note 6. Ovid has once construed the active creo with an ablative, 
 without expressing the preposition -, but, in general, among prose 
 writers, at least, creo, creor, nascor, and other verbs of descent, as 
 orior, gigno, genero, procreo, are followed by a preposition ex- 
 pressed: as, Principium exstinctum nee ipsum ab alio renascetur, 
 nee a se aliud crealit Cic. Generari et nasci a principibus fortui- 
 tum est Tac. 
 
 Note 7. The ablative after the others is likewise governed by a 
 preposition. After ulor, fruor, vescor, epulor, victito, nascor t creor, 
 de or ex is understood ; after potior, a or ab j with 5/0, periclitor, 
 in, &c. The genitive is governed by such words as re, negotio, 
 imperio, or the like, understood. 
 
 OF IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 RULE XXXIX. An impersonal verb governs the dative: 
 as, 
 
 Expedit reipublicce, It is profitable for tbe state. 
 Licet nemini peccare, No man is allowed to sin. 
 
 Note 1. Thus also, Non cuivis homini contingit adire Corinthum 
 Hor. Liceat mihi vera referre Ovid. 
 
 Note 2. Along with the dative is generally joined an infinitive 
 mood, or part of a sentence, which is supposed to supply the 
 place of a nominative to the verb: as, Peccare licet nemini Cic. 
 Omnibus bonis expedit salvam esse rempublicam Cic. In the 
 last, the words salvam esse rempublicam, equivalent to salus rei- 
 publicce, or their representative hoc, are as a subject or nominative 
 to expedit. Quoniam tecum ut essem non contigit Cic. in which 
 the dative is understood, and the preceding words supply the place 
 of the nominative. 
 
 Note 3. The dative is often suppressed : as, Faciat quod lubet 
 Ter. i. e. sibi. 
 
 Note 4. Id, hoc, illud, quod, multum, &c., may be prefixed as a 
 nominative to some impersonals : as, Aliquid peccatur vitio praci- 
 pientium Senec. Sin tibi id, minus libebit Cic. The plural 
 number is in this manner admissible in certain words : as, Quo in 
 genere multa peccantur Cic. Cetera item qua cuique libuissent 
 Suet. 
 
 Note 5. In the following instances, the infinitive mood of im- 
 personal verbs supplies the place of a noun : as Terra muUifariam 
 pluvisse nunciatum est Liv. Non potest accedi Cic. 
 
 Note 6. Conducit and expedit, instead of the dative of a thing, 
 haye sometimes an accusative with a preposition l : as, Quod in rein 
 
 1 We say Conducit tibi ad salutem, hut cannot say Conducit ad te. The reason 
 Is obyious; the purpose is expressed by ad; and, consequently, the accusative 
 after these verbs, is that of the thing. 
 
221 
 
 recte conducat tuam Plaut. Non quo minus quidquam Ccesari ex- 
 pediat ad diuturnitatem dominationis Cic. In these, there are two 
 nominatives, quod and quidquam ; but they are of such a kind as, 
 according to Note 4, may sometimes precede verbs that are used 
 impersonally. 
 
 Note 7'. An impersonal passive may be used for any person ac- 
 tive of the same mood and tense : thus, Statur a me, a te, ab illo; 
 a nobis, a vobis, ab ittis, are equivalent to sto, stas, stat, &c. Cce- 
 pit, incipit, desinit, debet, solet, potest, videtur, and perhaps some 
 others, (volo, nolo, malo, audeo, cupio, and the like, never,) joined 
 to impersonals, become impersonal : as, Pigere eumfacti ccepit 
 Justin. Tot res circumvattant, unde emergi non potest Ter. i. e. a 
 nobis, for emergere non possumus. Tcedere solet avaros impendii 
 Quint, for avari solent. In the infinitive also, when another 
 verb precedes : as, Si Volscis ager redderetur, posse agi de pace 
 Liv. Yet, we find, Ita primi pcenitere cceperunt Justin. Cum 
 miser eri mei debent Cic. 
 
 Note 8. The verbs belonging to this rule, are such as accidit, 
 contingit, evenit, conducit, expedit, lubet, libet, licet, placet, displi- 
 cet, vacat, restat, prtzstat, liquet, nocet, dolet, sufficit, apparel, &c. 
 the dative with which they are followed being that of acquisition, 
 according to Rule XXVII. Neuter verbs, and active intransitive 
 verbs are often used impersonally in the passive voice : as, Non 
 invidetur illi tetati, sed etiamfavetur Cic. 
 
 RULE XL. Refert and interest require the genitive : as, 
 Refert pair is, It concerns my father. 
 
 Interest omnium, It is the interest of all. 
 
 Note 1 . Thus also, Hwnanitatis plurimum refert Plin. Inter- 
 est omnium rectefacere Cic. 
 
 Note 2. Refert and interest admit likewise these genitives, tanti, 
 quanti, magni, permagni, parvi, pluris : as, Magni interest mea t 
 una nos esse Cic. Instead of majoris, maximi, &c. magis, max- 
 ime, multum, plurimum, minus, minimum or minime, interest or re- 
 fert , is used. Tanti, quanti, parvi ; or tantum, quantum, parum 
 refert or interest, are used indifferently. Juvenal uses Minimo dis- 
 crimine refert; and hence the common expression Parvo discrimine 
 refert. 
 
 Note 3. They are sometimes used personally, and admit not only 
 the nominatives quid, quod, id, &c., but others also: as, Tua quod 
 nihil refert , percontari desinas Ter. Illud mea magni interest 
 Cic. Plurimum refert soli oujusque ratio Plin. Non quo mea in- 
 teresset loci natura Cic. 
 
 Note 4. The adverbs, or adverbials tantum, quantum, multum, 
 plurimum, infinitum, parum, with nihil, maxime, minime, and the 
 like, are often joined with them : as, Multum refert Mart. Pin- 
 rimum intererit Juv. 
 
222 
 
 Note 5. When the word following them is a thing, it is often 
 put in the accusative with ad: as, Ad honorem nostrum interest 
 Cic. Quam ad rem isthuc refert Plaut. Sometimes when it is a 
 person : as, Quid id ad me, aut ad meam rem refert Plaut. Plu- 
 rally ; Percontari volo quce ad rem referunt Plaut. Seldom the 
 dative : as, Quoi rei id te assimulare retulit Plaut. Quid referat 
 viventi Hor. Acino plurimum refert Plin. But some of these 
 constructions are altered in certain editions. 
 
 Note 6. They are sometimes used absolutely, that is, without 
 their regimen's being expressed : as, Neque enim numero compren- 
 dere refert Virg. Interest enim, non quce (Etas, neque quid in cor- 
 pore intus geratur, sed quce vires Cels. 
 
 Note 7. The construction is elliptical, and may be supplied 
 thus : Refert pair is, i. e. refert se ad negotia pair is. Interest om- 
 nium, i. e. est inter negotia omnium. 
 
 RULE XLI. But mea, tua, sua, nostra, vestra, are put in 
 the accusative plural : as, 
 
 Non mea refert, I am not concerned. 
 
 Note 1. That is, instead of using mei, tui, sui, nostrum, vestrum, 
 the genitives of the substantive pronouns, the accusative plural, 
 neuter gender, of the corresponding pronominal adjectives, is 
 used : as, Et tua et mea maxime interest Cic. Tanti illud refert 
 mea Plaut. 
 
 Note 2. Cuja, and cujus interest are used indifferently : as, De- 
 tur ei cuja interfuit, non ei cuja nihil interfuit Cic. Quis enim 
 est hodie, cujus intersit istam legem manere ? Cic. 
 
 Note 3. The constructions of this and the preceding rule some 
 times occur in the same clause : as, Mea et reipublicce interest. 
 Magni interest Ciceronis, vel mea potius, vel utriusque, me interve- 
 nire discentiCic. In the first part of the last example, occur 
 the genitive of estimation or value, and the genitive of the person; 
 afterwards, the accusative plural. Whether we can use Mea unius 
 interest, Tua solius refert^ Nostra ipsorum interest, Mea oratoris 
 interest, Mea Ciceronis interest, and the like, is not ascertained. 
 At any rate, it is better to say Mea refert, qui sum natu maximus 
 Plin.j than mea natu maximi; and in the case of a person's speak- 
 ing of himself, as in Mea Ccemris refert, it is better to omit the 
 proper name. When the discourse is directed to a second person, 
 it is more elegant to use the vocative : thus, Magis nullius interest 
 quam tua, Tite Otacili Liv. Vestra, commilitones, interest 
 Tacit. Alvarez prefers Nostrum omnium interest, to Nostra om~ 
 nium interest, in which omnium is governed by interest, and nos- 
 trum by omnium, i. e. all of us equivalent to us all. 
 
 Note 4. Some have supposed mea, tua, &c. to be the ablative 
 singular feminine, with causa, gratia, or re understood. Others 
 
$23 
 
 contend that they are the accusative plural, neuter gender; which 
 case we have adopted. It is unnecessary to recapitulate the argu- 
 ments used on either side. - Perizonius is of opinion, that Interest 
 mea is Interest inter mea negotia, or perhaps, Est inter tnea negotia; 
 and that Refert tua is Refert se ad tua negotia. Thus Plautus says 
 Quid id ad me, out ad meam rem refert. Cicero, Omnia ad suam 
 utilitatem referre. The author of the Comp. Synt. Erasm. seems 
 inclined to steer a middle course, and to think that mea, tua, &c. 
 are ablatives after refert, and accusatives after interest. These are 
 all the possible varieties ; but it is a matter of very little conse- 
 quence to ascertain which of them comes the nearest to the truth. 
 The genitives magni, parvi, tanti, &c. may be accounted for, 
 in the same manner as was done after verbs referring to price or 
 value. 
 
 RULE XLII. These five, miseret, pcenitet, pudet, 
 and piget, govern the accusative of a person, with the geni- 
 tive of a person or thing : as, 
 
 Miseret me tui, I pity you. 
 
 Pcenitet me peccati, I repent of my sin. 
 
 Tcedet me vita, I am weary of life. 
 
 Note 1 . Thus also, Miseret te aliorum, tui te nee miseret, nee 
 pudet Plaut. Eos ineptiarum pceniteret Cic. Me civitatis morum 
 piget ttzdetque Sail. Miserescit may be joined : as, Inopis nunc 
 te miserescat mei Ter. 
 
 Note 2. The infinitive or part of a sentence sometimes supplies 
 the place of the genitive : as, Te id puduit facere Ter. At nos 
 puduit, quia cum catenis sumus Plaut. Non pcenitet me quantum 
 profecerim Cic. 
 
 Note 3. The accusative is sometimes omitted ; and sometimes 
 the verbs are used absolutely : as, Scelerum si bene pcenitet -Hor, 
 i. e. nos. Nisi piget, consistite Plaut. 
 
 Note 4. These verbs are sometimes used personally, especially 
 with the pronouns hoc, id, quid, &c.: as, Me quidemhcecconditio 
 nunc non pcenitet Plaut. Ipse sui miseret Lucr. Non te hcec 
 pudent Ter. Ira ea tcedet, qua invasit Senec. Nimio id quod 
 pudet Jacilius fertur, quam id quod piget Plaut. Here perhaps 
 fecisse mjieri may be understood, and quod may be the accusative 
 case. These few examples, opposed to the general practice, can 
 be considered but as peculiarities of the writers. - It is observed 
 that the participles of these verbs are in every respect like other 
 participles : thus, Nee multo post pcenitensfacti Suet. Hie ager 
 colono est pcenitendus Colum. Nulla parte pigendus erit Ovid. 
 
 Note 5. The genitive is supposed to be governed by some sub- 
 stantive, such as negotium, factum, res, respectus, or the like, un- 
 derstood : as, Miseret me tui, i. e. negotium tui mali miseret me; or 
 respectus tui miseret me. Non te horum pudet, i, e. negotium or co- 
 
224 
 
 
 gitatio* Or a more particular word may be supplied : thus, Mise- 
 ret me ejus, i. e. miseria or calamitas. Plum me ad te scribere pu- 
 det is equivalent to Pudor habet me, or, pudor est mihi, me plura 
 ad te scribere. Vitce tcedet me, i. e. res vitce, this being equivalent 
 to vita, in imitation of the Greeks, who sometimes use TO %^ 
 rwv WKrwv, for htea nox or hoc noctis. The accusative they go- 
 vern, as verbs transitive. 
 
 RULE XLIII. These four, Decet, delectat, juvat, opor- 
 tet, govern the accusative of the person with the infinitive: 
 as, 
 
 Non decet te rixari, It does not become you to scold. 
 
 Delectat me studwe, I delight to study. 
 
 Note 1. Thus also, Orator em irasci minime decet, simulare non 
 dedecet Cic. Me pedibus delectat claudere verba Hor. Meju- 
 vatcoluisse Propert. Mendacem memorem esse oportet Quinct. 
 The first three govern the accusative, as transitive verbs ; but as 
 oportet is neuter, being equivalent to opus est, or necesse est, the 
 accusative following it is not governed by it, but depends upon 
 the infinitive mood following. 
 
 Note 2. Decet sometimes takes the dative : as, Ita nobis decet 
 Ter. But this seems a Graecism ; TJJOUV vptnei. Juvat and opor- 
 tet likewise seem to have been formerly construed with a dative. 
 
 Note 3. Oportet is elegantly joined with the subjunctive mood, 
 
 ut being understood : as, Ex rerum cognitione efflorescat, et redun- 
 
 det oportet oratio Cic. Also with perfect participles, esse, or 
 
 fuisse, being understood : as, Adolescenti morem gestum oportuit 
 
 Ter. 
 
 Note 4. Fallit, Jugit, prceterit, latet, when used impersonally, 
 have an accusative, and generally with the infinitive : as, Fugit 
 me ad te scribere Cic. Sometimes, instead of the infinitive, is 
 used a finite verb with some particle: as, Ittud alterum quam sit 
 difficile, non tefugit Cic. Latet me, and latet mihi, do not rest 
 on very high authority. 
 
 Note 5. Attinet, pertinet, and spectat, have an accusative with 
 ad : as, Perdat, pereat, nihil ad me attinet Ter. Ad rempublicam 
 pertinet me conservari Cic. Spectat ad omnes bene vivere Incert. 
 but this last is uncommon. Attinet me is sometimes used for at- 
 tinet ad me. 
 
 Note 6. Decet, delectat, juvat, are often used personally, and 
 oportet sometimes : as, Parvum parva decent Hor. Thus also 
 dedecet, condecet and indeed : as, Quarum me dedecet usus Ovid. 
 Ornatus me condecet Plaut. Juvenes adhuc confusa qucedam et 
 quasi turbata non indecent Plin. Literce me delectarunt Cic. 
 Otia me somnusque juvant Mart. Hcec Jcicta ab illo oportebant 
 Ter. DelectOf and juvo used for auxilior, frequently occur in 
 
225 
 
 the first and second persons Specto, used personally for perti- 
 
 net mtendit, takes an accusative with ad: as, Res ad arma spectat 
 Cic. When it refers to place, the preposition may be either 
 expressed, or omitted : as, Spectat ad meridiem Caes. Spectare 
 Hispaniam Plin. But pertinet, as in Pertinet ad Hehetios, ad 
 arccm Caes. in^which it is equivalent to tendit or vergit, is never 
 used without a preposition. 
 
 Note 7. The nature of this construction is sufficiently evident. 
 These impersonals, as they are called, govern the accusative, 
 being transitive verbs, oportet alone excepted. The infinitive mood 
 which follows them, or other words in the sentence, supplies the 
 place of a nominative to them. 
 
 Of Passive Verbs, and others admitting an Ablative 'with 
 a Preposition. 
 
 * RULE XLIII. The principal agent, when following a 
 verb of passive signification, is governed by a, ab, or abs : 
 as, Laudatur ab his, culpatur ab illisULor. Omnis ora 
 maritima depopulata ab Achtzis erat Liv. Testis in eum 
 rogatus, an ab reo fustibus vapuldsset Quinct. Opera fa- 
 bant a legionibus Hirt. B. Afr. Respondit a cive spoliari 
 se matte, qudm ab hoste venire Quinct. 
 
 Note 1. Neuter verbs, (especially those whose signification re- 
 sembles that of passives,) and deponents also, admit an ablative 
 with a or ab : as, Ne vir ab hoste cadat Ovid. Rem atrocem 
 Macedo a servis suis passus est Plin. 
 
 Note 2. Passive verbs sometimes take the dative, especially 
 among the poets : as, Quia non inteliigor ulli Ovid, for ab ullo. 
 Nullaque laudetur mihi Ovid, for a me. Videor, used in the 
 sense of / seem, always governs the dative : as, Mihi videbor es&e 
 restitutus Cic. In its primary signification of / am seen, it is 
 sometimes thus construed ; but generally with the ablative and a 
 preposition : as, Sum visus ab illo Ovid. 
 
 Note 3. The secondary agent, means or instrument, following 
 an active, passive, or neuter verb, is governed by per, or is ex- 
 pressed in the ablative : as, Per me defensa est respublica Cic. 
 Naluram expellasfurcd Hor. 
 
 Note 4k The preposition a or ab is sometimes suppressed : as, 
 Desertaque conjuge ploret Ovid. Colitur linigerd turbd Ovid. 
 Scriberis Vario Hor. 
 
 Note 5. Some verbs are found, in the same sense, construed 
 either with the dative, or the ablative and a preposition : as, Ne- 
 que populo neque cuiquam bono probaiur Cic. Meumjactum pro* 
 ban ads te, triumpho gaudio Caes. ad Cic. 
 
 Note "6. A great many other verbs take also the ablative with 
 
 Q 
 
226 
 
 a or ab referring to the source or origin of their action ; such as 
 verbs of, 
 
 1. Receiving; as accipio, capio, sumo, mutuor ; also adipiscor y 
 consequor, impetro, &c. thus, A majoribus morem accepimus Cic. 
 
 2. Distance, Difference, and Dissention ; as disto, differo, dis- 
 sentio, dis&ideo, discrepo, discordo : thus, Cum a veris falsa non 
 distent Cic. 
 
 3. Desiring, Intimating, and Inquiring; as pet o, expeto, posco, 
 percontor, sctior, sciscitor, rogo, oro, obsecro, precor, j)osti(lo,jla- 
 gito, contendo, exigo, &c.: as, A te opem petimus Cic. 
 
 4. Cessation ; as cesso, desisto, quiesco, requiesco, tempero : thus, 
 A prceliis cessare Liv. 
 
 5. Expecting; as expecto, spero, &c.: thus, Ab alio exspectes, 
 alteri quodfeceris P. Syr. Ab uno exspectes quod a multis sperare 
 nequeas Buchan. Perhaps in such instances there is an ellipsis 
 of a verb of receiving. 
 
 6. Taking away and Removing; as, aiifero, rapio , surripio , fu- 
 ror, tollo, removeo, arceo, prohibeo, pello, repello, propulso, revoco ; 
 also contineo, cohibeo, refrceno, defendo, munio, tego, tueor, dejicio, 
 descisco, degenero, to which may be added verbs compounded with 
 a or ab ; as abigo, abstineo, amoveo, abduco t abrado, amitto for di- 
 mitto, avello, avoco, &c. : thus Minas triginta ab illo abstuliTer. 
 Cohibere animum ab alieno Cic. 
 
 7. Dismissing, Banishing, and Disjoining ; as dimitto, relego* 
 disjungo, divello, segrego, separo : thus, Eumab se dimittit Caes. 
 
 8. Buying ; as emo t mercor,fceneror, conduco : thus, A piscato- 
 ribus jactum emerat V. Max. 
 
 9. Many other verbs of various significations ; as caveo, declino, 
 deflecto ; discedo, recedo ; qffero, do, reddo,fero, reporto ; incipio, 
 ordior ; servo, custodio, vindico ; timeo, metuo,Jbrmido, &c. : thus, 
 Tibi ego, Brute, non solvam, nisiprius a te cavero Cic. 
 
 Note 7. Many of these vary their construction. Aiifero, adi- 
 mo, eripioi &c. generally govern the dative ; also sometimes verbs 
 of Defending, Difference, and Distance. We say Interdicere all- 
 cui aliquam rem, aliqua re, and, according to Cicero, Prcetor in- 
 terdixit de vi hominibus armatis. Timere, metuere ab aliquo, and 
 aliquem. Verbs of Asking have generally two accusatives. Pro- 
 hibeo, cesso, desisto, are often followed by the infinitive. By the 
 subjunctive and ut or ne, verbs of Intreating, Asking, and Fear- 
 ing ; with ne, prohibeo, interdico, and caveo (the last generally 
 without ne) ; and also with quin and quo minus, interdico, and 
 prohibeo. Verbs of Asking are often followed by an, num,utrum, 
 
 & c . Again ; Verbs are often followed by other prepositions : 
 
 as, Differre discrepare, dissentire cum aliquo, for ab aliquo. Emo, 
 redimo, declino, deflecto de. Haurio, sumo, habeo, percontor, scitor, 
 sciscitor t ex. Audio, moveo, dimoveo^pello, aufero, tollo, ccdo, colligo, 
 qncero ( signifying fo inquire) de or ex. Arceo, prohibeo, interclu* 
 
do, moveo, petto, cedo, desisto, sepono, submoveo ; also abdico and 
 supersedeo, an ablative without a preposition. The last two never 
 have the preposition expressed. 
 
 Note 8. In like manner, certain adjectives of Diversity and Or- 
 der, such as alms, alter, alienus, diversus ; secundus, tertius, c. 
 take an ablative with a or ab : as, Quicquam aliud a libertate 
 Cic. Tu nunc eris alter ab illo Virg. Ut sacerdos ejus Dece, ma 
 jestate, imperio et potentia secundus a rege habeatur Hirt. B. 
 Alex. Or alins without a preposition : as, Neve putes alium sa- 
 piente bonoque beatum Hor. Quod si accusator alius Sejanojb- 
 retPhsedr. 
 
 Note 9. Verbs of Striving ; as, contendo, certo, bello, pugno : of 
 Joining'or Coming together ; a&jungo, conjungo, concumbo, coeo, 
 misceo, take an ablative with cum; as, Mecum certasse feretur- 
 Ovid. Salutem meam cum communi salute conjungere discrevi 
 Cic. Consilia cum illo non miscuerant Tac. To these add confe- 
 ro, comparo, compono, and contendo used for comparo, with com- 
 
 munico and participo. But of these the construction is often 
 
 varied ; for we say Contendere, certare, &c. contra or adversus all- 
 quern ; also inter se, and, poetically, alicui. Jungo and conjungo 
 have also the dative usually; and poetically, concumbo, coeo, and 
 misceo. We also find Jungere se ad aliquem Cic. Jungi, coire t 
 misceri, inter se, are common. 
 
 Note 10. Mereor,facio, Jit, erit,Juturum est, take an ablative 
 with de : as, Ita de populo Romano meritus est Cic. Mereo also ; 
 as, Si bene quid de te merui Virg. Indicium dejide ejusjecisti 
 Cic. Quid de me fat? Ter. But generally the preposition is 
 omitted: as, Quid hoc homine faciatis Cic. Quid te Juturum 
 censes? Ter. Sometimes the dative is used: as, Quid huic tu 
 hominijaoies Cic. Quid mihijiet Ovid. 1 
 
 Note 11. Verbs of Perceiving and Knowing; as intelligo, sen- 
 tio f cognosco, conjicio, disco, per cipio, cottigo, audio, take the abla- 
 tive with e or ex : as, Ex gestu tuo intelligo quid velis Cic. Ex 
 tuis literis statum rerum cognovi Cic. Hoc ex illo audivi Cic. 
 
 Note 12. A variation in the construction, or in the prepositions, 
 often alters the sense : thus, Audire ex aliquo refers to the source 
 of information. Audire de aliquo generally refers to the object 
 concerning which information is given. Yet, Cicero uses S&pe 
 hoc audivi de patre et de socero meo ; for ex patre, ex socero. Cog- 
 noscere ex aliquo, i. e. to discover from one. De aliquo, i. e. to 
 judge of him. Mereri aliquid, i. e. to deserve a thing. De ali- 
 quo, i. e. of one. Sentire cum aliquo, i. e. to be of one's opi- 
 nion. De aliquo bene vel male, i. e. to think well or ill of him. 
 Timere, metuere aliquem, or ab aliquo, i. e. to be afraid of one. 
 Timere, metuere alicui, or pro aliquo, i. e. to be afraid or concern- 
 ed for him. 
 
 1 Quid tibi fiet, and Quid de tefiet, have no other difference than " What 
 will be done to you ?" and " What will become of you ?" 
 
 Q2 
 
228 
 
 Note 13. Passive impersonate are either used absolutely; as, 
 Quid agitur? Statur Ter. Or they take after them the case of" 
 their personals, the accusative of the active voice excepted : as, 
 Ut majoribus natu assurgatur, ut supplicum miser eatur Cic- Nee 
 mihi parcatur Ovid. 
 
 Note 14. The accusative of the active voice constituting the 
 nominative in the passive, it follows, that verbs which govern the 
 dative only, can be used passively in the same sense as imperso- 
 nals only ; thus instead of Ilia cetas non invidetur, sed favetur, we 
 should say Non inmdetur illi atari, sed favetur Cic. instead of 
 Noceor, Nocetur mihi. The converse of this is in general true : 
 that whatever verb is used in the first and second persons passive, 
 its active admits an accusative after it. Very few examples oc- 
 cur to the contrary. 
 
 Note 15. Passive impersonate, coming from neuter verbs, some- 
 times become personal, taking a nominative of the same or of a 
 kindred signification : thus, Cursus curritur, Vita vivitur, &c. be- 
 cause we can say, in the same manner, actively, Curro cur- 
 sum, Vivo vitam. Pugna ilia quce pugnata est Cic. Omne mill- 
 tabitur bellum Hor. Jam tertia vivitur cetas Ovid.. Many 
 neuter \ erbs taken in an active sense, or in a sense different from 
 their primary signification, are found in the passive voice, used as 
 if they came from active verbs ; these will be found in one of the 
 annexed lists. 
 
 OF THE INFINITIVE, PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS, AND 
 SUPINES. 
 
 RULE XLIV. One verb governs another in the infini- 
 tive : as, 
 
 Cupio discere, I desire to learn. 
 
 Note 1. Or, when two verbs come together, without a conjunc- 
 tion expressed or understood, one of them is put in the infini- 
 tive : as, Qui mentiri solet, pejerare consuevit Cic. Incipit appa- 
 rere Virg. 
 
 Note 2. The infinitive is frequently subjoined to adjectives, 
 especially among the poets : as, Insueto vera audire ferodor ora- 
 tio visa est Liv. Audax omnia perpeti Hor. Dignus amari 
 Virg. 
 
 Note 3. The infinitive, with, or without, an accusative ex- 
 pressed, frequently depends upon nouns and verbs : as, Et jam 
 tempus equum Jumantia solvcre colla Virg. Utrum melius esset 
 ingredi Cic. Se semper credunt negligi Ter. Non satis est pul~ 
 chra essepoemata Hor. 
 
 Note 4<. Sometimes the accusative is turned into the dative : as, 
 Quid est autem tarn secimdum naturam, quam scnibus emori Cic. 
 
229 
 
 Cato maj Perhaps the whole sentence may be Quid csl tarn se- 
 cundum naturarn, quam (est secundam naturam) senibus, (series t ) 
 emori. 
 
 Note 5. The governing word is sometimes understood : as, 
 Mene inccpto desistere victam Virg. i. e. decet or par est. Ego 
 illnd sedulo negare fact urn Ter. i. e. ccepL In such forms as 
 Videre est, Animadvertere est,facultas, potestas, copia, or the like, 
 is understood. Thus also, Neque est tejhltere cuiquam Virg. 
 
 Note 6. The infinitive itself is sometimes suppressed : as, Ei 
 proviuclam Numidiam popidits jussit Sail. i. e. dari. Socratem 
 fidibus docuit Cic. i. e. canere. 
 
 Note 7. It has just been mentioned that the infinitive is often 
 dependent upon ccepi understood : but many instances occur in 
 which this idiom cannot be rationally explained upon the sup- 
 position of such an ellipsis : as, Verum ingenium ejus haud absur- 
 dum : posse versus Jacere, jocum movere Sail. 
 
 Note 8. When the infinitive mood is governed by a preceding 
 verb, it supplies the place of a substantive, since it is the object 
 of the action, energy, or affection denoted by the governing verb ; 
 thus in Cupio discere , discere is the object of the affection denoted 
 by cupio, in the same manner as in English, to learn or learning, 
 is the object of I desire, when we say I desire to learn, or I desire 
 
 learning. The infinitive mood may, therefore, be considered 
 
 as a substantive. Its gender is neuter ; it is of the singular num- 
 ber ; and is used in all cases. It is governed by nouns, verbs, 
 and prepositions ; and adjectives and pronouns agree with it, as 
 will be seen in the following examples : 
 
 1. It is used as a nominative to a verb personal : as, Vtinam 
 emori fortunis meis honestus exitus esset Sail. As a nominative 
 following a verb substantive ; thus, Sive illuderatsinefunereferri 
 Ovid. As a nominative to a verb sometimes esteemed imper- 
 sonal : thus, Cadit in eundem et misereri et invidere Cic. As a 
 case in apposition to a preceding nominative : thus, Res erat spec- 
 iaculo digna, videre Xcrxem in exiguo latentem navigio Justin. 
 It is true that, in this last example, videre, the infinitive, is, as in 
 a preceding example, the nominative to the substantive verb ; 
 but the sentence is usually translated, " It was a thing worthy 
 of being seen to behold, or observe, Xerxes," &c. 
 
 2. It is used after some substantives and adjectives as a geni- 
 tive, often convertible into the gerund in di : as, Tempus est abire 
 Cic. for abeundiy or abitionis. Est animus nobia effundere vi- 
 tam Ovid. Non defuit animus adoriri Suet. Soli cantare 
 pcriti Arcades Virg. for cantandi, or cantus. 
 
 3. It is used as a dative : thus, Et -oos servire magis, quam im- 
 perarc parati estis Sail. i. e. serviiuti magis quam imperio. 
 
 4. As an accusative : thus, Da mihi fallere Hor. i. e. artem 
 follendi. Terram cum primnm aranf, proscindcre appellant ; cum 
 
 itcrum, offringere dicuutVarr. After a preposition : as, Nihil 
 
230 
 
 interest inter dare el accipere Senec. Prceter plorare Hor. 
 Prater loqui Liv. 
 
 5. As a vocative, in vivere nostrum, for vita nostra. 
 
 6. As an Ablative: thus, Et erat turn dignus amari Virg. for 
 amore. Ne operam perdas poscere Plaut. i. e in poscendo. As 
 an ablative case absolute, either with, or without, a preceding 
 accusative expressed : thus, Hand cuiquam dubio opprimi posse 
 Liv. Audito regem in Sicilian tendere Sail. 
 
 7. It admits an adjective or pronoun to agree with it : as, To- 
 tum hoc displicet philosophariCic. Sed ipsum Latine loqui est 
 illud quidem in magna Laude ponendum Cic. Scire tuum nihil 
 est Pers. The poets often join an adjective with the infinitive, 
 which may be considered either as an adverb, or as an adjective 
 agreeing with it : thus, Datur ordo senectce Admeto, serumque mo- 
 ri Stat. Reddes dulce loqui, reddes ridere decorum Hor. 
 
 8. It is found with the genitive of a pronoun after it, like a 
 noun: as, Quid est hujus vivere ? din mori Sen. F. Maximus ; 
 cujus non dimicarefuit vincereVal. Max. 
 
 Note 9. The infinitive is used as an accusative, after verbs of 
 an active signification : as, Desidero te videre, for conspectum tuum: 
 and this chiefly when there is no suitable noun : as, Nescio men- 
 tiri. Likewise, when the infinitive may be resolved into quod, ut, 
 ne, quin, &c. with some finite verb : as, Non dubitabo te monere 
 Cic. i. e. quin te moneam. It is sometimes used when convertible 
 into the participle in dus : as, Loricam donat habere viro Virg. 
 i. e. habcndam, or ut habeat. It supplies the place of an accusa- 
 tive with ad, propter, or ob: as, Nam te emere coegit Cic. i. e. 
 ad emere or ad emendum. Plorat aquam proflindere Plaut. i. e. 
 ob aquam projimdendam. The infinitive is generally used in En- 
 glish and in Greek, when the intention is to denote the final 
 cause ; this is not common in Latin, but a few instances of it oc- 
 cur: as, Non tefrangere persequor Hor. i.e. ut frangam. In~ 
 troiit videre Ter. Proteus pec us egit altos viscre monies Hor. 
 This may be considered either as '\ poetical license or a Graecism, 
 and is not to be imitated. 
 
 Note 10. The infinitive mood and its accusative case (which 
 form is equivalent to quod or ut with a finite verb) often supplies 
 the place of a case : as, Scin me tuum esse herum Plaut. Te ac- 
 cepisse meas literas gaudeo Ter. in which the neuter verb may be 
 supposed to be followed by the preposition Kara or propter. 
 
 Note 11. The infinitive has been termed Nomen Verbi, or the 
 noun of the verb : and whenever the verb following that interven- 
 ing between two verbs, is convertible, according to the sense> 
 into a cognate noun, the noun and verb following that may gene- 
 rally be put in Latin, the one in the accusative, and the other 
 in the infinitive, omitting the Latin of that : thus, Audivieum ve~ 
 nisse, I heard that he had arrived, is equivalent to ejus adventum, 
 of his arrival. Scrip-sit se cupcrc, to suam cupiditatcm. The in- 
 
231 
 
 finitive is, however, sometimes turned into a finite verb followed 
 either by quod or ut, although these two are not, but very seldom, 
 mutually convertible : thus, 
 
 1. The infinitive mood, or sometimes quod followed by the in- 
 dicative or subjunctive, is put after verbs of sense ; as sentio, ani- 
 madverto, intelligo, audio, censeo, scio, credo, obliviscor, &c. : verbs 
 of affection ; as gaudeo, lector, doleo, cegrejero, miror, &c. except 
 verbs of desire and fear, which require ut : verbs of speaking 
 and showing ; as, dico, aio, perhibeo, rejero, nuncio, nego, ostendo, 
 dcmonstro, promitto, polliceor, spondeo, voveo, &c. : (but after the 
 following the infinitive is used, but never quod ; solet, cccpit, inci-, 
 pit, potcst, quit, neguit, est for licet, debet, &c.) . as, Miror te a/ 
 me nihil scribere Cic. Scio se promittere folso Ovid. Scio jam 
 
 Jilius quod amet meus Ter. forjilium meum amare. Scribis miki, 
 mirari Ciceronem, quod nihil significem de suis actis Brut, ad Att. 
 ap. Cic. This subject will be further noticed under Conjunc- 
 tions, where an alphabetical list will be given of the principal 
 words usually followed by quod, ut, or the infinitive. 
 
 2. The infinitive, or the subjunctive with ut, may be subjoined 
 to verbs of willing ; as volo, nolo, malo, cupio, opto, permitto, sino, 
 patior, &c. (these rather take the infinitive :) to verbs of com- 
 manding ; as impero, mando, prcccipio, edico, &c. ; to verbs of in- 
 treating ; as oro, rogo, postulo, peto, Jlagito, prtzcor, &c., (but 
 these oftener take the subjunctive with ut or ne : ) also to verbs de- 
 noting something future ; as paro, cogo, impello, urgeo, decerno, 
 tlatuo, constituo, facio, studeo, &c. ; and to certain impersonals, 
 or words used impersonally ; as libet, licet, decet, oportet, expedit, 
 conducit, prodest, obest, nocet, refert, interest, prcestat, scquitur, 
 &c. to which may be added such expressions as JEquumest, Par 
 est, Cerium est, Fas est, Nejhs est, but these seldom take the sub- 
 junctive with ut. Thus, Vis me uxorem ducere. ? Ter. or ut uxo- 
 rem ducam. Non aliter cineres mando jacere rneos Mart, or, ut 
 cineres meijaceant. His orat vigiles incumberc curas--Va\. Flac. 
 or, ut his vigiles euro* incumbant. Modo liccat vivere, est spes 
 Ter. or, ut vivamus.lt is observed that the subjunctive with 
 ut or ne, is more common after verbs of commanding, than the 
 infinitive ; but that the infinitive generally occurs after a dative 
 or an accusative, the subjunctive, after a dative only : as, Cadmo 
 perquirere raptam [jUiam] Imperat Ovid. Equitatum procedcre 
 
 imperat Cses. Suis, ut idem faciant, imperat Caes. It is 
 
 likewise observed, that, after the following words, the conjunc- 
 tion is often omitted, volo, nolo, malo, rogo, precor, censeo, cavco, 
 suadeo, licet, oportet, jubeo, and similar words, moneo, and the like; 
 after die used for jube, after sine,fac or Jacito, esto, (suppose, 
 grant ;) and after necesse est, inscitia est, dare operam : as, Syro 
 ignoscas volo Ter. Nee medeare miM sanesquc n&c vulnem man- 
 do Ovid! Tu fac bono magnoquc animo sis Cic. Inscitia est, 
 adversum slimnliun calces Ter. Lice! adjicias Var. Iliad monco, 
 casira habeas Nep. Esto, populus mallet Hor. The verb of in- 
 
232 
 
 treating is sometimes omitted : as, Ut isthunc di, deccque pe.rd.anl. 
 Precor, or a similar word, is understood. 
 
 Note 12. Dubito and dulium est are sometimes followed by the 
 infinitive, but oftener by the subjunctive with an, num, utrum, 
 and (if non goes before) qmn : as, Non dubito fore plerosque 
 Nep. Periisse me una hand dulium est Ter. Non dulium est, 
 quin uxorem -nolitjilius Ter. Din dubitavit, impcrium deponerel, 
 an bello register et Justin. It is to be observed, that such phrases 
 as Dubito an, Hand scio an, Nescio an, although from their very 
 nature they imply some doubt, are, notwithstanding, generally 
 used in a sense almost affirmative : thus, Si per se virtus sine foriu- 
 nd ponderanda sit, dubito an hunc primum omnium ponam Nep. 
 i. e. for aught I know he may be placed first, or I am inclined to 
 place him first. Alque hand scio an cjuce dixit vera sint omnia 
 Ter. denotes that he is inclined to believe all that had been said, 
 to be true. Elor/uenlid quidern nescio an parem habuisset neminem 
 Cic. implies that he supposed he had no equal. A few in- 
 stances might be mentioned in which such phrases are to be in- 
 terpreted negatively. 
 
 Note 13. Verbs of fearing; such as timer*, metuo, vereor, paveo, 
 are used affirmatively with ?ie, but negatively with ut or ne. non : 
 thus, Timet ne deseras se Ter. She is afraid that you may forsake 
 her. Paves ne ducas uxorem Ter. denotes you are afraid to marry. 
 Paves ut ducas Ter. You are afraid lest you should not marry 
 her. Fereor ne exercitumjirrnum habere possit Cic. I am afraid 
 lest he should have a good army. Intellexi te vereri ne superiores 
 literce mihi redditte non e&sent Cic. 1 understood you were afraid, 
 that I had not received your last letter. Timeo ne non impetrem 
 Cic. I am afraid I shall not carry the point. In explanation of 
 this, it may perhaps be observed, that such Latin verbs have in 
 themselves something of a negative nature, that, ex. gr. timeo 
 has in it something of the nature of non spero, expectation being, 
 in a certain sense, the basis of both ; that, therefore, seeing they 
 are negative themselves, it follows that, when they are followed 
 by ne, which is another negative, the sense must be, on the 
 whole, affirmative, since two negatives destroy each other; and 
 that when the)' are followed by ut, which is no negative, or by 
 ne non, which, being two negatives, is equivalent to an affirma- 
 tive, they are still negative, as they are followed by nothing capa- 
 ble of destroying their own negative signification. Thus also if 
 we use two words of a negative nature, as in Non vereor ut id 
 Jiat, or, which is the same thing, four negatives, as in Non ve- 
 reor ne non id fiat, the meaning is affirmative, and the same in * 
 both, namely, that we are almost certain, that we expect, or sus- 
 pect, that the thing we wish for will happen ; and, therefore, that 
 we are not afraid that it will not come to pass. Thus Cicero, Ne 
 verendum tjuidem est ut tenere se possit, et moderari. We have no 
 reason to be afraid of his containing and governing himself; or, 
 although the expression is somewhat stronger, we have reason to 
 
233 
 
 believe, of to expect, that he will, &c. Non vereor ne hoc officium 
 meum Servilio non probem. I am not afraid, or I hope, that I shall 
 be able to justify my conduct to Servilius. There is, it is ob- 
 served, a distinction between Vereor ne, and Vereor ut, in the for- 
 mer's being used to denote our fear that something may happen, 
 which we do not wish; and in the latter 's implying our fear that 
 
 something may not happen, which we wish to happen. The 
 
 infinitive is but seldom used after these: thus, Metuit tangi Hor. 
 i. e. ne tangatur. Sed vereor tardce causa fuisse morce Ovid. i. e. 
 ne causa fuerim. But in such expressions as Metuit tentare, Timet 
 venire, ftreor dicere, He is afraid of trying, or to try, &c. the in- 
 finitive only is used, because in these the reference is to a simple, 
 positive action ; in the others, to one which is contingent. 
 
 Note 14s After such verbs as cxutima, puto, sporo, affirmo, sus- 
 picor, &c. the place of the future of the infinitive may be ele- 
 gantly supplied by fore orfuturum esse, the verb being put in the 
 subjunctive with ut: as, Existimabant pleriquefuturumfuisse t ut 
 oppidum amitteretur Cses. Nunquam putamfore ut ad te supplex 
 veniremCic. When the verb has no future participle, this phra- 
 seology becomes necessary. 
 
 Note 15. The English infinitive following any part of the verb 
 am is expressed in Latin by the future participle : as, Rationem 
 redditurus est, He is about to give an account. Ratio reddenda 
 est Cic., An account is to be given. It may sometimes, as after 
 video, sentio, audio, be expressed in Latin by the present participle ; 
 as, Vidi eum ingredientem, I saw him enter, or entering. Sensi 
 ilium lacrymas effundentem, I saw him shed tears. 
 
 The General Rule for the Government of 'Participles, 
 Gerunds^ and Supines. 
 
 RULE XLV.- Participles, Gerunds, and Supines, govern 
 the case of their own verbs : as, 
 
 Amans virtutem. Loving virtue. 
 Gsrerujraude, Wanting guile. 
 
 Note 1. Thus also, Quidam nominatus poeta Cic. Regni re- 
 rumque obliti Virg. Indulgens sibi hi/drops Hor. Non inferiora 
 secutus Virg. Virum pecunid indigentem l V. Max. Parcendurn 
 estteneris Juv. Consilium Lacedcemonem occupandi Liv. Uten- 
 dum est cetate Ovid. Aut Gratis servitum matribus ibo Virg. 
 Legati venerunt questum injurias, et exfcedere res repetilum Liv. 
 Vaticinatus est madefactum iri Grceciam sanguine Cic. 
 
 1 We find Egcns omnibus Cic. and Omnium honestarum rerum egens~SaM. 
 Abundant is likewise thus construed, but the ablative is the more frequent. 
 Jndigens is also construed with a genitive. Such constructions may be re- 
 ferred to this rule, since cgco, abundo, and indigco, are found with a genitive. 
 Some, however, refer them to Rule XXI, and others refer the genitive to 
 Rule XIV, 
 
234? 
 
 
 Note 2. Government belongs to the first supine only. 
 
 Note 3. Verbal nouns sometimes govern the case of their verbs: 
 as, Justitia est obtemperatio scriptis legibusCic. Insidice consult 
 non procedebant Sail. In these, perhaps, some participle may 
 be understood, as prcestitus orjactus. Ignis aquce pugnax Ovid. 
 Gratulabundus patrice Justin. Vitabundus castra Jiostium Liv. 
 
 Note 4. The gerund in di, in imitation of a substantive, some- 
 times governs, instead of the accusative plural, the genitive plu- 
 ral : as, Nominandi istorum erit copia Plaut. Neque sui colligendi 
 hostibusfacultatem relinquunt Cses. This is most common with 
 pronouns; but we also find Facidtas agrorum condonandi Cic. 
 Exemplorum eligendi potestas Cic. &c. If the genitive singular 
 be found, and this is very uncommon, it happens when the pro- 
 noun is of the feminine gender : as, Quoniam tui videndi est copia 
 Plaut. Ego ejus videndi cupidus recta consequor Ter, Few 
 instances can be adduced of its governing any other singular ge- 
 nitive than that of pronouns feminine. 
 
 Note 5. Exosus, perosus t and often also pert&sus, signify active- 
 ly, and govern the accusative : as, Tcedas exosa jugales Ovid, 
 Plebs consulum nomenperosa erat Liv. Pertcesus ignaviam suam 
 Suet. Pertcesus, used impersonally, governs the genitive also: 
 as, Pertasum levitatis Cic. thalami tcedceque Virg. Exosus 
 andperosus, signifying passively, are said to be found with a dative ; 
 as, \jermani Romanis perosi sunt. Exosus Deo et sanctis Lily. 
 Exosus universis Eutrop. 
 
 Note 6. Do, reddo, volo, curo,Jacio, habeo, with the accusative 
 of a perfect participle, are often used by way of circumlocution, 
 instead of the verb of the participle: as, Effectum dabo Ter. i. e. 
 cfficiam. Me missumjhce Ter. i. e. mitte. Inventas reddam Ter. 
 i. e. inveniam. In certain instances there is an evident difference 
 between the simple tense of the verb, and the periphrasis corre- 
 sponding to the manner in which it is usually interpreted in En- 
 glish : thus, if we say Gladius quern abdiderat, or Gladius quern ab- 
 ditum kabebat, the translation of either is, The sword which she had 
 concealed. The latter is the phraseology of Livy, describing the 
 suicide of Lucretia, and implies the actual possession of the dag- 
 ger, at the time ; the former does not. In the others, the peri- 
 phrastic form is said usually to denote greater emphasis than what 
 is contained in the simple tense of the verb. 
 
 Note 7. CurOy habeo, mando, loco, conduco, do, tribuo, accimo t 
 mitto, relinquo, and the like, as edico, deposco, suscipio, rogo, trado, 
 permitto, instead of the infinitive, the subjunctive, or sometimes 
 the gerund in dum with ad, are elegantly construed with the par- 
 ticiple in dus, agreeing with a substantive in gender, number, and 
 case : as, Funus ei satis amplum faciendum curavi Cic. for Jieri 
 or utjieret. Demus nos pJiilosopfiice excolendos Cic. Edico dird 
 helium cum gente gcrendum Virg. Q? laudcm gloriamque P. 
 AJricani luendam conscrvandamquc suscepitQc* Atiribuit nos 
 
235 
 
 trucidandos Cethego ; ceeteros cives interjidendos Gabinio ; urbem 
 i)iflammandam Cassio ; totam Italiam vastandam diripiendamque 
 Catilince Cic. in which the gerund in dum might be used, as ad 
 truddandum, ad interficiendum , &c. 
 
 GERUNDS. 
 
 RULE XL VI. The gerund in dum of the nominative 
 case, with the verb est, governs the dative : as, 
 
 Vivendum est mihi recte, I must live well. 
 Moriendum cst omnibus. All must die. 
 
 Note 1. That is, the gerund in dum of the nominative case, de- 
 noting necessity or obligation, with the third person singular of 
 any tense of sum, or with Jbret, governs the dative of the object 
 with which the necessity or obligation lies : as, Dolendum est tibi 
 ipsi Hor. Multa novis rebus prcesertim quum sit agendum Lucr. 
 Etiamsi cumpluribus dimicandumforet Liv. In these last, how- 
 ever, the dative is understood. 
 
 Note 2. The dative is often understood : as, Orandum est, ut 
 sit mens sana in corpore sano Juv. supply tibi. 
 
 Note 3. Neuter verbs, denoting posture or gesture, which have 
 a nominative before and after them, may have after this gerund 
 two datives : as, Tibi in tud pace armato vivendum est Senec. 
 equivalent to Tibi in tud pace armato [vel armatum~\ vivere necesse 
 est. 
 
 Note 4. After another verb, this gerund is turned into the ac- 
 cusative with esse or fore, expressed or understood : as, Quotidie 
 meditere resistendum esse iracundice Cic. Quibus rebus quam ma- 
 turrime occurrendum (esse) putabat-^-Cses. Rursus ab Senatu ei 
 postulandumjbre Liv. 
 
 Note 5. This gerund may be resolved into the infinitive, or the 
 subjunctive with ut generally understood, such words as necesse 
 est, oportet, debeo, going before : as, Cuique manendum est, into 
 Qtiisque debet manere. Moriendum est, into Homini necesse est 
 mori, or ut moriatur. Ei postea non credendum, into Ei credi 
 postea non oportet Cic. When the verb is neuter, it is not con- 
 vertible into the participle in dus ; but when it is active, it may 
 be thus varied : as, Habendum est canes, i. e. Oportet habere canes ; 
 ovHabendisunt canes, i. e. Oportet canes haberi. The latter is said 
 to be the more frequent construction, when there is a passive 
 voice ; but the former is not, on that account, to be reckoned an 
 antiquated form of expression. The antients frequently varied 
 this construction by the substantive verb, and a verbal noun in io: 
 as, Quid tibi hanc curatio est rem Plant. Cavcndum est may be 
 changed into Cautio mihi est, Cautio mea est ! , Debeo cavere, Ne- 
 
 1 In these two forms, the duty, necessity, or obligation, does not appear so 
 evident as in the others. 
 
236 
 
 cesse esL mi/ii cave re, Necesse est or Oporiet me cavere, Neccsse li 
 beo cavere, Caveam oportet or necesse est. 
 
 Note 6. Grammarians have differed in their explanation of the 
 construction of gerunds, some considering them as the participle 
 in dus, and others, as verbal nouns governing a case. That they 
 are not participles, is inferred chiefly from the two considerations, 
 that they have no substantive expressed, with which they agree, 
 and that neuter verbs in o, which have no participle in dus, have, 
 notwithstanding, the verbal noun or gerund. Taking them as 
 nouns, this construction may be thus explained ; Eundum est mild, 
 I must go, i. e. Eundum est (opus) mihi, Going is needful or ne- 
 cessary for me. Orandum est, ut sit &c. i. e. Orandum, ut sit &c. 
 est (opus nobis;) equivalent to opus est, ut oremus. If dum be con- 
 sidered as coming from the participle in dus, such examples as the 
 last may be thus explained passively ; Hoc est orandum, ut sit &c. 
 It is to be observed that the gerund in dum, while it is followed by 
 a dative, governs at the same time the case of its verb : thus, in 
 the last example, if orandum be taken in an active sense, the words 
 ut sit metis sana &c. supply the place of an accusative to it : thus 
 also Utendum est (nobis) estate Ovid. In regard to their signi- 
 fication, there has been a considerable difference among gramma 
 rians, some asserting that it is active, and some, passive. 1 believe 
 it will be generally found, that they have the same signification 
 as their verbs, that is, when these are active, they are active ; and 
 when these are neuter, they are so likewise. It may be inferred 
 from their government of other cases, besides the dative which all 
 gerunds in dum with the verb est govern, that they have an active 
 signification, those which come from neuter verbs being excepted. 
 That they may be turned into the passive participle in dus is no 
 decisive argument in favour of their being passive, since, although 
 the general meaning in both forms may be similar or nearly so, yet 
 there is a difference in the precise mode of the respective expres- 
 sions. Thus, if we say In percipiendojructus, the meaning is ac- 
 tive, and is equivalent to Cumpercipiasfructus. If we say In per- 
 cipiendisfructibus, the turn of expression seems passive, Cumfruc- 
 tus percipiantur. As active verbs are sometimes used absolutely, 
 or as neuters, so their gerunds are sometimes found having an ab- 
 solute or apparently neuter signification : thus, Pueros ante urbem 
 
 lusus causd exercendique producers Liv. Quum Jugurtha Tisi- 
 
 diumad imperandum vocaretur Sail. In the former a personal pro- 
 noun may be understood ; and in regard to the latter, which some 
 explain by considering ad imperandum as equivalent to adimperari^ 
 or ut ei imperaretur, it may be observed that it seemed to the Ro- 
 mans themselves so contrary to analogy, that Cicero writes " Quare 
 ades ad imperandum, sen parendum potius: sic emm antiqui lo- 
 quebantur. Ep. 9. 25. Thus also,- if we say Memoria cxcolendo, 
 sicut alia omnia, augeturQuinct. the meaning may be not si co- 
 latur, but si colas. Yet, if there are some who consider such ex- 
 amples as passive, it is a matter of little consequence. The foJU 
 
237 
 
 lowing are the principal instances which I have seen adduced to 
 prove their passive signification ; Athenas quoque erudiendi causd 
 missus Justin, i. e. for the sake of being instructed, or for 
 the sake of instruction ; but this may be interpreted actively, 
 ut eum aliquis erudiat. Carpit enim vires paulatim, uritque viden- 
 do femina (bos) Virg. generally rendered by being seen, or as 
 equivalent to dum vidctur ; but may not the real meaning be by 
 seeing him? Thus also Charta emporetica inutilis scribendo 
 Plin. Aqua utilis bibendo Plin. Res ad judicandum difficilis 
 Cic. These, however, although the meaning does appear passive, 
 may be interpreted actively. Indeed, no ambiguity arises, in En- 
 glish, from giving them what is, at least mjbrm, an active interpre- 
 tation ; thus, we may say,paperfafor writing, orjfa to write upon, 
 while we mean, Jit for being written upon ; water jit for drinking, 
 or to drink, or Jit to be drunk; a matter difficult to decide, &c. That 
 the English gerund, participle, or verbal noun, in ing, has both 
 an active and a passive signification, there can be little doubt. 
 Whether the Latin gerund has precisely a similar import, or 
 whether it is only active, it may be difficult, and, indeed, after 
 all, it is not of much moment, to ascertain. 
 
 RULE XLVII. The Gerund in di is governed by substan- 
 tives, or adjectives : as, 
 
 Tempus legendi, Time of reading. 
 
 Cupidus discendi, Desirous to learn. 
 
 Note 1. The substantives are such as amor, causa, gratia, stu- 
 dium, tempus, occasio, ars, Jacidtas, otium, cupido, voluntas, con- 
 suetudo, locus, licentia, venia, vis, &c. ; thus, Amor habendi Cic. 
 It is observed, that gratid and causd are generally placed after 
 the gerund: as, Pabulandi causa Goes. Purgandi gratia Caes. 
 Mala et impia consuetudo, est contra deum disputandi Cic. but 
 that, when used in any other case than the ablative, they may 
 be placed before : as, Equitatum per causam pabulandi emissum 
 Caes. 
 
 Note 2. The adjectives are chiefly such as denote desire, know- 
 ledge, remembrance, and their contraries ; as peritus, imperitus, cu- 
 pidus, insuetus, certus, rudis, &c. belonging to Rule XIV : thus, 
 Docendi peritus Quinct. Certus eundi Virg. Insuetus navigan- 
 cft-Caes. 
 
 Note 3. The infinitive is sometimes used for this gerund, espe- 
 cially by the poets ; as Tempus abire, Occasio scribere, &c. for ab- 
 eundi, scribendi. Studium quibus arva tueri Virg. Tempus sol- 
 vere colla Virg. Sometimes the gerund in dum with ad : as, Fa- 
 cultas ad dicendum Cic. equivalent to Facultas dicendi. 
 
 Note 4. The governing substantive is sometimes understood : 
 as, Cum haberem in animo navigandi Cic. i. e. propositum. This 
 sometimes happens to participles or gerundives : as, Regium impe- 
 
238 
 
 rium quod initio conservandae libertatis atque augenda reipullicce 
 fuerat Sail. i. e. causa. 
 
 Note 5. This gerund is sometimes followed by the genitive plu- 
 ral, instead of the accusative. See Rule XLV, Note 4. 
 
 RULE XLVIII. The gerund in do of the dative case is 
 governed by adjectives signifying usefulness or fitness : as, 
 
 Charta utilis scribendo, Paper useful for writing. 
 
 Note 1. Thus also, Charta emporetica est inutilis scribendo 
 Plin. Ferrum habile tundendo Plin. 
 
 Note Q. The adjective is sometimes suppressed: as, Tu non sol- 
 vendo eras Cic. Radix ejus vescendo est Plin. Supply par, ha 
 bilis, aptus, or some similar word. 
 
 Note 3. This gerund sometimes depends upon a verb : as, Epi 
 dicum qucerendo operam dabo Plaut. Ut nee triumviri accipiundo 
 nee scribes referundo sitfficerent Liv. Is censendo Jinisfactus est 
 Liv. 
 
 Note 4. Sometimes the gerund in dum with ad is used instead o 
 this construction : as, Qua pecude, quod erat ad vescendum homi- 
 nibus apta, nihil genuit naturafcecundius Cic. 
 
 Note 5. This gerund is governed not only by adjectives signify, 
 ing usefulness, fitness, or the contrary, but by other adjectives 
 also: thus, Illud ediscendo, scribendoque commune est Quinct 
 Dat operam ne sit reliquum poscendo atque auferendo Plaut. Te- 
 lum, utfodiendo acuminatum pariter, et sorbendo Jistulosum esset- 
 Plin. 
 
 RULE XLIX. The Gerund in dum of the accusative case 
 is governed by the preposition ad or inter : as, 
 
 Promptus ad audiendum, Ready to hear. 
 
 Attentus inter docendum, Attentive in time of teaching. 
 
 Note 1. It is likewise sometimes governed by ante, circa, or ol: 
 thus, Ad ppenitendum properat qui citb judicatPubl. Syr. Age, 
 Tityre, et inter agendum. . . . caveto Virg. Ante domandum In- 
 gentes tollent animos Virg. Plus eloquentia circa movendum valet 
 Quinct. A quo pecuniam ob absolvendum acceperis Cic. 
 
 Note 2. As the gerund in dum is the nominative before est, so, 
 consequently, it is the accusative before esse expressed or under- 
 stood : as, Qui dicerent dignitati esse serviendum, reipullicce (esse) 
 consulendum Cic. See Rule XLVI, Note 4. 
 
 Note 3. This gerund is sometimes construed with haleo : as, 
 Quum enitendum haberemus, ut (juod parentibus datur, et orbis pro- 
 laretur Plin. When the accusative is added, the gerundive or 
 participle in dus is used : as, Ut nihil discendum haleres tempore 
 docendi Plin. 
 
8*1 
 
 RULE L. The gerund in do of the ablative case is go- 
 verned by the prepositions a, ab, de, e, ex, or in : as, 
 
 Pcena a peccando, absterret, Punishing frightens from 
 
 sinning. 
 
 Note 1. Thus also, Aristotelem non deterruit a scrilendo Cic. 
 He transeundo in EptrumCic. Ab revocando ad indtandos hor- 
 tandosque versus milites Liv. .r assentando Ter. file quident 
 in recusando perstabat Liv. It is, though seldom, governed by 
 pro or cum: as, Pro vapulando abs te mercedem petam Plaut. 
 Ratio recte scribendijuncia cum loquendo est Quinct. 
 
 Note 2. The gerund in do, says Mr. Seyer, is found governing 
 a genitive: as, Cujus autem in dicendo aliquid reprehensum est Cic. 
 Here I am inclined to concur in opinion with Dr. Crombie, whose 
 words I take the liberty to use. ' * That possessive adjectives, and, 
 " consequently, the genitive singular of nouns substantive, are 
 " joined with verbals in io, there can be no question. Thus we 
 ic say, dictio mea, ejus dictio, &c. That, for the sake of euphony, 
 " the gerund is sometimes found governing the genitive of the pa- 
 " tient, or subject of the action, is likewise unquestionable: thus, 
 " Studio videndi patrum vestrorum. But I recollect no example, 
 " where the gerund is joined with a possessive adjective, or geni- 
 " tive of a noun substantive, where the person is not the patient, 
 " but the agent ; as dicendum meum, ejus dicendum, cujus dicendum. 
 " In truth, these phraseologies appear to me, not only repugnant 
 (< to the idiom of the language, but also unfavourable to precision 
 " and perspicuity. The example, which Mr. Seyer has adduced, 
 1f of the gerund governing the genitive of the agent, does by no 
 " means authorize his conclusion ; for cujus may evidently be go- 
 " verned by aliquid. Nihil ejus, nihil cujus, aliquid ejus, aliquid 
 " cujuSy * nothing of his,' ' nothing of whose/ ' any thing of his,' 
 " c. are expressions which I need not justify by any quotations; 
 " because to every classical scholar they must be perfectly fami- 
 " liar. 
 
 " Mr. Seyer has likewise said that the gerund is in signification 
 " the same with the infinitive, or the verbal in io. No two words 
 " can be considered as synonymous, or precisely the same in sig- 
 " nification, unless they be in all cases interconvertible terms. 
 " Now we may say legere est facile, lectio est facilis, but not legen- 
 " dum est facile. To explain the distinction between the gerund 
 " and the infinitive or the verbal in io, is beside the present pur- 
 " pose. It is sufficient to observe that they are not used indis- 
 " criminately." 
 
 Note 3. This gerund may be found, contrary to the opinion of 
 L. Valla, after verbs of motion : as, Ipse a dicendo refugisti Cic. 
 The gerundive also : as, Non videor omnino a defendendis homini- 
 lus sublevandisque discedere Cic. 
 
240 
 
 RULE LI. Or, the Gerund in do may be used without a 
 preposition, as the ablative of manner or cause : as, 
 
 Memoria excolendo augetur Quinct The memory is im- 
 proved by exercising it. 
 
 Defessus sum ambulanda Ter. I am wearied with walk- 
 ing- 
 
 Of the Changing of Gerunds into Gerundives 
 or Participles in dus. 
 
 RULE LII. Gerunds governing the accusative may be 
 elegantly turned into the participles in dus, which agree 
 with their substantives, in gender, number, and case : as, 
 
 Petendum est pacem, into Petenda est pax. 
 Tempus petendi pacem, Tempus petendre pacis. 
 
 Ad petendum pacem, Ad petendam pacem. 
 
 A petendo pacem, A petenda pace. 
 
 Note 1. Thus also Ejicienda est hcec mollities Ter. for Ejici- 
 endum est hanc mollitiem. Inita sunt consilia urbis delendce Cic. 
 for urbem delendi. Reparandarum classium causd Suet, for re- 
 
 parandi classes. Rerum suarum referendarum secum dominis 
 
 jusfiebat Liv. From the two last examples, (and many more 
 
 might be cited,) it is evident that Valla and Farnabius committed 
 a mistake, when they asserted that, on account of the noisy sound, 
 the gerund in di is seldom changed into the genitive plural of the 
 gerundive ! , but that either the accusative is retained, as in Studio 
 patres vestros videndi, or that the substantive, and not the gerund, 
 is put in the genitive plural, as in Patrum vestrorum videndi studio 
 Dummodo perpetiendo labori sit idoneus Colum. for perpetiendo 
 lalorem. Quce valeant ad gloriam adipiscendamCic. for adipiscen- 
 dum. His et qua taceo duravi scepeferendis Ovid, fovhcecferendo. 
 
 Note 2. This rule takes place, only when the verb may govern 
 an accusative : if it governs any other case, the gerund must be 
 used : as, Veritus ne relir/uos populares metus invaderet parendi sibi 
 Sail. Plus penc parcendo metis quam vincendo, imperium auxisse 
 Liv. There is, however, an exception in regard to the verbs 
 utor, (perhaps also, abutor,) fruor, fungor, and potior, which, 
 although they do not govern the accusative, (they did so for- 
 merly,) are construed according to this rule : thus, JEtas adhces 
 utenda idonea Ter. Justitice fruendce causd Cic. In omni mu- 
 nere fungendo Cic. Urbis potiundce cupido Justin. 
 
 Note 3. The gerundives must be in the same case as the gerunds 
 would have been, preserving, however, the gender and number of 
 the substantives. 
 
 1 When a relative follows, the gerund is used ; as Hie dies attulit initium di* 
 cendi qua vellemCic. not dicendorum eorum qua vellem. 
 
Note 4-. Although the form of expression in which the gerun- 
 dive is used be the more common, yet examples of the other form 
 frequently occur in Cicero, and in other writers of the best age 
 and authority : thus, Visendi demos potestas Liv. Petendi con- 
 sulatum gratia Sail. Venit ad, recipiendum pecunias Var. Nunc 
 purgando crimina, nunc qucedam fatendo - - - nunc monendo etiam 
 Patres Conscriptos Liv. Nullo loco deero, neque ad consolandum 
 neque ad levandumfortunam tuam Cic. Romam videndi causa 
 Virg. with many similar instances. .E^ nos lavando operam dede- 
 runt Plaut. is a very uncommon construction. 
 
 Note 5. Of the signification of gerunds sufficient notice has 
 been taken in Rule XL VI. And, although a few more instances 
 might be added, tending to confirm the opinion of their passive 
 acceptation, yet there is no doubt that they in general have an 
 active signification, although it is certain there are not wanting 
 examples in which they have, or seem to have, a passive one. 
 
 The gerund in dum of the nominative case, is construed by 
 Rule II ; the dative following it, by Rule XXV ; that in di by 
 Rules XI and XIV : in do of the dative case, by Rule XVI ; in 
 dum of the accusative case, by Rule LXVIII ; and that of the 
 ablative, by Rule LXIX, LXXI, or LV. 
 
 OF SUPINES. 
 
 RULE LIII. The Supine in um, is put after a verb of mo- 
 tion: as, 
 
 Abiit deambulatum, He is gone to walk. 
 
 Note 1. The supine in urn, like the gerund, is a verbal noun ; 
 and being, generally, placed after a verb of motion, it denotes the 
 nature of that action to which the motion tends. It commonly 
 retains the signification of the verb in o, whether active or neuter, 
 whence it comes, and governs the same cases: thus, Omnes lonos 
 perditum eunt Sail. Ut cubitum discessimus Cic. 
 
 Note 2. There are a few expressions in which the supine in um 
 follows a verb not strictly denoting motion, though motion may 
 be considered as implied ; such are Dojlliam nuptum Ter. Pam- 
 philam cantatum provocemus Ter. Cohortes ad me missum facias 
 Cic. Vos ultum injurias horlor Sail. Coctum ego> non vapu- 
 latum, dudum conductus fui Plaut. It is likewise put after par- 
 ticiples : as, Patriam defensum revocatus Nep. Spectatum ad- 
 vnissi Hor. 
 
 Note 3. There have been various disputes concerning the nature 
 of supines, and the part of speech to which they ought to be refer- 
 red. The general opinion seems to be, that they are mere verbal 
 nouns ; and some think that, although only two cases are com- 
 monly mentioned, um of the accusative and u of the ablative, the 
 former used after a verb of motion, and the latter after an adjec- 
 tive noun, they are found in other cases likewise, and even, it is 
 
 R 
 
242 
 
 said, in the plural number. Thus in such phrases as Cautum est ! , 
 fantum est, Pugnatum /, Comurrectum est, in which the verb is 
 said to be used impersonally, it is asserted that the nominative is 
 used. Horrendum auditu, Miralile visu, Collocare nuptui, are said 
 to contain the dative of the supine. In Eo spectatum y Vtmimus 
 qiicesitum, and the like, the accusative is used, governed by ad> 
 which is found sometimes expressed. Dictu opus est Ter. ; Mi- 
 grain difficilia Liv. ; Parvum dictu, sed immensum cestimatione 
 Plin. ; are considered to contain the ablative governed by in un- 
 derstood. In regard to their signification, likewise, there have 
 been differences of opinion. 
 
 The general opinion seems to be, that the supine in um signifies 
 actively, when it comes from an active verb, governing the same 
 case as the verb ; but that there are a few instances in which it ap- 
 pears to have a passive signification, such as Coctum ego, non vapu- 
 latum dudum conductus fui Plant, i. e. ut vapularem, sive verbe- 
 rarer. But this cannot, I think, be reckoned a decisive instance, 
 since the supine has here only the passive signification which in 
 . the active voice the verb itself possesses. Mulier quce usurpatum 
 isset Gell. i. e. quoe usurpatafuisset. The supine in u is said to 
 have an active signification, chiefly when it comes from neuter 
 and deponent verbs : thus, Foedum inceptu,foedum exitu Liv. i. e. 
 Cum incipit, cum exit. Quia C<zsar rams egressu Tacit, i. e. raro 
 egrediebatur. It has been, however, usually considered as passive, 
 and is convertible into the infinitive passive : as, Fessis leviora tolli 
 Pergama Graiis Hor. 2, 4, for sullatu. Adspici cognosciijite dig' 
 nissimum Mela. Notwithstanding this, and although it never 
 governs a case, and both supines are considered as coming from 
 the perfect participle in us, which has a passive signification, 
 (originally it had an active one likewise, ) it appears to me, that 
 the supine in u may, without materially altering the sense, be in- 
 terpreted actively. It is generally convertible into a verbal noun, 
 and these are for the most part understood in the sense of the ac- 
 tive voice ; thus, Auctor dignus leclu, or dignits lectione\ as well as 
 dignus legi t dignus quern legas, or dignus t/ui legatur. Hand mogna 
 memoratu res est Liv. may be either important to le me?itioned, 
 or, for me to mention. Acerbafatit Virg. may be translated bit- 
 
 1 While I mention this as the decision of several celebrated grammarians, 
 I do not pledge myself for the accuracy of their opinion, either in regard to 
 this case, or to the dative. That such words as cautum, ventum, pugnatnm y 
 &c. are participles, I entertain little douht. Those who wish to see the sub- 
 ject discussed are referred to Vossius, Anal. III. 1 1. and 42, and to Perizonius, 
 P. 441 and 461. The principal objection to the opinion that ventitm, and the 
 like, are participles in ventum est, &c. is, that being neuter verbs, they are not 
 supposed to have a passive participle. But if, as such, they admit venitur, they 
 may likewise ad^nit the neuter gender of a passive participle. The truth, I be- 
 lieve, is, that neuter verbs, used impersonally, have perfect participles, which 
 are considered as triptotes, having only the nominative, accusative, and abla- 
 tive neuter : thus, Slat-urn est, statum e'sse (licit, opus est stalo ; thus also, Pcrstta- 
 stivi cst, pcrsnas-uin fuse volo, illi* perxnaao. 
 
24-3 
 
 ter to le related, or for me to re/ate. But, as an ingenious writer 
 observes, " It must be confessed, that every question relating to 
 gerunds and supines is extremely doubtful : whichever side the 
 reader takes, he will find difficulties in accommodating any theory 
 to the practice of writers. They were originally, perhaps, both 
 active and passive, both substantives and participles ; some con- 
 structions and significations might grow obsolete, other similar 
 ones might be arbitrarily retained ; from whence arose that irre- 
 gular diction which was in use at the time of the best authors, 
 and which can be acquired only by attentive observation." 
 
 Note 4>. The supine in um with the verb iri constitutes the fu- 
 ture of the infinitive passive : as, Brutum, ut scrilis, visum iri a me 
 puto Cic. It never varies its termination ; for we do not say Illos 
 occisos iri, but illos occisum iri. Thus used its signification is said 
 by some to be passive; see, however, page 87. It is to be ob- 
 served, that the future signification arises neither from eo, nor from 
 the supines, but from the connection of both ; and that, as the 
 one action depends upon the other, it must necessarily be con- 
 sidered as contingent or future : thus, in Amatum ire and Amatum 
 iri, the former of which some grammarians have considered as 
 present, and the latter, as future, the time of going, as denoted 
 by ire or iri, is present, and as it precedes the action denoted by 
 arnatum, it follows that the loving is subsequent or future. In the 
 same way it is, that, by inference, the form " I will love," which 
 is composed of the present tense / will, and the infinitive to love, 
 is considered to express future action in regard to the loving, the 
 performance of the action willed being necessarily subsequent or 
 future to the present action of willing it. For this reason, Cur te 
 25 perditum ? Ter. is not to be esteemed equivalent to Cur te per- 
 dis? the former implying future destruction, thus, " Why are you 
 about to destroy yourself?" " Why are you going to destroy your- 
 self?" "Why are you acting in such a manner that the consequence 
 will be your destruction?" the latter denoting present destruction, 
 ' Why are you destroying?" or " WTiy do you destroy yourself?" 
 
 Note 5. The supine in um may be resolved into a finite verb 
 with ut -, thus, Spectatum veniunt, i. e. ut spectent. Postr/uam au- 
 dierat non datum iri Jilio suo uxorem Ter. i. e. fore ut uxor non 
 daretur; or, perhaps, rather, fore ut uxorem non darent. 
 
 Note 6. This supine may be varied by different constructions: 
 thus, Fenit oratum opem. Fenit opem orandi causa or gratid 1 . fe- 
 nit opis orandcz causa or gratid. Fenit ad orandum opem. Venit 
 ad orandam opem. Fenit opi orandae (uncommon). Fenit opem 
 oraturus. Fenit qui or ut opem oret. Fenit opem orare (poetical). 
 To these forms have been added Fenit opem orans, and Fenit de 
 oranda ope, both supported by classical authorities. But the for- 
 
 VVhere the substantive may be used in the plural, the genitive may be 
 substituted for the accusative ; thus, Fenit spectandi ludorum causa. See Rule 
 XLV, Note 4. 
 
 R2 
 
244 
 
 mer does not appear to me to be precisely equivalent in sense to 
 y^nit oratum opem or to the others, as it simply denotes " He 
 comes begging assistance," which does not imply that the intention 
 or purpose of the coming is to beg assistance, but merely that the 
 coming and the begging are concomitant or co-existent acts. 
 
 RULE LIV. The Supine in u is put after an adjective 
 noun: as, 
 
 Facile dictu, Easy to tell, or, to be told. 
 
 Note 1. Thus also, Nee visufacilis, nee dictu qffalilis ulli Virg. 
 Quod optimum factu videbitur, fades Cic. 
 
 Note 2. It is sometimes, but rarely, found after fas, nefas, and 
 opus: as, Hoc fas est dictu, Cic. Nefas visu Ovid. Ita dictu 
 opus est Ter. Scilu opus est Cic. Prudentius has used see/us 
 in like manner : as, Quod dictu scelvs est. It may be observed that 
 these have the force of adjectives, and are equivalent to licitum, 
 illicitum, necessarium, scelestum. 
 
 Note 3. It is sometimes put after verbs signifying motion from 
 a place : as, Primus cubitu surgat, primus cubitum eat Cato. It 
 is likewise found after other verbs. Those, however, who make 
 a distinction between supines and verbal nouns of the fourth de- 
 clension, will be inclined to refer such forms to the latter deno- 
 mination. 
 
 Note 4. It seems to be sometimes used for a dative case: as, 
 Aut mala tactu Vipera delituit Virg. Omnia postremo bima sen- 
 sibus et mala tactu Lucr. Hcec res neutiquajn neglectu est mihi 
 Ter. These may be considered either as the supines, or abla- 
 tive case governed by a preposition understood, or they may be 
 datives, as if is well known that the dative of the fourth declension 
 antiently ended in u. 
 
 Note 5. The supine in u, as has been already mentioned, is in 
 reality the ablative of a verbal noun governed by a preposition un- 
 derstood ; and it generally follows adjectives governing either the 
 dative or ablative, such as ajj'abilis, bonus, dignus, indignus,facilis, 
 difficilis, jucundus, injucundus, pulcher, utilis,foedus, turpis, rarus, 
 horrendus, gravis, asper, &c. Thus, Res horrenda relatu Ovid, 
 may be horrenda in relatu. Culitu surgat may be a cubitu. Quin- 
 tilian uses in the same sense Nee in receptu difficilis. Virgil has 
 Vesper e pastu vitulos ad tecta reducit, in both which the preposi- 
 tion is expressed. 
 
 , Note 6. This supine is convertible into the infinitive : thus, Ar- 
 dua imitate, cceterum cognosci utilia Val. Max. for utilia cognitu. 
 Indeed, as the second supine is used absolutely, that is, does not 
 govern a case, the infinitive is commonly used when the energy of 
 the verb is intended to pass to an object. Into the gerund in 
 dum with ad : as, Illud autem facile ad credendum est Cic. It is 
 
observed that this form is chiefly preferred either when there is no 
 supine, or when, if there be one, it cannot be used on account of 
 
 the words dependent upon the action of the verb. Into a verbal 
 
 noun: thus, Opus proscriptione dignum Plin. After verbs of mo- 
 tion it is observed that the verbal noun is much more frequently 
 used than this supine: as, A declines legionis cokortatione profectus 
 Caes. Jam JEtoli a populatione Acarnamcc Stratum redierant Liv. 
 Indeed, in these the supine could not be used, on account of the 
 genitives depending upon the verbals, since the supine, as such, 
 governs neither a genitive like a substantive, nor any case as part 
 of a verb. The verbals are also used in the dative : as, Aqua potui 
 jucunda Plin. Or in the accusative with ad: as, Tant/uam me- 
 diocritas prceceptoris ad intellectum atyue imilationem sit jacilior 
 Quinct. 
 
 Note 7. The supine in urn commonly follows verbs of motion; 
 the infinitive, other verbs ; the gerund in dum with ad, follows ad- 
 jective nouns. This last form is, however, frequently met with after 
 verbs of motion ; and the poets use also the infinitive after adjec- 
 tives. The supine in u and the present infinitive passive are 
 
 thus distinguished : the former has generally an adjective before 
 it; the latter has not, unless sometimes among the poets. Indeed, 
 gerunds, supines, and the infinitive, being considered as verbal 
 nouns substantive, it is not wonderful, that, in many instances, 
 the one noun may be used for the other, as they are all derived 
 from the same original. 
 
 ON THE CONSTRUCTION OF CIRCUMSTANCES. 
 
 Circumstances are five; CAUSE, MANNER, INSTRUMENT, 
 PLACE, and TIME; and they are common both to verbs and 
 nouns. 
 
 The Cause, Manner, and Instrument. 
 
 RULE LV. The Cause, Manner, and Instrument, are put 
 in the ablative : as, 
 
 Palleo melU) I am pale with fear. 
 
 Fecit suo more, He did it after his own way. 
 
 Scribo calamo, I write with a pen. 
 
 Note 1. Thus also, Cause; as, Pallet amore Hor. To this 
 refer such expressions as Insignis piciate, Major et maximus nalu, 
 Natione Syrus, &c. Qppidum nomine Bilrax Caes. Naturd tu 
 Hit pater, consiliis ego Ter. Some of these may be referred to 
 
 the Manner. Manner: as, More majorum Sail. Lento gradu 
 
 ad vindictam sui divina procedit ira Val. Max. Instrument : 
 as, Naturam expetlas fared Hor. Ccesus est virgis Cic. Some 
 refer to the Instrument, the means, as in Ami-cos vbscrvantid } rein 
 
246 
 
 parsimonid retinuit Cic. but such ablatives are better referred to 
 the Cause or Manner. 
 
 Note 2. The Cause is known by putting the question Why? or 
 Wherefore? The Manner, by How? And the Instrument, by 
 Wherewith ? 
 
 Note 3. The Cause sometimes takes the prepositions per, prop- 
 ter* ob ; de, e, ex, pros: as, Depulsus per invidiam Cic. Ea sus- 
 picio propter hanc causam fuitCic. Ob adulterium cccsi Virg. 
 Indeed, in some cases the preposition seems almost indispensable: 
 thus we should say Colo te ob vel propter virtutem, rather than vir- 
 tute. When the cause is a person, this preposition must be general- 
 ly used: as, Non est aquum me propter vos decipi Ter. Fessus 
 
 d e v id Cic. Vacillare ex vino Quinct. Nee loqul prce mcerore 
 potuit Cic. Sometimes a or ab is used : as, Animus tumidajer- 
 vebat ab ird Ovid, but these refer to the word considered rather 
 as the agent, than as the cause. 
 
 Note 4. The Manner is sometimes expressed by o, ab, cum, de, 
 ex, per : as, Quern celer adsuetd vcrsat ab arte puer Tibul. Cum 
 videret oratores cum severitate audiri, poetas autem cum voluptate 
 Cic. Diadema gesiavit de more rituque priscce religionis Suet. 
 Id non Jleri ex verd vitd, nec/ue adeo ex cequo et bono Ter. Quud 
 iter per provinciam per vim tentdssentCses. 1 
 
 Note 5. The Instrument, properly so called, scarcely ever ad- 
 mits the preposition : thus we do not say Interfecit eum cum gladio, 
 but gladio only. But, when the Instrument is spoken of not 
 strictly as material but as equivalent to the cooperating weans, 
 cum may be used : as, Cum meis copiis omnibus vexavi Amanienses 
 Cic. 2 Among the poets, however, a or ab is sometimes used : 
 as, Pectora trajectus ab ense Ovid. Other prepositions, as sub, 
 de, or in t are sometimes prefixed to the instrument : as, Exercere 
 solum sub vornere Virg. De manu cibos et aquam prcebere Co- 
 lum. But in this last, manu does not so much denote the instru- 
 ment by which the thing is done, as the place whence it is given. 
 The Vulgate has Vmiabo in virgd peccata eorum, and the like, 
 
 which are Hebraisms. Sanctius observes, that cum is not placed 
 
 before the Instrument, lest it might occasion ambiguity. Thus, 
 if we were to write Tetigi eum cum kasta, it might be doubtful 
 whether the meaning were, "I touched him with (and) the spear," 
 or, "I touched him with (i. e. he was touched by me with) a 
 spear." For this reason cum is omitted, unless when the meaning 
 is along with, and the examples cited to prove the contrary either 
 are suspicious, or imply a different sense. 
 
 Note 6. The ablative of the Instrument is to be distinguished 
 from the ablative of concomitancy , which is generally expressed 
 
 1 Sallust has Midta'Cum suo animo volvcbat and Cum animo rejmtans* 
 
 " It was noticed, under the construction of passive verbs, that;><?r generally 
 
 refers k> the means or secondary cause, a or ab to the source or original cause ; 
 
 us in Per Tlvaxybulum Lycijilium, ab cxcrdlu rcdpitiir Nep. 
 
247 
 
 wither///// as, Desinant obsidere cum gladiis curiam Cic. 1 To 
 this may be referred certain expressions in which the Instrument, 
 used in a general sense, the Manner, the Adjunct, or the like, is 
 denoted: as, Quid incipit facere cum tantis minis Plaut. Cognovi 
 te Romam venisse cum febri Cic. Ira procul absit, cum qua ni- 
 hil recte fieri potest Cic. Cum curd legere Plaut. Cum Jide 
 persolvere Suet. But in such instances the preposition is some- 
 times omitted : as, Multitudine Numidarum castra circumvenit 
 Sail. Sese omnibus armis Influvium dedit Virg. 
 
 Note 7. To this rule are referred the ablatives of the adjunct, the 
 matter of which any thing is made, and of the part affected : as, 
 Lepore, et humanitate, omnibus prcestitit Soaraies Cic. &re 
 cavo clypeus Virg. JEger pedibus Quinct. And also many 
 other constructions, which have been mentioned under other rules : 
 such as dfficere aliquem honore, Persequi odio, Gnudere equis, 
 
 Delibutus gaudio, &c. It is to be observed, however, that the 
 
 adjunct sometimes takes a preposition ; and that the matter is gene- 
 rally put in the ablative with de, e, or ex: as, Interea cum Musis 
 nos delectnbimus Cic. Templu*n de marmore Virg. Candela- 
 Irum factum e gemmis Cic. Naves totce factce ex robore Caes. 
 Sometimes the matter is put in the genitive : as, Nummus argenti; 
 crateres argenti Pers. in which the genitive may be governed by 
 ex re, or ex materia, understood. This seems an imitation of the 
 Greek construction, according to which they write Tov Mtpgov 
 iTfolya-sy lcr%vp(ov v\wv Xen. i, e. He built a chariot of strong 
 wood ; in which the genitive is, in reality, governed by l?c or diro, 
 understood, but sometimes expressed. 
 
 Note 8. The- ablatives of this rule, though used without a pre- 
 position, are governed by one understood, as is sufficiently mani- 
 fest from observing the construction of the vulgar languages, in 
 which it is always expressed. 
 
 Of Place. 
 
 RULE LVI. The name of a town is put in the genitive, 
 when the question is made by Ubi, [Where] : as, 
 
 Vixit Roma, He lived at Rome. 
 
 Mortuus est Londini, He died at London. 
 
 Note 1 . That is, the continuance or abode in or at a town is put 
 in the genitive, if the name be of the first or second declension : 
 as, Quid Romce faciam Juv. Is habitat Mileti Ter. It is ob- 
 served, however, that when the name is of the first declension, 
 and ends in e, it is better to change the termination into a, and to 
 say Negotiatur Mitylence, than Mitylenes, or, supplying the ellipsis, 
 in urbe Mitylenes. 
 
 1 Czcsar writes, Casar mbscyucbatttr omnibus copiis. 
 
21-8 
 
 Note C 2. Humi 1 , militice and belli (domi will be hereafter noticed ) 
 are also construed in the genitive, when the question is made by 
 ubi, the words in solo, in loco, or tempore, being understood: as, 
 Et humi nascentia fraga Virg. i. e. in solo. Prosternite humi 
 juvenem Ovid. i. e. ad solum vel terrain, in which it is to be ob- 
 served, that humi answers to the question Quo, denoting motion 
 to a place. Una semper militia et domifuimus Ter. It is like- 
 wise to be observed, that domi militicsque is the usual form and 
 order of the expression. Belli domique agitalatur Sail, in which 
 in loco seems understood. To these may be added duelli, terrce 
 and foci, which are said to be found, very rarely however, used 
 in this way : thus, Quce domi duellique male fecisti Plaut. Cum 
 vellet terrce procumbere Ovid. Here, however, terrce may be 
 the dative. Domi fodque Ter. But these are not to be imi- 
 tated. 
 
 Note 3. The names of towns belonging to this rule are some- 
 times, though very rarely, expressed in the ablative : as, Hujus 
 exemplar Romd nullum habemus Vitruv. for Romtz. Rex Tyro 
 decedit Justin, for Tyri. Pons, quern ille Alydofecerat Justin. 
 
 Note 4-. It is observed, that, when at denotes near or about a 
 place, the preposition ad is used : as, Bellum quod ad Trojam ges- 
 serat Virg. 
 
 Note 5. This rule is elliptical, in urbe, in oppido, or the like, 
 being understood. On which account, we cannot say Natus est 
 Romcc urbis Celebris, but Romce in celebri urbe, or in Romce cele- 
 Iri urbe, or in Romd celebri urbe; or, (but not so often,) Romcs 
 celebri urbe, which several forms are sanctioned by classical autho- 
 rity. 
 
 RULE LVII. But if the name of the town be of the third 
 declension, or of the plural number, it is put in the ablative : 
 as, 
 
 Habitat Carthagine, He dwells at Carthage. 
 Studuit Parisiis, He studied at Paris. 
 
 Note 1 . Thus also, Alexander Babylone mortuus est Cic. Car- 
 thaginefuit Cic. Quoniam Delphis oracula cessant Juv. It has 
 appeared to some grammarians, that nouns of the third declen. 
 sion are sometimes put in the dative, by the figure Antiptosis, be- 
 
 1 Mr. Jones (Lat. Gram. p. 96) observes, that " the nouns humi, domi, belli 
 militite, were originally written humoi, domoi, belloi, militiai ; but, by dropping 
 the preceding instead of the last vowel, they became by accident the genitive 
 instead of the ablative, humo, domo, bdlo, militia, which the sense requires.' 
 To form the ablative of the last, the final i must be removed, or supposed sub- 
 scribed. Domo is certainly found where the usual rule requires domi ; ant 
 names of towns, belonging to this rule, may be found in the ablative. May 
 not, then, originally, these names of towns have been generally expressed in the 
 ablative, which seems their natural or appropriate case, as well as those be- 
 longing to the third declension, or of the plural number? 
 
24-9 
 
 cause we find Convento Antonio Tiluri Cic. Nulla Lacedccmoni 
 tarn est nobilis vidua Nep. Ego aio hoc fieri in Grcecid et Cartha- 
 gini Plaut. But these are old ablatives similar to ruri for rurc. 
 
 Note 2. The ablative is governed by the preposition in, which 
 is sometimes expressed: as, In Philippis Thessalus ijuidam ei de 
 futurd victoria nunciavit Suet. Complures [naves'] in Hispalifa- 
 ciendas curavit Caes. 
 
 RULE LVIII. When the question is made by Quo, 
 [Whither,] the name of a town is put in the accusative: as, 
 
 Venit Romam, He came to Rome. 
 
 Profectus est Athenas, He went to Athens. 
 
 Note 1. That is, Motion to a town is put in the accusative : as, 
 Carthaginem rediit Cic. Et inde primum Elidem, deindc Thebas 
 venit Nep. Capuam iterjiectit Liv. 
 
 Note 2. The dative is seldom found : as, Carthagini nuncios mil- 
 tarn Hor. 
 
 Note 3. Names of towns are sometimes put after verbs of tell- 
 ing and giving, words which imply a sort of motion : as, Romam 
 erat nunciatum Cic. Messanam literas dedit Cic. 
 
 Note 4. It has been observed by Sanctius and Scioppius, that 
 Quo is an antient accusative similar to ambo and duo, and still con- 
 tinued in quocirca, quoad, &c., so that when we say quo vadis, in 
 or ad is understood. Hence, the government of the accusative 
 of this rule is obvious. The preposition is often expressed : as, 
 Consilium in Lutetiam Parisiorum transfert Cfes. Ad doctaspro- 
 ficisci Athenas Propert. It is almost needless to reply to the ob- 
 jection, that ad signifies merely at, and that in means only in, 
 since it is so well known, thai, although this be the case, when 
 something is denoted as situated near or in a place, they are like- 
 wise used to denote motion to a place. 
 
 RULE LIX. If the question be made by Unde, [Whence,] 
 or Qua [By or through what place,] the name of a town is 
 put in the ablative : as, 
 
 Discessit Corintho, He departed from Corinth. 
 
 Laodiced iter faciebat, He went through Laodicea. 
 
 Note 1. Thus also, Accepi Roma literas Cic. Multisvirisfor- 
 tlbus Tolosd, Carcasone, et Narbone nominatim evocatis Caes. her 
 Laodicedfaciebam Cic. Qucesitis Samo, 7/zo, Erythrii, per Afri- 
 cam etiam ac Siciliam et Italicas colonias, carminibus Sibyllce 
 Tac. 
 
 Note 2. When the question is made by r/ua, per is frequently 
 used, in order to avoid ambiguity : as, Cum iter per Tkebos face- 
 ret Nep. But when the verb is compounded with trans, it may 
 
250 
 
 be omitted: as, Cum Gracchus Pomcetium transiretCic. in 
 which the accusative is governed by the preposition in composi- 
 tion. 
 
 Note 3. The ablative is governed by a or al, or by in denoting 
 
 a sort of continued or protracted motion equivalent to that which 
 is expressed by through. 
 
 Note 4-. The foregoing rules concerning names of towns may 
 be thus recapitulated : the name of a town after in or at is put in 
 the genitive, unless it be of the third declension or plural number, 
 for then it is put in the ablative ; after to or unto, (the latter pre- 
 position is obsolescent, ) it is put in the accusative ; and after^rom 
 or through, in the ablative. 
 
 i 
 
 n 
 
 Of Domus and Bus. 
 
 RULE LX. Domus and Rus are construed the same way 
 as names of towns : as, 
 
 Ubi ? Manet domi, Where ? He stays at home. 
 
 (Rule LVI.) 
 Vivit rure or neri 9 He Jives in the 
 
 country. ( Rule 
 LVIL) 
 
 Quo ? Domum revertitur, Whither ? He returns home. 
 
 (Rule LVIII.) 
 Abiit rus, He has gone to 
 
 the country. 
 
 Vnde? Domo arcessilus sum, Whence? I am called from 
 
 home. ( Rule 
 LIX.) 
 
 Rediit rure, He has returned 
 
 from the coun- 
 try. 
 
 Note 1. Thus also: Ubi? Domi industria, foris justum imperi- 
 um Sail. Rure ego viventem, tu dicis in urbe beatum Hor. 
 Huri agere vitam Ter. Rttri is more frequently used than 
 rure ; but both are used, in prose as well as in poetry, by the 
 
 best classical writers. Quo? Ite domum Virg. Also, after 
 
 verbs in which motion is not so evidently expressed : as, Cum 
 dabis posthac aliquid domum literarum mci memineris Cic. Rus 
 ibo Ter. Cum rus ex urbe evolavissent Cic. -Unde? Nun- 
 cius ei domo venit Nep. Qui se domo non commoveruntCic. 
 Consilium domo petere Cic. Metuo pater ne rure redierit Ter. 
 
 N)te 2. D ) mi, does not admit any adjectives to be joined to it, 
 but mecKj tuce, suce, nostrfr, vest-fee, alienee: as, Apud eum sic fui, 
 tanquam domi mccu Cic. Multos annos domi nostr<z vw't Cic. 
 
251 
 
 Nonne mavis sine per iculo domi tuce esse, quam cum periculo alienee 
 Cic. 
 
 Note 3. With other adjectives domo is used, generally with the 
 preposition in : as, Sustinet in vidua tristia signa domo Ovid. 
 But Clamor intereajit tola domo Cic. without the preposition. 
 
 Note 4. When domus is followed by a genitive denoting the 
 possessor, either domi, or the ablative with a preposition, may be 
 used : as, Deprehensus est domi, or, in domo, Ccesaris Cic. ad 
 
 Att. Domo is sometimes used absolutely for domi: as, Aide 
 
 domo Virg. Domo me tenui Cic. We also find. Nee densa nasci 
 tur humoCol. 
 
 Note 5. When the question is made by quo, the preposition 
 may be either expressed or understood, when domus has the pos- 
 sessives meus, tuus, suits, &c. joined to it, or is followed by the 
 genitive of the possessor : as, Recta aporta domum meam venisse ; 
 neque hoc admiror, quod non ad tuam potius, scd illud, quod noti 
 ad suam Cic. Cumprima luce Pomponii domum venisse dicitur 
 
 Cic. Jubeo ad prcetoris domum Jerri Cic. With other 
 
 adjectives the preposition is generally expressed: as, Omnes ad 
 earn domum projecti sunt Cic. Si in domum meretriciam deducar 
 Ter. Yet, Sallust has Aurum atque argentum, et alia qua pri- 
 ma ducuntur, domum regiam comportant Jug. 76, 6, without the 
 
 preposition. When motion from a place is signified, a similar 
 
 construction seems to be followed : thus we say Profectus est do- 
 mo mea, tua, &c. or, e or a domo mea t tua, &c. : but not Profec- 
 tus est domo opulenta, magnificat, &c., but e or a domo opulenta, 
 &c. Thus also : Me domo med expulistis. Cn. Pompeium do- 
 mum suam compulistisCic. Remigrare in domum veterem e no- 
 vd Cic. Ad quern e domo Ccesaris tarn multa dclata sunt Cic. 
 In some of these, it appears to me that the variation of the con- 
 struction may perhaps arise from some little difference in the 
 significations of domus as denoting both home, figuratively, and 
 a house, primarily. 
 
 Note 6. Domos, when with the above-mentioned possessives, 
 is generally construed without a preposition : as, Alias alium do- 
 mos suas invitant Sail. But when with other adjectives, the 
 preposition is generally expressed : as, Quibus aqua in privates 
 domos inducitur Hint. B. Alex. Inque domos superas scandere 
 curafuit Ovid. Yet, Propertius has Ulteriusque domos vadere 
 Memnonias. i. 6, 4. Iret ut JEsonias aurea lana domos. iii. 9, 12. 
 
 Note 7- Rura is always preceded by a preposition : as, Jam 
 ubi vos dilapsi domos, et in rura vestra eritis Liv. But rus and 
 rure, even with an adjective, are found without a preposition : as, 
 Equum conscendit, et.rus urbanum contendit Justin. Qfiarfamt- 
 quc apud lapidem suburbano rurc substiterat Tac. Rurc is found 
 with a preposition : as, Ex rure in urbcm rcvertebatur Cic. 
 
 Note 8. Domi is said to be governed by in ccdibus ; the other 
 
252 
 
 cases of domus, and those of rus, are governed by prepositions 
 understood, and which, as has been shown, are frequently ex- 
 pressed. 
 
 RULE LXI. To names of countries, provinces, and other 
 places, (towns generally excepted,) the preposition is com- 
 monly added : as, 
 
 TTJ 9 f Natus in Italia, in 1 ^ 1Tl n f Born in Italy, in La- 
 Uhf { Latio, in urbe, &c. } Where ' \ dum, in aciiy, &c. 
 
 C Abiit in Italiam, ^ C He is gone to Italy, 
 
 Quo? 3 in Latium, in or > Whither ?< to Latium, to a ci- 
 (^ ad urbem, &c. J (^ ty, &c. 
 
 C Rediit ex Italia, ^ f He is returned from 
 
 Unde ?le Latio, ex urbe, > Whence ?< Italy, from Latium, 
 (^ &c. ) (^ from a city, &c. 
 
 {Transiit per~*\ f He passed through 
 
 Italiam, per I Through what j Italy, through La- 
 Latium, per \ place? | tium, through a 
 urbem, &c. j L C ^} T ? & c ' 
 
 Note 1. That is, The preposition is commonly expressed be- 
 fore the names of the larger places, such as countries, provinces, 
 islands, and the like : before the proper names of villages, moun- 
 tains, rivers, seas, woods, &c. ; and before appellatives : as, Ubi ? 
 In Italia Cic. In Lemno Ter. In FormianoCic. Lucus 
 in urbefuit Virg. Quo ? Nobis Her est in Asiam Cic. Te in 
 Epirum venisse gaudeo Cic. Annibal ad portas venisset Cic. 
 Unde ? Al Europd petis Asiam j ex Asia transis in Europam 
 Curt. Ex urbe tu rus habitatum viigres Ter. Qua ? her in Ci- 
 liciam facto per Cappadociam Cic. Per totum terrarum orbem 
 manavit V. Max. But these are sometimes expressed with- 
 out a preposition : as, Ubi ? Septimumjam diem Corey rat tenebamur 
 Cic. Quce mihijam Sami, sed mirabilew. in modum Ephesi, prcesto 
 fuit Cic. Numidice facinora ejus mcmorat Sail. Quo ? Inde 
 Sardiniam cum classe venit Cic. Navigare JEgyptum pergit 
 Liv. At nos hinc alii sitientes ibimus Afros ; Pars Scythiam, et ra- 
 pidum Cretcc veniemus Oaxen, Et penitus toto divisos orbe Britannos 
 Virg. Lavinaque venit Liltora Virg. Verla refers aures non 
 pervenientia nostras Ovid. Unde? Literce deinde Macedonia al- 
 latae Liv. Ut Juded profecti rerum potirentur Suet. Turn po~ 
 terat manibus summd tellure revelli Ovid. Atque imo Nereus ciet 
 cer/uora fundo Virg. Qua ? Totd Asia vagatur Cic. Manat 
 totd urbe rumor Liv. Ibam forte vid sacrd Hor. Sometimes 
 the accusative is found, per, or some other preposition, being un- 
 derstood : as, Ino ctiam prirnd terras cetate vagata est Propert. 
 Tyrrhenum navigat cequor Virg. But, notwithstanding the really 
 intransitive nature of the verbs, such accusatives are sometimes 
 said to be governed by them. 
 
253 
 
 Note 2. It has been seen in the preceding rules, that the names 
 of towns are generally found without a preposition : but it is very 
 often expressed : as, Ubi ? In Stymphalo mortuus est Terentius 
 Suet. Dum apud Zamam certaturSa]\. Quo ? Postquam hinc 
 in Ephesum alii"- Plant. Profectus sum ad Cupuam Cic. Gram- 
 marians mention a difference between Venit Romam and Venit ad 
 Romam\ The former, they say, denotes that he entered Rome ; 
 the latter, merely that he came to it. But there are not wanting 
 instances to show that ad is sometimes used also when entrance is 
 intended : as, Magni interest, quamprimum ad urbem me venire 
 Cic. iu which it is most probable that entrance is referred to. He 
 also says, Brundusium veni, vel potius ad moenia accessi, in which 
 it is evident, from the words following, that access only is intend- 
 ed ; Urlem unam mihi amicissimam declinavi s and that, otherwise, 
 if ad always denoted vicinity, it would have been sufficient to say 
 Ad Brundusium veni. But, however, the distinction is generally 
 observed : as, " Quum ad me venissent in castra ad Iconium 
 
 Cic." Unde? Ex Epheso hue ad meum sodalem literas mist 
 
 Plaut. A Brundusio nulla Jama venerat Cic. When the ques- 
 tion is made by unde, the preposition is very often expressed. 
 Grammarians mention a difference between Venit Rojnd, and Vc- 
 nit a Romd, asserting that the former denotes coming from the 
 inside, the latter from the outside or vicinity ; but this distinction 
 is often neglected. It has been already mentioned, that, when 
 the question is made by Qua, the preposition per is generally 
 used. 'With respect to the names of towns, it is to be observ- 
 ed, that, if an adjective or an appellative be added, the preposi- 
 tion is generally expressed : as, Magnum iter ad doctas projicisci 
 cogor AthenasPropert. Ad Cirtam, oppidum iter constituent 
 Sail. In Hispali oppido Plin. But even in such cases, the poets 
 sometimes omit it : as, Tyrid Carthaginequi mine Exspcctat Virg. 
 It is also with propriety omitted by prose writers, when other words 
 are depending upon the adjective, or when a possessive pronoun 
 is used : as, Capuamjlectit iter, luxuriantem longa felicitate &C.T 
 Liv. Malo vel cum timore domi esse, quam sine timore Athenis tuif 
 Cic. It is sometimes omitted, and sometimes expressed, before 
 compound names of towns ; as, Inde Carthaginem Novam iu hi- 
 lerna Annibalem concessisse Liv. In Alba Helvia inventa est vitis 
 Plin. It has been already mentioned, that prepositions are 
 frequently added to domus and rus ; and that ad is generally used 
 when vicinity is denoted. It may be added, that a similar remark 
 is applicable to apud', but that, although these two are often 
 used indifferently, the former denotes more particularly juxta, 
 or in proximo loco, close ly ; the latter circa or prope, about or 
 
 near. From this, and the preceding Note, it appears, that the 
 
 *practice of the best writers, in regard to the use of prepositions 
 before the proper names of places, is very capricious; that, be.- 
 fore the names of provinces, countries, &c. with which they are 
 
254 
 
 generally expressed, they are sometimes understood, and before 
 those of towns or cities, with which they are generally omitted, 
 they are sometimes expressed '. 
 
 Note 3. It is almost unnecessary to observe, that, although peto 
 is used before the names of towns, in the signification of going, 
 yet, as it is an active verb, denoting to seek, it governs the accu- 
 sative without a preposition : as, Vento petiere Mycenas Virg. 
 JEgyptum petere decrevit Curt. He resolved to go to jgypt, 
 or, literally, He resolved to seek ./Egypt. Thus also, with an 
 appellative, Scev&que petunt Tritonidis arcem Virg. 
 
 Note 4. The adverb versus, when used, is always put after the 
 names of places, sometimes with, but oftener without, the prepo- 
 sition ad or in : as, Ad Oceanum versus proftcisd julet Caes. In 
 Ilaliam versus navigaturus eral Cic. Amanum versus profecti 
 sumus Cic. 
 
 Note 5. The abverb usque is frequently joined to the names of 
 places, when the question is made by Quo, or Unde, the prepo- 
 sitions ad, a, ab, e, ex, de being sometimes expressed and some- 
 times understood; as, Usque ad Numantiam Cic. Usque Ennam 
 profecti Cic. Usque e Persid Plaut. Usque Tmolo petivit 
 Cic. Thus also, with in and trans : as, Utque in Pamphiliam 
 Cic. Trans Alpes usque transferri Cic. Instead of usque ad y 
 and usque ab, the poets sometimes say adusque, abusque : as, 
 Adusque columnas, Abusque Pachyno Virg. and Tacitus has Ani- 
 tnaiia marts Oceano abusque peliverat Ann. xv. 37, 2, in which 
 the compound word is put after the ablative which it governs. 
 
 Of Space, or the Distance of Place. 
 
 RULE LXII. The distance of one place from another 
 is put in the accusative ; and sometimes in the ablative : as, 
 
 Jam mille passus processeram, I had now advanced a 
 
 mile. 
 
 Abest ab urbe quingentis millibus. passuum, He is five 
 hundred miles distant from the city. 
 
 Note 1. Thus also, Cum abessem ab Amano'iler unius diel Cic. 
 Ventidius bldui spatio abest ab eo Cic. To this rule may be re- 
 ferred such expressions as Ire viam longam, Sept'mgenta rnillia 
 passuum ambulare, Tres pateat cosl'i spatium non amplius ulnas 
 Virg. &c. 
 
 1 Servius, taking notice that the rules of grammar require prepositions to 
 be joined to the names of provinces, but not to the names of towns, adds Sci- 
 endum tamen usurjmtum ab autoribus ut vel addant, vel dctrahant prceposiliones. 
 It may, however, be observed, that the rules of grammar can require nothing 
 beyond the usage of axithors, (by which he, doubtless, means prose writers as 
 well as poets,) since grammar was rather formed from them, than for them. 
 Si volet usus, Quern penes arbitrium est, ctjus, et nvrma loquendi~ Hor. 
 
255 
 
 Note 2. One of the substantives, expressing the distance, is 
 sometimes omitted : as, Castra, quce alerant bidui Cic. i. e. spa- 
 tium, iter, viam j or spatio, itinere, vid. 
 
 Note 3. When the place where a thing is done, is denoted 
 only by its distance, the distance is either expressed in the ab- 
 lative generally without a preposition, or in the accusative with 
 ad; as, Millibus passuum duolus ultra eurn castra fecit Cses. Non 
 jam a tertio lapide, sed ipsas Carthaginis portas obsidione quatiebat 
 Flor. Cum ad tertium milliarium consedisset Cic. But these 
 last seem to denote rather the place itself, than the distance of 
 one place from another. 
 
 Note 4. The excess of measure or distance is put in the abla- 
 tive only : as, Superat capite et cervicibus altis Virg. See Rule 
 XVIII. Note 2. 
 
 Note 5. The word of distance is governed in the accusative by 
 ad or per understood, and in the ablative, by a or ab. All these 
 are sometimes expressed, except perhaps the first : as, Per tola, 
 novem cmjugera corpus porrigitur Virg. A miUibus passuum mi" 
 nus duolus castra posuerant Caes. But it may be observed, that, 
 in the last, the question is made as well by ubi, (where,) as by 
 quanta intervallo, at what distance. 
 
 . Of Time. 
 
 RULE LXIIL Time is put in the ablative, when the 
 question is made by Quando [When ?] : as, 
 
 Venit hora tertid, He came at three o'clock. 
 
 Note 1. That is, the noun denoting a precise term of time, and 
 answering to the question, When ? is put in the ablative : as Noc- 
 te latent mendce Ovid. Initio per internuncios colloquitur Nep. 
 To which may be referred mane, diluculo, noctu: sero, raro, primo, 
 postremo, (tempore being understood,) quotannis, &c. words gene- 
 rally deemed adverbs, and also the old ablatives luci or lucu, tern- 
 port, vesperi. In the antiquated phrases, die quinti, seplimi, pris- 
 tini, crastini, there is probably an ellipsis of soils 1 . 
 
 Note 2. When the question is made by Quanta tempore, or In- 
 tra quantum tempus, (in what time?) time is put in the ablative: 
 as, Triduo audietis Cic. Quatuor tragosdias sexdecim diebus aib- 
 SQlvisse cum scribas Cic. Quod oppidum panels diebus, quibus eo 
 ventum erat, expugnatum cognoverant Cses. This is little different 
 from the question by cjuando. 
 
 Note 3. The part of time is frequently expressed by the prepo- 
 sitions 27Z, de, ad, per, intra : as, In tempore ad earn veni Ter. 
 Utjugulent homines, surgunt de nocte latrones Hor. Prcestofuit 
 ad horam destinatam Cic. Duo fuerunt per idem tempus Cic. 
 
 1 A word, when it implies time, falls within this rule ; as Pcllo Allobrogum 
 proximo Ca-s. 
 
256 
 
 Consul intra paucos dies moritur Liv. It is likewise expressed 
 with other prepositions, such as circa, circiter, prope, cis, in with 
 the accusative, ante, post) sub, cum t due attention being paid to 
 their several meanings. 
 
 Note 4?. Abhlnc is found with an accusative, or ablative, with- 
 out a preposition, ante being understood to the former, and in, 
 to the latter : as, Hoc factum est abhinc liennium Plaut. Quo 
 tempore ? Abhinc annis quatuor Cic. 
 
 Note 5. The English in is sometimes expressed by post : as, 
 He will return in six years, Post sexennium redilit Cic. But, 
 when the in can be omitted, without altering the sense, the noun 
 of time is put in the ablative : as In the following month, or The 
 following month, Mense proximo. In such expressions as one, 
 two, three o'clock, &c., the ordinal numbers are used instead of 
 the cardinal : as, At one o'clock precisely, Hord ipsa prima, and 
 the same change may be made in such expressions as, He had 
 been consul three years before : thus, Tertio is ante anno consul 
 fuer at. 
 
 Note 6. In such phrases as Profectus est id temporis Cic. Ist- 
 huc atatisTer. Illud horce Suet, used for eo tempore, isthac 
 relate, ilia hora, there seems to be an ellipsis of ad or circa, and 
 of some general substantive, such as negotium or tempus. 
 
 Note 7. It is evident that the ablative is governed by some pre- 
 position understood, and which, as has been already shown, is 
 often expressed. 
 
 RULE LXIV. When the question is made by Quamdiu, 
 [How long ?] time is put in the accusative, or ablative ; but 
 oftener in the accusative : as, 
 
 Mansit paucos dies, He staid a few days. 
 
 Sex mensibus abfuit 9 He was absent six months. 
 
 Note 1. That is, Words denoting the duration of time, and 
 answering to the question, How long ? are put in the accusative, 
 or ablative, but generally in the accusative : as, Duces diliguntur, 
 qui una cum Sertorio omnes annos fuerant Cses. Quatuor horis 
 neutro inclinata est pugna'Liv. To this rule is referred the ques- 
 tion by Quamdudum, [How long ago?] in such examples as Al- 
 hinc triennium commigravit hue vicinios Ter. 1 
 
 Note 2. The prepositions per, ad, in, intra, inter, are frequently 
 expressed : as, Quern per annos decent aluimus Cic. Si ad cen- 
 tesimum annum vixisset Cic. In diem vivere Cic. In dies, in 
 singulas koras, in posterum, in ceternum, &c. It is observed, that, 
 in such instances with ad and in, the prepositions cannot be 
 omitted ; and that they particularly mark the boundary or extent 
 of time, answering rather to the question Quousque, Till what 
 time, than to the question Quamdiu. Qui intra annos quatuor- 
 
 1 It is observed, that, in examples answering to the question by Quamdu- 
 dum, Quampridem, or A quo tempore ; the particle abhinc is usually expressed. 
 
257 
 
 decim tectum non subierintCsea. Qute inter decent annos nefarie 
 fiagitiosiequefacta sunt Cic. The difference between Intra decent 
 annos, i. e. Within ten years, and Inter decem annos, i. e. During 
 ten years, seems to be, that the former does not imply the whole 
 ten years, but within or less than that space, while the latter de- 
 notes the entire period. 
 
 Note 3. The manner of supplying the ellipsis in the following, 
 and in similar expressions, should be attended to : Annos natus 
 unum et vigintt Cic. i. e. ante. Tyrus septimo mense, quam op- 
 pugnari ccepta erat, capta est Curt. i. e.post. Minus diebus tri- 
 ginta in Asiam reversus est Nep. i. e. quam in. Siculi quot annis 
 tributa conferant Cic. i. e. tot annis quot or quotquot sunt. It is 
 observable, that the words answering to more, before, or after, am- 
 plius,ante, or post, do not influence the case of time : as, Tertium 
 amplius annum docet. Fit paucis post annis Cic. i.e. quam per 
 annum ; and in annis. 
 
 Note 4?. It has been observed, that the continuance of time may 
 be found in the genitive, as in Trium me.nsium molita cibaria 
 sibi quemque domo ajfferre jubent Caes. But it appears to me, 
 that, although duration may be here inferred, the genitive ex- 
 presses only its usual relation ; thus " food belonging to three 
 months," " food for three months," or " the food of three 
 months." If this be not allowed, there is an ellipsis of pro tem- 
 pore or pro spatio. 
 
 Note 4?. This construction is elliptical, the accusative depend- 
 ing upon per, in, inter, intra, or ad understood, but sometimes 
 expressed, and the ablative, upon in understood, but which is 
 scarcely found expressed. 
 
 Of the Ablative Absolute. 
 
 RULE LXV. A substantive and a participle whose case 
 depends upon no other word, are put in the ablative abso- 
 lute: as, 
 
 Sole oriente, fu- \ f The sun rising, (or, while the sun 
 
 giunt tenebr&t J \ riseth,) darkness flies away. 
 
 Opere peracto, lti~ 1 f Our work being finished, (or when 
 
 demus, j \ our work is finished,) we will play. 
 
 Note 1. That is, When two parts of a sentence respect diffe- 
 rent persons or things, or, when one event referring to another 
 is not connected with it by proper particles, but is expressed by a 
 noun and a participle constituting the subject of no verb, these 
 are put in the ablative absolute : as, Hac oratione habita, consi- 
 lium dimisit Caes. Suffragante Theramene, plebiscite restituitur 
 Nep. Ccesare venturo, Phosphore, redde diem Mart. When 
 the participle in dus, or rather the gerundive, is found in the ab- 
 lative vvith a noun, it arises from the construction ofwHwraer, ra- 
 ther than from the nature of this -rule. 
 
 8 
 
258 
 
 This ablative is named absolute, because, grammatically, it 
 depends upon no word expressed in the sentence; for, if the 
 substantive with which the participle is joined be the nominative to 
 some following verb, or be governed by any word going before, 
 then this rule does not take place. The usual signs, in English, 
 of this ablative, are whilst, "when, after, having, being, or some 
 other word in ing ; sometimes, however, the participle in ed, be- 
 ing being understood : as, " The enemy conquered, we sliall live." 
 
 Note 2. The antient ente or existente is frequently understood, 
 another noun or pronoun being joined in concordance : as, Quid 
 sine imperatore, adolescenhdo duce, efficere possent Caes. i. e. ex- 
 istente, a stripling (being] their leader. Nikil te ad me scripsisse 
 postea admirer, prcesertim tain novis rebus Cic. Me suasore at- 
 que impulsore, hoc Jactum Plaut. Thus also, Deo duce, Jnvita 
 Minerva, &c. 
 
 Note 2. Sometimes the participle only is expressed, in which 
 case the sentence supplies the place of the substantive, or nego- 
 lio, or some other word, is understood : as, Excepto, quod non si- 
 mul esses, ccetera l&tus Hor. Uxorum Hagitatione revocantur, 
 per legatos denuntiantibus, ni redeanl, subolem se exjinitimis qua;- 
 situras Justin, for denuntiantium. But this construction, in 
 which uxoribus or ipsis is understood, seldom occurs, and is not 
 to be imitated. There is one instance in Sallust, in which a no- 
 minative seems to be placed absolutely ; Exercitus, amisso duce, 
 ac passim multis sibi quisque imperium petentibus, brew dilabitur 
 Jug, 18, 3. But it is conjectured that quisque may be used for 
 qmsque or quibusque. A few similar anomalies might be mentioned. 
 
 Note 4. In such antiquated phrases as Nobis prasente Plaut. 
 Absente nobis Ter. in which some grammarians consider the par- 
 ticiple as an indeclinable word, or a preposition, it may be ob- 
 served, that, if the sense is not correctly expressed, the rules of 
 Syntax seem to be still less regarded. 
 
 Note 5. When the verb is passive, having is necessarily changed 
 into being : as, Cicero having said these things, sat down, Cicero, 
 his dictis, consedit, literally, Cicero, these things being said, sat 
 down ; in which, as the pronoun is neither governed by any word, 
 nor the nominative to any verb, and as the proper English of die- 
 tus is being said, both the pronoun and participle are put in the 
 ablative absolute. But, when the English is having and the 
 verb deponent, no such change is necessary, since the two parti- 
 ciples precisely correspond to each other ; thus, Cicero hcec locu- 
 tus consedit, Cicero having said these things sat down, the proper 
 signification of locutus being having said. It is observed, that the 
 participles of Common verbs may either agree in case with the 
 substantive before them, like the participles of deponent verbs, 
 or may be put in the ablative absolute, like the participles of pas- 
 sive verbs : as, Romani adepti libertatem Jloruerunt : or Romani, 
 libertate adeptd, Jloruerunt. But, as the participles of Common 
 
259 
 
 verbs are seldom used in a passive signification, they are very 
 rarely found in the ablative absolute. 
 
 Note 6. It often happens, that, when in English two distinct 
 events are expressed by two finite verbs connected by and, the 
 conjunction is omitted in Latin, and the noun and verb preceding 
 it are put in the ablative absolute : as, " He made the signal, and 
 attacked the enemy," Signo dato, hostes invasit. Sometimes the 
 prior or contemporary event, which is usually expressed in the 
 ablative absolute, is made the object of the action of the follow- 
 ing verb, when the cases following both verbs denote an identity 
 in regard to the object : as, " He conquered the enemy and," 
 or, " Having conquered the enemy, he compelled them to surren- 
 der," may be expressed by, Hostes victos in deditionem redegit, or, 
 passively, Hostes victi in deditionem redacti sunt. Thus also Ovid, 
 Et (boves) occultat abactas. 
 
 Note 7. This ablative may be resolved into a nominative with 
 cum, dum, quando, postquam, si, quoniam, &c. and a verb of the 
 indicative or subjunctive mood : as, Augusto imperante, or dum 
 Augustus imperabat. Lectis literis, or postquam literce sunt lectce. 
 Me duce, or si ego dux ero. 
 
 Note 8. This ablative, although named absolute, is not only de- 
 pendent, in sense, upon a verb, but is, in reality, governed by 
 some preposition understood, such as sub, cum, a, ab, in, which 
 are sometimes expressed : as, Sub te (existente) magistro Virg. 
 Cum diis berie jwvantibus arma capite Liv. who elsewhere says, 
 Ut diis benejuvantibus bellwn incipiamus, omitting the preposition. 
 Moremque sinistrum sacrorum Druidce positis repetistis ab armis 
 Lucan. In quo facto domum revocatus, capitis accusatus, absolvi- 
 tur Nep. Sole sub ardenti Virg. In the last example, it seems 
 doubtful to me, whether ardenti is to be considered as an adjec- 
 tive, or a participle, since it is to be observed, that the termina- 
 tion in e is almost universally used, when the ablative is abso- 
 lute. 
 
 Note 9. It was observed, in Note 1, that this ablative is used, 
 when two parts of a sentence respect different persons or things : 
 this is generally true, but there are not wanting instances, in which 
 the same person, being spoken of in a diversity of time or condi- 
 tion, is the ablative to the participle, and the nominative to the 
 verb : as, Me duce ad hunc voti Jtnem^ me milite, veni Ovid. 
 Nobis vigilantibus, et midtum in posterum promdentibus, populo 
 Romano consentiente. erimus prqfecto liberi brevi tempore Cic. 
 But, generally, in such instances, the nominative is used : as, 
 lens in Pompejanum bene mane hcec scripsi Cic. Interrogate 
 incolce non patiuntur errare Senec. rather than me eunte, inter- 
 rogatis incolis. 
 
 S "2 
 
260 
 
 OF THE CONSTRUCTION OF WORDS 
 INDECLINABLE. 
 
 OF ADVERBS. 
 
 RULE LXVI. Adverbs are joined to verbs, participles, 
 nouns, and other adverbs : as, 
 
 Bene scribit. He writes well. 
 
 Fortiter pugnans, Fighting bravely. 
 
 Servus egregieJZdelis, A servant remarkably faithful. 
 
 Satis bene. Well enough. 
 
 Note 1. Thus also; Bonis quod benefit, haud peril Plaut. 
 Male parta, male dilabuntur Cic. Vir apprime nobilisTer. 
 Homerus plane orator Cic. Admodum pueila Liv. Adverbs 
 are seldom joined to substantives ; and in the last example, the 
 substantive seems to be used as an adjective. Tu vero Platonem 
 nee nimis valde unquam, nee nimis scepe laudaveris Cic. They 
 are also found with pronouns, and prepositions : as, Plane noster, 
 Longe ultra tcrminum, &c. 
 
 Note 2. It is observed, that the intensive words apprime, ad- 
 modum, vehementer, perquam, valde, &c. are generally joined to 
 positives ; likewise per, in composition ; sucli phrases also as in 
 primis, cum primis, ante alios, &c. ; and quam subjoined to other 
 intensives : as, Gratum admodum Jeceris Cic. Prceterquam 
 pauci Cic. But some of these are sometimes found with the 
 superlative. 
 
 Note 3. Tarn and quam generally connect positives, seldom 
 superlatives, and seldomer comparatives : as, Nemo orator tarn 
 multa scrtpsit, quam multa sunt nostra Cic. Quam quisque pes" 
 sinie fecit, tarn maxime tutus est Sail. Non tarn in bellis et in 
 prcsliis, quam in promissis Jlrmiorem Cic. When it denotes 
 wonder, pity, or interrogation mixed with wonder, quam is ge- 
 nerally joined with positives ; when used for quantum, how much, 
 it is joined to positives : as, Quam sint morosi qui amant, vel ex 
 hoc intelligi potest Cic. ; but when used for quantum, the verb 
 possum following, it is generally joined to superlatives : as, Quam 
 maximis itineribus potest, in Gallium contendit Cses. ; used for 
 wide, it is elegantly joined to superlatives : as, Utatur verbis 
 quam usitatissimis Cic. Perhaps, here, possum may be implied. 
 
 Note 4. Parum, multum, ?iimium > tantum, quantum, aliquantum, 
 are generally joined to positives, sometimes also to comparatives : 
 as, Socer hujus vir multum bonus est Cic. Forma viri aliquan- 
 tum amplior humana Liv. 
 
 Note 5. Paulo, nimio, aliquanto, eo, quo, hoc, impendio, nihilo, 
 are generally joined to comparatives: as, Eo gravior est dolor, 
 
261 
 
 quo culpa major Cic. Tanlo, quanto, multo, to comparatives or 
 superlatives : as, Omne animi vitium tanto conspectius in se Crimen 
 habet, quanta major qui peccat habelur Juven. Tanto pessimus 
 omnium poeta, quanto tu optimus omnium palronus Catull. Mul- 
 to potentiusSenec. Multo jucundissimus Cic. 
 
 Note 6. Longe is generally joined to superlatives, sometimes 
 to comparatives, but seldom to positives : as, Suevorum gens est 
 longe maxima et lellicosissima Germanorum Caes. ; with adjectives 
 
 of diversity also : as, Longe mihi alia mens est Sail. Pedilus 
 
 longe melior Lycus Virg. Longe opulentus Apul. 
 
 Note 7. Facile, used for haud dulie, is joined to superlatives, 
 or to words of similar import : as, Vit unus totius Grades facile 
 doctissimus Cic. Homo regionis illius virtute facile princeps Cic. 
 
 The nature of two negatives in the same clause, or in different 
 clauses, has been noticed in Etymology ; and the government of 
 adverbs, in regard to moods, will be noticed under that of Con- 
 junctions. 
 
 RULE LXVP. Some Adverbs of Time, Place, and Quan- 
 tity, govern the genitive : as, 
 
 Pridie illius diez, The day before that day. 
 
 Ubique gentium. Every where. 
 
 Satis est verborum. There is enough of words. 
 
 Note 1 . The Adverbs of Time are Interea, postea, inde, tune : 
 as, Te interea loci cognovi Ter. Postea loci Sail. Inde loci 
 Lucr. Tune temporis Justin. 
 
 Note 2. The Adverbs of Place are Ubi and quo, with their com- 
 pounds, ubique, ubicunque, ubiubi, ubinam, ubivis, aliubi, alicubi, 
 quocunque, quovis, aliquo, quoquo ; also eo, alibi, hue, huccine, wide, 
 usquam, nusquam f longd, ibidem, &c. : as, Ubi terrarum sumus 
 Cic. Quo hinc nunc gentium aufugiam Plant. Eb audacice pro- 
 vectus est Tac. Tu autem abes longe gentium Cic. &c. 
 
 Note 3. The Adverbs of Quantity are Abunde, qffhtim, largiter, 
 nimis, quoad, sat, satis, parum, minime : as, Se jampridem poten- 
 ticz gloriceque abunde adeptum Suet. Divitiarum qffatim Plaut. 
 Auri et argenti largiter Plaut. Nimis insidiarum Cic. Quoad 
 ejusjacere potuerisCic. * Sat rationis Virg. Satis eloquenlice, 
 
 1 Dr. Crombie, however, has clearly shown, that quoad is uniformly an ad- 
 verb, incapable of government, and that when it appears with an accusative, 
 it is a corruption of quod ad, when with a genitive, a corruption for quod. In 
 the following example from Livy, Quod stipendium serius quoad diem prersta- 
 rct, Cellarius reads quam ad diem, and Gesner observes, " Et monuit olim 
 Vorstium Gronovius, melius legi quam ad diem ; licet vulgatam librorum lec- 
 tionem et ipse, et nunc Drakenborchius, servavcrint." JNoltenius also calls 
 ?uoad with an accusative pravum parliculcc usurn. Tursellinus says "Quoad 
 hoc, quoad illud, Latine dici non videtur ; sed quod ad hoc spectat, quod ad U- 
 \lud pcrtiiict>" Perizonius observes, that in the passages in which quoad ejus oc- 
 
262 
 
 sapientice parum Sail. Minime gentium Ter. Several of these 
 seem to have the force of substantives. 
 
 Note 4s Ergo, denoting for the sake, instar, and partim, usu- 
 ally enumerated among adverbs, are real substantives, and, as 
 such, govern the genitive. 
 
 Note 5. Pridie and postridie take the genitive or accusative ; 
 as, Pridie ejus diet Cic. Postridie ejus diet Caes. Pridie Quin- 
 quatrus Cic. Postridie ludos Cic. Thus also, Pridie andpost- 
 ridie, kalendas, nonas, idus ; rather than kalendarum, &c. 
 
 Note 6. In regard to such constructions, it may be observed that 
 Interea loci may be Inter ea negotia loci ; Eb, quo, and the like, 
 are supposed to be the old datives eoi, quoi, with loco or negotio 
 understood ; or they may be accusatives plural ; others, as abun- 
 de, ubi, longe, have the force of nouns. Pridie ejus diei may be 
 die priore ante tempus ejus diei ; and when pridie and postridie 
 are followed by an accusative, ante or post is understood. 
 
 Note 7. En and ecce take the nominative or accusative : as, 
 En causa, cur dominum servus accusat Cic. En Paridis hostem 
 Senec. Ecce nova turba Cic. Ecce rem Plaut. Hem, used 
 for ecce, is construed with an accusative : as, Hem astutias Ter. 
 It is observed, that when these words are used, merely for the 
 purpose of showing, they are commonly followed by a nomina- 
 tive ; but that when they express scorn, contempt, reproof, or blame, 
 they are commonly construed with the accusative. 
 
 The nominative is supposed to be dependent on such words 
 as adest, or existit, understood ; and the accusative is thought 
 to be governed by some part of video, or the like, understood. 
 
 RULE LX VII. Some derivative Adverbs govern the case 
 of their primitives : as, 
 
 Omnium clegantissime \ ( He speaks the most elegantly 
 
 loquitur, ) \ of all. 
 
 Vivere convenienter \ /To live agreeably to na- 
 
 natura, J \ ture. 
 
 Note 1. Thus also, Omnium optime Cic. by Rule XV. Thus 
 too, Scepissime omnium, diutissime omnium, although the superla- 
 tives, whence the adverbs come, are not used. Congruenter 
 
 naturae convcnienterque vivere Cic. Huic obviam civitas proces- 
 
 smrtCic. Rule XVI. Alftpedem Colum. Altt tribus pe- 
 
 dibus Pallad. Rule XVIII. Quam proxime potest hostium cas- 
 
 trls castra communit Caes. Quiproxime Rhenum incolunt Caes. 
 
 curs, the latter word is under the government of aliquid understood; a con- 
 jecture supported neither by example nor analogy. On the contrary, Dr. 
 Crombie contends for the substitution of yuod ejus, as being a reading which 
 i- consistent with the sense and the rules of analogy, and in several instances 
 approved by editors of the greatest erudition. 
 
263 
 
 The accusative is the more common case, and it is governed by 
 ad understood, in which way propior and proximus are sometimes 
 construed: the dative^ belongs to Rule XVI. Amplius opinione 
 morabatur Sail. Prius tud opinione hie adero Plaut. Rule XIX. 
 Thus also, Diutius expectatione, although diutior does not exist. 
 Vossius adds Clanculum patres Ter. considering clanculum as a 
 derivative from clam, which, being itself rather an adverb than a 
 preposition, admits an accusative or an ablative after it, through 
 certain prepositions understood. Such elliptical expressions as 
 Plus duo millia, Minus quadringenti. Plus quingentos colaphos, 
 Amplius sexcenti, Amplius octingentos equos, sometimes referred to 
 this Rule, have been noticed tinder Rule XIX ; and Vossius ob- 
 serves, in regard to them, that it is doubtful whether the compa- 
 ratives be adverbs or nouns. 
 
 Note 2. To complete some of the preceding constructions, the 
 adverbs require the same ellipses to be supplied after them, as 
 their adjectives. 
 
 OF PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 RULE LXVIII. The prepositions ad, apud, ante, &c. go- 
 vern the accusative : as, 
 
 Ad patrem, To the father. 
 
 RULE LXIX. The prepositions #, ab, abs, &c. govern 
 the ablative : as, 
 
 A patre, From the father. 
 
 RULE LXX. The prepositions in, sub, super, and sub- 
 ter, govern the accusative, when motion to ar place is signi- 
 fied 1 : as, 
 
 Eo in scholam, I go into the school. 
 
 Sub mcejiia tendit Virg. He goes under the walls. 
 
 Incidit super agmina Virg. It fell upon the troops. 
 
 Ducit subterfastigia tecti \ J* He brings him under the 
 Virg. J \ roof of the house. 
 
 1 It is observed, that in denoting motion to a place is expressed, in English, 
 by to or into ; and in denoting motion or rest in a place, by the English in ; 
 and this is generally true. But, in the phrase In bonam partem acdpcre 
 Cic. in which there certainly is motion to, the English idiom requires in " To 
 take in good part." We also say " They hid themselves in the woods," mean- 
 ing they retired into the woods for concealment, Sese in sylvas abdiderunt 
 Caes. Sese in sylvis abdiderunt would imply that they Were in the woods pre- 
 viously to their concealment. Thus also " To givem marriage," Dare in ma" 
 trimonium Cic. ; " To speak in (to the) praise," Dlccrt in laudcm Aul. Gtil. ; 
 *' In future," In fiilurum ; " In a wonderful manner," Mirum in modum. con- 
 sunt omnium mentesC&n, ; In Junonis honorem Her. In honour, or to 
 the honour." 
 
264 
 
 RULE LXXI. But if motion or rest in a place be signi- 
 fied, in and sub govern the ablative, super and subter either 
 the accusative or ablative : as, 
 
 Sedeo, vel discurro, in 1 J I sit, or run up and down, in 
 
 sckold, J \ school. 
 
 Recubo, vel ambulo, sub \ f I lie, or walk, under the sha- 
 
 umbrd, ) \ dow. 
 
 Sedens super arma Virg. Sitting above the arms. 
 Fronde super viridi Virg. Upon the green grass. 
 Vena subter cutcm di- \ ( The veins dispersed under the 
 
 spersa Plin. J \ skin. 
 
 Subter littore Catull. Beneath the shore. 
 
 Note 1. Such instances as Esse in potestatemCic. for in po- 
 testate, are rare 2 . For such, and other remarks on prepositions, 
 the learner is referred to Prepositions, in Etymology, to which 
 it seems unnecessary to make any additional remarks. 
 
 RULE LXXI I. A preposition often governs the same 
 case in composition, that it does out of it : as, 
 Adeamus scholam^ Let us go to school. 
 Exeamus schola, Let us go out of school. 
 
 Note 1. Thus also, Casar omnem equitatum pontem transducit 
 Caes. Hie ut nam egressus est Nep. Supersedes hoc labore 
 itineris Cic. 
 
 Note 2. The preposition is often repeated : as, Quod talem vi- 
 rum e cimtate expulissent Nep. Nunquam accedo ad te> quin abs 
 te abeam doctiorT&c. 
 
 Note 3. Some verbs never have the preposition repeated after 
 them : as, Affaris, attoquor, allatro, alluo, accolo, circumnenio^ cir- 
 cumeO) circumsto, circumsedeo, circumvolo, obeo, preetereo, abdico t 
 effero, everto, &c. The compounds of trans sometimes repeat 
 the preposition. Some of the compounds with inter , as Interci- 
 no, intererro, ivterfluo, interfuro, interluo, intermeo, interstrepo, and 
 
 i In castra venissetCces. J}. G. lib. ii. 17, is in certain MSS. in castris / 
 and In conspect um agminis nostri venissent Cses. B* G. lib. iv. 9, is in certain 
 MSS. in conspeclu. Those who wish to see the latter phraseology explained 
 and defended, are referred to Clarke's Casar, Hell. Gall. lib. iv, 9 ; or page 76. I 
 have perused the note, attentively, but do not feel myself perfectly convinced by 
 the arguments there adduced. Venire in castris Caes. may mean, as Clarke says, 
 Venire et considere (two verbs very different in their sense) in castris ; and Ve~ 
 nit in senatu Cic. may denote Venit et consedit in senatu ; yet, although the 
 action of coming may be followed by silling down, it seems a strange supposi- 
 tion, that the latter is implied in, or expressed by, the former. Esse in potes- 
 tatem y attributed to Cicero, may, perhaps, upon the same principle, be explain- 
 ed to ' mean " To be [come] in [to] the power." Such readings are, perhaps, 
 spurious. If not, the constructions may be regarded as anomalies; or, 
 may, probably, denote, in such examples, the result of the aclion of 
 as expressed by the English verb arrive* See Note, p. 12S. 
 
265 
 
 almost all verbs compounded with prater, commonly omit the 
 preposition. Interjaceo, interjicio, intercede, interpono, repeat it, 
 or omit it : or, otherwise, like intermico, intervenio, take the da- 
 tive. The compounds of in, ob, and sub generally take the da- 
 tive ; those of super, generally the accusative. 
 
 Note 4. There are other verbs which appear to be always con- 
 strued with a preposition ; as Accurro, adhortor, incido, avoco, 
 averto, &c. Attineo is generally thus construed. 
 
 Note 5. Some either admit or reject it, as Abstineo, decedo, ex- 
 pello, aggredior, perrumpo, ingredior, induco, aberro, evado, ejicio, 
 cxco, extermino, extrudo, exturbo ; also adeo, accedo, incumbo, in- 
 sulto, increpo, incurso, pervado, Uludo,peragro, abalienor, abhor- 
 reo, avetto, &c : thus, Ingredi orationem, or in orationem Cic. 
 Exire cere alieno-r-Cic. ^Jlnibus suis Goes. Pervadere urbem 
 Liv. per agros Cic. Avellere templo palladium Virg. aliqucm 
 a se Ter. &c. Many of these admit after them other preposi- 
 tions of similar import to those in composition: as Dehortor, de- 
 Jicio, desclsco, &c. ab aliquo ; Abire, demigrare loco, or a, de, ex, 
 loco ; Exire a patria Cic. Excidcre manibus, de manibus, &c. 
 
 Note 6. Many are construed with the dative, or otherwise : as, 
 Assurgere alicui ; Accedere urbem, ad urbem, urbi ; Inesse rei ali- 
 cui, and in re aliqua ; Abalienare aliquid alicujus for ab aliquo 
 Cic. &c. 
 
 Note 7. Some verbs compounded with e or ex, are followed by 
 an accusative, or ablative : as, Exire limen Ter. septis Virg. 
 Egredi veritatem Plin. portubus Ovid. Some words compound- 
 ed with prce, take an accusative: as, Tibur aquce prcsfluunt Hor. 
 Asiamque potentem prccvehitur Lucan. Thus also Praesidere Ita- 
 llam, prceminere cccteros, prcestare omnes, &c. In some of these 
 examples the accusative may be supposed governed by prccter or 
 extra understood, and sometimes expressed, as Extra jines et ter- 
 jninos egredi Cic. 
 
 Note 8. This rule takes place chiefly when the preposition may 
 be separated from the verb : as, Alloquor te Virg. i. e. loquor ad 
 te. Classis circumvehitur arcem Liv. i. e. vehitur circum arcem. 
 Excrcitum Ligcrim transducit Caes. i. e. ducit exercitum trans 
 Ligerim. But, in regard to active verbs compounded with pre- 
 positions governing the accusative, it generally happens, that the 
 preposition is'repeated, as in Cccsar se ad neminem adjunxit Cic. ; 
 or a dative is used, as in Hie dies me valde Crasso adjunxit Cic. 
 
 Note 9. It may be here added, that an ellipsis of prepositions 
 is frequent : as, Devenere locos Virg. i. e. ad. Nunc idprodeo 
 Ter. i. e. ob or propter. Maria aspera juro Virg. i. e. per. Ut 
 se loco movcre non possent Cic. i. e. e or de. Quid illo Jciclas? 
 Ter. i. e. de. Ut patrid pelleretur Nep. i. e. ex. Sometimes 
 the word to which the preposition refers, is omitted: as, Circum 
 concordice Sail, i, e* adem. And this occurs most frequently 
 
266 
 
 after prepositions in composition : as, Emltiere servum Plaut. i. e. 
 manu. Evomere virus Cic. i. e. ore. Educere copias Caes. i. e. 
 castris. When prepositions are joined with cases which they do 
 not govern, there is always an ellipsis supposed : as, Campum 
 Stellatem divisit extra sortem ad viginti mUlilus civium Suet. i.e. 
 civium millilus ad viginti millia* To which may be added such 
 expressions as Anno ante, Longo post tempore, in which the abla- 
 tives are those of time, some word being understood as the regi- 
 men of the prepositions. See R. LXIV, Note 3. 
 
 OF INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 RULE LXXIII. The interjections O, heu, and proh, go- 
 vern the vocative, and sometimes the accusative : as, 
 
 Oformose puer ! O fair boy ! 
 
 Heu me miserum ! Ah wretch that I am ! 
 
 Note 1. These interjections are found with the nominative or 
 vocative, and sometimes with the accusative : as, O virfortis, at- 
 que amicus Ter. Heu vanitas humana ! Plin. Proh dolor ! 
 Liv. O Dave t itane contemnor als te Ter. Heu miserande puer / 
 Virg. Proh sancte Jupiter ! Cic. O prceclarum custodem ! 
 Cic. Heu me infelicem ! Ter. Proh deum hominumyue Jidem I 
 Cic. It is observed that when O is used as a particle of ex- 
 clamation, it takes either the nominative, accusative, or vocative j 
 that when any vehement affection is denoted, it is generally fol- 
 lowed by an accusative ; and that when the affection is gentle, it 
 is generally omitted. When used in addressing a person, it is al- 
 ways followed by the vocative: in this sense it is generally under- 
 stood. ! 
 
 Note 2. Eheu is construed in a similar way to the others : as, 
 Eheu Palcestra atque Ampelisca ! uli estis nunc Plaut. Eheu me 
 miserum / Ter. Eheu conditionem hujus temporis Cic. 
 
 Note 3. Sometimes there is an ellipsis of the case usually fol- 
 lowing these particles: thus, O miserce sortis Lucan. i. e. homines. 
 Proh deum immortalium Ter. i. e. Jidem. 
 
 ^ Sometimes, by a Hellenism, the nominative is used instead of the* voca- 
 tive ; as Projice iela munu, meus sanguisVirg. It may here be observed, that, 
 in the decline of the Latin language, meus was sometimes joined to the voca- 
 tive of a noun ; as domine meus, a phraseology adopted by Sidonius, Salvianus, 
 and others. Mi (the usual vocative, formed by apocope from the antient mie 
 of miiis) was also used in the other two genders ; as mi parens, mi conjux 
 Apul. for mea mater, mea uxor ; mi SM/MS Apul. for meum. Testor, mi Paulla 
 Hieron. Scaliger would read Vive diu, mi dulds anus Tibull. 1, 7, 69 ; but 
 it has been shown by others, that such expressions did not prevail in the Au- 
 gustan age, and mihi has been restored from more correct MSS. and editions. 
 Mi, however, is sometimes used for mihi. Mi was said to be employed, even 
 as the vocative plural ; as Mi homines, mi spectatoresPloMt. mi hospites 
 Petron. But here mt seems to be a contraction of mci, or of the antient mii r 
 like sis used for suis, sos for suos, by the more antient writers. 
 
267 
 
 Note 4. Such constructions are deemed elliptical, as interjec- 
 tions do not seem to govern any case. The vocative may be said 
 to be placed absolutely, or to be governed by no word. O vir 
 fortis may be O quam es virfortis. Heu me infelicem may be Heu 
 quam me infelicem sentio. In Proh deum hominumque jidem, there 
 may be an ellipsis of imploro or obtestor : and so, of the rest. 
 
 RULE LXXI V. Hci and Vce govern the dative : as, 
 Hei mihi ! Ah me ! 
 
 V& vobis ! Woe to you ! 
 
 Note 1 . Thus also, Hei mihi ! quails erat Virg. Vcs tili, cau- 
 sidice Mart. Thus used, they seem to have the import of nouns, 
 the expressions being equivalent to Malum est mihi, Omnia fu- 
 nesta sint till. 
 
 Note 2. Heus and Ohe, to which may be added, Au> Eho, Eho- 
 dum, Ehem, Heia and /o, are followed by the vocative only : as, 
 Heus SyreTer. Ohe libelleMart. Au mi homo ! Ter. Eho- 
 dum, lone vir, quid ais ? Ter. But in these examples, either O 
 is understood, or, rather, the vocative is put absolutely. 
 
 Note 3. Ah and Vah are followed by the accusative, or voca- 
 tive : as, Ah me miserum ! Ter. in which sentio or experior seems 
 to be understood. Ah virgo infelix ! Virg. yah inconstantiam I 
 Incert. Vah salus mea I Plaut. 
 
 Note 4*. Hem is followed by the dative, accusative, or vocative: 
 as, Hem tili Ter. Hem astutias Ter. in which vide, or videte, 
 seems understood. Hem mea lux! Cic. 
 
 Note 5. Hui is found with an accusative: as, Hui tarn graves 
 rastros, quaeso Ter. supply tractas. 
 
 Note 6. Apage and cedo are sometimes added : as, Apage te, 
 cedo puerum Ter. but these are verbs. 
 
 Note 7. It may be generally observed, that the nominative is 
 the subject of some verb understood ; that the dative is the dative 
 of acquisition ; the accusative is governed by some verb under- 
 stood ; and the vocative is used absolutely. 
 
 Note 8. Most of the other interjections, and frequently also 
 those mentioned, are thrown into discourse without any case sub- 
 joined to them: as, Eheu ! fugaces laluntur anni Hor. Ah! tan- 
 tam rem lam negligenter agere Ter. 
 
 OF CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 RULE LXXV. The conjunctions et, ac, atque, aut, vel, 
 and some others, couple like cases and moods : as, 
 
 Honora patrcm ct matrem, Honour your father and 
 
 mother. 
 Nee scribit) nee legit^ He neither writes nor reads. 
 
268 
 
 Note 1 . It is the opinion of many writers on Latin and on 
 English grammar, that conjunctions unite only sentences or affir- 
 mations, and not single words or cases. Of this opinion are 
 Scaliger, Sanctius, Vossius, Ursinus, and the author of the New 
 Method. On the other hand, Perizonius and Ruddiman contend 
 that they sometimes unite single words. Among the moderns 
 too, Mr. Harris, the learned author of Hermes, asserts that the 
 chief difference between prepositions and conjunctions is, that 
 the former couple words, and the latter, sentences. The respect- 
 able author of a useful Latin grammar observes, that " it would 
 perhaps be more rational to say that conjunctions join sentences. 
 They always suppose an ellipsis. Thus in the example, Pulvis et 
 umbra sumus Hor. the full sentence will be Sumns pulvis et su- 
 7tius umbra; and in Aut prodesse volunt, aut delectare poetce Hor. 
 it will be, Aut prodesse volunt poet<z 3 aut delectare volunt poetae. 
 This solution will appear more natural, if we examine the sen- 
 tences in which the construction is varied, and for which gramma- 
 rians have been obliged to clog their general rule with exceptions. 
 Thus, Mea et reipullicce interest Cic. Meo pr&sidio atyue hoy 
 pitisTev. Aut ob avaritiam, aut miserd ambitione, laborat Hor. 
 Decius, cum se devoveret, et equo admisso, in mediam aciem irruebat 
 Cic." In these remarks I coincide generally, but differ from 
 him in a part of his inference. These instances certainly may 
 prove that conjunctions join sentences, which was not denied ; 
 but they do not disprove the opinion, that they sometimes join 
 cases likewise. In regard to those complex sentences, which, ac- 
 cording to the sense, it is possible to resolve into simple asser- 
 tions, the opinion may be just ; but, if we say "two and two make 
 four," and analyse the proposition into " two make four," and 
 " two make four," we shall find the resolution incorrect, and that, 
 here, not two affirmations are implied, but that two words or cases 
 are coupled together in one affirmation ; for the predicate is ap- 
 plicable, only when the two subjects are taken in conjunction. 
 In like manner, were we to say Pater et Filius sunt duo, we can- 
 not resolve the proposition into Pater est duo, et Filius est duo, for 
 this is palpably untrue ; nor into Pater est unus, et Filius est unus, 
 for this is only saying, that, " one is one," and " one is one," 
 which are different propositions from " one and one constitute 
 two." Again ; if we say, Emi equum centum aureis et pluris (<zris 
 pretio), we cannot resolve the sentence into Emi equum centum 
 aureis, et emi equum pluris, since the clause centum aureis et plu- 
 ris constitutes the one price of but one horse bought at once 1 . 
 Still, it may be true, that, in Amo patrem et matrem, et couples 
 amo and a wo, rather than patrem and matrem. From what has 
 
 1 Again, when we read Septingentesimo ac nono anno betta eivilia repnrata, 
 sunt, we do not understand, that the wars were renewed (twice) ; i. e. once in 
 the 700th year ; and, again, that they were renewed in the 9lh year ; but that 
 they were renewed in the 709th year, septingentcsimo and nono being the words 
 coupled, and not rrparala sunt (understood), and rcparata sunt (expressed), or 
 two sentences. Nor do I conceive that two anno s arc coupled, one being to 
 
269 
 
 been said, we may infer, that not sentences, but single words, are 
 coupled, when, according to the obvious meaning, the predicate 
 is not applicable to each subject individually, but to both con- 
 junctly. 
 
 Note 2. Not only the copulative conjunctions, et, ac, atque, nee, 
 neque, &c. and the disjunctive, aut, ve, vel, seu, sive, belong to this 
 rule, but also, quam, nisi) prceterquam, an, nempe, licet, quamvis, 
 nedum, sed, verum, c., and the adverbs of likeness, cen, tanquam, 
 quasi, ut, &c., are referred to it: as, Nee census, nee clarum nomen 
 avorum, Sed probitas magnos ingeniumque facit Ovid. Pkiloso- 
 phi negant quenquam virum bonum esse, nisi sapicntem Cic. Aman- 
 dus pater, licet difficilisCic. Gloria virtutcm tanquam umbra sc- 
 quitur Cic. 
 
 Note 3. If the wrds require a different construction, this rule 
 does not take place, in regard to the cases : as, Mea et reipublicce 
 interest Cic. Sive Roma; es, sive in Epiro Cic. But generally, 
 this seeming variation from the rule, arises from an ellipsis : thus, 
 Interest inter mea negotia, et negotia reipublicce; Sive in urbe 
 Romas es } sive in Epiro. 
 
 Note 4-. If the sentence admits a change in the construction, 
 the cases or moods may be different : thus, Lentulum eximia spe, 
 summce virtutis adolescentem fac erudias Cic. Neque per vim, 
 neque insidiis Sail. Decius, cum se devoveret, et equo admisso, in 
 medium aciem irruebat Cic. for irrueret. Sentences of different 
 constructions may be joined together : as, Omnibus honoribus et 
 prcBsens est cultus, et projiciscentem prosesuti sunt, sc. Romani 
 Liv. 
 
 Note 5. When et, aut, vel, sive, or ncc, are joined to different 
 members of the same sentence, without expressly connecting it 
 in a particular manner with any former sentence, the first ct is 
 expressed in English by both or likewise ; aut or vel t by either ; 
 the first sive, by whether; and the first nee, by neither : as, Et 
 legit, ct scribit, He both reads and writes : thus also, Turn legit, 
 turn scribit, or Cum legit, turn scribit. Aut legit, aut scribit, He 
 either reads, or writes : and thus, respectively, of the others. 
 
 Note 6. A conjunction is sometimes joined to the word which 
 stands first in the connexion, for the sake of emphasis: as, Mon- 
 tesquejcri, sylvceque loquuntur Virg. 
 
 Note 1. The reason of this construction is, that the words 
 coupled often depend upon the same word, which is generally ex- 
 pressed to one of them ; and is, in most instances, to be under- 
 stood to the other. 
 
 he considered as understood to septingcntesimo, for this supposition might alter 
 the meaning; but that the two numeral adjectives conjnnctly agree with one 
 and the same anno. Were it necessary, it would be an easy matter to accu- 
 mulate similar instances. 
 
270 
 
 RULE LXXVI. Lfr, quo, licet, ne, utinam and dummodo, 
 are for the most part joined with the subjunctive mood: as, 
 
 Accidit ut terga verterent. It happened that they turned 
 
 their backs. 
 
 Note 1. An, ne, num, utrum, anne, annon, and all other inter- 
 rogative particles ; the pronouns quis and cujas; the adverbs quo- 
 modo, ut, quam, ubi f quo, unde, qua, quorsum, and the like ; and 
 the adjectives quantus, qualis, quotus, quotuplex, uter, are gene- 
 rally followed by the subjunctive, if the sense be dubitative or con- 
 tingent (that is, they have in reality no government of moods; 
 since, if the sense be indicative, the indicative mood is requisite): 
 as, Qua virtus, el quanta, loni, sit vivere parvo, Discite Hor. 
 Nescit vitane fruatur, An sit apud manes Ovid. Ut sciam quid 
 agas, ubi quoque, et maxime quando Romgjidurus sis- Cic. But 
 many of these are found joined with the indicative, even when 
 they are used indefinitely. After the subjunctive in the principal 
 member of a sentence, the verb following these is subjunctive: as, 
 Turn verb cerneres quanta audacia, quantaque animi visjuissct in 
 exercitu Catilin<z-Sa\l. 
 
 Note 2. The following words may have in general an indicative 
 or a subjunctive mood after them. 
 
 ( 1 ) Antequam : as, Antequam proxime discessi Cic. Ante* 
 quam de republica dicam Cic. 
 
 (2) Postquam: as, Nunc postquam vides Ter. Sed sive ante- 
 quam ver prcevenerit, sive postquam hyemarit Plin. But both 
 postquam and posteaquam are oftener found with the indicative. 
 
 (3) Priusquam 1 : as, Priusquam de republica dicere incipio 
 Cic. Priusquam incipias, Consulto opus est Sail. 
 
 (4-) Pridiequam and Postridiequam : as, Mummius, qui t pridie- 
 quam ego Athenas venirem, Mitylenas profectus erat Cic. Postri- 
 die, aut post diem tertium, quam lecta erit Cato. It is to be ob- 
 served, that, when the leading verb is of a contingent signification, 
 the verb following these is generally subjunctive*, as, Ut ne quis 
 corona donaretur, priusquam rationes retulisset Cic. 
 
 Note 3. The following words may have an indicative or a sub- 
 junctive mood indifferently, when the signification is indicative. 
 
 (1) Cum or quum, quando, quandoquidem, when they denote 
 since : as, Nunc cum non queo, cequo animo Jero Ter. Cum tot 
 
 1 Ante, post, and priiis are often found, as will hereafter be noticed under 
 the Position or Arrangement of Words, separated from quam, the former three 
 being placed in one member of a sentence, and the latter, in another. Some- 
 times also antequam and postquam are separated in such a way that ante and 
 post govern their own case : thus, Ante paucos quam occideretur menses Suet. 
 Quartum post annum quam ex Peloponneso in Sicilian. redteratJtfep. Quum 
 alone is sometimes used for postquam : as, Altera die quam a Srundisio wlvit 
 Liv. When nrtdu? precedes, quam is used for ante or priusyufim : as, Pridie 
 quam excessit e t'iVo - Cic. Pridie quum heec scrips! Cic. 
 
271 
 
 sustineas negotia Hor. Quando aliter diis visitm est Liv. Nee 
 fiuminibus aggesta [terra'] laudabilis ; quando sencscant sata quac- 
 dam aqua Plin. Quandoquidem apud te nee auctoritas valet 
 Liv. Quandoquidem agros jam ante istius injuriis exagitati reli- 
 quissent Cic. In this last, however, the sense seems contingent. 
 (2) Cum or quum* ; quando ; quandocunque or quandoque ; 
 ubi ; ubicunque ; quoties ; quotiesque ; simul ; simul ac, ut, atque, 
 adverbs of time : as, Quce cum accidunt, nemo est, &c. Cic. Cum 
 faciem videas, videtur esse quantivis pretii Ter. Quando erit, ut 
 condas instar Carthaginis urbem Ovid. Indeed, quando and 
 quandoquidem generally take the indicative, as well as quando- 
 cunque ; Quandocun<jue ista gens suas literas dabit, omnia corrum- 
 pet Plin. Hue ubi (when) perventum est Nep. Ubi semel quis 
 
 1 Rhenius, and, after him, Schmidius and Ursinus, thus speak of the ad- 
 verbial particle cum: (1) When it denotes in German, wenn (Angl. when), 
 and refers to time absolutely, it is followed either by the present or the future 
 of the indicative, or by the future subjunctive [perfect] : as, Cum audio ad te 
 ire aliqucm, literas ad te dare soleo Cic. Cum inimici nostri venire dicentur, 
 turn in Epirum iboCic. Vereor ne exeundi potestas non sit, cum Casar venerit 
 Cic. (2) When it answers to the German als or da (Angl. as, whilst, when,) 
 it is followed by the imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive : as, Cum scribercm ; 
 Cum scripsissem. (3) But when any time has been previously expressed, it 
 takes any tense of the indicative : as, Multi anni sunt, cum ille in cere meo est 
 Cic. Nunquam obliviscar noctis iUius, cum tibi vigilanti pollicebar Cic. JBi- 
 ennium est, cum virtuti nuncium remisisti Cic. But these remarks, as Ursinus 
 himself allows, do not always hold good. 
 
 Dr. Crombie observes that the two last rules are correct, but that the first 
 is not sufficiently comprehensive ; for cum, taken absolutely, admits also the 
 imperfect indicative, as Cum aliquid videbatur caveri posse, turn id negligentiam 
 dolebamdc. And likewise the preterite ; as Cum patriam amisl, turn me 
 periisse putato~O\id. He observes also, that these rules, taken as a whole, 
 are defective, cum being often joined to the indicative mood, when the sense 
 is not absolute, and when no time is mentioned, either specially or generally. 
 Noltenius more comprehensively gives the following rules : Cum, for quando, 
 quo tempore, qtwties, takes the present, the preterite, and the future indicative ; 
 for postquam, and ex quo, the present and preterite of the same mood, or the 
 imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive, rarely the same tenses indicative ; and 
 when any time is noted, either specially or generally, it takes the indicative. 
 The same learned critic observes, ( Gymnasium, 2d Ed. vol. i. p. 66) that it 
 would seem, that the rule by which the practice of classic writers was generally 
 regulated, in regard to the adverb cum, was to join it to the indicative mood, 
 when they intended emphatically to mark the time of one action, present, past, 
 or future, as coincident with that of another action, or with any time, specially 
 or generally. If no particular stress was laid on the times as coincident, and 
 if the actions themselves, not their co-existence, or their continuity, formed the 
 primary consideration, cum was joined to the subjunctive. He gives it as a 
 general rule, for the direction of the junior reader, to join cum with the sub- 
 junctive, when it can be turned into after or while, without any material injury 
 to the force or meaning of the expression ; or when the clause with which cum 
 is connected, can be rendered participially, either in Latin or in English ; thus, 
 " When he had drawn up his army, he waited for battle," Cum excrcitvm in- 
 slruxisset, prcelmm expeclabat, or cxercilu instructo, having drawn up his army. 
 " When he had arrived sooner than was expected," or having arrived, Cum de 
 impraviso venisset Caes. B. G. ii. 3. Here the clause connected with cum 
 cannot be participially rendered in Latin, the verb venio being intransitive, and 
 the Latins having no perfect participle active. 
 
272 
 
 pejeraverit, ei credi postea non oportet Cic. But here, perhaps, 
 the sense may be considered contingent. lUe ubi nascentem ma* 
 culis variaverit orbem Virg. Evenit ut, quotiescunque dictator re- 
 ccpit, hostes moverentur Liv. Plebs scimt, sacerdotes, quotiescun- 
 q ue pro Pop. Athen. precarentur, toties execrari Philippum Liv. 
 Quoties and quotiescunque are most commonly found with the in- 
 dicative. Simul inflamt tibicen, a perito carmen cognosciturCic. 
 Simul portarum claves tradiderimus, Cartkaginiensium extemplo 
 Enna erit Liv. Quam simul ac tali persensit peste teneri Virg. 
 Ut, simul ac posita sit causa, habeant quo se rejerant Cic. Omne 
 animal, simul ut ortum est, et se ipsum diligit, &c. Cic. Facile ut 
 appareat, nostros omnia potuisse consequi simul ut velle ccepissent 
 Cic. Simul atque introductus est, rem confecit Cic. Sccevola 
 quotidie, simul atque luceret, Juciebat omnibus sui conveniendz po- 
 testatem Cic. When the signification is contingent, the subjunc- 
 tive ought to be used : as, Quandoque ossa Capyis detecta essent, 
 fore ut) &c. Suet. It should be observed of cum, that when used 
 as a conjunction, for quoniam, or quandoquidem since, or etsi, al- 
 though, it generally takes the subjunctive, and for quod because, 
 the indicative ; as, Cum Athenas tanquam ad mercaturam bonarum 
 artium sis profectus, inanem redire turpissimum est Cic. Cum 
 etiam plus contenderimus, quam possumus, minus tamen Jaciemus, 
 quam debemus Cic. Cum tu liber es, Messenio, gaudeo Plaut. 
 
 (3) These adverbs of time, dum 1 , donee, quamdiu, quoad : as, 
 PIcec dum aguntur Cic. Dum id nobiscum una videatis, ac vcnit 
 jEdilimus Varr. Donee ad hcec tempora perventum est Liv. 
 Cerium obsidere est usque donee redierit Ter. It is observed, that 
 dum and donee, when used for quamdiu, are generally followed 
 by the indicative, and for usqu,edum t by the indicative or subjunc- 
 tive ; and dum for dummodo, by the subjunctive. Ego tamdiu re- 
 quiesco, quamdiu ad te scribo Cic. Reminiscere illam, quamdiu 
 ei opusfuent, vixisse Cic. Nequejinem insequendijecerunt, quoad 
 snbsidio confisi equites prcecipites hostes egerunt Cass. Equites* 
 quoad loca patiantur, ducerejubet Liv. It is observed, that the 
 indicative mood is the more frequent after all these words ; but, 
 if the sense be contingent, then the subjunctive must be used: as, 
 Ne cxpectetis, dum exeant hue Ter. or, when used for dummodo : 
 as, Oderint, dum metuant Cic. Ut nemo .... donee quidquam 
 virium superesset, corpori aut sanguini suo parceret Liv. Quamdiu 
 se bene gesserint. Mihi hoc dederunt, ut esses in Sicilid, quoad 
 velles Cic. 
 
 (4?) Etsi, etiamsi, quanquam, quamvis, tametsi: as, Etsi vereor, 
 judices &c. Cic. Etsi enim nihil in se habeat gloria cur expctatur y 
 tamcn virtutem tanquam umbra seqnitur Cic. Quam tibi, etiamsi 
 non desideras, tamen mittam Cic. Omnia brema tolerabilia esse de- 
 
 1 It is observed, in regard to dum, that when it refers to a present or pro- 
 gressive action, the subjunctive is seldom used. Yet Cicero writes, Me scito, 
 dum tu absis, scribere au<I(tcivs-sim. xii. 17. Thus also, Dum here ita Cerent 
 Hirt. B. Afr. c. 25, 
 
273 
 
 bent, etiamsi maxima sint Cic. Atque ego, quanquam nullum scelus 
 rationem habet, tamen .... scire velim Liv. Quanquam Volcatio 
 assentirentur Cic. Quamvis tardus eras, et te tuaplaustra tenebant 
 Ovid. Quamvis Elysios miretur Grcecia campos Virg. Quamvis 
 prudens adcogitandum sis, sicut es Cic. Although, in this last, 
 the sense appear contingent, and consequently es for sis might be 
 deemed incorrect, yet, in a similar instance, the indicative is used : 
 thus, Ea si maxima est, ut est certe Cic. 1 Off. 153. Tametsi 
 jactat ille quidem illud suum arbitrium Cic. Memini tametsi mil- 
 lus moneas Ter. > It is observed, that etsi, tametsi, and quanquam, 
 when they stand in the beginning of a sentence, usually have the 
 indicative after them; and that etiamsi and quamvis are oftener 
 joined with the subjunctive. Tamenetsi is construed as tametsi. 
 But, when the verb is contingent in sense, or when the verb 
 in the principal member of the sentence is contingent, the verb 
 which follows the preceding particles must be in the subjunctive 
 mood : as, Etsi ne disccssissem e tuo conspectu, nisi me plane nihil 
 ulla res adjuvarei Cic. Nee ille, etiamsi prima prospere evenis- 
 sent, imbellem Asiam qucesisset Liv. Putaram te aliquid novi, 
 .... quamvis non ciirarem quid in Hispaniajieret, tamen te scrip- 
 iurum Cic. Gaudeo tibi meas literas prius a tabellario quam ab 
 ipso redditas ; quanquam te nihil Jefellisset Cic. Non crederem, 
 tametsi vulgb audirem Cic. 
 
 (5) Si, sin, ni, nisi, siquidem : as, Si vales, bene est Cic. Ut 
 si s&pius decertandum sit, ut erit, semper novus veniam Cic. Si 
 ilium relinquo, ejus vitce timeo ; sin opitulor, hujus minas Ter. 
 Sin autem ad adolescentiam perduxissent amicitiam, dirimi tamen 
 interdum contentione dicebat Cic. Mirum nidomiest Ter. Pom- 
 peius Domitium, nisi me omniajfallunt, deseret Cic. Nee JustiticB 
 nee Amidtice omnino esse poterunt, nisi ipsce per se expetantur 
 Cic. Ni seems to be a contraction of nisi ; indeed, si?i and nisi 
 seem to be only si with a negative ; it is no wonder, therefore, 
 that their construction is similar. Siquidem is but si quidem. Robur 
 et soboles militum interiit, siquidem, qucz nuntiantur f vera sunt 
 Cic. These being kindred or similar words, it is unnecessary to 
 multiply examples. It is observed, that si used for quamvis, re- 
 quires the subjunctive: as, Redcam? non, si me obsecret Ter. in 
 which, however, the sense is evidently contingent. Si is some- 
 times omitted, and, then, the verb is generally in the subjunctive: 
 as, Tu quoque magnam partem opere in tanto , sineret dolor, Icarc, 
 habercs Virg. Thus also in the phrase Absque eo esset for Si 
 
 1 I suspect that a few of the examples which are adduced, of the subjunc- 
 tive mood, do, in reality, involve the potential ; thus, Tametsi nullus moneas 
 does not mean "though you do not," but "should not admonish;" Non si 
 me obsecret, not "if she beseeches," but "if she beseech" or "should beseech 
 me." Indeed, from the sameness of the forms, it is not always easy to distin- 
 guish these two moods, more especially, as the indicative and potential phra- 
 seologies are, in English, sometimes employed in the same, or nearly the same 
 sense, and the second form of the Latin verb sometimes admits, consistently 
 with the sense, an interpretation, by the one, or the other. 
 
 T 
 
274- 
 
 absque eo esset, (Had it not been for hin^) the English idiom ad- 
 mitting also the ellipsis of if. When the sense is contingent, it 
 is needless to repeat, that, after all such words the subjunctive 
 is used : as, O morem prceclarum, quern a majoribus accepimus, si- 
 quidem teneremus Cic. It is obvious that the member of a sen- 
 tence, which is preceded by si and the like, is dependent upon 
 another, which may be considered as the principal member. If 
 the verb in the principal member be contingent, then the verb 
 following si, and the like, must be in the subjunctive, and the 
 tenses of the one member must, according to the sense, be ac- 
 commodated to those of the other : thus, for Present Time, Si 
 
 Jbret in terris, rideret Democritus Hor. Nee si rationem siderum 
 ignoret, poetas intelligent Quinct. Si ex habitu novce fortunes spec- 
 tetur, venisset in Italiam Liv. For Past Time; Et habuisset res 
 
 fortunam, nisi unus homo Suracusisfuisset Liv. Si meum consi- 
 lium valuisset, tu hodie egeres Cic. Dixit hostes fore tardiores, 
 si animadverterent Nep. Docet eum magnofore periculo, si quid 
 adversi accidisset Nep. Placebat illud, ut si rex amicis tuisjidem 
 suamprcestitisset, auxiliis eum tuis adjuvares Cic.- For Future 
 Time ; Redeam ? non, si me obsecret Ter. Ita geruntur apte, ut 
 si usus Jbret) pugnare possintCic. Aufugerim potius quam re- 
 deam, si eo mihi redeundum sciam Ter. Etfacerent, si non ccra 
 repulsa sonent Tibull. In this last, congruity, perhaps, required 
 
 facerent .... sonarent, or faciant .... sonent. The verb in the 
 principal member is sometimes in the indicative, instead of the 
 subjunctive mood, but still the verb following si must be in the 
 subjunctive : as, Si per Metellum licitum esset, matres illorum ve- 
 niebant Cic. Si mens non l&va fuisset, impulerat ferro Argolicas 
 
 fcedare latebras Virg. Nee veni, nisi fata locum sedemque dedis- 
 sent Virg. In poetry, both verbs may be found in the indica- 
 tive: as, Atfuerat melius, si te puer iste tenebat Ovid. 
 
 (6) Quod, quia, quoniam, quippe (because), seem generally to 
 be joined to the indicative or subjunctive mood indifferently: as, 
 Senatusconsulta duo facia sunt odiosa, quod in Consulem facia pu- 
 tantur Cic. Mihi quod defendissem, leviter succensuit Cic. It 
 is observed that quod, used for cur or quamobrem, with the verb est 9 
 is construed with the subjunctive: as, Est quod te visam Plaut. 
 AliiSy quia defit quod amant, cegre est Ter. Vides igitur, quia 
 verba non sint, nihil videri turpe Cic. Quoniam non potest idjieri 
 quod vis, Id velis quod possit Ter. Latiumque vocari maluit, his 
 quoniam latuisset tutus in oris Virg. Quippe id est homini natu- 
 rale Quinct. Non ignorat voluptatem Epicurus, quippe qui testi- 
 
 Jlcetur Cic. 1 Quippe, when used for riant, it is observed, takes 
 the indicative : as, Quippe vetor fatis Virg. When quatenus is 
 
 1 It is observed that quippe used for utpote, and, as in this example, followed 
 by qui, generally takes the subjunctive : and when followed by cum, always : 
 as, Quippe, cum ea sine prudentia satis habeat auctoritatis, prudentia sinejustitiA 
 nihil valeatCic. Followed by quod, it takes the subjunctive ; by quia or quo- 
 niam, the indicative : as, Multa de mea sentcntia quccstus est Ceesar, yuippe quod 
 
275 
 
 used for quoniam, it is construed as quoniam. If the principal 
 member of a sentence be contingent, the word following these 
 particles must be in the subjunctive : as, Se videre ait, quod panels 
 annis magna accessiofacta esset, Philosophiam plane absolutamjbre 
 Cic. Neque quisquam est qui dolorem ipsum, quid dolor sit, amet 
 Cic. Quoniam fractce vires hostium fore nt, Domitianum inter- 
 venturum Tac. When quod is used in the same connective or 
 relative signification as ut, it may have an indicative or subjunc- 
 tive mood after it : as, Apparet, quod aliud a terra sumpsimus, 
 aliud ab honore Cic. Cato mirari se dicebat, quod non rideret 
 aruspeXf aruspicem cum vidisset Cic. 
 
 (7) Quasi, ceu, tanquam, perinde, when they denote likeness, 
 are joined with the indicative, but when they denote pretence or 
 irony, with the subjunctive : as, Fuit olim, quasi ego sum, senex 
 Plaut. Quasi de verbo, non de re, laboretur Cic. Adversi rupto 
 ceu quondam turbine venti Conjligunt Virg. Ceu verb nesciam ad- 
 versus Theophrastum scripsisse etiam Jceminam Plin. Tanquam 
 philosophorum habent discipline ex ipsis vocabula Ter. Tanquam 
 Jeceris ipse aliquid Juveri. Hcec omnia perinde sunt, ut aguntur 
 
 Cic. Perinde ac satis Jacere etjraudata restituere vellent Caes. 
 
 (8) With respect to the construction of qui with the subjunc- 
 tive mood, it should be observed, that when the English is ex- 
 pressed contingently or potentially, or when contingency is con- 
 veyed, as it frequently is, by the English indicative, the second 
 form of the Latin verb, or potential mood, is required by the 
 sense. And it is only when the English indicative, used in a sense 
 unconditional, requires a Latin subjunctive, that, strictly speak- 
 ing, this mood can be said to be governed by qui, or indeed by 
 any other word. 1st. When the subject is introduced indirectly 
 with periphrasis, whether affirmatively, negatively, or interroga- 
 tively, the verb in the relative clause is usually subjunctive, pro- 
 vided this clause constitutes the predicate. Thus, instead of say- 
 ing, Nonnulli dicunt, we say, Sunt, qui dicant, there are persons, 
 who say. Fuerunt, qui censerent Cic. who thought. Inventi 
 autem multi sunt, qui vitam profundere parati essent Cic. Nemo 
 est, qui hand intettigat Cic. who does not understand. Nulla 
 pars est corporis, quce, non sit minor Cic. Quis est enim, cut non 
 perspicua sint ilia ? Cic. to whom those things are not clear ? 
 An est quisquam, qui dubitet Liv. These, and similar phraseo- 
 logies, admit the three following forms ; thus we say, They ran 
 through every flame, or There is no flame, through which they 
 did not run, or What flame is there, through which they did not 
 run ? Per omnem Jlammam cucurrerunt. Nulla est Jlamma, per 
 quam non cucurrerint. Qucznam est Jlamma, per quam non cu- 
 
 etiam Crassum ante vidisset Cic. Quifjpt quia magnarum scape id remedium 
 ergritudinum est Ter. Insanabilis non est credendus (morbus) qnippe quoniam 
 et in muftis sponte desiit Plin. Quod, quia, and quoniam, seem to be redundant 
 in these examples. 
 
 Tfi 
 
276 
 
 currerint ; which last is the expression of Cicero. Under this rule 
 may be comprehended those cases in which qui is joined with the 
 subjunctive mood after such words as unus and solus, when they 
 are employed to restrict what is affirmed in the relative clause, ex- 
 clusively to that particular subject mentioned in the antecedent 
 clause. The relative clause, therefore, is the predicate; thus, Vah! 
 solus hie homo est, qui sciat dimnitus Plaut. This is the only man 
 that knows, equivalent to Hie solus scit. Sapientia est una, qua 
 mcestitiampellatexanimis Cic. The restrictive term may be merely 
 implied; as, Mens est, qui diros sentiat ictus Ovid. It is the mind 
 (alone) that feels. The observance of this rule is, in some cases, 
 essential to perspicuity ; for, otherwise, the subject may be mis- 
 take^ for the predicate. If we say Sunt boni, qui dicunt, to ex- 
 press They are good men, who say, and also, There are good men, 
 who say, the expression is evidently ambiguous. This ambiguity- 
 is prevented by expressing the former sentiment by Sunt boni, 
 qui dicunt, in which case the relative clause is the subject, and 
 the antecedent clause the predicate; and by expressing the latter 
 sentiment by Sunt boni, qui dicant, where the antecedent ^clause 
 is the subject, and the relative clause the predicate. 2ndly, The 
 relative is joined to the subjunctive, when the relative clause ex- 
 presses the reason or cause of the action, state, or event. Thus, 
 Male fecit Hannibal, qui Capuce hiemarit, or quod Capuce hiemavit, 
 Hannibal did wrong, in wintering, or, as we sometimes express it, 
 to winter, at Capua, that is, because he wintered. Ccesarem mag- 
 nam injuriam facere, qui suo adventu vectigalia sibi deteriorafa- 
 ceret. Caes. In such phraseologies, the relative seems equivalent 
 to quoniam ego, quoniam tu, quoniam ille. This construction of 
 the relative, as in the preceding rule, recommends itself, by its 
 subserviency to perspicuity. If we say Male fecit, qui hiemavit, 
 we impute error to the person who wintered ; but do not express 
 the error as consisting in his wintering. When we say qui hie- 
 marit, we signify, that he erred because he wintered. When 
 the relative possesses a power equivalent to et cum is, et quod is, 
 et quoniam is, et quia is, these adverbs in the antecedent clause 
 being joined with the subjunctive, the relative also, in conformity 
 with this rule, is joined with the subjunctive ; thus, Cum autem 
 pulchritudinis duo genera sint, quorum in altero venustas sit, in al- 
 tero dignitas Cic. Here the relative clause is equivalent to et 
 cum eorum in altero venustas sit. Under this rule may be com- 
 prehended those cases, in which qui is joined with the subjunc- 
 tive mood, namely, when the relative clause states some circum- 
 stance belonging to the antecedent, as accounting for the princi- 
 pal fact, or as contributing to its production ; thus, Illi autem, qui 
 omnia de republicd prcedara, atque egregia sentirent, sine ulla 
 mord, negotium susceperunt Cic. They, as being persons who en- 
 tertained the most noble sentiments. When ut, utpote, quippe, 
 are expressed with the relative, they sufficiently mark the influ- 
 ence of the relative clause; and as all ambiguity is thus prevented, 
 
277 
 
 the relative is sometimes joined with the indicative, but much 
 more frequently, agreeably to the general rule, with the subjunc- 
 tive ; thus, Prima luce ex castris projiciscuntur, ut quibus cssetper- 
 suasum Caes. Egressi Trojani, ut quibus nihil superesset Liv. 
 as being persons to whom nothing remained. Quippe qui videam 
 Liv. Prater ejus, utpote qui peregre depugnavit Cic. This is the 
 reading of Ernesti ; but most of the early editions give dcpugnd- 
 rit. 3dly. The pronoun qui is joined to the subjunctive mood, 
 when the discourse is oblique or indirect, that is, when the rela- 
 tive clause does not express any sentiment of the author's, but 
 refers it to the person or persons of whom he is speaking. Thus, 
 Dixerunt unum petere, ac deprecari, si forte pro sud dementia ac 
 mansuetudine , quam ipsi ab aliis audirent, statuisset Atuaticos esse 
 conservandos, ne se armis despoliaret Cres. Here it is obvious, 
 the relative clause expresses a sentiment delivered by the speak- 
 ers, and is not to be considered as an observation of the author's, 
 the expression quam audirent being equivalent to quam ipsi audi- 
 visse dixerunt ; whereas ipsi audiebant would imply an observa- 
 tion of Caesar's, equivalent to quam ego (scil. Ccesar) eos audiisse 
 dico. The same principle is applicable to ubi used relatively for 
 in quo loco, to quod used as a conjunction, and likewise to cum, 
 quia, quam, quando ; thus, Quare ne committeret y ut is locus, ubi 
 constitissent, ex calamitate populi Romani nomen caperet Caes. 
 Quo also for ad quern locum, and unde for e quo loco, are construed 
 in a similar way. Non minus libenter sese recusaturum populi Ro- 
 mani amicitiam, quam appetierit Cses. It may be observed, that, 
 whenever the future perfect would be employed in direct state- 
 ment, the pluperfect is necessary in the oblique form. We find 
 the direct expression, used by Ovid, Dabitur quodcumque optaris, 
 expressed under an oblique form by Cicero, Sol Phacthonti Jilio 
 facturum se esse dixit, quidquid opt asset. 4thly. When qui is taken 
 for ut ego, ut tu, ut ille, ut nos, &c., it is joined with the subjunc- 
 tive ; thus, Atque ittcc dissensiones erant hujusmodi, Quiritcs, quae 
 non ad delendam, sed ad commutandam rempublicam pertincretit 
 Cic. The dissensions were such, that, or of that kind, that, &c. 
 Nee ulla vis imperii tanta cst, quce possit Cic. It is frequently 
 thus used after dignus, indignus, idoneus, and quam following a 
 comparative; 5thly. Qui, taken foryzws, is generally joined with 
 the subjunctive; thus, Sentiet qui mr stem Ter. Care should 
 be taken not to mistake the interrogative pronouns used indefi- 
 nitely, for the relative pronoun. If we say, I know not what arts 
 he was taught, the latter clause expresses the subject, and re- 
 ceives the action of the verb. Nescio quibus artibus sit eruditus. 
 Here we evidently express our ignorance, to which of the arts 
 his studies were directed. The pronoun, therefore, is the inter- 
 rogative, and being indefinitely taken, is joined with the subjunc- 
 tive. But if we say, I know not the arts in which he was in- 
 structed, it is not the latter clause which receives the action of 
 the verb, but the word arts. Aries hand novi } quibus ille cst cm- 
 
278 
 
 ditus. Here we express our ignorance of those arts in which he 
 was instructed ; and the pronoun is the relative, and joined with 
 the indicative mood. 1 
 
 (9) 'Ubi, ubicunquc, ubi ubi, quo, quocimque, qua, quacunque, 
 adverbs of place, may be followed either by the indicative or the 
 subjunctive when the signification of the verb is indicative : as, 
 Portions hcec ipsa, ubi ambulamus Cic. Petentibus, ut ab Norbd, 
 ubi parum commode essent, alio traducerentur Liv. Omnes cives 
 Romani, qui ubicunque sunt, vestram severitatem desiderant Cic. 
 Nunc ubi ubi sit animus, certe in te est Cic. It is needless to mul- 
 tiply examples in regard to the compounds of ubi, as they natu- 
 rally follow the construction of their primitive. Ubi neque noti 
 esse Us, quo venerunt, neque semper cum cognitoribus esse possunt 
 'Cic. Sect quocunque venerint, hanc sibi rem prcesidio sperant fu~ 
 t <ram- Cic. Non est, quo proper es, terra paterna tibi Ovid. 
 qua sol habitabiles illustrat eras Hor. Quacunque iter fecit, ejus- 
 modi Juit Cic. Turn visam belluam vastam, quacunque incederet, 
 omnia pervertere Cic. The sense is sometimes such as requires 
 the subjunctive only.: as, Hie locus est units, quo perfugiant Cic. 
 Habebam, qub confugerem, ubi conquiescerem Cic. 2 Here the 
 sense seems contingent, or potential. 
 
 Note 4-. Ut, and utcunque, signifying when, if the signification 
 be indicative, are followed only by the indicative mood : as, Ut 
 ab urbe discessi Cic. Utcunque dejecere mores Hor. But if the 
 sense be contingent, the subjunctive must be used: as, Tu ut sub- 
 sermas orationi, utcunque opus sit verbis, vide Ter. Ut, when a 
 particle of similarity, and subjoined to ita or sic (both which are 
 sometimes understood) has an indicative : as, Tu tamen has nup- 
 tias perge facere, ita ut facis Ter. Ita uti supra demonstravi~ 
 mus Caes. Ut is sometimes subjoined to ita in a peculiar man- 
 ner: as, Ita vivam, ut maximos sumptus Jacio Cic. Att. 5. 15. 
 i. e. May I die, if I do not. Ut is sometimes used for talis, or 
 tali modo : as, Tu (ut tempits est diei) videsis, ne quo hinc lowgius 
 abeas Ter. Horum auctoritate jinitimi adducti (ut sunt Gallo- 
 rum subita et repentina consilia) &c. Caes. Credo, ut est dementia 
 Ter. 
 
 Note 5. The following words are joined with the subjunctive. 
 
 (1) Licet (which, in reality, is a verb, ut being understood 
 after it, although used as a conjunction in the sense of etsi : as, 
 Dicam cquidem, licet arma mihi mortemque minetur Virg. 
 
 (2) Quo, put for ut, quoniam, or quasi: as, Adjuta me, qiib id 
 fat Jac'diits Ter. but this is, strictly speaking, an example rather 
 
 1 For these valuable rules for the construction of qui, we are indebted to 
 Dr Crornbie's Gymnasium, a work deservedly held in the highest estimation. 
 
 a It may be worth while to remark, that, when the learner, in translating 
 English into Latin, is doubtful whether the sense be contingent, or not, it is 
 safer for him to join the words mentioned in 2\ r ote 3, with the subjunctive 
 than wiih the indicative, since, if the sense be indicative, the subjunctive may 
 generally be used, and if contingent it must be used. 
 
279 
 
 of the potential. Non quo ilia Lcelii sit quicquam dulcius, scd 
 multo tamen venustior Cic. 
 
 (3) Ut si, ac si, ceque ac si, perinde ut si, aliter ac si, &c., vclut 
 si, veluti: as, Triremem in portu agitarijulet, ut si exercere remiges 
 vellet Nep. Prceterea transversis itineribus quotidie castra movere, 
 juxta ac si hostes adessent Sal). Perinde quasi exitus rerum non 
 hominum consilia legibus vindicentur Liv. Itaque velut si cum alio 
 exercitu exiret, nihil usqua?n pristince discipiuicc tenuit Liv. Ac 
 veluti stet volucris dies, parcis diripere - - - - amphoram Hor. 
 Cccpti inde ludi, velut ea res nihil ad religionem pertinuisset Liv. 
 &c. 
 
 (4) Quin, for qui non, quod non, ut non, or quo minus: as, 
 Quarn nunc nemo est in Sicitid, quin habeat, quin legal Cic. Fieri 
 nullo modo poterat, quin Cleomeni parcerelur Cic. Nulla tamfa- 
 cilis res, quin diffic'dis siet, quam invitus facias Ter. Non quin 
 rectum esset, sed quia &c. Cic. Promts nihil abest, quin sim mi- 
 serrimus Cic. Otherwise, this word is followed by the mood 
 which the sense requires : thus, used for cur non, Quin continctis 
 vocem indicem stultitice vestrce ? Cic.; for imo, the indicative or 
 imperative ' : as, Quin est paratum argentum ? Ter. Quin tu hoc 
 audi Ter. 
 
 (5) Ut, quo, ne, quominiis, referring to the final cause, require 
 the potential, which retains its proper contingent signification, 
 the final cause being a contingency j and, in such instances, the 
 mood cannot, strictly speaking, be considered as under the go- 
 vernment of the particle. In regard to the succession of tenses, 
 the general rule is, that if the verb preceding such words be of 
 past time, the verb which follows them must be in the preterim- 
 perfect or preterperfect subjunctive : and if the preceding verb 
 be future, or present, the present tense must be used. But to 
 this there are many exceptions, which must be regulated by due 
 attention to the nature of the tenses, and the sense of the sub- 
 ject. Avaro quid mail optes, nisi ut viuat diu ? P. Syr. PhiLippi- 
 dem miserunt, ut nuntiaret Nep. Dixil Romam statim ventures, 
 ut rationes cum publicanis putarent Cic. 2 When the following verb 
 
 1 Vossius says, that when quin is u.;ed in exhorting or commanding, it takes 
 the indicative or imperative ; and that, when used for imo, it is sometimes 
 followed by the subjunctive : as, Hie non est locus, Quin lu alium quceras, cut 
 centones farcins Plaut. He might have added Quid nunc agitur ? Gn. Quin 
 rcdcamus Ter. But, as Ursinus observes, in these quin implies exhortatjpn, 
 whicli is still clearer in the following, Hortor ne. cujusquam miscrcat, Quin 
 spolies, miitiles, laceres, qucmque nacta sis Ter. It may be added, that in those 
 examples in which Vossius assigns to it the sense of exhorting, it is commonly 
 interpreted by imo.- Quin is a contraction of quine, and its real signification 
 seems to be qui non, or cur non ; thus Quin die is equivalent to Die, qui non f 
 or cur non ? Non dubium est quin uxorcm nolit Jilius to Non dubium est, qid 
 ne sit, or cur non sit, ut uxorem nolit films. 
 
 * It is to be observed, that although a preterite may precede, yet if the ac- 
 tion is understood to continue, the present is to be used : as 'Orare jussit hera, 
 ut ad se venias Ter. Ea ne me cdct, consuefedfilium Ter. In the follow- 
 ing, Sublimcm medium arripcrem, et capite primum in lerram staluercm, Ut cere- 
 bro dispergat want Ter. Adcl. III. 2. 18, certain critics substitute diverge- 
 
280 
 
 has no present, we find the perfect used instead of it : as, Rogat, 
 uli meminerint Sail. If the final cause is to be passing at a fu- 
 ture time, the present of the subjunctive should be used : as, Ne 
 dolere quidem possum, ut non ingratus videar Cic. Irritant ad pug- 
 nandum, quo fiant acriores Varr. And here observe, that quo 
 is used, instead of ut, before a comparative ; and sometimes, 
 though rarely, when a comparative does not follow: as, Qua, non 
 quo te celem, non perscribo Cic. But if the final cause is to be 
 perfect in any time either past, present, or future, then the pre- 
 terperfect subjunctive is to be used: as, Ne frustra hi tales viri 
 venerint, te aliquando, Crasse, audiamus Cic. Timeo ne Verres 
 impurti fecerit Cic. Indeed, all such instances are sufficiently 
 regulated by the sense. Ut, ne, quo, quominus, when used in what 
 is called a relative or connective sense, require the potential 
 mood, and follow the same rules that have been just given : as, 
 Futurum sensit, ut cceteri sequerentur Nep. Ne quis impediretur, 
 quominus frueretur Nep. If the dependent action is passing now 
 or at some future time, the present potential is used : as, Oran- 
 dum est, ut sit mens sana in corpore sano Juv. Orare jussit, ad 
 se ut venias Ter. Sperofore, ut contwgat id nolis Cic. (See 
 the preceding Note, imd pag.) If, in this case, an imperfect pre- 
 cede, the same tense should follow ; as, Idem cnim iwpediret, quo- 
 minus mecum esses, quod mine etiam impedit Cic. But, if the de- 
 pendent action is to be considered as completed either in past, 
 present, or future time, the preterperfect subjunctive must be 
 used : as, Si verum est, ut populus R. omnes gentes superdrit Nep. 
 Faciam ut noveris Ter. Si est, culpam ut Antipho in se admiserit 
 Ter. But ut after verbs of wishing seems to be excepted from 
 these rules, and to follow the construction ofutinam: as, Cupe- 
 rem ipseparens spectator adesset Virg. Quam vel/em ut te a Stoicis 
 inclinasses Cic. Vellem affuissesCic. Ut, when correspond- 
 ing to the intensives ita, adeo, sic, tarn, talis, toties, tantus, is, &c. 
 requires the subjunctive, in the same tenses that have been just 
 specified. When the dependent action is represented as passing 
 at a past time, the imperfect is used : as, Cum jam in eo essei, ut 
 oppido poiirelur Nep. When the dependent action is passing at 
 some time present or future, the present is used : as, Adeojie ig~ 
 
 ret, while others consider that the former tense is used for the latter, by the 
 figure Enallage. In Dum id qutzro, tibi qviflhim restituerem Ter. Heaut. III. 
 1. 83, some would substitute restituam, while others read restiluerim, used for 
 restituam, as dixeris sometimes is for dicas. The past follows the present, when 
 the sense requires it: as, Velim itafortuna tvlissel Cic. Servis suis ut januam 
 clauderent, et ipsi ad fores assisterent, imperat. Dcum precor ut hie dies libifdi- 
 citer illuxerit Cic. Persuadet Castico ut idem faceret Cses. In such in- 
 stances, the present seems to be used historically (see. p. 72), imperat and per- 
 suadet having the effect of perfects. Ut is found vt ith the infinitive : as, Ut 
 melius quicquid erit pati-~ Hor. Car. I. 11. 3. for patiaris. This is a Grecism, 
 which we have formerly noticed, under the explanation of the moods and tenses. 
 Some resolve this example thus : Ut (vel cum) melius sit jxili qidcquid erit, quam 
 teuton: &c. Others thus ; Ut (vel quanta) melius est &qno animo pati quicquid 
 &c. And others, in different other ways. 
 
281 
 
 narus es, ut hccc nescias Cic. Nunquam eril turn oppressus sena- 
 tus, ut ei ne supplicandi quidem ac lugendi sit potestas Cic. If in 
 this case an imperfect precede, the same tense must also follow. 
 But when the dependent action is represented as complete either 
 in time past, present, or future, the perfect subjunctive is used: 
 as, Videre licet altos tanta levitate. Us ut fuerit non didicisse melius 
 Cic. Rex tantum motus eat, ut Tusaphernem hostemjudicaver'tt 
 Nep. Sic erudivit, ut in sumrnd laude Juerint Nep. In such 
 sentences ut, and, sometimes, quominus, are used alone, the in- 
 tensive word being understood. Ut is used for supposing that, 
 
 allowing that, before the potential only ; and, in like manner, its 
 negative ne : as, Ut enim rationem Plato nullam afferret Cic. Ut 
 ita dicam passim. Ne singulos norninem Liv. Ut is sometimes 
 omitted : as, Unde ilia scivit, nigtr an albus nascerer ? Age porro, 
 sdssetPh&dr. 
 
 (6) Ut qui, utpote qui, utpote quum, generally ; and the parti- 
 cles of wishing or praying, utinam, o si 1 , and ut, for utinam, al- 
 ways have the subjunctive mood : as, Ita turn discedo ab illo, ut 
 qui sefiliam daturum neget Ter. Antonius procul al>erat, utpote 
 (jui mogno exercitu sequeretur Sail. Meincommoda valetudo, ut- 
 pote cum sine febri labordssem, tenelat Brundusii Cic. O mihi 
 prosteritos referat si Jupiter annos Virg. Utinam lilerorum mo- 
 res nen perderemus Cic. Utinam ea res ei voluptati sit Cic. Ut 
 ilium dii deceque perdant Ter. Indeed, utinam is only a variety 
 of ut or uti, which is used in the last example for utinam, a word 
 of wishing being understood in all such instances. Utinam ex- 
 presses a wish either for the present, past, or future, and always 
 requires the subjunctive. For the present, the preterimperfect 
 subjunctive is used : as, Uiinam pro decor e nolishoc tantum, et 
 non pro salute, esset' certamen Liv. For the past imperfect, the 
 preferimperfect is used : as, Utinam istuc verlum ex animo diceres 
 Ter. For the past perfect, the preterpluperfect : as, Fecisseni- 
 que utinam Virg. For future time, the present subjunctive : as, 
 Utinam ilium diem videam Cic. In the former case, utinam is 
 sometimes omitted by the poets ; and in the latter, oftcner than 
 it is expressed : as, Me quoque quafratrem mactdsses, improbe, dex- 
 tra Ovid. Dii te eradicent Ter. Quod bene vertat passim. 
 
 1 Si is sometimes used for o si, or utinam : as, Si nunc sc nobis ille aureus 
 arborc ramus Ostendat nevwre in lanto Virg. Qudm vcllem is likewise used 
 in the sense of wishing : as, Qudm vellem Roma; mansisscs Cic. in which, 
 however, ut is understood. Sometimes even the particle and verb are both 
 understood : as, Tecum ludere, sicut ipsa, possem Catull. i. e. opto ut, or uti- 
 nam, possem. To these may be added such expressions as Ne sim salvus, Ne 
 vivam, (may I die,) which may be thus completed -J7a precor, ita voveo, ut ne 
 sim salvus, tit ne vivam. Thus also utinam ne ; as, Utinam ne innemorc De~ 
 lio securibus Casa cecidissct abicgna ad terram trabes Enn. ap. Cic. Instead 
 of which some employ utinam non. Cicero uses both : as, Illud utinam ne 
 vere scriberem Fam. v. 17. Heec ad te die natali mco scripsi ; quo utinam 
 susccptus non esscm, aid nc quid ex eadcm malrc postea nalum cssct -Attic, xi. 
 9. extr. 
 
282 
 
 The ellipsis of utinam is the foundation of what is called the op- 
 tative mood. But its omission not being allowable in all tenses, 
 nor common in any but the present, it seems scarcely admissible 
 to consider this as a distinct mood. For the future perfect, when 
 it is intended to wish that a future action may be completed, the 
 preterperfect or the preterpluperfect is used : as, Utmam hie sur- 
 dus, aut hcec muta facta sit Ter. Utinam (inquit C* Pontius) ad 
 ilia iempora mefortuna reservavisset, et tune essem natus si quando 
 Romani dona accipere ccepissent : non essem passus diutius eos im- 
 perare Cic. in which reservavisset implies a wish for past time, 
 and essem natus for future. But ut used forpostquam, quam, quo- 
 modo, and as an adverb of likeness (see also Note 4), is followed 
 by the indicative ; and ne, as an adverb of hindering, by the im- 
 perative or subjunctive : as, Ut sumus in Ponto, terfrigore consti- 
 tit Ister Ovid. Utfalsus aniini est ! Ter. Ut tute es, item om- 
 jies censes esse Plaut. Sometimes, also, the future subjunctive : 
 as, Ut sementemfeceris, ita metes Cic. Abi, nejura, satis credo 
 Plaut. Ne fugite hospitium Virg. Ne post conferas culpam in 
 me Ter. Non, in a forbidding sense, is always joined with the 
 future indicative, and not with the imperative or subjunctive. In- 
 deed, it is most likely, that ne is, like non, always a mere nega- 
 tive adverb, and that the subjunctive following it is governed by 
 ut understood, which is also frequently expressed : thus, Eisque 
 prcedixit, ut ne prius Lacedamoniorum legatos dimitterent, quam 
 ipse esset remissus Nep. Sed tamen ita velim, ut ne quid properes 
 Cic. Ut non is likewise used forut ne : as, Utplura non dicam, 
 7ieque aliorum exemplis confirmem Cic. Or, for quin : as, Potest 
 igitur,judiceSj L. Cornelius damnari^ ut non C. Marii facturn con- 
 demnetur Cic. We also find quo ne with a comparative : as, 
 Cautum erat quo ne plus auri, et argentifacti domi haberemus Liv. 
 
 (7) Dummodois joined with the subjunctive: as, Ornnia ho- 
 nesta negligunt, dummodo potcntiam consequantur Cic. Also dum, 
 when used for it : as, Oderint, dum metuant Cic. 
 
 Note 6. When the English that is not commonly considered as 
 a pronoun, or definitive, and when at the same time it comes be- 
 tween two verbs, it is, in Latin, expressed by ut or quod with a 
 finite verb following, or the noun after it is put in the accusative, 
 and the verb, in the infinitive mood 1 . Ut is commonly used 
 after, 1st, Verbs signifying to intreat or request. 2dly, After verbs 
 signifying to decree, happen, order or command, but seldom after 
 juleo, unless signifying to decree. 3dly, After verbs signifying 
 to advise or persuade, generally. 4thly, After verbs signifying 
 to cause, effect, or bring to pass. 5thly, The articles of every 
 agreement are expressed by ut. 6thly, All intensive words, as 
 adeo, ita, talis, tantus, the pronouns is and hcsc^ &c. are followed 
 
 1 It was originally intended (see page 88) to introduce here the whole of v 
 the discussion relative to that. That part of it, however, which refers to thq 
 infinitive or ut or quod, will be found explained under Rule XLI V. 
 
283 
 
 
 
 by ut. This word ' is generally used to express the final cause, 
 or end proposed ; quod, the moving or impelling cause i thus, 
 "Scholam petere solebat,non qubdliterarum studiosus erat, sed ut 
 patri morem gereret," He went to school, not that he was desirous 
 of learning, but thatliQ might comply with the humour of his father. 
 Thus also, Gaudeo quod te interpellavi Cic. Cursorem miserunt, 
 ut nunliaret Nep. But in such phrases as Fulurum sensif, ut cce- 
 teri sec/uerentur Nep. and Inde Jit, ut raro reperire queamus 
 Hor., ut does not denote the final cause, but serves rather to 
 point out the connexion or relation subsisting between the pre- 
 ceding verb and the following member of the sentence, and an- 
 swers to the question by what ? Neither does ut, when used 
 after intensives, indicate the final cause, but the manner, as in 
 Nullum tarn impudens mendacium est, ut teste careat Plin. In 
 regard to such sentences, it is to be observed, that the intensive 
 is sometimes implied, as in Full disertus (he was so eloquent) ut 
 in primis dicendo valeret Nep. and that, instead of ut after in- 
 tensives, and after dignus, indignus, idoneus, major, ejusmodi, &c,, 
 qui is often used : as, Quis est tarn Lynceus, qui tantis tenebris ni- 
 hil oflendat, nusquam incurrat Cic. Qui ilium decreverunt dig- 
 num, suos cui liberos committerent Ter. Itane tandem idoneus 
 Till videor esse, quern tarn aperie fallere incipias dolis ! Ter. Ma- 
 jor sum, quam cui possit For tuna nocere Ovid. Genus belli est 
 ejusmodi, quod maxime vestros animos excitare debetCic. Missi 
 sunt, qui (or ut} consulerent Nep. Indeed, it may be added, 
 that in some instances, quod does not denote a moving or im- 
 pelling cause, but is used merely connective!}', when a simple 
 event is expressed, as depending upon a preceding verb ; thus 
 Sciojamjilius quod amet meus Plaut. forjilium meum amare. Ne 
 is the same as ut ne or ut non ; quominus is similar to ne, for quo 
 is used with comparatives instead of ut, and minus is merely a 
 negative ; and quin, which is qui ne, is used for quominus, quod 
 non, or ut non; so that ut, or the sense of it implied, seems the 
 basis of most of these particles.' As it is impossible to class 
 
 all words with the respective methods of expressing that after them, 
 and as many verbs are followed by different forms, sometimes 
 without any visible difference in the meaning, I shall subjoin to 
 this Rule, from Seyer, an alphabetical list (though not a complete 
 one, one half of the examples of which is, he says, taken from 
 Gesner's Thesaurus) of words followed by the accusative and in- 
 finitive, or by certain particles and finite verbs; premising, how- 
 ever, that, upon an examination of his instances, quodis evidently 
 often used for quia or quoniam, and that several words appear to 
 be followed by ut, not through .their own particular nature, but 
 by means of the verb with which they are connected, or some in- 
 tensive word expressed or implied in the preceding member of the 
 
 1 Ut, denoting the final cause, seems equivalent to the Greek 'i*y, eo fine, in 
 huiicjincm, eo consilio ; and, when used connectively, to on; whence, as will 
 hereafter he noticed, it is probably derived. Quod may, perhaps, claim the 
 i>ame origin. 
 
284 
 
 sentence; and that all the different forms are not always to be 
 used indifferently, but with a general reference to the several ex- 
 planations which have been given of the nature and use of the in- 
 finitive mood, and of the precise meaning and use of quid and ut. 
 For instance, we may say, Gaudeo te valere, I am glad that you 
 are well, which is equivalent to, Gaudeo tua salute, or valetudine 
 lond ; or Gaudeo quod tu vales, or valeas, both being expressions 
 of similar meaning; but we cannot, in this sense, say Gaudeo ut 
 tu valeas, because this would be supposed to mean I am glad (in 
 order) that you may be well. And although we may say Vis me 
 uxorem ducere, Do you wish me to marry, or my marriage, or Vis 
 ut uxorem ducam, Do you wish that I should marry, we cannot 
 use quod in this sense. We may say Suadeo till fugere, or utfu- 
 gias otium, if the intention, aim, and final cause of advising be to 
 induce you to shun idleness ; but we cannot say Suadeo till ut 
 (nor quod) rex venerit, if we mean to convey information, the verb 
 not admitting this sense. When persuadeo denotes to persuade, 
 that is, advise thoroughly, or with effect, it is commonly followed 
 by ut j thus, He persuaded me to be, Mihi persuasit, ut essem. But 
 when it signifies to persuade, or to convince, it is followed by the 
 infinitive ; thus, He persuaded me, that I was, Mihi persuasit, me 
 esse. In like manner moneo, when it signifies to apprize, by way 
 of counsel, of any truth or fact, requires the infinitive ; monenti- 
 lus amicis, cavendum esse Mutium Suet. His friends telling him 
 by way of caution. But when advice to action is implied, ut is 
 used. The same author says, Monitus est, ut vim multitudinis ca- 
 veret. But although we have endeavoured to point out the prin- 
 cipal and prominent difference between quod and ut, it must be 
 observed, that, in some instances, the shades of difference become 
 so faint, that their respective significations very much approxi- 
 mate each other. We find even quod used for ut : as, Prcemoneo 
 nunquam scripta quod ista legat Ovid. Mos veterum fuit, quod 
 praetor soleret pronunciare Ascon. in Verrin. This is not so re- 
 markable in the last example, since, had ut been used, it would 
 have been but as a definitive or connective. Ut for quod: as, Juro 
 ut ego rempullicam non deseram Liv. Si verum est ut populus R. 
 omnes gentes virtute superdrit Nep. But notwithstanding these 
 and similar instances, there is a distinction generally observed 
 between quod and ut ; for, as Ursinus observes, were we to say Die 
 quod veniat, we simply relate that the thing is doing ; if Die ut 
 venial, we mean, that it may be done : if we say Audivi quodfuerit 
 prcelium, we simply declare or specify the thing heard ; if Audivi 
 utfuerit prcetium* we refer to the manner of the action. We like- 
 wise sometimes find qui used as if equivalent to quia or quod, and 
 as well as quo, used also for ut 1 ; and, indeed, it is possible that 
 
 1 Thus, Nam in prologis scribendis operam abutitur, Non qiti argumcntum nar- 
 ret, sedqut malevoli Veteris po'etce malcdictisrcspondeat Ter. prol. And., in which 
 qui is supposed to he equivalent to ut. Stnltus es, qui hide credas, in which it is 
 reckoned equivalent to quia or quod. You arc a fool for believing him, or 
 
285 
 
 ut, quod, id, all denoting that, may bear some affinity to one an- 
 other, since ut, originally written uti, may be QTI, and quod, KO.I 
 orfi, qu' otti, quoddi, quodde, (hence quod,) for we know that, in 
 etymology, k and q, and t and d are respectively esteemed con-' 
 vertible letters. Indeed, or/, in whatever way it may be used, is, 
 in reality, the neuter gender of os~i$, as will be evident by ob- 
 serving the way in which it is sometimes used at the end of a 
 sentence : thus, 'AAX' OUK &ffow(ret$ t d!& oft Aristoph. " But 
 you will not restore it, I know that-" or, as we often express the 
 same assertion, " But I know that you will not restore it." 
 When it does not receive the action of the verb, and signifies 
 that or to the end that, like the Latin ut or uti, it is still consi- 
 dered as the pronoun, but governed by &' or ta, thus Sid on, 
 for that, or for that purpose. And in this way, it likewise denotes 
 the moving or impelling cause, like the Latin quod. Even when 
 the Latin ut or uti is used as an adverb of likeness, denoting as, 
 it may still be considered as having the import of a definitive, 
 since this last is supposed to be the German es, signifying that, 
 it, or which: thus, ILli, ut erat imperatum, circumsistunt, i. e. They 
 surround him, as (or that) had been ordered. And, in English, 
 the that which was formerly denominated a conjunction, is now 
 almost universally considered as an adjective, a definitive, or de- 
 monstrative, and is, like quod, easily resolvable into a relative 
 pronoun, being, as such, a word connecting two parts of a sen- 
 tence. Thus, if we say Benefacis, quod me adjuvas, You do well 
 that you assist me, we may resolve it into Adjuvas me, que id lene 
 fads, You assist me, and that, or rather for that (que ad id or ob 
 id, quod being equivalent to que id,) you do well 1 . But whether 
 quod be generally the relative; or whether it originally come from 
 the same source as ut, since the respective imports of these two 
 are so generally considered as greatly dissimilar, are matters con- 
 cerning which perhaps too much has already been said, as they 
 are subjects rather of curious than of beneficial investigation. 
 
 A LIST of Words having quod, ut, &c., or the Infinitive 
 Mood) after them 2 . 
 
 Abnuo ace. and inf. Absum ut, quin. 
 
 Abstineo quominus. Accedo ut, quod. 
 
 to believe him. Qui huic credis would denote simply, You, who believe him, 
 are a fool. Neque enim hoofed, quo tibi molestus essem Plin. in which qua 
 is equivalent to ut. See also Note 5, (5). 
 
 1 There are a few instances in which quod seems redundant : thus, Quod si- 
 mulatque Gracchus perspexit fluctuare populum Auct. ad. Herenn. iv. 55. 
 Quod utinam ilium eadem hcec simulantem videam Sail. Jug. 14. 21. 
 
 a The classical instances, and their authorities, are here omitted, that the 
 list might not extend beyond the limits necessarily prescribed to a work of this 
 description ; but this circumstance is, comparatively, of no great importance, 
 
286 
 
 Accido ut, ace. and inf. 
 Accipio, ace. and inf. 
 Acerbum est, ace. and inf. 
 Addo quod, ut. 
 Admoneo, see Moneo. 
 jEquitas quae ut. 
 jflistimo ut. 
 Affirmo, ace. and inf. 
 Ago ut, ne, ace. and inf. 
 Alieno quin. 
 Alius quam ut, nisi ut. 
 Ambigitur quin. 
 Ango, ace. and inf. 
 Aniraadverto quod, acc.and inf. 
 Annuo, ace. and inf. 
 Apparet quod, ace. and inf. 
 Appello quod. 
 Arguo, ace. and inf. 
 Argumentum quod, ut, ne, ace. 
 
 and inf. 
 Assequor ut. 
 
 Assentior, ace. and inf., ne. 
 Assevero, ace. and inf. 
 Audio, ace. and inf. 
 Auctor est ut, ne, ace. and inf. 
 Autumo, ace. and inf. 
 Bonum, melius, optimum est, ut. 
 Cadit ut. 
 
 Cano, Canto, ace. and inf. ut. 
 Caput est ut. 
 Caveo, Cautio, ut, ne.. 
 Cavillor, ace. and inf. 
 Causa est, quod, ut, quin. 
 Censeo ne, ace. and inf. 
 Cerno ut (how), ace. and inf. 
 Clamo and comp. ut,acc. and inf. 
 Cogitalio ea ut. 
 Cogo ut. 
 
 Cognosce quod, ace. and inf. 
 Committo ut, 
 Comperio, ace. and inf. 
 Competit ut. 
 
 Complector ut. 
 
 Concedo ut, ace. and inf. 
 
 Conditio ista est ut. 
 
 Conficio ut. 
 
 Confido ut, ace. and inf. 
 
 Confirmo ut, ace. and inf. 
 
 Confiteor, ace. and inf. 
 
 Congruo ut. 
 
 Conor quomirius. 
 
 Consilium esse ut. 
 
 Consentio, ace. and inf. 
 
 Consentaneum est, ace. and inf. 
 
 Consequor ut ne. 
 
 Constantiajnconstantia quse ut. 
 
 Constituo ut, ace. and inf. 
 
 Contendo ut, ne, aoc. and inf. 
 
 Contineo quin. 
 
 Contingit ut. 
 
 Convinco, ace. and inf. 
 
 Convenit ut, ne. 
 
 Credo, ace. and inf. 
 
 Custodio ne. 
 
 Cura, Curo ut, quod, ne. 
 
 Decerno ut. 
 
 Decet, Dedecet, ace. and inf. 
 
 Declare, ace. and inf. 
 
 Deduco quominus. 
 
 Definio, Definitio \\scc ut, quo- 
 minus. 
 
 Defugio, see Fugio. 
 
 Demonstro, ace. and inf. 
 
 Denuntio ut, ace. inf. 
 
 Deploro, see Ploro. 
 
 Deprecor ne, ut. 
 
 Despero ace. and inf. 
 
 .Deterreo ne. 
 
 Devito ne. 
 
 Dico-is, ace. and inf., ut and 
 quod seldom. 
 
 Dignus est ut. 
 
 Do ut, ace. and inf. 
 
 Do ceo, ace. and inf. 
 
 since the nature of the infinitive mood, and that of quod, ut, &c. have been so 
 fully explained. And, for the same reason, the list itself might have been 
 altogether omitted, without much loss or inconvenience. Indeed, upon a 
 minute inspection, it appears to me both redundant and defective ; and, in 
 some respects, so likely to perplex a learner, that I would advise him to rely 
 chiefly on the general rule, and on his own observation. Some of the other 
 lists occupy n considerable space, but their insertion could not, with propri- 
 ety, be avoided. 
 
287 
 
 Doleo quod, ace. and inf. 
 
 Dubium est quin. 
 [ Dubito, an, num, utrum, ace, 
 and inf. 
 
 Duco (to lead), Adduce ut. 
 
 Edico ut, ne, ace. and inf. 
 
 Edictum ne. 
 
 Efficio ut, ne, ace. and inf. 
 
 En undo, ace. and inf. 
 
 Eripio quin. 
 
 Erro quod. 
 
 Error hie ut. 
 
 Evenio ut, quod. 
 
 Evinco ut. 
 
 Excipio ut, ne. 
 I Excogito ut. 
 
 Excuso quod (for quia). 
 
 Exigo ut. 
 
 Existimo, ace. and inf. 
 
 Exoro ut, ne. 
 
 Expecto ut. 
 
 Experior ut. 
 
 Explore, ace. and inf. 
 
 Extremum est ut. 
 
 Facio ut, quod. 
 
 Fallo, ace. and inf. 
 
 Falsum esse ut. 
 
 Fama pervenit, ace. and inf. 
 
 Fateor, ace. and inf. 
 
 Fero ut, ace, and inf. 
 
 Fides est, ace. and inf. 
 
 Fingo, ace. and inf. 
 
 Fit ut; Fiebat, factum est, &c, 
 ut. 
 
 Fleo, ace. and inf. 
 
 Fremo, ace. and inf. 
 
 Fugio, Defugio ne, quin. 
 
 Fugit quin. 
 
 Gaudeo quod, ace. and inf. 
 
 Glorior, ace. and inf. 
 
 Gratia quod vivo. 
 
 Gratulor quod, ace. and inf. 
 
 Habeo hoc ut. 
 
 Hortor, Cohortor ne, ut. 
 
 Impedio ne, quominus. 
 
 Impello ut. 
 
 Impetro ut, ne. 
 
 Inclamo ut. 
 
 Incline ut. 
 
 Induce ut, ne, quominite. 
 
 Injicio mentem ut. 
 
 Instituo ut. 
 
 Insto ut, ne. 
 
 Insuesco ut. 
 
 Integrum erat ut. 
 
 Intercede ut ne, quominus. 
 
 Intelligo, ace. and inf. 
 
 Interdico ne., 
 
 Interest ut, ace. and inf. 
 
 Invite ut. 
 
 Irascor, Succenseo quod. 
 
 Jubeo ut, ace. and inf. 
 
 Jure, Adjuro, ace. and inf. 
 
 Jus hoc ut. 
 
 Juvo, ace. and inf. 
 
 Lahore, Elaboro ut, ne. 
 
 Lsetor, ace. and inf. 
 
 Laus est, ace. and inf. 
 
 Largior ut. 
 
 Lege ea ut. 
 
 Licet ut, ace. and inf. 
 
 Liquet, ace. and inf. 
 
 Mando ut ne. 
 
 Memini, ace. and inf. 
 
 Mente ea ne. 
 
 Mentior, ace. and inf. 
 
 Metuo, see Timeo. 
 
 Minor, ace. and inf. 
 
 Mirer, mirus &c. quod, ut, 
 
 quin, ace. and inf. 
 Molior ut. 
 Moneo, Adraoneo ut, ne, ace. 
 
 and inf. 
 Mos est ut. 
 Mora est quin. 
 
 Moror quominus, ace. and inf. 
 Munus est quod, ut. 
 Narro ut (for quemadmodum ) . 
 Nascor ut. 
 
 Necesse est ut, ace. and inf. 
 Nego, Denego, ace. and inf. 
 Negotium dat ut. 
 Niter, Connitor ut, ne. 
 Nosco, ace. and inf. ; ut (how). 
 Nuntio, Nuntius, ace. and inf. 
 Objicio quod. 
 Obliviscor, ace. and inf., ut^br 
 
 quemadmodum. 
 
288 
 
 Obsecro ut, ne. 
 
 Observe ne. 
 
 Obsisto, Obsto ne. 
 
 Obtestor ut, ne. 
 
 Obtineo ut. 
 
 Obtrecto ne. 
 
 Officium primum est ut. 
 
 Omitto quod. 
 
 Opinio, (with ea, ut) ace. and 
 
 inf. 
 
 Operam dare ut. 
 Opto ut. 
 
 Oportet ut, ace. and inf. 
 Oro ut, ne. 
 
 Ostendo quod, ace. and inf. 
 Paciscor &c. ut, ne. 
 Parum est quod, ut. 
 Par est, ace. and inf. 
 Paro ut. 
 
 Pateo, ace. and inf. 
 Patior ut, quin, ace. and inf. 
 Paveo, see Timeo. 
 Peccatum quod. 
 Percipio ut, ace. and inf. 
 Perduco ut. 
 Perficio ut. 
 Permit to ut. 
 Perpello ut. 
 Perse vero ut. 
 
 Perspicuum est, ace. and inf. 
 Peto, Postulo, Precor, &c. ut. 
 Ploro, Deploro quod, ace. and 
 
 inf. 
 
 Polliceor, ace. and inf. 
 Praecipio ut, ne. 
 Praedico, -as, ace. and inf. 
 Praedico, -is ut, ne,, ace. and inf. 
 Praescribo ut, ne. 
 Praesto ut, ace. and inf. 
 Praetereo ut, ne, quin, ace. and 
 
 inf. 
 
 Praetermitto as Prsetereo. 
 Praevertor quod. 
 Probo ut, quod, ace. and inf. 
 Profiteer,, ace. and inf. 
 Prohibeo ne, quin, quominus, 
 
 ace. and inf. 
 Promitto, ace. and inf. 
 Prope erat ut. 
 
 Propositum tertium est ut. 
 Propono ut, ace. and inf. 
 Proprium est civitatis ut. 
 Prospicio, ace. and inf. 
 Prodest quod, quin, ace. and 
 
 inf. 
 
 Provideo ne. 
 Pugno ut. 
 Puto, ace. and inf. 
 Quain with comp. degree ut. 
 Queror quod (because}, ace. 
 
 and inf. 
 Rarum est ut. 
 
 Recuso ne, quin, quominus. 
 liefero quod. 
 Relipquitur ut. 
 ReKquum ut, quominus. 
 Rehuntio, ace. and inf. 
 Reor, ace. and inf. 
 Repeto ut. 
 Restat ut. 
 Resisto ne. 
 Respondeo ut. 
 Rogo ut, ne. 
 Sancio ne, ace. and inf. 
 Sapientia quod. 
 Scelus est quod. 
 Scio ( quod rarely), ace. and inf. 
 Scribo ut, ne, ace. and inf. 
 Senatus consultum ne, ut. 
 Sententia una ut. 
 Sequitur ut, ace. and inf. 
 Signum ne, arc. and inf. 
 Simulo, ace. and inf. 
 Sino ut. 
 
 Spero, Spes ut, ace. and inf. 
 Statuo ne, ace. and inf. 
 Sto ne, quominus. 
 Struo ut. 
 Studeo ut. 
 Stupeo, ace. and inf. 
 Suadeo ut, dat. and inf. 
 Subeo, Succurro, ace. and inf. 
 Sum, Est ut, (inde est quod,) 
 
 ace. and inf. 
 Supplex ut. 
 Suscipio ut. 
 
 Suspicor ut ne, ace. and inf. 
 Tango ut. 
 
289 
 
 Tempus est ut. 
 
 Teneo ut, ne, quin. 
 
 Tento ut. 
 
 Testis quod. 
 
 Tester, ace. and inf. 
 
 Timeo &c. ne, ut, quin, ace, 
 
 and inf. 
 
 Trado, ace. and inf. 
 Tribuo ut. 
 Vereor ne, ut. 
 
 Verisimile est ut, ace. and inf. 
 Verum est ut, ace. and inf. 
 
 Veto ne, quominus, ace. and inf. 
 Video, ace. and inf. 
 Visurn est mihi ut. 
 Video for Caveo, ne, ut. 
 Vinco. Vicit sententia ut, ace. 
 
 and inf. 
 
 Vis parva naturae est quod. 
 Vim hanc habuit ut. 
 Vitiura est quod. 
 Volo ut, ace. and inf. 
 Utilis ut ne. 
 
 LISTS. 
 
 Neuter Verbs variously construed wdei' the same 
 Signification. 
 
 Accedere muris, LzV. ad urbem, Adequitare portae, Plin. ade- 
 
 Sall. in oppidum, Cic. acce- quitare Syracusas, Liv. 
 
 dere domos infernas, Virg. Adesse pugnae, i. c. praesentem 
 
 accedere alicui, i. e. assentiri, esse, Cic. in pugna, Sail, ad 
 
 Quinct. 
 Accidit auribus, Plin. ad aures, 
 
 exercitura, Plaut. adesse ami- 
 cis, i. e. auxiliari, Cic. 
 
 Liv. genibus, Id. ad genua, Adhaerere lateri, Liv. ad turrim, 
 Suet, in te isthuc verbum, Cces. in me, Cic. fronte, pro 
 
 Ter. 
 
 in fronte, Ovid. Sic. 
 
 Accubare horreis, Hor. scor- Adhaerescere justitiae, Cic. ad 
 turn, Plaut. alicui in convi- saxum, Id. in hanc materiam, 
 vio, Cic. apud aliquem, Id. Id. 
 
 Sic. 
 Accumbere epulis, Virg t in epu 
 
 lo, Cic. 
 Acquiescere rei alicui, Sen. ali- 
 
 Adhinnire equae, Ovid, equam, 
 
 Plaut. ad orationem, Cic. 
 Adjacere mari, Liv. mare, 
 
 Nep. 
 
 qua re, Cic. at scepius, in all- Adnare navibus, Liv. naves, 
 qua re, Id. Cces. 
 
 Adambulare lateri alicujus, Adnatare insulae, Plin, ad ma- 
 
 Apul. ad ostium, Plant. 
 
 num, Id, 
 
 1 Also, in the same sense, Accedere ad sententiam alicujus' Plaut. But 
 when the noun denotes a person, the dative is used ; for with an accusative 
 of a person and ad, uccedo signifies to go. When it signifies to be added to, 
 either construction may be used : as, Hoc accedit da?nnis-Ovid. Ad IKEC 
 mala hoc mihi accedit. In this sense, also, the dative of a person is usually 
 preferred. When it denotes to happen to, the dative only is used : as, Huic 
 nihil possit qffensionis accedere Cic. To arrive at, the accusative with ad : as, 
 GUI'S ita ad vsnustatem JEsovi accedat. 
 
 u 
 
290 
 
 Adrepere virorum animis, Tac. 
 
 ad amicitiam alicujus, Cic. 
 Adstare mensis domini, Mart. 
 
 trabes, V. Flac. ad Achillis 
 
 turnulum, Cic. in eonspectu, 
 
 Id. 
 Adstrepere alicui, Tac. aures 
 
 alicujus, Plin. 
 Adsultare vallo, Sil- moras por- 
 
 tarum, Slat. 
 Advenire alicui, Tac. urbem, 
 
 Virg. ad urbem, Quid. Sic. 
 Adventare alicui, Tac. portis, 
 
 Slat, locum, Tac. ad Italiam, 
 
 Cic. 
 Adversari alicui, Cic. aliquem, 
 
 Tac. 
 Advigilare alicui, Tib. ad cus- 
 
 todiam ignis, Cic. 
 Adulari alicui, Curt, aliquem, 
 
 Cic. Col. Tac. 
 Advolare rei, vel homini, Plin. 
 
 Virg. ad equites, Liv. advo- 
 
 lat rostra Cato, Cic. 
 Afflare alicui rei vel personae, 
 
 Hor. aliquem re/, aliquid, Virg. 
 
 aliquid alicui, Virg. 
 Affluere alicui,, Owe/, ad aliquid, 
 
 Cic. 
 Allabi oris, Virg. ad exta, Liv. 
 
 aures alicujus, Virg. 
 All at rare alicui, Aur. Viet. 
 
 aliquem scspius, Liv. Plin. 
 
 Col. 
 Alludere alicui, Plin. ad mulie- 
 
 rem, Ter. 
 Anniti hastae, Virg. ad aliquid, 
 
 Cic. aliquid, i. e. conari perfi- 
 
 cere, Plin. 
 
 Antecedere alicui rei, Cic. ali- 
 quem, Id. antecedere aliquem 
 
 aetate, nobi\itate, magnificen- 
 
 tia, Justin. Suet, raro alicui. 
 Antecellere alicui, Cic. rarissime 
 
 aliquem. 
 Anteire alicui, Cic. aliquem, 
 
 Tac. alicui aetate, Cic. om- 
 nes gloria, Sail, caeteros vir- 
 tute, Cic. 
 
 Antestare cseteris virtute, Cell. 
 caeteros robore, Apul. 
 
 Antevenire rei alicui, Plant, ali- 
 quem, Sail, tempus, Claud. 
 
 Antevertere alicui, i. e.anteeum 
 venire, Ter. Sic. antevertere 
 damnationem veneno,f .e. prae- 
 venire, Tac. At, antevertere 
 rem rei, est pragponere, Plant. 
 
 Apparere alicui, i. e. officii aut 
 obsequii causa praesto esse: ut, 
 Lictores apparentConsulibus, 
 Liv. Apparent ad solium Jo- 
 vis, Virg. l 
 
 Appropinquare Britanniae, Cces. 
 portam, Hirt. ad portam, Id. 
 appropinquat alicui posna. Cic. 
 
 Arridere alicui, i. e.placere,Hor. 
 Arridere ridentibus, Id. ali- 
 quid, Gell. 
 
 Aspirare coeptis, Ovid, ad ali- 
 quem, i. e. pervenire, Cic. ad 
 laudem, i. e. contendere, Id. 
 in curiam, Id. 
 
 Assidere segro, Senec. Assidet 
 insano, i. e. proximus est, 
 Hor. Assidere aliquem, Sail. 
 
 Assistere alicui, Plin. ad fores, 
 Cic. super aliquem, Virg. 
 contra aliquem, Cic. Assistere 
 equos, t. e. sistere, Slat. 
 
 Assuesco, assuefacio,assuefio, re 
 aliqua: Genus pugnae quo as- 
 sueverant, Liv. Puro sermo- 
 neassuefactadomus, Cic. As- 
 suescere rei alicui, Liv. Operi 
 assuefecit, Id. Assuescere ad 
 homines, Cces. In hoc assues- 
 cat, Quinct. animis bella, Virg^. 
 
 Attendere Caesari, Plin. juri, 
 Suet, aliquem, Cic. res hos- 
 tium, Sail. animum, Ter. 
 auimum ad rem aliquam, Cic. 
 
 1 When it denotes to be conspicuous, or to be clear, it is generally followed 
 by the dative only : as, Apparet mihi res Hor. Cui non apparere, affectare 
 turn imperium in Latinos Liv. 
 
Auscultare alicui, Ter. aliquem, 
 Plaut. 
 
 Blandiri sensibus, Cic. igneara 
 sae.vitiam, Colum. 
 
 Colludere alicui, Hor. cum ali- 
 quo, Cic. 
 
 Confido, Vid. Fido. 
 
 Congruere alicui, Ter. cum re 
 aliqua, Cic. inter se, Id. 
 
 Constare sibi, Cic. secum, Id. 
 Constat inter omnes, Nep. 
 Res mihi cum aliis constat, 
 Auct. ad Her. 
 
 Consuescere alicui, Ter. cum ali- 
 quo, Plaut. libero victu, Co- 
 lum. juvencum aratro, pro 
 consuefacere, Id. 
 
 Consulere alicui, Ter. famae ali- 
 cujus, Cic. de salute sua, Id. 
 durius in aliquem, Tac. in 
 longitudinem, Ter. in com- 
 mune, in medium, in publi- 
 cum, Ter. Lucan. Plin. 
 
 Convenire alicui, Cic. cum re 
 aliqua, Id. Convenit in eum 
 haec suspicio, Id. Cothurnus 
 convenit ad pedem, Id. Con- 
 veniunt mores, Ter. Majestas 
 et amor non con veniunt, Quid. 
 ^Etatem aliam aliud factum 
 convenit, Plaut. Aliquid mi- 
 hi convenit cum adversariis, 
 Auct. ad Her. Convenimus 
 inter nos, Plaut. Inter omnes 
 convenit, Cic. Saevis inter se 
 convenit ursis, Juv. 
 
 Deh'ciunt mihi vires, Gees, me 
 vires, Cic. Deficior viribus, 
 Senec. omnibus rebus, Col. 
 ab arte, i. e. destituor, Ovid. 
 
 Degenerare patri, Claud, ali- 
 quem, Ovid, a virtute, Cic. 
 
 Derogare alicui, Cic. legi, Auct. 
 ud Her. de lege, Cic. ex aequi- 
 tate, Id. fidem alicui, Id. de 
 fide alicujus, Id. 
 
 Desperare saluti alicujus, Cic. 
 de republica, Id. pacem, Id. 
 rempublicam, Id. 
 
 Desuescerehonori,&7. Desueta 
 bello agmina, Pirg. At hoc 
 dativo an ablativo dictum, in- 
 cerium, 
 
 Desunt verba dolori, Ovid. In 
 Antonio defuit hie ornatus, 
 Cic. Paucae ei centuriae ad 
 Consulatum defuerunt, Id. 
 
 Dominari cunctis oris, firg. 1 in 
 caetera animalia, Ovid, in civi- 
 tate, Cic. 
 
 Excellere alicui dignitate, Cic. 
 in aliqua re, Id. super alios, 
 Liv. aliter, inter, praeter cae- 
 teros, Cic. inter aliquos, Id. 
 
 Facere ad aliquid, pro prodesse 
 vet convenire, Ovid, et alii 
 frequenter. Raro hdc notione, 
 facere alicui, Prop. Hor. 
 
 Fidere, confidere rei alicui, Virg. 
 Cic. re aliqua, Id. in re ali- 
 qua, Hirt? 
 
 Gratulor tibi hanc rem, Cic. hac 
 
 1 Some have supposed this case to be the dative ; and some the ablative. 
 Alvarez conceives it to be the dative, and in the following it certainly is this 
 case ; Toti dominabere mundo Claudian. Diomedes and Vossius have ima- 
 gined it to be the ablative. Alvarez considers such expressions as Dominatus 
 cst Alexandria, Victis domitmbitnr Argis, as similar to Natus est Romce, Athenis. 
 Dominor is often followed by inter. 
 
 * When the following noun is a person, the dative only is used ; as, Confido 
 tibi, not te, unless te depend upon some infinitive. Fido is often followed by 
 the dative, and often by the ablative, but perhaps by the latter oftener. Con- 
 fido is construed in like manner : as, Sibi confidere Cic. causee Cic. Jlrmi- 
 tate cordons Cic. in which last there is an ellipsis of in. It is often construed 
 with the infinitive : as, Confido fore ; and thus also diffido. When this last de- 
 notes to distrust, it governs the dative only : as, Prudentice alicujus diffidere~ 
 Cic. But we say Confidere or Diffidere de salute alicujus, and the like, in which 
 the former seems to denote to have hopes of, and the latter to despair of. 
 
 U2 
 
292 
 
 re, Gael. ap. emd. de hac re, 
 Cic. in hac re, Id, 
 
 Haeret lateri, Virg. curru, Id. 
 alicui in visceribus, Cic. 1 
 
 Ignoscere alicui, Ter. vitio, 
 Ovid, peccatum suum alicui, 
 Plant. 
 
 Illudere alicui, Virg. aliquem, 
 Ter. aliquid, Virg. in ali- 
 quem, Ter. in aliquo, Id. 
 
 Illabi rei alicui, Virg. in rem 
 aliquam, Cic. Perniciesillapsa 
 civiuni aniraos, Id. ad eos il- 
 labi, Id. 
 
 Illuxit dies alicui, Liv. aliquem, 
 Plant. 
 
 Imminere rei alicui, Ovid, in 
 fortunas alicujus, Cic.' 
 
 Immorari rei alicui, V. Max. in 
 re aliqua, Quint. 
 
 Immori studiis, Hor. in vino, 
 Plin. 
 
 Impendere alicui, Cic. aliquem, 
 Ter. in aliquem, Cic. 
 
 Incessit cura, cupido, timor ali- 
 cui, Liv. V* Max. Sail, aliquem, 
 Liv. Tac. in aliquem, Ter. 
 
 Incubare ovis, Col. ova, Plin. 
 pecunias, thesauris, Cic. Liv. 
 
 Incumbere toro, Virg. gladium, 
 Plant, in gladium, Cic. labo- 
 ri, Sil. ad laudem, Cic. ad 
 studia, Id. in studium, cu- 
 ram, cogitationem, Id. 3 
 
 Incurro et incurso rei alicui, 
 Snet. rem aliquem, Liv. in 
 rem aliquam, Cic. 
 
 Jndulgeo illi, Ter. me, Id. ali- 
 quid alicui, &uet. 
 
 Ingemcre,ingemiscere rei alicui, 
 Liv. re aliqua, Curt, in re ali- 
 qua, Cic. Ingemuere jacentem 
 Inachidae Stat, interitum, 
 Virg. 
 
 Inhaereo et inhaeresco rei alicui, 
 Ovid, in re aliqua, Cic. 
 
 Inhiare auro, Flor. bona alicu- 
 jus, Plant. Virg. 
 
 Innare aquae, Liv. fluvium, 
 Virg. 
 
 Jnnasci rei alicui, Ter. in re ali- 
 qua, Cic. Innati eodem solo, 
 Just. 
 
 Innatare flumini, Plin. undam, 
 Virg. in concham, Cic. 
 
 Inniti rei alicui, Stat. re aliqua, 
 Liv. in re aliqua, Cic. in ali- 
 quem, Plin. 
 
 Insidere rei alicui vel personae, 
 Virg. collem, Plin. locum, 
 Liv. in memoria, in animo, 
 in medullis, i. e. firmiter in- 
 haerere, Cic. 
 
 Insidunt apes floribus,' Virg. 
 pardiinsidunt condensa arbo- 
 re, Plin. 
 
 Insilire rei alicui, Lncan. in e- 
 quum, Liv. tauros, Suet, su- 
 pra lignum, Phesdr. 
 
 Insistere cure rerum, Plin. ves- 
 tigiis alicujus, Cic. \iarn, Ter. 
 via, Id. in re aliqua, Cic. in 
 dolos, Plant, negotium, Id. 
 
 Instare operi, firg. victis, Liv. 
 rectam viam, Plant, currum 
 Marti, i. e. instanter fabrica- 
 re, Virg. unum, i. e. instanter 
 urgere, Ter. 
 
 1 H&rere in amorem Plaut. Ad radices linguae h&rens stomachusClc. In 
 Hceret pede pesVirg. either pede is an old dative, or it may be an ablative 
 governed by cum or some other preposition. 
 
 2 Also, Imminere Jbrtunis Cic. ad cesdem Id. 
 
 3 When this word is not used figuratively, the dative according to Valla is 
 used : as, Incumbere remis, not in remos nor ad remos. Incumbere alicui, in 
 ilium and in illo, referring to a person, are all mentioned as having been used. 
 But when, figuratively, the mind is referred to, it is followed by an accusative 
 with ad or in .- as, Omni studio ad bellum incumbereCic. Incumbe in hanc 
 curam Cic. In this signification it hardly admits a dative : but Incumbere 
 philosophise, vel Juris studio, and a few similar expressions are noticed. 
 
293 
 
 Inspuere rei alicui, Plin. all- 
 quid, Id. in aliquid, Id* 
 
 Insuere rei alicui, Ovid, pelle 
 juvenci, Id. culeo, y. Max. 
 in culeura, Cic. 
 
 Insuescere rei alicui, Tac. re 
 aliqua, Colum. 
 
 Insultare alicui rei vel personse, 
 Suet. Cic. fores, Ter. patien- 
 tiara alicujus, Tac. in miseriam 
 alicujus, Auct. ad Her. bonos, 
 Sail. 
 
 Insum rei alicui, Sen. in re ali- 
 qua, Cic. 
 
 Insurgere regnis alicujus, Ovid. 
 in miseros, Slat. 
 
 Jnsusurrare alicui, Cic. in aurem 
 alicujus, Id. 
 
 Intercedit mihi tecum amicitia, 
 Cic. internes, Id.^ 
 
 Interdicere alicui provincia, 
 Suet, aqua et igni, Cic. foe- 
 minis usura purpurae, Liv? 
 de vi hominibus armatis, Cic. 
 
 Jnteresse rei alicui, Cic. in re 
 aliqua, Id. 3 
 
 Interjaceresulcis, Col. duasSyr- 
 
 tes, Plin. Haec inter earn et 
 
 Rhodum interjacet, Id. 
 Intervenire alicui rei, Tac. cog- 
 
 nitionem, Id. 
 Invasit timer improbis, Cic. Vis 
 
 avaritiae in animos invaserat, 
 
 Sail. Invadere urbem, Virg. 
 
 in fortunas alicujus, Cic. in 
 
 arcem causse, Id. 
 Invidere honori alicujus, Cic. 
 
 honorem alicui, HOT. aliquem, 
 
 Ovid, in re aliqua, Cic.* 
 Latet res mihi, Lucan. Latet 
 
 me, Virg* 
 Mederi alicui, Cic. cupiditates, 
 
 Ter. contra serpentum ictus, 
 
 Plin. 
 Medicari alicui, Virg. ictum 
 
 cuspidis, Id. 
 Moderari animo, Cic. gentibus, 
 
 Sail, navim, Cic. omnia, Id. 
 Nocere alicui, Cic. rarissimeali- 
 
 quern, Plant. 
 
 Nubere alicui, Cic. in clarissi- 
 mam familiam, Id. Nupta 
 
 1 It is sometimes used absolutely : as, Unus et alter dies intercesscrat Cic. 
 i. e. inter hoc ct illud factiim ; or, as we say in English ,had intervened. Sena- 
 tds auctoritas intercessit Cic. i. e. medium se interposuit, vel, impcdivit : in 
 which last sense it seems that Seneca says Quoties potent, sapiens fortunes in- 
 tercedet. Whether we can use intercedere pro aliquo, for to supplicate in behalf 
 ef, or to intercede for, seems questionable. 
 
 * Intcrdico te hoc re is very uncommon ; but this case seems to be sanctioned 
 by such phrases as Philosophi urbe et Italia intcrdicti aunt Gell. Its usual con- 
 struction seems to be with the dative, and an ablative : as, Vos interdicitis pa- 
 tribus commercio plebis Liv. Interdirit histrionibus scenam is written by Sue- 
 tonius ; and Omni Gallid Ro7nanas interdixisset is attributed to Caesar ; but 
 some read Romanis. Interdicor aqua ct igni does not seem to be sanctioned 
 by authority. And in Cicero's lit M. Tullio aqua et ignis interdicatur ; and 
 Ut mihi aqua et ignis inter 'dicerelur, it is thought by the best critics that aqua 
 and ignis are mistaken for aqua et igni. 
 
 3 Here intersum signifies to be present ; but when it signifies to come between 
 or to differ, a different construction is used : as, Inter primuni et sextum con- 
 sulatum 46 anni inteifuerunt Cic. Hoc pater et dominus interest Ter. Stulto 
 intelligens quid interest ? Ter. 
 
 4 This verb is commonly construed with the dative of the person, and the 
 accusative of the thing. That it may have been construed, especially by the 
 antients, with the accusative of the person, appears from Horace's Ego cur ac- 
 qtdrere pauca Si possum, mvideor. 
 
 * Latet has commonly the dative in Cicero ; as Xifiil maUris quod mihi la- 
 tcrt. valeat ; and this case seems more consonant with the analogy of the Latin 
 language than the accusative, which seems an imitation of Greek construction. 
 
294- 
 
 cum aliquo, Id. Una nupta 
 apud duos, Gell. 1 
 Obambulare muris, Liv. ante 
 
 portas, Id. ^Etnam, Ovid. 
 Obequitare castris, Liv. agraen, 
 
 Curt. 
 
 Obrepere alicui, Cic. in animos 
 dormientium,/(rf. ad honores, 
 Id. Taciturn te obrepet fames, 
 Plant. 
 
 Obtrectare alicui, Cic. laudibus 
 alicujus, Cic. vires, V.Max. 
 Obversari oculis, Liv. ante ocu- 
 los, Id. ad aures, Lucr. som- 
 no, Liv. in somnis, Id. 
 Obumbrat sibi vinea, Plin. Ob- 
 
 umbrant Solem nubes, Id. 
 Occumbere morti, Virg. mor- 
 tem, Cic. morte, Liv. 
 Palpari alicui, Plant. Palpare 
 
 aliquem, Juv. 
 
 Parcere alicui, Cic. labori, Ter. 
 
 pecuniam, Plant. Ut parce- 
 
 rent sibi vitam, Gelt. Talenta 
 
 natisparcetuis, Virg. Utacae- 
 
 dibus parceretur,Lzz;. Parcite 
 
 oves nimium procedere^zYg. 
 
 Pepigit mihi aliquid, Ovid. Pe- 
 
 pigit cum aliquo, Suet. Pepi- 
 
 gerunt inter se, Auct. ad He- 
 
 renn. Sic. Paciscor alicui, 
 
 Cic. cum aliquo, Id. Pacisci 
 
 vitam ab aliquo, Sail, vitam 
 
 pro laude, Virg. 
 
 Praecedunt vestraefortunaemeis, 
 
 P/aw/.Praecedere aliquem vir- 
 
 tute, Goes, omnes in re aliqua, 
 
 Plin. Prsecedere agmen, Virg. 
 
 Praecurrere alicui, Cic. aliquem, 
 
 Id. ante omnes, Cces. 
 Praeire alicui, Slat. i. e. praecede- 
 
 re aliquem. Praeire alicui verba, 
 
 sacramentum, Liv. Tac. i. e. 
 
 dictare. Praeire verbis, Plant. 
 
 voce alicui, Cic. descripto,P/m. 
 
 Praejacens Asiae vastum mare, 
 
 Plin. Praejacere castra, Tac. 
 
 Praeminere omnibus, Sen? ma- 
 
 los, Tac. 
 
 Praesidere urbi, imperio, Cic. 
 exercitum, Italiam, littora 
 Oceani, Tac. 
 
 Praestare alicui, Cic. omnibus 
 humanitate, Id. omnes elo- 
 quentia,, Nep. s 
 Praestolari alicui, Cic. aliquem, 
 
 TV. 4 
 
 Praevertere al iquid rei alicu i, Liv. 
 uxorem prae republica, Plant. 
 Cursu pedum praevertere ven- 
 tos, Virg. Et passive, Prae- 
 vertihoc certumest rebus aliis 
 omnibus, Plant. Ut bell urn 
 praeverti sinerent, Liv. Vo- 
 lucremque fuga praevertitur 
 Hebrum, Virg. 
 
 Procumbere terrae, Ovid.* geni- 
 bus alicujus, Id. ad genua, 
 Liv. ante pedes, Ov id. in ar- 
 mos, Mart. 
 
 Providere rei frumentarice, Cces. 
 rem frumentariam, Cces, de 
 re frumentaria. Cess. 
 Quadrare alicui, Cic. in ali- 
 quem,/^. admulta,/(i. acer- 
 vum, i, e. in quadrum redi- 
 gere, Hor. 
 
 Respondere alicui, Cic. his,CV&?. 
 
 ad haac, ad postulata, Id. ad 
 
 nomen,Z,;. votis alicujus,, i.e. 
 
 satisfacere,^zrg.ad spem,Lfv. 
 
 Servire, inservire aliciu, Hor. 
 
 1 Tlius also Denubere alicui Tac. And Denubere in domum alicujus Tac. 
 It is very probable, that as nubo seems to signify properly vdare, to cover, or 
 to veil, an accusative is always understood to it. 
 
 2 Some read prcenitere. 3 Also, Preestitit inter suos tcquales Cic. 
 
 4 Cicero often construes this verb with a dative ; but almost every other 
 writer uses the accusative. 
 
 5 Terrce may here be perhaps the genitive, as in Procumbit humi bos, in solo 
 being understood to both. 
 
295 
 
 Cic. rarissime aliquem, Plant. 
 Turpil. 
 
 Studere alicui rei, i, e. operam 
 dare, Cic. literas, Id. aliquid, 
 2. e. cupere, Cic. in earn rem, 
 Quinct. in ea re, Gdl. Stude- 
 re alicui, i. e. favere, Cic. 
 
 Subesse rei alicui, Cic. in re ali- 
 qua, Id. 
 
 Subire muro, Vug. feretro, Id. 
 Subeunt mihi cunctarum fas- 
 tidia, Ovid. Subire tecta, Virg. 
 limina, Id. ad moenia, Liv. 
 ad portas, Id. in locum alicu- 
 jus, Ovid, in ceelum, Plin. 
 sub acumen styli, Cic. Subi- 
 bat me, viros fmxisse caecam 
 esse fortunam, Apul. At sub- 
 ire onus, labores, pcenam, 
 periculum, &c. item-, subiit a- 
 
 nimum, mentem, fere semper 
 dicuntur. 1 
 
 Subjacere monti, Plin. ad ali- 
 quid, Quinct. 
 
 Succedere penatibus, F?rg. mu- 
 ro, Liv. murum, Sail, ad ur- 
 bem, Liv. sub primam aciem, 
 CMS. in pugnam, Liv. Suc- 
 cedere alicui et in locum ali- 
 cujus, Cic. 
 
 Superstare alicui rei, Liv. ali- 
 quem, Virg. 
 
 Supervenire alicui, Liv. Unda 
 supervenit undam, Hor. 
 
 Venire alicui, Ovid, multb fre- 
 quentius ad aliquem, Cic. sub- 
 sidio alicui, Cic. suppetias, 
 Hirt. B. AJ. adversum alicui, 
 Plant, sub ictum telorum, Liv. 
 
 To these may be added the following List of Ferbs sometimes 
 employed as Active or Neuter 2 , in the same Sense, or in 
 one a little different from the primary Signification. 
 
 Abhorreo, N. (usually.) A. Om- 
 nes ilium abhorrent et asper- 
 nantur, Cic. 
 
 Abnuo, Annuo. N. Annuit his 
 Juno, jfin. 12, 84-1. A. Jain 
 abnuentes omnia, fiall. Jug. 
 Omen abnuit ^Eneas, sEn. 
 5, 531. Cceli quibus annuis 
 arcem, ^En. 1, 250. 
 
 Aboleo. A. Corpus nonigni abo- 
 litum, Tac. N. Memoria cla- 
 dis nondum aboleverat, Liv* 
 perhaps se understood. 
 
 Adolesco or Adoleo. A. Igne 
 puro altaria adolentur, Tac. 
 
 hist. 2, 3, 5. N. Adolescunt 
 ignibus ara3, Georg. 4>, 379. 
 And in a different seme, Si- 
 mul atque adoleverit aetas, 
 Hor. sat. 1, 9, 34-. 
 
 Adulor.N. Potenti adulari, Nep. 
 25, 8, 6. A. Adulari fortu- 
 nam alterius, Cic. de divin. 2. 
 plebem, Liu. 23, 4. 
 
 JEquo. A. (us. } N.Libros^qui jam 
 illis fere aequarunt, studiose 
 legas, Cic. off. 1, 1, al. 3. Ita 
 signis carpentisque et spoliis 
 ferme sequabat, Liv. 33, 24. 
 perhaps se is understood. 
 
 1 Subeo is often used absolutely : as, Subiit cogitatio, mcmoria, cura, Sec. in 
 which animum or mentem is understood ; indeed, it is generally expressed. 
 In the same sense, Subiit regem sera pcenitcntiaCurt. and, with the accusa- 
 tive suppressed, Subiit cart gentians imago Virg. In this sense the dative is 
 found: as, Subeant animo Latmia saxa tuo Ovid. 
 
 8 In the same manner we sometimes find, in English, such expressions as 
 " To cease a noise," for " To make a noise cease." Thus also " To rurt a 
 horse," "dance a child," " sleep away sorrow, a surfeit, &c.," with many si- 
 milar examples. 
 
296 
 
 JEmulor. A. Pindarum quisquis 
 studet aemulari, Hor. od. 4, 
 2, 1. N. Tanquam mihi ab 
 infimo quoque periculum sit, 
 ne mecum aemuletur, Liu. 
 28,43. 
 
 /Estuo, Exaestuo. N. (us.) A. 
 Pisaeumque domus non ae- 
 stuat annum, Stat. (i. e. sestu- 
 ando exhibet annum.) Omnes 
 exaestuat aestus, Lucr. 6, 816. 
 But this is a cognate Ace, 
 
 Ambulo. N. (us.) A. Ambulare 
 inaria, Cic. de Jin. 2, ad Jin. 
 Si ambulantur stadia bina, 
 Plin.23, I. 
 
 Anhelo. N. (us. ) A. De pectore 
 frigus anhelans, Cic. nat. 
 d. 2. Anhelare crudelitatem, 
 Auct, ad Herenn. 4, 55. An- 
 helatiignes, Ovid. Her. 12, 15. 
 
 Appello, -is. A. (iw.)N. Eo anno 
 Alexandrumin Italiam classe 
 appulisse constat, Liv. 8, 3. 
 perhaps se understood. 
 
 Appeto. A. (us.} N. Jam appe- 
 tebat tempus, Liv. 25, 2. 
 
 Applaudo. N. (us.) A. Applau- 
 dit manu caput, Nemes. eel. 
 3, 33. Cavis applauso corpore 
 palmis, Ovid. met. 4, 352. 
 
 Ardeo. N. (us.) A. Corydonar- 
 debat Alexin, Virg. 
 
 Arrideo. N. (us.} A. Quum aut 
 non adhibeantur ad causas,aut 
 adhibiti derideantur : nam si 
 arrideantur, esset id Attico- 
 rum, Cic. de. opt. gen. orat. 
 
 Ascendo. A. Ascendere jugum, 
 Cezs. 1. G. 1, 21. N. Ascen- 
 disset ad h on ores, Cic. de cl. 
 orat. 241, c. 58. 
 
 Assuesco, Consuesco, Insuesco. 
 N. Ut aliis parere eonsuesce- 
 rent, Cic. de inv, 1, 2. A. 
 Consuescere rusticos circa la- 
 rem domini epulari, Colum. 
 11, 1. Sic insuesci debent, 
 Colum. 1 . ( See the preceding 
 List.) 
 
 Audeo. N. Aude, hospes, con- 
 temnere opes, JEn. 8, 364. 
 But here hoc seems understood, 
 or contemnere opes supplies 
 the place of an accusative. A. 
 Periculum audebant, Tac. 
 ann. 3, 76. In regnis hoc 
 ausa tuis, JEn. 5, 792. 
 
 Cachinno or Cachinnor. N. (us.) 
 A. Exitium meum cachinnat, 
 Apul met. 3. 
 
 Careo. N. (us.) A. (antiquated) 
 Collum collaria caret, Plant. 
 Carendus is used by the best 
 writers: as, Virque mihi 
 dempto fine carendus abest, 
 Ov. pen. ul. But this is no 
 proof of its being active. 
 
 Caviller. A, Tribunes cavillans, 
 Liv. 2, 58. N. Saepe cum 
 populo cavillatus est, Suet. 
 Tit. 8. 
 
 Cedo, Concede. A. Earn pro- 
 vinciam collegae cessit, Val. 
 Max. 4. Perizonius imagines 
 quod ad understood. Con- 
 cedere dolorem, Cic. N. Tu 
 ne cede malis, Virg. C once- 
 darn hinc intro atque expec- 
 tabo, Ter. 
 
 Celero. N. or, rather, absolutely. 
 CeJerarestatuit, Tac. Siacce- 
 lerare volent, Cic. Cat. 2, 4. 
 A. (us.) Celerarefugam,f?rg. 
 Iter accelerare, Cas. b. G. 3, 
 39. magistratum, Tac. Itine- 
 ribus celeratis, Ammian. 31, 
 11. 
 
 Certo. N. (us.) A. Si res certa- 
 bitur unquam, Hor. Certare 
 rem, Sedig. ap. Gell. 15, 24. 
 Certatam litedeorum Ambra- 
 ciam, Ov. met. 13, 713. 
 Thus also, Concertare quid, 
 Ter. Ad. 2, 2, 2. Quae non 
 sunt concertata, Cic. part. 
 c.28. 
 
 Cesso. N. (us.) It is used pas- 
 sively only as an impersonal, 
 or in the perfect participle : 
 
297 
 
 thus, Largaque provenit ces- 
 satis messis in arvis, Ov.fast. 
 4, 617. Bui this is no proof 
 of cesso leing active. 
 Clamo, Clamito, and comp. N. 
 (us. ) A. Clamare morientem 
 nomine, Mn. 4, 674. Con- 
 clamat socios, Ov. met. 13, 
 
 73. Inclamavit comitem su- 
 um, Cic. inv. 2, 4. Exclamat 
 uxorem, Plant. Amph. In- 
 clamitor quasi servus, Plant. 
 Epid. 5. 2, 46. Clamitare 
 calliditatera vidcntur, Cic. pro 
 Rose. com. 20, 7. Clamata 
 palma, Ov.fast. 5, 189. Cor- 
 pora conclamata, Lucan. 2, 
 22. 
 
 Coeo. N. (us.) A. Coire societa- 
 tem, Cic. Phil. 2, 10. Socie- 
 tas coitur, Cic. pro Sext. Rose. 
 c. 7. Societas and societatem 
 are the only words thus used. 
 
 Cceno. N. (us.) A. Ut aprum 
 coenem ego, Hor. sat. 2, 3, 
 235. Eum odorem cosnat Ju- 
 piter, Plant, pseud. 
 
 Cogito. A. (us.) N. Mihi de 
 amicitia cogitanti, Cic. Amic. 
 1. De me cogites, Ter. Run. 
 1, 2, 1 14. In these it is only 
 absolute. 
 
 Conflagro. N. (us.) A. Confla- 
 gravit Semelen Jupiter, //y- 
 gin.fab.l c 29. Urbs incendio 
 conflagrata, Auct. ad Herenn. 
 4, 8. But neither these nor 
 the deflagrata domus in Caesar 
 Strabo ap. Prise. 6, will prove 
 the zweq/'conflagror awc/defla- 
 gror, nor an active significa- 
 tion in flagro. 
 
 Contingo. A. (us.) N. (and per- 
 haps impers.) Id in magnis 
 anirnis contingit, Cic. off. 1, 
 
 74, c. 22. 
 
 Consisto. N. (us.) A. (for con- 
 stituo) Et per quae vitam pos- 
 suntconsistere tutam, Lucr. 6. 
 
 Contendo. A. (us.) N. Plato in 
 
 contendit, Cic. 
 Contendere armis, Cic. Att 
 7, 9. nobilitate, Lucr. It ap- 
 pears to me always active, 
 cursum, iter, or nervos, being, 
 according to the sense, under- 
 stood. 
 
 Convenio. N. (us.) In urbem 
 crebro convenio, Plant. True. 
 
 3, 2, 14. i. e. fgo. A. Pue- 
 rum conveni, Ter. And. 2, 2, 
 31, i. e. I met. Nonestisa 
 me con vent us, Cic. Att. 15, 
 1, i. e. met. Pax conventa, 
 Sail b. Jug. 112, i. e. agreed 
 upon. (See the preceding and 
 the following List.) 
 
 Corusco. N.Flamma inter nubes 
 coruscat, Cic. de orat. 3, 155, 
 c. 39. It is said to be usually 
 Neuter; but may not the re- 
 flective pronoun be understood? 
 A. (In the sense of to bran- 
 dish or shake.) Strictumque 
 coruscat mucronem, &n. 10. 
 Coruscare hastam, JEn. 12, 
 431. Also neuter or absolute 
 in the same sense : as, Longa 
 coruscat sarraco venienteabi- 
 es, Juv. 3, 254. Coruscandis 
 nubibus, Apul de deo Socr. 
 p. 675. 
 
 Crepo, Concrepo. N. Quando 
 esurio, [intestina] crepant, 
 Plant. Men. 5, 5, 26. Sed 
 ostium concrepuit, Ter. Hec. 
 
 4, 1,6. A. Sulcos et vineta 
 crepat mera, Hor. ep. 1, 7, 
 Si, 2. e. chatters of. Con- 
 crepat aera, Mart, i e. makes 
 them ring, or jingle. Digi- 
 tos concrepare, Petron. i. e. 
 to snap the fingers ; al. digi- 
 tis. 
 
 Credo. A. Num puero summam 
 belli, num credere niuros. 
 JEn. 10, 70. N. Crede mihi, 
 bene qui latuit bene vixit, Ov. 
 Credo is followed also by a ge- 
 nitive : ay, Duarum rerum ere- 
 
298 
 
 dere, Plaut. True. 2, 2, 52, 
 i. e. quod attinet. Nimium 
 ne crede colori, Virg. eel. 2, 
 17. 
 
 Cunctor. N. (us.) A. Ut du- 
 bium et pugnas cunctantem 
 Eteoclea vidit, Stat. 11, 268. 
 
 Curro and comp. N. (us.) A. 
 ( but generally cognate accusa- 
 tive.) Currit iter tutum, JEn. 
 5, 862. stadium, Cic. off. 3. 
 Cuncta decurrere possum, 
 Firg. vitam, Prop, inceptum 
 laborem, Virg. Geo. 2, 39. 
 Recurrere cursum, Plant. 
 Cist. 2, 3, 50. Ccelum trans- 
 currere, Mn. 9, 110. cursum, 
 Cic. de cl. oral. 281. divisio- 
 nes, Quinct. 4, 2, 2. Decursa 
 setas, Cic. pro Quinct. c. 31. 
 
 Decline. A. Urbem unam decli- 
 navi, Cic. pro Plane. 97. v. 
 41. me, Plant. Aul. 4, 8. De- 
 clinantur contraria, Cic. nat. 
 d. 3, 13. N. Declinare a 
 proposito, Cic. orat. 40. Se 
 seems understood. 
 
 Desino. N. (us.) A. Mulierte- 
 lam desinit, Ter. Heaut. 2, 3, 
 64. Artem desinere, Cic. 
 fam. 7, 1 . Orationes legi de- 
 sitae, Cic. Brut. c. 32. 
 
 Despero. N. (us.) A. Pacem 
 desperavi, Cic. Alt. 7, 20. 
 Desperabantur praelia, Mart. 
 Sped. 22. 
 
 Despicio. A. (us.) N. Nequein 
 vias sub cantu querulae de- 
 spice tibiae, Hor. od. 3, 7 5 29. 
 
 Differo. A. Rem differre et pro- 
 crastinare cceperunt, Cic. pro 
 Sex. Rose. 9. N. (in a diffe- 
 rent sense.) Cogitatione diffe- 
 runt, re copiilata sunt, Cic. 
 Tusc. 4. 
 
 Doleo. N. (us) A. Meum ca- 
 sum doluerunt, Cic. pro Sext. 
 c. 69. Pcena dolenda, Ovid. 
 Her. 5, 8. 
 
 Dubito. N. (us.) A. Turpe est 
 
 dubitare philosophos, quae ne 
 rustici quidem dubitant, Cic. 
 Dubitare aliquid, Quid. met. 
 6, 194. Ne auctor dubitare- 
 tur, Tac. ann. 14, 7, 1. 
 
 Duro. A. Frictio durat corpus, 
 Cels. 2, 15. N. Asinius pene 
 ad extremum duravit, Cic. 
 dial, de orat. 17, i. e. lasted. 
 
 Ebullio. N. Ubi ebullit vinum, 
 Cato. A. Virtutes ebullire et 
 sapientias, Cic. Tusc. 3, 18, 
 i. e. to vaunt of. Animarn 
 ebullit, Sen. in ApocoL 
 
 Edormio. N. (us.) A. Edormi 
 crapulam, et exhala, Cic. 
 Phil. i. e. sleep off or away. 
 
 Emerge. N. (us.) A. Quibus ex 
 mails ut se emerserat, Nep. 
 Attic. 11, 1. Ex fluorine 
 emersus, Cic. div. 2, 68. 
 
 Emineo. N. (us.) A. Moles a- 
 quam eminebat, Curt. 4. 
 
 Equito. N. Equitare in arun- 
 dine, Hor. A. Atque etiam 
 [cameli] equitantur, Plin. 8. 
 
 Erumpo. N. Erumpunt portis, 
 yirg. A. Erumpere stoma- 
 chum in aliquem, Cic. Att. 
 16, 3. Portis se erumpunt, 
 Cces. I. c. 2. May not se be 
 understood in the JIT st exam- 
 ple? Prorumpit ad sethera 
 nubem, &n. 3, 572. Erupti 
 ignes, Lucr. 1, 724. 
 
 Erro. N. (us.) Errata retrorsum 
 littora, Mn. 3, 690. But 
 neither does this, nor the im- 
 personal erratur, prove erro 
 to be active, or errare terras 
 to be allowable. 
 
 Erubesco. N. (us.) A. Affines 
 te erubescunt, Cic. Erubes- 
 cendi ignes, Hor. amores, 
 Sen. controv. 2. 
 
 Evado. N. In loca tuta evasit. 
 Liv. 28. A. Me evasit, Suet. 
 Tib. Evasum se esse, Liv. 
 
 Evigilo. N. Evigilavitinundis, 
 Stat. sylv. 5, 3, 128. A. Quos 
 
299 
 
 studium cunctos evigilavit 
 idem, Ov. trist. 1, 1, 108. 
 Evigilata consilia, Cic. Attic. 
 9, 12. 
 
 Exeo. N. Postquam e portu pi- 
 ratae exierant, Cic. Verr. 5, 
 71. A. Jam ut limen exirem, 
 Ter. Hec. 3, 3, 17, lut this 
 is unusual. It is used in the 
 sense of to avoid, with an ac- 
 cusative: as, Corpora tela 
 modo atque oculis vigilanti- 
 bus exit, Mn. 5, 438. 
 
 Exerceo. A. (us) Exercentes 
 and Exercendo are used ab- 
 solutely : as, Exercentes e- 
 phebi, Suet. Aug. 98. 
 
 Exhalo. N. Exhalant vapore al- 
 taria, Lucr. A. Exhalant flu- 
 mina nebulas, Ov. met. 13, 
 602. Exbalata anima, Ov. 
 met. 11,43. 
 
 Exubero. N. Pomis exuberet 
 annus, Firg. Georg. 2, 51 6. 
 A. Qua? herbaefavorum ceras 
 exuberant, Colum. 9, 4. 
 
 Facesso. A. (us.) Matris prae- 
 cepta facessit. Georg. 4, 548. 
 And it is found especially in 
 old writers in the signification 
 of to take away. Dictum fa- 
 cessas tuum, Plaut. Men. 2, 
 
 1 , 24. Facesse hinc Tarqui- 
 nios, Liv. I, 47. And hence 
 the following. N. Ni faces- 
 serent propere urbe finibus- 
 que, Liv. 4. Haec hinc faces- 
 sat, 7>. Phorm. 4, 3, 30, i. e. 
 go away. Perhaps se is un- 
 derstood. 
 
 Fastidio. A. Si te hie fastidit, 
 Virg. Dum nullum fastiditur 
 genus, Liv. N. Fastidit rnei, 
 Plaut. Aul. 2, 2, 67. Factis 
 saepe fastidiunt, Cic. pro Mi- 
 Ion. 43. 
 
 Festino.N. Festinate, viri, ^En. 
 
 2, 373. A. Festinare vestes, 
 Ovid. Met. 11, 575. Festi- 
 nare in se mortem, Tac. aun. 
 
 4, 28, 3. Ammo cupienti ni- 
 hil satis festinatur, Sail. Jug. 
 64,6. 
 
 Fleo. N. (us) A. Flere funera, 
 Ovid, aliquem, Mn. 7, 760. 
 Longo quod flebitur aevo, 
 Sil. 5, 187. 
 
 Flo and comp: N. Belle nobis 
 flavit Auster, Cic. Att. 7, 2. 
 Etsi Etesiae valde reflarint, 
 Cic. Att. 6, 6. A. Flaret e 
 corpore flammam, Lucr. 5, 
 984. al. efflaret. Laetos effla- 
 rathonores, Firg. Tibia fla- 
 tur, Ov.fast. 4, 841. Aer 
 ducitur atque reflatur, Lucr. 
 4, 936. Sufflare ignem, Plin. 
 34, 8. Sufflata cutis, Plin. 8, 
 38. 
 
 Fugio and comp. N. Fuge, nate, 
 propinquant, JEn. 2. Eftugit 
 rex e nianibus, Cic. pro L. 
 M. c. 9, 22. A. Fugere ali- 
 quem, Ovid. met. 3, 384. 
 Paupertas fugitur, Lucan. 1, 
 165. Effugere periculum, 
 COBS. I. G. 4, 35. Defugere 
 administrationem reipublic. 
 CCBS. I.e. 1,32. 
 
 Gemo, Ingemo. N. (us.) A. 
 Gemere casum alicujus, JEn. 
 1, 221. Hie status gemitur, 
 Cic. Att. 2, 18. Ingemuisse 
 leonesinteritum,^zrg. Glades 
 ingemiscenda, Ammian. 30, 7. 
 
 Gratificor. A. Decus atque li- 
 bertatempotentiae gratificari, 
 Sail. Jug. 3. tibi hoc, Cic. f am. 
 1 , 10. N. Aliis gratificari vo- 
 lunt, Cic. fin. 5, 15. But, 
 prolally, an accusative is un- 
 derstood. 
 
 Habito. A. Centum urbeshabi- 
 tabcint, JEn. 3, 106. N. or 
 Absol. Habitabant vallibus 
 imis, JEn. 3, 110, i. e. they 
 lived in. Duabus urbibus ha- 
 bitabat populus idem, Liv. 8, 
 22. But, perhaps, in these 
 a/iU; the sense is inhabit, do- 
 
300 
 
 mos, or some such word, being 
 understood, 
 
 Hiemo. N. Atrum defendens 
 pisces hieinat mare, Hor. A. 
 Decoquunt aquas - t mox et 
 illas hiemant, Plin 19, 4. 
 Hiemato lacu, Plin. 9. 
 
 Horreo. N. (us.) A. Horrere 
 pauperiem, Hor. sat. 2, 5, 9. 
 conspectum, Cic. Horrenda 
 diluvies, Hor. car. 4?, 14, 27. 
 Nomen horrescunt, Apul. 6. 
 
 Increpo. N. (vs.) A. Soniturn 
 increpuit tuba, JEn. 9, 503. 
 socios, JEn. 10, 830. Quae 
 in victoriam Sullanam incre- 
 pabantur, Sail. ep. de rep. 
 ord. 1,5. 
 
 Jneo, Ingredior. N. Intra muni- 
 tionesingredi, Cces. I: G. 5, 9. 
 Ineunte aetate, adolescentia, 
 &c. passim. A. Colles ingredi- 
 tur, Ov. met. 14-, 846. Taurus 
 init ccelum, Ov.fast.5, 617. 
 
 Inolesco. N. (us.) A. Inolevit 
 nobis natura amorem nostri, 
 Gdl. 12, 5. In moribus in- 
 olescendis, Gell. 12, 1. 
 
 Insanio. N. (us.) A. Insanit a- 
 mores, Prop. 2. Quam me 
 
 stultitiam insanire putas, 
 
 Hor. So Bentley reads j others 
 have qua stultitia. 
 
 Irascor. N. (us.) A. (with an 
 accusative of the thing) Istud 
 dictum tibi irascor, Plant. 
 Merc. 4, 5. Nostram ne vi- 
 cem irascaris, Liv. 34, 32. 
 
 Irrumpo. N. In castra irrupe- 
 runt, Cces. b. G. 4, 14. A. 
 Milites oppidum irrumpe- 
 rent, Cces. b. G.I. 27. 
 
 Juro, Adjuro. N.or Absol. (us.) 
 A. (with an accusative of the 
 thing sworn by ) Stygias jura- 
 vim us undas, Ov. met. 2. 
 Jurare Jovem, Cic. fam. 7, 
 12. Arae jurandae, Hor. ep. 
 2, 1, 16. An accusative of 
 the ih'uig sworn to -, Qui dc- 
 
 negatetjuravitmorbum, Cic. 
 Att. And with hoc id &c. : as, 
 Hoc idem jurant reliqui, Cces. 
 b. c. 3. Haec adjurarent, Liu. 
 43, 16. 
 
 Laboro. N. (?ts.) A. Ad quid 
 laboramus res Romanas, Cic. 
 Att. arma tibi, Slat. Theu. 3, 
 279'. Propter quae haec labo- 
 rantur, Cic. fam. 3, 1 3. Ves- 
 tes arte laboratae, Virg. 
 
 Lacrymo, Lacrymor. N. (us.) 
 A. Lacrymare casum alicu- 
 jus, Nep. 7, 6, 4. Casum col- 
 lacrymavit, Cic. pro Sext. 
 Lacrymata3 cortice myrrha?, 
 Ov.fast. 1,339. 
 
 Lapido. A. (us.) N. Reate im- 
 bri lapidavit, Liv. 43, 13. // 
 is here used impersonally. 
 
 Latro. N. (us. ) A. Latrent il- 
 ium canes, Hor. epod. 5, 57. 
 Hunchabentesnegant latrari 
 a canibus, Plin. 25, 10. 
 
 Luceo. N. (us ) A. Lucebis 
 novaenuptaefacem,P/aM/.C'a?. 
 
 Ludo. N. (us.) A. Luderealeam, 
 Suet. Aug. 70, 5. bella latro- 
 num, Mart, civem bonum, 
 Ccel ad Oic. 8, 9. Luditur 
 alea pernox, Juv. 8, 10. 
 
 Maneo. N. or Absol. (us.) A. 
 Manere aliquem, Liv. 10, 35. 
 Manebat a?tas negligentiam, 
 Ter. Phorm. 4, 1. ^Etas ma- 
 nenda, Lucr. 3, 1088. 
 
 Mano, Emano, Stillo. N. or Ab- 
 sol. (us.) A. Manat picem, 
 Plin. lacrymas, Ov. met. 6, 
 3 1 2. Calor per man at argen- 
 tum, Lucr. 1 , 495. Emanare 
 saniem, Plin. 23, 3. Stillabit 
 ex oculis rorem, Hor. ar. 
 poet. 429. Electra de ramis 
 stillata, Quid. met. 2, 364. 
 
 Mature. N.or Absol. Maturant- 
 que celeriter, sicut morus, 
 Plin. 16, 25. A. Maturate 
 fugani, Mn. 1, 137. Matu- 
 ratur opus, Justin. 2, 15, 7. 
 
301 
 
 Mentior. N. or Absol. In virum 
 bonum mentiri non cadit e- 
 molumenti sui causa, Cic. 
 off. 3, 20. A. Mentiri auspi- 
 ciura, Liu, 10, 40. colores, 
 Virg. Mentitae sortes, VaL 
 Ft. 3, 618. 
 
 Metuo, Timeo. A. Calamitatem 
 metuo, Cic. Verr. 3. Et quae 
 sibi quisque timebat, JEn. 2. 
 N. Syre tibi male timui, Ter. 
 Hei ! rnetui a Chryside, Ter. 
 And. 1, 1, 79. But here 
 some accusative is certainly 
 understood. 
 
 Moderor. N. Qui non modera- 
 bitur irse, Hor. ep. 1, 2. 59. 
 A.Moderari cantus numeros- 
 que, Cic. Tusc. 5, 104, c. 36. 
 
 Mcereo. N. Dolore alterius mce- 
 rere, Cic. fam. 4, 5. A. Filii 
 mortem mcereret, Cic.Tusc.l. 
 
 Muto. A, (us.) N. or Absol. 
 Mortis metu mutabant, Sail. 
 Jug. 28. Mores populi R. 
 quantum mutaverint, Liv. 
 
 Nato. N (us.) A.Natareaquas, 
 Mart. 14, 196. Aquae na- 
 tantur, Ov. art. 1, 48. 
 
 Navigo. N. (us.) A. Navigare 
 aequor, &n 1, 67Enavigare 
 Indum, Ptin. 6, 17. Oceanus 
 navigatus est, Plin. 2, 67. 
 Enavigatus sinus, Plin. 9, 3. 
 Unda omnibus enaviganda, 
 Hor. od. 2, 14, 11. 
 
 Nitor. N. (us.) A. Alternoslon- 
 ga nitentem cuspide gressus, 
 JEn. 12, 386. 
 
 Obeo. A. Is obiit mortem, Ter. 
 And. ], 3, 18. diem supre- 
 mum, Nep. Dion. Morte obi- 
 ta, JEn. 10, 641. N. Obiit 
 morte, Suet. Aug. 4. morbo, 
 Plin. 11, 37- 
 
 Obstrepo. N. Obstrepere laudi 
 alicujus, Senec. Here. fur. 
 1031. A. Avium vox obstre- 
 pit aures, Virg. CuL 104. 
 
 Oleo, Redoleo. N. (us.) A. Ce- 
 
 ram et crocum olere, Cic. 
 Olentilla supercilia malitiam, 
 Cic. Redolet antiquitatem, 
 Cic. de cl. or at. 21. 
 
 Palleo. N. (us.) A. Pallere co- 
 lores, Prop. 1. Et scatentem 
 belluis pontum mediasque 
 fraudes palluit audax, Hor. 
 od. 3. Fontis qui non expal- 
 luit haustus, Hor. 
 
 Palpo, Palpor. N. Observatote 
 quam blande mulieri palpabi- 
 tur, Plaut. A. Quern munere 
 palpat Carus, Juv. 1, 35. 
 Virginea palpanda manu pec- 
 tora, Ovid. met. 2, 867, at. 
 plaudenda. 
 
 Pascor. N. Pascitur in vivis li- 
 ver, Ovid. A. Pascuntur syl- 
 vas, Georg. 3, 314. Artus de- 
 pascitur, JEn. 2. 
 
 Paveo. N. Et pavet pectus, Ov, 
 met. 9,581. A.Paverepug- 
 nam, Lucan. 7 lupos, Hor. 
 Pavescere prodigia, Sil. 
 
 Penetro. Absol. Tumultus e 
 castris et in urbem penetrat, 
 Liv. Se seems understood. A. 
 Nihil tamen Tiberium magis 
 penetravit, Tac. 5. Penetrant 
 se in fugam, Plaut. Ut peni- 
 tus nequeat penetrari, sc. In- 
 dia, Lucr. 2, 539. 
 
 Pereo, Depereo. N. (us.) A. 
 Tres unam pereunt adoles- 
 centes mulierem, Plaut.Truc. 
 Ilium deperit impotente a- 
 more, Catull. Puppis pereun- 
 da est probe, Plaut. Epid. 1, 
 1,70. 
 
 Pergo. N. (us.) A. Pergo prae- 
 terita, Cic. Alt. 
 
 Perrepo, Perrepto.N. (us.) A. 
 Tellurem genibus perrepere, 
 Tibull. 1, 2, 87. Perreptavi 
 usque omne oppidum, Ter. 
 Ad. 4, 6, 3. 
 
 Persono. N. Cum domus cantu 
 personaret, Cic. in Pis. 10. 
 A, Personate aures vocibus, 
 
302 
 
 Cic.fam. ep. 6, 19, G.regna, 
 JEn. 6, 417. 
 
 Persevere. N. (us.) A. Quatri- 
 duo perseverata est inedia, 
 Justin. 12, 6, 15. Persevera 
 diligentiam is quoted ly Ges- 
 nerfrom Symmachus, but such 
 an accusative has no classical 
 authority. Perseverare ali- 
 quid, Cic. pro Quinct. c. 24. 
 
 Pervolo, Pervolito. A. Pervoli- 
 tat loca, JEn. 8, 24. Pervo- 
 let urbem, Juv. 6, 397. N. 
 Per dissepta domorum saxea 
 voces pervolitant, Lucr. 6, 
 952. Animus velociiis in 
 hanc sedem pervolabit, Cic. 
 Somn. Scip. 21, 9. 
 
 Plaudo. N. (us.) A. plaudere 
 fratrem, Slat. Silv. 5, 3, 140. 
 choreas, JEn. 6. Explosit 
 hoc genus divinationis vita 
 communis, Cic. divin. c. 41. 
 Histrio exploditur, Cic. Pa- 
 rad. 3, 2. Supplodo and Cir- 
 cumplaudo are active; but 
 whether they are ever neuter , 
 does not appear. Nemo pe- 
 dem supplosit, Cic. de orat. 
 Quaque ibis, manibus cir- 
 cumplaudere tuorum, Ovid. 
 
 Ploro. N. or Absol. Date puero 
 panem, ne ploret, Quinct. 
 Deplorare apud aliquem de 
 miseriis, Cic. Verr. 3, 45. A. 
 Juvenem raptum plorat, Hor. 
 od. 4, 2, 22. Deplorare cala- 
 mitates, Cic. Phil. 1 1 , 6, c. 2. 
 Quae de altero deplorantur, 
 Cic. deorat. 2, 211. 
 
 Pluo. N. (us.) A. Haec ilia est 
 
 tempestas mea quam mi- 
 
 hi amor et cupido in pectus 
 perpluit meum, Plant. Most. 
 1, 2, 30. Lacrymas depluit, 
 Prop. 2. Et camera pluit, 
 Liv. 3, 10. Other MSS. 
 have carne. That loth con- 
 structions were in use, see 
 Drakenlorch ad Liv. 3, 10. 
 
 Praevenio. N. in the sense of to 
 come before. A. in the sense 
 of to prevent. Praevenire 
 desiderium plebis, Liv. 8., 16. 
 Miles praeventam gloriam in. 
 telligit, Tac. hist. 1, 5, 2. 
 
 Prandeo. N. (us .) A. Si pran- 
 deret olus, Hor. Luscinias 
 soliti impenso prandere co- 
 emptas, Hor. 
 
 Propero, Appropero. N. (us.) 
 A. Properare arnaa alicui, 
 JEn. 12, 425. Haec prope- 
 rantur, Juv. 3, 264. Inter- 
 cisis venis, mortem apprope- 
 ravit, Tac. ann. 16, 14, 5. 
 
 Propinquo. N. (us.) A. Propin- 
 quare augurium, JEn. 10, 
 254. mortem, Sit. 2, 281. 
 
 Prorumpo, Perrumpo. A. A- 
 tram prorumpit ad asthera 
 nubem, JEn. 3, 572. Pro- 
 ruptum mare, ^En. 1, 246. 
 Ut rates perrumperet, Cccs. 
 l.c.l, 26. N. Fiuvio Tibe- 
 rinus amceno - - - in mare 
 prorumpit, JEn. 7> 32. Per- 
 rumpere per aciem, Liv. 3, 
 70. in vestibulum, Liu. 3, 18. 
 
 Provoco. A. Crispinus me pro- 
 vocat, Hor. N. Provoco ad 
 populum, Liv. l.i.e.l ap- 
 peal. 
 
 Pulvero. A. (us.) N. Nolohoc 
 pulveret, Plaut. ap. GelL. 18, 
 12, i. e. be dusty. 
 
 Quadro N. Conjunctionem ver- 
 borum numerose cadere, et 
 quadrare, et perfici volumus. 
 Cic. orat. 3, 44. A. Quadra- 
 re acervum, Hor. ep. 1, 6, 
 35. Quadrandae orationis in- 
 dustria, Cic. orat. c. 56. This 
 word signifies both to make 
 square, and to become square, 
 or perfect. 
 
 Quiesco, Requiesco. N. (us.) 
 A. Quiescent laudes tuas 
 populi, Senec. Here. Oct. 15. 
 Quieta urbs, JEn. 12, 558. 
 
303 
 
 Et mutata suos requierunt 
 flumina cursus, Virg. eel. 8, 4. 
 Kequietus ager, Ovid. art. 2. 
 351. Requietis militibus, 
 Satt. 
 
 Queror, Conqueror. N. Saepe 
 de luxuria questus sum, Sail. 
 Cat. 52. A. Aadivi Milonem 
 queri injuriam meam, Cic. 
 Att. 5, 8. Conquer! fortunam 
 adversam decet, Cic. 
 
 Radio. N. (us.} A. Scuta sed et 
 galeae gem mis radientur et 
 auro, Ov. Pont. 3, 4, 103. 
 
 Redundo. N. (us.) A. Redun- 
 dat talia raucis faucibus Vul- 
 turnus, Stat. silv. 4, 3, 71. 
 i. e. profert, loquitur. Redun- 
 datas flumine cogit aquas, 
 Ovid, trist. 3, 10, 52. But 
 these are not sufficient autho- 
 rity for red undo active. 
 
 Regno. N. (us.) A. Trans Lygi- 
 os Gothones regnantur, Tac. 
 Germ. 25, 4. Terra regnata 
 Philippe, Ovid. Pont. 4, 15, 
 15. Albam regnandam, JEn. 
 6, 770. But these are not suf- 
 Jicient authority for regno ac- 
 tive. 
 
 Resideo. N. (us.) A. Venter 
 gutturque resident esuriales 
 ferias, Plant. Capt. 3, 1, 8. 
 
 1. e. sedendo agunt. Denica- 
 les feriae a nece appellatae 
 sunt, quia residentur mortui, 
 Cic.de leg. 2,22. 
 
 Respicio. A. (us.) N. Et quum 
 Latinisstudebimus literis,non 
 respiciamusadGraecas,Qewc. 
 
 2, 12. 
 
 Resulto. N. (us.) A. Saxacau- 
 tesqueparilem sonum resulta- 
 rent, Apul. met. 5. 
 
 Rideo. N. (us.) A. Ridere ali- 
 quem, Cic. Jam. 2, 9. por- 
 tenta Thessala, Hor. Ridear, 
 Ovid. Pont. 4, 12, 16. 
 
 Roro. N. (us.) A. Lacrymis 
 
 oculi rorantur obortis, Ovid. 
 Her. 15, 97. Rorata mane 
 pruina, Ovid. fast. 3. 
 
 Ruo, Proruo, Corruo. Trruo. N. 
 Quid si ccelum mat, Ter. Ipsa 
 vi molis et irae proruit, Vol. 
 Flac. 7, 600. Corruit in vul- 
 nus, Virg. A. Cseterosrue- 
 rern, Ter. Ad. Ruere cumu- 
 los arenae, Virg. georg. 1. 
 105. Ruta caesa ap. J. Ctos 
 et Cic. orat. 2, 55. Multa 
 proruet integrum cum laude 
 victorem, Hor. od. 4, 4, 66. 
 Corruere divitias, Plant. Rud. 
 2,6,58,z'.e.congregare Spicae 
 corruuntur in corbem, Varro. 
 Vide ne ille hue intro se irru- 
 at, Ter. Ad. 4, 2, 11. 
 
 Rumpo. A. (us.) N. Gesso hue 
 intro rumpere, Ter. Eun. 5, 
 6, 26. 
 
 Rutilo. N. (us.) A. Rutilare ca- 
 pillos cinere, Vol. Max.^ 1, 
 5. comam, Suet. Cal. 47. 
 Promissae et rutilatse comae, 
 Liv. 38, 17. 
 
 Salto. N. (us.) A. Cheironomon 
 Ledarn molli saltante Bathyl- 
 lo, Juv. 6, 63. Carolina nostra 
 saltari scribis, Ovid, trist. 5. 
 7, 25. Poemata saltata, Ovid, 
 trist. 2. 
 
 Satisfacio. N. (us.) A. (obsol.) 
 Donicum pecuniam satisfe- 
 cerit, Cato r. r. c. 149. Sa- 
 tisfacto jurejurando, Gell.7, 
 18. It is conjectured from 
 this last, that the antients said 
 satisfacerejusjurandum. Pe- 
 rizonius is of opinion, that, 
 in such constructions there are 
 ttvo accusatives, of which one, 
 satis, is governed by the verb, 
 the other by K&fd, or quod ad, 
 understood. 
 
 Sibilo, Exsibilo. N. [Serpens] 
 sibilat ore, JEn. 11,754. A. 
 Populus me sibilat, //or, Ver- 
 
304 
 
 ba anguina exsibilat, Prudent. 
 Peristeph. 5, 175. Histrio 
 exsibilatur, Cic. Parad. 3, 2. 
 
 Sileo. N. (us.) A. Silere rem 
 aliquara, Senec. Hipp. 876, 
 Ea res siletur, Cic. pro Flac. 
 c. 3. 
 
 Sitio. N. (us.) A. Sitire sangui- 
 nem, Cic. Phil. 5, 7. honores, 
 Cic. Aquae sitiuntur, Ovid, 
 fast. 1,215. 
 
 Somnio. N. Nee mihi magis us- 
 quara videor somniare, Cic. 
 de divin. 2, 142, c. 68. A. Me 
 somnies, Ter. Eun. 1,2, 114. 
 Somniare ineptias, Coin. ], 
 8. 
 
 Sono, Insono, Circumsono, Re- 
 boo. N. (us.) A. Sonatvitium 
 fidelia, Pers. 3, 21. Alcyo- 
 num questus ad surdas tenui 
 voce sonantur Aqo*s,Albinov. 
 cleg. 1, 108. Verberaque inso- 
 nuit, JEn. 7, 451, where Ser- 
 vius notes pro verberibus in- 
 sonuitaz^ per verbera. Fini- 
 timis quamvis circumsoner 
 armis- Ovid. Scopulique om- 
 nes ac lustra ferarum Pirenen 
 reboant, Sil. 3, 439. 
 
 Specto. A. Spectat acervos,//or. 
 od 2, 2, 24. N. Spectare in 
 septentriones, Cess. b. G. 1, 1. 
 ad concordiam, Cic. 
 
 Spiro, Expire, Suspiro,Respiro. 
 N. or Absol. Arae spirant flo- 
 ribus, Stat. silv. 2, 2, 27. 
 Inter primam curationem ex- 
 piravit, Liv. 2, 20. Jngemit, 
 et tacito suspirat pectore, 
 Ovid. ep. 21, 201. Respi- 
 raro, si te videro, Cic. Alt. 2, 
 24. To some, at least, of 
 these, an accusative is under- 
 stood. A. Tetrum odorem 
 spirare, Colu, 1, 6. deam, 
 Ov. met. 3. Honainem tri- 
 bunatum spirantem, Liv. 3, 
 46. Confixi animas expirant, 
 
 JEn. 11, 883. Suspirat a- 
 mores, Tibull. 4. Eandem- 
 que [animam] a pulmonibus 
 respiret et reddat, Cic. de nat. 
 de. 2, 135. 
 
 Stupeo. N. (us.) A. Parsstupet 
 donum, jEn. 2. Stupenda 
 penetralia, Nazar. paneg. 
 Constant, c. 6. 
 
 Subsisto. N. (us.) A. Et post- 
 quara Romanum nee acies 
 subsistere ullas nee castra nee 
 urbes poterant, Liv. 9, 31. 
 
 Sudo. N. (us.) A. Sudent elec- 
 tra myricae. Virg. eel. 8, 54. 
 Thura balsamaque sudantur, 
 Tac. Germ. 45, 9. In sudata 
 veste durandum, Quinct. 
 
 Sufficio. A. Ipse pater Danais 
 animos viresque secundas suf- 
 ficit, JEn. 2, 617- In ejus 
 locum sufFectus, Liv. 5, 31. 
 N. Sufficere laboribus, Plin. 
 jun. Necsufficit umbo ictibus, 
 JEn. 9, 810. 
 
 Suppedito. N. Ea quse suppedi- 
 tant advictum, Cic. off. 1, 4. 
 Cui si vita suppeditavisset, 
 Consul factus est, Cic. Per- 
 haps an accusative is under- 
 stood. A. Sicilia frumentum 
 suppeditat, Cic. Ver. 2, 2. 
 Fistulis aqua suppeditabatur 
 templis, Cic. pro Rabir. per- 
 duell. c. ult. 
 
 Supero. A. (us.) Phoebum supe- 
 rare canendo, Virg. eel. 5, 9. 
 N. Et captae superavimus ur 
 bi, jEn. 2, 643, i. e. out- 
 lived. Supero signifies not 
 only to come over and to over, 
 come, and is used for vincere, 
 but to be over or remain, as 
 equivalent to superesse or su- 
 perstitem esse. In the former 
 sense it governs the accusative , 
 in the latter it takes the da- 
 tive. 
 
 Surgo. N. (us.) A. (obsol.) 
 
30.* 
 
 itlt. Surrecto mucrone, Liv. 
 7, 10. 
 
 &uspicio. A. Et castra suspexi- 
 mus, Cic. Tusc. 1, 63, c. 25. 
 N. Suspicere in coelum, Cic. 
 Somn. Scip. 1. 
 
 Taceo, Obticeo. N. (us.) A.Ta- 
 ceo te, Plant. Mil. multa, 
 Cic. Amor tacetur, Ovid. 
 amor. 2, 18, 36. Et queri- 
 tur nugas obticuisse meas, 
 
 .. Mart. 10, 17. 
 
 Tardo. A. (us.) N. An tardare 
 et commorari te melius esset 
 tibi, Cic. ad Brut. 18. Mark- 
 land says that this is the only 
 example of tardo being used 
 intransitively in Cicero or in 
 any other classical writer, ex- 
 cept once retardando the ge- 
 rund in a neuter sense in Cic. 
 nat. d. 2, 20. It was com- 
 mon, he observes, in the de- 
 cline of the language. This 
 is one of his arguments against 
 ike authenticity of the Ep. to 
 Brutus. It is, at best., but a 
 suspicious example. 
 
 Tempero. A. Temperat iras, 
 Mn. 1, 61. N. Usque mihi 
 temperavi. Cic. f am. ep. 10, 
 7. Quis temperet a lacrymis, 
 JEn. 2, 8. 
 
 Tendo.A Jter ad naves tendebat 
 Achates, Virg. N. Tendimus 
 in Latium, JEn. 1, 205. But 
 here iter, or a similar word, 
 may be understood. Illic Ja- 
 cides, illic tendebat Ulysses, 
 Ov. Pen. Uly.i. e. encamped ; 
 and here perhaps tentorium is 
 understood. 
 
 Tono, Intono. N. (us.) A. Ter- 
 centum tonat ore deos, Virg. 
 Laudes tonas, Plin. prof. 
 Cum haec intonuisset, Liv. de 
 Virginia. Minas intonare, 
 Ov. amor. 1, 7? 46. 
 
 Tremo. N. (us.) A. Tremere 
 varios casus, Senec. Troad. 
 262. Tremendi oculi, Ovid, 
 met. 3, 577. Unde pericu- 
 lum fulgens contremuit do- 
 in us Saturni veteris, Hor. 
 Non contremiscamusinjurias, 
 Sen. ep, 66. 
 
 Transgredior. A. Ut Alpes 
 transgrederer, Cic. f am. 11, 
 20. Transgressus Danubium, 
 Tac. ann. 2, 63, init. N. Inde 
 in Latinam viam transgres- 
 sus, Liv. 2, 39. Transgredior 
 ad vos, Tac. hist. 4-, 66, 4. 
 
 Transvolo, Transvolito. A. 
 Transvolat in medio posita, 
 Hor. N. Transvolat inde in 
 partem alteram, Liv. 3, 63. 
 Et clausa domorum transvo- 
 litant, Lucr. I, 355. 
 
 Trepido. N. (us.) A. Actrepi- 
 dant divina praesagia, Apul. 
 met. 6. 
 
 Triumpbo. N. (us.) A. Terram 
 triumphavit, Lactant. 6, 23. 
 Triumphatae gentes, Virg. 
 georg. 3, 33. Triumphatis dare 
 jura Medis, Hor. od. 3, 3, 43. 
 But notwithstanding these two 
 examples, an accusative of the 
 thing conquered is not found 
 in any author truly classical. 
 
 Turbo, Conturbo. A. (us.) N. 
 or Absol. Turbant trepida 
 ostia Nili, JEn. 6, 800, where 
 Servius notes turbant^ro tur- 
 bahtur. Indeed, where tur- 
 bans seems to be used for tur- 
 batus, and turbo^br turbor, 
 there seems to be an ellipsis 
 of some accusative. Contur- 
 bo, used absolutely, signifies 
 toi>e distressed in circum- 
 stances, or to have one's af- 
 fairs in confusion : thus, Pedo 
 conturbat, Matho deficit, 
 Juv. 7 1 29, in which probably 
 there is an ellipsis ofrationes. 
 
30G 
 
 Vagor. N. (us.) A. Terras va- 
 
 gari, Prop. 2, 28, 19. 
 Vaporo. A, Et templum thure 
 
 vaporant,^. 11,481. Vapo- 
 
 ratas aras, Virg. Oculos va- 
 
 porari praecipiunt, Plin. 28, 
 
 11. N. Aquae vaporant et in 
 
 ipso mari, Plin. 32, 2. 
 Velio, Inveho, Gesto. A. (us.) 
 
 N. The participles vehens, in- 
 
 vehens, gestans, are often 
 
 used absolutely in the same 
 
 sense as vectus and invectus : 
 
 thus, Ei consul! pater pro- 
 consul obviamin equo vehens 
 
 venit, Gell.2, C 2. Triton 
 
 natantibus invehens belluis, 
 
 Cic. nat. d. \ , 28. Idem classi 
 
 praefectus circumvehens Pe- 
 
 loponnesum classem eo- 
 
 rum fugavit, Nep. Timoth. 
 
 Lectica per urbetn vehendi 
 
 jus, Suet. Claud. 28. Simul 
 
 gestanti, Suet. Domit. 1 2. It 
 
 probably arises, from this 
 
 manner of using veho, that its 
 
 derivative vector signifies not 
 
 only a carrier but a passen- 
 ger. 
 Vergo. N,(w5.) A. (in the sense of 
 
 pouring) Vergere venena, Lu- 
 
 Among the foregoing will be found several Neuter Verbs, 'which 
 arc rendered transitive, through the Preposition with 
 which they are compounded : of the same Description 
 are the following. 
 
 cret. 5, IOCS. Frontiquein- 
 vergit vina sacerdos, JEn. 6, 
 244. Spumantes mero paterae 
 verguntur, Stat. Th. 6, 211. 
 
 Vescor. N. (us.) A. Ut infir- 
 missirnos suorum vesceren- 
 tur, Tae. Agr. Qui absin- 
 thium vescuntur, Plin. 11. 
 
 Vigilo, Evigilo, Pervigilo. N. 
 (us.) A.Vigilarenoctes, Hor. 
 sat. 1, 3, 17. Vigilatae noc- 
 tes, Ov. art. 1, 735. Noctes 
 vigilanturjOv. Med. J as. (See 
 Evigilo in List.) Pervigilare 
 noctem, Cic. pro S. Rocc. 
 c. 85. In mulco nox est pervi- 
 gilata mero, Ovid. Jast. 6, 
 326. 
 
 Ululo. N. (us.) A. Ulularunt 
 tristia Galli, Lucan. 1. He- 
 cate triviis ululata, JEn. 4, 
 609. 
 
 Undo, Inundo. N. or Absol. 
 Adcoelum undabat vortex, 
 JEn. 12,673. Inundant san- 
 guine fossae, JEn. 10, 24. A. 
 Quuni tuus^Eacides sanguine 
 undabit cainpos, Stat. Achil. 
 1, 86. Sanguine Enna inun- 
 dabitur, Liv. 24, SO. 
 
 Afflo. Afflat vittas anhelitus 
 oris, Ovid. met. 5, 617. Af- 
 flata est tell us, Ovid. met. 6, 
 707. 
 
 Adeo. A dire aliquem, Virg. 
 JEn. 3, 456. Adiri praetores 
 non potuerunt, Cic. ad Q. Fr. 
 1,2. 
 
 Anteeo. Anteirenivescandore, 
 Mn. 12, 84. Ne ab aliis an- 
 teirentur, Tac.hist.2, 101,2. 
 
 Circumeo. Circumire hostem, 
 Curt. 3, .8, 27. Se belli fluc- 
 
 tibus circumiri maluit, Cic. 
 
 Phil. 13, 9. 
 Circumsono. Circumsonat or- 
 
 bem Nereus, Ovid. met. 1, 
 
 187- Geticis circumsonor 
 
 arm is, Ovid, trist. 5, 3, 11. 
 Circumsisto. Circumsistunt 
 
 hostes impeditum, Cces. b. 
 
 G. 5, 43. Ne ab omnibus 
 
 circumsisteretur, CCES. b. G. 
 
 7, 43._ 
 Circumsideo. Circumsidere ur- 
 
 bem, Tac. ami. 3^ S. Cum 
 
307 
 
 a se Caecilius circumsedere- 
 
 tur, (sedeo) Cic. Alt. 14, 9. 
 Circuiustrepo. Circurastrepen- 
 
 tibus vitam humanam tot 
 
 minis, Senec. de vit. beat. c. 
 
 11. Vedius clamore seditio- 
 
 sorum circumstrepitur, Tac. 
 
 hist. 2, 44, 3. 
 Circumvenio. Circumvenireali^ 
 
 quern, Sail. Cat. 58. Circum- 
 
 venior judices, nisi subveni- 
 
 tis, Cic. Brut. c. 75. 
 Incubo Incubare ova, Plin. 9, 
 
 10. Ova incubantur, Plin. 
 
 10,54. 
 Perarabulo. Perambulat artus 
 
 frigus, Ovid. Her. 9, 135. 
 
 Perambulat us Niphates, Si' 
 
 don. car. 23, 93. 
 Percurro. Percurrere polurn, 
 
 Hor. car. 1, '28, 6. Ques- 
 
 tiones percursas, Cic. de orat. 
 
 2, 31. 
 
 Pererro. Pererrare locum, JEn. 
 5, 441. Orbe pererrato, Ovid, 
 met. 3, 6. 
 
 Permeo. Permeare orbern, Lu- 
 can. 2, 418. Permeato am- 
 ne, Ammian. 24, 2. extr. 
 
 Pervado. Pervasit urbem fama, 
 Lit). 2, 23 Pervasa urbe, 
 Ammian. 24, 2. 
 
 Prastereo. Praeterit iramodum, 
 Ovid. fast. 5, 304. Cum bo- 
 nus vir suffragiis praeteritur, 
 Cic. Tusc. 5, 19. 
 
 Subeo. Subire pericula, Ovid. 
 Her. 20, 175. Inimicitiae 
 subeantur, Cia. Verr. 5,71. 
 
 Supersedeo. Supersedere ope- 
 ram, Cell. 2, 29. Istis super- 
 sessis, Apul. Florid. 18. 
 
 Transeo. Transire flurnen, Cic. 
 Att. 8, 12. Rhodanus vado 
 transitur, Cces. b. G. 1,6, &c. 
 
 Some grammarians have denied the existence of neuter 
 verbs ; others have termed every verb neuter, which is used, 
 as active verbs often are, without its regimen's being ex- 
 pressed : and hence, in a great measure, it arises, that we 
 have been furnished with s\ich ample lists of verbs used as 
 active and neuter. It was this consideration which pre- 
 vented me from transcribing, according to my original in- 
 tention, Sanctius's list De Verbis falso neutris, along with 
 Vossius's two lists. From the definitions which have been 
 given of active and neuter verbs, and from some remarks 
 which have been made in regard to their construction, 
 under Rules XXVIII. and XXXIII., the learner will 
 have little difficulty to ascertain, when he considers the na- 
 ture and essential signification of a verb, whether it be 
 really active, or apparently neuter ; and, although he may 
 find, moveo, servo, ago., and many similar verbs, charac- 
 terized, not only as active, which they unquestionably are, 
 but as neuter also, because there are such constructions 
 as Postquam ille Canusio moverat Cic. Solus Sannio ser- 
 vat domi Ter. Agere inter homines desiit Tac., yet, let 
 him attend to the nature of the subject, and his own mind 
 will suggest the elliptical words to which the energy of these 
 words passes, and he will easily perceive to what descrip- 
 
 X 2 
 
SOS 
 
 tion of verbs they really belong. Nor, on the other hand* 
 are those verbs to be considered as real active verbs, which 
 admit after them an accusative of the same, or of a cognate 
 signification ; nor such as are followed only by the accu- 
 satives hoc, id, quod, nihil, aliquid, &c. These have been 
 generally omitted in the preceding list. The learner should 
 likewise distinguish between real neuter verbs, and such 
 active verbs as are often used in an absolute manner, which 
 happens, especially, when the sense requires only the mere 
 energy of the verb to be, generally, expressed, without any 
 application of it to a specified object, as, when speaking of 
 reading and writing, generally *, we say Nee legit^ nee scri- 
 bit. Sometimes part of the sentence supplies the place, of 
 an accusative ; sometimes, also, the reciprocal se, the pro- 
 noun me, or some similar word, is omitted after an active 
 verb 8 , w r hen, from the sense or the nature of the action, its 
 insertion is altogether unnecessary : as, Turn prora avertit 
 rVirg. Tresque vibrant lingua Ovid. The active verb 
 incipio has been denominated neuter, because we may say 
 Ver incipit, in the same way as Virgil says Vix prima in- 
 ccperat cestas, and, in the same manner, in English " The 
 spring begins," or "The summer had begun." But, I 
 have little doubt, that, in such instances, se is understood. 
 In speaking of this phraseology, an intelligent writer on the 
 Syntax of the Latin verb, remarks, that in the sentence 
 " The moon turns, round its axis," the verb turn is neuter, 
 and adds, " that he should make it a question, which was 
 the more antient kind, the verb active, or the verb neuter." 
 Such verbs I consider as active, or, as some have named 
 them, reflective. Moon and spring, though inanimate sub- 
 jects, undergo a sort of personification, and are so generally 
 considered to be vested with a self-influencing power, that 
 it is unnecessary to particularize themselves as the objects 
 upon which that power is exerted. And, although the 
 
 1 Thus Coesar says, in his laconic epistle, Veni, vidi, vici, in which two ac- 
 tive verbs follow a neuter verb, with no object or regimen expressed to them. 
 The reason is obvious. Coesar did not wish to say whom he conquered, but to 
 intimate that wherever he came, conquest, generally, was the immediate con- 
 sequence. But such verbs are not, for this use of them, to be characterized 
 as neuter, since it is in the very nature of tilings, that if there be a person who 
 sees or conquers, there must be objects ichich he sees or conquers. A verb is 
 not neuter, because it may not be followed by an object, but because it gene- 
 rally admits none. 
 
 2 Indeed, I will not assert that some of the verbs in the preceding list, 
 which have been exemplified as neuter, may not, even when they appear to 
 be thus used, be still in reality active, some pronoun, or other word, being un- 
 
 their regimen. 
 
309 
 
 agent and object be one and the same, and although, con- 
 sequently, the action does not, in a strict sense, pass from 
 the agent, yet it is evident that the subject is spoken of in 
 two distinct characters, as agent-) and recipient of action ; 
 and, therefore, the verb has precisely the same import and 
 nature which it would universally be allowed to possess, 
 were they individually different and distinct 1 . The same 
 kind of phraseology obtains in languages derived from the 
 Latin, with this difference, however, that the reciprocal is 
 not so frequently omitted in them. Thus, in French, they 
 say " Les jours commencent a s' alonger," the days begin 
 to lengthen (themselves). In Spanish, " Se acaba la riha," 
 the quarrel ends (itself). And in both, " Le soleil se 
 couche," " Se pone 2 el sol," the sun sets (itself 'or himself). 
 All such verbs, in English, as well as in Latin, have been 
 denominated, by some, neuter verbs, as may be seen, by 
 referring to Dr. Johnson's English Dictionary, passim, and 
 to the numerous lists made by Latin grammarians. Indeed, 
 were I inclined to hazard a conjecture, it would be the re- 
 verse of the opinion which seems to be sanctioned by the 
 ingenious writer alluded to above, and I should say, that, 
 the substantive verb, perhaps, excepted, active verbs were 
 the first invented, and that most verbs, if not all, were, very 
 probably, originally active, that is, admitted after them an 
 objective or accusative case of some kind or' other. The 
 Spaniards, whose language, as has been just mentioned, is 
 derived from the Latin, construe, as active, verbs which we 
 consider as neuter or intransitive : thus they say " Tu tc 
 duermes," thou fallest (Ihce) asleep. " Tu te paseas," thou 
 walkest (thee). " Tu te ibas," thou wast going (thee) away. 
 The French, too, say " II s' endort," he sleeps. " II se 
 promene," he walks. I am aware, however, that, although 
 some of these verbs are interpreted neuterly, their original, 
 etymological signification, may, perhaps, have been active. 
 Why the accusative is usually omitted, after such verbs, in 
 
 1 To express such actions seems to have been the original character of the 
 Greek middle voice. When an action had a double relation to the same sub- 
 ject or object, that is, when the same person was both active and passive, this 
 voice was generally used. But in other languages, the verb retains its active 
 form, se, himself, or a similar word, expressed or understood^ denoting the 
 subject of the verb, in its passive character, as acted upon. 
 
 * The pronoun is often omitted after the Latin pono : as, Quilm venli po- 
 siicre Virg. TEn. 7, 27. Jam vcntiponcnt Ov. Did. Thus used, this seems 
 a sea term. Indeed technical phrases are generally elliptical ; thus solvo is 
 used absolutely, for to set 'sail, or weigh anchor, as in jVos ro die cccnati solvi- 
 mus Cic. fain. ep. 16, 9, Naves cr snpcriurc porttt win-runt Cws. J3. G. 29, 
 the- accusative anchoras being, probably, understood, 
 
310 
 
 Latin, and in some other languages, it would not be diffi- 
 cult to determine ; perspicuity does not require its continu- 
 ance; and philologists are well acquainted with the ten- 
 dency to abbreviation, so easily discoverable in most lan- 
 guages. 
 
 In the foregoing list, the use of a passive voice is ad- 
 mitted as a proof of the active signification of verbs in o, 
 except with respect to passive impersonals, such as cumtur, 
 favetur, &c. But a perfect participle must not be deemed 
 unquestionable evidence of the existence of a passive voice, 
 for we find Ventum est^ standwn, pugnatum est, &c. although 
 there are no such words as venior., stor, pug?ior. The pas- 
 sive voice of verbs usually neuter is very uncertain ; and 
 even, although there be authority for the third person, the 
 other persons are not, on that account, allowable. 
 
 Verbs which vary their Construction according to 
 their Sense. 
 
 Accedo tibi, / assent. 
 
 Accedo ad te, / come or go to 
 you. ' 
 
 Hue accedebat, to this luas ad- 
 ded. 
 
 /Emulor tibi, 7 envy you. 
 
 JEmulor te, / imitate you. 
 
 Animadverto aliquid, 7 observe 
 a thing. 
 
 Animadverto in aliquem, 7 pu- 
 nish one. 
 
 Ausculto tibi, 7 obey you. 
 
 Ausculto te, 7 hear you. 
 
 Caveo tibi, I take care of you, 
 or for you, as my friend. 
 
 Caveo te, 7 am on my guard 
 
 against you, avoid you, as my 
 foe. 
 
 Cavere de realiqua, to give cau- 
 tion or security concerning*. 
 
 Cedere alicui, to give place to, 
 to comply with one. 
 
 Cedere suo jure, toyield or give 
 up his right. 
 
 Consulo tibi, 7 consult your in- 
 terest 3 . 
 
 Consulo in te, 7 am contriving 
 for or against you. 
 
 Consulo te, 7 consult you, ask 
 advice. 
 
 Consulo boni, 7 take in good 
 part. 
 
 1 Cavere aliquid alicui Plaut. To watch over the preservation of any one, 
 that no harm may happen to him. Obsidibus de pecunia cavere Cass. To 
 give security for the money, by hostages. Pecuniam alicui cavere ; i. e. To give 
 security for its payment. Obsidibus inter se cavere Cees. To consult their 
 security by mutual hostages. Milii tccum cavendum est Plaut. i. e. There 
 must be a proper surety in this suit which I have with you. Nisi prius a te 
 cavero Cic. Unless I shall first get security from you. 
 
 * Consulo tibi never denotes, (unless among writers of inferior authority,) I 
 give you advice. In this sense, suadco tibi, or auctor sum tibi are usually em- 
 ployed. 
 
311 
 
 Convenit hoc milii, this suits 
 
 me. 
 Convenit mihi cum illo, I agree 
 
 with him. 
 Conveniam hominem, / will 
 
 meet, or accost, the man. 
 Cupio tibi, I favour you. 
 Cupio aliquid, / desire some- 
 thing. 
 
 Deficit mihi, it is wanting to me. 
 Deficit me, it forsakes or leaves 
 
 me. 
 
 Deficere ab aliquo, to revolt. 
 Detrahere alicui,o detractfrom, 
 
 backbite, depreciate. 
 Detrahere aliquem, to lower, to 
 
 take one down (in reference to 
 
 place]. 
 
 Do tibi literas, I give you a let- 
 ter (not for yourself). 
 Do ad te literas ', I give a letter 
 
 for you, or 7 write to you. 
 Fcenero or fceneror tibi, 7 lend 
 
 out to you at usury. 
 Fceneror abs te, I borrow from 
 
 you at usury or interest. 
 Horrere alicui, (PUn.) to shud- 
 der for one. 
 Horrere aliquem, to be much 
 
 afraid of one as an enemy. 
 Imponere alicui, to deceive one, 
 
 put a trick upon one. 
 Imponere aliquid alicui, to put 
 
 one thing upon another ; or, 
 
 to lay any thing as a burden 
 
 upon any one. 
 Manere, to tarry, stay, or abide. 
 
 ( Absolute. ) 
 Manere aliquem. to wait for 
 
 one, or expect one. 
 Metuo tibi, lam afraid for you, 
 
 anxious about you y as my 
 
 friend. 
 
 Metuo te, or a te, I dread you, 
 
 or fear you, as my foe. 
 Peto aliquid alicui, I ask some- 
 thing for (to be given to) some 
 
 one. 
 Peto abs te, I ask of or from 
 
 you. 
 Petopcenas de aliquo, I inflict 
 
 punishment upon one. 
 Peto aliquem gladio, I strike or 
 
 attack one with a sword. 
 Peto locum, 7 go to, or direct 
 
 my steps to, a place. 
 Praeire alicui, (literally) to go 
 
 before one ; (figuratively] to 
 
 excel, (seldom.) 
 Praeire verba, to speak jirst what 
 
 may afterwards be rehearsed 
 
 by another. 
 Praestare alicui silentium,bene' 
 
 volentiam, to afford silence, 
 
 show kindness. 
 Praestare aliis or alios virtute, 
 
 to excel others in virtue or 
 
 courage. 
 Praestare se virum, to show or 
 
 prove himself a man. 
 Praestare culpam or damnum, 
 
 to take on himself the blame 
 
 or loss. 
 Praestabo eum facturum, I will 
 
 engage that he shall perform. 
 Prospicio, provideo, tuae saluti, 
 
 7 provide for, take care of, 
 
 your safety. 
 Prospicio, provideo periculum, 
 
 I foresee danger. 
 Recipio tibi, 7 promise you. 
 
 Thus also, Recipio in me, 7 
 
 undertake. 
 Recipio me in locum, 7 betake 
 
 myself to a place. 
 Refero tibi, 7 relate to you. 
 
 1 Thus, Do servo literas ad tc, I give your servant a letter for you. Dare 
 fidcm denotes to give a pledge, assurance, or solemn promise. In one or two 
 instances, unworthy of imitation, the phrase is used for fidcm, qffcrre, to add 
 credibility to a thing ; but it is never employed, by any classical writer, for fidcm 
 habere, or credere, to give credit, or believe. Dare pcenas denotes to suffer, 
 not to inflict, punishment. Dare vrrba alicni, to impose on, or deceive. 
 
342 
 
 ilefero ad scnatum, Hay before 
 the senate (for discussion'}. 
 
 Referre aliquem, to resemble 
 one. 
 
 Renuncio muneri, hospitio, to 
 renounce or refuse a present ,. 
 or act of kindness. 
 
 Renuncio consulem, I declare y 
 proclaim, or announce as con- 
 sul. 
 
 Solvo tibi aliquid, / pay you 
 something. 
 
 Solvo aliquem - 1 , to discharge or 
 liberate one. 
 
 Sufficere alicui, to be sufficient 
 for one, to satisfy. 
 
 Sufficere alicui arma, to fur- 
 nish or supply one with arms. 
 
 Sufficere aliquem, to choose or 
 put one into the place of an- 
 oilier. 
 
 Temperate linguae, manibus ; 
 
 to restrain, or keep zuithin 
 
 bounds, the tongue or hands. 
 Temperare csedibus, or a caedi- 
 
 bus, to abstain or refrain from 
 
 murders. 
 Temperare orbem, vires, ra- 
 
 tem, to govern the world, ; to 
 
 moderate strength, might or 
 
 power ; to regulate or direct 
 
 a ship. 
 Timeo tibi, / am afraid for you 
 
 as my friend. 
 Timeo te, I fear you as anf&e- 
 
 my. (Same as Metuo 2 ). 
 Vacare rei alicui, in, or ad ali- 
 
 quam rem, to study or apply 
 
 to a thing. 
 Vacare ab officio, to be exempt 
 
 from, or to leave off, business. 
 Vacare culpa, to be without 
 
 fault. 
 Vacat mihi, / am at leisure. 
 
 s Deponent, ivhich use the voice in o, in the same sense. 
 
 [The following Lists are taken from Vossius de Analogia, lib. 3, 
 to which work the learner is referred for the examples.] 
 
 Adulo for Adulor, Attius, 
 Lucr., c. Alterco^or Al- 
 tercor, Pacuv., Ter. Assen- 
 tio and Assentior are both 
 used, according to Gell., 
 
 Amplec- 
 tofbr Amplector, and Am- 
 plexo for Amplexor, Q. 
 Claud,, Cic., Attius. Aucupo 
 for Aucupor, Titin., Plaut., 
 
 J Solvere obsidionem urbis, et urbem obsidione Liv. To raise a siege. Sol- 
 vcre foedcra Virg. To break a league. Solvere fidem Ter. is not, as inter- 
 preted by Ainsworth, Stephanus, and Turner in his Exercises, to break a pro- 
 mise ; but, according to Ruddiman, to discharge, fulfil, or perform a pro- 
 mise, in which sense, he_says, Pliny uses Fidcm exsolverc, and Suetonius Fi- 
 dem liberarc. This last is also used by Cicero in the same sense. But sol- 
 vere fidem Cic. is rendered, in Pasini's Ital. Diet, by mancar di parola, to 
 fail in his word, or break his promise Abstractly considered, the phrase ap- 
 pears to me to denote merely to get rid of a promise or obligation, without 
 any express reference to the mode, either as honourable or dishonourable. 
 
 2 Formido mi/il Plaut. I am afraid for myself, that is, lest some harm be- 
 fall me. Formidat auro Plaut. He is afraid for the gold, that is, lest it 
 should be stolen. Forniidare cilicujus iracundiam, ctliyucm, and ab aliyuo, that 
 is, To dread his passion, or him, are attributed to Cicero. 
 
313 
 
 Pacuv., &c. Auguroy^r'Au- 
 guror, Att., Enn., Virg., &c. 
 Auspico for Auspicor, ac~ 
 cording to Priscian, Cato, 
 . Naevius. Auxilio for Auxi- 
 lior, Gracchus. 
 
 Cachinno, Lucr. Cachinnor, 
 Cic. Cohortoyor Cohortor, 
 Quadrigarius. Comito for 
 Comitor, Ovid. Commento 
 for Comraentor, according to 
 Priscian. Commisereo, Com- 
 miseresco. SeeMiseret. Com- 
 plectofor Complector, Pom- 
 pon. Congredio for Con- 
 gredior, Plaut. And Progre- 
 diojbr Progredior, Novius. 
 Consoloybr Consoler, Varr. 
 Contemplo for Contemplor, 
 Att., Naev., Enn., &c. Con- 
 vivo for Convivor, Enn., 
 Pompon. Criminoybr Cri- 
 minor, Enn. Cuncto for 
 Cunctor, Att., Enn. 
 
 Demolioybr Demolior, Alfenus. 
 Delucto. See Lucto. Digno 
 for Dignor, Pacuv., Attius. 
 
 Ejulo for Ejulor, according to 
 Priscian. Expergisco, Pom- 
 pon. Exsecroyor Exsecror, 
 Afranius. 
 
 Frustro for Frustror, Pom- 
 pon., Plaut., Caes. Frutico, 
 Colum , Plaut. Fruticor, Cic. 
 
 Horto for Hortor, according to 
 Priscian. 
 
 Imito for Imitor, Liv. trag., 
 Varr. Impertio and Imper- 
 tior, Cic. Insidioyorlnsidior, 
 Callistratus. 
 
 Jurgoy^r Jurgor, Lex 12 tab. 
 
 Lachrymo, Ter., Ov. Lachry- 
 mor, Cic. Lacto for Lsetor, 
 according to Prise. Largio 
 ybrLargior, Sail., Lucil., Ca- 
 to. Lucto for Luctor, and 
 Luctitoyor Luctitor, accord- 
 ing to Priscian, Ennius. Lu- 
 diiico, Plant. Ludificor, 
 
 Plaut., Ter., Cic , Liv. Lux- 
 urio, Tubero, Virg. Luxu- 
 rior, Colum., Plin. 
 
 Medico, Virg. Medicor is used 
 both actively and passively. 
 Mereo for Mereor, Plaut., 
 Turpil., &c. Thus also Pro- 
 mereo, Plaut. Minito for 
 Minitor, Naev., Plaut. Mi- 
 rofor Miror, Varr. Pompon. 
 Misero^br Miseror, Attius. 
 So Misereo and Misereor, 
 tvkence Miseret and Misere- 
 tur. So also Miseresco, Virg., 
 and Commiseresco, Enn. 
 Modero t /br Moderor, Att., 
 Pacuv., Plaut , Ulpian., and 
 according to some MSS. 9 Sal- 
 lust. Molioybr Molior, ac- 
 cording to Priscian. AndDe- 
 niolio, Varr,, Naev. Movofor 
 Moror, Naevius. Muneroybr 
 Muneror, Turpil. Mutuo 
 for Mutuor (to borrow), Cae- 
 cilius. 
 
 Obsono and Obsonor, active, 
 
 according to Priscian. Opino 
 
 for Opinor, Plaut., Pacuv., 
 
 Enn., Cecil. Opitulo, Liv. 
 
 trag. Osculo, Titin. 
 
 Pacisco, Naev. Palpo, Juv. Pal- 
 por, Lucil., &c. So Expal- 
 por, Plaut. Partio for Par- 
 tior, Lucil., Plaut., Att., Enn. 
 So Impertio for Impertior. 
 Patio for Patior, Naev. Per- 
 contofor Percontor, Novius, 
 Naev. Polliceoyor Polliceor, 
 Varr. Populo^or Populor, 
 Plaut., Caecil., Enn., &c. 
 Praelio for Praelior, Enn. 
 Praestoloyor Prasstolor, Tur- 
 pil., Liv. trag. Proficisco, 
 Turpil. Progredio. See Con- 
 gredio. Promereo. See Me- 
 reo. 
 
 Recordo, Quadrig. Kcfrago 
 for Refragor, according to 
 'Nonius. Suflraoor Suffra-? 
 
gor, Siscrina. Reminisco. 
 Rufus, Sanct. August. Re- 
 \ertofor Revertor, Pompo- 
 nius. This is common in clas- 
 sical writers. Rhetorico for 
 Rhetoricor, Novius. Rixo 
 for Rixor, Varr. Rumino, 
 Virg. 
 
 Scrutator Scrutor; Perscruto 
 
 for Perscrutor, according to 
 
 Nonius, Plaut. Sortio for 
 
 Sortior, Enn. Stipulo, Gloss. 
 
 Cyrill. Suavioyor Suavior, 
 
 Pompon., Nov. Suffrago, 
 See llefrago. 
 
 Testojbr Testor, according to 
 Priscian. Tuto for Tutor, 
 Plaut., Noev., &c. 
 
 Vagofor Vagor, Plaut., Seren., 
 Prudent., &c. Velifico, Plin., 
 Propert. Juvenal has velifi- 
 catus Athos passively. But 
 Cicero uses Velificor as a de- 
 ponent. Veneroyor Veneror, 
 Plaut. Vociferoyor Vocife- 
 ror, San. Bonifac. 
 
 Verbs Passive used as Deponents. 
 
 There are some verbs passive (having a regular active 
 voice) which are used, or were antiently used, as deponents, 
 i. e. in an active signification. 
 
 Affectorybr Affecto. Affecta- 
 tits est regnum, Varro. 
 
 Bellory?;r Bello. Pictis bellan 
 tur Amazones armis, Virg. 
 
 Censeorybr Censeo, Es tinier co- 
 mites Martia censa suos,Ovid. 
 
 Communicor for Communico. 
 Cum quibus spem communi- 
 cati sint, Liv. 
 
 Copuloryipr Copulo, according 
 to Prise, and Non. Adeunt, 
 consistunt, copulantur dex- 
 ter as, Plaut. 
 
 Erumporyor Erumpo. Vis ex- 
 agitataforas erumpilur.'Luci'. 
 
 FabricorJ/or Fabrico. Capilolii 
 Jhstigium - - - necessitas ipsa 
 fabricata est, Cic. 
 
 Feneror t /or Fenero, Gell. 
 
 Fluctuor^/br Fiuctuo, Fluctu- 
 atus animofuerat, Liv. 
 
 Juratus sum for Juravi. Judici 
 demonstrandum est, quid ju- 
 ratus sit, Cic. 
 
 Multor/or Multo. Rebellantcs 
 
 graviorc multatus est pee- 
 
 na, Suet. 
 
 Muneror tefor Munero, accord- 
 ing to Gell. and Diomed. So 
 Remuneror t /c>r Rcmunero. 
 
 Murmuror/or Murmuro, Apul. 
 
 Nutriorybr Nutrio. Hoc pin- 
 guern et placitam pad nutri- 
 tor olivam, Virg. 
 
 Nutricorybr Nutrico. Mundus 
 omnia nutricatur, Cic. 
 
 Objurgor^/or Objurgo. Curio- 
 nem objurgatus, COB! ad Cic. 
 
 Peragror. Peragratus est regi- 
 onem. Vellei. 
 
 Perlinor for Perlino. Ab inns 
 unguibus sese totam ad usque 
 summos capillos perlita, Apul. 
 But neither this instance* nor 
 that of copulor above, is es- 
 teemed sufficient proof. 
 
 Pigneror^or Pignero, Gell. and 
 Non. 
 
 Praevertor/or Praeverto, Plaut , 
 Liv., Curt., Tac., Apul 
 Virg. But only the prccter- 
 perfect active, pr&verti, is used, 
 there being no pra? versus sum. 
 
 Punioryor Punio, Cic. in three 
 places. 
 
 Quiritor, Varr. Quirito, Plin., 
 Quinct. 
 
 Ruminor, Varr., Liv. Andron. 
 Rumino, Virg. 
 
 Sacrificor for Sacrifico, Varr. 
 
Spector for Specto. Speclalus 
 est sitem, Varr. 
 
 Significor for Significo, accord- 
 ing to Gellius. To these may 
 be added, Adjutor, Conver- 
 ter, Emungor, Excalceor, 
 Fatiscor, Fociilor, Fruticor, 
 
 Gliscor, Ignescor, Labascor, 
 Ludificor, Manducor, Com- 
 manducor, Commurmuror, 
 Palpor and Expalpor, Praesa- 
 gior, Spolior, Urinor, all 
 'which Nonius confirms by an- 
 tient authorities. 
 
 Verbs Common, and such as were formerly Common. 
 
 It may be questioned whether any of these were used pas- 
 sively in the ordinary language of the classical age. 
 
 Abominor. Verrius Flaccus. 
 
 Abominatus (passive.) Liv., 
 
 Hor. 
 Adipiscor (passive.) Boeth , 
 
 Justinian., Fab. Max., &c. 
 Adminiculor. Adminiculali 
 
 (passive ) Varr. 
 Admiror (to be admired. ) Ca- 
 
 nutius. 
 Adorior. Adortos (attacked.) 
 
 Aurel. 
 Adulor. Adulati crant (they 
 
 were flattered.) Cassius. 
 Aggredior (passive.) Cicero. 
 
 Aggressus (undertaken.) Ter. 
 
 Maur. 
 Amplector (to be embraced. Pe- 
 
 tron., Lucil. 
 
 Antestor (passive.) Liv. 
 Arbitror (passive.) Coel., Gell. 
 Arch\tector.Architectata(built.) 
 
 Nep. 
 Argumentor. Argumentata rti~ 
 
 rwSevra. Aufusius ap. Prise. 
 
 But, perhaps , he wrote A. Fu- 
 
 rius. 
 
 Aspernor (to be despised ) Cic. 
 Assector (to be followed.) Enn., 
 
 Alpheus philol. 
 Auguror (to be foretold.) Luc. 
 
 Caes. Virgil uses the active 
 
 auguro, to foretell; and Ci- 
 cero, auguror, in the same 
 
 sense as a deponent. 
 Auxilior. Auxiliatus (assisted.) 
 
 Lucil. 
 
 Blandior. Blanditus 
 Qe}$. Verrius. 
 
 Calumnior (to be blamed.) Sta- 
 verius de proportione. 
 
 Carnificor (to be tortured.) Si- 
 senna. 
 
 Caviller. Cavillatus, (teased.) 
 Appul. 
 
 Cohortor. See Hortor. 
 
 Comitor(passive.) Justin., Ovid., 
 Virg. 
 
 Commentor. Commentus TTE- 
 rtXatrpsvos. Appius Caecus. 
 
 Complector (passive.) Virg., 
 Cic., Scaevola. 
 
 Confiteor (passive), according 
 to Priscian. Confessus (pas- 
 sive.) Optatus Afer. 
 
 Consequor, Consector, (to be 
 followed.) Orbilius, Varr., 
 and Laverius. 
 
 Consolor( passive.) Quint. Mc- 
 tell. Numid., and Asinius 
 Pollio. 
 
 Conspicor (to be seen.) Plant., 
 Varr., Sail. 
 
 Contestor (passive.) Contestatur 
 ffviqMprvpsirat. P. Aufidius. 
 
 Criminor (passive.) Cic., Ap- 
 pul., and Boeth. 
 
 Demolior, Immolior (passive.) 
 Curio pater, Liv. 
 
 Delargior, (passive.) C, Grac- 
 chus. 
 
 Depeculor (to be plundered,) 
 Lucius Coclius. 
 
316 
 
 Despicor (to be despised.} Qu. 
 Pompeius. 
 
 Detestor (to be hated.) Apul. 
 Apol. Detestata (hated.) 
 Hor. 
 
 Dignor (to be thought worthy.) 
 Cic. and Gell. Dignate (pas- 
 sive.) Virg. 
 
 Dilargior. See Largior. 
 
 Dominor (to be ruled.) Nigidius 
 Figulus, poet. vet. ap. Cic. 
 
 Ementior (passive.) Emcniila 
 ^V<rfj.svac. C. Memmius. 
 Ementitis (falsified.) Cic. 
 
 Enitor. Enixum puerum (born.) 
 Sulpic. Sever us. 
 
 Exsecror. Exccrati naT'aca- 
 Qsvres. Cato. 
 
 Exhortor. See Hortor. 
 
 Exorior. Res a raro ini- 
 
 tio exorsa, i. e. initcc. Visel- 
 lius. Here it may be called 
 a verb neuter deponent. 
 
 Experior (passive.) Experienda 
 (to be tried.) P. Nigid. Ex- 
 perta (tried.) Cic., Attius, 
 and Asin. Experfas (tried.) 
 Statius. 
 
 Exsequorf passive. )Ulpian. and 
 Emporius rhetor. 
 
 Fari (to be pronounced.) Sue- 
 ton. 
 
 Fatcor (to be confessed.) Cic. 
 
 Frustror (to be disappointed. ) Ke- 
 iiestclla. Frustratus pxrouvu- 
 QstSt Laverius. 
 
 Furor. Furatis (being stolen.) 
 Appuleius. 
 
 Hortor (passive.) Gell., and 
 Tac. Adhorlati (exhorted.) 
 Cassius. Cohortatum (en- 
 couragcd.) Marc. Cato. Ex- 
 liorlatitfi. Cic. Senec. al.exo- 
 rat-us. Exhortato. Ausonius. 
 
 Jaculor. Jaculafus (struck ivith 
 an arrow.) Victor Uticen- 
 sis. 
 
 Immolior. See Molior. 
 
 Interpreter (passive.) Paull. ju- 
 riscon. Ilieroriv. Auyiutin. 
 
 Interpretata (interpreted.) Ci- 
 cero. 
 
 Largior (passive.) Dilargitis 
 (bein<r given away.) Sail. 
 
 Loqui (passive.) Coelius. 
 
 Machinor. Machinata (contri- 
 ved.) Sail. 
 
 Meditor (passive. ) Minutius 
 Felix. Meditata ps ps \ery- 
 fj^va. Ter., Cic., Ovid., Gell. 
 Emeditatos. Appul. 
 
 Metior (to be measured.) Ar- 
 nob* 
 
 Metor (passive.) Metata Sf 
 metato. Hor. 
 
 Moderor. Moderata (passive.) 
 Epigr. vet. 
 
 Modulor (passive.) Modulata 
 (modulated.) Gell. 
 
 Molior (to be contrived.) Appul. 
 So Immolior. Immolilum. 
 Liv. 
 
 Nanciscor. Nacta (gotten.) 
 Hyginus, Appul. 
 
 Obliviscor (passive. ) Scholiast. 
 Juvenalis. Oblita (forgot- 
 ten.) Virg. and Boe'th. 
 
 Ordior. Orsa (begun.) Colum. 
 Ordita. Diomedes. 
 
 Osculor, usually set down, 
 wants authority. 
 
 Paciscor. Paciaerat (was pro- 
 mised.) Tac. 
 
 Percontor (to be asked. ) Percon- 
 tatum pretmm. Appul. 
 
 Polliceor (passive.) Metellus 
 Numidicus. 
 
 Populor (to be plundered.) Po- 
 pulatit populatam. Cic. But 
 populo is used, whence popu- 
 latus is regularly passive. 
 
 Potior. with a gen. case (to be 
 possessed by.) Plaut.,Ter.,&c. 
 
 Precor. Prccandus (to be prayed 
 to.) Auson. Ara precanda, 
 Prudent. 
 
 Queror (passive,) according to 
 Priscian. 
 
 Remoror (passive,) according to 
 Hegcsippus, 
 
81$ 
 
 Reor (passive,) according to Velificor (passive.) Velificatvs 
 
 Priscfan. Athos, Juven. 
 
 Sector (to be followed. } Varro. Veneror (passive.) Csesar Ger- 
 
 So Consector. manicus, Virg. Hor. 
 
 Solor (passive,) according to Venor (active and passive,) ac- 
 
 Priscian. See Consolor. cording to Priscian. 
 
 Stipulor(passive.)Sueton.,Liv., Vereor (passive.) Afranius. 
 
 andPlaut. Stipulor (active.) Ulciscor (passive.) Sail, and 
 
 Juvenal. Instipulor( passive.) Pore. Latro. Ultus. Valer. 
 
 Plaut. Active. Plaut. Flaccus. 
 
 Testor. Tcstata poLprvprfievra,. Vociferor (active and passive,) 
 
 Cic, according to Priscian. 
 
 Tueor and Tutor (passive.) Utor (passive.) Novius. So also 
 
 Varro. Abutor. Varro and Q, Hor- 
 
 Vador (passive,) according to tensius. 
 
 Priscian. 
 
 These last three lists might have been, perhaps, without 
 impropriety, omitted, since it is evident that they are com* 
 piled, chiefly from authors who wrote either before or after 
 the times of classical Latinity. I shall conclude with an 
 enumeration of certain participles which have something 
 peculiar in their nature. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 The following perfect participles come from neuter verbs, and 
 are used in a passive sense. 
 
 Erratut) festinatus, juratus, laboratus, vigilatus, certatus, ces- 
 satus, clamatus, conclamatus, ovatus, sudatus, triumphatus, ulu- 
 latus : as, Errata littora Virg. Festinati honores Lucan. Arte 
 laboratcc vestes Virg. Vigilatcc nodes Ovid. &c. Some per- 
 fect participles, coming from neuter verbs, are used in a sense 
 which is either neuter, or apparently active: as, Adultus, codlitus 9 
 concretus, cotiflagratus, deflagratus, conspiratus, dolitus, defect us, 
 emersus y exitus, exoletus, interitus, juratus (mentioned also be- 
 fore), obsoletus, obituS) occasus, penetratus, placitus, complacitus, 
 prceteritus, rebettatus, redundatus^ requietus, senectus, suetus, as- 
 suetus, consuetusy titubatus : as, Adulta virgo Liv. i. e. qutc ado- 
 levit. Emersus e cceno Cic. i. e. qui emersit. Cicero and others 
 use juratus for qui juravit : thus also, actively, Juratus est mihi 
 Plaut. for juravit mihi, and, passively, Quod juratum est Cic. 
 &c. To the above-mentioned may be added the following, having 
 an active signification ; Cautus, circumspectus, consideratus, despe- 
 ratus, effusus, profusus, tacitus, consultus, promptus, argutus, di- 
 sertuSj notus {qui novit), ignotus, (qui ignorat) ; also jtuxusyfal* 
 sus, stilus, whence inscitus, which have assumed the nature of ad- 
 jectives. 
 
 Lastly, there are some participles in ns which signify passively; 
 
318 
 
 such as vehens for qui vehitur ; vertens for qui vertitur ; volvens 
 for qui volvitur ; as, Quadfigis vehens Cic. for vectus. Ora vi- 
 des Hecates in ires vert entia paries Ovid. i. e. versa, al. vergentia. 
 Annus vertens Cic. Volventibus annis Virg. i. e. dum volvun- 
 tur. But to these, and to others, formed from verbs thus used, 
 it is probable, as has been already stated, that the objective case 
 of a pronoun is understood 1 . 
 
 There are certain words compounded with in, which have 
 either an affirmative or a negative signification, in which latter 
 sense they must be considered as participials ; as indictus, invo- 
 catus, immutatus, &c. Many, by being divested of their time, or 
 by a change in their construction, become nouns ; as sapiens, 
 doctus, adolescens, animansy abditus, patie?is, amans, &c. 
 
 OF THE ARRANGEMENT OR POSITION OF 
 WORDS IN A SENTENCE. 
 
 THE English is an analogous language, in which the words 
 of a sentence are generally arranged according to the order 
 of time. The nominative, or the subject of the action, ap- 
 pears first ; then the action with its several modifications or 
 accessary circumstances ; and, lastly, the object to which it 
 has a reference. This is the common order of construction. 
 The Latin, on the contrary, is a transpositive language, in 
 which the order of the words is very arbitrary, depending, 
 in a great degree, upon the taste or fancy of the composer, 
 or some particular purpose which he may have in view, some- 
 times the object, sometimes the action, and sometimes the 
 modification of the action, being made to precede or follow 
 the other parts. Thus, by its having greater variety of in- 
 flexions to express different relations, we can, without pro- 
 ducing ambiguity, say Alexander vicit Darium, Darium incit 
 Alexander, Alexander Darium vicit, or Darium Alexander 
 vicit, for " Alexander conquered Darius." This variety of 
 arrangement in Latin gives it an advantage over the English, 
 riot only in energy and vivacity of expression, but often also 
 in harmony and perspicuity. It is true, that, in English, a 
 similar inversion of words is sometimes admitted : as, " Him 
 the Eternal hurFd" Milton ; " Silver and gold have I none" 
 
 1 Volcns seems sometimes to have a passive signification, denoting what is 
 willed, welcome, or acceptable : as, Volentia fuerc. plebi hccc et lalia Tac. Vo- 
 lentia de ambobus accelerant- Sail. 
 
319 
 
 1 Acts iii. 6 ; but this occurs chiefly in poetry, or in impas- 
 sioned language.- While, however, no certain rules can 
 
 be given tor the order of Latin words, which are applicable 
 to every instance, it may be observed, that, in general, 
 
 1st. The word governed is placed before the word which 
 
 governs it : 
 
 2dly. The word agreeing is placed after the word with which 
 it agrees 1 . 
 
 To these two leading principles shall be subjoined a Jew 
 particular rules and notes. 
 
 RULE I. The adjective or participle is, perhaps, most com- 
 monly placed after the substantive with which it agrees : as, 
 Pulverem majorem videri Caes. Sabin flumen ab castris 
 suis abesse Caes. Ad exercitum transportandum Caes. 
 
 Note 1. When the adjective is a short word, and the substan- 
 tive a long one ; or to avoid the hiatus occasioned by the concur- 
 rence of vowels, the adjective is frequently placed first ; as Hce 
 disciplines, has causas, ea tempestas, innuba puella. 
 
 Note 2. The following adjectives, primus, medius, idtimus, ex- 
 tremus, hifimus. imus, summits, supremus, reliquus, cczterus, when 
 joined to a noun, to denote pars prima, media, &c., are generally 
 placed before their substantives : as Prima Jhbula Ter. Media 
 nox Caes. Reliqua JEgyptus Cic. 
 
 Note 3-. When the substantive, with which the adjective agrees, 
 has a genitive depending on it, the adjective is generally placed 
 first: as, Ulla officii prcccepta Cic. in which the substantive on 
 which the genitive depends is placed last. 
 
 Note 4?. When the substantive, with which the adjective agrees, 
 is a genitive governed by another substantive, then also the adjec- 
 tive may be placed first : as, Tantularum rerurn occupation^ 
 Caes. 
 
 Note 5. The adjective is frequently placed first, merely to gra- 
 tify the ear; as Bonus puer, magna parte, celer equus. 
 
 Note 6. A preposition or other word, is frequently put between 
 the substantive and adjective ; as, Tota in urbe, Quern in locum, 
 Rem vero publicam amisimus, in which last a compounded word is 
 divided by the intervention of verb. 
 
 RULE II. The finite verb is usually placed after its nomi- 
 native, several words often intervening: as, Neque ullanostris 
 jacultas aut admin istrandi, aut auxiliandi dabatur Caes. 
 
 1 A little attention to these two leading principles, with the following rules, 
 and to the usual order of the English language, will readily suggest what 
 have been named the rules of construing or analysis, that is, the rules for re- 
 ducing, previously to translation, the Latin into the English order. 
 
320 
 
 Note 1. In short sentences, or to contribute to harmony and 
 emphasis, the nominative is often put after the verb : as, At sec- 
 tabantur multi Cic. Quern ad finem sese effenata jactabit au- 
 dacia? Cic. Stat sua cuique dies Virg. Manet alta mente re- 
 postum judicium Paridis Virg. It may be observed that, in the 
 two preceding examples, the action of the verb is a principal ob- 
 ject of attention, which seems, on that account, placed first; and 
 that the fatal day, and the fatal decision, are likewise so placed as 
 to make a strong and a lasting impression. 
 
 Note 2. The nominative is put after the verb, when it is the an- 
 tecedent to a relative that cannot properly come before that verb, 
 nor yet be separated from its antecedent by the intervention of 
 other words : as, Mittitur ad eos, colloquendi causa, C. Arpinius 
 eques Romanus, et Q. Junius ex Hispania quic/am, qui jam ante, 
 missu Csesaris, ad Ambiorigem ventitare consueverat Caes. Erat 
 in Carnutibus summo loco natus Tasgetius, cujus majores in sua 
 civitate regnum obtinuerant Caes. 
 
 RULE III. The relative is commonly placed after, and as 
 near as possible to, its antecedent: as, Neque conditiones ac- 
 cipiendas arbitrabatur ab Us, qui, per dolum petita pace, ul- 
 tro bellum intulissent Caes. 
 
 Note 1. It sometimes happens that the real antecedent is omit- 
 ted, in which case the substantive is subjoined to the relative, which 
 then agrees with it in case : as, Populo ut placerent quas fecisset 
 fabulas Ter. i. e. Populo utjabulte placerent, quas [fabulas] fe- 
 cisset. 
 
 Note 2. To prevent ambiguity, the relative and its clause are 
 sometimes placed first: as, Haec qui faciat, non ego eum cum sum- 
 mis viris comparo, sed simillimum deo judico Cic. Had the re- 
 lative clause been placed after eum, to which it refers, it would 
 have occasioned too great a separation between the antecedent 
 and the terms of honour intended to be associated with it. Had it 
 been placed after comparo, it would have divided the terms of ho- 
 nour. And had it been placed after judico, ambiguity would have 
 been produced, since either eum or deo might have been taken for 
 the antecedent. 
 
 RULE IV. A noun in an oblique case is commonly placed 
 before the word which governs it ; as, Lctudis avidi, pecunicc 
 liberates erant Sail. Cunctis esto benignus, nulli blandus, 
 pallets familiarise omnibus <zquus Senec. Adolescentis est 
 majores natu revereri Cic. 
 
 Note 1. The substantive governed by an adjective in the neuter 
 gender is generally placed after the adjective : as, Nee tibi plus 
 cordis, sed minus oris inest Ovid. 
 
 Note 2. This rule, like the others, is frequently neglected, to 
 facilitate utterance and produce harmony. 
 
 
Note 3. It often happens that one or more words intervene be- 
 tween the word governed and the word governing ; but when the 
 words one and another are rendered in Latin by a repetition of the 
 substantives to which they refer, they closely follow each other : 
 as, Cuneus cuneum trudit. Thus, also, Alius aliud dicit, for One 
 man says one thing, and another a different thing. 
 
 RULE V. The finite verb is commonly placed last in its 
 own clause, and the principal verb is generally placed Jast 
 in the sentence : as. Quorum per fines ierant, his, uti con- 
 quirerent et reducer ent^ si sibi purgati esse vellent, imperavit 
 Cses. 
 
 Note 1 . This rule is often violated for the sake of harmony, and 
 especially when the verb is a monosyllable. Yet, we find many 
 sentences concluding with a word of one syllable, and apparently 
 under the influence of the figures synalepha and ecthlipsis : as, 
 Quae caedes per hosce annos sine \\lofacta est Cic. Altera occi- 
 
 sa, altera capta est Cses. Diu atque acriter pugnatum est 
 
 Caes. Intus inclusum periculum est Cic. This frequently oc- 
 curs also, when the preceding word ending with a consonant, 
 and the final word beginning with a vowel, or vice versa, the two 
 syllables are as closely connected in pronunciation as if they be- 
 longed to the same word : thus, Atque unus e filiis captus est 
 Caes. Quotiesconsuleminterficereeowafoe.s Cic. Impediments 
 
 strisque^o^V/ sunt Cass. Adventu tuo ista subsellia vacuafac- 
 ta sunt Cic. When the last syllable but one is short, this is 
 named the Iambic cadence. Both poets and prose writers ter- 
 minate a sentence with a monosyllable, when they intend to ex- 
 press indignation, abruptness, astonishment, or contempt. 
 
 RULE VI. A verb in the infinitive is usually placed be- 
 fore the verb which governs it, or on which it depends : as, 
 Jugurtha, ubi eos Africa decessisse ratus est,. neque propter 
 loci naturam Cirtam armis expugnare possit, mcenia circum- 
 dat Sail. 
 
 Note 1. When the governing verb is understood, infinitives 
 occupy the same place as finite verbs : thus, Caeterum, qua per- 
 gebat, urbes, agros vastare, praedas agere y suis animum, hostibus 
 terrorem, augere Sail. 
 
 Note 2. To prevent a hiatus, for the sake of harmony, or to 
 end a sentence with an emphatic word, the infinitive is frequently 
 placed after the verb on which it depends : as, Nam servitutera 
 quidem quis vestrum audebat recusare? Ex quibus nerainem 
 mihi necesse est nominare ; vosmet vobiscum recordamini ; nolo 
 enim cujusquam fords atque illustris viri ne minimum quidem 
 erratum cum maxima laude conjungere Cic. Nam impune 
 quaelibet facere, id est regem esse Sail. 
 
322 
 
 RULE VII. Dependent clauses, as well as single words, 
 are placed before the principal finite verb upon which such 
 clauses do chiefly depend : as, Qidbus rebus Micipsa tametsi 
 initio Icetus fuerat^ existimans virtutem Jugurtli(Z regno suo 
 glorice fore^ tamen postquam hominem adolescentem, exactd 
 (state sud) et parvis liberis, magls magisque crescere intelli- 
 git, vehementer eo negotio permotus^ multa cum ammo suo 
 volvebatSall. 
 
 Note 1. This rule may, in a great degree, be inferred from 
 Rule V. In the preceding quotation it may be observed, that 
 volvebat, being the principal verb, is placed last ; and that all the 
 clauses which induce Micipsas pondering, expressive of joy, hope, 
 and alarm, are consistently placed before that verb, whose ac- 
 tion they produced, upon which they depend, and with which 
 they are so intimately connected. 
 
 Note 2. The chief exception to this rule occurs, when the sen- 
 tence is long and complicated, so that, were all the dependent 
 clauses introduced between the nominative and principal verb, 
 the connexion subsisting between these two would either be lost 
 or rendered obscure. When this is the case, the principal verb 
 and its nominative, with the words immediately depending, are 
 placed either first or last in the sentence : thus, Bellum scripturus 
 sum, quod populus R. cum Jugurtha rege Numidarum gessit ; 
 primum, quia magnum et atrox, variaque victoria fuit ; dein, quia 
 turn primum superbiae nobilitatis obviam itum est Sail. Here it 
 may be observed that the luriting is the principal action in the 
 sentence. The nature of the war is assigned as the inducement to 
 write j which two circumstances are, Consequently, closely con- 
 nected. Yet, had the words scripturus sum, as being expressive 
 of the chief action, been placed after the dependent clauses, it is 
 obvious that the arrangement would have been not only unhar- 
 monious, but perplexed; since the object, bellum, which, as an 
 antecedent, must precede quod, would have been too far removed 
 from its governing word, scripturus. The following passage is 
 quoted from Seneca, De Benef. L 6, c. 31, as containing striking 
 instances of the propriety, beauty, and energy, produced by 
 placing the principal verb and its nominative at the end of a 
 clause, or the conclusion of the sentence; Divinaatque humana 
 impellentem, et mutantem quicquid obstiterat trecenti stare jus- 
 serunt. Stratusque per totam passim Graeciam Xerxes intellexit, 
 quantum ab exercitu turba distaret. 
 
 RULE VIII. Adverbs are generally placed immediately 
 before the words to which they belong : as, Nihil tarn as- 
 perum, neque tarn difficile esse, quod non cupidissime fac- 
 turi essent Sail. 
 
323 
 
 Note I. When the adverb is an emphatic word, it is often placed 
 after : as, Ut tibi necesse esset in conspectu P. R. vomere pos- 
 tridieCic. 
 
 Note 2. Words intimately connected with the word to which 
 the adverb refers, are generally placed between them : as, Sem- 
 perque his aliena virtus formidolosa est Sail. Sed maxime ado- 
 lescentium familiaritates appetebatSall. Non tarn in bellis et in 
 praeliis, quam in promissis et &&e,jirmiorem Cic. 
 
 Note 3. Antequam, postquam, and priusquam are elegantly di- 
 vided, one part being often put in one member of the sentence, 
 and the other in another: thus, Ita bello intra dies xxx perfecto, 
 ante cognitum est Gentium victum, quam cceptum bellum nun- 
 ciaretur Eutrop. Filius anno post Quaestor fuit, quam Consul 
 Mummius Cic. Atque ita perterritos egerunt, ut non jprius 
 fuga desisterent, quam in conspectum agminis nostri venissent 
 Caes. 
 
 RULE IX. Prepositions usually precede the cases govern- 
 ed by them: as, Ad lucem dormire Cic. Nihil est ab 
 omni parte beatum Hor. 
 
 Note 1. This rule is contrary to the first general maxim. 
 
 Note 2. Prepositions are often placed after the relative pro- 
 noun ; as, Quam circa, quern penes, quos inter, &c. : thus, also, Si 
 quos inter societas aut est, aut fuit Cic. Hsec aiunt probari a 
 Stoicis quos contra disputant Cic. 
 
 Note 3. We generally find mecum, tecum, secum, nobiscum, vo- 
 biscum ; and quicum, quocum, quacum, quibuscum t are much more 
 frequent than cum quo, &c. 
 
 Note 4s Temts and versus are set after their cases ; usque is 
 sometimes placed before and sometimes after: as, Daciam tenus 
 venit Flor. Aurium tenus Quinct. Cum Arretium versus cas- 
 tra movisset Cic. Usque Ephesum Plin. Tharsum usque 
 Cic. Many other prepositions are placed, both by poets and 
 prose writers, after as well as before their cases : as, Saxa per 
 et scopulos Virg. Te propter Virg. Hunc adversus Nep. 
 Urbemjuxta Tac. &c. 
 
 Note 5. The preposition is elegantly placed between the ad- 
 jective and substantive : as, Quam ad suavitatem Cic. Suos in- 
 ter cequales Cic. Paucos post dies Liv. Hoc ex loco Cic. 
 Nulla in re Cic ; thus also the compounds quemadmodum, 
 quamobrem. 
 
 Note 6. The poets, probably for the sake of the metre, some- 
 times place one or more words between the preposition and its 
 case : as, Vulneraque ilia gerens quae circum plurima muros Ac- 
 cepit patrios Virg. Qui faciunt solem certa de surgere parte 
 Lucret, 
 
 Y2 
 
324- 
 
 RULE X. Certain conjunctions are placed first in a clause 
 or sentence ; some, after the first word ; and others) in the 
 first or second place, indifferently. See p. 156. 
 
 Note 1. Autem and enim are sometimes found in the third 
 place ; as, Quid tu autem, asine, hie auscultas ? Ter. Odiosa 
 ilia enim fuerant, legiones venire Cic. Etiam is found in the 
 fourth place: as, At juvenis nihil etiam sequius suspicatus 
 Apul. Tamen is sometimes found after the second or third word 
 of its clause : as, Tu moriere tamen Propert. Tu, si tuis blan- 
 ditiis tamen Cic. 
 
 Note 2. The poets sometimes join que to a different word from 
 what the natural order of the sentence requires : as, Ore pedes 
 tetigitque crura Hor. for tetigit pedes cruraque. 
 
 Note 3. The poets also sometimes change the position of the 
 prepositives, et, atque, nee, neque, sed, siquidem, <vd, &c. : as, Sus- 
 piciens altam lunam, et sic voce precatur Virg. Nee deus hunc 
 mensa, dea nee dignata cubili est Virg. Ipsa sed in somnis in- 
 humati venit imago Conjugis Virg. &c. 
 
 RULE XL Words connected in sense should not be se- 
 parated by words that are extraneous. 
 
 Note 1. The violation of this rule is named Synchysis ; of which 
 the following are examples : Vidi ego quijuvenem seros desisset 
 amores Tibull. for Vidi egojuvenem, qui. Quisquis erit vitar, 
 tcribam, color Hor. Here scribam constitutes no parentheti- 
 cal clause ; neither is it connected by sense, government, or con- 
 cord, with either of the words between which it stands. Its place 
 seems to be before quisquis, or, rather, after color. Sed bona si 
 quis Judice condiderit, laudatur Caesare Hor. The place ofju- 
 dice seems to be in the clause with laudatur. Pene arsit macros 
 dum turdos versat in igne Hor. instead of Dum versat macros 
 turdos, peve arsit in igne. To these may perhaps be added such 
 inversions as, Per ego te deos oro Ter. Per ego te, inquit, fili, 
 qucecunque jura liberos jungunt parentibus, precor quaesoque 
 Liv. 23, 9. 
 
 RULE XII. In general, there should be neither a redun- 
 dance of long measures or long words, nor of short mea- 
 sures or short words ; and, as far as perspicuity and the 
 general system of arrangement will permit, when the fore- 
 going word ends with a vowel, let the next begin with a 
 consonant, and vice versa taking care, at the same time, 
 that the last syllables of the foregoing word be not the same 
 as the first syllables of the word following, and that many 
 words which bear the same quantity, which begin alike or 
 end alike, or which have the same characteristic letter in 
 declension or conjugation, do not come together. 
 
IWS 
 
 Perhaps the following sentence from Caesar may be con- 
 sidered, according to the way in which it is commonly 
 read, as deficient in some of these particulars ; Qua pars 
 ut ante dictum est, et regionum latitudine, et multitudine ho- 
 minum, ex tertia parte Gallic est testimanda ; in which 
 there are, within a small compass, three words terminating 
 in urn, the last two in num ,- two words ending in titudine ; 
 one word ending in e, and another beginning with it ; one 
 ending in <^, and another beginning with it : six monosyl- 
 lables almost close together, and two of them, est and et, 
 of nearly the same sound ; a hiatus in latitudine et, and an- 
 other in Gallicc est ; and an alliteration, or a repetition of 
 the concluding syllable of the former word, in the com- 
 mencement of the following, in est eestimanda. 
 
 These few Rules, aided by practice, and attention to the 
 arrangement adopted by the best classical writers, may, per- 
 haps, be found of some utility. It is almost needless to ob- 
 serve, that, in Latin, as well as in English, a principal ob- 
 ject is to avoid such a collocation of words as may lead to 
 ambiguity, or a confusion of ideas ; this being done, the 
 ear will be a tolerable guide with respect to the beauty of 
 cadences, and the harmony of periods, as the judgment 
 will be, in regard to a strong, and an emphatic arrange- 
 ment ! . As Quintilian observes, " Felicissimus sermo est, 
 cui et rectus or do, et apta junctura, et cum his numerus op- 
 portune cadens contingit." And again ; " Optime autem 
 de ilia [compositione] judicant aures ; quae et plena sen- 
 tiunt, et paruin expleta desiderant, et fragosis offenduntur, 
 et lenibus mulcentur, et contortis excitantur, et stabilia pro- 
 bant, clauda deprehendunt, redundantia et nimia fastidiunt." 
 Inst. .9, 4. 
 
 OF FIGURATIVE SYNTAX. 
 
 The Figures of Syntax are reduced to four kinds, Ellipsis, 
 Pleonasm, Enallage, and llyperbalon. 
 
 OF ELLIPSIS. 
 
 Ellipsis is the omission, in a sentence, of some word, or 
 words, necessary to supply the regular syntax. 
 
 1 Such as wish to see this subject thoroughly discussed, are referred to the 
 writings of Cicero and Quintilian. Learners may likewise, with consider- 
 able advantage, consult Mr. Valpy's " Elegantiae Latinae," and Mr. Lyne'g 
 " Latin Primer:" two school-books containing much useful information. 
 
326 
 
 It is termed strict, when the word to be supplied is not 
 to be found in any part of the sentence. It affects all the 
 parts of speech ; thus, 
 
 1. The Noun ; as Aiunt, supply homines. Non est oneri je- 
 rendo, supply aptus. 2. The Pronoun ; as Arma wrumque cano, 
 supply ego. 3. The Verb ; as Quid multa ? supply dicam. 4. The 
 Participle ; as Saturno rege, supply ente or existente. 5. The 
 Adverb ; as Vulnerantur amplius sexcentiCxs. supply quam. 
 6. The Preposition ; as JEo Romam, supply ad. 7. The Inter- 
 jection : as, Me miser urn, supply O or hen. 8. The Conjunc- 
 tion, as will be seen under Asyndeton. 
 
 The ellipsis is named lax or loose, when the word omitted may 
 he supplied from some part of the sentence ; as, Virtus (cogebat;, 
 ct honestas (cogebat], ft pudor cum consulibus esse cogebat Cic. 
 The former kind of ellipsis contains the figures, Apposition, Synec- 
 doche, and Asyndeton^ The latter contains, Zeugma, Syllepsis, 
 and Prolepsis. 
 
 Apposition,}*, t*hen, in putting two substantives together in the 
 same case, existem, or the obsolete ens, or some other part of 
 sum, with a relative, is understood : as, Urbs Roma, i. e. urbs 
 existens, ens, or, qua est, Roma. 
 
 Synecdoche is, when, instead of an ablative of the part, or of 
 the adjunct, an accusative is used, the Greek xara, secundum, or 
 quod ad, being understood : as, Expleri (quod ad) mentem nequit 
 Virg. 
 
 Asyndeton is the omission of a conjunction : as, Abiit, excessit, 
 evasit, erupit Cic. supply et. Sex septem dies, supply vel. 
 
 Zeugma is, when an adjective or verb referring to different 
 substantives, is expressed to the last only, with which it agrees, 
 being understood to the rest : as, Et genus* et virtus, nisi cum re, 
 vilior algdest--Ilor. Hie illius arma , hie currusjuit Virg. Quam- 
 vis ille niger, quamms tu candidus esses Virg. Zeugma is found 
 in the beginning, middle, or end of a sentence. And sometimes 
 the adjective or verbs agree with the more remote substantive ; 
 sometimes with the principal substantive ; and sometimes with 
 another. 
 
 Syllepsis is, when the adjective or verb, joined to different sub- 
 stantives, agrees with the more worthy 
 
 A syllepsis of gender is, when an adjective, joined to two sub- 
 stantives of different genders, agrees with the more worthy gen- 
 der. It is termed explicit, when substantives of different genders 
 are expressed : as, Attoniti novitate paveut, manibusque supinis 
 Concipiunt Baucisque preces timidusque Philemon Ovid. It is 
 called implicit, when they are suppressed : as, Ut templi tetigcre 
 gradus, procumbit uterque Promts humi Ovid. i. e. Deucalion et 
 JPyrrha. 
 
 It is also named direct or indirect. The direct is produced by 
 a copulative conjunction : as, Pater mihi et mater mortal Ter. 
 The indirect, by a preposition : as ; Dux koslintn cnm urbc Valcn- 
 
327 
 
 tia et exercitu deleti Sail. Note 1 - When the substantives ex - 
 press things inanimate, the adjective is generally put in the neu- 
 ter gender: as, arcum - - - et calamos ; qua Virg. Note 2. 
 When with two substantives of different genders, a plural sub- 
 stantive is placed in apposition, the more worthy gender is pre- 
 ferred : as, Ptolemceus et Cleopatra reges JEgypti Liv. i. e. rex 
 et re gin a. 
 
 A syllepsis of the persons is, when a plural verb, joined to two 
 substantives of different persons, agrees with the more worthy. 
 It is named explicit, when the persons are expressed : as. Sustu- 
 limus manus et ego et Balbus Cic. Implicit, or implied, when 
 they are not expressed: as, Quern per urbem uterquc defessi su- 
 mus quccrere Plant. It is also direct ; as, Ego et Cicero vakmus 
 Cic. Indirect : as, Ipse cumfratre Capuam ad consides adesse 
 jussi sumus Cic. A syllepsis of the numbers is, when the sub- 
 stantives being of different numbers, the adjective or verb is put in 
 the plural : as, Phrygii comites, etlcetus lulus, Incedunt Virg. Pro- 
 jectisque amiculo et literis Curt. It is sometimes indirect: as, Equi- 
 tes cum JEmilio subvenientes periculo ccetcros exemere TacSt. 
 
 Prolepsis is, when the parts, differing in number or in person 
 from the whole, are placed after it, the verb or the adjective not 
 being repeated : as, Boni quoniam convenimus ambo, tu calamos 
 inftare leves, ego dicere versus Virg. i. e tu convenisti bonus cala- 
 mos inflare, ego conveni, &c. It is named explicit, when the whole 
 and the parts are mentioned : as, Consides, Sulpicius in dextro, 
 Petilius in lavo cornu, consistunt Liv. Implicit, when the 
 whole, or the parts are omitted : as, Curemus eequam uterque par- 
 tern; tu alterum, ego item alterum Ter. i.e. nos uterque, ego 
 meam tu tuam partem curemus. Vestras quisque redite domos 
 Ovid. i. e. vos redite domos, tu tuam) alius suam. 
 
 OF PLEONASM. 
 
 Pleonasm adds unnecessary words; thus, 1. The Noun: as, 
 Sic ore locuta estVirg. 2. The Pronoun : as, Pater tuus, is 
 eratjrater patruelis mcus Plaut. 3. The Participle: as, Post- 
 quam primus amor deceptam mortefejellit Virg. 4-. The Adverb : 
 as, Prcesensit prius Plaut. 5. The Conjunction : as, Itaqueergo 
 amantur Ter. Etui quamvis Cic. Under Pleonasm are com- 
 prehended, Parelcon, Polysyndeton, Hendiadys, and Periphrasis. 
 
 Parelcon is the addition of an unnecessary syllable or particle 
 to pronouns, verbs, or adverbs ; chiefly, perhaps, for the sake of 
 emphasis : as, egomet, agedum, agesis.Jbrtassean. 
 
 Polysyndeton is a redundancy of conjunctions : as, Una Eu. 
 rusque Notusque ruunt, creberque procellis Africus Virg. This 
 use of the conjunctions by Virgil, is noticed* under the examina- 
 tion of the Hexameter. 
 
 Hendiadys (i. e.*Ev &a Suolv) expresses one thing, as if it were 
 two things: as, Paferis libamus et auroVii'g- instead ofpateris 
 
328 
 
 Periphrasis is a circuitous manner of cxprcision : as, Teneri 
 Jcetus ovium Virg. i. e. lambs. 
 
 OF ENALLAGE. 
 
 Enallage, in a general sense, is the change of words, or of their 
 accidents, one for another. There are various kinds of it : viz. 
 Antimeria, Enallage, strictly so called, Heterosis, and Antiptosis. 
 To Enallage may likewise be referred Synesis, Anacoluthon, Hel- 
 lenismus, and Archaismus. 
 
 Antimeria puts one part of speech for another: thus, 1. The 
 Noun for the Pronoun : as, Si quid in Flacco viri est Hor. in- 
 stead of in me, for Horace himself is speaking. For the Verb: 
 as, Tua indicatio est Plant, for tuum est indicare. For the Par- 
 ticiple : as, Populum late regem Virg. for regnantem. For the 
 Adverb : as, Sole recens orto Virg. for recenter. For the Inter- 
 jection : as, Navibus, infandum ! amissis Virg. 2. The Pronoun 
 for the Noun : as, suits for unicuiqueproprius, in Mittunt sua thura 
 Sabcei Virg. For the Conjunction : as, Hide conjuncta benefi- 
 centia est, quam eandem vel benignitatem vel liberalitatem appel- 
 lare licet Cic. for quam etiam. 3. The Verb for the Noun : as, 
 Nostrum istudvivere triste Pers. for nostra vita. For the Inter- 
 jection : as, age used in exhortation ; apage as a token of aversion. 
 For the Conjunction : as, licet for quamvis. 4. The Participle for 
 the Noun: as, amans for amator; medentes for medici. For the 
 Verb : as, Torpedo octogenos Jcetus habens invenitur Plin. for ha- 
 bere. For the Adverb : as, Lubensfecero et solens Plaut. forli- 
 benter et consuete. 5. The Adverb for the Noun : as, Aliud eras 
 Pers. for alias dies crastinus. Thus also, beneest, recteest^for bo- 
 num est, rectum est. For the Pronoun Qui, with some preposition 
 expressed or understood: as, Capiunt prcedones navem illam,ubi 
 cectusfui Plaut. for qua, or in qua. For the Preposition : as, 
 Intus tcmplo divinn,(for in ) Virg. For the Conjmiction : as, Dum, 
 jam, mine, adverbs of time, used, the first as a conditional con- 
 junction, the second as a continuative, and the third as an adversa- 
 tive. Thus also, quando for quoniam. 6. The Preposition for the 
 Noun: as, super for superstes, in mihi sola mei super Astyanactis 
 imago Virg. For the Adverb; as, ante, post, infra, instead of 
 antca, postea, inferim. 7. The Interjection for the Noun or Ad- 
 verb : as, Hei mihi, for malum vel male mihi est. 8. The Con- 
 junction for the Adverb : as,sed for imo in Plaut. Habet gladium, 
 sed duos. Si for an in Ter. Visam, si domi est. 
 
 Enallage, strictly so named, is when one word is substituted 
 for another, the part of speech not being changed; as Noun for 
 Noun, Verb for Verb, c. : thus, 
 
 1. The Substantive for the Adjective ; as, Exercitus victor, for 
 victoriosus. Thus also the Abstract for the Concrete : as, conju- 
 gium for conjux, in Virgil ^n. ii. 579. 
 
 2. The Adjective for the Substantive : as, Possum falli, ut ku- 
 
 Cic. For ut homo. Thus also the Concrete for the Abs- 
 
329 
 
 tract; ua,verum, bonum, cequum for verilas, boutins, tequilas. 
 The Noun proper, instead of the Appellative: as, Omne tempun 
 Clodios, non omne Catones fert Senec. in which Clodios is put 
 for homines improbos, and Catones for viros probos. The Noun 
 appellative for the Proper : as, Urbs for Roma. The Primitive 
 for the Derivative : as, Dardana arma for Dardania ; Laticem 
 Lyceum, for Lyeeeium, in Virgil. The Derivative for the Primi- 
 tive: as, Ter denis navibus ibant, for ter decem. The Simple for 
 the Compound : as, avus for abavus ; nepos for pronepos. The 
 Compound for the Simple : as, consceleratus for sceleratus. 
 
 3. One Pronoun used for another : as the Relative for the Re- 
 ciprocal, &c. (See Pronouns.) The Primitive for the Derivative : 
 as, Voluntas vestrum, for vestra. Labor mei, formeus. The De- 
 rivative for the Primitive: as, Desiderium tuum, Odium ttmm,for 
 tui. (See Pronouns,) The Simple for the Compound: as, Q*w 
 for aliquis. The Compound for the Simple : as, tibimet for /zfo", 
 memet for me, in Seneca, Agam. v. 798, and CEdip v. 84-7, where 
 met is evidently redundant. 
 
 4. In the Verb, the Active voice used for the Passive: as, Jam, 
 verterat fortuna Liv. for versa est ; unless, in such sentences as 
 this, there is an ellipsis of se. The Passive for the Active : as, 
 Placitam Pad nutritor olivam Virg. for nutrito. The Primitive 
 for the Derivative : as, Qui Syracusis habet Plaut. for. habitat. 
 Cernerejerro Virg. for certare. The Derivative for the Primi- 
 tive : as, Ductare exercitum, Agitare latitiam, Objectare period is, 
 in Sallust, for ducere, agere, objicere. The Simple for the Com- 
 pound : as, Mcestumque timorem mittite Virg. for omittite. The 
 
 Compound for the Simple : as, Deprecor for precor. Justin, xi. 9. 
 Retine me Ter. Heaut. iii.4. 23. fortene. 
 
 5. In the Participle, the Active for the Passive : as, Tondenti 
 barba cadebat Virg. for tonso. The Passive for the Active : as, 
 Dido, vultum demissa, prqfatur Virg. for demittens. In the for- 
 mer there is an ellipsis of me ; in the latter, of ad, or quod ad. 
 
 6. In the Adverb, with regard to its signification : as, ubi for 
 quando ; ibi for turn, &c. Thus also, the adverbs of quality bene 
 and male are used for the purpose of intension, instead of valde : 
 as, Sermo bene longus Cic. And a determinate number is used 
 for one uncertain : as, Millies audivi, for sa'pissime. O terque, 
 quaterque beati, for maxime beati. Likewise in respect to their 
 form, the Simple are used for the Compound', as, quo, qua, for 
 quvcunqtie, quaciuique. 
 
 1. In the Preposition and Conjunction, Enallage occurs, when 
 one is used for another: as, Ad judicem agere Cic. for apud. 
 Thus also, et is used for ctiam ; si for quamvis ; dum for dummo- 
 do, &c. 
 
 1. Heterosis uses one Accident, especially of a noun, pronoun, 
 or verb, for another : as, Ego quoque una pereo, quod mihi est 
 carius Ter. for qui mihi sum carior, in which the neuter gender 
 is used for the masculine. Romantts. Scotus, Gallus y for Romani, 
 
330 
 
 Scotiy Galii, in which the singular is used for the plural. Colla, 
 corda, ora, &c. are used among the poets, for Collum, cor, os, &c. 
 Thus also nos and nosier for ego and meus. 
 
 2. In the Verb, the Indicative is used for the Subjunctive ; as, 
 Me truncus iUapsus cerebro sustulerat Hor. for sustulisset. For 
 the Imperative : as, Tu hoc silebisCic. for sile. For the Infini- 
 tive: as, Verum ego ilium, spero mutari potest Plaut. for posse. 
 The Subjunctive for the Indicative: as, Ubisocordice te atqueig- 
 namce tradideris, nequidquam deos implores Sail, for implorabis. 
 For the Imperative : as, quiescas for quiesce Ter. and passim. 
 The Imperative for the Indicative: as, Si fcctura gregem supple- 
 ment , aureus esto Virg. form's. The Infinitive for the Imperfect 
 of the Indicative: as, Facile omnes perferre ac pati Ter. tor per- 
 ferebat nc patiebatur. For the Subjunctive : as, Bona censuerunt 
 reddi Liv. for ut redde'rentur . 
 
 In regard to the Time, the Present for the Imperfect: as, Tu 
 si hie sis, alitcr sentias Ter. for esses, sentires. For the Preter- 
 ite : as, Quamdudum in portum vents? Plaut for vcnisti. For 
 the Future of the same mood, or of a different : as, Quam mox 
 navigo Ephesum Plaut. for navigabo. Quern neque gloria, neque 
 pericula excitant, nequidquam hortere Sail, for hortaberis. The 
 Imperfect for the Present : as, Persuadet Castico, ut regnum occu- 
 paret Caes. for occupet. For the Pluperfect : as, Neque diutius 
 NumidcE resistere quivissent, nipedites cum equitibus permixti mag- 
 nam cladem in congressu facerent Sail, for fecissent. The Per- 
 fect for the Present : as. Magnum si pectore posset Excussisse deum 
 Virg for excutere. For the Pluperfect: as, Jam flammce. tule~ 
 rint, inimicus et hauserit ensis Virg. for tulissent and hausisset. 
 For the Future : as, Si hoc bene jixurn omnibus destinatumque in 
 animo est, vicistis Liv. for vincetis. The Perfect Subjunctive 
 for the Future Indicative : as, Sipaululum modo quidtefugerit, ego 
 perierim Ter. for peribo. The Pluperfect for the Imperfect : as, 
 Si saniora consilia pati potuisset, contentus patrio cederet alieni i?n- 
 periijinibus Curt, for posset. The Future for the Present : as, 
 Verbum hercle hoc verum erit Ter. for est. Respiraro, si te vi- 
 deroCic. for respirabo. For the Imperative : as, Luant peccata ; 
 neque illos Juveris auxilio Virg. forjuvafo ovjuves. 
 
 The Singular number for the Plural: as, Qua? loca Numidia 
 appellatur Sail, for appellantur The Plural for the Singular : 
 as, Moloni Rhodio dedimus operam Cic. for dedi. The First 
 person used indefinitely for the Third: as, Aberatea regio L. stadia 
 ab aditu quo Ciliciam intramus Curt for homines intrant. The 
 Second for the First, when any one accosts himself, as if another : 
 as, Impia quid dubitas Dei.anira mori? Ovid, for ego dubito. 
 Used also indefinitely for the Third: as, Fidelem haudfernie mu- 
 lieri invenias virum Ter. for quis inveniat. The Third for the 
 First: as, Si quis me qucerct rufus. DA. Prccsto est -Ter. for 
 
 a'sto sum, for the person himself speaketh. 
 
 Antfptosif uses one case for another: thus, 1. The Nominative 
 
331 
 
 for the Accusative: as, Uxor invicti Jovis esse nescis Hor. for 
 te esse uxorem For the Vocative : as, Adsis Icctilite Bacchus dator 
 Virg for Bacche. 2. The Genitive for the Nominative: as, 
 Expediti militum Liv. for milites. For the Dative : as, Ut civi- 
 tates Asite, quce Attali stipendiarieejuissent, Eitmeni vectigaL pen- 
 derent Liv. for Attalo. 3. The Dative for the Nominative: as, 
 Cut mine cognomen lulo Virg. for lulus. For the Genitive: as, 
 Cui dextra trisulcis Ignibus armata est Ovid, for cujus. For the 
 Accusative : as, Nobis non licet esse tain disertis Mart, for disertos. 
 For the Ablative with a or ab : as, Neque cernitur ulli Virg. for 
 ab idlo. 4. The Accusative for the Nominative : as, Meam uxorem, 
 Libane, nescis qualis siet Plaut. for nescis qualis sit mea uxor. 
 For the Dative : as, Ut anna sua qidsque stantes incumberent 
 Sail, for armis suis. For the Ablative: as, Omnia Mer curio si- 
 mills V"irg. for in omnibus. 5. The Vocative for the Nomina- 
 tive : as, Quibus Hector ab oris Expectate venis? Virg. for ex- 
 pectatus. 6. The Ablative for the Dative : as, Aliquo negotio in- 
 tentus Sail, for alicui negotio. For the Accusative: as, Scepc suo 
 victor lenis in hostefuit Ovid, for in hostem. 
 
 Synesis is, when the construction refers to the sense, rather 
 than to the precise nature of a word : thus, 1. As to Gender : as, 
 Scelus postquam ludificatus est virginem Ter. for scelestus. 2 
 Number: as, Clamor inde concursusque popitli, mirantium quid 
 rei est-\Av. for mirantis. 3. As to both : as, Pars in crucem acti 
 
 pars bestiis objecti Sail, for acta, objecta. Note Sometimes, 
 
 two verbs referring to the same collective noun, one is put in the 
 singular and the other in the plural : as, Pars stupet innuptce do- 
 num exitiale Minerva, Et molem mirantur equi Virg, 
 
 Synesis is divided into the explicit and the implicit. The expli- 
 cit is, when the noun is expressed to which the verb or adjective 
 refers, although it does not agree with it, but with some other of 
 the same sense, as in the preceding examples. The implicit is, 
 when the substantive is not expressed, but is implied in the adjec- 
 tive going before : as, Id mea minime rejert, qui sum natu maxi- 
 mus Ter. in which qui refers to ego included in mea. 
 
 Anacoluthon is when the Consequents do not agree with the An- 
 tecedents : as, Nam nos omnes^ quibus est alicunde aliquis objcdus 
 labos, omne quod est interea tempus, priusquam id rescitum est, 
 lucro est Ter. in which the author began, as if he intended to 
 say lucro habemus. and ended as if he had said nobis omnibus. As 
 the sentence is, there is no verb to which nos omnes is a nomi- 
 native. 
 
 Hellenismus, or Gra'cismus, is an imitation of Greek construc- 
 tion ; thus, 1. When with Substantives of a different Gender an 
 Adjective is used in the Neuter gender, as, Triste lupus stabulis 
 Virg. 2. When after certain Adjectives and Verbs, a Genitive is 
 used: as, Pr&stans animi. Abstine irarumllov. 3. When after 
 verbs of contending of distance, of coming together, and of ward- 
 ing off. a Dative is used: as, Solus tibi ccrtct Awyntas Virg. 
 4. When the Accusative^ instead of the Nominative, is joined t > 
 
332 
 
 the verb referring to the whole of the subsequentpartof the sentence : 
 as, Ego tejaciam ut miser sis Plant, forfaciam ut tu. 5. When 
 the Nominative, instead of the Accusative, is used after esse, and 
 similar infinitives : as, Acceptum refero versibus esse nocens Ovid. 
 for me esse nocentem. 6. When the Dative, answering to the an- 
 tecedent, is used with the verb esse, and the like, instead of the 
 Accusative : as, Penelope licet esse tibi sub Principe NervaMart. 
 for Penelopen. 7. When to Nouns is added an Infinitive, the Latin 
 language requiring a different form of expression : as, Fruges con- 
 sumere nati Hor. for ad fruges consumendas. 8. When the 
 accusative of part, or of the adjunct, is used after Adjectives 
 or Verbs: as, Fractus membra Hor. Expleri mentem Virg. 
 9. When the neuter gender of Adjectives is used adverbially: as, 
 Accrba tuens Virg. for acerbe. 10. To Greek construction may 
 be referred such ellipses as Urbem quam"statuo vestra est Virg. 
 for urbs quam (urbem). 11. The following expressions of Horace 
 may be considered as Graecisms : Mammce putres, Equina quales 
 ubera, for qualia. Also, Animce quales neque candidiores Terra 
 tidit, for qualibus. To Hellenism may likewise be referred many 
 of those changes noticed under Heterosis and Antiptosis. 
 
 Archaism is when an obsolete construction is used : as, Quid 
 tibi hanc curatio est rem Plaut. When Utor, abutor, fruor, go- 
 vern an accusative. When the Future Participle active, and per- 
 fect passive, are used as ir.declinables, with esse : as, Hanc sibi 
 rem prcesidio sperant Juturum Cic. Likewise when such ex- 
 pressions are used as Absente nobis, Prcesente testibus. 
 
 OF HYPERBATON. 
 
 Hyperbaton is, in a general sense, a transgression of the com- 
 mon order and position of words or sentences. There are seven 
 kinds of it ; viz., Anastrophe, Hysteron proteron, Hypallage, Syn- 
 chysis, Tmesis, Parenthesis, and Hyperbaton, strictly so called. 
 
 Anastrophe is the placing of those words last (chiefly preposi- 
 tions), which ought to precede : as, mccum for cum me, Collo dare 
 brachia circum Virg. for circumdare. 
 
 Hysteron proteron changes the natural order of the sense : as, 
 Valet at q ue vivit Ter. 
 
 Hypallage is an interchange of cases : as, Dare classibus Austros 
 
 Virg. for Dare classes Austris. 
 
 Synchysis is a confused arrangement of words : as, Saxa vocant 
 It ali mediis Quce injiuctibus Aras Virg. for quee saxa in mcdiis 
 Jiuctibus It ali oocant Aras. 
 
 Tmesis divides a compound word : as, Per mihi gratumjeceris 
 
 Cic. f o r pergratum . 
 
 Parenthesis is an interruption of the sense, by the insertion of 
 some word, or words : as, Tityrc, dum redeo, (brevis est via,)pasce 
 capellas Virg. 
 
 Hyperbaton, strictly so named, is, when the principal verb in 
 a sentence is put at rather a great distance from its nominative : as, 
 
Si 
 
 Interea reges : ingenti mole Latinus 
 Quadrijugo vehitur curru, cui tempora circum 
 Aurati bis sex radii Julgentia cingunt, 
 Solis am specimen : bigis it Turnus in albis, 
 Bina manu lato crispans hastilia ferro : 
 Hinc pater JEneas Romans stirpis origo, 
 Sidereojlagrans clypeo et ccelestibus armis ; 
 Etjuxta Ascanius magnce spes altera Romce : 
 Procedunt castris ------- Virg. 
 
 in which, between the nominative reges and the verb procedunt, 
 there are seven whole verses and a hemistich : in some editions, 
 however, the period is concluded at ferro, vehuntur being su}> 
 posed understood after reges ; so that JEneas and Ascanius are 
 then considered as the only nominatives to procedunt. 
 
 I shall conclude this explanation of the figures of syntax with 
 a brief account of the principal 
 
 TROPES AND FIGURES OF RHETORIC '. 
 
 A Trope is the elegant turning of a word, for the sake of illus- 
 tration, from its natural and genuine sense, to one that is relative 
 or secondary. 
 
 A Figure conveys some beauty, or expresses some passion, by 
 a mode of speaking different from, and more beautiful and em- 
 phatical than, the usual way of expressing the same sense. 
 
 PRIMARY TROPES. 
 
 1. A Metaphor is a simile without formal comparison, and puts 
 a word of likeness for the proper word : as, Cceptis aspirate Ovid. 
 i. e.favete. 
 
 2. A Metonymy changes names, or puts a noun of relation in- 
 stead of the proper word ; as the cause for the effect, the subject 
 for the adjunct, the antecedent for the consequent, &c. : as, Mars 
 for bellum ; Lyceus for vinum. Implentur veteris Bacchi Virg., 
 old wine. 
 
 3. Synecdoche puts the whole for the part, or vice versa: it like- 
 wise confounds the singular and plural : as, Animaque litandum 
 Argolica Virg. for homine Argolico. Armato milite complent 
 Virg. for militibus armatis. 
 
 4. Irony or Dissimulation thinks one thing and expresses another, 
 yet so that the real meaning may be discovered ; thus it blames 
 when it seems to commend, commends when it seems to blame, 
 &c. : as, salve, bone custos, curasti probe ! Ter. You have 
 taken extraordinary care, my trusty keeper ! Egregiam vero lau- 
 dem et spolia ampla refertis, Tuque puerque tuus Virg. 
 
 1 The tropes and figures properly belong to the art. of Rhetoric ; yet, as 
 they may be classed under that branch of syntax which is called Jignrative, it 
 i* not inconsistent with the nature of grammar to give some account n>f them. 
 
334 
 
 SECONDARY TROPES. 
 
 These are so named because they may, generally, be compre- 
 hended under the primary tropes. 
 
 1. Catachresis is a bolder or harsher metaphor, as when we say 
 a Wooden tombstone, a Glass inkhorn, &c. : Vir gregis ipse caper 
 deerraverat Virg. The husband of the flock, i. e. dux gregis. 
 
 2. Hyperbole magnifies or lessens beyond the strict bounds of 
 credibility : as, Rivers of blood. Candidior cycnis Virg. Ocyor 
 Euro Virg. 
 
 3. Metalepsis is the advance, or continuation of a trope, through 
 successive significations : as, Post aliquot aristas Virg. in which 
 arista (a beard of corn) is put for seges, seges for messis, and mes- 
 sis for annus, i. e. after some years. Hinc movet Euphrates, illinc 
 Germania bellum Virg. in which Euphrates is put for Mesopo- 
 tamia, which is washed by it, and Mesopotamia for the inhabitants. 
 
 4-. Allegory is a chain of tropes : as, Claudite jam rivos, pueri, 
 sat prata biberunt Virg. Swains, stop now your streams, the 
 meadows have drunk their fill, i. e. Leave off' your songs, there 
 has been sufficient entertainment. 
 
 5. Antonomasia puts a proper name for a, common one, and 
 vice versa ; as when we call a debauched person, a Sardanapalus ; 
 a grave man, a Cato ; a poor man, an lints, a beggarly attendant 
 on Penelope's suitors. Irus et est subito, qui modo Croesus erat 
 Ovid. 
 
 6. Litotes affirms more strongly, by denying the contrary : as, 
 Non laudo Ter. 1 blame you much. Est qui nee veteris pocula 
 Massici spernit Hor. There are persons fond of a glass of old 
 Massic wine. 
 
 7. Onomatopoeia coins words from sound : as rush, squeak, hiss, 
 crash. Thus also in Latin, arma stridentia ; tinnitus aeris ; rugitus 
 leonum; grunnitus porcorum, c. 
 
 8. Antiphrasis is a species of irony depending upon one word, 
 names being given contrary to the nature of the things, as calling 
 a dwarf 'a giant ; a grove lucus, because, perhaps, non lucet. 
 
 9. Charientismus gives soft words for harsh : as, Bona verba 
 qutzso Ter. 
 
 10. Asteismus is a witty jest, or facetious jeer : as, Qui Bavium 
 non odit, amet tua carmina, Mcevi ; Atque idem jungat vulpes et 
 midgeat hircos Virg. Who hates not Bavius, may it be his curse 
 to love thy verses, Msevius ; and may the same person yoke foxes, 
 and milk he-goats. 
 
 11. Diasyrmus reflects upon a living enemy : as, Si cantas, male 
 cantas ; si legis, cantas Quintil. 
 
 12. Sarcasmus insults any one in a malicious manner : as, Iver- 
 bis virtutem illude superbis Virg. 
 
 13. Parcemia is a proverbial form of expression: as, Many 
 hands make light work. Lupum auribus teneo Ter. I know not 
 how to act. 
 
 14. ^Enigma is a sort of obscure allegory., or an ingenious riddle: 
 
335 
 
 as, Die quibus in ierris, et eris mihi magnus Apollo^ Tres paleat 
 cceli spatium non amplius ulnas Virg. 
 
 EIGURES LYING IN THE LANGUAGE. 
 
 1. Antanaclasis is the use of the same word in different senses: 
 as, Quis neget Mnece natum de stirpe Neronem ? Sustulit hie ma- 
 trem, sustidit ille patrem Epigr. The latter took off (that is 
 killed) his mother; the former 4ook off (affectionately removed 
 from danger) his father. Let the dead bury their dead Matt. viii. 
 22. i. e. them that are dead in sin, bury those that are naturally 
 dead, or lifeless. 
 
 2. Place is the repetition of a proper name, or of another noun, 
 in a way in which the quality of the subject is denoted : as, His 
 wife is a wife indeed. Ex illo Cory don, Cory don est tempore no- 
 bis Virg. 
 
 3. Anaphora begins different sentences, or clauses of the same 
 sentence, with the same word : as, He pines, he sickens, he de- 
 spairs, he dies Add. Cato. Te, dulcis conjux, Te, solo in littore 
 secum ; Te, veniente die, Te, decedente, canebat Virg. 
 
 4. Epistrophe is a repetition of the same word, at the end of 
 different sentences or clauses : as, Are they Hebrews ? so am I. 
 Are they Israelites ? so am I 2 Cor. xi. 22. Namque ego, crede 
 mihi, si te quoque pontus haberet ; Te sequerer, conjux, et me quo- 
 quepontus haberet Ovid. It is sometimes called Epiphora. 
 
 5. Symploce is a complication of the two last, beginning the 
 several clauses with one word, and ending them with another : as, 
 Quis legem tulit ? Rullus : Quis majorem populi partem siiffragiis 
 
 privamt? Rullus: Quis comitiis prcefuit? Idem Rullus Cic. 
 
 6. Epanalepsis begins and ends a sentence with the same word : 
 as, Rejoice in the Lord alway, and again I say, rejoice Phil. iv. 4. 
 Multa super Priamo rogitans, super Hectore multa Virg. 
 
 7. Anadiplosis ends one clause, and begins another, with the 
 same words : as, For whether we live, we live unto the Lord ; and 
 whether we die, we die unto the Lord Rom. xiv. 8. Quamdiu 
 quisquam erit, qui te defendere audeat, vives : et vives, ita ut nunc 
 
 Cic. Hie tamen vivit: Vivit? imo vero etiam in senatum 
 
 ve?iit Cic. 
 
 8. Epanados repeats in an inverted order the same words, in a 
 second clause : as, Crudelis mater magis, an puer improbus ille ? 
 Improbus ille puer, crudelis tu quoque, mater Virg. 
 
 9. Epizeuxis repeats the same word, for the sake of emphasis: 
 as, Ah Corydon, Corydon, quce te dementia cepit Virg. Excitate, 
 excitate eum, si potestis, ab inferis Cic. 
 
 10. Climax is an amplification by steps, in which each part of a 
 sentence, arising above the former, begins with the conclusion of 
 the former, and in this respect it is a continued Anadiplosis : as, 
 Quce reliqua spes manet libertatis, si illis et quod libet, licet ; et 
 quod licet, possunt ; et quod po&sunt, audent ; et quod audent, vo- 
 
33(5 
 
 Us molestum non est Cic. When the sense advances without a 
 strict climax, it is called Incrementum ; when the sense is gradu- 
 ally heightened, it is called Anabasis ; and when it falls or de- 
 creases, Catabasis. 
 
 1 1 . Polyptoton uses the same word in different cases : as, Jam 
 clypeus cli/peis, umbone repellitur umbo ; ense minax e?isis, pedepes, 
 et cuspide cuspis Stat. The same kind of figure may be applied 
 to genders and tenses. 
 
 12. Paregmenon uses several words of the same origin, in one 
 sentence : as, Abesse non potest, quin ejusdem hominis sit, qui im- 
 probos probet, probos improbare Cic. 
 
 13. Paronomasia plays upon the sound of words : as, Who 
 dares greatly, dies greatly. Amor et melle etfelle estfcecundissi- 
 mus Plaut. Tibi parata erunt verba, huic verbera Ter. 
 
 14. Homoioteleuton ends several clauses, with the same sound : 
 as, Ccesar, dando, sublevando, ignoscendo, gloriam adeptus est 
 Sail. 
 
 15 Parachesis, or Alliteration, uses letters or syllables of the 
 same sound : as, Neu patrice validas in viscera veiiite vires Virg. 
 The various kinds of alliteration will be noticed under the remarks 
 on the Hexameter verse. 
 
 FIGURES LYING IN THE SENTIMENT. 
 
 1. For Proof. 
 
 usly ex- 
 
 1 . JEtiologia assigns a reason for a proposition previous _ 
 pressed : as, Spcrne voluptates : nocet empta dolore voluptas Hor. 
 
 2. Inversion, or the turning of an argument, is when an orator 
 makes that for his own advantage which was alleged against him: 
 as, Atfratres meos, inquit, quod erant conscii, in vincula conjecit : 
 cum, igitur, eos vinciret, quos secum habebat ; te solutum Romam 
 mittebat, qui eadem scires qua. illos scire dicis Cic. 
 
 3. Prolepsis anticipates objections : as : Verum anceps pugnce 
 f uerat fortuna : fuisset : Quern, metui moritura ? Virg. The ob- 
 jection is called Hypophora. The answer is called Anthypophora : 
 and if the objection is turned against the adversary, it is named, 
 as in the last, Inversion or Antistrophe. 
 
 4. Epitrope, or Concession, concedes a point to an adversary, 
 in order to confute him more effectuall}' : as, Sint^sane, quoniam 
 ita se mores habent, liberates ex sociorumjbrtunis; sint misericordes 
 infuribus ccrarii : ne illi sanguinem nostrum largiantur Sail. 
 
 5. Mimesis refutes an adversary by repeating his own arguments, 
 with a sneer, as unworthy of a *serious answer : as, Nunc augur 
 Apollo, nunc Lydce sortes, mine et Jove missus ab ipso Interpres 
 Divumjert horridajussa per auras Virg. 
 
 2. For Explanation. 
 1 . Paradiastole, or Contra-distinction, explains more forcibly 
 
 
337 
 
 by comparing opposites : as, Non sapiens, sed asiutus. Non for- 
 mosus erat, scd eratfacundus Ulysses Ovid. 
 
 2. Antimetabole or Antimetatkesis is a kind of Epanados, repeat- 
 ing opposites in an inverted order : as, Poetna est pictura loquens, 
 mutum pictura poema. Vide Hor. Art. Poet. 361. 
 
 3. Antithesis places contraries in opposition to each other : as, 
 Fiectere si nequeo superos, Acheronta movebo Virg. Hujus oratio- 
 jiis difficilius est exitum quam principium mvenire Cic. 
 
 4. Oxymoron is a seeming contradiction, uniting contraries toge- 
 ther: as, Concordia discors Hor. Cum tacent, clamant Cic. 
 Shu is dead, while she liveth 1 Tim. v. 6. 
 
 3. Hypotyposis gives a lively image or description : as, Obstu- 
 pui, steteruntque comae, et vox faucibus hcesit Virg. 
 
 6. Dialyton, or Asyndeton, omits conjunctions: as, Ferte cili 
 flammas^ date vela, impellite remos Virg. The want of the con- 
 junction denotes celerity of action. See Ellipsis. 
 
 7. Polysyndeton is the reverse of the last, being the use of many 
 conjunctions : as, Somnus, enim, et vinum, et epulce, et scoria, bal~ 
 neaque, corpora atque animos enervarunt Liv r . See Pleonasm, 
 
 8. Gnome is a general sentiment properly introduced : as, /m- 
 lellium est, verbis non armis, lellum gerere. 
 
 9. Noema is an elegant application of such a sentiment to a par- 
 ticular purpose : as, Athenienses quidem literis verbisque lellum ad- 
 versut Philippum gerebant Liv. 
 
 10. Epitheton, or Epithet, is an adjective joined elegantly to a 
 substantive, for the purpose of expressing some peculiar circum- 
 stance : as, Arma diu senior desueta trernentibus cevo Circumdat ne- 
 quicquam humeris et inutile Jerrum Cingitur Virg. 
 
 3. For Amplification. 
 
 1. Incrementum is an amplification without a strict climax, rising 
 or decreasing in terms of increasing energy : as, Facinus est vincire 
 civem Romanum ; scelus verberare ; prope parricidium necare ; quid 
 dicam in crucem tollere ? Cic. 
 
 2. Synonymia uses different words, or forms of expression, 
 having the same import : as, Quern si fata virum servant, si vesci- 
 tur aura jEtherea, neque adhuc crudelibus occubat umbris Virg. 
 for if he liveth. 
 
 3. Paralipns pretends to omit a charge, in order, thereby, to 
 render it more observed ; as, Nonne eliam alio incredibili scelere 
 hoc scelus cumuldsti ? quod ego prcetermitto et facile patior sileri ; 
 ne in hac civitate tanti fadnoris immanitas aul extitisse aut non vin- 
 dicata esse videatur Cic. 
 
 4. Periphrasis uses many words in description, where fewer 
 would be sufficient, often expressing an object by circumstances ; 
 as, Fabricator mundi, for Deus. I must put off' this tabernacle 
 2 Pet. i. 14?. that is, / must die. Et jam summa procul villarum 
 culmina fumant, Majoresque cadunt altis de montibusumbrce -Virg. 
 for it is near sunset. 
 
 z 
 
5. Paradigma draws a comparison from some historical exam- 
 ple: as, Saxa et solitudines voci respondent ; lestice scepe immanes 
 cantuflectuntur aique consistunl : nos instiluti rebus optimis non potf- 
 tarum voce moveamur ? Cic. 
 
 6. Parabola, or Simile, enforces an argument by a judicious 
 comparison : as, Repente enim te, tanquam serpent e latibulis, oculis 
 eminentibus, inflate collo, tumidis cervicilus, intulisti Cic. 
 
 7. Merismus, or Epimerismus, instead of mentioning the whole, 
 enumerates the parts : as, Senatus odit te; videre te equites Roma- 
 ni non possunt j plebs Romana perditum cupit : Italia cuncta exse- 
 cratur Cic. 
 
 8. Diapkora illustrates by comparing or contrasting things un- 
 like : as, Dissimilis est pecuniec debitio et gratice : nam qui pecu- 
 niam dissolvit, statim non habet id, quod reddidit ; qui autem delet, 
 is retinet alienum : gratiam autem et qui refert, habet; et qui habet, 
 in eo ipso quod habet, refert Cic. 
 
 4-. Pathetic Figures. 
 
 1. Erotesis, or Interrogation, asks a question in an earnest or 
 urgent manner : as, Creditis avectos hostes ? aut ulla putatis Dona 
 carere dolis Danaum ? sic notus Ulysses ? Virg. 
 
 2. Ecphonesis, or Exclamation, shows some violent transport of 
 the mind : as, My God ! My God ! why hast thou forsaken me ? 
 Matth. xxvii. 46. O tempora ! O mores ! 
 
 3. Epanorthosis, or Correction, recalls a word, in order to place 
 a stronger or more significant one in its stead : as, Filium unicum 
 adolescenlulum habeo: ah! quid dixi? me habere? Imo habui 
 Ter. 
 
 4-. Aposiopesis, or Suppression, leaves the sentence unfinished, 
 through some violent agitation of mind : as, Quos ego sed prce- 
 stat motos componere Jluctus Virg. 
 
 5. Epiphonema, or Acclamation, is a grave reflection on some- 
 thing said before : as, Tantcene animis coelestibu sires ? Virg. Tan- 
 turn Relligio potuit suadere malorum ! Lucret. 
 
 6. dnaccenosis, or Communication, is, when, relying on the ex- 
 pediency or merits of the cause, a forcible appeal is made to the 
 adversary's own conscience : as, Si vos in eo loco essetis, quid aliud 
 fecissetis Cic. 
 
 7. Aporia doubts what is to be said or done : as, Quos accedam, 
 aut quos appellem ? Nationesne an reges Sail. Revocat; redeam ? 
 non, si me obsecret Ter. When a Figure thus objects and an- 
 swers, it is said to be in Dialogismo -, otherwise in Logismo. Apo- 
 ria is sometimes named Diaporesis. 
 
 8. Apostrophe, or Aversio, is, when, to excite strong attention, 
 the narrative is interrupted by an appeal suddenly made to some 
 person or thing : as, Vi potitur : Quid non mortalia cogis r Auri sa- 
 cra fames Virg. 
 
 9. Prosopopoeia, or Personification, represents inanimate objects 
 as living and speaking. Thus Ovid introduces the Earth saying to 
 
339 
 
 Jupiter, Hosne mihi fructus, hunc fertilitatis honoretn, Officiique 
 refers, &c. According to this figure, an absent person may be 
 introduced speaking, or one who is dead, as if he were alive and 
 present. This and the preceding figure are sometimes conjoined : 
 as, Trojaque nunc stares ; Priamique arx alia maneres Virg. 
 
 Other jfgureS) less common, and of inferior note, might be enu- 
 merated ; instead of which a few general remarks shall be 
 added, on the beauties and blemishes of style. 
 
 1 . Purity of style is violated chiefly by a Barbarism or a Sole- 
 cisnt. Barbarism is the use of a word not Latin ; as stavi instead 
 ofsteti, the preterite of sto. Solecism is a construction contrary 
 to the rules of syntax ; as, Acuta gladius : Faveo te : Scrilo cum 
 calamo. It is further violated by Archaism, Neoterism, and Idi- 
 otism. Archaism is the use of obsolete words or constructions ; and 
 has been already noticed. Neoterism is the use of words or phrases 
 not used by authors living in the best ages of Latinity ; as brevia- 
 rium instead of summarium ; usualis for solitus or vulgaris : Ple- 
 num vino: Adulari alicui; instead of which the best writers used 
 Plenum vlni : Adulari aliquem. Jdiotism is the use of words or 
 phrases not purely Latin, but conformable to the usage or idioms 
 of other languages. 
 
 2. Perspicuity of language requires that it should be clear and 
 intelligible, and free from ambiguity and amphibology in words 
 and construction ; such as HeriJUius ad me venit. Aio te, &aci* 
 da, Romanes v'mcere posse. 
 
 3. Equality of language consists in using neither more nor fewer 
 words than the subject requires. When the same thing is repeat- 
 ed in different words, this error is called Tautology: as, Ipse egomet 
 venio. Where a superfluous addition is made, it is called Perisso- 
 logy : as, Ibant qua poterant ; qua non poterant non ibant. Tapi- 
 nosis is saying less than the subject requires : as, Saxea verrucca in 
 svmmo montis vertice. 
 
 4-. Propriety uses suitable words. This is violated by Acyrolo- 
 gia or Catachresis; as sperare for timere, in Juvenal, Jam quar- 
 tanam sperantibus cegris. Vir gregis ipse caper Virg. vir being 
 applicable only to the human species. 
 
 5. Harmony consists in the use of such letters and syllables as 
 are grateful to the ear. This is destroyed by Cacophaton or the dis- 
 agreeable position or repetition of letters ; as conlaudo for collaudo. 
 Sola mihi tales casus Cassandra canebat Virg. in which ca is thrice 
 repeated ; and by Cacosyntheton, or a bad arrangement of the words : 
 as, Fersdque juvencum Terga fatigamus hastd Virg. 
 
 6. Simplicity consists in the avoiding of affectation. It is op- 
 posed by Cacozelia, or an excessive desire of elegance ; as in Au- 
 reus axis era/, temo aureus, aurea summce Curvatura rota?, radio- 
 rum argenteus ordo Ovid. 
 
 Z2 
 
3*0 
 
 OF PROSODY. 
 
 PROSODY is defined to be that part of Grammar, which 
 treats of the quantity of Syllables ! ; of their tone or accent ; 
 and of Versification. 
 
 THE QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES. 
 
 By the quantity of a syllable is meant, the duration or 
 continuance of the voice, in pronouncing it. 
 
 A syllable is either short, long, or common. 
 
 A short syllable is sounded rapidly, like the a in the En- 
 glish word orator, or the e in the Latin word legere ; and 
 is thus marked, orator, legere. 
 
 A long syllable is pronounced slowly, and occupies twice 
 the time used in pronouncing a short one, as in the a of the 
 English word mediator, or of the Latin word orator ,- and 
 is thus marked, mediator, orator. 
 
 A common or doubtful syllable may be made long or 
 short, at the option of the poet, as in the first syllable of 
 patres, or the middle syllable of tenebrce and volucris, which 
 are pronounced either patres or patres ; tembrac or tenebrces 
 voliicris or volucris : and when they are marked as common 
 
 1 The quantity of syllables merits the chief attention. The ac- 
 cents are little attended to, being now used chiefly in a way, in 
 which they denote the distinction of words, or the difference of 
 quantities, rather than variation of tone ; but the common rules 
 for placing them will hereafter be given. The question has been 
 much agitated lately, whether Latin poetry should be read chiefly 
 according to quantity, or accent j and it is as yet very far from 
 being determined. Some, however, seem in favour of reading 
 by quantity j while others, perhaps not without reason, incline 
 to the opinion, that quantity may be observed, without the utter 
 neglect of accents, the observance of which, they contend, pro- 
 duced, both in the Greek and Roman languages, the same me- 
 trical effect as those prominent syllables (which are commonly 
 called accented) do in the English language, and in other mo- 
 dern languages. But, as Quintillian observes of accents, Exem- 
 pla eorum tradi scripto non possunt. 
 
341 
 
 or doubtful, it is done by a conjunction of the two preceding 
 marks, thus patres^ teiiebrce, vofucris. In prose, however, 
 these are short. 
 
 The quantity of a syllable is either natural, that is, depen- 
 dent on the intrinsic nature of the vowel itself, as the re of 
 ?'esisto, in which the e is short by nature ; or accidental, as 
 the re in restiti, which becomes long, because it happens to 
 be followed by two consonants. 
 
 The quantity of syllables is determined by certain esta- 
 blished rules, or, when they fail, by the authority of the poets. 
 
 Rules are either General, that is, applicable to all syllables, 
 whether first, middle, or last; or Special, that is, applicable 
 to particular syllables. 
 
 GENERAL RULES. 
 RULE I. 
 
 A VOWEL BEFORE A VOWEL. 
 
 A vowel before another (or, which is the same thing, 
 before an h followed by a vowel, or before a diphthong) in 
 words of Latin origin, is short : as, piier, nihil, egregitz. 
 
 O Melibcee, deus nobis haec otia fecit Virg. 
 
 De nihilo nihil, in nihilum nil posse reverti Pers. 
 
 Ipse etiam eximta laudis succensus amore Virg. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. The i ofjio is long, when it is not followed by e and 
 r ; asfiuntyftebant 1 . 
 
 Omnia jam f tent, fieri quae posse negabam Ovid. 
 
 2. The e of the genitive and dative of the fifth declension, 
 when it comes between double i, is long ; as faciei. 
 
 Ventum erat ad Vestaa quarta jam parte diei Hor. 
 It is sometimes found long, when not preceded by i; as 
 Ipsius rei rationem reddere possis Lucret. 
 Ille vir haud magna cum re, sed pl&nu'Jidei Ennius. 
 These cases were probably written either e - i or ei - i ; 
 hence the different quantities. 
 
 1 In some lines it is long, when, by the general rule, it should 
 be short ; Injurium est, nam si esset, unde idfieret, 
 
 Faceremus. Ter. 
 
3. The i is common in genitives in ius ; but the i of al- 
 terim is always short, of alius always long ! . 
 
 Uriius ob noxam, et furias Ajacis, Oi'lei Virg. 
 Navibus (infandum !) amissis, uriius ob iram Virg. 
 
 4. The penultimate (or last syllable but one) is long in 
 aural, aula'i, terra'i, and other old genitives of the first de- 
 clension ; and the a or e before i is long in proper names in 
 ams or ems, as Cams, Pompeius (probably written originally 
 with a double i}, as also in Grams, Ve'ius, &c. 
 
 j^Ethereum sensum, atque aurai simplicis ignem Virg. 
 Accipe, Pompet, deductum carmen ab illo Ovid. 
 Per vigil in pltima Caius, ecce, jacet Mart. 
 
 5. Aer, Dius, eheu, and, in general, Io, a proper name, 
 have the first syllable long. Ohe and the interjection io 
 have their first common. 
 
 Proximus est der illi levitate, locoque Ovid. 
 
 ^ si Candida jusserit Io Juv. 
 
 Ohe ! jam satis est, ohe, libelle Mart. 
 
 Quas tibl causa fugae ? quid, Io, freta longa pererras ? 
 Ovid. 
 
 For Greek words it is impossible to give a certain rule. In 
 many the first vowel is short; as in Danae, idea, sopMa, 
 Simois, H jades, prosodia, symphonia. In many it is long; 
 as in Lycdon, Sperchlus, Achelous, Enyo. 
 
 1. Words ending in ais, eis, and ois, generally lengthen 
 the first vowel, as Ndis, Briseis, Hindis ; in aius, eius, and 
 oius, as Grains, Cdius, Nere'ius, Pompeius, Minoms, Troms : 
 in aon and ion, as Machdon, Ixlon s the compounds of Aaof, 
 
 as Ldodice, Laertes, Arclielaus. But Thebais, Plicion, Aon, 
 Deucalion, Pygmalion, and many others, shorten the former 
 vowel. In Ner~eis, Orwn and Gerybn it is said to be com- 
 mon; but Orion is long, although, in Greek, sometimes short. 
 Geryon is short. 
 
 Troius ^Eneas Libycis ereptus ab undis Virg. 
 
 2. Greek genitives in eos, and accusatives in ea, from 
 nominatives in eus, generally shorten the e -, as, Orpheos, 
 Orphea, but these may be lengthened by the Ionic dialect, 
 thus Orpheos, Orphea, Ilionea. 
 
 1 Solius, alterutrius, and neutrius are said to be generally long 
 in approved authors. For alius, see R. IV. There is a sufficient 
 reason for the long quantity of alius, but I know of none for the 
 constant short quantity of alterius. It occurs long in Terent. 
 Maurus, and Ennius, and is probably common, like the others. 
 But allerms would be inadmissible in a dactvlic verse. 
 
343 
 
 Jlionea petit dextra Virg* 
 
 Idomenea ducem --------- Virg. 
 
 3. Those words which, in the Greek language, are writ- 
 ten with 13 or co, are long; as De'iphobus, Deianira, Troe's, 
 heroicus, &c. Eos and eous have their first common, be- 
 cause written either with >j or e ; and are generally long at 
 the beginning of a line, and short at the end. 
 
 Deiphobum vidit lacerum crudeliter ora Virg. 
 
 Portus ab eoo fluctu Virg. gentes aperi- 
 
 mus eoas Lucan. 
 
 4. Those words which, in Greek, are written with ei be- 
 fore a vowel, and in Latin with e or i 9 have the e or i long; 
 as, JEneas, Cassiopea, Cytharea, Centaurea, Penclopea, Ga- 
 latea, Laodicea, Medea, Mausoleum. Also, Basillus, Darius, 
 Clio, Elegia, litanla, politla, &c. Chorda, platea, Malea, 
 canopeum, Dicma, and perhaps acadeima, are common. 
 
 At pater JEneas casu concussus acerbo Virg. 
 
 Non mihi sunt visae Clio, Cllusve sorores Ovid. 
 duxere choreas Ovid. 
 
 Pars pedibus plaudunt choreas Virg. 
 
 There are no rules for the quantities of foreign or barba- 
 rous words introduced into the Latin language. Prudentius 
 lengthens the first a in Baal, Sedulius shortens it. Sido- 
 nius lengthens the penultimate of Abraham, Arator short- 
 ens it. The a in ael of Israel, Michael, Raphael, is some- 
 times long and sometimes short. 
 
 RULE II. 
 
 A VOWEL BEFORE TWO CONSONANTS. 
 
 A vowel before two consonants, one or both of which are 
 in the same word with it, or before any of the double con- 
 sonants j 1 , x, z, being likewise in the same word with the 
 vowel, is long by POSITION ; as drma, Errabdt silva In mag' 
 na ; axis, patrizo ; cujus. 
 
 1 In reality, in such cases, j is a vowel, and, with the preceding 
 vowel, constitutes a diphthong ; thus mai-oribus. In the same 
 manner, arises the quantity of such words as ejus andpejtts, which, 
 according to Priseian, the antients wrote eiius and peiius ; thus 
 ei-us, pei~us, one of the is being elided, or supposed to be elided, 
 in the pronunciation. In rejicio, too, the e is considered long, thej 
 uniting with it, so as to form a diphthong, ra - icio. When j 
 stands at the beginning of a word, it has no power of lengthening 
 a short final vowel. Even mjurejurando, the e is short, this being 
 in fact two distinct words. (See the following note.) 
 
3-H 
 
 Pdscere oporiet oves, deductum dicere carmen Virg. 
 Nee myrtus vincet corylos, nee, laurea Phoebi Virg. 
 Indomitique Dab as, et pontem indignatus Ardxes Virg. 
 Nobilibus gdzis, opibusque cubilia surgant CL 
 Nate dea, nam te mdjoribus ire per altum Virg. 
 
 Utjugulent homines, surgunt de nocte latrones Hor. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. The compounds of jugum have the i short before j; 
 as Mjugus,, quadrijugus '. 
 
 Martis equi bijtiges, et magni currus Achillis Virg. 
 Quadryugo vehitur curru, cui tempora circum Virg. 
 
 Annotations. 
 
 1 . If the former word ends in a short vowel, the next 
 word beginning with two consonants, or a double conso- 
 nant (x or z\ the vowel often remains short. 
 
 Tu poteras virides pennis hcbetare smaragdos Ovid. 
 
 Jam medio apparet fluctu nemorosa 2 Zacynthus Virg. 
 
 1 These words were formerly written biiugus and quadruuguz, 
 the j being the same as i, whence also ajo, and, as Cicero is re- 
 ported to have written it, aiio, instead of aio ; and one of the is 
 being elided, or supposed to be elided, for the sake of the sound, 
 there remains bmgus ; or the^' being sounded, as it is by the Ger- 
 mans and other adjacent nations, like our y before a vowel in the 
 same syllable, the word becomes bi-yugus, in the same way as, 
 in English, opi-ni-on becomes opin-yon. The Spaniards write, 
 mayor, for major, greater ; and in English we have also mayor 
 from major ; they likewise write yugo forjitgum, a ^oke ; but the 
 y they pronounce in a way peculiar to themselves. 
 
 2 The rule has been controverted, in cases where any of the 
 following consonantal combinations in the beginning of a word 
 follows a short vowel, namely, sc, sp, sq, or st. Numerous exam- 
 ples, however, occur, in which the final short vowel before these 
 combinations continues short : thus, in Horace, prcemia scribes ; 
 mala stultitice ; mihi Stertinius ; velatumque stola ; scppv stylum 
 verlas ; in Ovid, curvamine spince ; considers scamnis ; olentia 
 stagna ; tua stat ; inamabiU stridet, &c. But it is observed that 
 many of these examples are removed by better readings given 
 in MSS. and editions; and that the doctrine of syllables remain- 
 ing short before s, and another consonant, is not confirmed by 
 unquestionable authority. The line 
 
 Pontte : spes sibi quisque; sed haec, quam angusta, videtis 
 
 jn. xi. b09. 
 
 is rejected by the ablest writers, as an interpolation. Virgil, 
 however, who has adopted such licenses as Julius Hyacintho $ 
 an qui amant, quc enclitic, has lengthened the short syllable but 
 in one line, 
 
345 
 
 OF A VOWEL BEFORE A MUTE AND A LIQUID. 
 
 2. A vowel naturally short, followed by a mute and a li- 
 
 Ferte citi ferrum, date tela, scandite muros. 
 Many of those short vowels which are found long before two 
 consonants beginning the following word, are lengthened by Cae- 
 sura ; as in 
 
 Occul-ta spolia, et plures de pace triumphos Juv. 
 It is, however, the opinion of several respectable critics, that, 
 if the two consonants be at the beginning of the following word, 
 the preceding vowel is long : although the poets have frequently 
 neglected the rule. In the writings of the antients, instances of 
 violation are comparatively rare, although it must be allowed 
 that the balance of actual practice seems against the rule; while 
 in modern poetry, the syllable is generally found short. Mr. 
 Burgess, in his edition of Dawes's Miscellanea Critica, has laid 
 down the rule, " Quotiescumque ultima, quse brevis sit, vocabuli 
 praecedentis, partem ejusdem cum st, sp,sc, &c. pedis constituat, 
 toties earn esselongam, nisi in scriptis comicis iisque quse sermoni 
 propiora sunt." Hence, we may infer that, if the preceding 
 short syllable terminate a foot, it may remain short; and if it 
 do not terminate a foot, it becomes long, except in scriptis co- 
 micis &c. This is, perhaps, generally correct ; it must, however, 
 be observed, that Horace, Ennius, and Propertius, furnish ex- 
 amples in which the vowel remains short, although it does riot 
 terminate a foot ; a circumstance which tends to sanction the 
 opinion of those who are inclined to think, that the initial s and 
 a consonant have the same power over a preceding short vowel, 
 as a mute and a liquid have over a preceding short vowel in the 
 body of a word, that is, that they render it common. It is very 
 evident, from a coHection of the examples involving the colloca- 
 tion in question, (see Nos. 1 and 2 of the Classical Journal^) 
 that even among the antient poets, as Lucretius, Propertius, 
 Horace, Ovid, Seneca, &c., the vowel is oftener found short 
 than long. That, however, in many of those instances, the 
 sound of the s was suppressed, is very probable ; indeed, in a 
 line from Lucretius, terminating with miscere smaragdos, some 
 MSS. have maragdos. Reasoning from analogy, and the authority 
 of those poets, who, unless in their sermoni propiora, have but sel- 
 dom or never introduced the final short syllable before s and another 
 consonant, it is thought that there are good grounds for consi- 
 dering a vowel to be long before the two consonants, whether in 
 the same word, or in the next; although, in the composition of 
 verses, it may, perhaps, be expedient, considering the diversity 
 of opinion on this disputable point, to avoid the latter colloca- 
 tion altogether. Lucretius, who shortens the vowel, it is said, was 
 perhaps compelled, by the nature of his subject, to take th@ utmost 
 liberty he could at all defend, and was afterwards followed by 
 Horace in the sermoni propiora. But, in the Odes, we see no- 
 thing of the kind, nor is the practice in the least degree sane- 
 
34-6 
 
 quid, both in the following syllable, is common ; as 
 a-gris, phare-tra. 
 
 Et primo similis volucri, mox vera volucris Ovid. 
 
 tioned by Catullus or Virgil. These are the three greatest au- 
 thorities in Roman verse. Propertius is, perhaps, of inferior au- 
 thority. Tibullus shortens the vowel, only before sm, in smarag* 
 dos, in which probably the s was dropt in writing or in pronun- 
 ciation. Virgil has not admitted the short vowel in his Georgics. 
 In the ^neid, it occurs but once (Ponite: spes sibi quisque), in 
 a line which has been deemed corrupt. Horrida squamosi in his 
 Culexj (if indeed he was its author,) and nisi Scylla in his Ciris 9 
 two early attempts, have not much weight. Catullus, in but one 
 solitary instance, undo, Scamandri, has violated the law, by fol- 
 lowing Homer. The name, however, is written Kaju-avfyof in 
 ancient Greek MSS. Several instances occur in Ovid, of the 
 short vowel ; but it may be observed, that some of them admit, 
 and have received, different readings. It is worthy of remark, 
 too, that in compound words, sc, sp, st, have the power of length- 
 ening a preceding short vowel ; as rescindo, respuo, restinguo. 
 We shall only add, that neither the letter s, nor the liquid m f 
 seems to have been considered, by the Roman poets, so firm and 
 indissoluble a consonant as the rest. The former was frequently 
 elided by the earlier poets, not only before a vowel, but even be- 
 fore a consonant. The syllable that terminates with the latter, 
 almost always falls before a vowel. Although, in Greek, exam- 
 ples of final short vowels lengthened before J and are numerous, 
 it is difficult to find an unquestionable example, in Latin, of such 
 a circumstance ; but x and z may have possessed such a power. 
 Where a short vowel occurs before these letters, the sound may 
 have been softened, or they may have been pronounced like 
 d : thus, Danthus for Xanthus ; Dacynthus for Xacynthus. The 
 rule for lengthening the final short vowel before s and another 
 consonant, is rigidly enforced in some of our public schools, 
 and in others totally disregarded. Little or no attention, I be- 
 lieve, is paid to it at the universities of Oxford and Cambridge ; 
 nor has it been observed by the modern poets of England, Hol- 
 land, Germany, or Italy. And if we consider the few examples 
 in which we find the syllable short in antient poetry, compared 
 with those of modern occurrence, and the still smaller number in 
 which it is lengthened, there seems reason to conclude, that the 
 antients, in general, studiously avoided the collocation. Virgil, 
 it is observed, does not, like Horace, employ the word scefcstw, 
 but scctcratus; which, it has been thought, he would have done, 
 if he would not have been compelled to place a short syllable be- 
 fore it : but a different reason might be assigned. In conclusion, 
 we would observe, that, influenced solely by the unquestionable 
 preponderance of instances in which the vowel occurs short, even 
 after all the disputed lines are excluded, and taking into considera- 
 tion, that the practice is sanctioned by almost all the best rno- 
 
347 
 
 Natum ante ora patris, patrem qui obtruncat ad aras 
 
 Virg. 
 
 Et vos agrestum praesentia numina Fauni Virg. l 
 inter agrestia regem Virg. 
 
 dern poets, we might be justified in considering the vowel before 
 st &c. as generally short. Reasoning, however, chiefly from the 
 delay naturally produced by two such unyielding consonants, 
 if both are distinctly sounded, and relying on the confirma- 
 tory authority of the few undisputed examples in which the 
 vowel occurs long, we might be inclined to deem a vowel, so si- 
 tuated, long, and combining the two preceding conclusions, 
 the general inference would be, that, as the vowel is found some- 
 times short, and sometimes long, it should be regarded as com- 
 mon. But judging from the comparatively rare and limited oc- 
 currence of the collocation in question, in the writings of the 
 antient poets, I have little hesitation to say, that it should be 
 avoided, if not altogether, yet. as much as possible. Many in- 
 teresting observations on the subject of this Note, and, it needs 
 scarcely be added, on every subject connected with classical lite- 
 rature, may be found in the Classical Journal. See also some 
 ingenious remarks on this question, in Dr. Carey's valuable trea- 
 tise on Latin Prosody. 
 
 1 It is, however, short in prose. To produce this kind of po- 
 sition, which is reckoned weak (debilis), and is not to be used 
 without some limitation, three things are necessary. 1 . That 
 the mute precede the liquid. 2. That the mute and the liquid 
 be both in the following syllable ; or otherwise, this rule cannot 
 take place ; as in ab-luo, ob-ruo, in which the a and o, short by 
 nature, are made long by the usual rule of position, and cannot 
 be made short. 3. That the vowel preceding the mute and liquid 
 be short by nature ; for, if it is long, it cannot be made short. 
 Hence the a in acris, and matris, is always long, because the a in 
 acer, and mater, is long. In like manner, the penultimate of sa- 
 lubris, and ambulacrum, is always long, because they are derived 
 from salus, salutis ; and ambulatum, both long. 
 
 L and r are the only liquids found in Latin words preceded by 
 a vowel and a mute. L,, r t and also m, n, have the same force in 
 Greek words, when the preceding vowel is naturally short ; as 
 Cyclopes, pharetra, Te-cmessa, Da-phne. 
 
 Pars laeves humero pharetras, it pectore summo Virg. 
 
 Virginibus Tyriis mos est gestare pharetram Virg. 
 
 Et baccis redimita daphne, tremulaeque cupressus Pet. 
 
 Primus amor Phrebi Daphne Penei'a, quern non Ovid. 
 Martial has imitated the Greeks in shortening a syllable before g<, 
 Sardonychas, smaragdos, adamantas, iaspidas uno. 
 
 This rule, as has been already mentioned, is to be followed 
 with some degree of limitation. Vossius has observed, that he 
 would not be inclined to lengthen the penultimate of gemirix. 
 
348 
 RULE III. 
 
 OF DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 A diphthong is long in Latin and Greek words : as, 
 durum, fcenus, jffineas, Etibcea, Harpy i a ! . 
 
 And it may be seen, from some of the examples which have been 
 given, that words of three syllables, as volucris, pharetra, tenebrce, 
 having the first short, and the middle deemed common, never 
 
 have their penultimate long but at the end of a line. It may 
 
 likewise be observed, that words of three syllables, as agrestes, 
 cyclopes, &c., having the first common, and the second long, sel- 
 dom have the first short but at the end of a line; thus, misera- 
 
 tus agrestes Virg. Such words as tonitrua, tonitribus, and 
 
 ludibria, have the antepenultimate long in the latter part of a 
 line ; as tomtrua mentes Ovid, ludibria ventis Virg. Indeed, 
 the two first could not be admitted into any part of a heroic line 
 without a long antepenult, and in them the emphasis also tends 
 to strengthen the doubtful syllable. Ovid and Virgil generally 
 make the first syllable oflacryma short; Horace, common. Lu- 
 gilbris is generally long, but is made short by Horace at the end 
 of a lyric verse. Ludicra has generally the penult short. Patris 
 and some others may perhaps be varied in any part of a line. 
 Catullus sometimes lengthens a final short syllable followed by a 
 mute and a liquid ; but this is a liberty very rarely used, without 
 the influence of the Caesura. 
 
 These is nothing arbitrary in the principle which regulates the 
 quantity of a short vowel before a mute and a liquid. When the 
 liquid precedes the mute, it requires a distinct, full sound, and 
 thus, the syllable is rendered long; asjert. When, too, the 
 mute precedes the liquid, and they are in different syllables, the 
 liquid acquires, from this circumstance, a more marked, distinct 
 pronunciation, so as to render the preceding vowel long ; as sub- 
 ruo. But when, as in the terms of the rule, the mute precedes 
 the liquid in the same syllable, the latter glides or trills so rapidly 
 in the pronunciation, that a preceding vowel, short by nature, 
 although it may be rendered somewhat longer than a short one, 
 still remains rather shorter than a long one. As, therefore, its 
 length, comparatively considered, seems to be equally remote 
 from a short and a long quantity, it may in poetry be referred to 
 either; in other words, be deemed common. When the vowel 
 was lengthened, probably the two consonants were sounded in 
 different syllables; aspat-ris, instead ofpa-tris. It should be re- 
 marked, that the letter f, though commonly accounted a semi- 
 vowel, has, when followed by a liquid, the same influence as a 
 mute, upon a preceding short syllable ; that is, the syllable most 
 commonly remains short. Vossius and Alvarus seem inclined 
 to consider it as a mute. 
 
 * But u and a vowel following q, are not to be considei 
 
 jred as a 
 
349 
 
 Thesauros, ignotumjargenti pondus et ami Virg. 
 Infernique lacus, JE&cEque insula Circes Virg. 
 Miratur molem JEneas, magalia quondam Virg. 
 Euridicenque suam jam tuto respicit Orpheus Ovid. 
 Et patrio insontes Hat-pyias pellere regno Virg. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. Prcc in composition is short before a vowel; as prce- 
 ustus, prceeunte, pr<zacutus l . 
 
 Stipitibus duris agitur, sudibusve pr<%ustis Virg. 
 Nee tota tamen ille prior praeunte carina Virg. 
 
 2. A diphthong is once short in a line of Virgil, out of 
 composition : thus, 
 
 Insultf lonio in magno, quas dira Celaeno. 
 
 diphthong falling within the rule ; for in such combinations, the 
 latter vowel, if short, remains so ; as quater, queror, quibus, quo- 
 tus, equits, dissyllables. Some have supposed that the u follow- 
 ing q is a liquid consonant ; others, with more truth, that it be- 
 comes a mute vowel, or is a liquid vowel, which glides so rapidly 
 into the sound of the following vowel, as scarcely to be percepti- 
 ble in the pronunciation ; and that it does not form a diphthong 
 with the following vowel, because it has little or no force as a 
 letter in verse. Amittit vim literce in metro, says Priscian ; which 
 made Donatus believe, that, strictly speaking, it is neither vowel 
 nor consonant. After g and s, it seems also to be generally liquid 
 or evanescent, as in angms, sanguts, lingua, suetus, suadet, dissyl- 
 lables. Sometimes it retains its full force, as in exiguus, suits. It 
 has even been omitted in some words, as in stingo for stinguo ; 
 ungo for unguo ; cum for quum, qu having, probably, been for- 
 merly sounded, in some instances at least, like the letter k, as in 
 the French language. 
 
 1 This is inaccurately expressed in the short sketch of Prosody 
 in the Eton Grammar j and from it, the inaccuracy has been co- 
 pied into many other grammars. " Omnis diphthongus longa est, 
 nisi sequente vocali," should be nisi prae, sequente vocali. For as 
 the rule now stands, a solitary exception is made the basis of a 
 general exception to one of the most general rules of prosody. 
 The diphthong in pr& is, however, long in 
 
 Praemia cum vacuus domino prceiret Arion Stat. Theb. 6. 
 The ce in prce is supposed to have become short, from an elision 
 of one of the component vowels ; or it may have arisen from the 
 same cause through which the diphthong in M&otis, and in one 
 or two other words, is deemed common, viz, from the corruption, 
 in sound, of ce (ae or at) and ce (oe or oi) originally proper di- 
 phthongs, intoe; owing to which circumstance they are now 
 termed improper. 
 
350 
 
 This seeras to be in imitation of the Greeks, who, gene- 
 rally, shorten a diphthong, or a long vowel at the end of a 
 word, the following beginning with a vowel. 
 
 RULE IV. 
 
 OF CRASIS, OR CONTRACTION. 
 
 Every syllable formed by the contraction of two syllables 
 into one, is long ; as cogo for coago, the genitive allus for 
 aliius '. 
 
 Tityre edge pecus, tu post carecta latebas Virg. 
 
 Obscurse sortis patres ambagibus errant Ovid. 
 
 SPECIAL RULES. 
 
 OF THE FIRST SYLLABLE, AND OF MIDDLE 
 SYLLABLES. 
 
 RULE I. 
 
 OF DERIVATIVES. 
 
 Derivatives, and words formed from other words, have 
 the same quantity as the words whence they come : thus 
 amicus, pavidus, avitus, from amo, paveo, amis ; mdternus, 
 
 1 This is a rule of very extensive application, as well in prose 
 as in poetry. We are told that the antients expressed a long 
 syllable, by two vowels; thus veenit, for vtnit, the preterite; and 
 it will be found, that, in many words, the long syllable arises 
 from the contraction of two vowels. Thus, we write tibicen in- 
 stead of tibiicen ; ambages for ambeages ; nonus for novenus ; bl- 
 gee, trigce, &c., for bijiigce, trijugce ; junior for juvenior ; bobus 
 for bovibus ; it for lit ; and sometimes vvmens for vthemens ; ml 
 for mihi", &c. j and in joining words, as malo for magis volo. But 
 some final syllables, probably contracted at an early period, re- 
 main short ; such as sit from siet, amat from amait. Perhaps, 
 however, in such instances, instead of contraction, one vowel 
 may have been removed, and the other made to conform to the 
 usual analogy. 
 
 Syncope, Crasis, and Synaeresis may be thus distinguished. 
 Syncope takes a letter or syllable from the middle of a word, 
 without affecting the remaining letters. Crasis contracts two 
 vowels, in the same word, or from different words, into one 
 vowel ; Synaeresis (which will be hereafter explained), two vowels 
 in the same word, into one syllable. The former of these two is 
 applicable to prose and poetry ; the latter, chiefly to poetry. 
 
351 
 
 ndtivus, finltimus, from mater ^ nutus, finis ; legebam, le- 
 gerem, legam, &c. formed from lego , legeram, legerim, 
 legero, &c. from legi ; notus, notitia, notio, from notum ; 
 virgineus, sangumeus, from virgmis, sangumis, fcenebris, from 
 fceiieris ; propinquus, fromprope. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. Desiderative verbs, in urio, have the u short, although 
 formed from the participle in urus, which has u long ; as 
 nuptiirio, from nuptilrus *. 
 
 Parturiunt montes, nascetur ridiculus mus Hor. 
 
 2. Frequentative verbs, formed from the second supine 
 of the first conjugation, by changing dtu into ito, have the 
 i short; as clamito, voUto. 
 
 Infelix sua tecta super volitaverit alis Virg. 
 
 3. There are other derivatives, long, formed from short 
 primitives; and there are short derivatives, formed from 
 long primitives; thus jugerum from jugum, sdgax from 
 sdgio 8 . 
 
 Et labefacta movens robustus jtigera fossor Virg. 
 Arva aliena^go premere, atque avertere praedas Virg. 
 
 1 Other verbs in urio, as ligurio and scaturio, lengthen the u. 
 They were antiently written with a double r. 
 
 * Some of those anomalies have perhaps arisenfrom the influence 
 of syncope and crasis. Thus, mobilis from moveo may have been 
 movibilis ; momentum, mommentum ; motum, movitum ; fotum,fQ- 
 vitum, fromjoveo ; jiitum, juvatum ; SLndjumentumjjuvamentum, 
 homjuvo. It would appear, however, that verbals in bills, as 
 well as those in tills, and nouns in ator, atrum, atus, etus, men, 
 mentum, &c., are generally formed from the supine or perfect 
 participle, and that by this their quantity is regulated ; thus from 
 amatum, amabilis ; volatum, volatilis ; JUtum, fitbilis ; temtum, 
 terribilis ; statum, of slsto, stabilis ; in the same way we have ara- 
 tor, aratrum, apparatus, certamen, jumentum, volumen, lenimen, 
 irrit amentum t monumentum or mommentum, alimentum, blandimen- 
 turn ; alsofomes, ftomfotum, &c. Derivatives often come from 
 the genitive ; as from hymen, enis, hymen ceus; fromsalutis,saluber; 
 from jwn&rls, funebris ; from mulierls, muliebris, &c., the deri- 
 vatives from increasing nouns of the third declension usually 
 agreeing in quantity with the increment of the primitives. Verbs 
 also ; as ordino, saluto, exhceredo, &c. Sometimes the word de- 
 rived, or formed, becomes short, by dropping one of the conso- 
 nants which rendered the word whence it is supposed to come, 
 long by position ; as disertus from dlssero ; libella from libra ; 
 mamilla from mamma ; volutum from volvo ; solutum fromsolvo; 
 tigillum from ttgnum ; potul from possum. When the primitive 
 
352 
 RULE II. 
 
 COMPOUND WORDS. 
 
 Compound words have the same quantity as the simple 
 words of which they are compounded : as perlego and re- 
 lego, because lego ,- perlegi and relegi, because legi , imprb- 
 bus, because probus ; perjurus, because jus, juris. 
 
 If a vowel is changed, in forming the compound, it re- 
 tains the quantity of the vowel, or diphthong, from which 
 it is changed ; as concido, from cado ; concldo from cccdo ; 
 inlquus from cequus. 
 
 Multa renascentur, quae jam cecidere , cadentque Hor. 
 
 Taurus, et averso cedens canis occidit astro Virg. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1 . The following are short compounds from long primi- 
 tives ; Nihilum from Jiilum ; dejero and pejero from juro ,- 
 veridicus, fatidicus, causidiciis, and the like, from dico ; se- 
 misopitus from sopitus ; cogmtwn and agmtum from notum / 
 innuba, subnuba, and pronuba, from nubo. 
 
 Quae causa officii ? quid quaeris ? nubit amicus Juv. 
 Et Bellona manet te pronuba : nee face tantum Virg. 
 
 2. Imbecillus, said to come from bacillus, has the second 
 syllable long. Ambltum the supine, and ambitus the parti- 
 ciple, have the i long, although coming from itnm> which has 
 
 is necessarily short, by one vowel's preceding another, as in hi/ems, 
 the derivative sometimes becomes long, after the removal of a 
 vowel ; as in hiberna, hiberno, hibernacula, Liquidus is supposed 
 to have its first common, (as it may be derived from the depo- 
 nent verb liquor, or from the neuter, Uqueo, ) on the following 
 authority : 
 
 Crassaque conveniunt liquidis, et liquida crassis Lucret. 
 For the difference in quantity between many derivatives and 
 their primitives no plausible conjecture can be given ; such ano- 
 malies must be left to observation. Of this description are some 
 of the following ; Ambitus (subst.), ambitio, ambitiosus from am- 
 bitum ; arena from areo ; aruspex from ara ; dicax from dlco ; 
 lucerna from luceo ; nato, natas, from natu ; sopor from sopio ; 
 vadum from vado, &c. Chius from chios ; como, -is, from coma, 
 hair ; humanus from homo ; regina, rex, regis, regula, from rego ; 
 secius from secus ; sedes, sedile, from sedeo ; tegida from tego ; vox, 
 vocis, from voco, &c. Words may be sometimes distinguished by 
 a difference in quantity ; thus corno, -is, corno, -as ; duco, ducis, 
 dux, ducis ; rego, regis, rex, rcgis. 
 
3:33 
 
 the i short ; but the substantives ambitus and ambttio have 
 the ? short, like itum ! . 
 
 Porto meis, nullo dextram subeunte bacillo Juv. 
 
 Imbecillus, iners, si quid vis ? adde propino Hor. 
 
 Jussit et ambltcE circumdare litora terras Ov. 
 
 Et properantis aquae per amoenos ambitus agros Hor. 
 3. Connubium, from nubo, has the u common 2 . 
 
 Connubio jungam stabili, propriamque dicabo Virg. 
 
 Hectoris Andromache ! Pyrrhin' connubia servas Virg. 
 
 RULE III. 
 
 OF PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION. 
 
 Prepositions have generally the same quantity in compo- 
 sition as out of it : thus amitto and deduco have the first 
 syllable long, because a and de are long. Aboleo and per- 
 imo have the first short, because db and per are short. 
 
 Expediam, prima repetens db origine, famam Virg. 
 
 Nee poterit ferrum, nee edax dbolere vetustas Ovid. 
 
 Exceptions and Annotations. 
 
 1 . A preposition ending in a vowel, although out of com- 
 position it may be long, becomes short by the first general 
 rule, if followed by another vowel ; as dvosculor, prohibeo. 
 And if a short preposition end in a consonant, and be fol- 
 lowed by another consonant, it becomes long, by the second 
 general rule : as admitto, ptrccllo. 
 
 K coelo tactas memini praedicere quercus Virg. 
 
 A media coelum regione dehiscere coepit Ovid. 
 
 ad auras Virg. admiscere saporem Virg. 
 
 Note. Sometimes the preposition, instead of becoming 
 long by position, loses its final consonant, and remains 
 short ; as omit to, operio. 
 
 Quod petiit spernit, repetit quod nuper omisit Hor. 
 
 2. Pro, when used as a Greek preposition, for ante, is 
 short ; as propketa, prologus, propontis : but pro, a Latin 
 preposition, is generally long ; as prodo, prdveho, promitto. 
 
 1 Ambitum perhaps by crasis of ambe itum. Or it may come 
 from the regular ambio, ambltum, formed from ambi the old form 
 of the inseparable am, still visible in ambidexter ; and there may 
 have been also ambeo, ambitum a compound of eo. 
 
 2 It is contended by some that the u is always long, and that 
 connubio and connubiis, although supposed to have u short in 
 Virgil, are to be considered as trisyllables, by the figure Synizesis 
 or Synecphonesis ; thus con-nitb-yo ; in which case the first foot 
 becomes a spondee instead of a dactyl. 
 
 2 A 
 
354 
 
 furtumque Promethei Virg. 
 
 Qua3 tarn festa dies, ut cesset prodere furem Juv. 
 But in many Latin words pro is short ; as profundus^ pro- 
 fugio, profugus, pronepos, proneptis, profestus, profari^ pro- 
 fiteer, prZfanuS) profectb, procus, procella, protervus, propero, 
 and propago, signifying lineage ; but propago signifying a 
 vinestock, is long l . 
 
 Contremuit nemus, et sylvae intonuere pwfundce Virg. 
 In some it is common; ospropino,, propago (the verb),^?r<>- 
 fundo, propello, p?-opulso, procuro, Proserpina (in reality a 
 corruption of Persephone). 
 
 Nee ratione fluunt alia, stragemque propagant Lucret. 
 Hi propaganda ruerant pro limite regni Claudian. 
 exin corpus propellit, et icit Lucret. 
 
 quse provehat atque propellat Lucret. 
 
 3. The inseparable preposition re is short ; as remitto, 
 repello, refero 2 . But re (which here is supposed to be an 
 ablative) is long in the impersonal verb refert, "it concerns." 
 
 Quid tamen hoc refert, si se pro classe Pelasga 
 
 Arma tulisse refert Ovid. 
 
 Posterius ferri vis est aerisque reperta Lucret. 
 
 4. The inseparable prepositions, se and di 9 are long ; as, 
 separOy diduco, diversus. But di is short in dirimo and di- 
 sertus. 
 
 Separat Aonios Actaeis Phocis ab arvis Ovid. 
 Dlversos ubi sensit equos, currumque referri Virg. 
 Hanc Deus et melior litem natura diremit Ov. 
 In causa facili cuivis licet esse diserto Ov. 
 
 1 Notwithstanding such distinctions propago, whose significa- 
 tion is always essentially the same, may be considered among the 
 doubtfuls; to which class procumbo is likewise added by some, 
 probably, on the authority of Lucretius, who uses it short, 
 IV, 950. But the passage stands differently in Wakefield's edi- 
 tion. As, however, some of the compounds with pro are reckoned 
 long, because it happens that they are found long among the 
 poets ; and, for a similar reason, some are reckoned short, and 
 others doubtful, it is not improbable, that, in all compound Latin 
 words, the poets may have used^ro, long or short, as it suited their 
 verse. 
 
 * Re is sometimes found lengthened, by doubling the following 
 consonant ; as in relli^io, reppulit : but this duplication is gene- 
 rally omitted, except in the verb reddo, so that religio t reliquice, 
 reliquus, repent, retulit, repulit, reducere, are found long, and with 
 only one consonant. 
 
 Neu populum antiqua sub relligione tueri Virg. 
 
 Religione patrum multos servata per annos Virg. 
 
 Et prius est rrpertitm in equi conscendere costas Lucret* 
 
355 
 
 OF THE FINAL VOWELS OF FIRST WORDS IN COMPOSITION. 
 
 The vowels E, I, O, U, and Y, ending the Jirst *wwd of a 
 compound^ are generally short. A is long. 
 
 RULE IV -- A. 
 
 Words ending in a in the former part of a compound are 
 long ; as qudre, quapropter, quatenus ; also trd (trans), as 
 in trado, traduco, trano. 
 
 Qiiure agite 6 proprios generatim discite cultus Virg. 
 
 1. Except eadem, unless it be the ablative, hexameter, and 
 catapulta. 
 
 RULE V. - E. 
 
 Words ending in e in the first part of a compound are 
 
 short ; as,, in the first syllable, nefas, nefastus, liefandus, nt- 
 
 Jarius, neque ; also tredecim, trecenti, cquidem : in the se- 
 
 cond, valedico, madcfacio, stuptfacio, tremefacio, and the 
 
 like : in the third, hujuscvmodi, ejuscemodz. 
 
 Credebant hoc grande nefas, et morte piandum Juv. 
 
 Insolito belli tremefecit murmure Thulen Claud. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. The first is long in words compounded of se for sex 
 or for semi., as sedecim, semestris, semodius, (but in sclibra it 
 is found short) ; in nequis, nequicquam., nequam, nequitia^ ne- 
 qitando, liemo^ credo, memet, mecum, tecum^ secum ,- in words 
 compounded of the inseparable preposition se, as secedo ; 
 and in the second of veneficus and videlicet. 
 
 Nequicquam seros exercet noctua cantus Virg. 
 
 Note, That liquefacio, tepefacio, tabefacio, and patefacio 
 have their second syllable sometimes long. Rarefacio and 
 rarefio also have the e generally long. Vossius observes 
 that Virgil shortens the e in such words, and that Lucretius 
 and Catullus lengthen it, the former without caesura. In- 
 deed, it is probable that in these words it was generally 
 considered common. 
 
 Sic mea perpetuis liquefiunt pectora curis Ovid. 
 
 Tabe liquefactis, tendens ad sidera palmas Ov. 
 
 Et rarefecit calido miscente vapore Lucret. 
 
 Intremuit, motuque sinus patefecit aquarum Ovid. 
 
 Atque patefecit, quas ante obsederat ater Lucret, 
 The e of videlicet may be found short, probably, by poetic 
 license. 
 
 2 A2 
 
356 
 RULE VI. /. 
 
 Both Latin and Greek words shorten the final i of the 
 first word of a compound ; as om?npote?is, bivium, tnvium, 
 triceps 1 , siquidem, fatidicus, unigenitus, agricola, vaticinium, 
 significo ; architectus, dimeter, trimeter, Iplngenia. 
 
 Omnipotens genitor, tanton* me crimine dignum Virg. 
 
 Archilochi, non res, et agentia verba Lycambem Hor. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. Those compounds in which the i is changed in declin- 
 ing, are long; as quldam, qulvis, quilibet, &c., quanfivis, 
 quantlcunque, tantldem, unicuique, eldem, reipubliccK, quail- 
 cunque. 
 
 Jure mihi invideat qulvis, ita te quoque amicum Hor. 
 
 2. The final i is long in those compounds which may be 
 Separated without destroying the sense, that being their re- 
 gular quantity ; as ludlmagister, or ludl magister ; parvi- 
 pcndo, or parvi pendo ; lucrlfacio, or lucrifacio ; slquis, or 
 si quis : thus also agrlcultura. 
 
 Ludi-magister, parce simplici turbae Martial. 
 
 3. Those words which, in joining, undergo a crasis or 
 syncope, are long ; as tibwen, for tibiicen : blgte, trigce, &c. 
 for byugtf, trijuga, &c. ; llicet for ire licet ,- scilicet for scire 
 licet ; to which add blmus, trimus, quadrimus ; but tulncen, 
 which has suffered neither, is short by the general rule. 
 
 llicet ignis edax summa ad fastigia vento Virg. 
 
 4. Idem masculine is long ; but neuter, short. Identi- 
 dem has the penultimate short. The first i of rilmirum, the 
 i of ubique, utroblque, and the second in ibidem, are long. 
 Ubi'vis and ubi cunque (and probably most of the compounds 
 of ubi and ibi?} may be found common. 
 
 amor omnibus Idem Virg. 
 
 Invitum qui servat, idem facit occidenti Hor. 
 
 , nee quicquid ublque est (Gentis Dardaniae) 
 
 Virg. 
 
 Clamat : io matres audite ulncunque* Latinae Virg. 
 Seryor, ubicunque est ; uni mea gaudia servo ? Ov. 
 
 1 ^Words derived from trlginta must not be confounded with 
 the compounds of tris or tres, short by this rule ; for tricesimus, 
 trigesimus, trlceni, are long, because trlginta is long, ginta being 
 no distinct word, but a termination. 
 
 Bis jam pene tibi consul trigesimus instat Mart. 
 
 2 Al. ubi quceque. This is the usual reading. 
 
, 357 
 
 5. The compounds of dies have the final i of the first 
 word long ; as biduum, triduum, merldies, prldie, postndie. 
 These two last are long by Exception 3d, being priori die 
 and posteriori die. 
 
 Si totus tibi trlduo legatur Mart. 
 Nam vita morti propior est quotldie Phaedr. 
 Quotidie, and quotldianus, are said to have the i some- 
 times short ; but this is not satisfactorily ascertained, since 
 the lines adduced in proof may, by the figure synizesis, be 
 differently measured : thus, 
 
 Conjugis in culpa flagravit quotfidiand Catull. 
 
 or quottid-ya-na. 
 
 It must however be confessed, that, thus read, the line is 
 harsh, and is unnecessarily rendered spondaic. 
 
 RULE VII. 
 
 O is short in the first word of a Greek or Latin com- 
 pound; as Argoiiauta, Arctophylax, areopagus, bibliotheca, 
 pkilosophus, Timotheus ; bardocucullus, sacrosanctus, duo- 
 decim, duodeni, hodie, words compounded of two nouns. 
 
 Non nautas puto vos, sed Argonautas Martial. 
 
 A tergo nitet Arctophylax, idemque Bootes Manil. 
 
 Non dices hodie, quorsum haec tarn putida tendant Hor. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. Words compounded with intro, retro, contro, and 
 quando; as intrdduco, mtromitto, retrocedo, retrogradu^ con- 
 troversia, controversus, quanddque, quandoctmque. To which 
 may be added alioqui?i 9 utroque, cteteroquin, utrobique ; the 
 compounds of qiio, as quomodo, quocunque, quominus, quo- 
 circa, quovis, qudque, and similar ablatives. 
 
 Quandoquidem, and quoque, the particle, have the o short. 
 Ipse retrdversus squalentia protulit ora Ov. 
 Quod mcechus foret, aut sicarius, aut alioqum Hor. 
 Dicite; quatidoquidem in molli consedimus herba -Virg. 
 damnabis tu quoque votis Virg. 
 
 2. Those words, which in Greek are written with an ome- 
 ga, have the o long; as Geometra, Minotaunts, lagojms. 
 
 Minotaurus inest, Veneris monimenta nefandai Virg. 
 
 RULE VIII. 17 and Y. 
 
 U, and Y in Greek words, are short ; as, in the first syl- 
 lable, ducenti, dupondium', in the second, quadriipes, cen- 
 
358 
 
 tuplcx, Trojitgena, cornupcta; also Poli/darus, Polydamas, 
 Polyphemus, doryphorus. l 
 
 1 It may be useful to beginners, and to the mere English scho- 
 lar, if we subjoin a few of those words, which are often incor- 
 rectly pronounced, some of them even by our best English poets. 
 Andromcus, Cleomcus, Stratomcus* Polynices-, Tkessalomcaj &c. 
 have the penultimate long, because the first syllable of'v/xij, vie- 
 loria, whence, probably, they are derived, is long ; /SouAsro v/xijv 
 II. vii. 21. The first syllable of irayoj (a hill) is short: there- 
 fore we say, Areopagus. Bellerophon was so named, in conse- 
 quence of having slain one Eellerus, the second syllable of which, 
 like the second of the former, is short. Milton has improperly 
 accented it. Many of our English poets improperly lay the em- 
 phasis on the second of Geryon, contrary to ancient usage. 
 Geryone extincto, &c. Virg. vii, 662 : viii, 202. Hor. ii, 14?, 8. 
 Some writers produce the authority of Claudian, for lengthening 
 the second syllable. See Grad. ad Parnas. Smetii Prosod. Hoc 
 neque Geryon triplex, nee turbidus orci Claud. But the proper 
 reading is Gerjjo-nes, by which the true quantity is preserved. 
 The second syllable in Gramcus, in Homer, Hesiod, Ovid, &c. 
 is always long : 11. xii, 21. Gramco nata btcorni Ovid, xi, 763. 
 In the Greek and Latin poets the penultimate of Helena, Gr. 
 'EAsvij, is invariably short. But it is vulgarly pronounced long 
 in the name of the island St. Helena, said to be discovered on the 
 day dedicated by the Romish church to St. Helena, the mother 
 of Constantine the Great. The English accent or syllabic em- 
 phasis is improperly laid on the a of Heractitus. Herad'dus init 
 &c. Lucr. i, 639. Shakespeare and others pronounce Hyp- 
 rion with i short, contrary to the custom of the Greek and Latin 
 poets. Hypenone menso Metamorph viii, 64. In the Greek 
 and Latin poets, the penultimate of Iphigcma is always long. 
 Dryden and others pronounce it as a word of four syllables. 
 IphigenHa mora, Prop. Homer and Virgil make the penultimate 
 of Laodama long; many of our poets accent the antepenulti- 
 mate. Laodamia sinus Ovid. Several of our English poets 
 throw the emphasis on the penultimate of Pharnaces ; yet Lucan 
 and others make it short. Pharnacis et gelido, &c. Phars. The 
 best Greek and Roman poets lengthen the penultimate of Scrap-is. 
 Vincebant, nee quae turba Serapin amat Mart, ix, ,'*!. Mar- 
 tianus Capella, and some others, unwarrantably shorten the se- 
 cond. It may be observed that the first syllable in Apis, which 
 is supposed by some [see Gesn. Thes.] to be the same ^Egyp- 
 tian deity, is uniformly long. Mactabitur Apis. Luc. ix, 169. 
 We sometimes lind in English an improper quantity given to 
 triumviri, decemviri, centumviri, and the like, words having their 
 third syllable short. Read JEoltis, Antipodes, Herodotus* Tim- 
 cydtdesy Archimedes* Amphlon* Tisiphone, Terpsichore, Miltiades, 
 Alcibiadcs, Amphltritc, Anlidai, Anon, Arsaces, Ccesarca, Cleo- 
 
 
359 
 
 Nam full hoc vitiosus ; in hora ssepe ducentos Hor. 
 Nam qualis quantusque cavo Polyphemus in antro Virg. 
 Except judico, long in its first syllable. 
 
 Et sapit, et mecum facit, et Jovejudicat sequo Hor. 
 
 menes, Darius, Deiphobus, Demosthenes, Diomedes, Eplrus, Erato, 
 Euphrates, Hecate, Hermlone, Agesilaus, lulus. Ixlon, Leucate, 
 Longimanus, Mausolus (hence mausoleum,) Medea, Nerttos, 
 Nicomedes, Omphale, Osiris, Pachynus, Pactdlus, Persephone, 
 Philomela, Pisistratus, Proserpina, Sardancipalus , Acrisione, 
 Thalia, Thrasjjbulus, Tomyris, asylum, Pantheon, Orion, panacea, 
 Oreades, Antiochia, Pandion, Philostratus, Galatea, Bellovaci, 
 Andreas, Philadelphia, (the name of a town, Gr. <piAa#A<pja) 
 Philadelphia^ brotherly love, Gr. <pfAa&A<pra) presbyter, (although 
 irpsa-Zurys,) sabacthani, and to these words, were there room, 
 many more might be added, in which English pronunciation fre- 
 quently errs. It may be observed, that, according to the ana- 
 logy of the English language, the English ictus is generally much 
 more safely laid upon a syllable, in the original language, long, 
 than upon a short one. It has, doubtless, arisen, from paying 
 more attention to the position of the Greek accent than to the 
 original long quantity of the following syllable, or to the gene- 
 rally corresponding influence of our own English ictus or sylla- 
 bic emphasis, that we ever hear eremus, poesis t ulolum, instead 
 of eremus, poesis, idolum. From the same cause, it has probably 
 arisen, that the penultimate of the word Paraclctus or Para- 
 clitus (irapoiK\T)TOs), which is unquestionably long, has been short- 
 ened by Prudentius, and other poets, and hymn- composers. The 
 Greek accentual marks, the precise object of which, whether 
 to indicate tone or emphasis, is not ascertained, should not be 
 allowed in preference to a due regard to quantity, and the ge- 
 neral analogy of Latin pronunciation, to regulate our syllabic 
 emphasis. Accent and emphasis are not identical properties ; 
 nor should ancient long quantity, and our English syllabic em- 
 phasis be confounded, although the latter be found to fall most 
 frequently upon a long syllable. And, although, in the preceding 
 examples, the first syllable of idolum be long, as well as the se- 
 cond ; yet, whatever may be the position or the object of the 
 Greek accent, considering it as a Latin word, it appears to me, 
 that, in our pronunciation, the quantity of both syllables will be 
 the best regarded, by laying the emphasis on the middle syllable. 
 By " the accent," whatever may have been its original import, 
 the modern Greeks evidently mean nothing but ictus or syl- 
 labic emphasis. I asked an intelligent Greek to pronounce, in 
 their usual way, the word !tcuAov; which he did thus ; itholon, 
 giving the diphthong the diphthongal sound of our English i (ai), 
 throwing the emphasis on the first syllable, and thus naturally, 
 1 do not say necessarily, giving an improper short quantity to the 
 second. 
 
360 
 
 U iii such words as usucapio, usuvenio^ is long, being the 
 termination of an ablative naturally long. Jupiter ', being a 
 contraction, has u long. 
 
 RULE IX. 
 
 OF THE FIRST SYLLABLE OF DISSYLLABIC PRETERITES. 
 
 Preterites of two syllables have the first long ; as veni, 
 vidii vici, wi. 
 
 Fortunatus et ille deos qui novit agrestes Virg. 
 Venit summa dies, et ineluctable tempus Virg. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. These seven, bibi, scidi from scindo^ (for abscidi is long 
 from abscida, absctdi, short from abscindo,} fidi from^findo, 
 (for fidi, and confldi, fromjido are long,) tiili^ dedi, steli, sttti, 
 have the first syllable short. 
 
 Claudite jam rivos, pueri ; sat prata btberunt \ 7 irg. 
 Cui mater media sese tulit obvia sylva Virg. 
 
 RULE X. 
 
 OF THE TWO FIRST SYLLABLES OF REDUPLICATED PRE- 
 TERITES. 
 
 Preterites doubling their first syllable have that syllable 
 and the following, both short ; as tetigi, pepuli, peperiy di- 
 dtci, tutudi, cccidi from cado. 
 
 Tityre, te patulee cecini sub tegmine fagi Virg. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. Cecidi from ccedo, and pepedi, have the second sylla- 
 ble long ; and likewise those preterites, in which it is fol- 
 lowed by two consonants ; nsfefelli, nibmordi. 
 
 Ebrius et petulans, qui nullum forte cecidit Juv. 
 
 Extulit, et coelo palmas cum voce tctendit Virg. 
 
 RULE XI. 
 
 OF THE FIRST SYLLABLE OF DISSYLLABIC SUPINES. 
 
 Supines of two syllables, and the participles formed from 
 them, have the first syllable long; as casum, msum, motum, 
 vls-us, motus, v/suws, mdtwus. 
 
 Terribilqs visu formae, letumque, laborque Virg. 
 
 Quos ego sed motos prsestat coniponere fluctus Virg. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 1. Saturn coming from sera : citum from cieo 1 ,- Ittum from 
 
 1 Citnm from do is long; hence citus, accitus, excltus, concilus. 
 Kxc'itum ruit ad portus, ct iittora complentVirg. 
 
 
361 
 
 lino * ; situm from sino ; itum from eo ; dtttum from do , ru* 
 turn (as well as ruitum, and hence dirutum, erutum, &c.) from 
 rz/o ; qmtum from <7M<?0 ; ratum from r^or ; and futum from 
 the obsoleteywo, (but whence/^tarws) have the first syllable 
 short. 
 
 Corripuit sese, et tectis citus extulit altis Virg. 
 
 Cui datus hserebam custos, cursusque regebam Virg. 
 
 Effigiemque toro locat, hand ignaYafiituri Virg. 
 
 Diruta sunt aliis, uni mihi Pergama restant Ovid. 
 v 2. Statum is common : hence we find staturus, constaturus, 
 obstaturus, stamen, Statius, a man's name; &n&priestitum t 
 status -us, status -a -urn, statio, statuo, stabilis, stabnlum, sta- 
 tor, statim, &c., the former of which are said to come from 
 sto, the latter from sisto. 
 
 Non prcEstcita sibi praestat natura sed unus Prosp. 
 
 Constatura fuit Megalensis purpura centum Mart. 
 
 Urbem quam statuo vestra est. Virg. 
 
 Hie status in ccelo multos permansit in annos Ovid. 
 
 Tune res immense placuit statura labore Lucan. 
 
 RULE XII. 
 
 OF THE FIRST SYLLABLE OF POLYSYLLABIC PRETERITES 
 AND SUPINES. 
 
 Preterites and supines of more than two syllables have the 
 same quantity in their first syllable as the present ; thus vo- 
 cavi and vocatum have the first short, because the first of 
 voco is short ; clamavi and clamatum have the first long, be- 
 cause the first of clamo is long. 
 
 Si vocat oflicium turba cedente vehetur Juv. 
 
 Induit, implevitque mero, divosque vocavit Virg. 
 
 Protinus ad sedes Priami clamore vocati Virg, 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 I. The following are short in the first syllable, although 
 coming from long presents, postii, positum, from pdiio ; ge- 
 nui, gentium, from gigno ; potui from jjossum ; solatum, vo- 
 lutum, from solvo and volvo. 
 
 Saecula ? qui tanti talem genuere parentes Virg. 
 
 Et circum Iliades, crinem de more sUuta Virg. 
 
 Citus in the sense of divisus is long, coming from do ; but citus, 
 quick, is short, from deo, and hence conc/tus, hastened. The verb 
 and adverb c#o,formed from it, are short, and also the compounds, 
 as excito, concito, reclto. 
 
 1 OblUus, smeared, 1'rom lino, is to be distinguished from Mlus, 
 having forgotten, from obiivi&cor. 
 
362 
 RULE XIII. 
 
 OF THE PENULTIMATE OF POLYSYLLABIC SUPINES. 
 
 Supines of more than two syllables, in atum, etum and 
 utum, lengthen the last syllable but one ; as amdtum, dele- 
 turn, minutum. 
 
 Supines in itum from preterites in ivi, also have the pe- 
 nultimate long ; as cupivi, cupitum, petivi, petitum, polivi, 
 politum. But the compounds of eo, ambio, if it be a com- 
 pound, excepted, have the penultimate short 
 
 Supines in itum, coming from any other preterites, shorten 
 the penultimate; as cubui, cubitum, monui, monitum, abclevi 9 
 abofitum, agnovi, agnitum, cognovi, cognitum, credidi, credi- 
 tum. Recensitum of recenseo is long, because it originally 
 comes from the obsolete censio, censivi. 
 
 Namque ferunt luctu Cycnum Phaethontis amdti Virg. 
 
 Deletas Volscorum acies, cecidisse Camillam Virg. 
 
 Hectore, qui redit exuvias indiitus Achillei Virg. 
 
 Adjicit extreme lapides oriente petitos Ov. 
 
 Cedamus Phoebo, et moniti meliora sequamur Virg. 
 
 Prisca recensitis evolvite saecula fastis Claud. 1 
 
 RULE XIV. 
 
 OF THE PENULTIMATE OF PARTICIPLES IN R US. 
 
 Participles in rus always lengthen the last syllable but 
 one ; as amaturus, habitants, ausurus. 
 
 Si periturus abis, et nos rape in omnia tecum Virg. 
 
 OF THE INCREMENTS OF NOUNS. 
 
 By the increments of nouns, is meant the syllable, or syl- 
 lables, by which an oblique case exceeds the nominative. 
 
 If a noun has one syllable, in an oblique case, more than 
 the nominative, it is said to have one increment, or increase; 
 
 i i 
 
 as rex, re-gis ; sermo, ser-mo-nis. 
 
 The quantity of the increment of all the other oblique 
 cases is regulated by that of the genitive ; as scrmoni, ser- 
 
 1 Divido, whether it be formed immediately from mdco, or dc 
 rived from the Etruscan iduo, follows, in quantity, the analogy oi 
 video ; thus divtdo, divisi, divtsum, the second syllable of Perf. 
 and Sup. being long. Gaudeo, too, probably also a kindred verb, 
 has gavisus, second long. 
 
 Et penitus toto divisos orbc Britannos Virg. 
 
 Armaquc gavlso referat captiva parent! Claud. 
 
363 
 
 monem, sernionibus, &c. in all which the o is long, because 
 the o of scrmonis is long. There is but one exception to 
 this rule, viz. bobus, but this is, in reality, a contraction of 
 bovibus, from bos, bovis. When a word of one syllable in- 
 creases, the penultimate is considered as the increment ; as 
 the re in re-gis from rex, and never, in any word, the last 
 syllable ; and it is to be observed, that, when there are more 
 increments than one, which seldom happens but in the plural, 
 they are to be reckoned in retrograde order, beginning with 
 the penultimate. 
 
 Nouns, in general, have but one increase in the singular; 
 but iter 9 jecur when its genitive is jecinoris, supellex, and 
 the compounds ofcaput, ending in ps, have two increments: 
 
 Thus, tier, i ti ne ris. 
 
 jecur, je ci no ris. 
 
 supellex, supel lee ti Us. 
 
 anccps, an ci pi tis. 
 
 The dative and ablative of the third declension, in ibus 9 
 
 1 2 
 
 have generally two increments ; as ser mo ni bus. The 
 forementioned words have three increments; thus, 
 
 1 2 3 
 
 i ti ne ri bus. 
 
 je ci no ri bus. 
 
 supel lee ti li bus. 
 
 an ci pi ti bus. 
 
 The uncommon increase of these words arises from their 
 originally coming from nominatives, now obsolete, which 
 consisted of a greater number of syllables than the nomi- 
 natives to which they are now assigned. 
 
 OF THE INCREMENTS OF THE SINGULAR NUMBER. 
 
 Of the 1st, 4fth 9 and 5th, Declensions. 
 
 In the first, fourth, and fifth declensions, there is no incre- 
 ment in the singular, but that in which a vowel precedes an- 
 other ; as in the first, in such words as aulai, aurai; in the 
 fourth, in anuis, anui, instead of anus, anui, &c. ; and in 
 rei and spei, and the like, of the fifth : the quantity of all 
 which words is ascertained by the first general rule. 
 
 INCREMENTS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 RULE XV. 
 
 The increments of the second declension are short; as 
 tener, teneri ,- satur 9 saturi ; vir, tflri ; puer, pueri ! . 
 
 1 These nouns in r are formed, by Apocope, from nouns in us; 
 
364- 
 
 Praesentemque viris intentant omniu mortem Virg. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. Iber, Iberi, and its compound Celtiber, Celtiberi, 
 lengthen the penultimate. 
 
 Aut impacatos a tergo horrebis Iberos Virg. 
 
 INCREMENTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 RULE XVI A. 
 
 Nouns in a shorten the penultimate ,- as dogma -dtis. 
 Non quivis videt immodulata poemdta judex Hor. 
 
 RULE XVII. /. 
 
 Nouns in *, compounds of melt, shorten the penultimate; 
 as hydromeli, hydromeUtis. 
 
 RULE XVIII. O. 
 
 1. ImS) from 0, is short; as car do, cardinis. 
 
 2. Enis, and onis, from o, are long ; as Anio, Anicnis ; 
 Cicero, Ciceronis. 
 
 3. Gentiles in o generally shorten the increment ; as Ma- 
 cedo, Macedonis ; Saxo, Saxonis. To which add Lingones, 
 Senones 9 Teutones, Fangiones, Vascones, with the penultimate 
 short. Some lengthen their penultimate ; as Suessiones, Vet- 
 tones, Burgundiones, Eburones. Juvenal shortens Britones; 
 Martial lengthens it. 
 
 Note. Nouns in on, taken from the Greek wv, which some- 
 times drop the n, preserve in Latin the same quantity in their 
 increments, which they have in Greek ; as Agamemnon or 
 Agamemno, Agamemnonis, with the penultimate short; Dc- 
 miphon or Demipho, Demiphonis, with the penultimate long. 
 
 Sanguine placastis ventos, et virgme caesa Virg. 
 
 Haec turn multiplici populos sermone replebat Virg. 
 
 Non longinqua docent domito quod Saxone Tethys 
 Claud. 
 
 Qua nee terribiles Cimbri, nee Britones unquam Juv. 
 
 Quam veteres braccae Britonis pauperis, et quain Mart. 
 
 Quo ferus injusto petiit Agamemnona ferro Ovid. 
 
 RULE XIX. C. 
 
 Nouns in cc lengthen the penultimate; as halec -cch ; 
 Mclchisedec -dccis. 
 
 as tenerus t puerus,saturus; and, therefore, strictly speaking, they 
 have no increment in their singular. 
 
 
365 
 Halecem sed quam protinus ipsa voret Mart. 
 
 RULE XX. D. 
 
 Nouns in d shorten the penultimate; as David -idis ; 
 Bogud -iidis. 
 
 Erecto indulget Davidis origine lumen Juvenc. 
 
 In sacred poetry, the penultimate of David is often 
 lengthened. 
 
 RULE XXI, L. 
 
 1. Masculines in al shorten the penultimate; as sal, salts, 
 (masc. or neut.) Hannibal -alis. 
 
 2. Neuters in al lengthen alis ; as animal -alis. 
 
 3. Sol lengthens solis ; and also Hebrew nouns in el 
 lengthen the penultimate ; as Michael -elis ; Daniel -elis. 
 
 4. All other nouns in I shorten their increment ; as vigil 
 -tlis : consul -ulis ; exul -ulis. 
 
 Vela dabant laeti, et spumas salis a3re ruebant Virg. 
 Pronaque cum spectent animalia caetera terrain Ovid. 
 Regia solis erat sublimibus alta columnis Ovid. 
 Aut ursum aut pugiles, his nam plebecula gaudet Hor. 
 
 RULE XXII. N. 
 
 1. No certain rule can be given for the quantity of the 
 increment from on. 
 
 Many nouns lengthen the penultimate: as Helicon, Chiron, 
 Demiphon, Simon, Agon, Solon, Lacon, Sicyon, -onis. 
 
 Many shorten it; as Memnon, Action, lason, Agamemnon, 
 Amazon, sindon, Phil&mon -onis. Sidon, Orion, and JEgteon 
 have the penultimate common. (See Rule XVIII.) 
 
 2. Nouns in en shorten mis ; as crimen -mis ; Jlumen -mis. 
 
 3. All other nouns in n lengthen the penultimate ; thus 
 an, anis, as Titan -anis ,- en, enis, as Siren -enis ; in, mis, 
 as delphin -mis ; yn, ynis, as Phorcyn -ynis-> but Hymen -vnis. 
 
 Credit, et excludit sanos Helicone poetas Hor. 
 Et velut absentem certatim Actamia clamant Ov. 
 JEg&ona suis immania terga lacertis Ov. 
 Audierat duros laxantem JEgceona nexus Stat. 
 Quodque magis mirum est, auctorem criminis hujus 
 
 Mart. 
 
 Concitat iratus validos Titanas in arma Ov. 
 Tollere consuetas audent delphlnes in auras Ovid. 
 
 RULE XXIII. R. 
 
 1. Ar neuter lengthens am; as calcar -aris. 
 
366 
 
 Except. These neuters shorten ctris ; bacchar, jubar, nec- 
 tar, -arts, to which add hepar -atis ; also the adjective par, 
 parts, with its compounds ; as impar, imparts ; dispar, dis- 
 parts, &c. 
 
 2. These nouns ending in r lengthen the increment ; as 
 Ndris , Car, Carts ; fur, furis ; ver, verts ; Recimer, 
 
 Recimeris ,- Byzer, Byzeris ; Ser, Scris ; Iber, Iberis, as well 
 as Iber, Iberi, of the second declension. 
 
 3. Greek nouns in ter lengthen teris ; as crater -eris ,- 
 character -eris ; spinther -eris. Except tether -eris, the pe- 
 nultimate short. 
 
 4. Or lengthens oris ; as amor, timor, -oris : also^verbal 
 nouns, and comparatives ; as victor, melior, -oris. 
 
 Except. 1. Neuters; as marmor, ceqttor, -oris. 2. Greek 
 nouns in or ,- as Hector, rhetor, -oris. 3. Arbor, -oris, femi- 
 nine, and the adjective memor (formerly memoris], memoris. 
 
 Ador forms adoris, or adoris, the penultimate being com- 
 mon, whence adoreus, in Virgil, Horace, and Claudian. 
 Decoris, long, is said to come from decor; decoris short, from 
 decus. 
 
 5. Other nouns in r, not mentioned, shorten the penulti- 
 mate : thus ar, aris, masculine ; as C&sar -aris ; lar, laris : 
 er, eris, of any gender, as aer, aeris ; mulier 'eris ; cadaver, 
 -eris ; also tier (formerly itiner), itineris, and verberis from 
 the obsolete verber : ur, uris, and oris, as vultur, murmur, 
 
 furfur, -uris ; femur, robur, jecur l , ebur, -oris : yr, yris, as 
 martyr, martyris. 
 
 Seu spumantis equi foderet calcdribus armos Virg. 
 
 It poYtisjubare exorto delecta juventus Virg. 
 
 Ardentes auro, et paribus lita corpora guttis Virg. 
 
 Velleraque ut foliis depectant tenuia Seres Virg. 
 
 Indulgent vino, et vertunt crateras ahenos Virg. 
 
 Inque dies quanto circum magis (Ether is sestus Lucr. 
 
 Quo magis aeternum da dictis, diva, leporem* Lucr. 
 
 Multa super Priamo rogitans, super Hectore multa 
 Virg. 
 
 Si nigrum obscuro comprenderit dera cornu -Virg. 
 
 Aspice, ventosi ceciderunt murmuris aurae Virg. 
 
 RULE XXIV AS. 
 
 1. Latin nouns in as lengthen the increment; as Maece- 
 nas, cetas, pietas, -atis ; vas, vdsis, a vessel. 
 
 1 Andjecinoris. 
 
 * Distinguish lepor om ? (elegance), from lepus.oris, (a hare). 
 
367 
 
 Except anas, anatis : mas, maris ; and vas, vadis, (a se- 
 curity), their penultimate being short. 
 
 2. Greek nouns in as shorten adis, dtis and anis; as Pallas, 
 lampas, -adis ; artocreas, artocreatis , Melas, Melanis. 
 Insignem pietate virum tot adire labores Virg. 
 Tyrtaeusque mares animos in martia bella Hor. 
 Instar montis equum divina Palladis arte Virg. 
 
 RULE XXV. - ES. 
 
 js shortens the increment; as miles, militis; seges, segetis; 
 prases, prtzstdis ,- obses, obsidis ; Ceres, Cereris ; pes, pedis, 
 
 Except locuples, quies, mansues, -etis ; hares, merces, -edis : 
 also Greek nouns which have etis ; as lebes, Tholes, tapes, 
 magnes, -etis, all with the penultimate long. 
 
 Metiri se quemque suo modulo acpede, verum est Hor. 
 
 Ascanium surgentem, et spes hceredis liili Virg. 
 
 Viginti fulvos operoso ex sere lebetas Ovid. 
 
 RULE XXVI. -- IS. 
 
 Nouns in is shorten the increment; as lapis, Phyllis, -i 
 cinis, cineris ; sanguis, mngumis. 
 
 Except. 1. Glis, gliris, and vires, the plural of vis, which 
 have the penultimate long. 2. Latin nouns which have itis; 
 as dis, dltis ; Us, lltis ; Quiris, Samnis, -itis. But Charis, a 
 Greek noun, has Charitis short. 3. Crenis, Crenldis; Nesis, 
 Nesidis ; Psophis, Psophidis, lengthen the penultimate, but 
 the last has it once short in Statius. 4. Greek nouns in is, 
 which have also the termination in ; as Salamis, or Salamin, 
 -mis. 
 
 Immolat et pcenam scelerato ex sanguine sumit Virg. 
 
 Sic fatus validis ingentem viribus hastam Virg. 
 
 Insequeris tamen hunc, et lite moraris iniqua Hor. 
 
 Tres fuerant Charites, sed dum mea Lesbia vixit Auson. 
 
 Sylvaque, quae fixam pelago Nes'ida coronat Stat. 
 
 Tyburis umbra tui, Teucer Salamlna patremque Hor. 
 
 RULE XXVII, - OS. 
 
 Os has its increment long; as nepos, nepotis ; Jlos, Jloris ; 
 os, oris ; custos, odis ; also Greek nouns in os ; as rhinoceros 
 -otis ; Tros, heros, -dis. 
 
 Except. Three have their increment short, bos, bovis; com- 
 pos, impos, -otis. 
 
 Qui legitis Jlores, et humi nascentia fraga Virg. 
 Egressi optata potiuntur Troes arena Virg. 
 Perpetui tergo bpvis, et lustralibus extis Virg. 
 
368 
 RULE XX VII I. ~US. 
 
 Nouns in us shorten the increment; as lepus, carpus, 
 vellus -cris ; tripus -odis. 
 
 Except. 1. Those nouns which have udis, uris, or utis, 
 lengthen the penultimate ; as incus, incudis ; tellus, telluris ; 
 salus, saliitis. But these three are short ; Liguris from Ligur 
 or Ligus ; pecudis from the obsolete pecus ; and intercutis 
 from intercus. 
 
 2. Comparatives in us lengthen the penultimate, preserv- 
 ing the same quantity as in the masculine and feminine gen- 
 ders ; as melius, melioris. 
 
 Ut canis in vacuo leporem cum Gallicus arvo Ovid. 
 
 In medio : sacri tripodes viridesque coronae Virg. 
 
 Fas etjura sinunt : rivos deducere nulla Virg. 
 
 Non ego te, Ligurum ductor fortissime bello Virg. 
 
 Perge, decet, forsan miseros meliora sequentur virg. 
 
 RULE XXIX. YS. 
 
 1 . Ys shortens the increment ijdis, or ydos ; as chlamys 
 -ydis or -ydos. 
 
 2. Ys lengthens jjnis ; as Trachys -ynis. 
 
 In medio, chlamyde, et pictis conspectus in armis 
 
 Vir 
 
 I 
 
 Herculea Trachy?ie jube, sub imagine regis Ovid. 
 
 RULE XXX. BS, PS, MS. 
 
 Nouns in s preceded by a consonant, shorten their incre- 
 ment ' ; as ccelebs -ibis stips, stipis , Lcelaps -apis , Cecrops, 
 Dolops, -opis ; auceps -cupis ,- hiems -emis : also, anceps -cl- 
 pitis ; biceps, bicipitis, and similar compounds of caput, in 
 which both increments are short. 
 
 Except. The following lengthen their increment: Cy- 
 clops -opis ; sepgy sepis ,- gryps -yphis ; Cercops -opis ; plebs, 
 plcbis ; hy drops -opis. 
 
 Hie Dolopwn manus, hie saevus tendebat Achilles Virg. 
 
 Ad matres primo anctjntes, oculisque malignis Virg. 
 
 Antiphatae memores immansuetique Cyclopis rOvid. 
 
 Fortunam, et mores antiquae plebis, et idem Hor. 
 
 1 That is, when a single consonant comes between the incre- 
 ment and the termination. If two consonants intervene, the pe- 
 nultimate is necessarily long by position ; as excors, excordis ; pars, 
 partis. 
 
369 
 
 RULE XXXI. T. 
 
 Nouns ending in t shorten the penultimate of itis ; as 
 wput, capitis ; sinciput^ sindpitis. 
 
 Magna fuit quondam capitis reverentia cani Ov. 
 
 RULE XXXII. ,X. 
 
 1. A noun in x shortens the vowel before gis in the ge- 
 nitive; as tiarpax -agis ; grex, gregis ; aquilex -Kgis ; Biturix 
 -rgis ; Styx -ygis ; Allobrox -ogis; conjux -ugis ; Phryx -ygis. 
 
 Except. Lex, legis ; illex, exlex, -legis ; rex, regis ; coc- 
 cyx -ygis, mastix -igis ,- and frugis from the obsolete frux, 
 are long. 
 
 Quinque greges illi balantum, quina redibant Virg. 
 
 Ad Styga Taenaria est ausus descendere porta Ovid. 
 
 Prima dedit leges -> Ovid. 
 
 2. A noun in ex shortens ids , as vertex -ids ; pontifex 
 -ids. Except vibex (rather vibix) -Ids, long. , 
 
 Qualem virgineo demessum pollice florem Virg. 
 
 3. Other nouns in x generally lengthen the increment : 
 
 thus nouns in ax ; as pax, pads ; fornax -ads. Except. 
 
 Abax, smilax, Atrax, dropax, anthrax, fax, At ax, climax, 
 panax, opopanax, styrax, colax, the compounds of phylax 
 and corax, as Arctophylax, Nomophylax, nycticorax, phala- 
 crocorax, all have ads short. 
 
 In ex ; as vervex -eds. Except. Nex, neds; vids and 
 
 precis, wanting nominatives ; also fcenisex, resex, -eds ; and 
 supellex -ectilis, have the penultimate short. 
 
 In ix ; as radix, dcatrix, felix, nutrix, victrix, altrix, and, 
 probably, (notwithstanding a line in Lucilius) following the 
 usual analogy 'stf verbal nouns, natrix -ids. Except. Ap- 
 pendix, fornix, coxendix, chcenix, Cilix, calix, pix, illix (a 
 decoy), hystrix, varix, t filix, salix, larix, -ids ; and nix, mvis, 
 and mastix ichis (JJL gum), which have the penultimate short. 
 Mastix -Igis (a Greek noun), a whip, is long. 
 
 In ox ; as vox, vods ,- velox -ods, Except. Cappadox, 
 
 prxcox, -ods, short. 
 
 In ux ; as lux, litcis , Pollux -luds. Except, jyux, 
 
 crux, mix, trux have uds short. 
 
 In yx ; as bombyx -yds. Except onyx -ijchis ; Eryx 
 
 -yds ; calyx -yds; Nary x- yds, which have the penultimate 
 short. 
 
 Note. Syphax*, sandy x and Bebiyx have the penultimate 
 of the genitive common. 
 
 1 The short quantity of Syphax may be doubted. The line 
 from Claudian, quoted by Smetius, as an instance, lias been 
 deemed incorrect. 
 
 5 B 
 
370 
 
 Fraternaeque fidem pads petiitque, deditque Ovid. 
 Dicitefellces aniraae, tuque, optime vates Virg. 
 ~EA,jilicem curvis invisam pascit aratris Virg. 
 Contritumque simul cum mastwhe confer anethum Seren. 
 
 Voce vocat Virg. 
 
 Mancipiis locuples, eget aeris Cappadocum rex Hor. 
 
 Lucis egens aer Ovid. 
 
 Annibalis spolia, et victi monumenta Syphacis Prop. 
 Bebrycis et Scythici procul inclementia sacri Val. Flac. 
 Possessus Baccho saeva Bebrycis in aula Sil. Ital. 
 
 PLURAL INCREMENTS. A y E, 7, 0, U. 
 
 RULE XXXIII. 
 
 1 . A, e, 0, in plural increments, are long ; as musarum, 
 
 dominorum, ambabus, rebus. 
 Moenala transieram latebris horrendayerarwB Ov. 
 Sunt lacrymse rerum, et mentem mortalia tangunt Virg. 
 Sic ubi dispositam, quisquis fuit ille dedrum Ovid. 
 Exin se cuncti divinis rebus ad urbem Virg. 
 
 2. / and u are short ; as sennombus, tribus, qmbus, artibus 
 from ars ; verubus, lacubus, artubus from artus. 
 
 Montibus in liquidas pinus descenderat undas Ov. 
 
 Pars in frusta secant, verubusque trementia figunt Virg. 
 Bobus, or bubus, has been already noticed as a contraction, 
 from bovibus ; and, consequently, is long. 
 
 Nescia, nee quicquam junctis debentia bobus Ovid. 
 
 INCREMENT OF VERBS. 
 
 When any part of a verb exceeds in number of syllables 
 the second person singular of the present indicative, active, 
 the excess is considered as the increment or increase. As 
 in nouns, the last syllable is never reckoned the increment ; 
 so that when there is onJy one increment, it must be the pen- 
 ultimate. 
 
 i i i 
 
 Da mus, fie tis, sci res have one increment, because 
 
 i 2 
 
 das, jles> and scis are monosyllables. A ma ba mus, 
 
 i 2 
 
 a ma bi tis have two increments, because they exceed 
 
 123 
 
 amas by two syllables. A ma ve ri tis has three 
 
 1234 
 
 increments. Au di e ba mi ni has four increments, 
 because it has four syllables more than audis. In deter- 
 mining the increments of deponent verbs, an active voice 
 
 i 
 may be supposed; thus co na tur has one increment, 
 
371 
 
 1 ' 2 123 
 
 co na ba tur 9 two, co na re mi ni, three, because 
 conas of the fictitious active voice has but two syllables. 
 The increments of these may also be regulated by other 
 verbs of the same conjugation, which have an active voice. 
 
 RULE XXXIV. -- A. 
 
 A is long in the increments of verbs ; as stabam^ ama- 
 rem, legebamus, audiebdmini, bibamus, veneramus. 
 
 Stabat in egregiis Arcentis films armis Virg. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1 . Do and its compounds of the first conjugation have a 
 short in their first increment ; as ddmus, ddbunt, dare , also 
 circunddmus, venundabo, &c., the penultimate being short. 
 But in any other increment, do, like its compounds of the 
 third conjugation, is long ; as dabamus, dederatis, circundd- 
 credamus. 
 
 Haec ego vasta dabo, et lato te limite ducam Virg. 
 Luce palam certum est igni circunddre muros Virg. 
 
 RULE XXXV. -- E. 
 
 E is long in the increments of verbs ; as amemus, ama- 
 remus, amavissetis, docebam,, docerem^ legebat, legerunt, le- 
 geris, legere, both of the future passive, audiemus, &c. 
 
 Flebant, et cineri ingrato supreme Jerebcmt- Virg. 
 
 Sed qui pacis opus citharam cum voce moveres Ovid. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. E before r is short in the first increment of any pre- 
 sent and imperfect of the third conjugation ; as legeris or 
 legere of the present indicative, passive ; legere, the present 
 infinitive active, and imperative, passive; legerem and le- 
 gerer, the imperfect subjunctive, active and passive. But 
 reris and rere, in the third, and in other conjugations, are 
 long ; as legereris, legerere amareris, amarere ; docereris, 
 docerere, &c. 
 
 An quia, cum legeret vernos Proserpina flores Ovid. 
 Nostra, neque ad sedes victor veherere paternas Virg. 
 
 2. Beris and bere are every where short ; as amaberis, 
 amabere ; doceberis, docebere ; and among the antients, lar- 
 giberis, experibere, of the fourth Excepting where the b 
 belongs also to the termination of the present, scriberis, 
 and scribere, of the future, passive, being long by the gene- 
 ral rule. 
 
 Hoc tamen infelix miseram solabere mortem Virg. 
 2 B2 
 
372 
 
 3. E, before ram, rim, ro, and the persons formed from 
 them, .is short 1 ; as amaveram,amaveras, amaverim., amavZro, 
 docueram, eram, fueram*, potero, potuero, &c. 
 
 Vincere, nee duro poteris convellere ferro Virg. 
 By Systole, the poets sometimes shorten e before runt ; as 
 Obstupui, steteruntque comae, et vox faucibus hsesit 
 
 Virg. 
 Di tibi divitias dederunt, artemque fruendi Ilor. 
 
 RULE XXXVI. /. 
 
 7 is short in any increment of verbs ; as amabimus, doce- 
 bitur, legimus, cupitis, aggredimur, audiremini, audirmni, au- 
 diebammi. 
 
 Linqtiimus Ortygiae portus, pelagoque volamus Virg. 
 
 Vemmus* ; et latos indagine cinximus agros Ovid. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1 . These have i long ; simus, vellmus, nollmus, with the 
 other persons coming from them and their compounds ; as 
 sitis, velitis, nolltis ; nollte, nolltote ; maltmus, malitis ; pos- 
 slmus, possitis, &c. 
 
 Et gratam sortem, tutas modo simus, habemus Ovid. 
 
 2. / before vi 9 in preterites, is always long ; as pefivi, 
 quteswi, audivi ; and also in the other persons ; as petlvisti, 
 qiicesivit, audlvimus, &c. 
 
 Cessi, et sublato montem genitore petlvi Virg. 
 
 3. The first increment of the fourth conjugation is long 3 ; 
 as audlmuS) auditis, attditur, audit o, aud/rem, scimus, sclre; 
 also in the antient audibo, and hi audibam sometimes found 
 
 contracted, and the usual ibam and Ibo of eo. When a 
 
 vowel follows, the i is short by position, as audmnt, audie- 
 bam. 
 
 Omnibus auditur. Sonus est, qui vivit in ilia Ovid. 
 Tu ne cede malis ; sed contra audentior ito Virg. 
 
 Ibimus in poenas Ovid. 
 
 Observe, That imus in every preterite, and in that of the 
 
 1 This is applicable only to verbs in their natural state, and not 
 to such as have suffered contraction. 
 
 2 In such verbs of the fourth conjugation as have, in the first 
 persons plural of their present and perfect indicative, the same 
 words in regard to spelling, there is a distinction by the quan- 
 tity ; the penultimate of the former being long, as vemmus, re- 
 perimns ; that of the latter short, as vemmus, reperimus. 
 
 3 In Qrfturque miserrima csedes Virg. the verb is of the 3d 
 conjugation. 
 
373 
 
 fourth conjugation also, is short; as juvimus, vidimus, fe- 
 cimus, veriimus, the first increment being short ; amavimus, 
 adolevimusy pepercimus, munimmus the second being short. 
 
 Bis sex Nelidaefuimus conspecta juventus Ovid. 
 (See the preceding note.) 
 
 Rimus and Ritis. 
 
 Rimus and ritis in the preterite subjunctive are short. 
 Egrerimus, nosti ; et nimium meminisse necesse est Virg. 
 Rimus and ritis in the perfect future (future subjunctive) 
 are common \ 
 
 Videritis Stellas illic, ubi circulus axem Ovid. 
 Dein cum millia multefecerimus Catull. 
 Cum maris lonii transieritis aquas Ovid. 
 
 RULE XXXVII O. 
 
 in the increments of verbs is always long ; as amatote, 
 Jacitote, itote. 
 
 Hoc tamen amborum verbis estate rogati Ovid. 
 
 1 In regard to the quantity of the terminations rimus and ritis 
 of the subjunctive, the antient grammarians were divided ; and it 
 is not an easy matter to ascertain it. Diomedes, Probus and Ser- 
 vius thought the future long : Vossius seemed to incline to the 
 same opinion, though he owned that there were authorities for its 
 being considered short. Diomedes and Agroetius thought the 
 preterite short ; Probus, long. It is not always easy to distin- 
 guish these two tenses, since, without materially altering the sense, 
 they may be, in many instances, interconvertible. The perfect of 
 the potential seems to be both past- perfect contingent and future- 
 perfect contingent. The perfect future has also so great an affi- 
 nity to the preterperfect potential that often a word may, consis- 
 tently with the sense, be suppposed to belong to either. As these 
 tenses are usually interpreted in English, there is a great resem- 
 blance in their structure, as well as in the ideas which they ex- 
 press. Both are composed of verbs in present time, the one a verb 
 of present liberty or the like, the other of present intention or ob- 
 ligation; of an infinitive denoting subsequent or depending pos- 
 session ; and a participle significant of the perfection of the ac- 
 tion denoted by the verb : thus, " I may have written," " I shall 
 have written." We find by A. Gellius, 18, 2. that it was a sub- 
 ject of dispute at Rome whether the tense in rim ought to be set 
 down as past or future, or both. Such disputes may, perhaps, 
 have arisen from the accessary circumstances which are implied, 
 besides the immediate action of the verb ; in the same manner 
 as, in English, two forms precisely the same in their structure and 
 reference are characterized by certain grammarians under diffe- 
 rent times, namely, " I may write," and " I shall write," the for- 
 
374 
 
 RULE XXXVIII.- U. 
 
 U in the increments of verbs is short ; as possumtis, w- 
 
 y siimus, qiwesumus. 
 Qui dare certa ferae, dare vulnera possumus hosti Ov. 
 For the penultimate of unts, see Rule XIV. 
 
 AN APPENDIX. 
 
 Concerning the Quantity of the First and Middle 
 Syllables of certain other Words. 
 
 I. Patronymics masculine, in IDES, or ADES, generally 
 have the penultimate short ; as Priamides, Atlantiades. 
 Except those formed from nouns in eus ; as Pelldes ; also 
 Befides, Lycurgldes, Amphiaraides, Japetiomdes, which 
 lengthen it. 
 
 Atque hie Priarmdem laniatum corpore toto Virg. 
 Par sibi Pelldes : nee mania Tartara sentit Ovid. 
 
 II. Patronymics, and those a-kin to them, in AIS, EIS, 
 ITIS, ois, OTIS, INE and ONE, generally lengthen the pen- 
 ultimate; as Achdis, Ptolemais, Ckryseis 9 Jx/n&i 9 Memphi- 
 tis, Oceamtis, Miriois, Latdis, Icariotis, Nildtis, Nerme, 
 Acrisione. But Thebais and Phocais shorten the penulti- 
 mate. Nereis is common. 
 
 mer being named, from the accessary idea, a present, and the lat- 
 ter, from the depending action, a future ; while, in reality, if w< 
 apply the same criterion to them, they are either both present o 
 both future*. Indeed, it has been contended that the future had 
 the termination rim as well as ro ; so that it is reckoned not im- 
 probable that both may originally have been but one tense, which 
 had both a past and a future reference. In addition to the au- 
 thorities for reckoning rimus and ritis common, there is likewise 
 reason to consider ris of the future at least, as common ; and this 
 is an argument, founded on the analogy observed in other tenses 
 between the quantity of the final syllable of the second person 
 singular, and the penultimate of the first and second persons plu- 
 ral increasing a syllable, for considering the following rimus and 
 
 ritis also common. Ris, rimus and ritis of the preterite are 
 
 commonly accounted short ; but it is exceedingly probable, that, 
 whether referred to the preterite, or perfect future, they still 
 might be used as common. 
 
 a The principle of arrangement, here briefly intimated several years ago, the 
 present writer afterwards adopted, and partially explained, in his arrangement 
 of what are termed the English tenses. See an English Grammar (published 
 m 1813), Preface; pp. 82, 3, 4, &c, ; 210, 11, &c. ; 219, &c. In a small tract, 
 
 i 
 
375 
 
 Protinus ^Egiiies, rapta Minoide, Dian Ovid. 
 
 Thebaides jussis sua tempora frondibus ornant Ovid. 
 III. Adjectives in ACUS, icus, IDUS, and IMUS, generally 
 have the penultimate short ; as JEgyptiacus, dtemoniacus ; 
 academicus, aromaticus; calUdus, perftdus, lepidus ; Jinifimus, 
 legitimus ; also superlatives, pulcherrtmus, fortissimus, opti- 
 mus, maximus, &c. Except meracus, opacus ; am'zcus, apricus, 
 pudlcus, mendicus, posflcus ; fidus, infidus / bimus, trimus, 
 quadrimus, patrimus, matrimus, opmus ; and the two super- 
 latives, Imus, and primus. 
 
 appended to Ruddiman's Rudiments, (first published, I believe, in 1820,) 
 Dr. John Hunter, the learned and justly respected Professor of Humanity in 
 the University of St. Andrew's, has made the same principle the basis of a new 
 arrangement and explication of the Latin and Greek moods and tenses. The 
 leading principles upon which he proceeds are, 1st, " By separating the time 
 " from the other circumstances involved in those forms of the Latin verb, 
 " called the tenses of the indicative and the subjunctive mood" [potential?] 
 and, 2nd, By assuming that, as the auxiliary verbs in English employed to ren- 
 der the tenses of the subjunctive mood, are all indicative, " it follows, that the 
 " tenses of the Latin subjunctive, or potential, or optative, as in certain instances 
 " it has been called, as well as the subjunctive and optative of the Greek verb, 
 " which involve these auxiliaries, and are rendered into English by means of 
 them, are also INDICATIVE." Conformably to these principles, Dr. H. thus 
 classes the Latin tenses : 
 
 Presents. Pasts corresponding. 
 
 Indie. Pres. Scribo, Indie. Imperf. Scribebam, 
 
 Perf. Scripsi, Plup. Scripseram. 
 
 In the preceding arrangement, it appears that Dr. H., guided solely by 
 the auxiliaries implied, and not regarding the simple energy of the tense, has 
 omitted to dispose of the tense scripsi, "I wrote." As scribebam, "I was 
 writing," corresponds as a past to scribo, "I am writing," as a present; so, 
 it appears to me, does scripsi, " I wrote," correspond to scribo, " I write." 
 Had we not seen this little tract most ostentatiously lauded, in a number of 
 the New Edinburgh Review, (No. V.) which Jas just come under our notice, 
 in an article evidently written by a zealous disciple and advocate, but, at the 
 same time, an acute critic, as exhibiting something new and highly important, 
 we should not have deemed it worth while to prefer any claim to a novelty, if 
 it be such, which, as far as regards the learned languages, we never did think, 
 and do not even now think, of much practical utility ; nor to assert, that, nei- 
 ther to Dr. Hunter, whom we never had the pleasure of seeing or hearing, 
 nor to any other person, have we been, in any way whatever, indebted for a 
 single hint or suggestion on this important subject, had not the critic stated 
 his having " seen so many of Dr. Hunter's peculiar doctrines plagiarised, and 
 palmed upon the world as original discoveries, by those who had enjoyed the 
 benefit of his prelections at St. Andrew's." As, however, neither Dr. H., nor 
 the Reviewer, seems to have attempted an explanation of the principle, and 
 although this may not be the proper place for it, we shall endeavour, by 
 a few imperfect hints very hastily thrown together, in some degree to sup- 
 ply the omission. That all propositions, whether certain or contingent, or 
 whatever their forms may be, or whatever may be the grammatical designation 
 of the words in which they are enunciated, are either sententially indicative, 
 
376 
 
 Utque suum laqueis, quos callidus abdidit auceps Ov. 
 
 Fidum .ZEneas afFatur Achaten Virg. 
 
 IV. Adjectives in ALIS, and almost all in ANUS, ENUS, 
 ARUS, ivus, ORUS, and osus, have their penultimate long; as 
 conjugalis, dotalis ; montdnus^ urbunus ; terrenus ; aMurus, 
 av'trus ; cestwus, fugitivus ; canorus, decants , arenosus, per- 
 
 niciosus. But the penultimate of barbarus, opiparus and 
 
 oviparus is short. 
 
 or logically resolvable into simple assertion, has long been considered an esta- 
 blished truth. Hence, in conformity with the nature of our ideas, only one 
 mood, the Indicative, is absolutely necessary for the communication of thought. 
 There is, in English, only this mood ; and yet, although it contains but two 
 tenses, we possess suitable means of denoting, explicitly and distinctly, pos- 
 session, power, obligation, volition, liberty, contingency, and every mode and 
 circumstance of thought that are associated with action, in the various moods 
 and tenses of the learned languages. With respect to tenses or times, it seems 
 equally true, that, whatever may be their number or variety in these languages, 
 there are, in the nature of things, as in English, but two, a past, and a present. 
 In speaking of present time, we here wave altogether the metaphysical con- 
 sideration of the nature of duration. Brief and fleeting as the present moment 
 is, consisting of a portion of time just passed, and a portion just come or 
 coming, there is an assumed period of time, deemed present, whether it be 
 termed the present moment, hour, or day ; and all past time was once what 
 we term present. Verbs, we conceive, have their essence in motion or rest ; 
 and these two must exist in time. Now, only three sorts of time can be con- 
 ceived, past, present, and future. Of these, the first has had an existence ; the 
 second is said to have an existence; but the third is a sort of non-entity ; it is 
 purely ideal, an object of mental contemplation. No action, therefore, can 
 have existed, or can exist, in it. A past action has been before us ; it has been 
 present ; we know, therefore, that it has had an existence ; and we have a right 
 to record it, as having existed, as being past. But an action, contemplated as 
 future, has had no existence, and may never exist ; it is a mere contingency. 
 Every action, therefore, or energy of the mind, must come into existence, in 
 the time deemed relatively present. As far, then, as the accessary part of a 
 verb is concerned, and it is with this part alone of a complex tense, that the 
 subject of the verb comes into direct and immediate contact, no future tense 
 ever existed, or, in the nature of things, could exist, in any language, antient 
 or modern. The execution, or action implied in the radical part of the verb, 
 if future, is so merely by inference ; because the action is, necessarily, poste- 
 rior to the volition or obligation from whence it emanates ; but the volition or 
 obligation must first exist in present time. The accessary idea is, as it were, 
 the medium, or connecting word between the subject or nominative, and the 
 radical part of the verb, whether this be regarded equivalent to a noun, a par- 
 ticiple, or an infinitive. From these few hasty remarks, I think, we may fairly 
 infer, 1st, That all moods are, in sense, essentially Indicative ; and, 2ndly, 
 That, as far as regards the time of a simple tense, and, in complex tenses, as 
 far as the accessary or leading idea is concerned, all tenses, in all languages, 
 whether they be simple or complex, are, in sense and signification, Present or 
 Past, Futurity, when implied or involved, being inferred, not specially ex- 
 pressed. We shall only add, that tenses may also be arranged, as definite or 
 indefinite, in respect of action or time. When a tense denotes the mere name 
 or simple energy of the verb, as write, plough, it is indefinite in action. When 
 it denotes progression or perfection as indicated, respectively, by writing, 
 ploughing, or by written, ploughed, it is definite. All tenses, we apprehend, are 
 indefinite in point of time, specific portions of it requiring to be ascertained by 
 the addition of appropriate terms. This subject is noticed, at considerable 
 length, in the writer's Eng. Gram. pp. 65, 66, 83, 84, &c. 
 
377 
 
 Adjecisset opes, animi irritamen avuri Ovid. 
 
 Pictus acu tunicas, et barbara tegmina crurum Virg. 
 
 V. Verbal adjectives in ILLS shorten the penultimate ; as 
 agiUs, faciliS) fusiliS) ufilis, &c. But those adjectives which 
 are derived from nouns are generally long ; as amlis, cimlis, 
 herHis, &c. to which may be added emits, and subtilis ; also 
 the names of months, Aprllis, Quinctilis, Sextilis. Except 
 humilis, parilis, and siniilis, a word of uncertain origin, whose 
 penultimates are short. But all adjectives in ATILIS, whether 
 derived from verbs or nouns, have the penultimate short; as 
 plicatiliS) versatilis, volatilis, fluviatilis, &c. 
 
 Nee tibi deliciddfaciles, vulgataque tantum Ovid. 
 At qui umbrata gerunt civlli tempora quercu Virg. 
 Et cognoscenti siniilis fuit Ovid. 
 
 VI. Adjectives in INUS, derived from living things, and de- 
 noting possession; also numeral distributives, proper names, 
 and gentile nouns, lengthen the penultimate; as Agmnus, ca- 
 riinus, lepormus; JBlnus, trinus, qulnus; Albmus, Cratlmts, Jus- 
 tinus ; AlexandriniiS) Latmus, Venuslnus, &c. To these may 
 be added certain adjectives having a reference to animal ac- 
 tions ; as adulterinus, festinus, gelaslnus, genulnus, libertmus, 
 mediastlnuS) opinus, and inopltws, paupertlnus, peregrinus, su~ 
 plnus. Also, adjectives of place ; as colllnus, marmus, vici- 
 nus ; and those derived from nouns denoting time ; as matu- 
 tlnus, vespertinus ; and lastly these few, not reducible to a 
 class, Austrmus, Caurinus, cisterninus, clandestmus, repentl- 
 nus. 
 
 Sicaniam peregrma colo Ovid. 
 
 Et matutini volucrum sub culmine cantus Virg. 
 
 VII. Adjectives in INUS, derived from inanimate things, 
 such as plants, trees, stones, and from other nouns generally 
 denoting matter ; also from adverbs of time, or from substan- 
 tives denoting the four seasons of the year, have their pen- 
 ultimate short ; as Amaracmus, crocmus, hyacintlnnus ; ce- 
 drinus, fagmus, oleagmus j adamantmus, amethysfinus, sma- 
 ragdinus , corallmus, crystallmus, murrhinus ; Crastmus, diu- 
 tinus, perendinuS) pristinus, serotinus ; Earinus, oparmus, 
 cliimerinuS) thcnnus ; also annotmus, hornotmus. To which 
 add bombycinuS) elephantinus, which seem to refer rather to 
 the silk, and ivory, than to the animals themselves. 
 
 Et lux cum primum terris se crastina reddet Virg. 
 Mens tantum pristma mansit Ovid. 
 
 VIII. Diminutives in OLUS, OLA, OLUM, and ULUS, ULA, 
 ULUM, shorten the penultimate; as iirceolus, Jiliola, musceo- 
 
378 
 
 lum ; Lectulus, ratiuncida^ corculmi, &c. Nouns in ETAS 
 and ITAS ; as pietas, civitas. 
 
 Ante fugam soboles, si quis mihi parvulus aula Virg. 
 
 IX. Adverbs in TIM lengthen the penultimate ; as oppi- 
 
 datim, dietim, virltim, tributim. Except qffatim and per- 
 
 petim ; also statim, which has however been lengthened by 
 poets living in an age of degenerate Latinity. 
 
 Et velut absentem certdtim Actaeona clamant Ovid. 
 Stulta est fides celare quod prodas statim (Iamb.) 
 
 X. Latin denominatives in ACEUS, ANEUS, ARIUS, ATICUS, 
 ORIUS ; also verbals in ABILIS; and words in ATILIS, what- 
 ever their derivation may be, lengthen their antepenultimate; 
 as cretaceus, testaceus; momentaneus,subitaneus ; cibarius, her- 
 bdrius ; aquaticus, fanaticus ,- censorius, mcssorius ; amabilis, 
 revocabilis ; (except stabilis, from statum, of sisto ; ) pluvia- 
 tilis, plicatiliS) &c. 
 
 Aiunt, cum sibi sint congesta cibaria, sicut Hor. 
 Calcavere pedis, nee solvit aquaticus Auster Ovid. 
 Sic erat instabilis tellus, innabilis unda Ovid. 
 
 XI. Adjectives in icius, derived from nouns, shorten the 
 i of the antepenultimate ; as gentiticius, patricius> tribumcius. 
 Except novicius or ruw/tius. But those which come from su- 
 pines, or participles, lengthen the i of the antepenultimate ; 
 as advecftciuS) commendatlcius, suppositions^ &c. 
 
 Patmcios omnes opibus cum provocet unus Juv. 
 
 Jam sedet in ripa, tetrumque novicius horret Juv. 
 
 Hermes supposiftcius sibi ipsi (Phal.) Mart. 
 The quantity of the first and middle syllables of foreign or 
 barbarous words introduced into the Latin language, cannot 
 be determined, unless when they fall within the general rules. 
 Those first and middle syllables which cannot be ascer- 
 tained by the preceding rules, must be determined by the 
 practice or authority of the poets. 
 
 SPECIAL RULES 
 
 FOR LAST OR FINAL SYLLABLES', AND FOR 
 MONOS YLLABLES. 
 
 OF THE VOWELS. 
 
 One general quantity of a is not ascertained. E is, ge- 
 nerally, i/, always, short. / is, generally, u, always, long. 
 O is generally common. 
 
379 
 
 RULES I. and II. A final. 
 
 I. A final, in words declined by cases, is short; as musa, 
 tcmpld, Tyded, lampada. 
 
 Musa refert : Dedimus summam certaminis uni Ovid. 
 
 Templa petebamus Parnassia. Ovid. 
 
 Hectoris hie magni fuerat comes : Hector a circum Virg. 
 Quo teneam vultus mutantem Protea l nodo Hor. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. The ablative singular of the first declension is long; as 
 Me musa, hoc JEnea. 
 
 2. The vocative singular from Greek nouns in as, is long; 
 as O JEnea, O Palld, from JEneas, Pallas. But Greek vo- 
 catives in a from nominatives in tes (changed to ta, in some 
 parts of the Doric dialect) are short ; as Orestd, JEeta, from 
 Orestes, JEetes. 
 
 Prospiciens, summa placidum caput extulit unda Virg. 
 
 Quid miserum, JEnea, laceras? Jam parce sepulto Virg. 
 
 Fecerunt furiae, tristis Orestd, tuae Ovid. 
 
 II. A final, in words not declined by cases, that is, in verbs 
 and particles, is long; as ama,frustra, prater ea, posted, post- 
 ilia, ergd, infra, a. 
 
 Et pete quod fas est; et ama, quod fceraina debes Ovid. 
 
 Interea magno misceri murmure pontum Virg. 
 
 Extra fortunam est, quidquid donatur amicis Mart. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1 . The particles ltd, quid, ejd, and putd put adverbially, 
 shorten a ; and after the same manner Sidonius shortens 
 hallelujd. 
 
 2. The prepositions contra and ultra, and numerals in 
 ginta are sometimes found short; but approved authors 
 lengthen the a 3 . 
 
 1 In the following line the accusative Orjjkea may be consi- 
 dered either a dactyl or spondee ; Orpheaque in medio posuit, syl- 
 vasque sequentes Virg. But in the following, it is evidently a 
 spondee; Non tantum Rhodope miratur, etlsmarus Orphea Virg. 
 
 2 Antea is found long in Horace and Catullus. Contra is long 
 in Virgil ; short in Ausonius and Manilius. Postilla is long in 
 Ennius and Catullus. Postea is long in Plautus ; short in the be- 
 ginning of a line in Ovid; but in this last, Vossius says it should 
 be read post ca ; or, perhaps it may be used there as a dissyllable 
 formed by Synaeresis, t\\\*& postea. Posteaqnam is also used by Vic- 
 torinus in the beginning of a line. An able critic in the Class. 
 Journ. Vol. XV, p. 347, (Mr. Carson, we believe, the learned 
 
360 
 
 Turn sic affatur regem, atque itd turbidus infit Virg. 
 Trigintd capitum foetus enixa jacebit Virg. 
 
 RULE III. E final. 
 
 Words ending in e are generally short ; as nate, cubile, 
 patre, curre, nempv, ante. 
 
 I?2cipe, parve puer, risu cognoscere matrem Virg. 
 
 Ante mare et tellus, et, quod tegit omnia, coelum Ovid. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. All words in e>, of the first and fifth declension, are 
 long; as Calliope, Ancliise^ fide ; also fame, originally of 
 
 Rector of the High School, Edinb.) seems to contend, and it 
 would appear successfully, that the pronouns used long in com- 
 position, in such words as antea, postea, posteaquam, postilla, in- 
 terea, &c. are not, as is generally supposed, accusatives, which 
 would require a short quantity, but, like hac in antehac and post- 
 hac, ablatives singular feminine, the prepositions being employed 
 absolutely, and the pronouns referring elliptically to some cir- 
 cumstance implied ante andpos, for instance, in antea andpostea, 
 having the same kind of relation to the unspecified time probably 
 .represented by ea, as, when associated with horis, mensibus, annis, 
 multo, paulo, &c , they bear to the time thus specified; and that, 
 therefore, the a of ea and ilia, in such compounds, is long, like 
 that of ablatives of the first declension. In the line from Ovid, 
 post ea is evidently the proper reading, as marking, without any 
 immediate reference to time, merely the succession of events. 
 Poste.aquam, in the line quoted by Smetius from Victorious, 
 Posteaquam rursus speculatrix arva patere, was probably intended 
 for a trisyllable, the ea being sounded as one syllable, by Synae- 
 resis, like aured in Virgil, 7En. i. 698. Puta,?or videlicet, is found 
 short in Persius in the line, Hoc puta non justum est, &c. ; but 
 some re&dputo Ultra is long in Horace, Juvenal, Persius and 
 others, and there is hardly a respectable authority for considering 
 it short. Juxta, which is long in Virgil and others, is once short 
 in Catullus. But a better reading has juncta. The termination 
 sinta is found short in some of the old poets, and in those of a 
 later date, as Ausonius, Manilius and others; but those who flou- 
 rished during the purity of the language always made it long. In 
 Greek, however, the termination whence it is derived is short. 
 Quid is long in a line of Phaedrus: Ego primam tollo, nominor 
 quiz leo. But some would read quid nominor leo. 
 
 1 Achille is found short in Propertius, by Apocope, for Achilleu: 
 Quique tuas proavus fregit Achille domos. But in this line 
 amended, Achille becomes an Ablative. The Doric vocatives, 
 ' as Ulyssu and Achille, are long. 
 
 
381 
 
 the fifth. Thus also, re+ die, and their compounds quare, 
 hodie, pridie, postridie, quotidie. 
 
 Hanc tua Penelope lento tibi mittit, Ulysse Ovid. 
 
 Objicit : illefame rabida tria guttura pandens Virg. 
 
 Et quamquam saevit pariter rabiequefameque Ovid. 
 
 Nunc eadem, labente die, convivia quserit Virg. 
 
 2. All nouns wanting the singular ; as cete, mele, Tempe, 
 pelage, being Greek contractions. 
 
 Silva : vocant Tempe. Ovid. 
 
 At pelage, multa, et late substrata videmus Lucret. 
 
 3. The second person singular of imperatives of the se- 
 cond conjugation ; as doce, mane. But cave, vale, vide, re- 
 sponde and salve 1 , have e common. 
 
 Vade, vale, cave ne titubes, mandataque frangas Hor. 
 Idque, quod ignoti faciunt, vale dicere saltern Ovid. 
 Responde, quibus amissas reparare queam res Hor. 
 Quid sis nata vide, nisi te quoque decipis ipsam Ovid. 
 Si quando veniet ? dicet ; responde, poeta Mart. 
 Auriculas? Vide, sis, ne majorum tibi forte Pers. 
 Lector salve. Taces, dissimulasque ? Vale Martial. 
 
 4. Monosyllables are long ; as e, me, te, se, ne, (lest or 
 not). Except the enclitics que, ne, ve, and the syllabic ad- 
 jections pte, ce, te ; as suapte, hujusce, tute. 
 
 Vera, inquit ; neque me Argolica de gente negabo Virg. 
 Me miserum ! ne prona cadas, indignave laedi Ovid. 
 
 Nostrapti culpa facimus Ter. 
 
 Hinc omnis pendet Lucilius. Hosce secutus Hor. 
 
 5. Adverbs in e, coming from nouns of the second de- 
 clension, are long; as placide, pulchre, valde (or valide], 
 &c. : also all adverbs of the superlative degree; as doctissi- 
 me, maxime, minime. But bene, male, superne, inferm, magt, 
 the same as magis, and impune (two words whose immediate 
 derivation is not clearly ascertained), have their last syllable 
 short ; also the adverbs here, and Hercule. 
 
 Pr<vcipue, cum jam hie trabibus contextus acernis Virg. 
 
 Si bene quid de te merui Virg. 
 
 Terra superne 2 trernit, magnis concussa ruinis Lucret. 
 
 1 Perhaps some of these may have originally belonged to the 
 third conjugation also. The line from Martial is read otherwise ; 
 thus, 
 
 Quando venit? dicet: tu respondeto ; poeta. 
 Are not final vowels, independently of association or rhythmical 
 connexion, naturally of nearly the same quantity? 
 
 8 On the quantity of superne in this line, Lambinus says ; 
 " Millies jam dixi ultimam syllabam adverbii Superne, brevem 
 
382 
 
 Aspice, num mage sit nostrum penetrabile telum Virg. 
 Quam super baud ullae poterant impune volantes Virg. 
 Et positum est nobis nil here praeter aprum Martial. 
 Verterat in fumum et cinerem, non Hercule miror Hor. 
 Adjectives neuter, of the third declension, used adverbially, 
 retain the original short quantity of the e ; as sublime, fa- 
 cile, duke. 
 
 Cantantes sublime ferent ad sidera cycni Virg. 
 6. Ferme,fere, and ohe, have e long. 
 
 Mobilis et varia estferme natura malorum Juv. 
 Jamqueym? sicco subductaB littore puppes Virg. 
 OJi'c ! jam satis est, ohe ! libelle Mart. 
 Ausonius has shortened^?'?. 
 
 RULE IV. /final. 
 
 Words ending in i are generally long ; as dominf, Mer- 
 curly patri, fructui, me~t, amari, doceri, audi, 7, Ovidi^JUl. 
 Quid domini facient, audent cum talia fures Virg. 
 Sic fatur lacrymans c&zsslque immittit habenas Virg. 
 Hinc exaudirl gemitus, iraeque leonum Virg. 
 /, sequere Italiam ventis, pete regna per undas Virg. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1 . Greek vocatives are short ; as Alexi, Amarylli, Theft, 
 Pan, Dap/mi ; but Simin, or such as belong to nouns hav- 
 ing entos, gen. are long. 
 
 O crudelis Alexi, nihil mea carmina curas Virg. 
 Fraenato delphine sedens, Theti, nuda solebas Ovid. 
 
 2. Greek datives singular of the third declension, from 
 nouns increasing, are said to be varied ; but they are short. 
 Minoidi and Tethyi in Catullus, and Palladi in Statius, 
 are short. Thetidi in Catullus, and Paridl and Tyndaridi 
 in Propertius, are said to be long 1 . 
 
 Palladi litoreae celebrabat Scyros honorem Stat. 
 Morte, ferox Theseus qualem Mino'idi luctum Catul. 
 
 " esse : itaque eos errare qui hoc loco, et similibus, legi volunt 
 " Superna.' This remark is intended to be applied also to the 
 critics who wish to substitute superna for superne, in Horace, 
 od. ii. 20, 11 : Superne, nascuntur Iseves. Superne is used in the 
 same sense, Art. Poet, line 4-. Temere occurs short in Seneca. 
 1 These are long by Caesura ; for the i of Greek cases is natu- 
 rally short. Orphei may be considered as a dactyl, in Virgil, 
 EC. 4, 57, and, by Synaeresis, it is a spondee, in G. 4, 545, 553. 
 It here appears to be a contracted Greek dative. Neuters in i 
 
383 
 
 3. Datives and ablatives plural of Greek nouns in si (sin 
 before a vowel) are short; as heroist, Troasi, Charm. 
 
 Edidit haec mores illis heroism sequos Ovid. 
 Troasin invideo, quae si lacrymosa suorum Ovid. 
 
 4. MiJn 9 tibi, sibi, are common. Also ibi, nisi, ubi" 1 ^ and 
 quasi '; but these last are oftener short. Nisi and quasi are, 
 perhaps, scarcely ever long, without Caesura. 
 
 Non unquam gravis aere domum mihi dextra redibat 
 
 Virg. 
 
 Extremum hunc, Arethusa, mihl concede laborem Virg. 
 Puella senibus dulcior mihl cygnis Mart. 
 Sic quasi Pythagoras loqueris successor et haeres Mart. 
 Et devicta quasi, cogatur ferre patique Lucret. 
 Experiar sensus. Nihil hie nisi carmina desunt Virg. 
 
 RULE V. final. 
 
 at the end of words is common ; as leo, amo, disco*, 
 
 doceto. 
 Nempe tenens quod amo, gremioque in lasonis haerens 
 
 Ovid. 
 
 Non amo te, Sabidi ; nee possum dicere quare Mart. 
 Oro, qui reges consuesti tollere, cur non Hor. 
 Quo fugis ? Oro, mane, nee me, crudelis, amantem 
 
 Ovid. 
 
 may be added to the number of exceptions ; such as gummi, melt, 
 sinapi. But Greek datives, formed by contraction, are always 
 long ; as Demosthem, metamorphosi ; also those which come from 
 the first declension in Greek j as Oresti, Euripidi, which are long 
 too according to the rules of quantity for Latin Declensions. 
 
 1 Sicubi is short on the authority of Virgil, G. 3, 332 ; M. 5, 
 677. Necubi is also short. Alibi, ublque and ibidem are com- 
 monly long. Uti and veluti have the i generally long, which may 
 happen to them as well as to some of the others reckoned com- 
 mon, often by Caesura, independently on their own natural quan- 
 tity. But uti or sicuti is short in a line of Lucretius, and once 
 also in Ennius. 
 
 Sic uti quadrupedem cum primis esse videmus Lucret. 
 The i of utinam and uiique is also short. Cm when used as a 
 dissyllable, whether simply or in composition, generally has the 
 z short, as in a Sapphic from Seneca, Troades, 852 ; but when 
 reckoned one syllable, which it seems to be by Virgil, Horace, 
 and Ovid, it is always considered to be long. 
 
 2 Seldom in verbs, except puto, scio and nescio, and chiefly 
 when used parenthetically, or when the vowel concludes a foot, 
 is o made short, by any author living in the Augustan age. Scio 
 and nescio are said to be shortened to distinguish them from the 
 datives or ablatives scio and nescio. 
 
384 
 
 Quando pauperiem, missis ambagibus, horres Hor. 
 At patrias siquando domos, optataque, Paean Stat. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. Monosyllables are long: as o, pro, proh, d.o, sto ; but 
 the compounds of the last two follow the Rule. 
 
 Do quodvis et me victusque, volensque remitto Virg. 
 
 lux Dardanise, spes O fidissima Teucrum ! Virg. 
 
 2. Greek feminines ending in o, and Greek cases origi- 
 nally written with an o-mega, are long ; as Sappho, Clio, Di- 
 do (in whatever case), Atho, from Athds, Androgeo. 
 
 Clidque, et Beroe soror, Oceanitides ambae Virg. 
 
 In foribus letum Androgeo ; turn pendere pcenas Virg. 
 
 3. Also, datives and ablatives of the second declension ; 
 as domino, deo, pondo, to which add another ablative, ergo, 
 
 for the sake of, ergo, signifying therefore, belonging to the 
 Rule. 
 
 Turn caput ipsi aufert domino, truncumque relinquit 
 
 Virg. 
 Invadunt urbem somnd vinoque sepultam Virg. 
 
 4. Also, Greek genitives from nouns of the Attic dialect, 
 in us', as Androgeo, At/id. See Excep. 2. 
 
 5. Adverbs formed from nouns are long; as cerfb,faho, 
 meritd, tanto, quantd, paidd, contimid, mulib; also illo, quo, 
 ed, and the compounds, quovis, qudcunquc. To which add, 
 
 citrd, intro, and ultrd. But the following, though oftener 
 
 long, are sometimes short; denuo, sero, mutuo, postremo, vero. 
 Porro, retro, idcirco, adeo, ideo, may likewise be deemed com- 
 mon ; to which have been added crebro and sedido. Profecto 
 and subito, both naturally long, have been shortened, the 
 
 one by Ter. Maurus, the other by Seneca. Modo and its 
 
 compounds are short ; as quomodo, dummodo, postmodo ! . 
 
 1 The words first noticed, in No. 5, among the Exceptions, 
 are, obviously, ablatives, and long by Except. 3. Several of the 
 words also in the third division of No. 5 are likewise ablatives, 
 denuo being de novo, and profecto, pro facto ; but porro is an ab- 
 lative of no Latin noun, and, in Greek, in which it is an adverb, 
 its final o is long. 
 
 Modo, when separated from the words with which it is usually 
 compounded, might be expected to assume its natural quantity, 
 according to Except. 3. 
 
 Nunc. quo quamque modo possis cognoscere, dicam Virg. 
 But here it is long by Caesura. In the following line, with an en- 
 clitic, which, by attracting the ictus metricus, strengthens the pre- 
 ceding syllable, it is long : 
 
385 
 
 Hie aliud majus miscris multoque tremendum Virg. 
 Heu scro revocatur amor, seroquc juventus Tibull. 
 Vaster porro labor fcecundior, historiarum Juv. 
 Sero memor thalami, mcestae solatia matri Stat. 
 Hie inter densas corylos modo namque gemellos Virg. 
 
 6. Ambo, duo, scio, nescio, puto, imo 9 illico, cedo the im- 
 perative, ego, homo, cito, (which is the adjective used ad- 
 verbially,) are generally considered short. 
 
 Sic ubi nescio quis Lycia de gente virorum Ovid. 
 At putt} non ultro, nee quicquam tale rogantem Ovid. 
 Tarn cito commisi properatis verba tabellis Ovid. 
 Ast ego quae divum incedo regina, Jovisque Virg. 
 Praeterea duo nee tuta mihi valle reperti Virg. 
 Europamque Asiamque, duo vel maxima terra? Auson. 
 
 7. Gerunds in do are always made long by Virgil ; but 
 others sometimes shorten them 1 . 
 
 Caetera nequaquam simili ratione modoque Her. 
 Horace concludes two other lines with ratione modoque. Here, 
 however, some persons might suspect the effect of Caesura, but, 
 it would appear, without sufficient reason ; for modoque may be 
 regarded as one trisyllabic word, of which que is a constituent 
 part, in the same way as liminaque is a quadrisyllable, at the be- 
 ginning of a line in Virgil, in which que, otherwise short, becomes 
 long, merely by being considered as the final syllable of a word 
 under Caesura. In composition I have always found the a final 
 short. Used adverbially, it seems to be generally short ; thus 
 Cum tribus annellis, modo lava Priscus inani Hor. 
 Tu modo nascent! puero quo ferrea primum Virg. 
 In the following line it is long ; 
 
 Hoc quid putemus esse. ? qui modo scurra Catull. 
 But, here it may be observed, that, one particular instance ex- 
 cepted, Catullus lengthens a short final vowel before s and an- 
 other consonant. In the following Anapaestic, however, from 
 Seneca, it is long : Quae fa|ma modo \ venit ad aures. But, per- 
 haps, this example may not be quite satisfactory to those who 
 consider the Octavia the worst of all the plays that bear the 
 name of Seneca. In the following Anapaestic, it is short, being 
 in a different part of the foot : Utinam | modo n5|stra redirent 
 Boeth. Upon the whole, excluding the influence of ictus and 
 caesura, it would appear, that the short quantity of modo is more 
 common, and better established, than the long. In the following 
 Iambic, however, it is long ; Excede, pietas ; si modo nostra in 
 domo Senec. 
 
 Prosper shortens omnino ; but it is better to lengthen it with 
 Virgil. 
 
 1 Gerunds are verbal nouns, the quantity of which might be 
 ascertained by Except. 3 ; and it seems strange that it is ever va- 
 
 2 C 
 
380 
 
 Per nemora, atque altos qucerendo hucula lucos Virg. 
 Plurimus hie a?ger moritur yigilandv, sed ilium Juv. 
 Aufer et ipse meum pariter medicandu dolorem Tibul. 
 
 RULE VI. U final. 
 
 Words ending in u are long; as vitltl 9 cornn, Panlhu 9 
 dictu, diil. 
 
 Prajterea lumen per cornu transit : at imber Lucret, 
 
 Vultu quo coelum tempestatesquc serenat Virg. 
 
 Sed, tu quod nolles, voluit miserabile ihtum Ovid. 
 
 Quo res summa loco, Panthii ? quam prendimus arcem 
 Virg. 
 
 The diphthong of vocatives in cu does not appear to be 
 ever dissolved : 
 
 Scis, Proteu, scis ipse ; neque est te fallere cuiquam Virg. 
 
 Note. Indu for in, and nenii for non^ both used by Lu- 
 cretius, the former likewise by others, in composition, as in- 
 diiperator^ indu- or endv-gredior, have the u short. 
 
 Indu manu validas potis est moderanter habenas Luc. 
 
 Nenu queunt rapidi contra constare leones Lncr. 
 
 ried. Were I to hazard a conjecture concerning the probable 
 cause of this variation, it would be founded upon an analysis of 
 the gerund, the constituent parts of which seem to me to be the 
 radical letters of the verb and the antient preposition endo, or in- 
 dii, (see Rule VI.) which is equivalent to in. Thus we find in 
 the Twelve Tables the following law : 
 
 Hominem mortnum endo urbe net sepeleito, neive uriio. Let not 
 a dead person be buried nor burnt in the city. 
 The e is used in the Greek en and endon, and in the French en, 
 in preference to L The i is used in Latin and English, in pre- 
 ference to e. 
 
 The same endo we find in the following lines of Lucretius, 
 Quod genus endo mari, &c. Endogredi sccleris, c., and in other 
 parts. This endo or indu, having its final syllable short, appears 
 to me to be the final part of Latin gerunds, and of those of the 
 languages of Europe, antient and modern ; and hence perhaps 
 arises the short quantity sometimes assigned to Latin gerunds. 
 Docendo, in Latin, means, IN teaching. Vendcndo, in Portuguese, 
 means selling, or IN sale. Dui'miendo, in Spanish, sleeping, or IN 
 sleep. Vferkende, in Dutch, working, or IN work. Agissand (t), 
 in French, acting, or IN act. The same observation I have rea- 
 son to think applicable to the Saxon, Gothic, Islandic, and Ger- 
 man languages ; and were I disposed to advance further into the 
 held of conjecture, I might endeavour to show that some affinity 
 exists between endo, and the ing of our English participle or ge- 
 rund. A few additional remarks may be found in the writer's Eng. 
 Gram. p. 140. 
 
387 
 
 Also, words ending in ils short, when, to prevent the vowel 
 from becoming long by position, the s is elided ; as nuncuc 
 for nuncius, plemC lofpleri&s. 
 
 Vicimus O socii, et magnam pugnavimff pugnam En- 
 nius. 
 
 RULE VII. Y final. 
 
 Words ending in y are short ;- as Moly 9 Tiphy, chely, Te- 
 thy. 
 
 Molij vocant superi Ovid. 
 
 Note. When y is a contraction, as in Tethy instead of 
 Tcthyi the dative, it is long by the fourth general Rule. 
 Quam Tethy longinqua dies, Glaucoque repostam Val. 
 Flac. 
 
 OF CONSONANT^. 
 
 Every consonant at the end of a word, preceded by a sin- 
 gle vowel, generally makes that vowel short* unless followed 
 by a word beginning with a consonant ; except c and n, 
 which have the preceding vowel generally long. As, es, os 9 
 are generally long ; is, us and ys 9 generally short. 
 
 RULE VIII. B final. 
 
 Latin words ending in b are short ; foreign words com- 
 monly long ; as ab, ob, Job, Jacob. 
 
 Magnus ab integro sec'lorum nascitur ordo Virg. 
 
 RULE IX. C final. 
 
 Words ending in c are long ; as dc, sic, liw (adverb), due, 
 illuc. 
 
 Sic oculos, sic ille manus, sic ora ferebat Virg. 
 
 Hoc ' erat, alma parens Virg. 
 
 Hoc age, ne mutata retrorsum te ferat aura Hor. 
 Atque hie ingentem comitum affluxisse novorum Virg. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. Nee and dome are short. 
 
 2. Hie 1 , the pronoun, is common; alsojfac 1 , to which 
 some add hoc l of the nominative and accusative. 
 
 1 It is contended by the antient grammarians that the pronoun 
 hie is always short by nature ; and that when it is found long, be- 
 fore a word beginning with a vowel, it is owing to the syllabic ad- 
 jection ce being supposed to belong to it, the e of which (and, as 
 it generally happens, the c likewise) is cut off by synaloepha ; and 
 
 2 C2 
 
388 
 
 Parve, nee invideo, sine me, liber, ibis in urbem Ovid. 
 Cogere donee oves stabulis, numerumque referre Virg. 
 Hie vir, htc est, tibi quern promitti saepius audis Virg. 
 Hie glaclio fidens, hie acer et arduus hasta Virg. 
 
 RULE X. D final. 
 
 Words ending in d are short, in Latin ; but foreign words 
 are generally long ; as quid, ad, apiid, illild, std : Benaddd, 
 David, Bognd. These, however, are varied. 
 
 Quicquid id est, timeo Danaos et dona ferentes Virg. 
 
 RULE XL L final. 
 
 Words ending in I are short; as tribunal^ Asdrubal,ft'l, 
 poly consul, procul. 
 
 ,Non semtl et Satyros eluserat ilia sequentes Ovid. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. Hebrew words are generally long ; as Daniel, Michael, 
 Nabdl, SaUl. 
 
 2. Sal 1 , sol, and ml 1 , are long. 
 
 Omnia sub pedibus, qua so/ utrumque recurrens Virg. 
 
 that, therefore, the remaining c must be supposed to possess the 
 force of a double letter. Be this as it may, it certainly is found 
 more frequently long than short. The same kind of assertion has 
 been applied to hoc of the nominative and accusative, which also 
 theantient grammarians considered as naturally short; so that, with 
 regard to both, it is contended, that when we find these cases long 
 (which they generally are) before a word beginning with a vowel, 
 we are to consider that the long quantity arises from the ce which 
 is suppressed. But there is no question about hoc of the ablative, 
 which is always long. 
 
 Quondam hoc indigense vivebant more, priusquam Juv. 
 The following are the usual authorities cited for determining 
 the quantity offac. 
 
 Non possunt ; yfo enim minimis e partibus esse Lucret. 
 Hosfac Armenios, hsec est Danaeia Persis Ovid. 
 Signa rarius, aut semeiy^c illud (Phal.) Mart. 
 But the^ac of the middle example has been changed, in cor- 
 rected editions, intofacito ; so that it seems safer, according to 
 the opinion of Alvarez, to considers/ere as short. 
 1 Nil is long, as being a contraction of nihil. 
 
 Nil aliud video, quo te credamus amicum Mart. 
 As to sal, I find only one authority quoted by Smetius, from 
 Ausonius, and another by Alvarez, from Statins, to prove it to be 
 long ; but these authorities are not perhaps satisfactory, when it is 
 considered that sal is formed, by apocope, from the obsolete sale 
 with a short. 
 
 Sal, oleum, panis, mel, piper, herba, novem Auson. 
 Non sal t oxyporumve, caseusve Stat. 
 
389 
 
 RULE XII. A/ final. 
 
 M at the end of words was, antiently, short, and was not, 
 as now ! , elided, when followed by a vowel. 
 
 Insignita fere turn millia militum octo Ennius. 
 It is still short in circiun and cum (con) in composition 
 with words beginning with a vowel ; as circumeo, circumago. 
 Cujus non hcderae circumiere caput Propert. 
 
 Quo te circumagas Juv. 
 
 Vivite, lurcones, comedones., vivite ventres ! Lucil. 
 If it be ever found long, before a vowel, it must be by 
 caesura. 
 
 RULE XIII.- N final. 
 
 N at the end of words is long ; as en, splen, quin, sin, non. 
 Also in Greek nouns masculine and feminine; as Titan, 
 Hymen, Siren, Salamm, Phorcyn ; and Actceon, Lacedtemdn, 
 Plaion, and the like written with co (omega) ; also in Greek 
 accusatives of the first declension, coming from nominatives 
 in AS, ES, and E, long ; as JEncdn, Anchisen, Calliopen and 
 in genitives plural ; as Myrmidonun, Cimmerian, epigram- 
 matun. 
 
 Tostos en, aspice crines Ovid. 
 
 Quin, agite, et rnecum infaustas exurite puppes Virg. 
 Finierat Titan ; omnemque refugerat Orpheus Ovid. 
 Actaeon ego sum ! domiiium cognoscite vestrum Ovid. 
 Amitto Anchisen, hie me, pater optime, fessum Virg. 
 Cimmerion etiain obscuras accessit ad oras Tibul. 
 
 Exceptions, 
 
 1 . Nouns ending in e , having mis in Uie genitive, with 
 the penultimate short, are short ; as carmen, crimen, numcn, 
 -mis. 
 
 Add lint et titulum; titulus breve carmen habebat Ovid. 
 
 2. Also nouns in on, of the singular number, which in 
 Greek are written with o (omicron), and which are in Latin, 
 
 of the second declension ; as Ilion, Erotion, Pylon. But 
 
 not Greek accusatives in on of the Attic dialect, having M 
 (omega) in the original ; as Athon, Androgeon. 
 
 ^ nee habebat Pelion umbras Ovid. 
 
 Laudabnnt alii claram Ehodmi, aut Mitylenen Hor. 
 
 1 In one instance Horace retains the m. 
 
 Quam laudas, pluma ? Cocto num aclcst honor idem ? 
 Thus the line is read by Dacier, Bentley, and Wakcficld ; but in 
 the Dauphin edition it is thus given ; 
 
 Quam laudas, pluma ? Coctove num adcst honor idem ? Sat. it. 
 
3. N is short in Greek accusatives, whatever the declen- 
 sion may be, of nouns the final syllable of whose nomina- 
 tive is short; as Majan, JEginan, Orpheon, Alexin, Ibm, 
 chelyn, Ityn. 
 
 Namque ferunt raptam patriis JEginxn ab undis Stat. 
 
 Scorpion, atque aliter curvantem brachia Cancrum Ovid. 
 
 Tantaque nox animi est, Itun hue arcessite, dixit Ovid. 
 
 o w ' ^ w 
 
 1. An, m, forsan, forsitan, tamtti, attamcn, vem?ita?nen, 
 videji', satm\ have n short 1 . 
 
 Mittite ; forsan et ha?c olim meminisse juvabit Virg. 
 Educet. Fiden' ut geminae stent vertice cristae Virg. 
 Satin 9 id est ? Nescio, hercle ; tantum jussu* sum Ter. 
 
 RULE XIV. R final. 
 
 Words ending in r are short ; as cttlcar, Hamilcar, fmber, 
 pater, mater, vir, Hector, cor, turtur, martyr, prccor, mitticr, 
 semper, prater, amamur, audiuntur. 
 
 Turn pater omnipotens misso perfregit Olympum Ovid. 
 
 Inque cor 2 hamata percussit arundine Ditem Ovid. 
 
 Semper honos, nomenque ttium, laudesque manebunt 
 Virg. 
 
 Inseruisse manus, impure ac semiuir, audes ? Lucan. 
 
 hanc prccor, optime, pro me Virg. 
 
 Ille operum custos, ilium admiravtur, et omnes Virg. 
 
 quibus Hector ab oris Virg. 
 
 1 To these are commonly added some words suffering an apo- 
 cope ofde, as exin, dein,proin\ but without decisive authorities. 
 And along with vidcn and satin are likewise joined scin, audin', 
 nostin', ain' t nemori ', men ', and the like. Nosiin , indeed* if late 
 editions are correct, is short in Ovid, Epist. Medece ; but nemon 
 is tvvice long in Horace. The others cgnnot be safely used, un- 
 less followed by a consonant ; when, in course, they are long. 
 
 Greek datives in sin have been noticed under Rule IV. /final. 
 
 2 Cor long is attributed to Ovid : but the line, in which it is 
 said to be thus found, is rend differently in corrected editions. 
 
 Molle meum levibus cor est violabilc telis. 
 
 Molle meum levibus^we cor est violabile telis Ep. xv. 79. 
 Vir long has been likewise said to be found in Ovid ; but that too 
 arose from an erroneous reading. 
 
 De grege mine tibi vir, et de grege natus habendus. 
 Better thus; 
 
 De grege nunc tibi vir> mine dc grege natus habendus Met. 1. 
 
 660. 
 In the last t/r is long, merely by its position. 
 
391 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. Greek nouns, and such as have en's in the genitive, 
 with the penultimate long, are long ; as crater, stater, ver, 
 Ser, Rccimcr, -eris ; also Ibcr, which has Ibcris as well as 
 Ibcri ; and acr and atlier, which have the penultimate of their 
 genitive short. CdtiUer, a compound of Ibcr, is common. 
 
 Vcr erat asternum, placidique tepentibus auris Ovid. 
 Si tibi durus Iber> aut si tibi terga dedisset Lucan. 
 Aer a tergo quasi provehat atque propellat Lucret. 
 Dacit ad auriferas quod me Salo fe^tr -oras Mart. 
 Nunc Ccltiber es : Celtiberia in terra Catull. 
 Legit Eois Ser arbor ib us Seneca. 
 
 2. These monosyllables are long, far, Mr 1 , Ndr, cur, fur, 
 and par 1 with its compounds, compdr, dispdr, impdr. 
 
 Par aetas, par forma fuit ; primasque magistris Ovid. 
 Ludere par impdr, equitare in arundine longa Hor. 
 Exagitant et Lar, et turba Diania fures Ovid. 
 Cur, inquit, diversus abis ? hue dirige gressum Virg. 
 
 RULE XV. AS final. 
 
 Words ending in as are long ; as mas, vas, pictds, Pallas 
 (PaUantis), Thomas, mcnsas, legds, amds, fords. 
 
 Quid meus JEneas in te committere tantum ? Virg. 
 Has autem terras, Italique hanc littoris orarn Virg. 
 Et pete quodjas est, et ama, quod focmina debes Ovid. 
 Coiicilias : tu das epulis accumbere divum Virg. 
 Hinc Pallas instat et urget Virg. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. Greek nouns whose genitive ends in ad is or ados are 
 short ; as Pallas, Areas, lampas, Ilicis, -cidis. To which add 
 the Latin noun, anas, and Latin nouns in as, formed after 
 the manner of Greek patronymics ; as Appias. 
 
 Pallas Erichthonium, prolem sine matre creatam Ovid. 
 
 1 It has been disputed whether par and Lar ought to be con- 
 sidered long, since their increase is short, and since ar of the no- 
 minative is short in other nouns which increase short, and even in 
 those which increase long. Par and its compounds arc certainly 
 generally found long, and although this may arise from diastole, 
 it does not appear safb to change the quantity usually assigned 
 them. Par, impar, and dispar are found long in Horace. The 
 latter two are, however, short in Prudentius. Yet notwithstand- 
 ing this authority, and that also of Martianus Capclla and Avic- 
 nus, added to the argument founded on analogy, it is safer, as 
 already observed, to consider the last syllable of these words a:> 
 loner. 
 
392 
 
 Et pictis anas enotata, pennis Petron. 
 
 Appias expressis aera pulsat aquis Ovid. 
 
 2. Also the accusative plural of the third declension of 
 Greek nouns ; as crater as, Cyclopas, heroas, Troas, hero'idas, 
 Hectoras. 
 
 Jupiter ad veteres supplex hero'idas ibat Ovid. 
 
 Existunt montes, et sparsas Cycladas augent Ovid. 
 
 RULE XVI. ES final. 
 
 Words ending in es are long; as Alcides, Circes, Pene- 
 lopes, quies, hccres, locuples, sermones, res, ames, doces, leges, 
 esses, decies, posses, amavisses- the nominatives and vocatives 
 plural of Greek nouns originally written with e<; contracted 
 from ss; ; as hereses, crises, phrases ; the antient genitive of 
 the fifth declension, as rabies. 
 
 An, quae per totam res est notissima Lesbon Ovid. 
 Si modo des illis cultus, similesque paratus Ovid. 
 Quodcumque est, rabies unde illoec germina turgent 
 Lucret. 
 
 Exceptions, 
 
 1. The nominatives and vocatives plural of Greek nouns 
 increasing (not in eo$) short in the singular, are short ; as 
 Amazones, Arcades, Delphines, Naiades, gri/phes, Phrygcs 1 . 
 To which may be added Greek vocatives singular in es 
 coming from nominatives in es not formed from eus of the 
 Doric dialect, and having their genitive in eos', as Demo- 
 sthenes, Socrates. 
 
 Pamphagus, et Dorceus, et Oribasus ; Arcades omnes 
 
 Ovid. 
 Troades ; et patrioe fumantia tecta reliquunt Ovid. 
 
 2. Es from sum is short 2 , and in the compounds; as ades, 
 , prodts, poles, &c.; and in the preposition perns. 
 
 Quisquis es, hoc poteras meciun considere saxo Ovid. 
 Cui deus, At conjux quoniam mea noi\ potcs esse Ovid. 
 
 1 These nouns, when they assume, in the accusative plural, the 
 Latin termination es, instead of as, have it long, according to the 
 quantity of Latin syllables. 
 
 2 Vossius, following Servius, asserts that cs ofedo, being a con- 
 traction ot'edis, is long ; but he cites no authorities. The es of 
 sum, and the es of edo, notwithstanding the latter's government 
 of a case, in such examples, as Est Jlamma medullas Virg. bona 
 Plaut. olivas Hor. animum Hor. are, without doubt, one 
 and the same word, and consequently both short. Amiens, too, 
 is used by Lucretius, V. 397, in the sense of ambcdcns. 
 
393 
 
 Quern penes arbitrium est, et jus, etnorma loquendi Hor. 
 
 3. Greek neuters in es , as cacoethes, kippomanes. 
 Scribendi cacoethes, et aegro in corde senescit Juven. 
 
 4. Latin nouns of the third declension in es, whose ge- 
 nitives have a short increment; as hebes, ales, pedes, limes, 
 
 obtes. But es is long in these following; Ceres, paries 1 , 
 
 aries 1 , abies 1 , pes\ and compounds; as bipes, alipes, tripes, 
 sonipes, to which some add pr&pes, a derivative of pr&peto. 
 
 Myrmidoiium, Dolopumve, aut duri milts Ulyssei Virg. 
 jjEtherea quos lapsa plaga Jovis ales aperto Virg. 
 Hie farta premitur angulo Ceres omni Mart. 
 PCS etiam et camuris hirtae sub cornibus aures Virg. 
 Stat sonipes et frsena ferox spumantia mandit Virg. 
 
 RULE XVII. 75 final. 
 
 Words ending in is are short; as turns, Jovis, militis ; as- 
 2ncls, creditis ; magis, cis, bis ; is and qiiis, nominatives. 
 Sangws hebet, frigentque effcetae in corpore vires Virg. 
 Tu in Ins ad occasum, bis se convertit ad ortuin Ovid. 
 Sed qitis Olympo Virg. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. All plural cases in is are long: aspennls, nobis, vobis ; 
 omnls and urbls, for omnes and urbes ; qu~is, and queis, for 
 qnibus. 
 
 Sed pater omnipotens speluncls abdidit atris Virg. 
 
 Atque utinam ex vobis unus, vestrique fuissem Virg. 
 
 Quis ante or a patrum Trojse sub moenibus aids Virg. 
 
 1 Wherever paries, aries and abies are found long, there hap- 
 pens to be a caesura ; and perhaps Ceres and pes are long by dia- 
 stole ; so that it is not very improbable, on the principle of analogy, 
 that all of them may belong to the general Exceptions. Ausonius 
 shortens bipes and tripes ; and Probus observes that alipes and so- 
 nipes are likewise short. The contrary, however, appears in Vir- 
 gil, Lucan, and Horace ; but it is to be observed, that some of the 
 above-mentioned words could not be introduced into heroic verse, 
 without the influence of a figure to lengthen their final syllable. 
 Prtepes is short in Virgil; it comes not from pes y but from 
 TfpfjTfsrr^) prcevolans. 
 
 Acer, anhelanti similis; quern prcepes ab Ida. 
 Tigres, ascribed to Ovid, is rejected by the best critics. Ac- 
 cording to Greek analogy, some would read tigris ; Quis scit, an 
 hxc sarvas insula tigris habet ? Ep. 10, 86, the Greek is in such 
 cases being short. This line has been written thus ; Quis scit, an 
 haec ssevas tigridas insula habet Ed. Burman. 
 
391 
 
 2. The nominative in is is long', when the genitive ends 
 in Iljs 9 Inis 9 or cntis, with the penultimate long; as Us, $#/- 
 , Salamzs, Simdis. 
 
 Grammatici certant, et adhuc sub judice Us est Hor. 
 Samnis in ludo ac rudibus cuivis satis asper Lucil. 
 
 3. Is is long in the adverbs gratis andyprls 1 ; in the noun 
 glis ; and in vis, as a noun and verb. 
 
 Igne'a convexi vls 9 et sine pondere cocli Ovid. 
 
 Si vis esse aliquis. Probitas laudatur et alget Juv. 
 
 4. All second persons singular in is are long ; when the 
 second persons plural have Itis with the penultimate long ; 
 as els, audls, abls,fls, possis, sis. Is, velis, noils, &c. 
 
 Nescis, hen ! nescis dominae fastidia Romae Mart. 
 
 Qua3 tibi causa viae : cur sis, Arethusa, sacer fons Ovid. 
 His of the perfect is commonly considered short ; 775 of the 
 future is by some considered short also, and by others, with 
 more reason, common ; but the same observations as were 
 made on the quantity of rimus and ritis are applicable to ris 9 
 and probably to the last syllable of ausis and jtofe likewise. 
 From the usual import of the two tenses, and from analogy, 
 it 'may be inferred that they were all common. 
 
 Dixens egregie notum si callida verbmn Hor. 
 
 Quas gentes Italum, aut quas non or aver is urbes Virg. 
 
 Quemcumque miserum videris hominem scias Seneca. 
 
 Si thure placarls et horna Hor. 
 
 Da mihi te placidum ; dederls in carmine vires Ovid. 
 
 Miscuerls elixa, simul conchylia turdis Hor. 
 . But the objection of caesura may be brought against the 
 last two examples, and against most of the others which I 
 have seen. Still, however, when it is considered that the ri 
 
 1 It is not improbable that gratis andforis may be ablatives: 
 and, consequently, they arc long by Exception 1. The former is 
 long in Martial, the latter in Horace, with caesura ; but if that be 
 considered as an objection, it is one which, rigidly insisted on, 
 would destroy the authority of many of the examples to be found 
 in works on Prosody, for establishing the quantity of final syl- 
 lables. Phaedrus, however, furnishes an example ; Gratis anhe- 
 lans, multa agendo nil agens. In making the preceding remark, 
 however, we do not mean to intimate, that, if the short quantity 
 of a syllable is properly established, and it is found long only in 
 caesura or position, its quantity is common ; it is, in this case, de- 
 cidedly short. But such is sometimes the structure of a word, 
 that it may be impossible, at least in Hexameter verse, whence, 
 for obvious reasons, authorities are usually adduced, to exem- 
 plify ^acknowledged long quantity of the syllabic, without the 
 coincidence of caesura. 
 
395 
 
 in rinuis and ritis is found long, we are authorized to con- 
 clude, from the analogy between the two numbers in regard 
 to quantity, that ris is long or common in its own nature, 
 and not by caesura 1 . 
 
 RULE XVIII. 05 final. 
 
 Words ending in os are long ; asjlds, nepos, honos, heros, 
 Minds, viros, bonds, nos, vos, os (0m), Tros. 
 
 Flos apprima tenax Virg. 
 
 Vos agitate fugam Virg. 
 
 Os homini sublime dedit, coclumque tueri Ovid. 
 
 Tros, ait, <Enea, cessas ? Virg. 
 
 Prianii nepos Hectoreus, et letum oppetat Seneca. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. Greek genitives in os, from whatever nominatives they 
 come, are short; as Arcad-os, Tethyos, Tereos, Orpheos. 
 
 Palladus admonitu Ovid. 
 
 Tethyos unda vagae lunaribus eestuet horis Lucan. 
 But genitives in cos, from nouns in is or eus, would be 
 long, by imitation of the Attic dialect. 
 
 2. Compos, impos, and os (ossis), with its compound exos, 
 have the final syllable short. 
 
 Insequere et voti postmodo compos eris Ovid. 
 Exos et exsanguis tumidos perfluctuat artus Lucret. 
 
 1 The endeavour to prove the qtlantity of rimus and ritis by 
 that of ris, and the quant ty of ris by that of rimus and ritis, may 
 perhaps be thought to border a little upon reasoning in a circle. 
 But when we consider that, in the other tenses, wherever we find 
 one syllable more in the first or second person plural than in the 
 second person singular, we observe an agreement, in regard to 
 quantity, between the penultimate of such first or second person 
 plural and the final syllable of the second person singular, except 
 where a difference is caused by position, there certainly does not 
 seem to be an impropriety in using them respectively to confirm 
 or to ascertain the quantity of one another. That such analogy 
 does subsist, may be seen in the following examples ; amus, ama- 
 mus, atndtis ; doces, doctmus, docl j tis ; legls, Icgimus^ fagitfo ; fas, fa- 
 miiSy titis of the first and second conjugation. It should be ob- 
 served however that ris y rimus, arid ritis 9 of ero and potcro, are 
 commonly short. 
 
 Fortunate puer, tu mine cris alter ab illo Virg. 
 But as from their termination, these two tenses appear to have 
 been originally subjunctive or future-perfect, it is probable that 
 they had ris, rimus, ritis, common. Juvencus, Tertullian, and 
 Paulinus Icngthcn^the ri of erimus and poicrimus, $LC p. 128. 
 
396 
 
 3. Greek nominatives and vocatives of the second declen- 
 sion have os short ; as Claros, Tenedos, Lesbos, Alropos. - 
 But nouns of the Attic dialect, having their genitive in o, are 
 long ; as Androgeos, Athos : also nouns of the same dialect, 
 which have changed llios (Aao?) into Kos (Aswj); as Peneleos, 
 Meneleos. 
 
 Et Claros, et Tenedos, Pataraeaque regia servit Ovid. 
 
 Et Tyros instabilis, pretiosaque murice Sidon Luc. 
 
 Quantus At/ids, aut quantus Eryx 
 
 4-. Greek neuters in os are short ; as Argos, epos, chats, 
 melos. 
 
 Facta canit pede ter percusso : forte epos acer Hor. 
 Et Chaos et Phlegethon, loca node silentia late Virg. 
 
 RULE XIX. -- US final. 
 
 Words ending in us are short; as anniis, bonus, tempiis, 
 inter cus, illius, fontibus, dicimus, intus, pcnitus, tenus ; like- 
 wise us of the nominative and vocative singular of the fourth 
 declension. 
 
 Ipse, ubi tempus erit, omnes in fonte lavabo Virg. 
 
 Hie domus, haec patria est -- Virg. 
 
 patria ! o divum domus Ilium ! et inclyta bello Virg. 
 Venimus ; et latos indagine cinximus agros Ovid. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. Monosyllables are long; as grus^jus, rus 9 plus. 
 Romae rus optas, absentem rusticus urbem Hor. 
 Plus etiam quam quod Superis contingere fas sit Ovid. 
 
 2. Also genitives of feminine nouns in o ; as Clius, Sap- 
 phus, Mautus. 
 
 Didits atque suum misceri sanguine sanguen Varro. 
 
 3. Genitives singular, and nominatives, accusatives and 
 vocatives plural, ot the fourth declension, all being contrac- 
 tions, have us long ; as fructus, manus. 
 
 Quale manus addunt ebori decus, aut ubi flavo Virg. 
 Pars secreta domus ebore et testudine cultos Ovid. 
 Hosne mihifructus ,- hunc fertilitatis honorem Ovid. 
 Portus cequoreis suetii insignire tropucis Sil. 
 
 4. Also nouns having the genitive in uris, utis, udis*, the 
 
 1 Palus is once short in Horace, perhaps by systole. 
 
 Regis opus, sterilisque diupalus, aptaque remis Art. Poet. 65. 
 Some critics, however, pronounce the text to be incorrect, and 
 would read thus; Regis opus ; sterilisve pains diu, aptaque remis, 
 Jong vowels, when not cut off, being regarded as common ; or din 
 may be considered a diphthongal sound. 
 
397 
 
 penultimate long; and in units, and podis, orptidos; as tellus, 
 virtus, palus, incus ; Opus, Amathus ; tripus, Oedipus 1 . 
 
 Ridet ager ; neque adhuc virtus in frondibus ulla est 
 Ovid. 
 
 Dicitur, et tenebrosa palus Acheronte refuse Virg. 
 
 Est Amathus, est celsa mihi Paphos, atque Cythera 
 Virg. 
 
 Hie Oedipus ^Egea tranabit freta Seneca. 
 
 5. Also those nouns, written in Greek with the diphthong 
 ous, which have u in their vocative; as Panthus, o Panthu; 
 and our Saviour's sacred name, lesus. 
 
 Et coalo et terris venerandum nomen lesus. 
 The diphthong eus is long ; as Orpheus but eus as a dissyl- 
 lable is short ; as Orpheus, of the second declension. 
 
 Panthus Othryades, arcis Phcebique sacerdos Virg. 
 
 Addunt se socios Ripheus, et maximus annis Virg. 
 
 RULE XX YS final. 
 
 Words ending in ys are short ; as Capys, chelys, chlamys. 
 At Capys, et quorum melior sententia mend Virg. 
 Tethys et extreme seepe recepta loco est Ovid. 
 Certain nouns, said to form the nominative in yn also, are 
 mentioned as exceptions; such as Gortys, Phorcys, Trachys. 
 To these may be added contracted plurals ; as Erinnys for 
 Erinnyes, or Erinnyas. Tethys is said to be sometimes long ; 
 but then it is, as far as I have discovered, accompanied by 
 caesura. 
 
 Teque sibi generum Tethys emat omnibus undis Virg. 
 
 RULE XXI T final. 
 
 Words ending in t preceded by a single vowel, are short; 
 as capiit, amdt, ut, et. 
 
 Verum haec tantum alias inter caput extulit urbes Virg. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. T is sometimes long by crasis, or syncope ; as redit for 
 redtrt or red wit, amdt for amavit. 
 
 Magnus civis obit, et formidatus Othoni Juven. 
 
 Dum trepidant, It hasta Tago per tempus utrumque 
 
 Virg. 
 Disturbed urbes, et terra? motus obortus Lucret. 
 
 1 To which add polypus, and melampus when of the third de- 
 clension; but when of the second, us of the three last may be short. 
 Utque sub aequoribus deprensum polypus hostem Ovid. 
 
398 
 
 In these examples, obit, it, and disturbdt, are put for obiit, 
 iit, and disturbavit. The first and the last example are long, 
 too, by cassura. 
 
 RULE XXII. 
 
 FINAL SYLLABLE OF A VERSE. 
 
 The last syllable of every verse (except the Anapaestic, 
 and the Ionic a minor e} is considered common ; that is, if 
 the syllable be naturally long, it may be reckoned short, if 
 it suits the verse, and vice versa. 
 
 Gens inimica mihi Tyrrhenum navigat <equor Vir<r. 
 In this,. or, naturally short, forms the second syllable of a 
 spondee. 
 
 Crescit occulto velut arbor aw Hor. 
 In this Sapphic, the word cmo, which is naturally a spon- 
 dee, forms a trochee, a foot consisting of a long and a short 
 syllable. 
 
 OF ACCENT. 
 
 As Quantity means the length of time employed by the 
 voice, so Accent denotes the elevation or depression of the 
 voice in pronouncing a syllable : and is sometimes called the 
 Tone. 
 
 The accents are three, the Acute, the Grave, and the Cir- 
 cumflex. 
 
 The acute is said to sharpen, or elevate a syllable ; and is 
 thus marked, dominus. 
 
 The grave is said to sink or depress it ; and is thus marked, 
 docte. 
 
 The circumflex is defined to be a compound accent, first 
 elevating and then depressing, or, perhaps, vice versa ; and 
 as it requires greater time than either of the former, it is never 
 put over any but a long syllable ; and is thus marked, amare, 
 i. e. amadre. 
 
 RULES FOR THE ACCENTS. 
 
 I. Monosyllables, long by nature, receive the circumflex ; 
 sisjlos, spes, a, e. But if they are short, or long by posi- 
 tion only, they take the acute; as vir,fax, mcns. 
 
 II. Dissyllables always have the grave accent on their 
 last syllable. If the first syllable be long by nature, and 
 
399 
 
 the second short, it receives the circumflex ; as R(Jma,Jld- 
 ris, hlna ; otherwise, the acute ; as homo, parens, msons l . 
 
 j 
 
 1 In speaking of improper pronunciation as arising from the 
 want of due attention to quantity and accent, Mr. Pickbourn, the 
 ingenious author of a dissertation on the English verb, observes 
 (Monthly Magazine, No. 135,) " That scholars err in their pro- 
 nunciation of, 1st, words of two syllables having the first short, 
 as eques ; 2ndly, words of three syllables having the first long 
 and the second short, as sidera ; 2dly, potysyllables accented 
 on the antepenultimate, as juvenilibus, interca, &c. ; and, lastly, 
 words ending in a long vowel, as domini, or in a long vowel and 
 a single consonant, as dominis. These errors arise in part from 
 the want of distinguishing between the long and short powers of 
 the vowels. For, as they are all of them by nature capable of be- 
 ing cither long or short, every long vowel being equal to two short 
 ones, this is a distinction of the greatest importance. The prin- 
 cipal source of cur mistakes on this subject is the indistinct and 
 confused notion which we have of accent. For, when it falls on a 
 short syllable, we often make that syllable long ; and wjien it falls 
 on a long one, we sometimes make it short. Accent does certainly 
 affect quantity ; that is, it makes the accented syllable a little 
 longer than it would be without it. But its operation is never so 
 great as to make a short syllable become long, nor does the pri- 
 vation of accent make a long syllable become short ; for there 
 are degrees of time both in long and short syllables, All short 
 syllables are not equally short ; nor are all long ones equally long. 
 This remark is fully confirmed by a passage quoted by Dr. War- 
 ner (in his Metron ariston) from Quinctilian: Et longis longio- 
 res, et brcvibus sunt bremorcs syllctbce. The second syllable oi'ama- 
 vit, being accented, is a little longer than the second syllable of 
 amaiwunt, though they are both long syllables ; and the first syl- 
 lable in Icgi, being accented, is a little longer than the second, or 
 than the first syllable oflegisti t which is deprived of accent, though 
 they are all long syllables. In pronouncing such words as ani- 
 mus 9 dominus, ocidus, &c., though the vowels retain their short 
 sound, yet the stroke of the voice laid on the first syllable in- 
 creases the impression which that syllable makes on the ear, and, 
 consequently, diminishes the impression made by that which fol- 
 lows it. 
 
 " Quinctilian and all succeeding grammarians inform us that the 
 Latin acute accent is never laid on the last syllable of a word ; 
 that in dissyllables and trisyllables having the second syllable 
 short, it invariably falls on the first syllable ; and that in polysylla- 
 bles having the penultimate short, it lies on the antepenultimate. 
 In the English language dissyllables accented on the first syllable 
 generally have that syllable long. We have, therefore, very impro- 
 perly applied this rule to all Latin dissyllables, because they are 
 accented on the first syllable. Hence we say^ww, ctuies, miser,. 
 
400 
 
 III. Polysyllables, if the penultimate be long, and the 
 last syllable short, have the circumflex on the penultimate; 
 as Romdnus, Imperdtor, Justinidnus. If both the penulti- 
 
 nemus, vigor, rigor, liquor , timor, &c. making the first syllables 
 long, or, at least, nearly so. Why do we not pronounce the first 
 syllables of eques, comes, miser, nemus, as we do the first syllables 
 of their genitives, equitis, cbmitis, miseri, nemoris? And why do 
 we not pronounce such words as vigor, rigor, liquor, as we do the 
 English words vigour, rigour, liquor? And the first syllable in 
 ttmor, as we do the first syllable in twioris, and of the English 
 word timorous? If we pronounced the first syllable of the ad- 
 jective malus, as we do the first syllable of the English word ma- 
 lice, we should properly distinguish it from malus, an apple-tree. 
 By an attention to this rule we should easily distinguish between 
 the present and preterperfect tenses of many verbs, as venit and 
 venit, fugit and fugit, legit and legit, &c. Again, many En- 
 glish words of three syllables, accented on the first, have that syl- 
 lable short; we have, therefore, hastily concluded that all Latin 
 trisyllables, accented on the first, must have that syllable short, 
 unless it be long by position, and, therefore, we very improperly 
 saysidera, limina, Umite, semine, viribus, dicer e, scribere, c. Why 
 do we not pronounce the first syllables of these words with a 
 long vowel sound, in the same manner in which we pronounce 
 the first syllables of sidus, limen, limes, semen, vires, dico, scribo, 
 &c. ? for all vowels long in themselves, and not by position, should 
 certainly be uttered with a long vowel sound. An attention to 
 this remark would show the difference between populus, a people, 
 and populus, a poplar-tree. In polysyllables accented on the an- 
 tepenultimate we sometimes err in a similar manner to the last 
 case, by giving a short sound to a vowel long by nature, as injw- 
 veriilibus, and, at other times, by giving a long sound to a vowel 
 naturally short, as ininterea. But, in words of this kind, we do not 
 universally err ; for I do not remember that I ever heard a scholar 
 pronounce such words as deposition, consilium, exilium, excidium, 
 &c. improperly. Lastly, words ending in a long vowel, as domini, 
 orjn a long vowel followed by a single consonant, such as datives and 
 ablatives of the first and second declension, and genitives singular, 
 nominatives, accusatives, and vocatives plural of the fourth de- 
 clension, as dominis, gradus, should always be uttered with a long 
 vowel sound, though the accent or stress can never fall on such syl- 
 lables, except by a very singular poetic license." The same judi- 
 cious critic, in an ingenious little treatise on Metrical Pauses, adds, 
 that, in accented antepenults, a short is commonly pronounced 
 right, as in animal ,but sometimes wrong, that is, with along vowel 
 sound, as in galea, Jateor, taceo, caesaries, Mcenalios ; a long is 
 generally pronounced wrong in trisyllables, as pabulum, gramina, 
 machina ; but ri^ht in some polysyllables, as mortalia, navalia ; 
 and wrong in others., as spedacula, levamine, imagine. E short is 
 
401 
 
 mate" and the last syllable be long, the former receives the 
 acute; as parentes, amaverunt, rhinoceroth. If the penul- 
 timate be short, the antepenultimate has the acute ; as do- 
 
 sometimes improperly made long, as in senior, senibus, melior, 
 obsequium. veniet, inveniet ; but it is generally pronounced right, 
 as in trepidus, gcmitus, epulce, vulneribus ; e long is generally pro- 
 fiounced right in polysyllables, as carchesia ; but wrong in tri- 
 syllables, as semina, legibus. I short is always right, as timidus, 
 consilium ; ^long, always wrong; asjrigidus,milite 9 frigore t spt- 
 ritusyformidine, sidere (noun and verb), fynvivium, senilia, divi- 
 nitus, oblivia. O short is generally pronounced right, as in do- 
 minus, incolumis ; but sometimes wrong, as in odium, moriens, 
 moveo, infodiimt ; o long, in some words, is pronounced right, as 
 otium, but in many others wrong, aspocuhcm, honoribils. (/short, 
 generally wrong, as incubuit, but not always, for subigit is com- 
 monly pronounced right ; it long always right, as lumine, cacu- 
 mine, &c. He concludes by observing that, upon the whole, 
 neither accent nor quantity is to be neglected ; and that, so long 
 as we attend to the just rules of accent, and carefully retain the 
 true natural sound of the vowels, never making a short one long 
 nor a long one short, we cannot much err in our pronunciation. 
 Upon this subject, Dr. Valpy differs a little from Mr. Pick- 
 bourn in regard to the influence of the accent on the quantity, 
 and observes, in his excellent Greek Grammar, " that the ele- 
 vation of the voice does not lengthen the time of that syllable, so 
 that accent and quantity are considered by the best critics as 
 perfectly distinct, and by no means inconsistent with each other. 
 In our language, the accent falls on the antepenultimate equally 
 in the words liberty and library; yet, in the former, the tone 
 only is elevated, in the latter, the syllable is also lengthened. 
 The same difference exists in baron and bficon, in level and 
 lever. In words of two, and of three, short syllables, the diffe- 
 rence between the French and English pronunciation is striking. 
 The former make iambics and anapests, the latter trochees and 
 dactyls. The French syjugis,ft(gimus : the English f jFugis ti fu- 
 gimus. In many instances both are equally faulty ; thus we short- 
 en the long is mfav'is, the plural ofjhvus ; they lengthen the 
 short is in ora, the genitive of os. Indeed, both may be said to 
 observe strictly neither accent nor quantity." To observe ei- 
 ther strictly is, perhaps, not easy ; to observe both is still more 
 difficult. The precise nature of accent does not seem to be fully 
 agreed upon ; and, therefore, if, in reading, either must be sacri- 
 ficed to the other, (for which, however, there is no absolute 
 necessity,) it is certainly better, that what is in some degree un- 
 certain, should yield to that which is certain,- that accent should 
 give way to quantity, which is ascertained. By reading accord- 
 ing to quantity, is not, however, meant, the breaking down, split- 
 ting, or destroying the words, by attending to the feet only ; but 
 
 2 b 
 
4-02 
 
 
 minus, Virgilius, Constantinopolis. All other syllables of poly- 
 syllables receive the grave accent. Except from the pre- 
 ceding rules the enclitics, que, ve, ne, which throw the accent 
 upon the last syllable 1 , of the word to which they are joined ; 
 as amat) amatque ; thus lacrymansve^ gemensve Virg. Hyr- 
 camsve> Arabisve Virg. Culpetne, probetne Ovid. 2 
 
 the pronouncing the words] of a verse, so as to give, as much as 
 possible, its due quantity, in real time, to every syllable. In as 
 much as to this mode of reading we can add an attention to ac- 
 cent, emphasis, cadences and pauses, whether metrical or senten- 
 tial, in so much, doubtless, will the pronunciation be the more 
 correct, graceful, and harmonious. How the antients pronounced 
 the vowels, whether as we do, or, which is more probable, as 
 they are pronounced on the Continent, it is now difficult to de- 
 termine. One thing, however, is certain, that they did not give 
 a long sound to a short vowel, nor a short sound to a long vowel. 
 In whatever way we sound the vowels, we ought to attend to their 
 quantity. I shall only add, that a syllable long by nature was 
 sounded more fully, being a reduplication of the same vowel, as 
 diicere, maalus, an apple-tree, poopulus, a poplar-tree. Whereas 
 the syllable long by position, had no other length than its being 
 sustained by the two following consonants, as dixi. It is proba- 
 ble also that a syllable short by nature preserved more of its na- 
 tural quantity than a syllable sliort by position only. Such 
 words as volucris have the accent, in prose, on the antepenulti- 
 mate, but, in verse, we should place it on the antepenultimate 
 when the penultimate is considered as short, and upon the pen- 
 ultimate when it is regarded as long ; thus, 
 
 Et primo similis volucri, mox vera volucris Ovid. 
 
 1 This is, unquestionably, true when the penultimate is long, 
 as siderisque. But it admits some doubt, when the penultimate 
 ends with a short vowel, as in sideraque. Should we not, there- 
 fore read 
 
 Pronaque cum spectent animalia caetera terrain Ovid. 
 With respect to the accentuation of words introduced from 
 other languages, there seems to be scarcely any general rule, or 
 uniform practice. 
 
 2 It does not happen, however, that que and ne, at the end oi 
 words, are always to be considered as enclitics ; and when they 
 are not, the words are accented according to the general rules , 
 as utique, denique, undique, &c. ; likewise such words, used inter- 
 rogatively, as niccine, siccine, &c. Priscian says that in calefacio, 
 calcfacis, and calefacit, the accent is on the same syllable on which 
 it falls in the simple verb, namely the second a, although in the 
 two last it be the penultimate, and also short. And in the same 
 manner, calefio, calefis, calefit, as in the simple verb. Accord- 
 ing to Donatus, siquando had the accent sometimes on the ante- 
 penultimate ; according to Serous, exinde likewise; and, to Gel- 
 
403 
 
 The accentual marks are seldom used but for distinction's 
 sake. Thus the adverbs aliqub^ continub, paldm, docte, una y 
 and the like, are marked with a grave accent. Ablatives 
 of the first declension ; genitives of the fourth ; nostrum and 
 vestnfan from nos and vos ; ergo used for causa, are written 
 with a circumflex on the last syllable ; and sometimes those 
 words which have suffered syncope or synaeresis are cir- 
 cumflected ; as poetd, fructus, a^ndsse^Jlesti^ dis. The cir- 
 cumflex is put over the nominative nostrds^ instead of which, 
 nostratis was formerly used ; likewise over genitives in zY, 
 when one i is cut off by apocope ; as Pompilt regnum, Tar- 
 quini fasces Hor. instead of Pompilii, Tarqidnii. 
 
 The three preceding rules are, I believe, those usually given 
 for the position of the Latin accents. Whether the word accent, 
 as employed in them, was originally intended to be received in 
 the sense of tone, or of emphasis or ictus, it may, perhaps, be con- 
 sidered difficult to determine ; but, notwithstanding the previous 
 definitions of the accents, as consisting in elevation and depres- 
 sion of voice, I have little doubt, that these rules refer, solely or 
 chiefly, to the situation of the ictus or syllabic emphasis. One 
 thing clearly appears, from an inspection of the 2nd and 3d rule, 
 the only rules, indeed, by which the pronunciation seems to be 
 particularly affected, that our usual ictus or syllabic force, if not 
 identical with the accent there intended, at least uniformly coin- 
 cides with it on the same syllable ; as in Roma, homo, insons, em- 
 phatic on the first syllable ; Romanus, imperator, parentes, ama- 
 verunt, emphatic on the penultimate ; dominus, Virgilius, on the 
 antepenultimate. It is almost needless to add, what is so well 
 known, that the enclitics naturally incline our syllabic emphasis 
 to the syllable immediately preceding them ; as amat, amatque. 
 With respect to the nature of Accent, and indeed, generally, in 
 all discussions regarding the nature and mutual relations of the 
 accidents or properties essential to a note of speech, much diver- 
 
 lius, exadversum and ajfatim. To these are added enimvero, dun- 
 xaty and some others which may be seen in Priscian, Lipsius, 
 or Vossius. Vossius observes, that although the accent may be 
 on the antepenultimate in perinde and deinde, we are not to con- 
 clude that it may be so in deinceps, and the like, where the last 
 is long ; for that no word can be accented on the antepenulti- 
 mate, when the two last syllables are long. The penultimate of 
 vocatives in ius is accented, although it be short ; as Ovtdi, Vir- 
 gili, Mercuri ; the reason of which is, that these words formerly 
 had e after the z, which although they have dropped, they retain 
 the accent on the same syllable as before. To these might be 
 added a few others, as mulieris, which, according to Priscian, has 
 the accent on the penultimate though short. 
 
 2D2 
 
404 
 
 sity of opinion is known to prevail. The subject, it must be con- 
 fessed, is intricate, and involved in considerable difficulty. If, 
 therefore, in the following humble attempt to elucidate some dis- 
 puted points, and correct some prevailing misconceptions, it 
 should be found, which he fears is not unlikely, that the writer 
 himself has inadvertently lapsed into obscurity or error, he will 
 have some claim on the reader's indulgence. 
 
 Most of the errors, and contradictions, that so frequently oc- 
 eur in discussions relative both to ancient and modern prosody, 
 1 have reason to believe, may be traced chiefly to the following 
 sources : 
 
 1st. An imperfect knowledge, and a consequent confusion, of 
 the three distinct properties essential to a note of speech, namely : 
 1. Quantity, time, or dimension, comprehending the relative 
 proportions denominated long and short , open and close. 2. Qua- 
 lity, force, or emphasis, comprehending the properties denoted 
 by the terms loud and soft, forte and piano, strong and feeble, em- 
 phatic and remiss, or un emphatic, thetic, and in arsis ; the essence, 
 we know, of rhythm, in all modern tongues. And, indeed, as 
 the organs of speech cannot be supposed to vary, and, conse- 
 quently, the process of verbal utterance, in all ages, must have 
 been uniformly the same in kind or manner, we entertain not the 
 smallest doubt, that the same prominent, unavoidable, and alter- 
 nately or periodically obtrusive properties, constituted also the 
 essence of rhythm in all the antient languages. 3. Tone, tune, 
 or accent, comprehending ilie pitch, and the rising or the Jailing 
 inflections, of words and syllables, termed the high and the low 
 notes, the acute and the grave accents ; an accident in which 
 chiefly consists the melody of speech. A note of speech, then, 
 must be of some time ; and, whether it be long or short, it must 
 be either emphatic or remiss; and, whether long or short, em- 
 phatic or remiss, it must have some musical pitch, and be either 
 an acute accent or a grave accent, that is, a rising inflexion or a 
 falling inflexion, or a combination of the two; variations, however, 
 which, in speech, do not commonly succeed each other, as is ge- 
 nerally the case in music, per saltum, or at intervals, but in con- 
 stant and almost imperceptible slides or undulations. Every vocal 
 and articulate sound, therefore, possesses these three accidents. 
 According, however, to the different genius of different languages, 
 any one of the three may so far predominate, in the usual mode of 
 speech, over the others, as to seem, from its prominence, the 
 principal, if not the only, accident ; and, in a faulty or unna- 
 tural pronunciation of a language, any one of the accidents may 
 occasionally acquire undue preponderance. But we are not 
 hence to infer that any one of them is utterly extinguished. Quan- 
 tity, it is probable, may have obtained, at some period, most at- 
 tention in the pronunciation of the antient languages, as quality 
 now has in that of the modern tongues. Hence it may be, that 
 the poetry of the former is regulated chiefly by a certain regard to 
 
405 
 
 long syllables and short ; and that of the latter by a similar re- 
 gard to emphatic syllables and unemphatic. 
 
 2d. The want of a distinct and specific notation for each of 
 the, three accidents. 
 
 3d. The circumstance, that length of quantity, emphasis, and 
 the rising inflexion, are found to coincide most frequently on 
 the same note; a coincidence for which it would not be difficult 
 to assign a satisfactory reason. 
 
 4th. The utter impossibility of recovering an accurate know- 
 ledge of the accentual, or even of the cmphatical, pronunciation 
 of a dead language 5 or, indeed, of fixing, by rule, the tones or 
 accentuation of any language. 
 
 5th. The notion that quantity, emphasis, and tone, necessa- 
 rily interfere with and influence each other ; but yet that it is 
 possible to read ivcll by quantity, without any observance of em- 
 phasis or of tone ; or to read well according to emphasis, with- 
 out any regard to tone or to quantity ; in other words, that it is 
 possible to read the ancient languages well, neglecting, or sink- 
 ing altogether, one or two of the accidents. 
 
 6th. The want of a special, appropriate, and univocal proso- 
 dical nomenclature. Hence, 1. The misapplication, at least 
 among the moderns, of the term accent, to designate syllabic em- 
 phasis ; a circumstance which has contributed to the almost uni- 
 versal confusion of the two distinct qualities properly denomi- 
 nated by these two different terms. 2. The common use of the 
 term high, to designate the property of loud, and vice versa. 
 3. The general acceptation of the word /ow>, as a correlative term 
 both to loud and high. 4. The prevailing error in the grammars 
 ot^ modern tongues, and in the writings of modern authors, of 
 terming an emphatical syllable, a long quantity, and anunempjia- 
 tical syllable a short quantity. 6. The two fold application to 
 such words as voice, vox ; syllabic, syllaba ; of such verbs as 
 lower, depono, demitto, dcprimo ; raise, elevo, acuo, attollo ; in re- 
 ference either to the vocal slides or inflexions, or to the distinc- 
 tions merely of softness or loudness sometimes in reference to 
 quantity; see also Lily's 2d and 3d special rule. 6. The va- 
 rious interpretations and acceptations of the ancient terms arsis 
 and thesis, some authors referring them respectively to acuteness 
 and to gravity of note ; some, in like manner, to loudness and 
 softness ; and others, in both respects, just reversing the refe- 
 rences ; some uniformly assigning the first part of a foot, with- 
 out considering whether it be the beginning or the middle of a 
 bar, to the arsis, and the last to the thesis ; and others, with si- 
 milar incaution, uniformly placing the thesis first, and the ar.ns 
 last ; opposites, if considered as general rules, without doubt, 
 equally incorrect. 7. The undefined nature of the terms ictus 
 and percussio, some referring both to the accident of ton^ or ac- 
 cent, others to that of quality or emphasis ; some considering 
 them as denoting identical, and others dissimilar effects ; and 
 
406 
 
 some contending that the former denotes only a part of what is 
 denominated by the latter, but without furnishing a clear ex- 
 planation of the precise nature either of the part or the whole. 
 Reasoning from the principles and practice of ourown tongue, we 
 should not deem it unlikely, that the ictus may have been gene- 
 rally intended to designate the usual emphatic or thetic influ- 
 ence, falling alternately or periodically on one or more of the 
 syllables of every hypermonosyllable ; and that the percussio may 
 have distinguished the preeminently emphatic or thetic syllable 
 of the longer polysyllables, or perhaps of compound or polysyl- 
 labic feet. 8. The various uses of the word ccesura, which is 
 sometimes used to denote the cutting or separation of a word, 
 the syllable separated, and the pause of separation ; and is ap- 
 plied, too, to whole verses and to single feet, Its synonym tome, 
 also, is used for the separation of a verse, and seems to be some- 
 times applied to the first part of the verse separated, or to any 
 equivalent combination of syllables. 9. The different accepta- 
 tions of the word cadence, which is used to denote the fall of the 
 voice, with regard either to tone or to force, and the rhythm, 
 flow, or general harmony of an expression. 10. The unquali- 
 fied application of the names belonging to the ancient feet, re- 
 gulated by quantity, to the modern feet, regulated by quality ; a 
 circumstance which has led some to suppose that both ancient and 
 modern poetry are directed precisely by the same principles. 1 1 .The 
 various imports ascribed to such terms as Ju^eXsia, lypufyuu'a, melo- 
 dy, harmony, modulation, &c. 12. The various senses in which the 
 term tone is employed. It denotes sometimes the mere sound or 
 voice itself, a note of speech or song, the musical gradations of a 
 series of sounds, and sometimes the peculiar intonation of a pro- 
 vince or country. 13. The lax sense of the ancient term rkythmus. 
 (1.) It was sometimes spoken of as synonymous with foot ; thus 
 Dionysius, of Halicarnassus, says, ro 5'auro xaXo; tro'^a Ka.1 puQfjwv 
 (De Struct. Orat. sect. 17.) And Aristidcs, pvQp.o$ rolvuv Iri <ru- 
 r^ft-a >t Kpovwv Kcurd TWO. fdfyv (rwyxEifAsvwv. (De Musica, 1. i. p. 31 . ) 
 Rhythm is a system of times put together in a certain order. 
 (2.) Again : not the same order, but the same quantity, of times, 
 was denoted ; for example, the dactyl and the anapa?st are in the 
 same rhythm, because they each consist of the same times. So, 
 Quintilian, Rhythmi, id est, numeri, spatio temporum constant. 
 (De Inst. Orat. 1. ix. c. 4. p. 479.) The truth probably is, that, 
 as insulated feet or separate metres, a trochee and an iambus, 
 and a dactyl and an anapa?st, must be considered respectively as 
 the reverse of each other ; but that in succession, the trochaic 
 and the iambic rhythm, and the dactylic and the anapaestic, are 
 respectively considered the same. (3.) The word rhythmus 
 sometimes denotes the measure, or a number, of movements, 
 agreeably united, of which the ear is to be the judge. So, Cice- 
 ro, Quicquid est enim quod sub aurium mensumm aliquam cadet, 
 ctiamsi abest a versu, numerus vocattir, qui Grace pvop "" 
 
5 
 
 107 
 
 (Dc Orat.} Here the word seems to refer to the concintiitas, 
 or general harmony of period, which results, not so much from 
 any minute attention to a certain succession of feet or syllables, 
 as from the choice, order, proportions, and arrangement of its 
 constituent words, clauses, and members. Nothing is more per- 
 plexing, or a greater source of error and of captious dispute, 
 than the vague, indefinite, or equivocal use of technical terms. 
 Were writers more careful in defining, and in using such words, 
 there would be fewer disputed points, and these would much 
 sooner, if not more satisfactorily, arrive at their natural conclu- 
 sion. We feel no hesitation to declare our belief, that the com- 
 lete practice of ancient prosody is irrecoverably lost ; nor, we 
 o assert, will its mere theory ever be intelligibly discussed by 
 modern critics, till the real meaning and import of its technical 
 terms shall have been precisely ascertained. 
 
 I shall now proceed, without restricting myself to any parti- 
 cular order, to exhibit, with occasional remarks and illustrations, 
 some of the misconceptions on the subject both of ancient and 
 modern Prosody. 
 
 That learned critic, Isaac Vossius, affirms (in his work De Poc- 
 inatum cantu et viribus Rhythmi) t that we have no rhythm at all 
 in our poetry ; that we mind nothing but to have a certain num- 
 ber of syllables in a verse, of whatever nature, and in whatever 
 order ; that there is nothing but confusion of quantities in the mo- 
 dern odes ; that the moderns have no regard to the natural quan- 
 tity of syllables ; and have introduced an unnatural and barbarous 
 variety of long and of short notes, without any regard to the sub- 
 ject and sense of the verse, or the natural pronunciation. Nothing 
 can be more untrue than the substance of these remarks. That 
 the accident of quantity is not much regarded in English poetry, 
 nor in that of other living languages, is a fact which no one con- 
 versant with the subject will be inclined to question. For a mo- 
 dern verse is regulated neither by the mere measure, nor by any 
 particular order, of times. But doubtless the same care that the 
 ancients devoted to the regular arrangement of their longs and 
 shorts, the moderns devote to that of their emphatics and unem- 
 phatics ; in the due and natural observance of which consists the 
 essence or rhythm of their poetical compositions. Rhythm, then, 
 the English language does possess, similar in its nature, we will 
 venture to assert, to that of the ancients, the essence of both con- 
 sisting, not in the mere drawl of quantity, nor in the fluctuating 
 and fugitive tones of syllables, but in the prominent, natural, and 
 regularly varied distinction of syllabic emphasis and remission. 
 Trissino, a famous Italian poet, justly observes "that, as the an- 
 cient feet were determined by the quantity of the syllables, so in 
 his language they are determined by the accent," (i. e. syllabic 
 emphasis.) "This (adds Pemberton, in Observ. on Poet.) is 
 equally true in our tongue ; and for this reason, that, whereas the 
 ancient accent is represented to be only a variation in the tone, 
 
408 
 
 and had no relation to the quantity of the syllable, ours is coiv 
 stantly attended with an emphasis which implies greater length in 
 the syllable." Here there appear to be at least two blunders, the 
 confusion of accent and emphasis, and the assertion that syllabic 
 emphasis implies greater length of syllable, which is not always 
 the fact. But in some points regarding this subject, Dr. Arthur 
 Browne seems to have erred even more than his fallible predeces- 
 sors. He observes (7th vol. of Irish Transact.) that "the mo- 
 dern Greeks make accents the cause of quantity ; they make the 
 syllable long on which the acute falls ; and they allow the acute 
 accent to change the real quantity. They always read poetry, as 
 well as prose, by accent." That either the acute accent, or the 
 syllabic emphasis, (two things, however, widely different,) may 
 fall most frequently on a long syllable, is not at all unlikely ; but 
 that, in any language, either accent or emphasis can be " the 
 cause of quantity," is a most unnatural supposition, one which 
 will obtain credit from no person that has any clear conception, 
 of the distinct natural properties belonging to a note of speech. 
 No such relation subsists between them. The truth however is ? 
 that Mr. Marsh, the learned translator of Michaelis, asserts the 
 contrary ; he states that he heard a Greek priest distinctly mark, 
 in his pronunciation, both accent and quantity. But he appears 
 to say nothing respecting the syllabic emphasis, which is much to. 
 be regretted ; for, since so prominent an affection could not be 
 overlooked, a suspicion may remain, that, while he imagined he 
 was remarking the accent, his attention was arrested merely by 
 the more commanding quality of syllabic emphasis. It is indeed 
 tea true, that, from the circumstance of our syllabic emphasis 
 being commonly termed accent, even our most intelligent writers, 
 on the subject seem to forget, or not to know, that there really 
 does exist such a quality as accent or tone, altogether different 
 from that of emphasis falsely termed accent. Still, however, his 
 assertion would prove the correct observance of syllabic emphasis 
 and quantity. Indeed I am inclined to think that Dr. Browne 
 himself, when he wrote, did not understand the difference between 
 accent and emphasis. When he employs " accent" or the " acute 
 accent," he appears to mean syllabic emphasis. " They always (he 
 says) read poetry, as well as prose, by accent," And were they 
 ever read correctly, otherwise ? He probably then meant to say, 
 that, in their poetry, syllabic emphasis has the same predominance 
 that it possesses in our own, and in that of other modern tongues. 
 " In the English language (adds Dr. Browne) accent and quantity 
 always agree." Nothing can be more untrue, whether, by the 
 term agree, he refers to their identity, or to their coincidence on the 
 same note or syllable; or whether by accent he means tone or merely 
 syllabic emphasis. An acute syllable, an emphatic syllable, and 
 a long syllable, are widely different one from another ; nor do the 
 qualities always coincide on the same syllable. The first syllables 
 of tyrant, private, and of tyranny, privy, arc both emphatic ; and 
 
^ 409 
 
 yet the first syllable of each of the former two is long or open, 
 while that of the latter two is short or close. Their tones too are 
 probably dissimilar. There is little doubt that both Primatt and 
 Browne, in their conceptions, that the rhythm of verse consists in 
 a due regard to accent, have mistaken one property of speech for 
 another, or, at least, have improperly employed one term for an- 
 other. With respect, however, to the nature of modern verse, and 
 the accidents of a note of speech, the French grammarians seem 
 to have carried their absurdities to the greatest extent. The 
 French language is said to have no accent, meaning, I suppose, 
 syllabic emphasis. Their philologists prescribe as a universal rule, 
 that, "pour bien parler Francois, il ne faut point avoir ^'accent;'" 
 zmd they contradistinguish our language from theirs by calling 
 the English " une langue cadencee." Moreover, it would seem 
 that their poetry is independent on accent, emphasis, or quan- 
 tity ; for as to a verse, " il ne consiste quen certain nombre de 
 syllabes." Such remarks, and such definitions, are altogether 
 incorrect. The French certainly ought to be the best judges 
 of their own language ; but, if I can trust to my ear, I think that 
 they do, and, ir to my judgment, that they must, have some 
 degrees of syllabic emphasis and remission. That in their lan- 
 guage there is more of lenity (if I may so use the word), or of 
 relative weakness, than in others ; and that in their polysyllables 
 they have not, as in English, one emphatic syllable regularly ren- 
 dered pre-eminent, are circumstances which I do not mean tQ 
 question. But, were any Frenchman to attempt to point out in- 
 telligibly the difference between the English word impossible, and 
 the French impossible, the result, I imagine, would be, that almost 
 the same eminence which the English assign to their syllable poss, 
 the Frenchman will give to the second i of the French word. That 
 the French language then possesses syllabic emphasis, and that 
 the regularity and harmony of their verses consist in the alterna- 
 tion of emphasis and remission, are facts that appear to me abun- 
 dantly evident. The following lines, for example, from Racine, are 
 in the even cadence, being iambic hexameters, with the even sylr 
 lables generally thetic or emphatic : 
 
 Celui qui met un frein a la fureur des flots, 
 
 Sait aussi des medians arreter ies complots. 
 In the following lines the cadence is evidently anapaestic: 
 
 II faut nous s'entre-aider, c'est la loi de nature. 
 
 Ce monarque, protecteur d'un monarque, comme lui. 
 On precisely the same principle are the verses of other modern 
 languages constructed : thus, in the Spanish, the following is an 
 iambic pentameter, hypercatalectic, the emphasis being on the 
 even syllables : 
 
 Pastores que dormis en la majada. 
 
 Thus also the Italian ; as in the following couplet, which likewise 
 has in each line a hyperrhythmical syllable : 
 
1-10 
 
 Che viver piu felice e piu beato, 
 Che ritrovarsi in scrvitu d'amore ! 
 
 And here it is worthy of observation, that on the first syllable of 
 ritrovarsi and of servitii is placed, as happens in English words, 
 the inferior emphasis, the primary being on the third syllable. It 
 is needless to exemplify the principle by reference to the English 
 language. It is surprising then that Mr. Mitford, the learned and 
 elegant historian, should observe (Harmony of Language) that 
 " he often gave his attention, at the Paris theatre, to the decla- 
 mation of the best actors, with the particular purpose of gathering 
 the nature of French verse j but that he ever remained ignorant 
 what it is that, under French rules, can make a French verse, with 
 the requisite number of syllables, a more or less harmonious verse." 
 The general inferiority of their emphasis is probably one reason 
 why, to mark clearly the boundary of the line, their verses are 
 generally concluded with very full rhymes. If in the preceding 
 French rule real accent or tone were meant, then we must ob- 
 serve thai the French have accent and variety of accent, that 
 every vocal or articulate sound proceeding from a Frenchman's 
 mouth has some musical pitch, and is a note either of speech or 
 song. The French language therefore is not, as writers have stated 
 it to be, an exception to the principle that to every language be- 
 long accent, quality, and quantity. 
 
 The late Bishop Horsley, in his elaborate and valuable treatise 
 " On the Prosodies of the Greek and Latin Languages," seems 
 to have confounded real accent or tone with syllabic emphasis, 
 or our modern accent. " It appears (ho says) that the acute, 
 which is a sharp stroke of the voice upon some one syllable of the 
 word, is in truth the only positire tone. The grave consists 
 merely in a negation of that acuteness." "The natural tendency 
 of the acute (he adds), contrary to the prejudice of the English 
 ear, is to shorten the syllable upon which it falls," while, on the 
 other hand, Primatt asserts that it makes a short syllable be- 
 come a long one. And, although he observes, with approbation, 
 that " the Halicarnassian says that the circumflex was a mixture 
 of the acute and the grave," yet he doubts whether " circum- 
 flexion be a different thing from acuteness," and considers the 
 circumflex accent " as a compound mark of accent and quan- 
 tity." What he means by " a sharp stroke," he does not seem to 
 have clearly explained. It is pretty evident, however, that he 
 means nothing essentially different from what is termed ictus, or 
 syllabic emphasis. 
 
 Now, it is almost needless to observe, that an acute accent is 
 in reality a rising inflexion, and has no necessary connexion with 
 any stroke of the voice, since it may affect either an emphatic or 
 an unemphatic syllable. Besides, the definition of circumflexion, 
 which he appears to approve, is not very consistent with his ex- 
 planation of the two simple accents, which, as far as tone is con- 
 cerned, would form a combination of something ami nothing, of 
 
I'll 
 
 a positive quality and its mere negation. While professing to re- 
 gulate accent or tone, which we suspect never was, and never 
 could be, completely subjected to rules, the learned author, doubt- 
 less, was unconsciously laying down rules merely for syllabic em- 
 phasis. 
 
 There are few subjects connected with language, on which wri- 
 ters have been more divided in opinion, than on the nature of an- 
 cient rhythm, and the manner in which antient poetry ought to 
 be pronounced. In contrasting the Latin position of his sharp 
 stroke, as in ifpoo-stpy, with the Greek, as in ^poo-tyy, in the follow- 
 ing line, 
 
 Toy ' drta.u,ioiLvos Tfpo<rE$t) Tfo^s wxu$ 'A^/AAsy^, 
 Dr. Horsley allows that the two first syllables will be short either 
 way ; but he thinks that, in following the former mode, it will be 
 difficult, if not impracticable, not to shorten the final long syl- 
 lable <py ; but that, by following the latter, the reader will be com- 
 pelled to give q>y with its true length of sound. " True, (observes 
 a Monthly Reviewer, vol.xxv. 256,) but he will also ieel himself 
 compelled to lengthen the sound of Trpo$-, and, indeed, we believe 
 it impossible to pronounce two consecutive short syllables with 
 the same brevity." Either way, I see little danger to quantity. 
 By the former mode, the word, in regard to emphasis and quan- 
 tity, will pretty much resemble the English word prostitute or sub- 
 stitute, the noun attributes, enterprise, runaway; by the latter, 
 such English words, as the verb attributes. For my own part, in 
 reading this line, I should feel no hesitation to lay i\\c-ictus or em- 
 phasis on the last syllable of the word, as I would on our English 
 word entertain. I consider a dactyl or a spondee as a metrical 
 cadence or complete rhythmical pulsation, including thesis and 
 arsis, equivalent to a musical bar, and constituting an aliquot part 
 of the verse, the first syllable of each being thetic or emphatic, 
 and the remainder of the foot being in arsis or remiss. Feet may 
 be regarded, so far perhaps as melepy is concerned, as a poet's 
 words; and, therefore, in reciting a hexameter verse, I would uni- 
 formly lay the emphasis on the first syllable of a dactyl and spon- 
 dee. The last syllable however of the dactyl, though in arsis, 
 will, of necessity, not be equally weak with the middle syllable. 
 And in such a mode of recitation, unless too great a pause be 
 made between the feet, there will be no danger whatever, either 
 by metrical connexions or separations, of destroying the intelli- 
 gibility of the words. In reciting the following English line, 
 
 Ah ! | come not, | write not, | think not j once of | me, 
 the two monosyllables have the precise effect of a dissyllabic ; 
 and yet no hearer, possessing a competent knowledge of the lan- 
 guage, would misunderstand either the words or their meaning. 
 Our longer words too are perfectly intelligible, even although, by 
 receiving two distinct emphases, they may seem, in a deliberate 
 recitation, to be broken into two distinct words. It is chiefly by 
 a sort of staccaf" utterance, by making an unnecessary long pause 
 
412 
 
 after each foot, and by erroneously laying our syllabic emphasis 
 on its last syllable, that in reading ancient hexameter, as it is 
 termed, by quantity, we seem to scan, rather than to read, de- 
 stroying the integrity of the words, and, as far at least as empha- 
 sis is concerned, to convert dactyls into anapaests, and spondees 
 into iambuses. 
 
 Let the dactyl be pronounced, in regard to time and force, 
 somewhat like our English word curious or warily, and the spon- 
 dee like timepiece or 'warlike ; and, I apprehend, neither will quan- 
 tity be much falsified, nor will emphasis be essentially injured. In 
 this way, two out of the three accidents of speech will be tolerably 
 preserved. But then it may be asked, what becomes of real ac- 
 cent or tone ? The complete practice, I answer, if not, also, even 
 the theory, of the Greek and Roman accentuation, is irretriev- 
 ably lost. But, if a line be read in the way which we have ven- 
 tured to recommend, not with the monotonous drawl of a child 
 learning to read, but with our natural and unaffected pronuncia- 
 tion, and a due regard to sense and pause, it will be found to pos- 
 sess, at least, all the melody or accentual music of English speech, 
 (which cannot be different in kind from that of Greece or Rome,) 
 arising from variety of pitch and inflexion, every syllable, whether 
 long or short, emphatic or unemphatic, having been uttered in 
 some accent, or combination of accent, commensurate with the 
 time of the syllable, the acute or rising inflexion coinciding mos 
 frequently with the long and emphatic quantity. By a regular 
 adjustment of the syllabic emphasis, tha Jypfyua will be regarded ; 
 in the natural accompaniment of tones, the ^V^EXSKX, will not be. 
 altogether lost ; and, by a due observance of the relative time of 
 each note or syllable, the perfection of both will be most essen- 
 tially promoted. 
 
 But Dr. Horsley's object was certainly a rational one, viz. n< 
 to supersede quantity, nor to annihilate accent or emphasis, but 
 to preserve both ; to prescribe rules for accent (syllabic empha- 
 sis), so as to render it " not destructive of quantity, but subser- 
 vient to it." And yet, doubtless, even ten general rules could not 
 be necessary to ascertain the proper position of the syllabic em- 
 phasis in hexameter verse, or in any other species of verse, an- 
 tient or modern ; and ten times the number would be insufficient 
 to fix the accentuation of any language. Although, however, 
 his rules in regard to the changes which he " conceives the tones 
 of connected words to have undergone," may not be deemed un- 
 objectionable, no one will deny that many of this eminently learn- 
 ed prelate's remarks are well entitled to the notice of every els 
 sical scholar. While grammarians, whether antient or modern, 
 are laying down rules for Jixing the accentuation, it is probable 
 that they mean by accent, nothing but syllabic emphasis. Accen- 
 tuation, in any language, never was, nor could be, fixed ; for the 
 accents must always have been liable to variation, according to 
 the position of the words, whether in question or in answer, in 
 
413 
 
 suspended, or in a final sense ; since tone consists in the natural 
 modulation of the voice, which accompanies the verbal expression 
 of our sentiments and emotions. 
 
 Dr. Horsley's treatise was attacked with some ability, and not 
 a little flippancy, in the postscript to a work entitled Matron 
 ariston, ascribed to Dr. Warner, and most extravagantly and 
 unwarrantably panegyrized by the Monthly Reviewers and other 
 critics. The object of this publication is to support the princi- 
 ples of Adolphus Mekerchus, who, in his commentary De veteri 
 et rectd pronuntiatione linguae Grcecce, was a strenuous advocate 
 for reading every syllable, according merely to its quantity. A 
 strange project truly ! There can, in truth, be no rational ob- 
 jection to reading by quantity ; but we deny the possibility of 
 reading by quantity alone. As emphasis cannot be neglected, 
 why should it not be put under some sort of regulation ? But we 
 further remark, that, while Dr. Warner conceives that he is read- 
 ing by quantity alone, it is quite evident that he is really reading 
 chiefly with attention to a particular position of the syllabic em- 
 phasis, since he assimilates his favourite mode of pronouncing 
 Greek and Latin verses, with " the modulation observed in the 
 English, with which his examples are associated in similar mea- 
 sure ;" ex. gr. 
 
 Ades, 
 
 Fortu 
 With glit 
 
 Lenes 
 When lads 
 
 Pater supreme, 
 
 Thy head with glo | ry beamy ! 
 
 na no mutat 
 
 ter and | with names 
 que sub | noctem 
 to meet j their lass 
 
 genus, 
 what fuss ! 
 susurri, 
 es hurry. 
 
 Now, what is this bwt reading chiefly according to syllabic em- 
 phasis, the predominating accident in the composition of our 
 own poetry ? But we are far from objecting to this mode; our 
 objection lies chiefly against the inapposite terms in which the 
 doctrine is couched, one accident of speech being evidently mis- 
 taken for another, and against the pompous manner in which it is 
 introduced as communicating " a new pleasure." Dr. Warner, 
 however, does not stand alone in this misconception. Almost 
 every modern advocate for ancient quantity, of whom we have 
 any knowledge, seems to regard a long quantity as precisely 
 identical with an emphatical syllable ; and to imagine that, while 
 he is recommending, in reality, nothing else but a particular ad- 
 justment of the emphasis, he is strenuously supporting the cause 
 of much-injured quantity. It is certainly 'true, however, that, in 
 all languages, strength and extension of sound, and perhaps, we 
 may add, acuteness too, more naturally, and, therefore, more fre- 
 quently, coincide on the same note or syllable : hence, probably, 
 the almost universal confusion of the really distinct properties of 
 emphasis (quality), quantity, and tone. It would seem, that the 
 particular state of organic tension, necessary for the production 
 of the emphatic impulse, is peculiarly adapted, not only for pro- 
 
414 
 
 traction of sound, but perhaps also for elevation of note. Even 
 Mekerchus himself, in allusion to what he terms reading by quan- 
 tity, observes, Si hoc modo pronuntiaris, servatd syllabarum quan- 
 titate, etiam ut versus non digeras in pedes, quis tamen apcriv et SECHJ 
 non audiatj et suavissimd horum versuum gravitate non capiatur f 
 Now, although a proper attention to quantity may be the moi 
 likely mode of ensuring the proper rhythm, as indicated by ars 
 and thesis, and vice versd; we do maintain, that reading by mei 
 quantity, were it practicable, would not of itself produce tho$ 
 varieties indicated by arsis and thesis, in as much as the essenc 
 of rhythm does not, and cannot, consist in an observance of mere 
 quantity. 
 
 We do not, however, mean to deny that time is necessary to 
 rhythm, but to assert that the essence of rhythm does not con- 
 sist in time. That arsis and thesis may be observed in the pro- 
 posed mode of reading, is likely enough; but then it will 
 found, that, in the recitation of Mekerchus, Dr. Warner, am 
 " the learned ecclesiastic," with whose pronunciation the lattei 
 was so fascinated, their long syllables are fully as much charac- 
 terized by emphasis, as by extension of sound. 
 
 Emphasis, not quantity, we conceive to be the true pulse of 
 speech. Time itself, in a mere continuation of longs and shorts, 
 cannot, we apprehend, be the time-measurer or time-beater. 
 Syllables of equal length can, of themselves, impress no charac- 
 ter of cadence. Without the variety produced by some other 
 accident than quantity, whence could arise the rhythm of a drawl- 
 ing succession of monochronous syllables, whether termed spon- 
 dees or pyrrhics ? The most exact pronunciation, indeed, of 
 longs, and shorts, in any possible order, would, otherwise, be 
 nothing but mere nerveless and exanimate syllabification, 
 
 Cicero observes, " Numerus in continuations nullus est; distin< 
 tio, et aequaliurn et saepe variorum intervallorum percussio, nume- 
 rum conficit." It is by the alternation of emphasis and remission, 
 that intervals and proportions of time are duly discriminated and 
 audibly indicated. The prominent variation of syllabic force and 
 feebleness must have been generally known before tones could be 
 analysed, or quantities were clearly ascertained, and must have 
 been instinctively and irresistibly Jelt, as the vital principle both 
 of speech and song. It is not conceivable that an accident of 
 speech, which constitutes almost the sole regulating principle of 
 modern versification, could have been overlooked, or should not 
 have been deemed a consideration of the highest importance, in 
 the composition and recitation of ancient poetry. Its existence 
 needs not to be proved by authorities, since it is founded in the 
 very nature of things, in the action and powers of the organs of 
 speech. Without an intervening pause, it is physically impossi- 
 ble to pronounce two consecutive syllables, whether long or 
 short, with the same strong syllabic emphasis ; there must be i 
 re-action of the primary organ of syllabic impulse, either during 
 
415 
 
 a pause, or on a remiss note or two, for speech is effected, not by 
 continuous, but reiterated action : and, in the utterance of even 
 two consecutive weak syllables, it will be found, that there is not 
 the same degree of weakness; hence the alternate or periodical 
 nature of emphasis and remission, which we conceive to be the 
 essence and governing principle of rhythm, and believe to hare 
 been visibly indicated by the action of thesis and arsis. It is upon 
 this principle, that every English word of two syllables, has ?ie- 
 cessarily an emphatic impulse upon one of them. The longer 
 words may have two or three impulses, their syllabic position be- 
 ing generally determined by the seat of the primary or pre-eminent 
 emphasis. In this manner 4 are English and other modern lan- 
 guages enunciated. Thus also are Greek and Latin now pro- 
 nounced. And in a similar manner must they always have been 
 pronounced, unless, indeed, the Greeks and Romans had theiror- 
 gans of speech differently constructed, or differently gifted, from 
 those of modern times. We entertain not even the smallest doubt, 
 for example, that the pronunciation, so far at least as concerns 
 emphasis, of the ditrochee, comprobavit, a cadence or close, with 
 which, we are told, by Cicero and Quintilian, that the Asiatics 
 were wonderfully delighted, was precisely similar to that of our 
 word approbation) a cadence, perhaps, equally agreeable to mo- 
 dern ears: that, in point of emphasis, (the present part of the 
 question does not regard quantity,) it consisted, like the latter, 
 of a weak and a strong modern trochee ; or, to speak more cor- 
 rectly, that, as, in the English word, the inferior emphasis was 
 laid on the first syllable com, and the stronger on a, the penulti- 
 mate. In regard both to emphasis and quantity, it is certain, 
 that each word furnishes a fine flowing cadence. True then it 
 doubtless is, in one respect at least, although often questioned, 
 that rhythmus est metro potentior. There is nothing in the na- 
 ture ot things, to determine whether the two syllables of a dissyl- 
 lable shall be both long, both short, or one of each kind. Far 
 otherwise with respect to emphasis. And hence it probably is, 
 that in the composition of verse, to the almost utter neglect of 
 passive quantity, rhythm, or the unavoidable pulsation of alter- 
 nate emphasis and remission, still survives, and may be said to 
 reign supreme lord of the ascendant. We again repeat it, Is it 
 rational to suppose that such a connate principle in human ut- 
 terance could have been overlooked by the antients ? Presuming 
 that it could not be overlooked, we would ask, In what terms 
 have they characterized its effects on speech, if these are not to be 
 regarded as the essence of the antient rhythm ? 
 
 We are well aware of the discrepancies observable among the 
 ancient writers, and among the modern too, on the nature of the 
 ancient rhythm. We presume, however, to think, that the au- 
 thority of Aristides, who was not only a grammarian, but a mu- 
 sician, is entitled to the highest credit. He writes, (Meibomius, 
 vol. 2, p. 49,) TOY (Jt^sv pvfyw Y apysi xou SEOTEI rr t v 8<r;av e%f<v, TO 
 
41$ 
 
 sv <TjAAaa{f xai ry f&fwv avo/xoior^n, that rhytlini has? 
 its essence in arsis and thesis, but metre in syllables and their dif- 
 ference ; and he afterwards plainly refers to its name and office, 
 when he speaks of the aywyij j&fipijnfj lpf>a<ro;, as Steele justly 
 translates it, drift of rhythmical emphasis. He observes also, that 
 cipffi$ ju/s'v sfi tyopa, trw^a^o; ITT* TUJ civou, $(ri$ E STTI ?w KO.T'UJ favrS 
 ppou$, (De Musica, p. 31,) that arsis is the raising up of some 
 part of the body, and thesis is the moving down the same. And 
 adds, that " the dactylic and trochaic feet begin with thesis, and 
 end with arsis ; but the anapaestic and iambic begin with arsis and 
 end with thesis." (Id. pp. 36, 37.) Hence it would appear that 
 the Greek and the Latin rhythmus was analogous to a bar of mu- 
 sic; the former comprising syllables, the latter consisting of notes; 
 the measure and quality of both being indicated by time-beating, 
 or the pulsation of thesis and arsis. If the foot began with an em- 
 phatic syllable, it was measured per thesin, by the hand first down, 
 or the supplosio pedis ; if, with an unemphatic syllable, it was 
 measured per arsin, that is, by the hand or foot first up ; so that, 
 according as the first part of the foot was emphatic or unempha- 
 tic, the measuring of it began either with thesis or arsis. A line, 
 beginning with arsis would be considered, we presume, as if com- 
 mencing in the middle of a bar. The preceding account of the 
 matter, we think much more accordant with the truth, than that 
 which is furnished by Hermann, (de Metris, p. 18,) who seems to 
 refer arsis either to loudness or to acuteness of voice (we do not 
 pretend to determine which) ; and thesis, in like manner, to either 
 softness or gravity. These are his words, " Ea vis et veluti nisus 
 quidam, quo princeps cujusque ordinis sonus ab insequentibus dis- 
 tinguitur, ictus appellatur ; Grseci apcriv vocant, ab elevatione vo- 
 cis," (whether does he mean loudness or acuteness ?) " insequen- 
 tesque sonos a demittenda voce," (softness or gravity? "in &e<ri 
 esse dicunt." Had he put thesis and arsis, with their respective 
 explanations, in the place of each other, and at the same time 
 substituted pes or manus for vox, I am inclined to think the words 
 of his definitions, and their application, would have come much 
 nearer to the truth. For we conceive ictus and thesis to be syno- 
 nymous, the foot or hand being here put down, and lifted up at 
 arsis. 
 
 ^ That rhythm and metre are different things, and that the an- 
 cient rhythm was identical in kind with the modern, we may, I 
 think, fairly presume from the words both of Quintilian and Lon- 
 ginus. The former concludes the well-known passage, in which 
 he is elaborately discriminating metre and rhythm, with these 
 words, " Metrnm in verbis modo, rhythmus etiam in corporis motu 
 est" that metre exists in words only, but that rhythm may be ex- 
 hibited equally in the motion of the body (as in dance). To the 
 same effect are the words of Longinus ; AiaQspst $s Msrpsv ' 
 vXy yap ro~; tTpoi$ f) cruAAao>j, xa) %u>fn$ (ToXXaf^ OVK civ 
 Msrpw. 'O h'Pufyto; ylvsfcn KM ev o-UAAa?a"$, ymtcu # 
 
 
417 
 
 jf KO.} ya.p iv xpdrw. Longin. Fragm. Metre differs from 
 rhythm ; for syllables are the material or metre, and without syl- 
 lable there can beoo metre: but rhythm may exist either in syl- 
 lables, or without them, for strokes (as in beating a drum) are 
 sufficient to produce rhythm us. 
 
 I am not ignorant either of the artificial polysyllabic feet men- 
 tioned as existing in ancient prosody, or of the alleged intricacy 
 of the ancient rhythmus. It is, however, stated as the opinion 
 of Austin, that a foot ought not to exceed four syllables. Dio- 
 nysius (de Struct. Orat. sect. xvii. ad fin.) says, that it should not 
 be less than two, nor more than three. Cicero (Orat. 218,) says, 
 '' Paeon, quod plures habeat syllabas quam tres, numerus a qui- 
 busdam, non pes habetur." And Quintilian seems to be of the 
 same opinion : " Quicquid enim supra tres syllabas, id ex plunbus 
 est pedibus." (Inst. 1 . 9.) But, be this as it may, the natural foot 
 or step must have consisted of, and been measured by, one arsis 
 and one thesis. There could not have been, we apprehend, more 
 than two, or, at most, three syllables in arsis. And when, ac- 
 cording to the particular quantities which it measured, the hand 
 or the foot had performed the appropriate motions, the natural 
 foot must have been complete; with a renewal of these motions, 
 another foot or rhythmus must have commenced. With respect 
 to rhythm, I must confess, that I know of but two kinds, existing 
 in nature, usually, I believe, termed common time, and triple 
 time ; and these, I apprehend, must always have been the same, 
 whether in speech or in song. 
 
 Much, however, as we would contend for the importance and 
 influence of emphasis in the recitation of ancient verse, we can- 
 not coincide in the literal interpretation of those words in the 
 Scholiast, which have been so often commented on, namely, *O 
 pufyuof, w$ /SouAsrcu, sAxe; rou; xpovovg. IloAAax^ y&v xa< TOY 
 iBpoi^vv "Ypww totst paKpov. The meaning has been supposed to 
 be this, that, when a short syllable occurred, where a long one 
 was required, the rhythmus would require a following inane or 
 rest ; so that, although the syllable would not in reality be length- 
 ened, the proper time of the line would thus be completed. To 
 the preceding strange dogma, Marius Victorinus has added, that 
 " rhythm will often make a long time short." We know that, in 
 reading English verse, we are sometimes compelled, if we yield 
 to the drift of the rhythm, to give an emphatic utterance to a syl- 
 lable not naturally emphatic, and to pass remissly over syllables 
 naturally entitled to syllabic force. All, then, we suspect, in- 
 tended to be intimated in the preceding words is, that the posi- 
 tion of the syllabic emphasis commonly observed in prose, was 
 not always regarded in poetry, or that the rhythm gives an em- 
 phatic utterance to a short, a doubtful, or an unemphatic syllable, 
 or to a natural short quantity in position, if in the verse it should 
 happen to occupy an emphatic situation. Emphasis, though often 
 mistaken for length of quantity, with which it most frequently 
 
 2 E 
 
418 
 
 coincide*, is not quantity ; nor can it, strictly speaking, impart 
 that which it neither is, nor essentially possesses. But we do not 
 mean absolutely to deny, that, in compositions in which there ex- 
 isted variety of feet, occasional modifications of quantity, without,* 
 however, altering its specific character, and occasional pauses, 
 might have been necessary to make the metre keep a due pace 
 with the rhythm. 
 
 An instance of the application of the preceding principle, it is 
 probable, we have in Virgil's 
 
 pecudes, pictaeque volucres. 
 
 Georg. iii, 243. JEn. iv, 525. 
 
 in which the middle syllable of volucres, commonly unemphatic, 
 and naturally short, though it may be deemed long by position, 
 becomes emphatic, by being put into the place of thesis. On this 
 line, Quintilian observes, "Evenit ut metri quoque conditio mutet 
 accentum, nam volucres, media acuta legam ; quia, etsi brevis na- 
 tura, tamen positione longa cst, ne faciat lambum, quern non re- 
 cipit versus heroicus." Whether, by accentus, Quintilian really 
 refers to accent, properly so termed, or tone, or to our accent or 
 syllabic emphasis, I shall not, notwithstanding the " media acuta" 
 in the context, attempt to determine. It is indeed not unlikely, 
 that the accentuation of the middle syllable may vary, with the 
 change of the syllabic emphasis, and the decision of the quantity. 
 I agree, however, with Mr. Steele, in thinking, that the liberty 
 which was taken by Virgil in this place, was not, strictly, what 
 the words of Quintilian might imply ; but was, precisely, the put- 
 ting the syllable lu in thesis, whereas it, naturally, should have 
 been in arsis ; or, in other words, Virgil put it into a place where 
 it must be pronounced emphatically, though by its nature it was 
 unemphatic. Such liberties, as the preceding one, we may add, 
 occur most frequently towards the end of a line ; and this cir- 
 cumstance may perhaps have arisen from the idea, that, in such 
 a position, the syllable is the less likely to evade the dycoyy /Suflpxifc 
 fcpttWMrft or drift of the rhythmical emphasis. Similar pecu- 
 liarities, observable in other antient poets, may, probably be ac- 
 counted for on the like principle. In the versification of Ho- 
 mer, a vowel, naturally short, sometimes occurs as the first syl- 
 lable of a foot, whether at the beginning of a verse, or in the 
 middle of a word, the syllable, which is thetic, being rendered 
 sufficiently prominent, under the drift of the rhythm, for the gene- 
 ral harmony of the verse, by the ictus metricus or syllabic em- 
 phasis, 1 
 
 * This long Note, which may perhaps be deemed a very unimportant one, 
 hastily transcribed aad chiefly from memoranda, which had been lying by me 
 for several years, was sent, at once, to the M.mth. Mag. for insertion, and be- 
 gan to appear in the year 1814. There is an evident coincidence between the 
 concluding sentence of it, and an opinion, previously published, of Professor 
 Dunbar's, in elucidation of the versification of Homer ; with this difference, 
 however, that those syllables which the learned Professor considers to be in 
 arsis, I have considered as in thesis, tbe emphatic syllable being, in my opinion, 
 
419 
 
 OF THE FIGURES OF PROSODY. 
 
 The syllables of words in verse are affected in eight dif- 
 ferent ways : By Caesura ; by Synaloepha, and Ecthlipsis ; 
 Synaeresis, and Diaeresis ; by Systole, and Diastole ! ; and 
 by Synapheia ; which are commonly called the Figures of 
 Prosody. 
 
 OF CAESURA. 
 
 When, after finishing a foot, there remains one syllable 
 of the word, this circumstance is called ctesura ; a term 
 which is also sometimes applied to the syllable itself thui 
 cut off, and which forms the first part of the following foot, 
 
 There are commonly reckoned four species of caesura ; 
 the tfiemimeriSy penthemimeris, hephthemimeris> and ennemi- 
 merls; or, according to the Latin, the semiternaria, semi- 
 yuinaria, semiseptenaria, and seminovenaria ; so named 
 
 1 By some, caesura is not enumerated among the figures ; sy- 
 stole and diastole are referred to poetic license ; and ecthlipsis 
 and synaloepha are included under the general term of elision.* 
 The term ccesura is sometimes applied to that separation, or short 
 pause, which, under the influence of the rhythmical movement, 
 naturally occurs, in reading a verse ; dividing the line, as it were, 
 into two members. As in English, and other modern poetry, 
 its place in the line seems to be determined, rather by the dig. 
 position of the syllabic emphasis of the words, in connexion some- 
 times with the sense, than by the mere feet or quantity. In 
 Heroic poetry, it occurs chiefly after the penthemimeris ; as 
 
 Tityre, tu patulne [ recubans sub tegmine fagi Virg. 
 Sometimes after the two first syllables of the third foot. 
 
 Effigiem statuere | nefas quae triste piaret Virg. 
 and in other positions. The rhythmical caesura, at the end of 
 the second foot, does not seem to contribute to the harmony of 
 the line, especially when followed by a spondee. 
 
 Conjugium vocat | hoc proetexit nomine culpam Virg. 
 This intermediate or rhythmical pause will be further noticed 
 in the Observations on Hexameter Verse. It occurs in the mid- 
 dle of Pentameter. 
 
 and that, while he conceives the syllable to lie lengthened by 
 1 ascribe to the ictus no such power, merely conceiving that, by being placed 
 in thesis, a short or doubtful syllable may, thus, be rendered sufficiently strong 
 and prominent for the intended rhythm. Previously, however, to the publi- 
 cation of Mr. Dunbar's valuable " Inquiry into the Versification of Homer," 
 which, I believe, first appeared, anonymously, in the Class. Journ. for June, 
 1 8 1 4, the present writer's opinions respecting these subjects had been intimated, 
 with sufficient clearness, particularly under the Articles on Syllabic and 
 Bmpkasis, Cadence, &c. in an English Grammar, printed in the year 18 12. 
 
 2 K 2 
 
420 
 
 from the places in which they are found in scanning a verse, 
 which the antients frequently did by half-feet. 
 
 1. The Triemimeris is, when, after the first foot, or two 
 half-feet, there remains a syllable terminating a word, or a 
 third half-foot. 
 
 2. The Penthemimeris is, when, after two feet, or four 
 half-feet, there remains a terminating syllable, or Jifth half- 
 foot. 
 
 3. The Hephthemimeris is, when, after three feet, or six 
 half-feet, a syllable remains, which is the seventh half-foot. 
 
 4-. The Ennemimeris 1 is, when, after four feet, or eight 
 half-feet, a syllable remains, which is the ninth half-foot. 
 
 The first three caesuras are in the following line, 
 
 Silves-trem \ tenu-i \ Mu-sam \ meditaris avena Virg. 
 All are in the following, 
 
 Ille la-tus j nive-um \ mol-li \ful-tus \ hyacintho\iYg. 
 
 The preceding may be named syllabic caesuras, or pauses. 
 To these may be added the trochaic caesura, as it has been 
 named by some grammarians, and by Mr. Pickbourn ; and 
 ' the monosyllabic pause, which is also noticed by Mr. Pick- 
 bourn, and of which some mention is made in Versification, 
 under the Great Alcaic. 
 
 The trochaic caesura is formed either by a trochee remain- 
 ing at the end of a word, after the completion of a foot, or 
 by a word consisting of a trochee : thus, 
 
 Cuncta prius ten-tata ; \ sed immedicabile vulnus Ovid. 
 
 Infandurn, re-gm^, | jubes renovare dolorem Virg. 
 
 Per connubia nostra-, \ per incceptos Hymenaeos Virg. 
 
 A similar pause to that which is caused by the usual caesura 
 of a syllable sometimes arises from a monosyllable; thus, 
 
 De grege nunc \ tibi vir, \ nunc de \ grege natus haben- 
 
 dus Ovid. 
 The general effects of caesura are twofold : 
 
 1. They give smoothness, grace, and sweetness to a verse, 
 since they connect the different words harmoniously together. 
 
 2. They often cause a syllable, naturally short, to be rec- 
 koned long, especially after the first, second, or third foot; 
 and this circumstance, perhaps, arises from the pause, or sus- 
 pension of the voice, which then, usually, ensues. 
 
 1 To these some have added the Hendechemimeris > which is, 
 when, after five feet, or ten half-feet, there remains a syllable, 
 which is the eleventh half-foot ; as, 
 
 Vertitur interea ccelum, et ruit ocea-no \ nox Virg. 
 Parturiunt monies, nascetur ridicu-lus \ mus Hor. 
 But such instances are very rare, and to be imitated with great dis- 
 cretion. 
 
421 
 
 After the first foot : as \ 
 Pectori-bus \ in/nans, spirantia consulit exta Virg. 
 
 After the second : as, 
 Omnia vincit am-or , et nos cedamus amori Virg. 
 
 After the third: N^S, 
 Dona dehinc anro gi-avi-d 1, sectoque cleplianto Virg. 
 
 After the fourth : as, 
 
 Grains homoinfectos linquens profu-gus \ hymenceos Virg. 
 
 Of all the metrical pauses 9 , the final one has been regarded 
 
 as the most important; since it is said to possess the power 
 
 of lengthening a final short syllable*, in every species of 
 
 poetic composition. 
 
 1 The learner should remember that the first pause arising from 
 caesura is in the second foot ; the second, or common pause, in the 
 third; the third pause, in the fourth; and the fifth pause, in the 
 last foot. He should also observe that, in using the caesural mark, 
 I have sometimes placed it at the cutting off] that is, before the syl- 
 lable cut off, but oftener, especially in speaking of the consequent 
 pause, after the syllable cut off. Either way, the syllable cannot 
 be mistaken, being the last of a word. 
 
 8 These are all merely pauses of suspension ; and, in reciting 
 verses, do not require either elevation or depression, or any altera- 
 tion in the tone of voice, unless they coincide with sentential pauses, 
 (pauses in sense,) which are of a very different nature. Metrical 
 pauses are carefully to be distinguished from sentential ones ; for 
 not only the caesural, but even final pauses, frequently occur, 
 where there is no stop in the sense ; even between the noun and its 
 adjective, and the nominative case and its verb : as, 
 Ignea convexi \ vis ct \ sine ponder e ccdi 
 Emicuit. 
 
 Here the noun vis is separated from its adjective ignea by a cse- 
 sural pause, and from its verb emicuit by both a caesural (monosyl- 
 labic) and a final pause. Pickbourns Dissert, on Metr. Pauses. 
 
 3 We do not iniagine, however, that any pause really changes 
 the quantity ; but suppose that it only prolongs the time of reci- 
 tation strictly belonging to the line, on the score of mere syllabic 
 quantity. The pause, although it may extend the time of recita- 
 tion, can have no effect on the syllable itself, for the general time is 
 not liable to modification from any power, except, perhaps, that of 
 rhythm. Now. the pause itself must obey the same power ; and, 
 therefore, will probably be shorter at the end of a verse which ter- 
 minates in a long syllable, than where the final syllable is a short one. 
 We are aware, that eminent critics, and among them, the learned 
 Dr. Clarke, entertain an opinion somewhat different, with respect 
 to the effect of the pause. He asserts (II. i. 51 ) that " the last 
 syllable of every verse is universally, not common, as gramma- 
 rians pretend, but al ways, of necessity, long, proptcr pausam istam, 
 
425 
 
 OF SYNALCEPHA. 
 
 piia cuts off the final vowel or diphthong of a word, 
 when the following word begins with a vowel or diphthong, 
 as in the following lines, 
 
 Terra antiqua, potens armis atque ubere glebes. 
 Qiiidve moror, si omnes uno ordine habetis Achivos. 
 Dardanidce infensi pcenas cum sanguine poscunt Virg. 
 in which terra, clique, si, uno, ordine lose their last vowel, in 
 scanning, and Dardanidce its diphthong, because the follow- 
 ing words begin with vowels, (h being considered a mere 
 aspiration,) and are thus scanned ; 
 
 Ter* antiqua potens armis atqu y uberc glebce. 
 Quidve moror, s' omnes un' ordin' habetis Achivos. 
 Dardanid? infensi pcenas cum sanguine poscunt. 
 Note 1. Synalcepha is sometimes omitted. (1) Regularly, 
 as in the interjections o, heu, ah, proh, v<z, vah, hci / as, 
 O pater, o hominum, Divumque aeterna potestas ! Virg. 
 Heu ubi pacta fides, ubi quae jurare solebas Ovid. 
 Ah ! ego non possum tanta videre mala Tibull. 
 Also in Id, by Ovid : as, 
 
 Et bis I'd Arethusa, Id Arethusa, vocavit, 
 But o is sometimes made short : as, 
 
 Te Corydon, o Alexi; trahit sua quemque voluptas Virg. 
 (2) By poetic license, as in the following lines; 
 Et succus pecori, et lac subducitur agnis. 
 
 qua t in fine versus, syllable ultinue pronuntiatio necessario produ- 
 citur" But pause and protracted utterance, it may be observed, 
 differ from each other, as much as silence and sound. Mr. Steele 
 goe so far as to assert, that pauses ought to be accounted a> 
 parts of the metre ; but no pauses can, we apprehend, be reck- 
 oned parts of the metre, except those which accompany short 
 syllables, when they occupy the places of long ones, and which 
 may, therefore, be considered as metrical. The caesural pause 
 also, while it conduces to the better discrimination of the feet 
 from the words, affords rest to the organs of speech, and pro- 
 duces delay in the recitation. And even if the syllable itself be 
 not lengthened, yet, standing at the beginning of the next foot, 
 it will be rendered sufficiently prominent, by receiving, from the 
 ictus or syllabic emphasis, such an energy of sound as will fully 
 enable it to sustain the following syllables of its own foot. It may 
 be remarked, particularly in a deliberate utterance, that, inde- 
 pendently of any caesural pause, a very short intermission of voice 
 necessarily precedes every strongly emphatic syllable ; and this 
 pause, too, will count in the aggregate time of the line. 
 
 
423 
 
 Posthabita coluisse Samo : hie illius arma. 
 
 Stant etjuniperi, et castanece hirsute Virg. 
 Tliis, which is called in Latin a hiatus, is not to be admitted 
 without some reason into a verse. It sometimes, however, 
 happens, if the preceding vowel is short, especially at the 
 end of a sentence, where, in course, a pause takes place ; as 
 in the following line, 
 
 Et vera incessu patuit dea. Ille ubi matrem Virg. 
 
 Note 2. Long vowels and diphthongs, when they are not 
 cut off, become common. 
 
 They are short in the following lines, 
 
 InsuUe lonio in magno, quas dira Celaeno. 
 
 Credimus ? an qiti amant, ipsi sibi somnia fingunt. 
 
 Victor apud rapidum Simoenta sub Ilio alto Virg* 
 They are long in the following, 
 
 Ante tibi Eoae Atlantides abscondantur. 
 
 Amphion Dircaeus in Actceo Aracyntho. 
 
 Lamentis gemituque zkfcemineo ululatu Virg. 
 
 Jactari quos cernis in lonio immense- Ovid. 
 Sometimes an instance of their being long and short oc- 
 curs in the same verse ; as, 
 
 Ter sunt conafi imponere Pelio Ossam. 
 
 Glauco et Panopei, et Inoo Melicertse Virg. 
 OF ECTHLIPSIS. 
 
 Ecthlipsis cuts off the final m and the preceding vowel, 
 the following word beginning with a vowel : as, 
 
 Leniter ex merito quicquid patiare ferendum est -Ovid, 
 
 O curas hominum, o quantum est in rebus inane Pers. 
 which are to be thus read, in scanning, 
 
 Leniter ex merito quicquid patiareferend* est 
 O curas homin' 6 quant' est in rebus inane- 
 
 Note 1. The antients sometimes retained the m and the 
 vowel, which they made short : as, 
 
 Corporum officiuin est quoniam premere omnia deorsum 
 
 Lucr. 
 But the urn of officium is elided. 
 
 Note 2. S was formerly elided, not only before a vowel, 
 with tl?e loss of a syllable; but before a consonant also, with- 
 out the loss of a syllable, as in 
 
 Turn lateral? dolor, certissimtf nuncitf mortis Lucil. 
 
 Nam, si de nihilo fierent, ex omnibrf rebus Lucret 
 
 At fixus nostris, tu dab? supplicium CatulL 
 
 Note 3. Under the influence of Synapheia, both synaloepha 
 
424- 
 
 and ecthlipsis are found in the last syllable of a verse, where 
 the elision takes place through the vowel at the beginning 
 of the following verse, provided no long pause intervenes at 
 the end of the line, by which the voice is suspended : as, 
 Sternitur infelix alieno vulnere, ccelumque 
 Adspicit, et dulces moriens reminiscitur Argos Virg. 
 Jamque iter emensi, turres ac tecta Latinomm 
 Ardua cernebant juvenes, murosque subibant Virg. 
 
 ADDITIONAL OBSERVATIONS ON SYNALO2PHA AND 
 ECTHLIPSIS. 
 
 1. These figures fall more pleasantly before a long sylla- 
 ble: as, 
 
 Turn quoque nil fecit, nisi quodfacere ipse coegi Ovid. 
 
 Postquam introgressi, et coram data copia fandi Virg. 
 But the elision of a long syllable is harsh, when it is followed 
 by a short one : as, 
 
 Troja, nefas ! commune sepulchrum Europe ', Asi&que 
 Catu'J. 
 
 2. The Synalcepha has a particular sweetness, if it falls 
 on the same vowel as begins the following word : as, 
 
 Hie ego qui quondam gracili modulatus avena Virg. 
 Ergo omnis longo solvit se Teucria luctu Virg. 
 
 3. Care must be taken that the sound arising from the use 
 of these figures be not harsh and disagreeable ; as in 
 
 Quis me uno vivit felicior, aut mage nostra Me Catull. 
 Quod cum it a sit, nolim statuas me mente maligna Ca- 
 tull. 
 
 4. Elisions should not be frequent, nor, without some par- 
 ticular reason, should there be more than two in one verse, 
 especially in an elegiac, which requires great smoothness. 
 On the contrary, in a heroic verse, several synaloephse some- 
 times occasion dignity and majesty ; and, as in the following 
 line, a particular sweetness, 
 
 Phyllida amo ante alias : nam me discedere flevit Virg. 
 But in the following lines, horror is produced by elision, 
 Momtrum horrenti-urn, informe, ingens, cui lumen ademp- 
 
 tum Virg. 
 
 Tela infer media, atque horrentes Marte Latinos Virg. 
 5. Nor should elision commonly happen at the beginning 
 of a verse, as in 
 
 Nam ut ferula csedas meritum majora subire Hor. 
 But Virgil has made an elision at the beginning, not, how- 
 ever, without a reason, or without beauty : as 
 
 Si ad vitulam spectes, nihil est quod pocula laudes. 
 
425 
 
 6. Elision is harsh at the beginning of the sixth foot of a 
 heroic; as in 
 
 Loripidem rectus derideat, JEthiopem albus^Juv, 
 Nunquid de Dacis audisti ? nil equidem, ut tu Hor. 
 
 7. Also after the first hemistich of a pentameter ; as in 
 Herculis, Antique, Hesperidumque comes Propert. 
 
 8. Elision is harsh in the last syllable of the fifth foot of 
 a heroic verse ; as in 
 
 Difficile est longum subito deponere amor em Catull. 
 
 9. Also in the last dactyl of a pentameter ; unless it is 
 used with great discretion ; as in 
 
 Quadrijugos cernes saepe resist ere equos Ovid. 
 It is not, perhaps, easy to determine how the antients 
 treated their elided syllables, whether, as in English, a slight, 
 imperfect sound of them might have been distinguishable, 
 or whether, as in the usual mode of scanning, they were 
 wholly omitted. It has been already noticed that all long 
 syllables are not equally long, nor all short syllables equally 
 short. Mr. Pickbourn is inclined to think that the elided 
 syllables were, in some degree, heard * ; and observes that 
 if we suppose the quantity of a dactyl or spondee to be 
 equal to sixteen, I think we may be allowed to conjecture 
 that the length of each individual syllable might probably 
 be not very different from that which is marked in the fol- 
 lowing lines : 
 
 *" 6 5^ 3_ 8 89 3 57 89349 ^ 
 
 Notitiam primosque gradus vicinia fecit. 
 
 9:14 81 717 9 7 _8 93 4 97 
 
 Littora : .multum ille et terris jactatus et alto." 
 
 OF SYNTHESIS. 
 
 Synaeresis is the contraction of two syllables in the same 
 word, into one syllable. 
 
 There are two kinds of contraction, Synteresis, strictly so 
 called, and Synecphonesis. 
 
 Synseresis, properly so called, is when the two vowels re- 
 maining become a diphthong ; as ae changed into <#, in 
 Phaton instead of Phaeton ; e'i into ei 9 as in the genitives 
 
 1 In regard to m elided, Quinctilian's words are clear ; " Eadem 
 litera, quoties ultima est, et vocalem verbi sequentis ita contin- 
 git, ut in earn transire possit, etiara si scribitur, tamen parum ex- 
 primitur" See Quinct. lib. ix. cap. 4. He says, " non eximi- 
 tur, sed obscuratur." Indeed, according to the etymology of 
 the word, Synalcepha conveys the idea of two syllables or vowels 
 blended into one, rather than of the elision of one of them. 
 
426 
 
 The&ei, Chphci^ Persei used as dissyllables, AckiUti, 
 Oilei, as trisyllables. Thus also oi in proinde, as a dissyl- 
 lable ; ei in reice formed by syncope from rejice ; id in huic 9 
 cuiy &c. used as monosyllables. 
 
 Cum te flagranti dejectum fulmine Ph&ton Varro. 
 
 Notus amor Phaedrae, nota est injuria TJiesei Ovid. 
 
 Proinde ton a eloquio, solitum tibi - Virg. 
 
 Tityre, pascentes a flumine reice capellas Virg. 
 
 Filius huic contra, torquet qui sidera mundi Virg. 
 
 In some names of Greek origin, as Tk^odotus, T/i?odo- 
 sius, &c. synaeresis is sometimes accompanied with a change 
 of one of the vowels, agreeably to the Doric dialect, as T/teu- 
 dotus, Theudosius. 
 
 Quam tulit a saevo TJieudotus hoste necem Ovid. 
 
 Theudosii, pacem laturi gentibus, ibant Claudian. 
 
 Synecphonesis (named also Episynalcepha and Synize- 
 sis) is when one of two vowels in the same word is cut off, 
 or absorbed in the pronunciation ; as in aured, Junto, used 
 as dissyllables ; and quoad as a monosyllable. 
 
 Aured percussum virga, versumque venenis Virg. 
 
 Nos miranda quidem, sed nuper consule Junto Juv. 
 
 Haeredes voluit ; quoad vixit, credidit ingens Hor. 
 E and / are the chief letters elided by Synecphonesis. 
 
 I. The letter E. (1.) Before a ; as mea, ea, considered as 
 monosyllables by the comic writers ; antehac, eddem, as dis- 
 syllables ; anteambulo, alvearia, as words of four syllables. 
 
 Quod si forte fuisse antehac eadem omnia credis Lucr. 
 
 Una eademque via sanguisque anim usque feruritur Virg. 
 
 Sum comes ipse tuus, tumidique anteambulo regis Mart. 
 
 Seu lento fuerint alvearia vimine texta Virg. 
 
 (2) Before another e ; as in deest, a monosyllable, decro, 
 deerit) prehendo, vehemens, dissyllables, mehercute 9 a trisyl- 
 lable. 
 
 Vilis amicorum est annona, bonis ubi quid deest Hor. 
 Divitis uber agri, Troiaeve opulentia deerit Virg. 
 Prendere quae possis oculorum lumine aperto Lucr. 
 Vehemens et liquidus puroque simillimus amni Hor. 
 Noli vereri ; at ille, facerem mehercule Phaedr. 
 
 (3) Before i : as in dein, dekinc, monosyllables ; deinde^ 
 deinceps, aureis, ferret, anteit, dissyllables ; and in anteire, 
 anteirent, and anteactus, trisyllables. 
 
 Dem clamore pari concurritur, et vice teli Juv. 
 Deinde torus junxit, nunc ipsa pericula jungunt Ovid. 
 Ferreique Eumenidum thalami, et discordia demeni 
 Virg. 
 
427 
 
 Te semper anteit dira necessilas (Alcaic) Hor. 
 
 Ergo anteire metus, juvenemque exstinguere pergit 
 Flacc. 
 
 Qui candore nives anteirent, cursibus auras Virg. 
 
 Nam si grata fuit tibi vita anteacta priorque Lucr. 
 
 Note, however, that the e of de is not in all such cases 
 subject to synasresis, or synecphonesis, for we find dehinc, 
 delude, &c. and it is found with its original quantity in de- 
 Jtortatur, and in deest, in two passages, one quoted from 
 Ennius by A. Gellius, and in one from Statius. 
 Annibal audaci curn pectore dehortatur 1 . 
 Deest servitio plebes, hos ignis egentes. 
 
 (4-) Before o ; as in meo, eo, used as monosyllables by the 
 eornic writers ; eodem, eosdem, alveo, seorsum, deorsum, as 
 dissyllables ; Euristheo, graveolens, as trisyllables. 
 
 Uno eodemque igni, sic nostro Daphnis amore Virg. x, 
 
 Eosdem habuit secum, quibus est elata, capillos Prop. 
 
 Cum refluit campis, et jam se condidit alveo Virg. 
 
 Nam per aquas quaecunque cadunt atque ae'ra deorsum 
 Lucr. 
 
 Et seorsum varies rerum sentire colores Lucr. 
 
 Rege sub Euristheo, fatis Junonis iniquae Virg. 
 
 Inde ubi venere ad fauces graveolentis Averni Virg. 
 
 (5) Before U; as in meus, meum, eum, which are likewise 
 considered by the comic writers, as monosyllables. 
 
 II. The letter /. (1) Before ,- as in omnia, a dissyllable; 
 vindemiator and semianimis, as words of four syllables. 
 
 Bis patriag cecidere manus : quin protinus omnia Virg. 
 
 Vindemiator, et invictus, cui saepe viator Hor. 
 
 Caedit semianimis Rutulorum calcibus arva Virg. 
 
 (2) Before e : as in vietus, a dissyllable ; and semiermis, 
 a trisyllable. 
 
 Quis sudor wetis, et quam malus undique membris Hor. 
 Semiermemque manum sternendam objecerat hosti Sil. 
 
 (3) Before another i- as in dii, dizs, it, Us, monosylla- 
 bles ; itdem, iisdem^ dissyllables ; denariis, a trisyllable. 
 
 Di meliora veliht, quanquam non ista precanda Ovid. 
 
 jpreecipitatur aquis, et aquis nox surgit ab isdem Ovid. 
 
 Dsnariis tamen hoc non emo, Basse, tribus Mart. 
 
 Such genitives as consili and imperi occur in Horace. 
 The forms consilii, servitii, auxilii, &c. are not found in 
 Virgil, but frequently occur in Ovid. 
 
 ( 4) Before o ; as in semihomo, fuvionim, considered as 
 
 in a different reading, the c is elided. 
 
words of three syllables, and tenuiore, considered as a word 
 of four. 
 
 Semihominis Caci facies quam dira tenebat Virg. 
 
 Fluviomm Rex Eridanus, camposque per omnes Virg. 
 
 Ortus, et instantem cornu tenutore videbat Stat. 
 
 In such words it is not improbable that i may have the 
 same sound as y, in the English word yore ,- thus rtnu- 
 yorc. 
 
 (5) Before u ; as in totius, regarded as a dissyllable ; in 
 promontorium, as a word of four syllables ; and, perhaps, in 
 certain genitives plural ending in turn. 
 
 Magnanimosque duces, totiusque ex ordine gentis Virg. 
 
 Inde legit Capreas, promontoriumque Miner vae Ovid. 
 
 Flos Veronemium depereunt juvenum Catul. 
 A, o, u, are less frequently elided, or, in the language of 
 grammarians, absorbed in the pronunciation. 
 
 III. A is elided, in contraire ; as, 
 
 Tigribus ? aut saevos Libyse contraire leones ? Stat. 
 
 IV. O is sometimes found absorbed before another o ; as 
 in cohonesto) used as a trisyllable ; and in cooperiunt, and 
 cooluerint, used as words of four syllables, by Lucretius, ii. 
 1060, and vi. 490; but in Mr. Wakefield's edition of this 
 poet, coaluerint is read instead of the latter word. 
 
 Tandem coaluerint ea, quse, conjecta repente. 
 
 V. U is sometimes elided before other vowels ; as in tua, 
 sua, tuo, suo, dutf, considered as monosyllables by the comic 
 writers ; in suapte, patrui, as dissyllables ; and duellica, as 
 a trisyllable. In these the u seems to have a similar pro- 
 nunciation to that of the u in suadeo, suetus, or of the w in 
 the English dwell, or of the u in persuade. 
 
 Et simili ratione animalia suapte vagari Lucr. 
 Nocturnique canum gemitus et limina patrui- Stat 
 Lanigerae pecudes, et equorum duellica proles. 
 
 To Synecphonesis may likewise be referred the changing 
 of the vowels i and u into the consonants^" and u, (which 
 were then probably sounded somewhat like the English y 
 in you, and w,) by which two syllables are contracted into 
 one ; as in genva, tenvis, dissyllables ; arjetat, tenvia, abjete> 
 pitvitaf trisyllables; and parjetibus, Nasidjenus, words of 
 four syllables; instead of genua, tennis., arietat, tenuia, &c. 
 
 Propterea quia corpus aquas naturaque tennis Lucr. 
 
 Genva labant, gelido concrevit frigore sanguis Virg. 
 
 Arjetat in portas et duros objice postes Virg. 
 
 Velleraque ut foliis depectant tenvia Seres Virg. 
 
 ^Edificant, sectaque intexunt dbjete costas Virg. 
 
429 
 
 Praecipue sanus, nisi cum pitvita molesta est Hor. 
 
 Parjetibusque premunt arctis, et quatuor addunt Virg. 
 
 Ut Nasidjcni juvit te coena beati Hor. 
 
 Note 1. Sometimes Synalcepha and Synecphonesis meet 
 together : as in 
 
 Uno eodemque tulit partu, paribusque revinxit 
 Serpentum spiris Virg. 
 
 Scan thus, Un* odemque tulit, &c. 
 
 Note 2. In the following words, Huic, cut, Dii, Diis, 
 iidem, iisdem, dein, deinde, proinde, deest, deeram, deessem, 
 deero^ deesse, anteambulo, anteit, antehac, semihomo, semi- 
 animis, and a few others, a contraction of the two sylla- 
 bles is more common among the best poets, than a separa- 
 tion. 
 
 Synteresis and Synecphonesis differ from Crasis, in this, 
 that they take place properly in poetry, the last, also in prose. 
 
 OF DUERESIS. 
 
 Diaresis (which is also called Dialysis] is the splitting 
 of one syllable into two syllables. 
 
 This is done in three different ways ; 
 
 I. By the division of a diphthong into two syllables ; as 
 aulai, aurai, instead of aulce^ aura ; Orpheiis, Perseus \ Troice, 
 trisyllables ; Namdum, Harpy'ias, words of four syllables. 
 
 Aulai in medio libabant pocula Bacchi Virg. 
 
 Et finitur in Andromeda, quam Perseus armis Manil. 
 
 Misit infestos Troice minis (Sapph.) Senec. 
 
 j'Egle Naiadum pulcherrima, jamque videnti Virg. 
 
 Circumsistentes reppulit Harpyias (Pentam.) Rutil. 
 
 The Ionic dialect in Greek frequently resolving the di- 
 phthong ei and >j into ijV, the Roman poets have sometimes 
 availed themselves of that license in Greek words origin- 
 ally written with a diphthong ; thus 
 
 Annuit, atque dolis risit Cytherea repertis Virg. : 
 Exigit indicii memorem Cythereid poenam Ovid. 
 
 II. By resolving the consonants j and v into the vowels i 
 and u~, as in silua, soliiit, for silv<z> solvit ; subiecta, a word 
 of four syllables, instead of subjecta. 
 
 Aurarum et silucs metu (Glycon.) Hor. 
 
 Quod zonam soliiit diu ligatam (Phaleuc.) Catull. 
 
 Si qua ferventi subiecta Cancro est (Sapph.) Senec. 
 
 1 In this case, Perseus and Orpheus are considered as of the 
 second declension ; but it is better to refer them, in poetry, to 
 the third, according to which, Greek proper names in eus (gen, 
 eos) have the eu a diphthong. 
 
430 
 
 The first vowel of silva, whether it be supposed to be de- 
 rived from the Greek, or from the Latin sileo, may be con- 
 sidered as naturally short, but for the position ; and like- 
 wise the first o of solvo and volvo and their compounds, as 
 is visible in their participles solutus and volutus, in which 
 the position is removed. 
 
 This figure is very common in the compounds of solvo 
 and volvo : as, 
 
 Stamina non ulli dissoliienda Deo (Pen tarn.) Tib. 
 Debuerant fusos evoliiisse suos (Pentam.) Ovid. 
 
 Indeed it is not improbable, that in many lines, in which 
 silv-, solv- 9 and volv-, are usually supposed to constitute the 
 latter part of a spondee, the resolution of them into sttu, 
 solu, and volu> as the two last syllables of a dactyl, may pro- 
 duce an assonantia verborum more adapted to the nature of 
 the subjects to be represented, as in the following lines ex- 
 pressive of the waving of trees, the rolling of a stone, and 
 the shivering of the limbs of ^neas. 
 
 Et claro slluas cernes Aquilone moveri Virg. 
 Saxum ingens voluunt alii, radiisque rotarum Virg. 
 Extemplo JEneae soluuntur frigore membra Virg. 
 
 When the nature of the verse does not prevent it, a di- 
 aeresis of the syllable containing^' may likewise be some- 
 times suspected in other words ; as in liilius, for Julius ; 
 lilno for Juno ; liipiter for Jupiter / lildice for Judice^ since 
 it is well known that jam is used by the comic writers as a 
 dissyllable, and that etinm^ which is only et jam 9 is always 
 acknowledged as a trisyllable ; thus, 
 
 Sed Proculus longa veni\ebat i\fllius Alba Ovid. 
 
 Grammatici certant; et ad\huc sub i\Tulice lis est Hor. 
 
 III. By giving an explicit and distinct sound to u sepa- 
 rated from the following vowel, (which, without this figure, 
 becomes mute, or, rather, has the sound of the English w, 
 after g, q, and s ;) as in aqii<z, siietus, siiasit, Suevos, consi- 
 dered words of three syllables; in relangiiit^ reiiqilas, words 
 of four. 
 
 Quae calidum faciunt aqua tactum atqne vaporem Lucr. 
 
 Cum mini non tantum furesque feraeque siieta Hor. 
 
 Atque alios alii inrident, Veneremque siiadent Lucr. 
 
 Ftmdat ab extreme flavos Aquilone Stievos Lucan. 
 
 Imposito fratri moribunda rclangiiit ore Ovid. 
 
 Reliquas tamen esse vias in mente patenteis Lucr. 
 
 OF SYSTOLE. 
 
 Systolc is the shortening of a syllable otherwise lo*)g by 
 
431 
 
 nature, or by position. Thus the poets sometimes shorten 
 Orion, on the first syllable ; as in 
 
 Cum subito assurgens fluctu nimbosus orwn Virg. 
 although in the Greek it is written with a long o, and is, 
 therefore, naturally long; as in 
 
 Saevus ubi Orion hybernis conditur undis Virg. 
 
 In the same manner Horace seems to have shortened the 
 last ofpalus ; as in 
 
 Regis opus; sterilisve diupaliis, aptaque remis. (See, 
 however, US final.) 
 
 But by others it is universally made long; as in 
 Limosoque pains obducat pascua junco Virg. 
 
 And here it is long too by cassura. 
 
 Palus inertis fceda Cocyti jacet Seneca, 
 
 In the same way, the e in viden', naturally long, is made 
 fihort; for it is a contraction of videsne ; also the i ofsatin\ 
 a contraction of satlsne, in which it is long by position ; 
 hodie for hoc die ; multlmodis for multls modi's, &c. 
 
 Ducere multimodis voces, et flectere cantus Lucr. 
 
 For viden* and satin 9 ,. see A 7 final; and for hodie, see in 
 compound words. 
 
 To this figure may be referred the shortening of a vowel 
 long by position, after the elision of one of the consonants, 
 or a double consonant ; as obicis for objicis ; adicit for dd- 
 jicit ; reicit for rejicit ; and such words as aperio, opcrio 
 (probably, ad, and ob, pario), omitto, instead of obmitto, c. 
 
 Cur obicis Magno tumulum, manesque vagantes Lucaii. 
 
 Si quid nostra tuis adicit vexatio rebus Mart. 
 
 Tela manu, reicitqne canes in vulnus hiantes Stat. 
 
 Pleraque differat, et praesens in tempus omittat Hor, 
 
 To Systole have been referred certain preterites found 
 with the penultimate short; as 
 
 Obstupui, steteruntque comae, et vox faucibus haesit 
 Virg. 
 
 Miscueruntque l herbas, et nen innoxia verba Virg. 
 
 Matri longatdecem tulenmt fastidia menses Virg. 
 
 To these may be added prqfu&runt in Tibullus; abierunt 
 iu Phaedrus ; defuerunt in Martial, and some others. 
 
 By some these anorpalies have been attributed to the m is- 
 lakes of transcribers, who, it is supposed, may have written 
 erunt instead of erant, or in some cases erint, both which 
 terminations are found in certain editions, or manuscripts ; 
 jind, in many instances, the sense not only admits the alte- 
 
 1 In this and similar examples, may not the u be sounded like 
 v or ty ; by synecphoneisis, thus misc-verunt? 
 
432 
 
 ration, but seems improved by it. Others have contended, 
 that the authors were inadvertently guilty of a breach of 
 prosody. And the last supposition is, that the e was ori- 
 ginally common, especially in verbs of the third conjuga- 
 tion, and the words of Diomedes are quoted in confirma- 
 tion ; " Fere in tertio ordiiie plerumque veteres tertia per- 
 " sona finitiva temporis perfecti, nmneri pluralis, E mediam 
 " vocalem corripiunt, quasi legerunt, emerunt, &c." But 
 notwithstanding this assertion, and the several instances 
 which can be produced, in which e is found short, it is by 
 no means safe to consider it common, its proper quantity 
 being long, unless by poetic license. 
 
 Such words as uriius, in which the i was said to be short 
 by Systole, are usually considered as common. They are, 
 however, all long in prose, with the exception, perhaps, of 
 alterius, a peculiarity for which there does not appear to be 
 any good reason. 
 
 OF DIASTOLE. 
 
 Diastole, or Ectasis, is the lengthening of a syllable other- 
 wise naturally short ; as the first in Priam ides and Arabia ,- 
 and the second in Macedonia. 
 
 Atque hie Priam-ides, Nihil ojibi, amice, relictum Virg. 
 
 Et domus intactae te tremit Arabia Propert. 
 
 Qui clypeo, galeaque, Macedonidque 1 sarissa Ovid. 
 
 That the first syllable of the first two is naturally short, 
 is evident from its being always short in their primitives 
 Priamus and Arabs. The second in Macedo is also short. 
 
 To this figure are referred those words in which re, na- 
 turally short, is made long, by doubling the following con- 
 sonant ; as relligio, relliquia, reppulit, rettidit, redduccre, 
 &c., and some other words, compounded with re ; instead 
 of religio, reliquiat, &c. 
 
 Tantum relligio potuit suadere malorum Lucr. 
 
 Troas relliquias Danaum, atque immitis Achillei Virg. 
 
 Et res heeredem repperit ilia suum Ovid. 
 
 Di tibi dent capta classem redducere" 2 Troja Hor. 
 
 In such cases it is asserted that formerly it was usual t( 
 double the consonant ; but this practice has'been condemned 
 by the most eminent modern editors of the classics, as con- 
 trary to original usage, and they have rejected one con; 
 
 1 The poet seems to have imitated the Greeks, who, to avoic 
 a concourse of short vowels, sometimes changed a short vowc 
 into a long one, and wrote MajojJoWa instead of 
 
 2 Al. deducere Bentl. 
 
433 
 
 nant in all such compounds, the verb reddo alone excepted, 
 in which a d is never omitted. But, though written with 
 only one consonant, the vowel must be sounded long, as 
 if supposed to be followed by two consonants. 
 
 The same remarks are perhaps applicable to the first syl- 
 lable of quotidie, quotidianus, and quatuor, (quottidie, quot- 
 tidianus, said to have been formerly written also cottidie, cot- 
 tidianus, quattuor,) which are sometimes found long, the last, 
 especially in Virgil and Horace ; although the first two are, 
 doubtless, short by nature, and, from observing that the a 
 in quitter, quaterni, &c., is short, it may be reasonably pre- 
 sumed that it is so in quatuor likewise. 
 
 Conjugis in culpa flagravit quotidiana Catul. 
 
 Sis bonus, O felixque tuis ! en quatuor aras Virg. 
 
 In the same manner the e in Porsena is made long, by 
 doubling the n ; as 
 
 Nee non Tarquinium ejectum For senna jubebat Virg. 
 Otherwise the penultimate is short; as 
 
 Cernitur effugiens ardentem Porsena dextram Sil. 
 
 Perhaps, the name might be written either way, indiffe- 
 rently. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS ON SYSTOLE AND DIASTOLE. 
 
 The use of these two figures, or the changing of the due 
 quantity of syllables, arises from two causes ; Necessity, 
 owing to the nature of the verse, and Poetical license. 
 
 1. The first takes place when the nature of the verse does 
 not admit some particular word with its real quantity ; and 
 when no other word can be expediently introduced fully 
 adequate to convey its meaning. The principal causes of 
 this, are, frst, the meeting of more than two short sylla- 
 bles, especially in hexameter, or pentameter ; for, in this 
 case, one of them must be made long ; as the first in Ara- 
 bius, Asiacus, Italia, Philosophus, Polydamas, Priamides, 
 pugilibus, Sicelides, &c. ; the second in Canicula, cuniculus, 
 cuticula,febricida, Lemuria, Thcophilus, &c. ; and the third 
 in Bonifacius, Hilarion, Macedonia, &c. : and, secondly, 
 the circumstance of a short syllable being between two long 
 syllables, in which case, the word cannot be admitted into 
 certain kinds of verse unless it is made long ; as the second 
 in delibutus, imbecillus, viatricida, parricida, Vaiicanm, &c. 
 
 2. Poetic license is, when, without such evident neces- 
 sity, the quantity of a syllable is changed; and to this, 
 some have attributed the shortening of the penultimate of 
 unius, illius,- &c., and the lengthening of the same in tene- 
 
 2 F 
 
434 
 
 br<z, voliicriS) locuplcs, &c. While others, considering, 
 that, even with regard to proper names, in which a greater 
 latitude as to quantity seemed to be tolerated, Ovid apolo- 
 gizes to Tuticanus, for not saying any thing of him in his 
 verse, which did not admit his name, as it has the second 
 syllable short between two long syllables, and that Martial 
 excuses himself for not inserting, in his verse, the word Ea- 
 rinus, consisting of four short, have contended, that it is 
 by no means improbable, that many of those words, whose 
 quantity we find occasionally long or short, a circumstance 
 often referred to the power of these two figures, were ori- 
 ginally considered as common, and are, therefore, not at all 
 under the influence of any licentia poctica. 
 
 This license was much more frequent among the Greek 
 poets than the Latin ; for we find, among the former, the 
 same syllable of the same word sometimes long and some- 
 times short even in the same line. Such liberties, however, 
 are not now to be taken, without great caution and discre- 
 tion ; for, as Servius says, " In licentia magis invent is 
 quam inveriiendis utimur." 
 
 OF SYNAPHEIA. 
 
 Synapheia is that figure, by which the concluding sylla- 
 ble of a verse is metrically connected with the initial syl- 
 lable of the succeeding one, so that the two lines run on 
 continuously, like a single verse ; thus 
 
 Fugiat vultus fortuna prior ; 
 Felix quisquis uovitfamulwn 
 Regemque pati, vultusque suos 
 Variare potest. Vires pepulit 
 Pondusque mali, casus nnimo 
 Qui tulit sequo (Anapaest.) Senec. 
 Here the short syllables, or, um (for final m, when not cut 
 off, is short) and it, are lengthened by the concourse of con- 
 sonants. By this figure, verses are sometimes connected, un- 
 der the influence of Synalccpha and Ecthlipsis ; thus 
 
 Jactemur, doceas; ignari hominumq; locoi'umquc 
 Erramus, vento hue et vastis fluctibus acti Virg. 
 i. e. locorum-l-gw* Erramus. 
 
 Jamque iter emensi, turres et tecta Latino-?'//?^ 
 Ardua cernebant juvenes, muroque subibant Virg. 
 In such instances, it may be observed that there is gene- 
 rally but a very short pause at the end of the verse. 
 
 In the Sapphic verse, we sometimes find simple words di- 
 
435 
 
 vided, a circumstance which has been referred to Syna- 
 pheia; thus, 
 
 Labitur ripa, Jove non probante, u- 
 
 -xorius amnis Hor. od. 1, 2, 19 (ex edit. Bentleii). 
 But the division more frequently takes place between the 
 members of a compound word ; thus, 
 
 Naturae Deus humana?, mortalis in unum- 
 
 Quodque caput, vultu mutabilis, albus et ater Hor. Ep. 2, 
 2, 188. 
 
 It was laid down as a rule, by the ancient grammarians, 
 that the last syllable of every verse might be considered as 
 common. But the Anapaestic verse, and the Ionic a mi* 
 nore, end in a long syllable, or a syllable rendered long by 
 being taken in metrical connexion with the following line ; 
 so that, under the influence of this figure, the rules of po- 
 sition are just as applicable at the end of these two kinds of 
 verse, as if the whole series of verses were written in con- 
 tinuation. Hermann observes, ultimo vcrsuwn syllable non 
 snnt communes^ sed eadem subtilitate, quce in mediis versibus, 
 expenduntur. It was in these two kinds of verses, that the 
 law of Synapheia was most strictly regarded. In other 
 species of verse, it may have occasionally taken place, to a 
 limited extent. 
 
 OF POETRY. 
 
 A Poem (Carmen] is composed of verses, or lines; and 
 a Verse, of feet. 
 
 A verse is a single line of poetry, and is formed by re- 
 peating the same foot a certain number of times, changing 
 it, sometimes, to equivalent or other feet. 
 
 A couplet, or two verses, is called a Distich , a half- 
 verse, a Hemistich. 
 
 A verse containing its exact measure is called Acatalec- 
 tic ; as in the following dimeter Iambic, 
 
 Mus<z Jovis simtfflicc. 
 
 A verse wanting a syllable at the end, is called Catalectic ; 
 as, Musce Jovem canebant. 
 
 A verse wanting a whole foot at the end, is called Bra- 
 chycatalectic ; as, 
 
 M.US& Jovis gnatce. 
 
 A verse having a redundant syllable, or two, is called 
 Hypercatalectic, or Hypermeter ; as, 
 Muscc sorores snnt Mincrvcc. 
 Musce sorores Palladis Indent. 
 2 F2 
 
436 
 
 A verse wanting a syllable at the beginning, is called 
 Acephalous. 
 
 To scan a Latin verse, is to divide it into its several con- 
 stituent leet. 
 
 OF FEET. 
 
 A Foot consists of two or more syllables of a certain 
 quantity. 
 
 There are commonly reckoned twenty-eight kinds of feet. 
 
 Those consisting of two or three syllables, are called sim- 
 ple ; others, as those of four, are called compound. 
 
 There are four feet of two syllables : 
 
 1. A Pyrrhic, (Pyrrhichius) two short; as Deus. 
 
 2. A Spondee, (Spondeus) two long ; as fundilnt. 
 
 3. An Iambus, (Iambus) a short and a long; as l?gu?if. 
 
 4. A Trochee, or Choree, ( Troch&us, or Cho- 
 %eus) a long and a short ; as . . . arma. 
 
 Eight feet of three syllables. 
 
 1. A Dactyl, (Dactylus) one long and two 
 
 short; as ....... carmma. 
 
 2. An Anapest, (Anapastus) two short and 
 
 one long ; as . . . , . . atiimos. 
 
 3. A Tribrac, ( Tribrachys) three short ; as fnctrt. 
 
 4. A Molossus, (Molossm) three long; as dixerunt. 
 
 5. An Amphibrac, (Amphibrachys) a short, a 
 
 long, and a short ; as . . . . am ore. 
 
 i . { (Amvhimacer. or Cre- 
 
 6. An Amphimacer, I i . Vi i 
 
 n \> < tzcus) a lon^, a short, 
 
 or a Cretic, 1 i ' , ' ' . 
 
 and a lon; as . ca 
 
 , . - . _ 
 
 long; as . casMas. 
 
 7. A Bacchic, (Bacchim) a short, and two 
 
 long; as ...... legcbant. 
 
 8. An Antibacchic, (Antibacchius) two long, 
 
 and one short ; as ..... audlrc. 
 
 There are sixteen compound feet, of four syllables. Of 
 these, four are the same foot doubled ; four are a com- 
 bination of contrary feet ; and there are four in which 
 long syllables predominate ; and four in which short syl- 
 lables predominate. 
 
 TJic same, foot doubled. 
 
 1. "| A Proceleusmatic, (Proceleusmaticus) 
 
 ^ 2 Pyrrhics; as ... homimbus. 
 
 2. { A Dispondee, (Dispondeus) 2 Spon- 
 
 J dees ; as . . . . confiixenint. 
 
437 
 
 3.^ A Diiarnbus, (Diiambus} 2 lam- 
 
 > buses; as .... amavrranf. 
 4.J A Dichorec, (Dichoreus) 2 Chorees; as c'omprobavit. 
 
 Contrary feet. 
 
 5.") A great Ionic, (lonicus major) a Spon- 
 
 1 dee and a Pyrrhic ; as . . celslssimus. 
 
 6. (A small Ionic, (lonicus minor) a Pyr- 
 
 J rhic and a Spondee ; as . propcrabunt. 
 
 7.~) A Choriambus, (Ckoriambus} a Cho- 
 
 l ree and an Iambus ; as . . terrifwant. 
 
 8. [An Antispast, (Antispastus} an lam- 
 J bus and a Choree ; as . . adluzslssc. . 
 
 Feet in which long syllables predominate. 
 
 9.~j First Epitrit, (Epitritus primus} an 
 
 ( Iambus and Spondee ; as . . amaverunf. 
 
 10. [Second Jipitrit, (Epitritus secundus) a 
 
 J Choree and Spondee ; as . concitarl. 
 
 11. ] Third Epitrit, (Epitritus tcrtius} a 
 
 I Spondee and Iambus ; as discordias. 
 
 12. [Fourth Epitrit, (Epitritus quartus) a 
 
 J Spondee and Choree ; as . . cxpectare. 
 
 Feet in which short syllables predominate. 
 
 1 3.~) First Pason, (Pceon primus) a Choree 
 
 ( and a Pyrrhic ; as . . tvmporibus. 
 
 14?. | Second Paeon, (P<eo?i secundus) an 
 
 J Iambus and a Pyrrhic ; as . potentia. 
 15.") Third Pa3on, (Pccon tcrtius) a Pyrrhic 
 
 I and a Choree ; as . . . ammatiis. 
 16. [Fourth Paeon, (Pccon quartus} a Pyr- 
 
 J rhic and an Iambus ; as . . temcritas. 
 To these may be added another compound 
 foot, of five syllables, mentioned by Cicero 
 and Quinctihan, (an Iambus and a Cretic,) 
 named Dochmlus or Dochimus ; as . abcrrait'rdnt. 
 Those feet arc termed isochronous or equivalent, which 
 consist of equal times, as the spondee, the anapest, the dac- 
 tyl, and the proceleusmatic, one long time being regarded 
 equal to two short ! . 
 
 1 Dr. Carey observes that " some critics will not allow any 
 feet to be isochronous, unless they be so in their separate mem- 
 bers, as the four above compared, whose Hrbt members all con- 
 sist of equal lime?, and in like manner their second. Hence they 
 
438 
 
 OF VERSES. 
 
 The most usual kinds of verses are, the Hexameter, Pen- 
 tameter, Asclepiadic, Glyconic, Sapphic, Adonic, Phaleucian, 
 Pherecratic, Iambic, Scazon, (or Choliambus,} Anacreontic^ 
 'Trochaic, Anapccstic ; to which may be added the Carmen 
 Horatianum, comprehending the two Alcaics and the 
 chilochian Iambic dimeter, hypercatalectic. 
 
 Verses are of different lengths, some consisting of two 
 feet, others of three, four, five, &c., as will be seen in the 
 following explanation of them. 
 
 OF HEXAMETER. 
 
 Hexameter, or Heroic verse, consists of six feet, of which 
 
 the fifth foot is usually a dactyl, the sixth, a spondee; and the 
 
 other four, either dactyls, or spondees, indiscriminately : as, 
 
 1 2 34 56 
 
 Aut pro desse vo\lunt aut\ dele\ctare po\etcc Hor. 
 
 Tu niliil 
 
 nroi\ta 
 
 nu-\ ucvcustut c f/tncwc JL j.ui . 
 
 di\casfaci\asve Mmicrvd Hor. 
 Inton\si cri\nes lo?i\gd cenvicc Jliicbant Tibull. 
 
 do not consider the trochee as isochronous to the iambus, or the 
 amphibrachys to any of the above four." He adds, " however 
 that may be, it often has forcibly struck me, even in reading 
 prose, that the amphibrachys, though apparently isochronous to, 
 the dactyl, is in reality somewhat longer in the duration of its 
 sound. Reclude, (ex. gr.) rtsumc t repelle, actually require more 
 time for their distinct enunciation, than those same syllables, 
 when transposed into dactyls, cludere, s timer e, pvllerZ ; the voice 
 dwelling longer on each of the short syllables, when separate, 
 than when connected together." I believe the remark to be cor- 
 rect, and the following to be the chief causes of the difference. 
 The middle syllable of the amphibrachys is emphatic ; and it 
 will be found, that, in speaking, a short pause precedes it, to en- 
 able the speaker to prepare for giving it sufficient strength. This 
 short pause, though it does not lengthen the preceding syllable, 
 will yet be counted with it, and thus somewhat increase the time 
 of recitation. With respect to the time, too, of the last syllable, 
 it is probable, that there is a small increase, all final vowels, I am 
 inclined to think, being of nearly equal length, as the sound is 
 not immediately terminated by articulation. It may be added, 
 that all long syllables are not equally long, nor all short sylla.- 
 bles equally short, and that the final syllable of the dactyl is 
 stronger ,and probably longer, than its middle syllable, and stronger 
 than the extremes of the amphibrachys, which, from their posi- 
 tion, in regard to the emphatic syllable, are of equal remissness. 
 No two feet, I apprehend, can be perfectly isochronous, unless 
 there i, not only a certain conformity in their syllables, but ah 
 agreement in the situation of their ictus. Besides, certain com- 
 binations of the same letters often coalesce more readily, than 
 others dx>. 
 
439 
 
 Sometimes the fifth foot is a spondee, whence the verse 
 is named Spondaic / and this generally happens when the 
 description is intended to be grave, majestic, slow, mourn- 
 ful, or the like, as 
 
 Cam Deiim soboles, magnum Jovis incrcmentwn Virg. 
 
 Projcimus huic, longo sed proximus intervallo Virg. 
 
 Constitit, atque oculis Phrygia agmina circiimspexit Virg. 
 
 This species of the verse has generally a dactyl as the 
 fourth foot ; and is commonly ended by a word of four syl- 
 lables, as in the above-cited examples. 
 
 But it is sometimes found otherwise ; as in 
 
 Aut leves ocreas lento duciint argento Virg. 
 
 Saxa per, et scopulos, et depresses convalles Vir<j. 
 
 Cum sociis, natoque, penatibus, et magnis Dh Virg. 
 
 Note 1. Some prosodians assert that the proceleusmatic is 
 found in Hexameter ; as in 
 
 Haarent pariettbus scalas, postesque sub ipsos Virg. 
 And the anapest ; as in 
 
 Fluvidrum rex Eridanus, camposque per omnes Virg. 
 
 But in these, pafietibus (pfirjetibus) has been shown, under 
 Synecphonesis, to consist but of four syllables, and Jtuvyo- 
 rum, but of three. 
 
 Note 2. Some assert that the tribrac, iambus, and tro- 
 chee, are sometimes found in it ; as in 
 
 Olli serva datiir, operum hand ignara Minervas Virg. 
 
 Desine plura, puer et quod nunc instat agamus Virg. 
 
 Ferte citi flammas, date tela, scandite muros Vim. 
 But in the first two lines, the last syllable in datur ana puer, 
 otherwise short, is made long by caesura,- so that in the first 
 line the foot is, in reality, a dactyl, and in the second, a spon- 
 dee ; and in the third line, the a of tela is considered long, 
 on account of the two following consonants, although they 
 be in a different word, so that the foot is a spondee. Those 
 critics who deny that the initial s and another consonant pos- 
 sess the power of lengthening a final short syllable, would 
 read et scanditc, thus destroying the rapidity of thought, as 
 indicated by the omission of the conjunction. Some would 
 read ascendite, perhaps a less objectionable lection. It does 
 not appear, that either alteration adds to the beauty or the 
 harmony of the line. 
 
 Note 3. Lastly, some have asserted that a dactyl may be 
 found as the last foot ; thus in 
 
 Inseritur vero ex ibetu nucis arbutus hornda 
 
 Kt steriles platani ^_ 
 
 Nee tantum llhodope miiantur et Ismarus Orphea Virg. 
 
440 
 
 But in the first example, the concluding foot is karri, a spon- 
 dee, the d being joined by the figure Synapheia to the be- 
 ginning of the following verse, after an elision of the a : 
 thus, horri \ D'et steri \ &c. In the last example Orphea 
 seems to be contracted into two syllables, forming a spondee. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS ON THE HEXAMETER. 
 
 1. 1 . Every line of an hexameter, whatever may be the 
 number of its syllables, occupies the same space of time in 
 recitation ; since equal time belongs to the spondee, though 
 consisting but of two syllables, as to the dactyl, which con- 
 sists of three. In consequence of this, lines containing many 
 of the former may appear to drag heavily and slowly ; and 
 those in which the latter abound seem sometimes to have a 
 hopping or a fluttering effect. It has, therefore, been thought, 
 that the greatest harmony and beauty are likely to be pro- 
 duced by an alternation of the two : as, 
 
 Ludere qua! vellem cdldmo permisit agresti Virg. 
 Pinguis vt Ingrdtcc prtmeretiir casttus firbi Virg. 
 
 2. If this alternation is not observed, those lines which 
 most abound in dactyls, have the greater harmony ; as 
 
 Tityre, tu pdtulce recubans sub tegmwefagi Virg. 
 Adspicis ut vt'nia?it ad Candida tectd columbce Ovid. 
 
 3. Those lines are the most pleasing in which are seve- 
 ral cfesura, or feet not consisting of whole but of broken 
 words : as 
 
 Rdman\os re\rum doniin\os gcntcmquv togatam Virg. 
 Infand\um 9 jZqgina, ju\bes retwvare dolorem Virg. 
 
 lnf~e\lix Pr y ia\mus fur \tirn mdndarat alendum Virg. 
 4-. But to prevent the palling monotony which would arise 
 from any uniform alternation or practice, the position of the 
 csesurae, and the arrangement of the feet, are to be varied ; 
 circumstances attended with little difficulty, when the end- 
 less variety in the length and quantity of Latin words is 
 considered ; as, 
 
 Vertitur 'mttrea calum, et rmt Oceano nox, 
 Involvens umbra magnd termmque pollimque, 
 MyrmidonTimque dolos :fusi per mcemd Teucri 
 Conticuere : sopor fessos complectitur artus Virg. 
 In the following line ? said to be intended, by broken and 
 
unconnected feet, to express great passion, there is no syl- 
 labic caesura till after the fourth foot: 
 
 Per cotmubia nostra, per inccp\tos Hymenccos Virg. 
 And Horace, to express the pain and trouble which lie ex- 
 perienced in writing amidst the bustle and noise of the town, 
 has a line without caesura, and which is little different from 
 prose ; 
 
 Prater ctetera, Roma mene poemata censes 
 Scribere posse, inter tot curas^ totque laborcs ? 
 The caesura is beautiful when it takes place on the last 
 syllable of a word which refers to the one terminating the 
 verse ; as 
 
 Tityre, tu patula \ recubans sub tegmine fagi> 
 Silvestrem tenui \ musam meditaris avena Virg. 
 Nee tarn prtcsentcs \ alibi cognoscere divos Virg. 
 Julius a magno \ demissum nomen liilo Virg. 
 Likewise, when it occurs on the fifth half-foot, the sense 
 being finished ; as 
 
 Arma vinimque cano, \ &c. Virg. 
 
 And also, if the sense includes some emphatic assertion ; 
 as, 
 
 Omnia vincit amor l | 
 
 Stat sua cuique dies \ 
 Or, at least, when, the line containing two distinct clauses, 
 the caesura includes one of them ; as 
 
 Nos patritfjines ! , | et dulcia linquimus arva Virg. 
 Fluminibus salices, \ crassisque paludibus alni Virg. 
 After the first foot the neglect of the caesura is no blemish, 
 provided that foot be a dactyl ; as 
 
 Annuity atque dolis visit Cytherea repertis Virg. 
 Horndd tempestas ccelum contraxit ; et imbres Hor. 
 Nor after a spondee is it much felt, more especially if it 
 be an emphatic word ; as 
 
 Tandem progreditur, magna stipante caterva Virg. 
 Acres esse viros, cum dura pra^lia gente Virg. 
 The first and second feet are often connected by the tro- 
 chaic caesura ; thus 
 
 Orba pa,\rtnt% suo quicumque volumina trnctas Ovid. 
 Nor is the want of a syllabic caesura felt, after the second 
 foot, if it be a spondee concluding with a monosyllable : as 
 Ah quoti\es per \ saxa canum latratibus acta est Ovid. 
 The caesura in the second foot, (observes Mr. Pickbourn,) 
 
 1 In such instances, the beauty seems to me to consist chiefly 
 in the coincidence of the builcntial with the rhythmical 
 
442 
 
 although much more frequently neglected than that in the 
 third, is scarcely ever omitted without the intervention of 
 proper names, compound words, &c., or, in a few cases, by 
 such long words as the following; crudcles, aquales, ambages, 
 solenni, mugitus^ &c. In almost all cases the word which in- 
 terrupts the first caesura is of sufficient length to comprehend 
 likewise the second ; as 
 
 Dixerat, Herculea bicolor cum populus umbra Virg. 
 
 Nos, tua progenies^ cceli quibus annuis arcem Vim. 
 And, when the last syllable of such a word is elided, the se- 
 cond caesura is often formed by est, et, &c. joined to it : as, 
 
 Quod facit, auratum cst, et cuspide fulget acuta Ovid. 
 
 llegna Libernorum, et fontem superare Timavi Virg. 
 This rule (he adds) admits very few exceptions ; nor do I re- 
 collect a single instance, in Ovid or Virgil, where the second 
 foot is a word constituting a spondee, unless it is formed by 
 the preposition intra 9 or inter 9 followed by a pronoun : as 
 
 Maximus intra ?w<?deus est. Non magnarelinqiinm Ovid. 
 
 Talibus inter se dictis ad tecta subibant Virg. 
 
 Vis ergo inter nos, quod possit uterque, vicissim Virg. 
 
 But these can scarcely be considered as exceptions ; for 
 Quinctiliari remarks, that the preposition and the case it go- 
 verns were frequently pronounced with one accent, that is, 
 as one word. They may, therefore, be considered as com- 
 pound words, of sufficient length to comprehend the two 
 first caesuras. 
 
 The first pause is likewise frequently interrupted by the 
 compound verb nescio^ followed by quis 9 qua, quos, &c.: as 
 Sic ubi nescio quis Lydea de gente virorum Ovid. 
 
 And, in one instance, Virgil has suffered even the second 
 pause to be interrupted by it ; as 
 
 Summa leves. Hinc nescio qua dulcedine laetae, 
 in which, perhaps, the Romans pronounced nescio qua with 
 one accent, as if one word. 
 
 Except where inter 9 intra 9 or nescio, occur in this man- 
 ner, I do not recollect an instance in. which Ovid suffers 
 the first pause to be interrupted, without the occurrence of 
 a word long enough to comprehend the first two caesuras. 
 Virgil is not quite so scrupulous in the observance of this 
 rule. There are a few instances, where the second foot is 
 a dactyl, in which it is neglected ; as 
 
 Nee Saturnius haec oculis pater aspicit sequis. 
 
 In like manner, whatever word interrupts the second ca> 
 sura is generally of sufficient length to include the third ; as 
 mori; quui sorlUus non pertulit ullos. Virg. 
 
443 
 
 The third caesura is not so often omitted as the first, by 
 Virgil, but more frequently by Ovid ; and it sometimes hap- 
 pens without the intervention of compound words ; thus 
 Vina dabunt animos : et prima pocula pugna. 
 Non datur : occulta nee opinum perde sagitta Ovid. 
 
 The place of this caesura is often occupied, bywords length- 
 ened by declension or conjugation ; thus 
 
 At pater omnipotens ingcntia mocnia cceli Ovid. 
 
 Lumina nam tcneras arcebant vincula palmas Virg. 
 
 Syllabic caesuras are seldom introduced after the fourth 
 foot ; they are generally unnecessary, and, when they occur, 
 the verses are not harmonious ; as 
 
 Omnes innocuae ; sed non puppis | tua, Tarchon Virg. 
 
 Vertitur interea ccelum, et ruit oceano | nox Virg. 
 
 In some cases, when formed by a monosyllable, they are 
 not ungraceful ; as 
 
 Explorare labor : mihi jussa capesserejfas est Virg. 
 
 Circumagi : quendam volo visere, non tibi notum Hor. 
 If the verse be spondaic, they are not jobjectionable ; as 
 
 Persolvit, pendens e verticibus | pran*uptis Catul. 
 It should be observed that when the verse is spondaic, the 
 fourth foot ought generally to be a dactyl, otherwise the he- 
 mistich is rendered dull by the succession of three spondees. 
 
 The first pause seems to be interrupted nearly as often as 
 the third. When there is but one caesura in a line, it is ge- 
 nerally the second ; as 
 
 Ad mea perpetuum | deducite tempora carmen Ovid. 
 Sometimes, however, it is the third ; as 
 
 Cum sic unanimem alloquitur | malesana sororem Virg. 
 
 The trochaic caesura has nearly the same metrical effect 
 as the syllabic, and although another caesura is introduced, 
 the former seems to be sometimes the principal one ; as 
 
 Ulla mora#i | fecerc, || neque Aonia Aganippe Virg. 
 
 Et nova factaque nuper || habebunt verba fidem si Hor. 
 
 When it is in the third foot, it is generally attended by 
 two others, and the principal pause is in the fourth foot; 
 as 
 
 Ponderibus | librata | suis : j| nee brachia longo Ovid. 
 It may agreeably take place in the fourth and filth feet ; as 
 
 Ergo desidiam quiciimque | vocavit | amorem Ovid. 
 And it may be advantageously employed twice in other parts 
 of the verse, provided that one or more feet of different 
 structure intervene ; as 
 
 Nee victoria | her! tetigit captlva | cubile Virg. 
 
444 
 
 It frequently occurs in the fifth foot, and makes the verse 
 end in a smooth and agreeable manner ; as 
 
 Qui modo sa3vus eram, supplex ultroquc rogavi Ovid. 
 Exigat, et pulchra faciat te prolS parentem Virg. 
 But here, perhaps, it should not be considered as retaining 
 its general nature of a pause. The same remark is applicable 
 to the monosyllabic caesura ; for, when it is introduced in the 
 fifth or sixth foot, it does not seem to retain any thing of the 
 nature of a pause. 
 
 In lines, where different caesuras are introduced, some- 
 times the principal one is formed by a monosyllable; thus, 
 Et conferre | manum, et || procurrere longius audent 
 
 Virg. 
 
 Si pietas | ulla est || ad me | Philomela redito Ovid. ! 
 The intermediate or rhythmical pause seems to be some- 
 times removed from the middle to the end of the fourth foot, 
 that foot being made to consist of a dactyl or spondee formed 
 
 by the last syllables of a word. The introduction of these 
 
 spondaic and dactylic divisions of a line, at the end of the 
 fourth foot, makes a pleasing variety, and occasions a great 
 diversity not only in the modulation, but also in the length 
 of the latter hemistich of a heroic verse. It may consist of 
 the following varieties : 
 
 Two feet and a short syllable. 
 Et mea sunt populo saltata | poemata saepe Ovid. 
 
 Two feet and a long syllable. 
 Frigida pugnabant calidis | humentia siccis Ovid. 
 
 Two feet and two short syllables. 
 Cara deum soboles, magnum ] Jovis incrementum Ovid. 
 
 Three feel and a short syllable. 
 Confusae sonus urbis, | et illaetabile murmur Virg. 
 
 Three feet and a long syllable. 
 Conticuere omnes, | intentume ora tenebant Virg. 
 
 Three feet and two short syllables. 
 Ducite ab urbe domum | mea carmina, ducite Daphnini 
 
 Virg. 
 
 5. A great beauty consists in suiting the feet to the ex- 
 pression of the objects to be described. Thus the great la- 
 bour and slowness of the Cyclops in lifting up their heavy 
 
 1 For some of the preceding remarks on pauses, I arn indebted 
 to Mr. 1'ickbourn's ingenious Dissertation on this subject. 
 
44-5 
 
 hammers are beautifully expressed in the following line by 
 slow spondees; 
 
 llli Inter sese magnet vl brachia tollunt Virg. 
 The gravity of an old man in the following ; 
 
 Olll sedato rcspondit corde Lett inns Virg. 
 The delay of Fabius, by which he saved the commonwealth, 
 in the following; 
 
 Units qul noils clmctdndo restituis rcm Virg. 
 On the other hand, the swiftness or rapid flight of a pigeon 
 is expressed by dactyls, as in the following; 
 
 ll'ldlt //CT llquldum, celeres neque commovet alas Virg, 
 Or the flight of Tnrnus, as in the following; 
 
 Ni jUga subsidio subedit : fugit ocyor Euro Virg. 
 And to express the fury of the winds and tempest, Virgil 
 puts two dactyls at the beginning; as in 
 
 Qua dcitii porta riiunt 
 
 fncubuere mar? < 
 
 I?ifoniiere poll 
 
 6. The sound, too, of the words is often accommodated 
 to the nature of the objects to be represented : thus in the 
 two following lines, in the first of which the whistling of the 
 winds is expressed by words in which the hissing 5 frequently 
 occurs, as in the second the cries of the sailors and the crash- 
 ing of the rigging are, by words in all of which will be found 
 the jarring r. 
 
 Luctantes ve?itos, tempestatesque sonwas. 
 
 Insequitur clamorque vimm, stridorque riidcntwn Virg. 
 
 7. It is also a beauty, as will again be noticed, when the 
 sense does not finish with each line, but when one expres- 
 sion or more are thrown back to the following line, provided 
 the stop be introduced at the close of the fourth or fifth, or, 
 at the furthest, of the sixth line ; as 
 
 Quid faciat laetas segetes ; quo sidere terrain 
 VcrterL\ Maecenas, ulmisque adjungere vites 
 Conveniat ; qua? cum bourn, qui cultus habendo 
 Sit pecoriy atque apibus quanta experientia parcis Virg. 
 A word of three long syllables, when it forms an image, or 
 paints an object, is often thrown back ; as 
 
 Carmine quo captae, dum fusis mollia pensa 
 
 DevolvFmf. Virg. 
 
 Diripiuntque dapes, contactuque omnia foedant 
 
 Immundo. Virg. 
 
 But a monosyllable alone is not commonly thrown back, 
 
446 
 
 nor a word of two syllables, unless it be to express some- 
 thing sad, difficult, grand, or frightful ; as 
 
 Extinctum Nymphae crudeli funere Daphnin 
 
 FUlant. 
 
 Fundimur, et telo lumen terebramus acuto 
 
 -Virg. 
 
 II. On the contrary, in this kind of verse, those lines are 
 reckoned rather harsh ; 
 
 1. Which end in a monosyllable ; as 
 
 Praelia rubrica picta ant carbone ; velut si Hor. 
 Cui pulchrum fuit in medios dormire dies, et Hor. 
 Except, t yrs/f, when another monosyllable goes before it; as, 
 Principibus placuisse viris, non ultima lam est Hor. 
 Ne qua meis esto dictis mora. Juppiter liac statVirg. 
 Except, secondly, when a particular beauty accrues to the 
 verse, from the use of a monosyllable ! ; as 
 
 - procumbit humi bos- Virg. 
 - et mole sua stat Virg. 
 Isne tibi melius suadet, qui ut rein facias, rem 
 Si possis recte : si non, quocumque modo rent ? Hor. 
 
 2. Those lines which end with several dissyllables ; as 
 Insano posuere ; v clut silvis, ubi passim Hor. 
 Semper, ut inducar, llandos offers mihi vultus Tibull. 
 
 3. Those which end in a word of more than three sylla- 
 bles ; as 
 
 Augescunt alia? gentes ; alias minuuntur Lucr. 
 Quisquis luxuria, tristive superstitionc Hor. 
 Except,^*/, the verse be spondaic, as already noticed. 
 Except, secondly, when the last word is a proper name ; as 
 Amphion Dircaeus in Actaeo Aracyntho Virg. 
 Hirtacidae ante omnes exit locus Hippocoontis Virg. 
 Quarum quae forma pulcherrima De'iopeiam Virg. 
 Except, thirdly, when this position contributes to the ex- 
 pression of some particular passion, or there is any peculiar 
 Leauty in introducing such a word, at the end the line ; as in 
 Per connubia nostra, per incceptos hymenccos Virg. 
 Seu mollis violae, seu languentis Jiyacinthi Virg. 
 The verse is usually concluded with a dissyllable, or a 
 trisyllable, both, of course, emphatic on the penultimate. 
 
 1 Or when an anticlimax is intended, as in the well-known line 
 of Horace, 
 
 Parturiunt montes, nascetur ridiculus mus, 
 in which, one of the longest words is placed first, and a monosyl- 
 lable, at the conclusion. 
 
447 
 
 4. Those lines in which there is no caesura, or but few; as in 
 lionise moenia terruit impiger Hannibal armis Enn. 
 Has res ad te scriptas, Luci, misimus, /Eli Lucil. 
 Sive quod Appula gens, seu quod Lucania belluni Hor. 
 Poste recumbite, vestraque pectora pellite tonsis Enn. 
 Sparsis hastis longe campus splendet et horret Enn. 
 
 5. Those in which the elisions are too frequent, or grat- 
 ing to the ear ; as 
 
 Primum nam inquiram, quid sit furere hoc ; si crit in te 
 
 Hor. 
 Illam ancillam ego amo ante alias, atque ipsi cro amandus. 
 
 6. Lastly, certain critics object to lines, (named Leonine, 
 as some suppose from Leo, the name of a monk who 
 brought them into vogue, or, according to others, from some 
 imaginary analogy to the Lion's tail,) in which there is 11 
 rhyme, especially when it includes the vowel w r hich pre- 
 cedes the caesural syllable ; as 
 
 Trajicit. I vcrbis virtutem illude supcrbis Virg. 
 
 Si Lfoysfatis aliquid restare putatis Ovid. 
 
 Ipse ego librorum video delicta mcorum Ovid. 
 And they reckon them less objectionable when there is an 
 elision ; as in 
 
 JEneamftmdantcjn arces et tecta novantcm Virg. 
 Such rhymes, however, are not without their admirers, 
 and considering what poets have used them, and how often^ 
 as will hereafter be noticed, that criticism is perhaps too 
 hasty, which condemns them to unqualified reprobation. 
 Some of the divisions of certain lines, however, in which 
 rhyme is supposed to exist, may, perhaps, be regarded as 
 merely homotclcut-iC) the rhyme being rendered imperfect, 
 or counteracted, in a correct pronunciation ofjcet, by a 
 diversity in the position of the syllabic emphasis. And 
 where rhyme does really exist, the circumstance may, pro- 
 bably, be sometimes accidental, and not intended. 
 
 But, in regard to a thorough knowledge of the beauties 
 and defects of hexameter verse ; and of w r hat position in a 
 line any particular word of a certain quantity, and certain 
 number of syllables, may properly and advantageously oc- 
 cupy, these are objects that can be attained only by prac- 
 tice, by a due regard to the rhythm, as connected with, or 
 dependent upon, emphasis, and a minute attention to the 
 works of such authors as have written in this kind of verse. 
 1 shall, therefore, conclude this sketch with a few re- 
 marks on the poetry of Virgil, as comprised under the fol- 
 lowing particulars. 
 
448 
 
 1. Tlie Varying of the Pause. It has been already ob- 
 served, that the common pause takes place in hexameter 
 after the first fi\e halt-feet, that is, after the first syllable of 
 the third foot ; as in 
 
 Ante mare et tellus \ et quod tegit om?iia, ccdum, 
 
 Unus erat toto \ Nature vultus in orbe. 
 
 Quern dixere Chaos \ rudis indigestaque moles ; 
 
 Nee quicquam, nisi pondus iners ; \ congestaque eodem 
 
 Non bene June tar um \ discordia semina rerum Ovid. 
 
 These lines have the pause in the same place, the fourth 
 excepted ; and in this kind of measure is the Metamorphosis 
 generally written. But it will be found, that Virgil endea- 
 vours as much as possible to avoid the common pause, as 
 in the following lines : 
 
 Quidfacerem ? \ ncque servitio \ me exire licebat Eel. 
 
 Fertesimul \ Faunique pedem \ Dryadesque puelltf Georg* 
 
 Inde toro \ pater jfcneas \ sic wsus ab alto. 
 
 Haec secum : \ mene incepto \ desistere vie tarn ? JEtU. 
 
 In a few instances he likewise omits the first caesura ; as 
 
 Nee minus interea extremam \ Saturnia bello TEn. 
 
 There i, perhaps, not an instance in which Ovid omits 
 both the first and second pause. In this consists the prin- 
 cipal difference between the versification of Ovid and that 
 of Virgil. The former scarcely ever omits the second 
 pause ; and hence the uniformity or general sameness so 
 easily observable in his versification. The latter, on the 
 contrary, by his frequent neglect of it, imparts greater va- 
 riety to his numbers, and, sometimes also, greater strength 
 to his expression. 
 
 2. The Inversion of the Phrase. In this consists a ma- 
 terial difference between the general style of prose and that 
 of poetry; and it is one of those means which are artfully 
 employed to create delay, suspense and interest. The fol- 
 lowing is an instance ; 
 
 Anna virumque cano, Trojcc qui primus ab oris 
 Italiam (fato profugus] Lavinaque venit 
 
 Littora. 
 
 Here, by the inversion of the phrase, the whole matter, 
 with the parenthesis fato profugus^ precedes the principal 
 verb, venit, the word littora excepted. Thus also ; 
 Vix e conspectu SiculdS telluris in altum 
 Vela dab ant 
 
 3. The adapting of the Sound to tlie Sense. Few are ig- 
 norant of the beauty of Quadmpedante^ &c., and Hli inter 
 sesc, &c., but in Virgil such instances are innumerable. 
 
 
469 
 
 How does the verse labour, when strong, heavy land is 
 to be ploughed ! 
 
 Ergo, age, terras 
 
 Pingue solum, primis extemplo a mensibus anni 
 
 Fortes invertant tauri 
 
 How nimbly does it move, when the turning over of very 
 light ground is represented ! 
 
 < Sub ipsum 
 
 Arcturum, tenui sat erit suspendere sulco. 
 How does the boat bound over the Po hi the following 
 words ! 
 
 ^ 1 Levis innatat alnus 
 
 Missa Pado 
 
 Nothing can be rougher than the following line ; 
 
 Inseritur vero exfcetu nucis arbutus horrida, 
 in which the prevalence of the rough r is visible ; nor can 
 water itself be more liquid than the following, in almost every 
 word of which, are both the trilling / and the hissing s ,- 
 
 Speluncisque lacus clauses, lucosque sonantes. 
 How soft and harmonious, and well adapted to the sense, 
 does the prevalence of the letter a render the following lines ! 
 Mollia luteold pingit vaccinia caltha. 
 Omnia sub magnd labentia jftumina terra* 
 Lanea dum nivea circumdatur infula vitta. 
 4. The mixing of the Singular and Plural Number. This 
 is a great beauty, which is particularly attended to by Vir- 
 gil ; and but seldom observed by Ovid, or any other Ro- 
 man writer in the time of Augustus. 
 The following are instances, 
 
 Camposque et flumina late 
 
 Curva tenent : ut molle siler, lentaeque genista, 
 Populus, et glauca canentia fronde salicta. 
 Pars autem posito surgunt de semine : ut altae 
 Castanet ; nemorumque Jovi quae maxima frondet 
 Esculus, atque habitse Graiis oracula quercus. 
 There is a beautiful passage of this kind in the Georgics ; 
 in which the thing to be done and the instrument with which 
 it is to be done are varied alternately ; 
 
 Quod nisi et assiduis terram insectabere rastris, 
 Et sojiitu terrebis aves, et ruris opaci 
 Fake premes umbras, votisque vocaveris imbrem. 
 Terram rastris , sonitu aves ; falce umbras ; and votis im- 
 brem. 
 
 In Ovid nothing of this kind is to be found : thus, 
 Ante mare et tellus et (quod tegit omnia) cerium, 
 2 G 
 
4-50 
 
 Unus erat toto naturae vultm in orbe, 
 
 Quern dixere chaos ; rudis indigestaque moles, 
 
 Nee quicquam nisi pondus iners. 
 
 In which are seven nouns in the singular, and not one in 
 the plural, amongst them. 
 
 5. The uncommon Use of the Particles et and que. 
 Of this the following are instances : 
 
 Multum ille et terris jactatus et alto ; 
 
 Multa quoque et bello passus -- 
 
 Et premere et laxas sciret dare jussus habenas. 
 And more frequently in his most finished piece ; 
 
 Quid tibi odorato referam sudantia liguo, 
 , et baccas 
 
 Si vero viciamque seres, vllemque faselum. 
 
 This manner of using the connecting particles gives 
 strength to the verse, and, by retarding the sense, raises sus- 
 pense and produces attention. For, in the last example, 
 the sense is not concluded, till the rest of the line is read, 
 vilemque faselum while, had the poet written, si vero vici- 
 am seres, and the verse would have permitted it, the reader 
 would have understood him without going any further, and 
 the line would have been very flat, compared with what it 
 now is ! . 
 
 This use of corresponding particles is particularly observ- 
 able in Homer ; as 
 
 Atridesque rex virorum, et nobilis Achilles. 
 
 Redempturus<7W filiam, ferensgw infimtum pretium libe- 
 rationis. Clarke's Transl. 
 
 6. The Collocatio Verborum. 
 
 Of this the following is an example ; 
 
 Vox quoque per lucos vulgo exaudita silentes 
 Tngens --- 
 In which the isolated position of the heavy spondee has a 
 striking effect, making the melancholy voice groan, as it 
 were, through the grove. 
 
 7. The changing of the common Pronunciation ; as 
 Stridere apes utero, et ruptis effervere costis. 
 
 1 It is observed, that enclitics are usually joined to the first 
 word of a clause, unless sometimes when the first word is a mo- 
 nosyllabic preposition ; as 
 
 Sub pedibus^we videt nubes et sidera Daphnis Virg. 
 Instances, however, are not uncommon, in which this rule is not 
 observed. Horace furnishes one ; 
 
 Flebili sponsac juveuemve raptum Lib. iv. ocl. 2. 
 
151 
 
 The open genitive?, as consihY, servitzV, auxibV, &c. do not 
 appear in the hexameters of Virgil, though evidently coir- 
 modious to the verse, and though Ovid not long afterwards 
 used these forms without reserve. In Horace, too, the forms 
 consilz and impen occur, iii. 4, 65. iv. 15, 14*. 
 
 8. Alliteration. This is of several kinds ; the initial, 
 single, and double ; sometimes treble, or more frequent ; 
 sometimes mixt, that is, both in the first letters of the words, 
 and in the following syllables. 
 
 The following are examples of the single alliteration. 
 Quid faciat lastas segetes, quo sidere terram 
 Verier e, Maecenas, ulmisque adjungere vites, 
 Conveniat ,- quae cur a bourn ; qui cultm habendo. 
 Again ; 
 
 Asia longe 
 
 Pulsa palm. 
 
 Of the double initial alliteration, this is an example ; 
 
 Totaque thuriferis Pancha'ia pinguis arenis. 
 Of the treble, and more frequent, initial alliteration, the 
 following is an instance ; 
 
 Et sola in sice a secum spatiatur arena. 
 The mixt alliteration will be found in the following ; 
 Hlas ducit amor trans Gargara, transque sonantcm 
 Ascanium : superant montes, etjlumina tranant. 
 In which two lines, the vowel a occurs fourteen times. 
 
 6. The Allusio Verborum, of which the following are in- 
 stances ; 
 
 Nee nocturna quidem carpentes pensa puellce* 
 Hoc metuens, molemque et montes insuper altos. 
 Stat sonipes, acfr<znaferox spumantia mandit. 
 10. The Assonantia Syllabarum, or Rhyme. Of this there 
 are in Virgil three different kinds. 
 
 First, the plain direct rhyme, which is of two kinds, single 
 and double. 
 
 Secondly, the intermediate or casual plain rhyme. 
 Thirdly, the scanning conclusive rhyme so called because 
 it can hardly be perceived by the generality of readers, till 
 the verse is scanned. 
 
 The following are examples of the single direct rhyme, in 
 which the lines are divided into two parts, to render it the 
 more easily perceived ; 
 
 Totaque thuriferis 
 Pancha'ia pinguis arenis. 
 Atque rotis summas 
 Levibm perlabitur undas. 
 <2 G2 
 
452 
 
 O nimium ccdo 
 Et pelago co-nfise sercno. 
 
 Of the plain direct double rhyme, which was so much in 
 vogue among the monks, the following are instances ; 
 Hie labor extremus, longanim 
 Hcec met a viarum. 
 Cormta velatarum 
 Obverfimus An tennarum. 
 
 Of the intermediate plain rhyme, the following are ex- 
 amples ; 
 
 Imposuit, regemque dedit, qui frcdere certo. 
 Descendo, ae ducente deo flammam inter et hostes. 
 In this last, deo seems used for dea in speaking of a god- 
 dess, very probably for the sake of a rhyme. 
 
 Of the scanning conclusive rhyme, the following are in- 
 stances ; 
 
 Sylvestrem tenui musam meui-ftms a-vend. 
 Nudus in ignota Pali-nureja-ceMs a-rend. 
 Whence it appears that Virgil's poetry abounds in rhyme 
 of one kind or other ; and it will be seen that he generally 
 concludes his strong, sounding, majestic sentences with a 
 full rhyme, as in that beautiful line, which sums up the 
 praises of Italy ; 
 
 Totaque thiiriferis Panchai'a pinguis arenis. 
 Thus also at the conclusion of his best work ; 
 Confluere, et lentis uvam demittere r'emis^ 
 To which may be added the last line of the episode to the 
 same ; 
 
 Tifyre, te patulcc cecini sub tegminefagi. 
 In which the two hemistichs rhyme to each other. 
 
 NEGLECTED HEXAMETERS. 
 
 In the Epistles and Satires of Horace, are hexameters, 
 which, from their studied negligence, and not having all the 
 majesty belonging to heroics, have received this appellation. 
 There are, however, great beauty and great simplicity in 
 them ; and they are admirable for the picture they contain 
 of the foibles and passions of mankind ; in which Horace 
 does not always spare himself. Thus, writing to his steward, 
 he says, 
 
 Rure ego vivtfifcm, tu diets in urbe beatum : 
 
 Cut placet alterius, sua nimirum est odio sort. 
 
 Slultus uterque locum immeritum causatur inique. 
 
 In cidpa est animus, qui se non effiigit unquam. 
 There are several smaller verses, besides the pentameter,, 
 
453 
 
 which are formed from the heroic verse; such as most oi 
 the following, some of which consist of the beginning, and 
 some of the latter part of a hexameter. 
 
 1. The Arclu'lochian Penthemimer, or Dimeter. Named 
 from Archilochus its inventor ; consisting of two dactyls, 
 and one syllable, and, therefore, named t-fypercat 'alec tic ; 
 Pulvis et | fimbra su\mus Hor. 
 
 %. The Alcmanian Dactylic Trimeter. 
 
 First used by Alcman; consisting of three successive dac- 
 tyls, and a syllable over ; therefore, Hypercatalectic. 
 
 Mimerd I 
 Nostril de\us canet 
 
 amqii? de 
 
 i Virg, 
 a Prudent. 
 
 kdrmorii 
 
 3. This verse likewise admits a spondee in the first, second, 
 and third place; as 
 
 Units e\nlm rerumpater.es/. 
 Hie claulstt membrls ani\mos, 
 Onme homi\num geniis in ter\ris Boet. 
 
 4. The Alcmanian Dactylic Tetrameter, Acatalectic. 
 Admitting in the first, second, and third places, either a 
 
 dactyl or spondee ; in the fourth a dactyl only ; as 
 
 J- - V* , / _ V W _ VJ 7 w - ^ *'-< 
 
 pn 
 
 Ntmbd\sisqu& po 
 
 Desup 
 Solvitur 
 
 vimoo'sisq, 
 uper in 
 I dens 
 
 tc 
 
 Ins stMt 
 rum itox 
 
 reditt vtgor. 
 imbrib&s. 
 
 funditur Boet. 
 Hor. 
 
 ems grdtd vice- 
 
 5. The Alcmanian Tetrameter, Acatalectic, or, as it has 
 been named, the Spondaic Tetrameter. 
 
 Containing the last four feet of a Hexameter, in which, 
 of course, the third is a dactyl, and the last foot a spondee ; 
 litmus I o soal comt\tesque. 
 Sic trls\tes of fdtus a\>mcos Hor. 
 It sometimes admits a spondee instead of a dactyl, before 
 the last foot ; in which case, to prevent the line from being 
 too prosaic, the second foot ought to be a dactyl ; 
 Menso\rem cohi\bent^ Ar\chytd Hor. 
 
 6, 7. The Pherecratian Trimeter, consisting of the last 
 three feet of a hexameter, the first foot being a spondee; and 
 the Adonic dipodia, (consisting of the last two,) will be here- 
 after described, 
 
 8 The Alcmanian Tetrameter, Catelcctic. Consisting of 
 one long syllable, or two short syllables ; and then a dactyl, 
 or spondee ; afterwards a dactyl ; and lastly a spondee : thus, 
 
 Qui 
 
 se volet 
 
 csse po 
 
 tentem.) 
 
 Am 
 
 mos domet 
 
 Illc fc 
 
 roccs ; 
 
 Nee 
 
 victd K 
 
 bidine 
 
 colla 
 
 Fee 
 
 dis sub 
 
 mlttat M 
 
 bcnis Boet. 
 
urn volet I 
 
 us fruti \cibus, 
 
 454 
 
 9. .The Alcmanian Tetrameter, Hypercatalectic. Consist- 
 ing of a heroic penthemimer, i. e. having, in the first and 
 second place, either a dactyl, or spondee, with a long sylla- 
 ble ; and then an Adonic, that is, a dactyl and spondee ; as 
 
 1 _ __2 3*4 
 
 Heii quam prcecipiti mersa pro\ fundo, 
 Mens hebet, et propri a luce re\ltcta, 
 Tendit in exter nas ~tre te\nebras Boet. 
 This verse seems to consist of two segments of the heroic 
 hexameter, the latter half of the third foot, and the whole 
 of the fourth, being excluded ; thus 
 
 Tityre tu patulac tegmine fagi. 
 
 It is little different from the Asclepiadic, and has been termed 
 the Alcmanian Choriambic. It may be scanned also as a 
 pentameter deficient by a semifoot. 
 
 1 0. The Ithyphallic, or Priapeian, Tetrameter, Acatalectic ; 
 consisting of three dactyls and a Pyrrhic, or iambus ; as 
 
 Qul sere re 'ingenu 
 
 Liber at arva pri 
 
 Falce ru bos fill cemque re\secat Boet. 
 This consists of the last four feet of the hexameter miurus ; 
 and has been termed the tetrameter miurus. The dactyl 
 seems to have been preferred in the first three places, though 
 the Spondee was admissible in the first and second. 
 
 1 1 . The Bucolic Hexameter, having, in the fourth place, 
 a dactyl ; as 
 
 Ab Jove principium, Musce , Jo vis omnia plena Virg. 
 Fortunatianus mentions, that Theocritus observed this rule 
 in his Pastorals, and that Virgil often neglected it 1 . 
 
 1 Some antient grammarians call all divisions of a verse at the 
 end of the fourth foot Bucolic caesuras. Bede says, Bucolice tome 
 ubi post quatuor pedes non aliquid remanet. These, observes Mr. 
 Pickbourn, are formed, not only by spondaic and dactylic divi- 
 sions, but in various other ways. Sometimes by a long or a short 
 monosyllable, added to the third caesura ; as 
 
 *Sive dolo, seu jam Trojae sic fata ferebant Virg. 
 Parce precor nostrum ianiatur in arbore corpus Ovid. 
 In other cases, they are made by a Pyrrhic, and in a few instances 
 by two short monosyllables following the third caesura ; as 
 Inferretque Deos Latio : genus unde Latinum Virg. 
 Vix oculos attollit humo : nee ut ante solebat Ovid. 
 Priscian, when he enumerates the caesuras in the first lines of 
 the twelve books of the j^Eneid, takes no notice of these divisions 
 of a verse at the end of the fourth foot : but Diomede mentions 
 them, and seems to rank these with common caesuras; for he says 
 the following line of Virgil contains three caesuras: 
 Talibus Ilianeus I cuncti I simul I ore fremebant. 
 
 Mr. Pick. 
 
455 
 
 1 2. The Hexameter which is named Miurus or Teliambus^ 
 having as its last foot an iambus instead of a spondee; as 
 
 Dirige odorisequos ad cceca cubilia canes Liv. Andron. 
 
 13, 14-. The two Alcaics will be noticed hereafter. 
 
 OF PENTAMETER. 
 
 Pentameter verse consists of five feet, of which the first 
 two are indifferently dactyls or spondees ; the third foot is 
 always a spondee, (the first semifoot being almost invaria- 
 bly a final syllable, long, independently of caesura), and the 
 fourth and fifth anapests ; thus 
 
 Natulrce seqw\tur se mina quls qm succ Propert. 
 
 - Y.-J7-- -! -_ j- . _v/_ S ' L 'v v-r /~V 1 
 
 Carmmnbus vllves tern 
 
 Qui dedc\rit pri\mus os ciila vie 
 
 pus in o mne meis Ovid. 
 
 erlt Ovid. 
 
 In the last line, there is a short syllable in the caesura ; a 
 very rare occurrence. 
 
 That this was the manner of scanning it among the an- 
 tients, appears from the words of Quinctilian, " in penta- 
 metri medio spondee*" (Inst. ix. 4.) and " Anaptestus . . . 
 qui .... pentametrijinis" (Ibid.) 
 
 But, among the moderns, it is generally scanned diffe- 
 rently. The verse is divided into two hemistichs, or penthe- 
 mimers. In the first hemistich, are contained two dactyls 
 or two spondees, or one of each indiscriminately, and a long 
 syllable as a caesura ; in the latter hemistich, two dactyls, 
 with another caesura, or common syllable ; thus 
 
 Natu\ne sequ1\tur 
 Carmlm\bus vllves 
 Qui dede\rit primus 
 
 semma 
 
 tempus m 
 
 osciila 
 
 qulsque su\&. 
 omne me\is. 
 victor e\rit. 
 
 Mr. Pickbourn gives the following as the result of a patient ex- 
 amination of 3000 verses in Virgil and Ovid. In 1500 lines, taken 
 from different parts of Virgil's works, he counted 811 Bucolic cae- 
 suras, viz. 161 formed by spondees, consisting of the two last syl- 
 lables of a word; 99 formed by dactyls, consisting of the last three 
 syllables of a word ; 179 formed by Pyrrhics ; and 372 by mono- 
 syllables. In 1500 lines, taken from different parts of Ovid's Me- 
 tamorph. he counted 802 Bucolic caesuras, viz. 226 formed by 
 spondees, 173 by dactyls, 192 by Pyrrhics, and 211 by monosyl- 
 lables. He adds that 500 of these lines were taken from Virgil's 
 Eclogues, where Bucolic caesuras occur more frequently than they 
 do in the ^Eneid. Had they been all taken, he says, from the lat- 
 ter poem, the numbers would not have exceeded, perhaps scarcely 
 equalled, those in Ovid. Upon the whole, the principal difference 
 is, that Ovid abounds more in Bucolic caesuras formed by spondees 
 and dactyls, and Virgil, in such as are formed by Pyrrhics and mo- 
 nosyllables. 
 
455 
 
 A pentameter line subjoined to a hexameter constitutes 
 an elegiac distich ; so named from sXeyof, lamentatio, be- 
 cause it was first used in sad and plaintive compositions ; 
 and hence the two following lines of Ovid, which may like^- 
 wise serve as a specimen of it ; 
 
 Flebilis indignos, Elegeia, solve capittos. 
 
 Ah nimis ex vero nunc tibi nomen erit ! 
 The JEolic Pentameter consists of four dactyls preceded 
 by a spondee, a trochee, or an iambus ; as 
 
 Cordi \ quandofulsse sibl canit atthidd Terent. 
 Edi-\-dit tuba terrtbrlem sonitum procul Terent. 
 '<9f oiv-\-$pcav $pevat$ svpotpsws yTroSa^vaTaj Theocrit. 
 The twenty-ninth Idyl of Theocritus is in this metre ; 
 
 Sometimes the first foot was a dactyl. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS ON PENTAMETER AND ELEGIAC VERSE. 
 
 1. In Pentameter, the first hemistich ought to end with 
 the entire word, that the caesura belonging to the penthe- 
 mimer may take place; for there is a blemish in a line want- 
 ing this caesura ; as in 
 
 Hcec quoque nostrte sententia mentis erat Diomed. 
 
 2. An elision immediately after the penthemimer is harsh ; 
 as, 
 
 Mi misero eripuisti omnia nostra bona. 
 Ilium affligit odore, iste perit podagra. 
 Troja vinim et virtutem omnium acerba cinis Catull. 
 Which verses are likewise rendered more harsh by the 
 synaloephae or ecthlipses in the other feet; and this harsh- 
 ness is still more obvious in the following line ; 
 
 Quam modo <jui me unum atque unicum amicum habuit- 
 Catull. 
 
 3. Neither hemistich should end in a monosyllable; as in 
 O di, reddite mi hoc pro pietate mea. 
 
 Autfacere, htzc a te dictaque factaque sunt Catull. 
 But, yet, if another monosyllable goes before, or there 
 is an elision in the preceding word, there is no blemish ; as 
 Magna tamen spes est in bonitate dei. 
 Prcemia si studio consequar, ista sat est. 
 Invitis oculis liter a lecta tua est Ovid. 
 
 4. Pentameter is best concluded by a dissyllable ; as are 
 in general the verses of Ovid ; but sometimes by a word of 
 four or five syllables ; as 
 
 Maxima de nihilo nascitur kistoria Propert. 
 Pomaque non notis legit ab arbor ibus Tibull. 
 
457 
 
 Lis est cum forma magna pudicitia Ovid. 
 Contactum mill is ante cupidinibus Proper!. 
 Seldom in a trisyllable ; as 
 
 Et caput impositis pressit amor pedibus Propert. 
 Quolibet ut saltern rurefrui liceat Propert, 
 
 5. The same objection that is made to Leonine verses, in 
 hexameter, is made to them in pentameter : such are the 
 following ; 
 
 Qiicerebant jlavos per nemus oinnefavos. 
 
 Hoc, mihi quid prodest, si tibi, lector, obest Ovid. 
 If, however, only the last syllables of the two hemistichs 
 rhyme to each other, this may be conducive to the elegance 
 and harmony of the verse ; as 
 
 Hue ades, et nitidas casside solve comas Ovid, 
 
 Flumineo celeres dissipat ore canes Ovid. 
 
 Fluminis ad liquidas forte sedemus aquas Buchan. 
 In the observations on Hexameter, it has been shown that 
 Virgil abounds in this kind of rhyme, and in other kinds. 
 The following are additional instances ; and in these, like- 
 wise, there are only two syllables which rhyme to each other. 
 
 Quamvis multa mcis exiret victima septis Virg. 
 
 Primus Idumaas referam tibi, Mantua, palmas Virg. 
 
 Dum petit infirmis nimium sublimia pennis. 
 
 Icarus learns nomina fecit aquis Ovid. 
 
 6. In elegiac poetry, the hexameters ought to flfow more 
 slowly, than when they are used alone. 
 
 7. In this verse, also, every distich generally terminates 
 a sentence, or at least ends with a colon. And it seldom 
 happens, (nor should it be imitated,) that it is concluded in 
 such a way that one word of the same member of a sen- 
 tence belongs to the preceding distich, and the other to 
 the following. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS ON THE OVIDIAN DISTICH '. 
 
 (l.) SCANSION AND STRUCTURE. 
 
 1. FOUR verses out of five, or nearly so, commence with 
 a dactyl. 
 
 2. When the sense of thejirst line overflows by a single 
 word into the second, that word almost always forms a dactyl, 
 or a trochee. 
 
 Obsequio tranantur aquae ; nee vincere possis 
 Flumina, si contra quam rapit unda, nates. 
 
 1 Class. Journ. vol. xxii. p. 221 . 
 
458 
 
 Nunc quoque detect! referunt monumenta vetusti 
 
 Moris, et antiquas testificantur opes. 
 The exception to this rule is very rare, and takes place 
 perhaps only with a verb. 
 
 Inde duse pariter, visu mirabile, palmse 
 Surgunt : ex illis altera major erat. 
 
 3. A molossus initial is preferred to a spondee, c&teris 
 paribus. 
 
 4. The Pentameter is never formed thus: (Monkish epi- 
 taph.) 
 
 Vile cadaver | sum || tuque cadaver eris. 
 
 5. The long verse, in structure, seldom deviates from 
 these models. 
 
 Tityre, tu patulae || recubans sub tegmine | fagi. 
 Sylvestrem tenui || musam meditaris | avena. 
 Formosam resonare | doces || Amaryllida | sylvas. 
 
 6. The trisyllabic ending is avoided in the short line, as 
 the quadrisyllable is in the long. The short line on some 
 very rare occasions ends with a quadrisyllabic word. 
 
 Quern legis, ut noris, accipe, Posteritas. 
 Me sciat in media vivere barbaric. 
 Quicquid et in tota nascitur Anticyra. 
 
 7. The sense does not overflow from one into another 
 distich, unless under circumstances like the following. 
 
 Languor, et immodici nullo sub vindice somni, 
 Aleaque, et multo tempora quassa mero, 
 
 Eripiunt omnes animo sine vulnere nervos : 
 Adfluit incautis insidiosus amor. 
 
 (in.) PROSODY. 
 
 8. A short vowel in one word preceding sc, sp, sq, st, in 
 another, very rarely forms a short syllable l . 
 
 In words like Scamander, Sciurus, Smaragdus, authority 
 and necessity are said to consecrate the usage. 
 
 9. The caesural lengthening of a short syllable in any 
 place of the verse is very uncommon. 
 
 Ut rediit animus, tenues a pectore vestes, &c. 
 
 10. M final and final short vowels are rarely cut off, even 
 in dissyllabic words : much less in monosyllables, and with 
 long vowels. 
 
 1 See, however, page 345. 
 
459 
 
 11. The most usual forms occur injinepentametri, such 
 as the following : 
 
 .... via est solo est ubi es ? ... .meum est. 
 
 12. Of the apostrophe so placed, the following line (other- 
 wise, objectionable) gives an extraordinary instance. Heroid. 
 x. 86. Ed. Burman. 
 
 Quis scit, an haec saevas tigridas insula habet? 
 
 1 3. Consilii, imperil, &c. stand as quadrisyllables in Ovid. 
 To this head, perhaps, of convenience in versifying, may 
 
 be referred the position of que in the short line ; the pecu- 
 liarity of evolvisse and persolvenda, as forming words of five 
 syllables; and the frequent use of implicuisse, &c., where im- 
 plicare, &c. else would naturally occur. 
 
 14. The shortening of the O final is very rare, and in a 
 very few words only admitted ; puto when parenthetic, and 
 nescio quern, &c., are not uncommon instances. 
 
 (IV.) RELATIVE POSITION OF WORDS. 
 
 1 5. The words by which the pentameter is usually con- 
 cluded, are nouns, and verbs, the verb substantive very 
 much, and pronouns possessive. 
 
 16. Of adjectives and adverbs injine pentametri the in- 
 stances being rare and particular are easily remarked: these 
 it is not safe to imitate, unless in cases justified by identity 
 or very close similitude. 
 
 17. Instances like these with sum, facto, and other verbs, 
 are readily distinguished. 
 
 Quae tantum lanas non sinat esse rudes. 
 YLocfaciet positae te mihi, terra, levem. 
 
 18. The participle in Jine pentametri, as in the fictitious 
 verse below, is not legitimate. 
 
 Et lastus vivit, rura paterna colens. 
 
 19. While the following instances, with a few others, 
 form no real exception to the rule. 
 
 Nunc tibi sum pauper, nunc tibi visa nocens. 
 Dicere non norunt, quid ferat hora sequens. 
 On the Position of the Adjective. 
 
 20. Generally, perhaps, the adjective precedes the noun, 
 Except, a. Where it is the longer word of the two. 
 
 b. Where it has a very emphatic or decisive 
 
 meaning in the sentence. 
 
 c. Where some word belongs to it in go- 
 
 vernment. 
 
 d. Where one adjective is coupled to another. 
 
460 
 
 The following collocations are legitimate, and may be imi- 
 tated with safety. 
 
 A- Si mea materice \ respondet Musa | jocosa. 
 
 B. Ruperat et duram | vernier aduncus \ humum, 
 
 C. Inque sinu natos | pignora chara \ ferunt 
 
 D. Prima vocas tardos | adjuga panda \ boves. 
 
 E. (any where perhaps but in t fine pentametri.) 
 Qui mini | Livor edax \ ignavos objicis annos. 
 
 Quag que nee | hostefero \ nee nive, terra, cares. 
 
 21. Other collocations equally legitimate occur, which it 
 may not be quite so easy to class and define. These the 
 Scholar will note as he meets with them, remembering care- 
 fully to distinguish where the noun and the adjective go 
 disjunctively as in A, and where conjunctively as in B, C 9 
 Z), and E. 
 
 22. The noun in the long line is seldom followed by its 
 adjective in the short, unless in a few cases very peculiar, 
 like these, 
 
 Protinus adspicies venienti nocte Coronam 
 Gnossida : Theseo crimine facta Dea est. 
 
 Dira viro facies ; vires pro corpore ; corpus 
 Grande : pater monstri Mulciber hujus erat. 
 
 Nos quoque templa juvant, quamvis antiqua probe- 
 
 mus, 
 Aurea : majestas convenit ista Deo. 
 
 OF THE ASCLEPIADIC (A CHORIAMBlc). 
 
 This verse, invented by the poet Asclepiades, consists of 
 four feet, a spondee, two choriambi, and a Pyrrhic (or, con- 
 sidering the last syllable of the verse as long, an iambus) ; 
 thus 
 
 Mace. nas atavis \ edite re\gtbus. 
 
 But it is likewise scanned differently. Thus, in the first 
 place some put a spondee, in the second a dactyl, with a 
 caesura or long syllable, and in the third and fourth, a dac- 
 tyl; as 
 
 Mcece}nas atalvis \ edite \ regibus. 
 
 It may be turned into a pentameter, by adding a syllable 
 to the second hemistich ; thus 
 
 O et presidium, \ duke decusque meum. 
 The caesura takes place at the end of the first choriambus^, 
 
 Uote I. Very rarely the first foot was a dactyl ; as 
 Effugj\um > et mise.ros \ llbtra \ mors veliit Seneca, 
 
461 
 
 Note 2. Single feet are elegantly composed of complete 
 words; as 
 
 Quassas, I indocilis I paupenem I pati Hor. 
 Magnum \ pauperits \ opprobrium, \ jubet Hor. 
 Note 3. The first choriambus, or the caesura, falls inele- 
 gantly on the middle of a word ; as 
 
 Non ln\cendia Carth\aginis im\pi(Z Hor. 
 Unless there be an ecthlipsis or synalcepha ; as 
 
 Exe 
 Audi 
 
 gl monumen\tum are peren 
 tdm moderelre drbonbus 
 
 nius Hor. 
 fidem Hor. 
 
 Or, the word be a compound ; as 
 
 Dum t fla\gra7itia dejorqutt ad os\cula Hor. 
 But such lines are somewhat harsh, and not rashly to be 
 imitated. 
 
 There are likewise the following varieties in choriambic 
 verse. 
 
 1. The Aristophanian Choriambic Dimeter, Acatalectic, 
 consisting of a choriambus, and a Bacchic or an amphibrac ; 
 as 
 
 Lydia die \ per omnes Hor. 
 
 2. The Alcaic Pentameter, Acatalectic, consisting of a 
 spondee, three choriambi, and a Pyrrhic ; as 
 
 Seu plu | res h^ ernes \ seu tribuit \ Jupiter ul\fimam Hor. 
 
 3. The Alcaic Epichoriambic Tetrameter, Acatalectic, 
 consisting of the second epitrit, (a choree and a spondee) 
 two choriambi, and a Bacchic ; as 
 
 Te Deos o\ro Sybarin \ cur properes \ dmando Hor. 
 
 OF THE GLYCONIC. 
 
 4. The Glyconic (so named from its inventor Glyco or 
 Glycon) consists of three feet, a spondee, a choriambus, and 
 a Pyrrhic ; as 
 
 Mens re\gnum bona pos\sidet Senec. 
 Others scan it by a spondee, and two dactyls ; thus 
 
 Mcns re\gnum bona \ possidet. 
 
 Note. The first foot is sometimes an iambus or a trochee; as 
 Piiel Ice et pUeri ~in tegri Catul. 
 
 Magnd \ progemes 
 
 Jams Catul. 
 
 Horace has but once admitted the trochee ; 
 
 Ignis | Iliacas domos Od. i. 15, 36. 
 
 To which may, perhaps, be added the twenty-fourth line of 
 the same ode, which, according to old editions, runs thus : 
 
 Teucer \ et Sthenelus sciens, 
 instead of Tcuccrque, et &c. or, probably, 
 
 Teuccr, te Sthenelus &c. 
 
462 
 
 5. See the Pherecratic, which may be classed either with 
 Choriambics or Dactylics. 
 
 OF THE SAPPHIC AND ADONIC. 
 
 The Sapphic, so named from the poetess Sappho, con- 
 sists of five feet ; the first a trochee, the second a spondee, 
 the third a dactyl, and the fourth and fifth trochees. Sap- 
 pho accompanied every three of these verses with an Adonic 
 (a measure used in lamenting the fate of Adonis) which con- 
 sists of a dactyl and a spondee; and in this she has been imi- 
 tated by Horace, Catullus and others, but not by Seneca, 
 who, in the choruses to his tragedies, often gives a conside- 
 rable number of successive Sapphics without any Adonic. 
 The Sapphic is a Trochaic pentameter, Acatalectic; the 
 Adonic, a Dactylic dimeter. 
 
 Inte\ger vi\t< scele\nsqUL' 
 Non e\get Mau\rl jacu\Us nee 
 
 gittis* 
 
 Hor. 
 
 Necvelnena \tlsgravi\da sa 
 
 Fiisce, pha\retra. 
 Boethius has many of these last successively ; as 
 Gaudia pelle ; Nubila me?is est, 
 
 Pelle timorem : Vinctaque frcenis^ 
 
 Spemque fugato ; Haec ubi regnant. 
 
 Nee dolor adsit. L. 1. de Con. Phil. 
 
 Note 1. The caesura penthemimeris gives beauty to Sap- 
 phic verse ; for those lines which are without it do not flow 
 very harmoniously; as 
 
 Concines major e po'e'ta plectro. 
 Phoebe silvarumque potens Diana Hor. 
 Note 2. A trochee, or, it is said, a dactyl, is sometimes 
 found in the second place ; as 
 
 Pauca | nunci \ ate mea puellce Catull. 
 Quceque ad. \ Hesperi\as jacet or a metas Senec. 
 Sumere \ wnumelras solititmji,guras Senec. 
 unless the two last words are read as trisyllables. But these 
 liberties should be sparingly used. 
 
 Note 3. These verses are sometimes found redundant, 
 (Hypermetrt); but, in this case, the last vowel is elided, be- 
 cause the following verse begins with a vowel ; as 
 Plorat, et vires, animumque, moresque 
 Aureos educit in astra, nigroque 
 
 Invidet Oreo Hor. 
 
 Note 4?. Those lines have been sometimes considered as 
 rather harsh, in which the first syllable of a .word belongs to 
 the preceding verse, and the remainder to* the following; as 
 
463 
 
 Grosphe, non gemmis, nequc purpurd ve~ 
 
 -nale, nee auro. 
 Also ; Labitur rtpd, Jove non probante, u- 
 
 -xorius amnis Hor. 
 
 In the composition, however, of the Sapphic stanza, it 
 has been observed, that a word may be divided so that the 
 former part of it shall close the third line, and the remain- 
 der shall form the beginning of the fourth, or Adonic. The 
 ancient poets afford no instance of such a division at the ter- 
 mination of the first, second, or fourth verse *. Thus 
 Gallicum Rhenum, horribilesque ulti- 
 
 -mosque Britannos Catull. 
 Labitur ripd, &c. Hor. ex edit. Bentl. 
 Grosphe, non gemmis, &c. Hor. ex ed. Bentl. 
 There are two other instances, which are of a different 
 class : 
 
 Thracio bacchante magis sub intei*- 
 -lunia vento Hor. i. 25, 11. 
 Pendulum zond bene te secutd e- 
 
 -lidere collum Hor. iii. 27, 59. 
 
 In these, the prepositions are allowably detached from the 
 words, as they often are in other metres ; a circumstance 
 which has been noticed by Bentley, and subsequently by 
 Dawes, in his Misc. Critic. In the last example, the com- 
 mon reading is 
 
 te secuta 
 
 L&dere collum. 
 
 This divisio vocis injine versus does not occur in the Sap- 
 phics of Seneca, Statius, Ausonius, Prudentius, Sidonius 
 Apollinaris, or Boethius ; and it is admitted, as already no- 
 ticed, only at the close of the third and beginning of the 
 fourth, by Catullus and Horace. The elision of the final 
 vowel is observable in the former, at the end of the third 
 verse ; and, in the latter, at the end of the first 2 , second, 
 and third. See Note 3, and Synapheia. 
 
 1 Month. Rev. Jan. 1798. 
 
 2 But this elision appears to me to receive little confirmation 
 from the example, 
 
 Pindarum quisquis studet semulari, 
 
 Me, Hor. iv. 2, 1, 
 
 since, if the word lule be pronounced as a dissyllable, which it 
 may be, the two lines will remain unconnected in their metre. 
 The observation with respect to the elisions, appears to be not 
 very important. Final elisions have been generally avoided; for 
 the ancients paid particular attention to the metre and rhythm 
 
464 
 
 A continuation of sense from stanza to stanza^ if not oc- 
 curring frequently, is permitted ; but it is deemed harsh and 
 awkward to open a new sentence with the Adonic verse* of 
 which the first and natural use is to close^the metre with an 
 agreeable rest. (See Class. Journ. xviii." 378.) In all the 
 odes of Horace, in this metre, one only, a light composi- 
 tion, even seems to yield any pretence for such a disjunction. 
 
 Est mihi nonum superantis annum 
 
 Plenus Albani cadus ; est in horto 
 
 Phylli, nectendis apium coronis ; 
 
 Est hederae vis [in horto] 
 
 Multa, qua crines religata fulges. 
 
 Ridet argento dooms: &c. Lib. iv. 11. 
 Catullus never offends against this rule. It is possible, 
 indeed, that the third Sapphic line, and the Adonic, might 
 have been considered as forming one verse ; Metrum asy- 1 
 narteton, ex Epichoriambico trimetro catalectico, et Choriam- 
 bico penthemimerL 
 
 OF THE PHALEUCIAN. 
 
 The Phaleucian, or, rather, Phalaecian verse, so named 
 from the inventor, Phalaecus, (<aAaixo$) consists of five feet; 
 the first, a spondee, the second, a dactyl, and the other three, 
 trochees ; thus 
 
 Quod sis \ esse ve Ills nWiilque \ malls. 
 Summam \ ncc m$tu\as di\em 9 nee \ dptcs Mart. 
 
 Note 1. This kind of verse neither rejects nor requires a 
 ca?sura. 
 
 Note 2. Instead of a spondee as the first foot, Catullus 
 sometimes uses a trochee, or an iambus ; a liberty seldom 
 taken by posterior poets* 
 
 towards the close of aline. Whether they occur in the first, or the 
 second, or the third line, the circumstance may have been purely 
 accidental, and not determined by any predilection for the parti- 
 cular line. Such elisions occur in other metres in Greek and Latin 
 poetry ; and for their occurrence, I am not aware that any prin- 
 ciple has been, or can be assigned, as founded on the particular 
 nature of the line, or of the versification. The only lines, in this 
 stanza, in which there appears to be a well marked peculiarity, 
 are the third and fourth ; and even in these, the peculiarity is re- 
 moved, by considering them as constituting one continuous verse. 
 An elision at the end of the Adonic would be obviously impro- 
 per. It may not be improper to add here, as a general rule ap- 
 plicable to Lyrical poetry, that, if a verse ends in a short vowel, 
 the following verse should not begin with a vowel, unless where 
 the sense ends with the end of the line. 
 
465 
 
 Graft as tibi maximas Catullus 
 Agit, pessimus omnium poeta. 
 
 Note 3. The same poet has also admitted a spondee, in- 
 stead of a dactyl, as the second foot; thus 
 
 Ora 
 
 mussl 
 
 Femellas om 
 
 forte non molestum est. 
 nes, amice, prendi 
 
 But this is not to be imitated. 
 
 The Phaleucian is sometimes named Hendecasyllabic, or 
 verse consisting of eleven syllables ; but that name does not 
 exclusively belong to it, since the greater dactylic Alcaic, 
 (to be hereafter noticed,) and the Sapphic, contain the same 
 number. The following is an instance of the latter con- 
 verted into the Phaleucian ; 
 
 Sapphic. Non c\get Mau\rl jacu\lis nee \ arcu. 
 
 Phaleuc. Non Mau\ri jacu\lls e\get me \ arcu. 
 
 Alcaic. Summum \ nee op\tes \\ nee metuas \ diem. 
 
 Sapph. Nee di\em sum\milm metu\ds, nee \ optes. 
 
 OF THE PHERECRATIC. 
 
 The Pherecratic verse, invented by Pherecrates of Athens, 
 consists of what may be the three last feet of an hexameter; 
 viz. in the first place, of a spondee, in the second, a dactyl, 
 and in the third, a spondee ; thus 
 
 Nigris | cequord \ ventis Hor. 
 
 Note 1. Catullus sometimes admits a trochee, or an iam- 
 bus, into the first place ; as 
 Prode\as nova nupta. 
 Puel\l(cque canamus. 
 Boe'thius sometimes an anapest; as 
 
 Simil'i | surgit ab ortu. 
 
 The Pherecratic verse is generally classed as a Dactylic 
 trimeter. It may also be considered as a Choriambic tri- 
 meter, catalectic (or a Glyconic deprived of its last syllable), 
 consisting generally of a spondee in the first foot, a chori- 
 ambus, and a catalectic syllable. 
 
 OF THE IAMBIC. 
 
 The two most common kinds of Iambic verse, (so named 
 from the foot Iambus,) are the Dimeter and Trimeter. The 
 Dimeter Iambic consists of four feet, the Trimeter, of six. 
 They were so named, because, in scanning them, the Greeks 
 joined two feet together, making what they called measures ; 
 of which the former contained two, and the latter, three. 
 But the Latins, from the number of the feet, called the one 
 Quaternarius, and the other, Senarius. 
 
 2H 
 
4G6 
 
 The pure iambic admits no other foot than the iambus ; 
 thus, 
 
 Measures. I. II. III. 
 
 Places. 1 
 
 u 
 
 Dimet. Indr 
 Trimet. Suis 
 
 3 
 
 sit ce stuo I sius. 
 et 7 psa Rd\ma tn, 
 
 ribus nut 
 
 -.Hor. 
 
 Dimet. 
 Trimet. 
 
 Forti 
 PCirs su 
 
 scque 
 mta 
 
 mur pc 
 tls vel 
 
 ctore 
 lu sa 
 
 nari 
 
 But in order to render composition less difficult, and, by 
 producing delay, to give the verses more gravity and digni- 
 ty, spondees were admitted into the odd places, that is, into 
 the first, third, and fifth ; thus 
 
 1 23456 
 
 Hor. 
 fitit Seneca. 
 
 The former of these makes two third epitrits ; and the 
 latter, three. 
 
 And lastly, instead of an iambus and spondee, certain feet 
 equal to them in quantity were admitted ; that is, in the odd 
 places, an anapest, a dactyl, and sometimes a tribrac ; and 
 also in the even places, (except the last, which always re- 
 quires an iambus,) a tribrac ; thus 
 
 12 3 456 
 
 a ( CamtK la trnc 
 
 tawt 
 
 dapes. 
 
 
 
 Si J 
 
 re prope 
 
 rantes 
 
 domum. 
 
 
 
 \ Quo quo 
 
 scele 
 
 stl nTi 
 
 tis aut 
 
 cur dejc 
 
 ttrls. 
 
 S I Prius 
 
 que cce 
 
 lum si 
 
 det "tii 
 
 ferms 
 
 marl. 
 
 ^ i Alitibus at 
 
 que cant 
 
 bus Komi 
 
 cid 9 He 
 
 ctorem. 
 
 1 Pavidumgue lepo 
 
 r'aut ad 
 
 venam 
 
 laquco 
 
 grilem Hor. 
 
 of which by 
 and by. 
 
 Note 2. The Latin comic poets admit also into the even 
 places those feet which others employ only in the odd places ; 
 except the last, which is always an iambus. The fables of 
 Phaedrus are constructed with the same liberty, and are 
 generally written in the following manner ; 
 
 Amlt\fit meri\td propri\um, qui att\enum dplpetit. 
 
 Facit | paren\tes boni tcts non \ neces-situs. 
 
 Horace has ten Epodes consisting of the trimeter and di- 
 meter iambic alternately ; thus 
 
 Beatus ille qui procul negotiis, 
 Ut prisca gens mortalium, &c. 
 But in hymns, we find the strophe consisting of dimeters only. 
 
 The caesura was generally after the two first feet of tri- 
 
467 
 
 meters ; and there was probably a short pause at the end of 
 each measure. 
 
 The following are varieties of the Iambic. 
 
 1. The Iambic Monometer, or Binarius, consisting of 
 two Iambuses ; as 
 
 1 2 
 
 Cave I malum. 
 Tene \ bonum. 
 
 2. The Archilochian Trimeter, Cat^lectic, which in the 
 first place has an iambus or spondee, in the second an iam- 
 bus, in t^e third a spondee, in the fourth and fifth an iam- 
 bus, with a common syllable ; thus 
 
 1234 5 
 
 Trcihunt 
 Nee prci 
 
 que sic'cds ma 
 ta calnis al 
 
 bicant \ prui 
 
 carl 
 
 nas 
 nis. 
 
 Hor. 
 
 3. The Archilochian Trimeter, Catalectic, differing from 
 the last in this, that it admits a spondee or iambus in the third 
 place ; as 
 
 12345 
 
 Mea 
 
 rem 
 
 det In domo 
 
 lacu 
 red 
 
 nar. 
 
 sas Hor. 
 
 Premunt \ colu mnas id timd 
 
 4. The Galliambic Trimeter, (so named from the Galli or 
 priests of Cybele,) Acatalectic, consisting of six feet, of which 
 the first is an anapest, the second and third an iambus, the 
 fourth and fifth a dactyl, and the sixth an anapest ; as 
 1 2 3 _ 4 5 6 
 
 Stiper a/l/a ve ctus A\tys cele ri rate I maria. 
 Phrygium nemus cita\to cupi depede tetigit, 
 
 Adiit\que opa ca sil\vis redi rnita lo\ca Dece Catull. 
 
 Note. This verse has always an iambus in the third place, 
 in the fifth always a dactyl, and in the sixth always an ana- 
 pest. But in the second it admits an anapest, and with 
 greater propriety, a tribrac, and in the fourth the dactyl 
 may be changed to a spondee. It sometimes admits, though 
 rarely, other feet ; as in the first place, a spondee, a cretic, 
 and a proceleusmatic ; in the second, a spondee, and its equi- 
 valent, a dactyl ; in the fourth, an iambus. The more usual 
 feet of this uncommon metre are here stated. For others, 
 see the Atys of Catullus. The line seems to consist of two 
 Anacreontics, the final syllable of the last being cut off, and 
 the caesura uniformly taking place at the end of the first di- 
 meter. It may, thus, be divided, as follows, the third foot 
 of both members being an iambus, and the penultimate foot 
 generally a tribrac ; 
 
 2H2 
 
46S 
 
 Super al\tit vtc tus ~a \tys \ \ c&M fate mX rla. 
 
 Jam jam dotit quod e\gi \\jdmjam\que pee mtet CatuH. 
 
 5. The Saturnian Trimeter, Hypercatalectic, which has 
 a spondee in the fourth place, and in the other five, iambuses, 
 with a syllable rent aining at the end ; as 
 
 1 2 3 4 _ 5 6 
 
 Dabunt \ malum \ Mttel\U \ Na\vw \ Poi ! \t<z Ter. Maun 
 
 6. The Hipponactic Tetrameter, Catalectic, consisting ot 
 seven iambuses, and a long syllable, and admitting some- 
 times a spondee into the odd places ; as 
 
 1 234 5 67 
 
 Etln 
 Depren 
 
 soleriter <z stues I velut 
 
 sana 
 
 vis in 
 
 mart vesd 
 
 mmii 
 nien 
 
 ta ma\gno 9 
 
 te vemto Catull. 
 
 7. The Tetrameter or Octonarius, Acatalectic, which is 
 also named Quadratus, consisting of eight feet, of which the 
 last is always an iambus ; in the other even places are iam- 
 buses or tribracs ; in the odd places iambuses or spondees, or 
 their respective equivalents, tribracs, anapests, or dactyls; as 
 1234 5678 
 
 Adest 
 Sane 
 
 celer 
 
 pol il Id te 
 
 phase 
 
 las ~d 
 miclen 
 
 le, quern 
 
 vide tis, hos\pites-Tei\Maur. 
 
 Pecu ] niam in 
 
 loco 
 
 negligV 
 
 Egojam\ transa 
 Propter\suam im 
 
 eta re 
 poten 
 
 convor 
 tiam 
 
 ta est mull er et temera\ ria Ter. 
 
 Comic writers, who generally use this kind of verse, some- 
 times admit into the even places such feet as are generally 
 used in the odd places, and vice versa / the last place ex- 
 cepted, in which there is always an iambus ; thus 
 12345 6 7 8 
 
 re malximum in\terdumest\lucrum-Ter. 
 tarn me\ domum cum obsovnio Ter. 
 se sem\per crt\dunt nelgligi Ter. 
 Similar changes take place in the trimeters ; as 
 1234 56 
 
 Si id est | ptcca\tum,pcc\cutum im\prudcn\tia est Ter. 
 Also in the catalectic tetrameters ; as 
 
 1 234567 
 
 Hemistoc \ verboammusmi\rediit,\et cu\ra tx cor'.de exces \sit-Ter. 
 The Tetrameter, Catalectic^ appears to be the Octonarius 
 deprived of its final syllable. The pure Iambic was seldom 
 used ; and, in both, the same variations were admissible as 
 in the Trimeter, the comic writers here also taking similar 
 liberties; thus 
 
 1 _ 2 3 456 78 
 
 Atque tst Jicec ca\dem qua mihi dix // tu te d~i l ,cas muli^rl Ter. 
 
 Quum de 
 
 Nostra 
 
 Non possum sati' 
 
 iilier 
 
 pit cul pa fact mus ut 
 quos 
 
 aves 
 
 osten d% os\citan \tes. . . Catul 
 maids expedi at eslse . . . Ter. 
 ludos prcebue rfs m'tus . . .Ter. 
 
469 
 
 8. See the Archilochian Iambic Dimeter, Hypercatalectic, 
 in the Carmen H&ratianum* 
 
 OF THE SCAZON OR CHOLIAMBUS. 
 
 9. The Scazon or Choliambus (claudicant, or lame iam- 
 bic, so named, because in it the cadence is inverted, or maim- 
 ed, as it were, by the change of feet in the last two places,) 
 consists of six feet ; of which the fifth foot is always an iam- 
 bus, and the sixth a spondee, the others being the same as 
 in the iambic trimeter ; thus 
 
 12 S 456 
 
 Miser 
 
 Catul 
 
 le 
 
 desinds 
 
 me 
 
 ptire. 
 
 Fulse 
 
 re quon 
 
 dam 
 
 cdndidi 
 
 tibi 
 
 soles Cat. 
 
 Cur In 
 
 thea 
 
 truniy 
 
 Cdto seve 
 
 re ve 
 
 nlstl ? 
 
 An ide 
 
 o tan 
 
 turn 
 
 ve nerds 
 
 iit ex 
 
 ires ? Mart. 
 
 This verse is an Iambic Trimeter, Acatalectic, with a 
 spondee instead of an iambus for the sixth foot. 
 
 OF THE ANACREONTIC. 
 
 1 0. The Anacreontic verse, so named from Anacreon the 
 famous lyric poet, is nothing else but the iambic dimeter, 
 catalectic. The first foot is an iambus, often also a spon- 
 dee, or anapest, and sometimes a tribrac, or a cretic; the 
 second and third are iambuses, with an additional syllable 
 at the end ; thus 
 
 1 2 3 
 
 Ades I pater 
 Quern ne\mo vl 
 Habet omms hoc 
 Stimulus agit 
 
 supre me, 
 dit un quam Prudent. 
 
 volu ptas 9 
 furen tes Boet. 
 
 $sgov<riv u 
 
 potiov Segeiov Anacreon. 
 
 A spondee was scarcely admissible in the third place, at 
 least in Latin. 
 
 OF THE TROCHAIC. 
 
 The Trochaic verse, so named from the foot, admits in 
 the odd places a trochee, or a tribrac ; but in the last place 
 a trochee only : in the even places, besides the trochee and 
 tribrac, it admits also a spondee, a dactyl, an anapest, and, 
 but seldom, a proceleusmatic. It rejects the iambus, as the 
 iambic does the trochee. The tribrac very rarely occurs in 
 the sixth place, and never in the seventh, except in a few 
 instances in comedy. The dactyl rarely appears in the fourth. 
 The pure Trochaic seldom occurs. 
 
 The most common Trochaic verse is the Tetrameter or 
 
470 
 
 Octonarius, Catalectic ; consisting of seven feet, with a half 
 foot, or sellable remaining ; thus 
 12 345678 
 
 Jussus 
 Te so 
 Consu 
 Solus 
 
 est in 
 cer sub 
 les fi 
 aut rex 
 Note 1. 
 
 eririis 
 ire 
 unt quot 
 aut po 
 Althoue 
 
 ire 
 celsa 
 dnms 
 eta 
 <\\ Ian 
 
 \purus 
 posclt 
 et no 
 lion quot 
 abics anc 
 
 ire 
 astra 
 vl pro 
 dnms 
 Troc 
 
 jussus 
 Jupi 
 consu 
 ndsci 
 hai'cs 
 
 est Catull. 
 ^er-Mart. Capell. 
 les: 
 wr-Flor. vet. Poet, 
 seem opposite 
 
 in their nature, yet there is a great affinity between them. 
 For, if a syllable be prefixed to the beginning of a pure tro- 
 chaic verse, it becomes a pure iambic ; and, on the contrary, 
 if the syllable be taken away from the beginning of the 
 iambic, it makes the verse trochaic. Indeed, some have 
 referred such verses to iambics, calling them acephalous iam- 
 bics. 
 
 Note 2. In the Trochaic Tetrameter, the caesura ought to 
 be altogether avoided after the fourth foot, which divides the 
 verse into two hemistichs ; as in the ecclesiastical hymn, on 
 the passion of our Lord ; 
 
 Pange, | lingua, \ glori\si \\ laure\am cer\tdmK nis, 
 Et super crucis trophao \\ die triumphum nobilem : 
 Qualiter, Redemptor orbis \\ immolatus vicerit. 
 
 It is thus written in the Breviary, in six lines. The first 
 hemistich is a trochaic dimeter ; and the second a trochaic 
 dimeter, catalectic. 
 
 Note 3. It is evident that the dactyl in iambics, and the 
 anapest in trochai'cs, must have a considerable influence in 
 checking the poetic rhythm of the line, and in imparting to 
 it a prose cadence, not unbecoming in comedy and other 
 loose compositions, the sermoni propiora. The Trochaic 
 Tetrameter Catalectic appears to be the same as the Iambic 
 Octonarius Acatalectic without the first syllable, the same 
 variations being admitted in the even places of the trochaic, 
 as in the odd of the iambic. 
 
 Note 4. The comic writers use, in trochaic verse, the 
 same liberties in regard to the choice of feet, as in iambics ; 
 putting promiscuously in the odd places such feet as others 
 admit only in the even places, the seventh foot alone excepted. 
 
 The following are the varieties in the construction of Tro- 
 chai'cs : 
 
 1. The Pancratic Trochaic Monometer, Hypercatalectic, 
 consisting of two trochees, and one syllable ; as, 
 
 1 2 
 
 Nulla \jamji\de$ Scalig. 
 
471 
 
 2. The Ithyphallic Dimeter, Brachycatalectic, consisting 
 of three trochees ; as 
 
 1 2 3 
 
 Hue aides Ly\cce Scalig. 
 
 3. The Euripidean Dimeter, Catalectic, consisting of 
 three trochees, (in the second place sometimes a spondee or 
 dactyl, and, I believe, an anapest,) with an additional syl- 
 lable ; as, 
 
 1 2 3 
 
 Non e\bur ne 
 
 que aurelum Hor. 
 
 Vota \supplex ojfe\ram Buchan. 
 Ducat\lntrepi dam ra\tem Senec. 
 4. The Alcmanic Dimeter, Acatalectic, consisting of four 
 trochees ; and admitting in the second place a spondee, or, 
 its equivalents in quantity, a dactyl and anapest ; as 
 12 34 
 
 Inco 
 Soils 
 Eja 
 Consci 
 
 la ter 
 ulti 
 Domino 
 os scele 
 
 rarum, ab 
 mum ad cu 
 jubi 
 ris ne 
 
 ortu 
 bile Buchan. Ps. 66. 
 late Buch. 
 fandi Buch. 
 
 5. The Anacreontic Dimeter, Acatalectic, having in the 
 first place a Pyrrhic, in the other three, trochees ; as, 
 
 1234 
 
 Age cuncta\ nupti\ali 
 RMimita vere tellus 
 Celt bra to\ros he\riles Claudian. 
 
 Here it may be remarked, that the initial pyrrhic well 
 accords with what may be supposed to be the rhythm of the 
 line, the emphasis appearing to lie on the odd syllables. A 
 similar remark may, perhaps, be applicable in many other 
 cases. 
 
 6. The Hipponactic Tetrameter, Acatalectic, called also 
 Quadratus, consisting of eight trochees, and admitting in the 
 even places also a spondee, and its equivalents, an anapest, 
 a dactyl, and sometimes a proceleusmatic ; and, in the odd 
 places, a tribrac ; as 
 
 123 45 678 
 
 Appe 
 Vini 
 
 tente j vere 
 torque falce 
 
 prlmo 
 tonsos 
 
 cum te 
 viti 
 
 ner vi 
 bus ma 
 
 rcscit 
 ritat 
 
 annus, 
 nlmosScal. 
 
 The comic writers, using the same license as in the cata- 
 lectic tetrameters, introduce almost all the above-mentioned 
 feet in all the places ; as 
 
 12345 6 78 
 
 ftanttiekmc abllsse : et\vltam\tuam tu-\tandam altlls den 
 AKos \tuam ran, credi \dlstl magi' quum I tele, a?u\ madvori 
 Nam ul^ite\rant m\a till \ certe\<]uae niinc \ til* (tt wM/,ca?ipira-Ter. 
 
 Note* In the first and second verse tuam is a 
 
472 
 
 7. 8. See the Sapphic, which is a Trochaic pentameter, 
 acatalectic ; and the Phaleucian, also a Trochaic pentame- 
 ter, acatalectic. 
 
 OF THE ANAPESTIC. 
 
 Anapestic verse is so named, because, in any place of it, 
 an anapest may be used. Instead of an anapest, however, 
 it admits a spondee, or dactyl, feet of equivalent quantity. 
 And this so often occurs, that there is frequently not one 
 anapest in a line termed Anapestic. 
 
 There are various kinds of it. The pure Anapestic con- 
 sists of four feet, all anapests ; thus 
 
 PharttrfE\que graves \ date sce\vaftro Seneca. 
 
 But this kind is seldom found ; the sweetest and most 
 common being that denominated the tetrameter acatalectic, 
 which is named Aristophanian, or Pindaric, consisting of 
 four feet, generally dactyls, or spondees, with a mixture of 
 anapests, in such a manner, however, that a dactyl is very 
 seldom used in the second, or fourth place, at least by the 
 Latin poets ; thus 
 
 1 234- 
 
 Quanti 
 
 Minus in 
 
 Levins 
 
 casus 
 
 parvis 
 
 queferit 
 
 huma nd rotant : 
 
 fortu 
 levio 
 
 nafurity 
 
 rd Deus Seneca. 
 
 It would appear, that the anapestic consisted primarily 
 of two anapests, which constituted what may be termed the 
 anapestic base; from which may be formed lines of any 
 length, due attention being paid to the synapheia. No La- 
 tin poet, however, ever wrote anapestics necessarily con- 
 sisting of four anapests, (with the exception of a few in 
 Seneca and Ausonius) ; but for the convenience of printing, 
 they are thus exhibited in editions, although they may be 
 read as dimeters, tetrameters, or as continued paragraphs, 
 the dactyl seldom appearing in any even place, counting 
 from the commencement of a series or paragraph. 
 
 Note I. Those anapestics which are without caesura, are 
 the most harmonious ; thus 
 
 Plures 
 
 Cupit hie 
 
 Clarus 
 
 Urit 
 
 fulgor 
 
 claras 
 miserum 
 
 aul(K. 
 
 ipsi 
 
 urbes. 
 
 pectus Seneca. 
 
 concitat 
 proximus 
 ire per 
 gloria 
 
 Note 2. And next to these in harmony, are the lines in 
 which each dipodia terminates a word ; as 
 Pectora longis I hebetata malts 
 Jam sollicitas \ ponite curas Seneca. 
 Note 3. Tragic writers were wont to subjoin an Adonic 
 after several anapestics. 
 
473 
 
 There are likewise the following varieties in Anapestics. 
 1. The Simoniclian Dimeter, Acatalectic, consisting of 
 an anapest, a dactyl, or a spondee, in the first place ; and in 
 the last, an anapest, or spondee ; as 
 1 2 
 
 Deflate virum, 
 
 Quo non 
 
 Potult 
 
 Discere 
 
 Una 
 
 Pdrte au dita, 
 
 Saepe et 
 
 alias 
 cifius 
 causas, 
 tantiim 
 
 neutra Seneca. 
 
 2. The Partheniac Tetrameter, Catalectic, seems a Verse 
 of definite length, admitting, in the first and second place, 
 either an anapest, or a spondee ; in the third, only an ana- 
 pest ; and lastly a long syllable ; as 
 1234 
 
 modo no stra redl 
 
 Utinam 
 
 In mores tempora pr't 
 
 rent 
 
 scos Boe't. 
 
 Note, This verse, by changing the manner of scanning 
 it, is the same as the Alcmanian, Dactylic Tetrameter, Ca- 
 talectic; (see those verses subjoined to the Hexameter,) thus 
 12 34 
 
 Uti 
 7n 
 
 nam modo 
 mores 
 
 nostra re dlrent 
 
 tempord 
 
 priscos. 
 
 3. The Archebulian Pentameter, Acatalectic, consisting 
 of four anapests, and a Bacchic ; thus 
 
 123 4 5_ 
 
 Tibi na\scitur o\mne pecus \ tibi cre\scit hoedus Ter. Mau. 
 
 It is observed, that what are here termed dimeter and te- 
 trameter anapestics (denominated also monometers and di- 
 meters, two feet being then reckoned equivalent to a mea- 
 sure) are generally so constructed, that they may be read in 
 lines of two, four, or more feet, without the division of a 
 word through the difference of arrangement. The tragic 
 anapestics do not seem to have been confined to a definite 
 length, but to have been extended, by Synapheia, to what- 
 ever length suited the poet's convenience ; suddenly breaking 
 off at the close of a period, or pause in the sense, and leav- 
 ing at the end a single foot or half-foot ; afterwards begin- 
 ning a new series or paragraph, running on and terminat- 
 ing, as before ; but in such a manner that, in the course of 
 each series or paragraph, the final syllable of every ana- 
 pest, if riot naturally long, is, under the influence of syn- 
 
4-74< 
 
 apheia, rendered long by the concourse of consonants. 
 For, (as Dr. Clarke observes, II. A. 51,) the anapest, con- 
 sisting of two short syllables followed by a long one, receives 
 a fuller pronunciation upon the final syllable than any other 
 foot ; and the pause at the termination of the verse is not 
 sufficient for that purpose, unless the syllable be long, or 
 stand at the conclusion of a sentence. In regard to the sub- 
 ject of this note, Hermann writes ; Dimetris tragici Latim 
 Gr&corum more usi stint, ut systematibus comprehensos paro- 
 cmiaco clauderent, de qua re dixit Bentleius in epistola ad 
 Jo. Millium, p. 474. Isque etiam hos poctas idtimam com- 
 munem adspernatos contendit. Qiiod etsi perditis illis tra- 
 gcediis certo affirmari non potest, veri tamen est simillimum^ 
 quandoquidem in satis magno jragmentorum numero, num- 
 quam ista anapczstorum lex violata est. 
 
 Of the Carmen Horatianum. 
 
 What is called the Carmen Horatianum^ is a compound, 
 in which Horace very much delighted ; consisting of four 
 verses, of which the first two are Dactylic Alcaics, the third 
 an Archilochian Iambic, and the fourth a Dactylic Alcaic 
 different from the preceding ; as, 
 
 Virtus repulscE nescia sordid^ 
 Intaminatis Julget honoribus . 
 Nee sumit, aut ponit secures 
 Arbitrio popidaris aurce. 
 Of each of which in their order. 
 
 1. The first and second verse of the Carmen Horatianum 
 is the Greater Dactylic Alcaic Tetrameter, Hypercatalec- 
 tic ; consisting of an Iambic Penthemimer, i. e. a spondee, or 
 iambus, (but oftener a spondee,) an iambus, and a caesura 
 or long syllable ; and after that, two dactyls ; thus 
 1234 
 
 Virtus 
 Jnta 
 
 repul see I nescia 
 mind tis \ fulgvt lib 
 
 sordidcc, 
 noribus. 
 
 It deserves remark, that, in some of Horace's Greater 
 Alcaics, the caesura is sometimes found in the beginning of 
 a word, sometimes in the middle, and sometimes it is a mo- 
 nosyllable T ; thus 
 
 1 Perhaps, strictly speaking, the propriety of this remark may 
 be questioned. A monosyllable, it has already been mentioned, 
 may produce the same effect as a caesural syllable ; and, there- 
 fore, though there is no cutting offi we speak, with little impro- 
 priety, of the monosyllabic caesura or pause. In regard, how- 
 ever, to the second example, it may be observed, that cip, which 
 is called the middle syllable, is, in a metrical point of view, the 
 
4-75 
 12 3 4 
 
 Spectan\dus ~in 
 
 Hinc omne pnn 
 
 Hoc caverfit 
 
 cer \tamme 
 
 cipdum hue refer 
 mensprovida 
 
 Martio O. 4. 14. 
 exitum O. 3. 6. 
 Result O. 3. 5. 
 
 2. The third verse is the Archilochian Iambic Dimeter, 
 Hypercatalectic ; which has in the first place a spondee, 
 and sometimes an iambus: in the third place, a spondee; and 
 in the second and fourth, an iambus only, with a remaining 
 syllable; thus 1234 
 
 
 
 Nee sfi\iritt aut 
 
 poriit 
 
 secu 
 
 res. 
 
 
 
 
 Rcde\git ad 
 
 veros 
 
 timo 
 
 res. 
 
 
 In 
 
 one line, 
 
 an iambus appears in the third place ; 
 
 Disjecta 
 
 last) since it precedes an elision ; or rather, the i which precedes 
 the final urn, must be pronounced likej, and considered a con- 
 sonant, in the measure of the verse. And thus also in Vos lene 
 consilium et datis et dato iii, 4, 41. The cer of the first exam- 
 ple is a long syllable, but I do not see how it can be properly 
 termed a caesura. Nor does it appear that the place of the cae- 
 sura is accurately observed in another line, Mentemque lympha- 
 tam Mareotico i. 37, 14. In three verses, the caesura may seem 
 to be preserved by the separation of a preposition in a compound 
 word; 
 
 Hostile aratrum exercitus insolens i. 16, 21. 
 Antehac nefas depromere Caecubum i. 37, 5. 
 Utrumque nostrum incredibili modo ii. 17, 21. 
 There are frequent instances of elision after the caesura ; such as 
 Mentcm sacerdotww incola Pythius, i. 16, 6. Of the enclitic 
 que elided, there is one instance, i. 35, 10 There are three or 
 four elisions, where the word ends with a short vowel ; as Audi- 
 re et videor pios, iii. 4, 6. Of elisions in words like invisz, sub 
 dio, incesto, redonabo, just as many. Instances of the following 
 kind are not very frequent. 
 
 Nil interest, an |) pauper, et infima ii. 3, 22. 
 In rebus ; illwwi ex || mcenibus hosticis iii. 2, 6. 
 One instance occurs of a vowel not elided ; 
 
 Jam Daedaled || ocior Icaro ii. 20, 13. 
 in which Bentley conjectures tutior. 
 
 Of an elision before et at the end of thejirst verse, which et, of 
 course, in sense belongs to the second, the following are instances ; 
 queerer^, et ; violaria, et ; Cyprww, et ; copiawz, et ; negotio, et ; 
 utih', et. In two instances, (iii. 1, 38 ; 29, 46,) negue, at the con- 
 clusion of the second verse, commences a new sentence with the 
 third. With respect to the beginning of these two lines, it is re- 
 marked, that the iambus is not common ; that it occurs seldom 
 in the first and second book, and very rarely in the third and 
 fourth. There is, perhaps, but one instance of a short syllable in 
 the caesura: Si non periret immiserabilis iii. 5, 17. Some 
 critics would, however, lengthen the syllabic by reading perirent. 
 
4-76 
 
 non levi ruina Od. 2, 19, 15. But this reading has been 
 corrected by Bentley from MSS. Disjecta non lent ruina. 
 Horace, therefore^ uniformly rejects an iambus in the third 
 place ; but Alcseus, in the Greek stanza, regularly uses it. 
 The third line of the Alcaic strophe seems to differ from 
 the two first, in point of quantity, chiefly in having two tro- 
 chees at the end, instead of two dactyls ; thus 
 
 Silvte 
 Nee su 
 
 labolruji 
 iitaut] po 
 
 luque. 
 mitaut] pomt secures. 
 
 3. The fourth verse is the Less Dactylic Alcaic Tetra- 
 meter, Acatalectic ; having, in the first and second place, a 
 dactyl, and in the third and fourth, a trochee ; thus 
 1 234 
 
 Arbitrt 
 
 Purpure o vari 
 
 o popit laris 
 
 us co lore. 
 
 aurce. 
 
 OF THE VERBAL STRUCTURE. 
 
 I. In the composition of this stanza, in Latin *, the third 
 verse does not begin with a word of four syllables, nor with 
 words naturally going together to that amount 8 . 
 
 Horace, i. 26, 11, has Hunc Lesbio || sacrare plectro, 
 and, with an elision, ii. 3, 27, Sors exitura || et nos in eeter- 
 num &c., which forms never occur again. Of the iambus 
 at the beginning, only ten instances occur in all the books, 
 and only two in the third and fourth ; of which none occur, 
 where the verse begins with a dissyllable. 
 
 Referre sermones deorum, et iii, 3, 71. 
 In the line, Puer quis | ex aula | capillis i, 29, 7, the 
 first division may be considered, under the influence of the 
 rhythm, a 0ftas-trisyllable. The first division, in other re- 
 spects, and the second, are formed by Horace in different 
 ways, without any particular attention to the number of syl- 
 lables in the words which he uses. 
 
 II. The verse should not end with ( 1 ) a trisyllable followed 
 
 1 For the first canon we are indebted to Mr. Tate, of Rich- 
 mond, Yorkshire ; and for the second, to the late Dr. C. Burney. 
 See Class. Journ. vol. xi, 351, and Month. Rev. Jan. 1798. 
 
 2 I have observed only three words of four syllables, but each 
 under elision ;jiinalia, et, iii, 26., 7 ; rubiginem, aut, iii, 23, 7, and 
 decurrere, et, iii, 29, 59. And three of five syllables, each be- 
 ginning with a preposition: a sort of words, indeed, from their 
 size, likely to be of rare occurrence; deprcelianteSy i, 9, 11 ; ena- 
 vigandd, ii, 14, 11 ; and denominates, iii, 17, 3, the three first syl- 
 lables of which are, however, as conformable to the rhythm ap- 
 parently intended, as trisyllables emphatic on their middle syl- 
 lable. 
 
477 
 
 by an enclitic or other monosyllable; nor (2) with a word 
 of four syllables; and (3) as seldom as possible with two 
 dissyllables *. 
 
 There are in Horace 317 verses written in the metre, to 
 which these two canons refer. 
 
 1 I do not find that any of our metrical critics, who enjoin that words of 
 certain sizes should occupy particular parts of a verse, assign any satisfactory 
 reason for their canons on this subject. As far as mere quantity is concerned, 
 the length of the word seems immaterial. Some of them, however, go so far 
 as to say, that it is for the sake of the rhythm, that certain sorts of words are 
 requisite in certain parts of the verse ; but they do not declare explicitly, in 
 which of the essentials of a note of speech, solely or chiefly, they believe the 
 rhythm to consist. We have little doubt, a,s already observed under Accent, 
 that the essence of antient rhythm resides chiefly in that property of speech, 
 which almost entirely regulates modern versification, Syllabic force or em- 
 phasis ; that the alternate or periodical return of the emphatic and the remiss 
 or weak syllables, in which the rhythm chiefly consisted, was sometimes visi- 
 bly indicated, by the antients, by the action of thesis and arsis ; and that it was 
 chiefly to contribute to the more easy and harmonious flow or pulsation of 
 such syllables, that, in certain parts of a verse, words of a certain size were 
 deemed preferable to others of a different size. In the first two lines of the 
 Latin Alcaic stanza, if read in metrical cadences, the 2nd, 4th, 6th and 9th 
 syllables seem to be emphatic. In the fourth line, the 1st, 4tbi> 7th, and 9th 
 seem to be the emphatic syllables. In the third line, to which alone the ca- 
 nons apply, the emphatic syllables, if we read it according to the feet, appear 
 to be the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th, the verse beginning, to use the terms of mo- 
 dern music, in the middle of a bar, with either a long weak, or a short weak 
 syllable, but generally with the former, thus, in feet, Lenes\que sub \ noctem \ 
 susur\ri. At the same time, it can scarcely escape notice, that, in the choice 
 of words, [we are now referring to ivords and syllabic emphasis, not to feet and 
 quantity] Horace, for the most part, prefers trisyllables, in our usual prosaic 
 pronunciation, emphatic on their middle syllable, or a part of a word, or a 
 combination of words or syllables, naturally receiving, or readily admitting 
 such an emphasis ; as Audita \ musarum \ sacerdos. \ Lenesque \ sub noctem \ 
 susurri ; or arranged in what has been termed triple time ; thus Lenes\que 
 sub noc\tem siisur\ri. Audi\ta mu\sarum sacer\dos, there being, as is frequently 
 the case in this measure in English, a deficient syllable at the beginning, and 
 a supernumerary one at the end. And this preference seems to have been 
 observed particularly at the close of the line. The chief difference between 
 the poetic and the prose rhythm of the line, lies in the third foot, where the 
 spondee, in the former, emphatic on its last syllable, sometimes consists of a 
 word, or a part of a word, in our common prosaic cadence, emphatic on the 
 penultimate, as noctem, mu-\sdru.m. In fact, it appears to me, that the two 
 canons might be correctly enough generalised thus: The three first syllables 
 of the verse, and the three last, should be such as naturally receive, or readily 
 admit, the syllabic emphasis on the middle syllable. And I see no good reason, 
 why the same principle should not be applied, though certainly much less ri- 
 gidly, to the three middle syllables of the verse, even notwithstanding the little 
 diversity that seems sometimes to exist between the prosaic, and what is sup- 
 posed to be the poetic, rhythm, in the third foot. The first division consists 
 most frequently, and, we think, most harmoniously, of a trisyllable ; or of a 
 dissyllable preceded by a monosyllable ; or of a dissyllable followed by a syl- 
 lable or monosyllable ; and less frequently of two first syllables preceded by a 
 monosyllable, or of three first syllables. The second division, in like manner, 
 consists most commonly of a trisyllable. It is formed also by the three first 
 or three last syllables of a word ; or oftener, by a dissyllable, or two first syl- 
 lables, preceded by a monosyllable ; or by a dissyllable, or two last syllables, 
 followed by a monosyllable, seldomer a syllable; and, like the first division, 
 in a few other ways perhaps, less frequent, as well as, in our mode of pro- 
 
478 
 
 (1) No instance occurs of a final monosyllable following 
 a hyperdissyllable, except in cases of elision. In the soli- 
 tary instance in which a word of one syllable closes the line, 
 
 nouncing, less agreeable to the ear of a modern. An initial penthemimer is 
 succeeded by a monosyllable; thus Te belluosus qui remotis- iv. 14, 47. The 
 only exceptions are the dissyllables and quadrisyllables. A final penthemimer 
 is preceded by a monosyllable ; thus Consulque non unius anni iv. 9, 39. 
 There is but one exception, Hunc Lesbio &c. Instead of a monosyllable, a 
 dissyllable under elision may precede, as in In majus ; idem odere vires iii. 
 4, 67, but is inadmissible after, the penthemimer. A final penthemimer, in a 
 single word, would be repugnant to the second canon. Among the most un- 
 harmonious lines, appear to be those, altogether, terminating with two dissyl- 
 lables. But, as* occasional variations from what may seem to be the more 
 usual, strict rhythm, such deviations ought not to be regarded as blemishes. 
 Whatever the moderns may think of these and a few other lines, (and it must 
 be confessed that they have a very imperfect knowledge of the subject,) Horace 
 was not likely, without a sufficient reason, to deviate from what appears to have 
 been his more usual practice. A strict and unfailing regularity in tone, pause, 
 or emphasis, has never been regarded as a poetical beauty. 
 
 But be these things as they may, whether the line is read with metrical, or 
 with prosaic cadence, it is evident, from a very cursory inspection of the third 
 division, that, either way, the verse closes with two very weak or unemphatic 
 syllables having an emphatic one between them. 1. To produce such a close, 
 no word can be better adapted, than a trisyllable emphatic on its middle syl- 
 lable, a word which invariably has its extremes very weak, and equally so ; 
 such as ambres, Sabina, parentes, procella:, nocentem, ciqrressos, &c. with which 
 kind of words most of the lines conclude. 2. The next conclusion, in point 
 of harmony, is, probably, that of a dissyllable followed by an enclitic, which, 
 in effect, thus becomes a trisyllable emphatic on the middle syllable, and 
 equally unemphatic on the extremes, as gduve, gcretque, gravesque. The prin- 
 cipal objection to any other monosyllable, after a dissyllable, than an enclitic, 
 as in the solitary instance, Depone sub lauru mea, nee, seems to be, that such 
 words have not the same influence, as enclitics, in inclining the syllabic em- 
 phasis to the syllable immediately preceding them, and do not so intimately 
 cohere with it. 3. Similar to this conclusion, but, perhaps, somewhat infe- 
 rior in coherence, is that ending, which consists of a dissyllable preceded by 
 an enclitic not following a monosyllable, or by a monosyllable, or the final weak 
 syllable detached from a hyperdissyllabic word, as, verecundumywe-6acc/mm, 
 fortunate dulci ; in-agros, sub-arcto, per-artes ; sacra.re-plectro, derivato clades. 
 Such weak syllables, before the dissyllable, are sufficiently attracted by the 
 contiguous emphasis of the dissyllable, so as to form with it one word ; but no 
 syllable, except an enclitic, can follow, because no other syllable has the power 
 of inclining the emphasis from the first syllable of the dissyllable to the se- 
 cond. 4. Next may be placed, the three quadrisyllable endings, occurring in 
 Horace ; and we are inclined to think, that, if the distinguished scholar, who 
 first propounded the valuable canon against quadrisyllables, had minutely ad- 
 verted to the particular conformation and rhythm of these three words, which 
 militate against it, he would have allowed such quadrisyllables to form a sort 
 of exception to his well-grounded canon. They are all of the same quan- 
 tity and syllabic emphasis ; and the second syllable of each consists of a vowel 
 followed by the letter r, a syllable, which when followed, as in these words, by 
 one that is long and emphatic, is among the weakest of unemphatic syllables. 
 This circumstance, common to the three exceptions, ought not, perhaps, to be 
 considered as merely accidental. The last three syllables of these words have 
 precisely the same effect, as trisyllabics long and emphatic on their middle 
 syllable ; and we are confident, that the modern poet, who should conclude 
 his verse with a quadrisyllable of precisely the same description, would not 
 mar its rhythm, or incur the censure of any liberal critic. It may be said, 
 
479 
 
 a dissyllable precedes : Depone sub lauru med ; nee ii. 7, 
 19. As to elisions, in i. 35, 11, there is barbaromm et ,- and 
 in the same ode, retusum in 39. In ii. 13, 23, piorum et. 
 In iii. 3, 71, and iii. 6, 3, deorum e> and iii. 29, 3, rosarum 
 
 that such a close occurs but thrice in Horace. To this, it may be replied, 
 that such words are not very numerous, and, even were they more so, that the 
 subject or sense might not require the introduction of a greyer number of 
 them. Still it must not be denied, that Horace seems uniformly to avoid 
 quadrisyllable endings, or what may amount to them, such as a trisyllable fol- 
 lowed by a monosyllable ; or two dissyllables : decidedly preferring a trisyl- 
 lable, or that combination which most readily becomes trisyllabic. 5. We 
 have no hesitation to say, that the most inharmonious of all the conclusions is, 
 that of two dissyllables, as sive flamma. Here we have, alternately, a strong, 
 a weak ; a strong, and a weak syllable. The second or weak syllable of the 
 first dissyllable is so firmly attracted by the preceding emphatic syllable of its 
 own word, that, without unnatural violence to speech, it can never be sepa- 
 rated from it, and be made to coalesce with the second dissyllable, so as to 
 form any thing like a trisyllabic verbal conclusion. Even with two such dis- 
 syllables as centum, viri, both emphatic on thei* first syllable, there seems no 
 mode of perfect union, without a change of the emphasis. These observa- 
 tions are offered, merely in the way of conjecture. Should they be found to 
 be generally correct, the application of the principle upon which they are 
 founded, may be extended to other kinds, and to all the parts, of verses ; for 
 we have little doubt, that the antients, in providing for the rhythm of their 
 poetical, and, it may be added, of their prose compositions, had a regard as 
 well to the quality or strength, as to the quantity or length, of the syllables 
 which they employed. Till the nature and influence of syllabic emphasis 
 shall have received due attention, neither, we apprehend, will ancient rhythm 
 be even tolerably understood, nor some apparent anomalies in ancient pro- 
 sody be satisfactorily elucidated. 
 
 Mr. Tate, the eminent scholar to whom, I believe, we are indebted for the 
 valuable Observations on the Stanza of Ovid, observes, that " if the ridiculous- 
 ness only of the following scheme of scansion for the Alcaic stanza can be for- 
 given ; its avowed purpose must be the better answered from the impossibility 
 of forgetting it, when it has once caught the ear." 
 Quis barbarorum, Tityre, Tityre, 
 Qm's barbarorum, Tityre, Tityre, 
 Quis barbarorum, barbarorum, 
 Tityre, Tityre, barbarorum. 
 
 We, of course, do not object to the quadrisyllable in the third line, though 
 one of that sort of words proscribed by the second canon. It is one of die 
 three quadrisyllables employed by Horace himself; and few words seem bet- 
 ter adapted for the supposed rhythm. They have a slight, or what may be 
 termed, the secondary, emphasis on their first syllable; the second syllable is 
 altogether weak ; the third has the predominating emphasis or percussio vocis ; 
 and the fourth is equally weak with the second. The primary emphasis be- 
 ing on the third, it readily attracts the preceding syllable, so as to render the 
 three last syllables perfectly equivalent to a trisyllable. The following imi- 
 tation, though, perhaps, not quite unobjectionable, particularly in the third 
 line, may be quoted as no bad exemplification, in English, of what might 
 eem to be the Horatian rhythm of the Alcaic stanza. 
 
 Justum et tenacem propositi virum, &c. 
 
 No civic ardor, madly tumultuous, 
 
 No frowning tyrant, fierce and implacable, 
 
 Can shake the just man's righteous purpose, 
 
 Firmly to hold an approving conscience. 
 
 Nor all the whirlwind's rage on the Adria, 
 Nor Jove's dread thunder, rending the firmament, 
 Though Heaven itself seems falling round him, 
 Fearless, he waits the impending ruin. Odell. 
 
480 
 
 eL In iii. 1, 39, triremi et. There is also in iii. 4, 59, Ju- 
 no et ; and in iii. 29, 7, arvum et. 
 
 (2) With respect to quadrisyllables, there are only three 
 instances, all in the first and second book. 
 
 Regumque matres barbarorum, et i. 35, 11. 
 Ab insolenti temper atam ii, 3, 3. 
 Nodo coerces viperino ii, 19, 19. 
 
 (3) There are only eight instances of the admission of 
 two dissyllables at the end of the verse ; and these occur, 
 too, in the first and second book ; thus Sive Jlammd 
 i. 16, 4. Necte fares 26, 7. Posse rivos 29, 11. Gran- 
 de munus ii. 1, 11. Dura navis 13, 27. Sive reges 
 14,11. Parce, Liber 19,7. Atque truncis 19,11. It 
 may be added, that only one line occurs/ Depone sub lauru 
 &c., which closes with a dissyllable followed by a monosyl- 
 lable not an enclitic. 
 
 No exception to these rules occurs in the third or fourth 
 book. 
 
 Those verses will be the best, and will approach nearest 
 to the rhythm that Horace appears to have intended, which 
 are considered by the writer in composing them, as con- 
 sisting of three feet or divisions, an Antibacchius, (sometimes 
 an Amphibrachys) a Molossus^ and a Bacchiits ! , each com- 
 prehended in a distinct word, thus : 
 
 1 2 3 
 
 Audlta | musarum | sacerdos. 
 
 In the third division, he admits the following varieties. 
 First, It is composed of a trisyllable ; as Deprome quadri- 
 mum Sabind i. 9, 7. Secondly. Of a dissyllable followed 
 by an enclitic ; as Silvae laborantes geluve i. 9, 3. Thirdly. 
 It is composed of a dissyllable preceded ( 1 ) by a monosyl- 
 lable, or (2) by an enclitic, or (3) by a final short syllable 
 at the end of a hyperdissyllabic word ; thus ( 1 ) Portare 
 ventis ; quis sub arcto i. 26, 3. (2) Morem, verecundum- 
 que Bacchum 27, 3. (3) Hunc Lesbio sacrari plectro 
 26, 11. In the first and third division of this class, also, 
 must be numbered the following examples of an elision at 
 the end of this verse ; 
 
 (1) Sors exitura, et nos in seternw??z 
 Exilium ii. 3, 27. 
 
 (3) Cum pace delabentis Etrusc^^?^ 
 
 In mare iii. 29, 35. 
 
 Of the forms not directly or indirectly forbidden in the fore- 
 going canons, the following scheme will show, in what fa- 
 
 1 Dr. Burney, following Terentian, had reversed the names, 
 terming the Bacchius an Antibacchius , and vice vcrsd ; they are 
 here employed in their more usual acceptation. 
 
481 
 
 vour each stood with Horace, and how certain forms pre- 
 vailed with his more cultivated ear, to the exclusion of others. 
 
 I. II. III. IV. 
 
 A. oj| 1| u 68 80 148 
 
 B. ||o ||o 28 27 55 
 
 C. o|| o || 4 41 45 
 
 D. || w o |j 3 4 7 
 
 G. o H ||w 26 15 41 
 
 H. || ~ o || ^ 2 4 6 
 
 I. (I- w o || 1 1 
 
 The form C seems to have been studiously sought or 
 preferred in the third and fourth books. 
 
 The form D occurs so rarely perhaps, only because the 
 words or sets of words going together are rare, which should 
 
 constitute the syllables o o 
 
 The same may be said of forms H and I. 
 Of the form G, it is obvious to remark, that occurring 
 much oftener in the 1st and 2nd books, than in the 3d and 
 4th, it must have been less sought by Horace, in the latter, 
 or rather less readily admitted. 
 
 With respect to the structure of the fourth line, no 
 form seems quite objectionable, but that in which every word 
 constitutes a distinct foot. 
 
 Oraque || jungere i| quaerit || ori, 
 has no parallel in Horace. 
 
 The following scheme will show the forms principally 
 adopted by Horace, and in what proportion. 
 
 I. II. III. IV. 
 
 A. o o I) o o ^ || 58 67 125 
 
 B. o w _|| u ^__||^ 25 29 54 
 
 D. ou H oo ||o 15 19 34 
 
 Aa, ^o H^o [I ^11 3 27 30 
 
 C. ^ ^ H ^ o o || 20 7 27 
 
 Ac. ^ o || w <-/ || o 5 6 11 
 
 E. o || ^ o w || o 6 4 10 
 
 More than two-thirds commence with o ^ |j Sec. Next in 
 number are those which commence with o o || o -> 1| &c. 
 
 There remain yet to be noticed, two kinds of verses, which 
 were not mentioned in the preceding enumeration, because 
 not considered as very common, viz. the Pyrrhic verse, and 
 the Ionic ; and lastly, Mixt verses. 
 
 OF THE PYRRHIC* 
 
 There is but one kind of Pyrrhic verse, consisting of two 
 or more Pyrrhics, such as that of Ausonius, Parental. 27 ; 
 
 2 I 
 
482 
 
 1234567 
 
 Eta 
 
 Cui 
 
 mita 
 brevi- 
 
 Vent 
 a me- 
 
 ria \propt 
 la mo dlfi- 
 
 nitr \8bit: 
 ca re-\cmo 9 
 
 Cinis 
 
 Utl 
 
 placi- 
 
 dula 
 
 supe 
 
 ra vilgeat, 
 
 Cele- 
 
 ripes 
 
 ade- 
 
 at lo 
 
 ca ta 
 
 cif firebi. 
 
 Of these strange verses, one at least, the last, does not 
 seem quite correct I am inclined to think, that, with any 
 view to harmony or effect, such lines must have been con- 
 structed with a regard to the distinction arising from sylla- 
 bic emphasis, rather than to that arising from mere quan- 
 tity. By pronouncing all the syllables in precisely the 
 same way, it is evident, that neither words, feet, nor ca- 
 dences, could possibly be produced. Without some know- 
 ledge of the rhythm intended, their metrical arrangement 
 must be in a great measure arbitrary. They may be con- 
 sidered as either pyrrhics, tribrachs, or proceleusmatics. 
 
 OF THE IONIC. 
 
 1. The pure Great Ionic Tetrameter, Acatalectic; con- 
 sisting of four great Ionics; thus 
 
 1 2 _3 4- 
 
 Fecit stitis | ccgrum rabi\em qui domu\it fenun& Scalig. 
 
 2. The impure Great Ionic, or Sotadean ; consisting of 
 three great Ionics, and a spondee ; thus 
 
 1 2 3 _4- 
 
 Tuto marts \ iras videt \ e littorc \ nauta. 
 Note 1. This kind of verse oftener admits in the third 
 place a dichoree instead of a great Ionic ; thus 
 
 1 234- 
 
 Has cum genii 
 Saturne, ti 
 
 na compedc 
 bi Zoilus 
 
 dcdicat catenas, 
 annulos pri\ores Mart. 
 
 Note 2. It is said to admit also, in all the places, except 
 the last, not only a dichoree, but the second paeon, and the 
 second epitrit. 
 
 Note 3. In almost all the places, a long quantity may be 
 resolved into two short quantities, both the long syllables, 
 however, not being resolved at the same time ; thus 
 1234 
 
 des qute pue'iros docint ma-\gistri Ter. M.delit.v.l. 
 
 Vocalis ut 
 Quumdicola 
 
 -\ . . 
 
 illam late-\re e.x utroqne co\arctct Ibid. v. 83. 
 vor, dicon''-ves, pluvifi, no vales Ibid. v. 95. 
 
 nullo Ibid. v. 179. 
 
 Diversa va\lent, alia do\cent, or dine 
 
 This verse, without the dichoree, and the resolution of 
 quantities, seems to be a species of choriambic. It may be 
 formed from the Ionic a minore tetrameter, by removing the 
 
483 
 
 two first syllables, when there will remain three great Ionics 
 and a spondee, constituting the Sotadean verse ; thus 
 
 | vino Iave\re 9 aut exam\mari metu\entes. 
 
 It seems almost unnecessary to add, that dactylics, tro- 
 chaics, and great ionics, although, as commencing with a long 
 syllable, they may seem their opposites, are, respectively, in 
 the same cadence, with anapestics, iambics, and minor ionics, 
 which begin with short quantities. The ionics appear to have 
 the ictus on the alternate long and short syllables ; that is, on 
 the first of both the spondee and the pyrrhic ; and the others 
 will be found, I believe, to have their long syllables gene- 
 rally thetic or emphatic. Hence we may infer, that dac- 
 tylics and anapestics are in what is termed the triple ca- 
 dence ; and the others, in the even. In speaking of the 
 measure of Horace's ode, iii. 12, the Delphin editor ob- 
 serves, " Metrum singulare. Sotadicum vocant aliqui. Alii 
 Rhythmicum, quod fere nullus pedum numerus insit" A very 
 odd reason, surely, for terming it rhythmicum. There can be 
 no doubt about its quantity ; with respect to its rhythm, we 
 have offered a probable conjecture, and, in the present day, 
 little more can reasonably be expected. 
 
 3. The Small Ionic ; so named, because, in every place, it 
 uses this foot. It is either trimeter, or tetrameter. Thus Ho- 
 race, Carm. iii. 12, after two trimeters places a tetrameter : 
 
 1 234? 
 
 ftlis^rdrum est, neque amorl dare ludum^ 
 
 Neque dulci mala vino lavere ; aut ex- 
 animari metuentes I patruce verberallnguce. 
 
 Note. The learned Bentley has, however, shown that this 
 composition of Horace's runs on in ten small Ionics, with- 
 out any pause ; and that, therefore, the whole of the ode is 
 finished in four decapodia of this kind. 
 
 It would appear that the Ionic a minore is not confined 
 to a definite number of measures, but may, like the dime- 
 ter and tetrameter anapestics, be extended to any length, 
 provided that the final syllable of the measure or foot be 
 naturally long, or, influenced by the law of Synapheia, be 
 made long by the concourse of consonants ; and that each 
 sentence or period terminate with a complete measure having 
 the spondee for its close ; rules observed by Horace in this 
 ode. It consists of forty measures, and has been divided 
 by Mr. Cuningham and others, into ten verses, each a te- 
 trameter, the line Simul unctos Tiberinis humeros lavit in 
 undis being placed after Studium aufert, Neobule, Liparm 
 nitor Hebri, contrary to the opinion of the Delphin editor, 
 
 2 I 2 
 
4S4- 
 
 but with manifest advantage to the sense, and without de- 
 ranging the order of things or altering the grammatical con- 
 struction l . For other modes of arrangement, see Carmen 
 Dicolon Tristrophon. Although the Ionic a minor e 9 like 
 the Anapestic, may be regarded as a continued series, and 
 be scanned as one line, by Synapheia; yet, if divided into 
 several verses, the arrangement into tetrameters seems pre- 
 ferable to any other. 
 
 OF MIXT VERSES. 
 
 Verses are said to be Mixt, (the Greeks named them 
 '^<rui/aT7JTou,) when two of different kinds are united. There 
 are various kinds of them ; but those only will now be men- 
 tioned, of w^hich examples can be produced from Latin poets. 
 
 1. The Archiiochian Dactylic Trochaic; of which the 
 first part is a Heroic Tetrameter, or the first four feet of 
 a' Hexameter ; the second part is an Ithyphallic Trochaic 
 Dimeter, Brachycatalectic, or three trochees ; thus 
 
 1 23 45 6 ^ 7 
 
 Solvitiir | acris hi\ems gra\td mcv\\veris \ et Fd\wni Hor. 
 which some divide into two verses ; thus 
 Solvitur acris hiems grata vice 
 Veris et Favoni. 
 
 2. The Archiiochian Elegiambic; of which the first mem- 
 ber is the latter part of an Elegiac Pentameter, or the Ar- 
 chiiochian Dactylic Penthemimer (consisting of two dactyls, 
 and a syllable) ; the second member, the Iambic Dimeter, 
 Acatalectic; as 
 
 12 345 6 
 
 Scribere \ versicu\los,\\amo\re perlcussum' 3 \ gravi Hor. 
 which is commonly divided into two verses ; thus 
 Scribere versiculos, 
 Amore percussum gravi. 
 
 1 It has been objected to this arrangement, that it occasions a 
 false quantity in the line Edues Ipso \ mtlior Btl\lZrophonte, \ nv- 
 quc pugno, in which the e final of Bellerophonte, from the lati- 
 nized Bellerophon, must be long, to constitute an Ionic a minore. 
 To this it has been replied, that ablatives in e from such Greek 
 words as Bellerophontes are sometimes long. Others have ob- 
 served, that every foot may be considered as a separate verse, 
 and that, therefore, the last syllable is common : but it may be 
 remarked that, throughout the whole ode, there is not another 
 instance of such a liberty. I have no doubt that Horace uses 
 the ablative long of Bellerophontes. 
 
 * Al. perciilsum. 
 
485 
 
 3. The Priapeian Dactylic Hexameter, Acatalectic; con- 
 sisting of two divisions of a Hexameter, each of three feet : 
 but in such a manner, that, in jhe first place of both, there 
 is a spondee, or, instead of it, a trochee, or iambus; in the 
 second and the third place of the first division, a dactyl : in 
 the second place of the second division, a dactyl, and the 
 third or last, a spondee. In this kind of verse, the last syl- 
 lable of the first division is accounted common ; as 
 123 4-56 
 
 Hunc lu 
 Qua do 
 Ncim te 
 Helle 
 
 cum tibi 
 mus tud 
 prcccipu 
 
 spontia 
 
 dedico 
 Lampsaci est, 
 e In suis 
 c&ttris 
 
 const 
 quaqm 
 urtfi 
 ostrt 
 
 croque, Pri 
 
 bits colit 
 
 osior 
 
 jpe. 
 ape : 
 
 ora 
 
 077S- 
 
 Catull. 
 
 4-. The Anapestic-Ithyphallic ; of which the first division 
 is an Anapestic Tetrameter, Catalectic, that is, three ana- 
 pests, (or in the first and second place, a spondee,) with a 
 remaining syllable: the second division, the Ithyphallic Tro- 
 chaic, or three trochees ; as 
 
 123 4. 5 6 
 
 \j 
 
 Ithyphal\licapdr\ro dica\runt\\Mnsi\ci Po\cta Ter. Maur. 
 
 5. The lambelegiac (the converse of No. 2) ; in which 
 the first division is Iambic ; and the second Elegiac ; thus 
 
 123 45 6 
 
 Nives\que de\ducunt \ Jovem : \\nunc ma 'ri\nunc siln\fc Hoi% 
 which is commonly divided into two verses; thus 
 Nivesque deducunt Jovem : 
 Nunc mare nunc silttce. 
 
 6. The Choriainbic-Dactylic ; in which the first division 
 is the Glyconic, having generally in the first place, a tro- 
 chee ; the second division is the Pherecratic, which, in like 
 manner, has generally a trochee at the beginning ; thus 
 
 _1 2 34 5 6 
 
 O Colloriia quce \ cupis\\ponte \ luderZ \ longd Catull. 
 This verse may be divided as in No. 3 ; in which the third 
 foot seems to be commonly a cretic. 
 
 7. The Choriambic-Trochai'c ; of which the first division 
 is the Choriambic Dimeter, or two choriambuses : the se- 
 cond, the Trochaic Dimeter, Brachycatalectic, whose first 
 foot may be a dactyl ; the other two, trochees ; thus 
 
 1 2 345 
 
 Vestirit Al\p\nus apex || et ruti>\dnt pruyncc Claudian. 
 
 8. The Trochaic-Dactylic; of which the first division is 
 a Trocha'ic Penthemimer, that is, in the first place there is 
 
486 
 
 a trochee, in the second a spondee, or dactyl, with an ad- 
 ditional syllable ; and the second part is an Adonic, that is, 
 ' a dactyl and a spondee ; as 
 
 12 34 
 
 SI qms 
 Cum rii 
 
 Arctu 
 mis cell' 
 
 ri || si d era 
 
 res\\explicet 
 
 nescit. 
 ortus Boet. 
 
 9. The Iambic-Dactylic ; of which the first part is an 
 Iambic Penthemimer, consisting of two iambuses, with along 
 syllable, but oftener in the first place, a spondee, and some- 
 times in the second, a tribrac : and the last part, as in the 
 preceding, an Adonic ; thus 
 
 12 34 
 
 Propih 
 Mergdt 
 
 qua sum\nid \\cardinc 
 que sc\ras\7e~f/2iore 
 
 Stupet qm subi\tis \\ mobile 
 
 lab?. 
 
 gammas, 
 vulgus Boet. 
 
 To the above-mentioned verses, which have received their 
 names from the feet which are used with the greater pro- 
 priety in them, others have been added ; such as the Spon- 
 daic, Molossic, Pteonic, Antispastic, &c. But as scarcely any 
 poem is now found written in these verses, they are omitted. 
 
 Among the Mixt might have been enumerated some of 
 those which have been explained under different divisions 
 or heads. Thus the Saturnian (see Iambics, No. 5,) might 
 have been denominated an Iambic-Trochaic; of which the 
 first part may be an Iambic Dimeter, Catalectic ; and the 
 second part, a Trochaic Dimeter, Brachycatalectic ; in this 
 manner 
 
 1 2 3 456 
 
 Dabunt \ malum \ Mctcl\U\\ Navi\o Po\etce. 
 
 In the same manner, the learned Bentley divides the 
 Alcaic Epichor iambic (see Choriambics, No. 3,) into two 
 parts, of which the first may be an Archilochian Trochaic 
 Dimeter, Acatalectic, with the second foot a spondee, and 
 fourth an iambus ; and the second part, an Archilochian 
 Trochaic (or Iambic) Dimeter, Catalectic, consisting of a 
 trochee, and two iambuses, with an additional syllable; thus, 
 
 1234 56 7 
 
 Te de\os o'rdy Sy\bari?i\\cur pro\peres \ aman\do. 
 
 The foregoing enumeration contains a full, and, it is 
 hoped, an accurate account of the principal kinds of verses, 
 that have been employed, more or less frequently, in what 
 is termed the Carmen Simplex l sen Monocolon ; that is, in 
 poems consisting of lines of similar metre or quantity, and 
 
 1 One compound has been introduced; the Carmen Homtianum. 
 
487 
 
 commonly divided, according to the subject, into epic, satire, 
 epistle, tragedy, comedy, ode, epigram, &c. The usual 
 names and arrangement have been adopted. They are, 
 however, sometimes divided into Hexameters, and such as 
 are composed of similar feet; into Iambics pure and mixt; 
 and into Lyrics, including all not contained in the two pre- 
 ceding classes. But the most natural and rational division 
 of them is that, founded on the prevalence, or greater pro- 
 priety in the use, of particular feet in their construction, into 
 Pyrrhics, Dactylics, Anapestics, Iambics, Trocha'ics, Chori- 
 ambics, Ionics, and to these may be added the Mixt ; a 
 classification which we have rendered perfectly obvious, by 
 the insertion of occasional references. 
 Thus, for example, 
 
 Hexameters, Pentameters, and those of similar construc- 
 tion, are Dactylics. 
 
 The Asclepiadic is a Choriambic Tetrameter, Acatalectic. 
 
 The Glyconic is a Choriambic Trimeter, Acatalectic. 
 
 The Sapphic is a Trochaic Pentameter, Acatalectic. 
 
 The Adonic is a Dactylic Dimeter, a part of a Hexameter. 
 
 The Phaleucian is a Trochaic Pentameter, Acatalectic. 
 
 The Pherecratic is a Dactylic Trimeter, a part of a Hex- 
 ameter. 
 
 The Scazon or Choliambus is an Iambic Trimeter, Aca- 
 talectic. 
 
 The Anacreontic is an Iambic Dimeter, Catalectic. 
 
 The Horatian is composed of (1) and (2) the Alcaic Dac- 
 tylic Tetrameter, Hypercatalectic ; (3) The Archiloclrian 
 Iambic Dimeter, Hypercatalectic ; (4) The Alcaic Dactylic 
 Tetrameter. Acatalectic. 
 
 Compositions, in one sort of verse, consist more frequently 
 of Hexameters, in which are written heroic poems ; of Iam- 
 bic trimeters, adapted to tragedy ; Scazons ; Trocha'ics, es- 
 pecially tetrameters, much used by Plautus and Terence 
 in comedy ; Asclepiadics ; Phaleucians ; and Anapestics ; 
 less frequently, of Iambic dimeters, and tetrameters cata- 
 lectic ; Glyconics ; Sapphics ; and Archilochians ; and very 
 rarely, of Pentameters or Adonics, a few successive lines of 
 the former occurring in Martianus Capella and Ausonius, 
 and of the latter, in Ter. Maur. and Boethius. 
 
 OF COMPOSITIONS IN WHICH THE VP;RSE JS VARIED. 
 
 It has been already observed, that, when only one sort 
 of verse is used in any ode or poem, such ode or poem is 
 called Carmen Monocolon. When more than one kind are 
 
4-88 
 
 used, the composition is named Potycolon, and this is ge- 
 nerally distinguished in two ways : 
 
 1. By the variety of verses which are used in it. 
 
 2. By the number of verses of which it consists previous 
 to the completion of one strophe or stanza, that is, before 
 the poem returns to the same kind of verse with which it 
 commenced. 
 
 First) According to the variety of verses, a composition 
 is named Polycolon ; or, more precisely, if there are two 
 different kinds of verses, Dicolon, or bimembre ; if three, 
 Tricolon, or trimembre. There is likewise the term Tetra- 
 colon ; but the ancients did not advance further than to Tri- 
 colon. 
 
 Secondly, According to the number of verses in one stro- 
 phe, the poem is named Carmen Distrophon, Tristrophon, 
 Tetrastrophon, or Pentastrophcn. 
 
 Distrophon is when the poem returns, after the second 
 verse, to the same verse with which it began. And the other 
 three respectively denote the return of the poem to the pr^ 
 mary verse, after the third, fourth, andjfyik line. 
 
 Indeed, beyond the Tetrastrophon the Latin stanza sel-* 
 dom reached. Catullus, however, has written one of five 
 line.s, consisting of four Glyconics, and a Pherecratic. 
 
 By a combination of the preceding terms, a poem in 
 which the stanza consists of two verses of different kinds, is 
 named Dicolon Distrophon , when the stanza contains three 
 verses, but only of two sorts, one sort being repeated, it is 
 named Dicolon Tristrophon ; when the stanza has four 
 verses, but only of two sorts, one being thrice repeated, it 
 is named Dicolon Tetrastrophon ; when the stanza contains 
 jive lines, of two sorts, one being four times repeated, it is 
 named Dicolon Pentastrophon. When the poem contains 
 three verses each of a different kind, in one stanza, it is 
 termed Tricolon Tristrophon ; and when in a stanza there 
 are four verses, but of only three different kinds, one verse 
 being repeated, Tricolon Tetrastrophon. 
 
 Hence it appears that there are six different kinds of com- 
 position consisting of a combination of various kinds of verses 5 
 and in each kind there are generally several varieties. 
 
 I. Of the Carmen Dicolon Distrophon. 
 
 1. The Elegiac, or Dactylic Heroic Hexameter, with a 
 Pactylic Pentameter; already explained. (See Pentameter.) 
 Sponte sud numcros carmen veniebat ad- aptos : 
 Et, quod tcntabani diccrc, versus crat Ovid, 
 
489 
 
 2. The Dactylic Hexameter, with an Archilochian Dac- 
 tylic Dimeter, Hypercatalectic. (See Hexameter, and No. 1, 
 under it.) 
 
 Diffugere nives, redeuntjam gramina campis, 
 Arboribusque comce Hor. 
 
 3. The Dactylic Hexameter, with an Alcmanian Dac- 
 tylic Tetrameter, Acatalectic. (See Hexameter, and No. 4.) 
 
 Tune me discussa liquerunt node tenebrcz^ 
 Luminibusque prior rediit vigor Boet. 
 
 4. The Dactylic Hexameter, with the Alcmanian Dac- 
 tylic Tetrameter, Acatalectic. (See Hexameter, and No. 5.) 
 
 Laudabunt alii claram Rhoden, aut Mitylenen, 
 Aut Ephesum, bimarisve Corinthi Hor. 
 
 5. The Dactylic Hexameter, with an Alcmanian Dactylic 
 Tetrameter, Catalectic ; or, as others name it, a Partheniac 
 Anapestic Tetrameter, Catalectic. (See Hexameter, No. .8, 
 arid Anapestics, No. 2.) 
 
 qui perpetuis orbem moderaris habenis, 
 Placidos bonus exsere vultus Buchan. Ps. 68. 
 
 6. The Dactylic Hexameter, with an Iambic Dimeter, 
 Acatalectic. (See Hexameter, and Iambic Dimeter.) 
 
 Nox erat, et ccelo fulgebat lima sereno 
 Inter minora sidera Hor. 
 
 7. The Dactylic Hexameter, with an Iambic Trimeter. 
 (See Hexameter, and the Iambic Trimeter, in Iambics.) 
 
 Alter a jam teritur bellis civilibus cetas ; 
 Suis et ipsa Roma viribus ruit Hor. 
 
 8. The Dactylic Hexameter, with an Archilochian Ele- 
 giambic. (See Hexameter, and Mixt verses, No. 2.) 
 
 Te regem Dominumque canam, dum lucida volvet 
 Lucidus astra polus, et unicum colam Deum Buchan. 
 
 Ps. H5. 
 
 In this manner ought the lines to be written, according to 
 the opinion of the famous Bentley, but Buchanan himself 
 has divided them into three verses. 
 
 9. The Dactylic Hexameter, with an lambo-Elegiac. 
 (See Hexameter, and Mixt verses, No. 5.) 
 
 Horrida tempestas ccelum contraxit^ et imbres 
 Nivesque deducunt Jovem : nunc mare, nunc siliice Hor. 
 
 10. The Alcmanian Dactylic Trimeter, Hypercatalectic, 
 with a Pherecratic Dactylic Trimeter, Acatalectic. (See 
 Hexameter, No. 2, or 3, and the Pherecratic verse.) 
 
 Omne hominum genus in terris 
 Simili surgit ab ortu Boet. 
 
 11. The Alcmanian Dactylic Tetrameter, Acatalectic, 
 
4<X) 
 
 with an Archilochian Dactylic Dimeter, Hypercatalectic. 
 (See Hexameter, No. 4, and No. 1.) 
 
 Quam thalamo, taedisque jugalibus 
 
 Invida mors rapitit Auson. Parent. 2. 
 
 12. The Alcmanian Dactylic Tetrameter, Acatalectic, 
 with an Iambic Dimeter, Acatalectic. (See Hexameter, 
 No. 4, and the Iambic Dimeter, in Iambics.) 
 
 Sunt etenim penna volucres mihi, 
 Qiice celsa comcendant poll Boe't. 
 
 13. The Anacreontic Iambic Dimeter, Catalectic, with 
 the Pherecratic Dactylic Trimeter, Acatalectic. (See the 
 Anacreontic and Pherecratic verses.) 
 
 Quisquis volet perennem 
 Cautus ponere sedem Boe't. 
 
 14. The Iambic Trimeter, Acatalectic, with the Elegiac 
 Pentameter. (See Iambics, and Pentameter.) 
 
 Quamvis jiuente dives auri gurgite 
 
 Non expleturas cogat avarus opes Boe't. 
 
 15. The Iambic Trimeter, Acatalectic, with the Iambic 
 Dimeter, Acatalectic. (See Iambics.) 
 
 Ibis Liburnis inter alta navium, 
 Amice, propugnacula Hor. 
 
 16. The Iambic Trimeter, Acatalectic, with the Archilo- 
 chian Elegiambic. (See Iambics, and Mixt verses, No. 2.) 
 
 Petti, nihil me, sicut antea,juvat 
 
 Scribere versicidos, amore percussum gravi Hor. 
 
 17. The Scazon Iambic, with an Iambic Dimeter, Aca- 
 talectic. (Seethe Scazon, and Iambics.) 
 
 Verona docti syllabus amat vatis ; 
 Maronefclix Mantua est Martial. 
 
 18. The Euripidean Trochaic Dimeter, Catalectic, with 
 an Iambic Dimeter, Acatalectic. (See Trochai'cs, No. 3, 
 and Iambics.) 
 
 Orbis omnes incolte, 
 
 A sole Eoo ad Hesperum Buchan. 
 
 19. The Euripidean Trochaic Dimeter, Catalectic, with 
 an Archilochian Iambic Trimeter, Catalectic. (See Tro- 
 chai'cs, No. 3, and Iambics, No. 3.) 
 
 Non ebur, neque aureum 
 
 Mea renidet in domo lacunar Hor. 
 
 20. The Alcmanian Trochaic Dimeter, Acatalectic, with 
 a Pherecratic Dactylic Trimeter, Acatalectic. (See Tro- 
 chai'cs, No. 4, and the Pherecratic verse.) 
 
 Quos vides seder e celsos 
 Solii cubnine regcs Boct, 
 
491 
 
 21. The Trochaic Tetrameter, or Octonarius, Catalectic, 
 with an Iambic Trimeter, Acatalectic, (See Trochaic, and 
 Iambic verses.) 
 
 Ore pulchro, et ore muto ; scire vis qiue sim ? Volo. 
 Imago Rufi rhetor is Pictavici Auson. Epig. 51. 
 
 22. The Sapphic Pentameter, Acatalectic, with an Iam- 
 bic Dimeter, Acatalectic. (See Sapphics, and Iambics.) 
 
 Gentis humance pater atque custos, 
 Qiiam sancta majestas tui Buchan. 
 
 23. The Sapphic Pentameter, Acatalectic, with the Gly- 
 conic Choriambic Trimeter, Acatalectic. (See the Sapphic, 
 and Glyconic verses.) 
 
 Cum polo Phcebus, roseis quadrigis 
 Lucem spargere cceperit Boet. 
 
 24. The Phaleucian Pentameter, 'Acatalectic, with an 
 Elegiac Pentameter. (See Phaleucian, and Pentameter.) 
 
 Quid tantosjuvat excitare motus, 
 
 Et prop-id fatum sollicitare manu Boet. 
 
 25. The Phaleucian Pentameter, Acatalectic, with an 
 Alcaic Dactylic Tetrameter, Acatalectic. (See Phaleucian 
 verse, and Carmen Horatianum.} 
 
 Quamvis se Tyrio superbus ostro 
 Comeret, et niveis lapillis Boet. 
 
 26. The Phaleucian Pentameter, Acatalectic, with a 
 Sapphic Pentameter, Acatalectic. (See Phaleucian, and 
 Sapphic.) 
 
 Hie portus placidd manens quiete, 
 Hoc patens unum miser is asylum Boet. 
 
 27. The Aristophanian Choriambic Dimeter, Acatalec- 
 tic, with an Alcaic Epich or iambic Tetrameter, Acatalectic. 
 (See Choriambics, No. 1, and 3.) 
 
 Lydia, die per omncs 
 
 Te deos oro, Sybarin cur proper es amando Hor. 
 
 28. The Glyconic Choriambic Trimeter, Acatalectic, 
 with the Asclepiadic Choriambic Tetrameter, Acatalectic. 
 (See the Glyconic, and Asclepiadic verses.) 
 
 Sic te diva potem Cypri, 
 
 Sic fratres Helena Incida sidcra Hor. 
 
 29. The Asclepiadic Choriambic Tetrameter, Acatalec- 
 tic, with the Pherecratic Dactylic Trimeter, AcaUileclic. 
 (Seethe Asclepiadic, and Pherecratic.) 
 
 Si quantas rapidis Jlatibus incitus 
 Pontus versat arenas Boet. 
 
 30. The Asclepiadic Choriambic Tetrameter, Acatalec- 
 tic, with an Iambic Dimeter, Acatalectic. (See Asclepia- 
 dic and Iambic verses.) 
 
4-92 
 
 Eheu, quce miseros tramite devios 
 Abducit ignorantia ! Boet. 
 
 31. The Dactylic- Trochaic Septenarius, with an Archi- 
 lochian Iambic Trimeter, Catalectic. (See Mixt verses, 
 No. 1, and Iambics, No. 2.) 
 
 Solvitur acris hiems grata vice veris et Favoni, 
 Trahuntque siccas machines carinas Hor. 
 
 32. The Trochaic-Dactylic, with an Iambic-Dactylic. 
 (See Mixt verses, No. 8, and 9.) 
 
 Si quis Arcturi sidera nescit 
 Propinqua summo cardine Idbi Boet. 
 
 II. Of the Carmen Dicolon Tristrophon. 
 
 1. Two Aristophanian Anapestic Tetrameters, Acatalec- 
 tic, and an Adonic Dimeter, Acatalectic. (See Anapestic 
 verse, and Adonic.) 
 
 Tu quoque in avum, Crispc, futurum 
 Mo3sti venies commemoratus 
 Munere tlireni Auson. 
 
 2. Two Alcmanian Trochaic Dimeters, Acatalectic, and 
 a Euripidean Trochaic Dimeter, Catalectic. ( See Trochaics, 
 No. 4-, and No. 3.) 
 
 Incoltf terrarum ab ortu 
 Solis ultimum ad cubile, 
 Eia Domino psallite Buchan. 
 
 3. Two Small Ionic Trimeters, Acatalectic, and then a 
 Small Ionic Tetrameter, Acatalectic. (See Ionics, No. 3.) 
 
 Miserarum est, neque amori dare ludum, 
 
 Neque dulci mala vino lover e ; aut ex- 
 
 animari metuentes patrtue verbera lingua Hor. 
 The celebrated and learned Bentley, following Mar. Vic- 
 torinus, has arranged the foregoing lines, in his edition, in 
 such a manner that the first two lines become tetrameters, 
 and the third a dimeter, although he considered the ode as 
 monocolon., and to be measured by decapodice. (See Ionics.) 
 
 Miserarum est, neque amori dare ludum, neque dulci 
 
 Mala vino lavere ,- aut exanimari metuentes 
 
 Patru& verbera lingucE. 
 
 They have likewise been arranged (as if a Carmen Trico- 
 lon Tetrastrophon) in four verses ; viz. two Small Ionic Tri- 
 meters, Acatalectic; a Small Ionic Trimeter, Catalectic; 
 and an Adonic ; thus 
 
 Miserarum est neque amori dare ludum, 
 
 Neque dulci mala vino lavere, aut ex- 
 
 ammari metuentes palrucc 
 
 Vcrbera linguce. 
 
493 
 
 Note, The third line consists of two small Ionics and an 
 Anapest. Indeed, scarcely does any composition, entitled 
 exclusively to the denomination dicolon tristrophon, seem 
 to exist in any classical author. 
 
 III. Of the Carmen Dicolon Tetrastrophon. 
 
 1. Three Anacreontic Trochaic Dimeters, Acatalectic, 
 and a Choriambic-Trochaic Quinarius. (See Trochaics, 
 No. 5, and Mixt verses, No. 7.) 
 
 Age cuncta nuptiali 
 
 Redimita vere telhis, 
 
 Celebra toros heriles : 
 
 Omne nemus cumjluviis, omne canat profundum Claud. 
 
 2. Three Sapphic Pentameters, and an Adonic Dimeter. 
 (See Sapphic verse, and Adonic.) 
 
 Quid brevi fortes jaculamur tfvo 
 Multa ? quid terras olio calentes 
 Sole mutamus ? patrice quis exsul 
 Se quoquefugit ? Hor. 
 
 3. Three Glyconic Choriambic Trimeters, Acatalectic, 
 and a Pherecratic Dactylic Trimeter, Acatalectic. (Seethe 
 Gly conic verse, and Pherecratic.) 
 
 Diana sumus injide 
 Puellcc, et pueri integri : 
 Dianam pueri integri, 
 Puelltfque canamus Catull. 
 
 4. Three Asclepiadic Choriambics, and a Glyconic Cho- 
 riambic. (See Asclepiadic, and Glyconic verse.) 
 
 Inclusam Danaen turris ahenea, 
 Robustczque fores, et mgilwn canum 
 Tristes excubice munierant satis 
 Nocturnis ab adulteris Hor. 
 
 IV. Of the Carmen Dicolon Pentastrophon, 
 
 This is very uncommon. There is only one kind, com- 
 posed of four Glyconic Choriambic Trimeters, Acatalectic, 
 to which is subjoined a Pherecratic Dactylic Trimeter, Aca- 
 talectic. (See Glyconic, and Pherecratic.) 
 
 Collis O Heliconii 
 
 Cultor, Urania genus, 
 
 Qui rapis teneram ad. virum 
 
 Virginem, O Hymenae Hymen, 
 
 Hymen, O Hymenae Catull. 
 
 V. Of the Carmen Tricolon TristropTion. 
 1. A Heroic Dactylic; an Archilochian Dactylic Dime- 
 
49* 
 
 ter, Hypercatalectic ; and an Iambic Dimeter, Acatalectic. 
 (See Hexameter, and No. 1 ; and Iambic verse.) 
 
 Te Regem Dominumque canam, dum lucida velvet 
 
 Lucidus astra polus, 
 
 Et unicum colam Deum Buchan. Ps. 145. 
 
 2. A "Hexameter ; an Iambic Dimeter ; and an Archilo- 
 chian Dactylic. (Same as the last, but in a different order.) 
 
 Pectore te grato Dominumque Deurnque fatebor, 
 
 Coram superbis regibus, 
 
 Et tua facto, canam Buchan. Ps. 138. 
 By others this is considered as a Carmen Dicolon Distro- 
 phon, such as the thirteenth Epode of Horace, in imitation 
 of which, Buchanan wrote this psalm. This epode may be 
 likewise divided in the same manner ; 
 
 Horrida tempestas ccelum contrazit ; et imbres 
 
 Nivesque deducunt Jovem : 
 
 Nunc mare, mine silua Ep. 1 3. 
 As a Carmen Dicolon Distrophon, it is thus divided ; 
 
 Horrida tempestas ccelum contraxit ,- et imbres 
 
 Nivesque deducunt Jovem. Nunc marc, nunc silucc. 
 The first is a Heroic Hexameter ; the second an Archilo- 
 chian Iambic Elegiac; as in the edition of D. Heinsius, 
 printed 1718. (See Mixt verses, No, 5, and Carmen Dico- 
 lon Distropho?i, No. 9.) 
 
 3. An Iambic Trimeter, Acatalectic; an Archilochian 
 Dactylic Dimeter, Hypercatalectic, (or Dactylic Penthe- 
 mimer;) with an Iambic Dimeter, Acatalectic. (See Iam- 
 bics, and Hexameter, No. 1.) 
 
 Petti, nihil me, sicut antea,juvat 
 
 Scribere versiculos, 
 
 Amore percussum gravi Hor. 
 
 According to others, this epode belongs to the Carmen 
 Dicolon Distrophon. (See Mixt verses, No. 2, and Carmen 
 Dicolon Distrophon, No. 16.) 
 
 In the same manner, O. 4. lib. 1, (see also Mixt verses, 
 No. 1,) is arranged as a Carmen Tricolon Tristrophon, the 
 first verse being an Alcmanian Dactylic Tetrameter ; the 
 second, a Trochaic Ithyphallic Dimeter, Brachycatalectic ; 
 and the third, an Archilochian Iambic Trimeter, Catalectic. 
 (See Iambics, No. 2; and Carmen Dicolon DistropJion, 31.) 
 
 Solvitur acris hyems grata vice 
 
 Veris et Favoni : 
 
 Trahuntque siccas machine carinas. 
 
 4. A Gly conic Chor iambic Trimeter; an Asclepiadic Cho- 
 riambic Tetrameter; and an Alcaic Choriambic Pentameter. 
 (See Glyconic, Asclepiadic, and Choriambics, No. 2.) 
 
4-95 
 
 Per quinquennid jam clecem, 
 
 Ni Jailor, Juiinus Septimus insuper 
 
 Anno cardo rotat> dumfruimur Sole volubili Prudent. 
 
 VI. Of the Carmen Tricolon Tetrastrophon. 
 
 1. Two Alcaic Dactylic Tetrameters, Hypercatalectic, 
 (that is Great Alcaics ;) an Archilochian Iambic Dimeter, 
 Hypercatalectic ; and an Alcaic Dactylic Tetrameter, Aca- 
 talectic, (or Small Alcaic.) (See Carmen floi^atianum^ and 
 Iambics.) 
 
 JEquam memento rebus in arduis 
 Si'rvare mentem, non secus ac bonis 
 Ab insolent i temper atam 
 Lcctitid : moriture Delli Hor. 
 
 2. Two Asclepiadic Choriambic Tetrameters ; a Phere- 
 cratic Dactylic Trimeter ; and a Glyconic Choriambic Tri- 
 meter. (See Asclepiadic, Pherecratic, and Glyconic.) 
 
 Prima node domum claude, neque in vias 
 
 Sub cantu querulce despice tibiae : 
 
 Et te scepe vocanti 
 
 Durum, difficilis mane Hor. 
 
 There is likewise a third sort, formed by a certain ar- 
 rangement of Ode 1 2. lib. 3. of Horace ; for which see the 
 Carmen Dicolon Tristrophon^ No. 3. 
 
 I SHALL conclude this system of Prosody with the me- 
 thod of scanning the different Metra Horatiana, all of which, 
 along with some slight variations observable in them, have 
 already been fully particularized. Should any one wish for 
 a comprehensive view of the different kinds of verse used in 
 their compositions by most of the Latin poets of any cele- 
 brity, either ancient or modern, he will find it in the works 
 of the learned and accurate Ruddiman, to whose industry 
 and talents I have been particularly indebted, in regard to 
 the present subject. 
 
 Horace uses twenty kinds of verse, and chiefly in com- 
 binations, as will appear in the following 
 
 SYNOPSIS. 
 
 (1) Lib. I. 1. III. 30. IV. 8, are Asclepiadic Tetrame- 
 ters, Acatalectic. (See the Asclepiadic verse.) 
 
 (2) Lib. I. 2, 10, 12, 20, 22, 25, 30, 32, 58. Lib. II. 2, 4, 
 6, 8, 10, 16. Lib. III. 8, 11, 14, 18, 20, 22, 27. Lib. IV. 2, 
 6, 11, and Carmen Secular e, me DicolaTetrastropha, No. 2; 
 
496 
 
 consisting of three Sapphic Hendecasyllabics, and an Ado- 
 nic Dimeter. 
 
 (3) Lib. I. 3, 13, 19, 36. III. 9, 15, 19, 24, 25, 28. IV. 
 
 1, 3, belong to the Dicola Distropha, No. 28; and consist 
 of a Glyconic Choriambic Trimeter, and an Asclepiadic 
 Choriambic Tetrameter, both Acatalectic. 
 
 (4) Lib. I. 4, belongs to the Dicola Distropha, No. 31 ; 
 and consists of the Dactylic-Trochaic Septenarius, with an 
 Archilochian Iambic Trimeter, Catalectic. 
 
 (5) Lib. I. 5, 14, 21, 23. III. 7, 13. IV. 13, belong 
 to the Tricola Tetrastropha, No. 2 ; consisting of two As- 
 clepiadic Choriambic Tetrameters, a Pherecratic Dactylic 
 Tripodia, and a Glyconic Choriambic Trimeter. 
 
 (6) Lib. I. 6, 15, 24, 33. II. 12. III. 10, 16. IV. S, 
 
 12, belong to the Dicola Tetrastropha, No. 4 ; and consist 
 of three Asclepiadic Choriambics, and a Glyconic Cho- 
 riambic. 
 
 (7) Lib. I. 7, 28, and Epode 12, belong to the Dicola 
 Distropha, No. 4 ; and consist of a Dactylic Hexameter, 
 with an Alcmanian Tetrameter, Acatalectic. (See Hexame- 
 ter, and No. 5.) 
 
 (8) Lib. I. 8, is a Dicolon Distrophon, No. 27 ; consist- 
 ing of an Aristophanian Choriambic Dimeter, Acatalectic, 
 with an Alcaic Epichoriambic Tetrameter, Acatalectic. 
 
 (9) Lib. I. 9, 16, 17, 26, 27, 29, 31, 34, 35, 37. Lib. 
 II. 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 19, 20. Lib. III. 1, 
 
 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 17, 21, 23, 26, 29. IV. 4, 9, 14, 15, belong 
 to the Tricola Tetrastropha, No. 1 ; consisting of two Great 
 Alcaics ; an Archilochian Iambic Dimeter, Hypercatalectic; 
 and a small Alcaic. This, from the number of odes written 
 in it, appears to have been Horace's favourite strain, and is, 
 therefore, named the Carmen Horatianum. 
 
 (10) Lib. I. 11, 18. IV. 10, are Monocola, (See Cho- 
 riambics, No. 2,) and consist of Alcaic Choriambic Penta- 
 meters, Acatalectic. 
 
 (11) Lib. II. 18, is a Dicolon Distrophon, No. 19; con- 
 sisting of the Euripidean Trochaic Dimeter, Catalectic, and 
 
 . the Archilochian Iambic Trimeter, Catalectic. (See Tro- 
 cha'ics, No. 3 ; and Iambics, No. 3.) 
 
 (12) Lib. III. 12, is either Dicolon Tristrophon, or Tri- 
 colon Tetrasfrophon. (See No. 3, of the former; see also 
 Ionics, No. 3.) 
 
497 
 
 (13) Lib. IV. 7, is a Dicolon Distrophon, No. 2; con- 
 sisting of a Dactylic Hexameter, with an Archilochian Dac- 
 tylic Penthemimer. 
 
 (14) Epod. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, are Dicola Di- 
 stropha, No. 15 ; consisting of an Iambic Trimeter, and Di- 
 meter, both Acatalectic. 
 
 (15) Epod. 11, is either Dicolon Distrophon, No. 16; 
 consisting of an Iambic Trimeter, Acatalectic, and an Ar- 
 chilochian Elegiambic; or it is a Tricolon Tristrophon, No. 3; 
 consisting of an Iambic Trimeter, Acatalectic ; and Archi- 
 lochian Dactylic Penthemimer; and an Iambic Dimeter, 
 Acatalectic. 
 
 (16) Epod. 13, is either Dicolon Distrophon, No. 9; con- 
 sisting of a Dactylic Hexameter, and an lambo- Elegiac; or 
 Tricolon Tristrophon, No. 2 ; consisting of a Hexameter ; 
 an Iambic Dimeter, Acatalectic ; and an Archilochian Dac- 
 tylic Penthemimer. 
 
 (17) Epod. 14, 15, are Dicola Distropha^ No. 6; con- 
 sisting of a Dactylic Hexameter, and an Iambic Dimeter, 
 Acatalectic. 
 
 (18) Epod. 16, is a Dicolon Distrophon, No. 7; consist- 
 ing of a Dactylic Hexameter, with an Iambic Trimeter, 
 Acatalectic. 
 
 (19) Epod. 17, 18, are Monocola ; consisting wholly of 
 Iambic Trimeters, Acatalectic. (See Iambics.) 
 
 (20) Satires, Epistles, and De Arte Poetica^ are all Mo- 
 nocola, consisting of the Dactylic Hexameter. (See Hexa- 
 meter.) 
 
 FINIS. 
 
 2K 
 
%* Page 413, line 25, read non. 
 
 477, line 36, read mtisalrum. 
 
 kt.MHH f\*IAMM.\M. 
 
 RICHARD TAYLOR, PRINTER, 
 SHOE-LANE. 
 
LATIN CLASSICS 
 
 Published by G. and 7F. B. WHITTAKER, 
 
 Ave Maria Lane, London. 
 
 1. T. Livii Patavini Historiarum ab Urbe Condita Libri 
 qui supersunt Omnes, ex recensione Arn. Drakenborchii. 
 Accedunt Notae Integrae. Ex Editionibus J. B. L. Crevierii, 
 
 cum Tndice Rerum locupletissimo, 4 vols. 8vo. boards. 280 
 
 2. Taciti Historia ex Editione G. Brotier, cura R. Rel- 
 
 han, Svo. boards . . . . . . 0120 
 
 3. Tacitus de Moribus Germanorumet de Vita Agricolae, 
 
 ex Edit. G. Brotier, cura R. Relhan, Svo. boards . O 7 
 
 4. Horatii Flacci Opera, Bentleiana plerumque emen- 
 data et brevibus Notis instructa, edidit T. Kidd, A. M. 
 
 1 8mo. boards ....... 7 6 
 
 5. Ditto, royal 12mo. fine paper, boards . . 15 
 
 6. Q. Horatii Flacci Opera, cum Selectis Scholiis, et 
 Observationibus Baxteri, Gesneri, et Zeunii. Editio nova 
 cum Indice Verborum et Nominum copiossissimo : in usum 
 Scholae Carthusianae, Svo. bound . . . .0120 
 
 7. Quinti Horatii Flacci Eclogae, curri Scholiis Veteribus. 
 Castigavit et Notis illustravit Gulielmus Baxterus : varias 
 Lectiones et Observations addidit Jo. Matthias Gesnerus j 
 quibus et suas adspersit Jo. Carolus Zeunius, Prof. Gr. Lit. 
 Viteberg. Editio auctior et emendatior, cum Indice Ver- 
 borum copiosissimo, Svo. boards . . . . 1 6 
 
 8. Articuli Ecclesiae Anglicanae Textibus Scripturae Pa- 
 trum Testimoniis brevibusque Notis illustrati. Auctore Ed- 
 vardo Welshman. Huic novae Editioni Appendicis loco 
 adjiciuntur Catechismus Edvardi Sexti atque Articuli A.D. 
 1552. approbati, Svo. boards . . . . O 6 6 
 
 g. D. Junii Juvenalis Aquinatis Satirae XVI. Ad Opti- 
 morum Exemplarum Fidem recensitae, perpetuo commen- 
 tario illustratae, atque prooemio argumentis instructae 3 a 
 G. A. Ruperti ; accedit et Index copiosissimus ; Oxonii, 
 boards ........ O 10 6 
 
 10. D. Junii Juvenalis et A. Persii Flacci Satirae expur- 
 gatae ; in usum Scholarum. Adduntur Juvenali Annota- 
 tiunculae Lud. Pratei et Jos. Juventii, boards . . 10 
 
 11. Latin Exercises; or, Exempla Propria : being En- 
 glish Sentences translated from the best Roman Writers, 
 and adapted to the Rules in Syntax ; to be again translated 
 into the Latin Language. By the Rev. George Whittaker, 
 A. M. late Master of the Grammar-school in Southampton. 
 Eighth Edition, 12mo. bound . . . O 3 O 
 
 12. A Key to the above, sewed . . . O 2 
 
 13. Grammatical Figures, and a System of Rhetoric, il- 
 lustrated by Examples of Classical Authority, for the use 
 of Senior Forms in Grammar Schools. By the Rev George 
 Whittaker, A. M. Second Edition, bound . . 1 
 
BOOKS PUBLISHED BY G. & W. B. WHITTAKER. 
 
 s. d. 
 
 14. A Concise Introduction to the Latin Language, com- 
 piled from ancient and modern Writers of approved Autho- 
 rity, for the use of the Middle Forms in Grammar Schools. 
 By the Rev. George Whittaker, A.M. Third Edition, 
 12mo. bound . . . . . . . 026 
 
 15. Phaedri et JEsopi Fafjulae, in Usum Scholarum, Se- 
 lectse Opera et Studio Georgii Whittaker, A. M. olim 
 Grammatical Scholae Magistii Southaraptoniae. Quarta 
 Editio, aucta atque emendata. 12mo. bound . O 2 
 
 16. Lectiones Selectae j or, Select Latin Lessons, in 
 Morality, History, and Biography ; adapted to the Capacity 
 of young Beginners. By the Rev. John Adams, A. M. 
 Tenth Edition, ISmo. bound . . . . 1 O 
 
 17. A Translation of the above, bound . . 1 O 
 
 18. Steps to Sense-verses ; or, a Set of Exercises to be 
 rendered into Latin Hexameters and Pentameters. For the 
 
 use of Schools. Second Edition, bound . . 016 
 
 *#* A Key to the above Work has been arranged for the 
 use of Masters and Teachers, which may be had gratis of 
 the Publishers 
 
 19. Juvenal and Persius, cleared of all the most objec- 
 tionable Passages j with Explanatory Notes and Introduc- 
 tory Essays. By Edward Owen, A. M. Rector of War- 
 rington. New Edition, 12mo. bound . . . 056 
 
 20. The Latin Primer, in three Parts. Part 1, Rules of 
 Construction j Part 2, Rules of Position j Part 3, A large 
 and plain Description of the Latin Verse, and of many 
 Kinds of Composition in Verse. By the Rev. Rich. Lyne. 
 Seventh Edition, 12mo. bound . . . . 046 
 
 21. The Common Accidence, methodised and enlarged, 
 suited both to a Commercial and Literary Education, origi- 
 nally drawn up for private use. By Edward Owen, A. M. 
 
 late Rector of Warrington. New Edition, 12mo. bound O 26 
 
 22. Clavis Virgil iana, or, a Vocabulary of all the Words 
 in Virgil's Bucolics, Georgics, and jEneid ; each word be- 
 ing accented to direct the Pronunciation, Parts of Speech, 
 Declension, Conjugation, &c. 5 compiled from the best 
 Authors on Virgil, 8vo. boards . . . . 076 
 
 23. Latin Synonyms, with their different Significations 
 and Examples, taken from the best Latin Authors, By 
 M. J. B. Gardin Dumesnil, late Professor of Rhetoric in 
 the College of Harcourt, &c. Translated into English, 
 with Additions and Corrections, by the Rev. J. M. S. Go- 
 
 Bet. Second Edition, 8vo. boards . . . 1 2 'O 
 
 In the Press. 
 
 24. C. Cornelii Taciti Opera. Recognovit, Emendavit, 
 Supplemento Explevit, Notis, Dissertationibus Illustravit, 
 Gabriel Brotier. Editio Nova, 4 vols. 8vo. 
 
 25. Excerpta exT. Lucretii Cari de Rerum NaturaLibris 
 Sex : cum Notis Variorum, In usnm Scholae Paulinse, 8vo. 
 
BERKELEY LIBRARIES 
 
 YC 00437